# Drools Documentation

The Drools Team <https://www.drools.org/community/team.html>
version 7.25.0.Final

# Welcome

## 1. Introduction

### 1.1. Introduction

KIE (Knowledge Is Everything) is an umbrella project introduced to bring our related technologies together under one roof. It also acts as the core shared between our projects.

KIE contains the following different but related projects offering a complete portfolio of solutions for business automation and management:

1. Drools is a business-rule management system with a forward-chaining and backward-chaining inference-based rules engine, allowing fast and reliable evaluation of business rules and complex event processing. A rules engine is also a fundamental building block to create an expert system which, in artificial intelligence, is a computer system that emulates the decision-making ability of a human expert.

2. jBPM is a flexible Business Process Management suite allowing you to model your business goals by describing the steps that need to be executed to achieve those goals.

3. OptaPlanner is a constraint solver that optimizes use cases such as employee rostering, vehicle routing, task assignment and cloud optimization.

4. Business Central is is a full featured web application for the visual composition of custom business rules and processes.

5. UberFire is a web-based workbench framework inspired by Eclipse Rich Client Platform.

The 7.x series will follow a more agile approach with more regular and iterative releases. We plan to do some bigger changes than normal for a series of minor releases, and users need to be aware those are coming before adopting.

1. UI sections and links will become object oriented, rather than task oriented. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Object-oriented_user_interface

2. Authoring/Library will become project oriented, rather than repository oriented. You’ll create, browse and open projects rather than repositories. The repository concept will be pushed lower, for instance it’ll be created automaticaly when you create the projcet.

3. The old form modeller will be removed and only the new one made available. Although old forms will continue to render.

4. The new designer will continue to mature with more nodes and improved UXD. Eventually it’ll become the default editor, but we will not remove the old one until there is feature parity in BPMN2 support.

5. Continued UXD improvements in lots of places.

6. We will introduce the AppFormer project, this will be a re-org and consolidation of existing projects and result in some artifact renames. UberFire will become AppFormer-Core, forms, data modeller and dashbuilder will come under AppFormer. Dashbuilder will most likely becalled Appformer-Insight.

The 8.x series will come towards the end of this year. We have ongoing parallel work to introduce concepts of workspaces with improved git support, that will have a built in workflow for forking and pull requests. This will be combined with horizontal scaling and improved high availability. These changes are important for usability and cloud scalability, but too much of a change for a minor release, hence the bump to 8.x

### 1.2. Getting Involved

We are often asked "How do I get involved". Luckily the answer is simple, just write some code and submit it :) There are no hoops you have to jump through or secret handshakes. We have a very minimal "overhead" that we do request to allow for scalable project development. Below we provide a general overview of the tools and "workflow" we request, along with some general advice.

If you contribute some good work, don’t forget to blog about it :)

#### 1.2.1. Sign up to jboss.org

Signing to jboss.org will give you access to the JBoss wiki, forums and JIRA. Go to https://www.jboss.org/ and click "Register".

#### 1.2.2. Sign the Contributor Agreement

The only form you need to sign is the contributor agreement, which is fully automated via the web. As the image below says "This establishes the terms and conditions for your contributions and ensures that source code can be licensed appropriately"

https://cla.jboss.org/

#### 1.2.3. Submitting issues via JIRA

To be able to interact with the core development team you will need to use JIRA, the issue tracker. This ensures that all requests are logged and allocated to a release schedule and all discussions captured in one place. Bug reports, bug fixes, feature requests and feature submissions should all go here. General questions should be undertaken at the mailing lists.

Minor code submissions, like format or documentation fixes do not need an associated JIRA issue created.

https://issues.jboss.org/browse/DROOLS

https://issues.jboss.org/browse/JBPM

#### 1.2.4. Fork GitHub

With the contributor agreement signed and your requests submitted to JIRA you should now be ready to code :) Create a GitHub account and fork any of the Drools, jBPM or Guvnor repositories. The fork will create a copy in your own GitHub space which you can work on at your own pace. If you make a mistake, don’t worry blow it away and fork again. Note each GitHub repository provides you the clone (checkout) URL, GitHub will provide you URLs specific to your fork.

https://github.com/kiegroup

#### 1.2.5. Writing Tests

When writing tests, try and keep them minimal and self contained. We prefer to keep the DRL fragments within the test, as it makes for quicker reviewing. If their are a large number of rules then using a String is not practical so then by all means place them in separate DRL files instead to be loaded from the classpath. If your tests need to use a model, please try to use those that already exist for other unit tests; such as Person, Cheese or Order. If no classes exist that have the fields you need, try and update fields of existing classes before adding a new class.

There are a vast number of tests to look over to get an idea, MiscTest is a good place to start.

https://github.com/kiegroup/drools/blob/master/drools-compiler/src/test/java/org/drools/integrationtests/MiscTest.java

#### 1.2.6. Commit with Correct Conventions

When you commit, make sure you use the correct conventions. The commit must start with the JIRA issue id, such as DROOLS-1946. This ensures the commits are cross referenced via JIRA, so we can see all commits for a given issue in the same place. After the id the title of the issue should come next. Then use a newline, indented with a dash, to provide additional information related to this commit. Use an additional new line and dash for each separate point you wish to make. You may add additional JIRA cross references to the same commit, if it’s appropriate. In general try to avoid combining unrelated issues in the same commit.

Don’t forget to rebase your local fork from the original master and then push your commits back to your fork.

#### 1.2.7. Submit Pull Requests

With your code rebased from original master and pushed to your personal GitHub area, you can now submit your work as a pull request. If you look at the top of the page in GitHub for your work area their will be a "Pull Request" button. Selecting this will then provide a gui to automate the submission of your pull request.

The pull request then goes into a queue for everyone to see and comment on. Below you can see a typical pull request. The pull requests allow for discussions and it shows all associated commits and the diffs for each commit. The discussions typically involve code reviews which provide helpful suggestions for improvements, and allows for us to leave inline comments on specific parts of the code. Don’t be disheartened if we don’t merge straight away, it can often take several revisions before we accept a pull request. Luckily GitHub makes it very trivial to go back to your code, do some more commits and then update your pull request to your latest and greatest.

It can take time for us to get round to responding to pull requests, so please be patient. Submitted tests that come with a fix will generally be applied quite quickly, where as just tests will often way until we get time to also submit that with a fix. Don’t forget to rebase and resubmit your request from time to time, otherwise over time it will have merge conflicts and core developers will general ignore those.

### 1.3. Installation and Setup (Core and IDE)

#### 1.3.1. Installing and using

Drools provides an Eclipse-based IDE (which is optional), but at its core only Java 1.5 (Java SE) is required.

A simple way to get started is to download and install the Eclipse plug-in - this will also require the Eclipse GEF framework to be installed (see below, if you don’t have it installed already). This will provide you with all the dependencies you need to get going: you can simply create a new rule project and everything will be done for you. Refer to the chapter on Business Central and IDE for detailed instructions on this. Installing the Eclipse plug-in is generally as simple as unzipping a file into your Eclipse plug-in directory.

Use of the Eclipse plug-in is not required. Rule files are just textual input (or spreadsheets as the case may be) and the IDE (also known as Business Central) is just a convenience. People have integrated the Drools engine in many ways, there is no "one size fits all".

Alternatively, you can download the binary distribution, and include the relevant JARs in your projects classpath.

##### 1.3.1.1. Dependencies and JARs

Drools is broken down into a few modules, some are required during rule development/compiling, and some are required at runtime. In many cases, people will simply want to include all the dependencies at runtime, and this is fine. It allows you to have the most flexibility. However, some may prefer to have their "runtime" stripped down to the bare minimum, as they will be deploying rules in binary form - this is also possible. The core Drools engine can be quite compact, and only requires a few 100 kilobytes across 3 JAR files.

The following is a description of the important libraries that make up JBoss Drools

- knowledge-api.jar - this provides the interfaces and factories. It also helps clearly show what is intended as a user API and what is just an engine API.

- knowledge-internal-api.jar - this provides internal interfaces and factories.

- drools-core.jar - this is the core Drools engine, runtime component. Contains both the RETE engine and the LEAPS engine. This is the only runtime dependency if you are pre-compiling rules (and deploying via Package or RuleBase objects).

- drools-compiler.jar - this contains the compiler/builder components to take rule source, and build executable rule bases. This is often a runtime dependency of your application, but it need not be if you are pre-compiling your rules. This depends on drools-core.

- drools-jsr94.jar - this is the JSR-94 compliant implementation, this is essentially a layer over the drools-compiler component. Note that due to the nature of the JSR-94 specification, not all features are easily exposed via this interface. In some cases, it will be easier to go direct to the Drools API, but in some environments the JSR-94 is mandated.

- drools-decisiontables.jar - this is the decision tables 'compiler' component, which uses the drools-compiler component. This supports both excel and CSV input formats.

There are quite a few other dependencies which the above components require, most of which are for the drools-compiler, drools-jsr94 or drools-decisiontables module. Some key ones to note are "POI" which provides the spreadsheet parsing ability, and "antlr" which provides the parsing for the rule language itself.

| if you are using Drools in J2EE or servlet containers and you come across classpath issues with "JDT", then you can switch to the janino compiler. Set the system property "drools.compiler": For example: -Ddrools.compiler=JANINO.

For up to date info on dependencies in a release, consult the released POMs, which can be found on the Maven repository.

##### 1.3.1.2. Use with Maven, Gradle, Ivy, Buildr or Ant

The JARs are also available in the central Maven repository (and also in https://repository.jboss.org/nexus/index.html#nexus-search;gavorg.drools~[the JBoss Maven repository]).

If you use Maven, add KIE and Drools dependencies in your project’s pom.xml like this:

      <dependencyManagement>
        <dependencies>
          <dependency>
            <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
            <artifactId>drools-bom</artifactId>
            <type>pom</type>
            <version>...</version>
            <scope>import</scope>
          </dependency>
          ...
        </dependencies>
      </dependencyManagement>
      <dependencies>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
          <artifactId>kie-api</artifactId>
        </dependency>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
          <artifactId>drools-compiler</artifactId>
          <scope>runtime</scope>
        </dependency>
        ...
      <dependencies>

This is similar for Gradle, Ivy and Buildr. To identify the latest version, check the Maven repository.

If you’re still using Ant (without Ivy), copy all the JARs from the download zip’s binaries directory and manually verify that your classpath doesn’t contain duplicate JARs.

##### 1.3.1.3. Runtime

The "runtime" requirements mentioned here are if you are deploying rules as their binary form (either as KnowledgePackage objects, or KnowledgeBase objects etc). This is an optional feature that allows you to keep your runtime very light. You may use drools-compiler to produce rule packages "out of process", and then deploy them to a runtime system. This runtime system only requires drools-core.jar and knowledge-api for execution. This is an optional deployment pattern, and many people do not need to "trim" their application this much, but it is an ideal option for certain environments.

##### 1.3.1.4. Installing IDE (Rule Workbench)

The rule workbench (for Eclipse) requires that you have Eclipse 3.4 or greater, as well as Eclipse GEF 3.4 or greater. You can install it either by downloading the plug-in or using the update site.

Another option is to use the JBoss IDE, which comes with all the plug-in requirements pre packaged, as well as a choice of other tools separate to rules. You can choose just to install rules from the "bundle" that JBoss IDE ships with.

###### Installing GEF (a required dependency)

GEF is the Eclipse Graphical Editing Framework, which is used for graph viewing components in the plug-in.

If you don’t have GEF installed, you can install it using the built in update mechanism (or downloading GEF from the Eclipse.org website not recommended). JBoss IDE has GEF already, as do many other "distributions" of Eclipse, so this step may be redundant for some people.

Open the Help→Software updates…​→Available Software→Add Site…​ from the help menu. Location is:

    http://download.eclipse.org/tools/gef/updates/releases/

Next you choose the GEF plug-in:

Press next, and agree to install the plug-in (an Eclipse restart may be required). Once this is completed, then you can continue on installing the rules plug-in.

###### Installing GEF from zip file

To install from the zip file, download and unzip the file. Inside the zip you will see a plug-in directory, and the plug-in JAR itself. You place the plug-in JAR into your Eclipse applications plug-in directory, and restart Eclipse.

###### Installing Drools plug-in from zip file

Download the Drools Eclipse IDE plugin from the link below. Unzip the downloaded file in your main eclipse folder (do not just copy the file there, extract it so that the feature and plugin JARs end up in the features and plugin directory of eclipse) and (re)start Eclipse.

https://www.drools.org/download/download.html

To check that the installation was successful, try opening the Drools perspective: Click the 'Open Perspective' button in the top right corner of your Eclipse window, select 'Other…​' and pick the Drools perspective. If you cannot find the Drools perspective as one of the possible perspectives, the installation probably was unsuccessful. Check whether you executed each of the required steps correctly: Do you have the right version of Eclipse (3.4.x)? Do you have Eclipse GEF installed (check whether the org.eclipse.gef_3.4..jar exists in the plugins directory in your eclipse root folder)? Did you extract the Drools Eclipse plugin correctly (check whether the org.drools.eclipse_.jar exists in the plugins directory in your eclipse root folder)? If you cannot find the problem, try contacting us (e.g. on irc or on the user mailing list), more info can be found no our homepage here:

https://www.drools.org/

###### Drools Runtimes

A Drools runtime is a collection of JARs on your file system that represent one specific release of the Drools project JARs. To create a runtime, you must point the IDE to the release of your choice. If you want to create a new runtime based on the latest Drools project JARs included in the plugin itself, you can also easily do that. You are required to specify a default Drools runtime for your Eclipse workspace, but each individual project can override the default and select the appropriate runtime for that project specifically.

Defining a Drools runtime

You are required to define one or more Drools runtimes using the Eclipse preferences view. To open up your preferences, in the menu Window select the Preferences menu item. A new preferences dialog should show all your preferences. On the left side of this dialog, under the Drools category, select "Installed Drools runtimes". The panel on the right should then show the currently defined Drools runtimes. If you have not yet defined any runtimes, it should like something like the figure below.

To define a new Drools runtime, click on the add button. A dialog as shown below should pop up, requiring the name for your runtime and the location on your file system where it can be found.

In general, you have two options:

1. If you simply want to use the default JARs as included in the Drools Eclipse plugin, you can create a new Drools runtime automatically by clicking the "Create a new Drools 5 runtime …​" button. A file browser will show up, asking you to select the folder on your file system where you want this runtime to be created. The plugin will then automatically copy all required dependencies to the specified folder. After selecting this folder, the dialog should look like the figure shown below.

2. If you want to use one specific release of the Drools project, you should create a folder on your file system that contains all the necessary Drools libraries and dependencies. Instead of creating a new Drools runtime as explained above, give your runtime a name and select the location of this folder containing all the required JARs.

After clicking the OK button, the runtime should show up in your table of installed Drools runtimes, as shown below. Click on checkbox in front of the newly created runtime to make it the default Drools runtime. The default Drools runtime will be used as the runtime of all your Drools project that have not selected a project-specific runtime.

You can add as many Drools runtimes as you need. For example, the screenshot below shows a configuration where three runtimes have been defined: a Drools 4.0.7 runtime, a Drools 5.0.0 runtime and a Drools 5.0.0.SNAPSHOT runtime. The Drools 5.0.0 runtime is selected as the default one.

Note that you will need to restart Eclipse if you changed the default runtime and you want to make sure that all the projects that are using the default runtime update their classpath accordingly.

Selecting a runtime for your Drools project

Whenever you create a Drools project (using the New Drools Project wizard or by converting an existing Java project to a Drools project using the "Convert to Drools Project" action that is shown when you are in the Drools perspective and you right-click an existing Java project), the plugin will automatically add all the required JARs to the classpath of your project.

When creating a new Drools project, the plugin will automatically use the default Drools runtime for that project, unless you specify a project-specific one. You can do this in the final step of the New Drools Project wizard, as shown below, by deselecting the "Use default Drools runtime" checkbox and selecting the appropriate runtime in the drop-down box. If you click the "Configure workspace settings …​" link, the workspace preferences showing the currently installed Drools runtimes will be opened, so you can add new runtimes there.

You can change the runtime of a Drools project at any time by opening the project properties (right-click the project and select Properties) and selecting the Drools category, as shown below. Check the "Enable project specific settings" checkbox and select the appropriate runtime from the drop-down box. If you click the "Configure workspace settings …​" link, the workspace preferences showing the currently installed Drools runtimes will be opened, so you can add new runtimes there. If you deselect the "Enable project specific settings" checkbox, it will use the default runtime as defined in your global preferences.

#### 1.3.2. Building from source

##### 1.3.2.1. Getting the sources

The source code of each Maven artifact is available in the JBoss Maven repository as a source JAR. The same source JARs are also included in the download zips. However, if you want to build from source, it’s highly recommended to get our sources from our source control.

Drools and jBPM use Git for source control. The blessed git repositories are hosted on GitHub:

- https://github.com/kiegroup

Git allows you to fork our code, independently make personal changes on it, yet still merge in our latest changes regularly and optionally share your changes with us. To learn more about git, read the free book Git Pro.

##### 1.3.2.2. Building the sources

In essense, building from source is very easy, for example if you want to build the guvnor project:

    $ git clone git@github.com:kiegroup/guvnor.git
    ...
    $ cd guvnor
    $ mvn clean install -DskipTests -Dfull
    ...

However, there are a lot potential pitfalls, so if you’re serious about building from source and possibly contributing to the project, follow the instructions in the README file in droolsjbpm-build-bootstrap.

#### 1.3.3. Eclipse

##### 1.3.3.1. Importing Eclipse Projects

With the Eclipse project files generated they can now be imported into Eclipse. When starting Eclipse open the workspace in the root of your subversion checkout.

When calling `mvn install` all the project dependencies were downloaded and added to the local Maven repository. Eclipse cannot find those dependencies unless you tell it where that repository is. To do this setup an `M2_REPO` classpath variable.

# KIE

KIE is the shared core for Drools and jBPM. It provides a unified methodology and programming model for building, deploying and utilizing resources.

## 2. KIE

### 2.1. Overview

#### 2.1.1. Anatomy of Projects

The process of researching an integration knowledge solution for Drools and jBPM has simply used the "kiegroup" group name. This name permeates GitHub accounts and Maven POMs. As scopes broadened and new projects were spun KIE, an acronym for Knowledge Is Everything, was chosen as the new group name. The KIE name is also used for the shared aspects of the system; such as the unified build, deploy and utilization.

KIE currently consists of the following subprojects:

Figure 1. KIE Anatomy

OptaPlanner, a local search and optimization tool, has been spun off from Drools Planner and is now a top level project with Drools and jBPM. This was a natural evolution as Optaplanner, while having strong Drools integration, has long been independent of Drools.

From the Polymita acquisition, along with other things, comes the powerful Dashboard Builder which provides powerful reporting capabilities. Dashboard Builder is currently a temporary name and after the 6.0 release a new name will be chosen. Dashboard Builder is completely independent of Drools and jBPM and will be used by many projects at JBoss, and hopefully outside of JBoss :)

UberFire is the new base Business Central project, spun off from the ground up rewrite. UberFire provides Eclipse-like workbench capabilities, with panels and pages from plugins. The project is independent of Drools and jBPM and anyone can use it as a basis of building flexible and powerful workbenches like Business Central. UberFire will be used for console and workbench development throughout JBoss.

It was determined that the Guvnor brand leaked too much from its intended role; such as the authoring metaphors, like Decision Tables, being considered Guvnor components instead of Drools components. This wasn’t helped by the monolithic projects structure used in 5.x for Guvnor. In 6.0 Guvnor’s focus has been narrowed to encapsulate the set of UberFire plugins that provide the basis for building a web based IDE. Such as Maven integration for building and deploying, management of Maven repositories and activity notifications via inboxes. Drools and jBPM build Business Central distributions using Uberfire as the base and including a set of plugins, such as Guvnor, along with their own plugins for things like decision tables, guided editors, BPMN2 designer, human tasks. Business Central is called business-central.

KIE-WB is the uber workbench that combined all the Guvnor, Drools and jBPM plugins. The jBPM-WB is ghosted out, as it doesn’t actually exist, being made redundant by KIE-WB.

#### 2.1.2. Lifecycles

The different aspects, or life cycles, of working with KIE system, whether it’s Drools or jBPM, can typically be broken down into the following:

- Author

  - Authoring of knowledge using a UI metaphor, such as: DRL, BPMN2, decision table, class models.

- Build

  - Builds the authored knowledge into deployable units.

  - For KIE this unit is a JAR.

- Test

  - Test KIE knowledge before it’s deployed to the application.

- Deploy

  - Deploys the unit to a location where applications may utilize (consume) them.

  - KIE uses Maven style repository.

- Utilize

  - The loading of a JAR to provide a KIE session (KieSession), for which the application can interact with.

  - KIE exposes the JAR at runtime via a KIE container (KieContainer).

  - KieSessions, for the runtime’s to interact with, are created from the KieContainer.

- Run

  - System interaction with the KieSession, via API.

- Work

  - User interaction with the KieSession, via command line or UI.

- Manage

  - Manage any KieSession or KieContainer.

#### 2.1.3. Installation environment options for Drools

With Drools, you can set up a development environment to develop business applications, a runtime environment to run those applications to support decisions, or both.

- Development environment: Typically consists of one Business Central installation and at least one KIE Server installation. You can use Business Central to design decisions and other artifacts, and you can use KIE Server to execute and test the artifacts that you created.

- Runtime environment: Consists of one or more KIE Server instances with or without Business Central. Business Central has an embedded Drools controller. If you install Business Central, use the Menu → Deploy → Execution servers page to create and maintain containers. If you want to automate KIE Server management without Business Central, you can use the headless Drools controller.

You can also cluster both development and runtime environments. A clustered development or runtime environment consists of a unified group or "cluster" of two or more servers. The primary benefit of clustering Drools development environments is high availability and enhanced collaboration, while the primary benefit of clustering Drools runtime environments is high availability and load balancing. High availability decreases the chance of a loss of data when a single server fails. When a server fails, another server fills the gap by providing a copy of the data that was on the failed server. When the failed server comes online again, it resumes its place in the cluster. Load balancing shares the computing load across the nodes of the cluster to improve the overall performance.

| Clustering of the runtime environment is currently supported on Red Hat JBoss EAP 7.2 only. Clustering of Business Central is currently a Technology Preview feature that is not yet intended for production use.

Additional resources

- Installation and Setup (Core and IDE)

- Advanced Settings

#### 2.1.4. Decision-authoring assets in Drools

Drools supports several assets that you can use to define business decisions for your decision service. Each decision-authoring asset has different advantages, and you might prefer to use one or a combination of multiple assets depending on your goals and needs.

The following table highlights the main decision-authoring assets supported in Drools projects to help you decide or confirm the best method for defining decisions in your decision service.

Table 1. Decision-authoring assets supported in Drools
Asset | Highlights | Authoring tools | Documentation
--- | --- | --- | ---
Decision Model and Notation (DMN) models | Are decision models based on a notation standard defined by the Object Management Group (OMG) Use graphical decision requirements diagrams (DRDs) with one or more decision requirements graphs (DRGs) to trace business decision flows Use an XML schema that allows the DMN models to be shared between DMN-compliant platforms Support Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) to define decision logic in DMN decision tables and other DMN boxed expressions Are optimal for creating comprehensive, illustrative, and stable decision flows | Business Central or other DMN-compliant editor | Decision Model and Notation (DMN)
Guided decision tables | Are tables of rules that you create in a UI-based table designer in Business Central Are a wizard-led alternative to spreadsheet decision tables Provide fields and options for acceptable input Support template keys and values for creating rule templates Support hit policies, real-time validation, and other additional features not supported in other assets Are optimal for creating rules in a controlled tabular format to minimize compilation errors | Business Central | Guided decision tables
Spreadsheet decision tables | Are XLS or XLSX spreadsheet decision tables that you can upload into Business Central Support template keys and values for creating rule templates Are optimal for creating rules in decision tables already managed outside of Business Central Have strict syntax requirements for rules to be compiled properly when uploaded | Spreadsheet editor | Spreadsheet decision tables
Guided rules | Are individual rules that you create in a UI-based rule designer in Business Central Provide fields and options for acceptable input Are optimal for creating single rules in a controlled format to minimize compilation errors | Business Central | Guided rules
Guided rule templates | Are reusable rule structures that you create in a UI-based template designer in Business Central Provide fields and options for acceptable input Support template keys and values for creating rule templates (fundamental to the purpose of this asset) Are optimal for creating many rules with the same rule structure but with different defined field values | Business Central | Guided rule templates
DRL rules | Are individual rules that you define directly in `.drl` text files Provide the most flexibility for defining rules and other technicalities of rule behavior Can be created in certain standalone environments and integrated with Drools Are optimal for creating rules that require advanced DRL options Have strict syntax requirements for rules to be compiled properly | Business Central or integrated development environment (IDE) | DRL (Drools Rule Language) rules
Predictive Model Markup Language (PMML) models | Are predictive data-analytic models based on a notation standard defined by the Data Mining Group (DMG) Use an XML schema that allows the PMML models to be shared between PMML-compliant platforms Support Regression, Scorecard, Tree, Mining, and other model types Can be included with a standalone Drools project or imported into a project in Business Central Are optimal for incorporating predictive data into decision services in Drools | PMML or XML editor | Predictive Model Markup Language (PMML)

#### 2.1.5. Project storage and build options with Drools

As you develop a Drools project, you need to be able to track the versions of your project with a version-controlled repository, manage your project assets in a stable environment, and build your project for testing and deployment. You can use Business Central for all of these tasks, or use a combination of Business Central and external tools and repositories. Drools supports Git repositories for project version control, Apache Maven for project management, and a variety of Maven-based, Java-based, or custom-tool-based build options.

The following options are the main methods for Drools project versioning, storage, and building:

Table 2. Project version control options (Git)
Versioning option | Description | Documentation
--- | --- | ---
Business Central Git VFS | Business Central contains a built-in Git Virtual File System (VFS) that stores all processes, rules, and other artifacts that you create in the authoring environment. Git is a distributed version control system that implements revisions as commit objects. When you commit your changes into a repository, a new commit object in the Git repository is created. When you create a project in Business Central, the project is added to the Git repository connected to Business Central. | NA
External Git repository | If you have Drools projects in Git repositories outside of Business Central, you can import them into Drools spaces and use Git hooks to synchronize the internal and external Git repositories. | NA

Table 3. Project management options (Maven)
Management option | Description | Documentation
--- | --- | ---
Business Central Maven repository | Business Central contains a built-in Maven repository that organizes and builds project assets that you create in the authoring environment. Maven is a distributed build-automation tool that uses repositories to store Java libraries, plug-ins, and other build artifacts. When building projects and archetypes, Maven dynamically retrieves Java libraries and Maven plug-ins from local or remote repositories to promote shared dependencies across projects.
| For a production environment, consider using an external Maven repository configured with Business Central.
| Artifact Repository
External Maven repository | If you have Drools projects in an external Maven repository, such as Nexus or Artifactory, you can create a `settings.xml` file with connection details and add that file path to the `kie.maven.settings.custom` property in your project `standalone-full.xml` file. | Maven Settings Reference Settings.xml and Remote Repository Setup

Table 4. Project build options
Build option | Description | Documentation
--- | --- | ---
Business Central (KJAR) | Business Central builds Drools projects stored in either the built-in Maven repository or a configured external Maven repository. Projects in Business Central are packaged automatically as knowledge JAR (KJAR) files with all components needed for deployment when you build the projects. | Build and Deploy
Standalone Maven project (KJAR) | If you have a standalone Drools Maven project outside of Business Central, you can edit the project `pom.xml` file to package your project as a KJAR file, and then add a `kmodule.xml` file with the KIE base and KIE session configurations needed to build the project. | Building with Maven
Embedded Java application (KJAR) | If you have an embedded Java application from which you want to build your Drools project, you can use a `KieModuleModel` instance to programatically create a `kmodule.xml` file with the KIE base and KIE session configurations, and then add all resources in your project to the KIE virtual file system `KieFileSystem` to build the project. | Defining a KieModule programmatically
CI/CD tool (KJAR) | If you use a tool for continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD), you can configure the tool set to integrate with your Drools Git repositories to build a specified project. Ensure that your projects are packaged and built as KJAR files to ensure optimal deployment. | NA

#### 2.1.6. Project deployment options with Drools

After you develop, test, and build your Drools project, you can deploy the project to begin using the business assets you have created. You can deploy a Drools project to a configured KIE Server, to an embedded Java application, or into a Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform environment for an enhanced containerized implementation.

The following options are the main methods for Drools project deployment:

Table 5. Project deployment options
Deployment option | Description | Documentation
--- | --- | ---
Deployment to KIE Server | KIE Server is the server provided with Drools that runs the decision services, process applications, and other deployable assets from a packaged and deployed Drools project (KJAR file). These services are consumed at run time through an instantiated KIE container, or deployment unit. You can deploy and maintain deployment units in KIE Server using Business Central or using a headless Drools controller with its associated REST API (considered a managed KIE Server instance). You can also deploy and maintain deployment units using the KIE Server REST API or Java client API from a standalone Maven project, an embedded Java application, or other custom environment (considered an unmanaged KIE Server instance). | Deploying KIE Execution Server
Deployment to an embedded Java application | If you want to deploy Drools projects to your own Java virtual machine (JVM) environment, microservice, or application server, you can bundle the application resources in the project WAR files to create a deployment unit similar to a KIE container. You can also use the core KIE APIs (not KIE Server APIs) to configure a KIE scanner to periodically update KIE containers. | KIE Public API

#### 2.1.7. Asset execution options with Drools

After you build and deploy your Drools project to KIE Server or other environment, you can execute the deployed assets for testing or for runtime consumption. You can also execute assets locally in addition to or instead of executing them after deployment.

The following options are the main methods for Drools asset execution:

Table 6. Asset execution options
Execution option | Description | Documentation
--- | --- | ---
Execution in KIE Server | If you deployed Drools project assets to KIE Server, you can use the KIE Server REST API or Java client API to execute and interact with the deployed assets. You can also use Business Central or the headless Drools controller outside of Business Central to manage the configurations and KIE containers in the KIE Server instances associated with your deployed assets. | KIE Execution Server
Execution in an embedded Java application | If you deployed Drools project assets in your own Java virtual machine (JVM) environment, microservice, or application server, you can use custom APIs or application interactions with core KIE APIs (not KIE Server APIs) to execute assets in the embedded engine. | KIE Public API
Execution in a local environment for extended testing | As part of your development cycle, you can execute assets locally to ensure that the assets you have created in Drools function as intended. You can use local execution in addition to or instead of executing assets after deployment. | Importing and executing Drools example decisions in an IDE

| Smart Router (KIE Server router) Depending on your deployment and execution environment, you can use a Smart Router to aggregate multiple independent KIE Server instances as though they are a single server. Smart Router is a single endpoint that can receive calls from client applications to any of your services and route each call automatically to the KIE Server that runs the service. For more information about Smart Router, see KIE Server router.

#### 2.1.8. Example decision management architectures with Drools

The following scenarios illustrate common variations of Drools installation, asset authoring, project storage, project deployment, and asset execution in a decision management architecture. Each section summarizes the methods and tools used and the advantages for the given architecture. The examples are basic and are only a few of the many combinations you might consider, depending on your specific goals and needs with Drools.

Drools on Wildfly with Business Central and KIE Server

  - Installation environment: Drools on Wildfly

  - Project storage and build environment: External Git repository for project versioning synchronized with the Business Central Git repository using Git hooks, and external Maven repository for project management and building configured with KIE Server

  - Asset-authoring tool: Business Central

  - Main asset types: Decision Model and Notation (DMN) models for decisions

  - Project deployment and execution environment: KIE Server

  - Scenario advantages:

    - Stable implementation of Drools in an on-premise development environment

    - Access to the repositories, assets, asset designers, and project build options in Business Central

    - Standardized asset-authoring approach using DMN for optimal integration and stability

    - Access to KIE Server functionality and KIE APIs for asset deployment and execution

  Figure 2. Drools on Wildfly with Business Central and KIE Server
Drools on Wildfly with an IDE and KIE Server

  - Installation environment: Drools on Wildfly

  - Project storage and build environment: External Git repository for project versioning (not synchronized with Business Central) and external Maven repository for project management and building configured with KIE Server

  - Asset-authoring tools: Integrated development environment (IDE), such as Eclipse, and a spreadsheet editor or a Decision Model and Notation (DMN) modeling tool for other decision formats

  - Main asset types: Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules, spreadsheet decision tables, and Decision Model and Notation (DMN) models for decisions

  - Project deployment and execution environment: KIE Server

  - Scenario advantages:

    - Flexible implementation of Drools in an on-premise development environment

    - Ability to define business assets using an external IDE and other asset-authoring tools of your choice

    - Access to KIE Server functionality and KIE APIs for asset deployment and execution

  Figure 3. Drools on Wildfly with an IDE and KIE Server
Drools with an IDE and an embedded Java application

  - Installation environment: Drools libraries embedded within a custom application

  - Project storage and build environment: External Git repository for project versioning (not synchronized with Business Central) and external Maven repository for project management and building configured with your embedded Java application (not configured with KIE Server)

  - Asset-authoring tools: Integrated development environment (IDE), such as Eclipse, and a spreadsheet editor or a Decision Model and Notation (DMN) modeling tool for other decision formats

  - Main asset types: Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules, spreadsheet decision tables, and Decision Model and Notation (DMN) models for decisions

  - Project deployment and execution environment: Embedded Java application, such as in a Java virtual machine (JVM) environment, microservice, or custom application server

  - Scenario advantages:

    - Custom implementation of Drools in an on-premise development environment with an embedded Java application

    - Ability to define business assets using an external IDE and other asset-authoring tools of your choice

    - Use of custom APIs to interact with core KIE APIs (not KIE Server APIs) and to execute assets in the embedded engine

  Figure 4. Drools with an IDE and an embedded Java application

### 2.2. Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run

#### 2.2.1. Introduction

6.0 introduces a new configuration and convention approach to building KIE bases, instead of using the programmatic builder approach in 5.x. The builder is still available to fall back on, as it’s used for the tooling integration.

Building now uses Maven, and aligns with Maven practices. A KIE project or module is simply a Maven Java project or module; with an additional metadata file META-INF/kmodule.xml. The kmodule.xml file is the descriptor that selects resources to KIE bases and configures those KIE bases and sessions. There is also alternative XML support via Spring and OSGi BluePrints.

While standard Maven can build and package KIE resources, it will not provide validation at build time. There is a Maven plugin which is recommended to use to get build time validation. The plugin also generates many classes, making the runtime loading faster too.

The example project layout and Maven POM descriptor is illustrated in the screenshot

Figure 5. Example project layout and Maven POM

KIE uses defaults to minimise the amount of configuration. With an empty kmodule.xml being the simplest configuration. There must always be a kmodule.xml file, even if empty, as it’s used for discovery of the JAR and its contents.

Maven can either 'mvn install' to deploy a KieModule to the local machine, where all other applications on the local machine use it. Or it can 'mvn deploy' to push the KieModule to a remote Maven repository. Building the Application will pull in the KieModule and populate the local Maven repository in the process.

Figure 6. Example project layout and Maven POM

JARs can be deployed in one of two ways. Either added to the classpath, like any other JAR in a Maven dependency listing, or they can be dynamically loaded at runtime. KIE will scan the classpath to find all the JARs with a kmodule.xml in it. Each found JAR is represented by the KieModule interface. The terms classpath KieModule and dynamic KieModule are used to refer to the two loading approaches. While dynamic modules supports side by side versioning, classpath modules do not. Further once a module is on the classpath, no other version may be loaded dynamically.

Detailed references for the API are included in the next sections, the impatient can jump straight to the examples section, which is fairly self-explanatory on the different use cases.

#### 2.2.2. Building

Figure 7. org.kie.api.core.builder

##### 2.2.2.1. Creating and building a Kie Project

A Kie Project has the structure of a normal Maven project with the only peculiarity of including a kmodule.xml file defining in a declaratively way the `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s that can be created from it. This file has to be placed in the resources/META-INF folder of the Maven project while all the other Kie artifacts, such as DRL or a Excel files, must be stored in the resources folder or in any other subfolder under it.

Since meaningful defaults have been provided for all configuration aspects, the simplest kmodule.xml file can contain just an empty kmodule tag like the following:

Example 1. An empty kmodule.xml file

    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule"/>

In this way the kmodule will contain one single default `KieBase`. All Kie assets stored under the resources folder, or any of its subfolders, will be compiled and added to it. To trigger the building of these artifacts it is enough to create a `KieContainer` for them.

Figure 8. KieContainer

For this simple case it is enough to create a `KieContainer` that reads the files to be built from the classpath:

Example 2. Creating a KieContainer from the classpath

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

` KieServices` is the interface from where it possible to access all the Kie building and runtime facilities:

Figure 9. KieServices

In this way all the Java sources and the Kie resources are compiled and deployed into the KieContainer which makes its contents available for use at runtime.

##### 2.2.2.2. The kmodule.xml file

As explained in the former section, the kmodule.xml file is the place where it is possible to declaratively configure the `KieBase`(s) and `KieSession`(s) that can be created from a KIE project.

In particular a `KieBase` is a repository of all the application’s knowledge definitions. It will contain rules, processes, functions, and type models. The `KieBase` itself does not contain data; instead, sessions are created from the `KieBase` into which data can be inserted and from which process instances may be started. Creating the `KieBase` can be heavy, whereas session creation is very light, so it is recommended that `KieBase` be cached where possible to allow for repeated session creation. However end-users usually shouldn’t worry about it, because this caching mechanism is already automatically provided by the `KieContainer`.

Figure 10. KieBase

Conversely the `KieSession` stores and executes on the runtime data. It is created from the `KieBase` or more easily can be created directly from the `KieContainer` if it has been defined in the kmodule.xml file

Figure 11. KieSession

The kmodule.xml allows to define and configure one or more `KieBase`s and for each `KieBase` all the different `KieSession`s that can be created from it, as showed by the follwing example:

Example 3. A sample kmodule.xml file

    <kmodule xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
            xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
      <configuration>
        <property key="drools.evaluator.supersetOf" value="org.mycompany.SupersetOfEvaluatorDefinition"/>
      </configuration>
      <kbase name="KBase1" default="true" eventProcessingMode="cloud" equalsBehavior="equality" declarativeAgenda="enabled" packages="org.domain.pkg1">
        <ksession name="KSession2_1" type="stateful" default="true"/>
        <ksession name="KSession2_2" type="stateless" default="false" beliefSystem="jtms"/>
      </kbase>
      <kbase name="KBase2" default="false" eventProcessingMode="stream" equalsBehavior="equality" declarativeAgenda="enabled" packages="org.domain.pkg2, org.domain.pkg3" includes="KBase1">
        <ksession name="KSession3_1" type="stateful" default="false" clockType="realtime">
          <fileLogger file="drools.log" threaded="true" interval="10"/>
          <workItemHandlers>
            <workItemHandler name="name" type="org.domain.WorkItemHandler"/>
          </workItemHandlers>
          <calendars>
            <calendar name="monday" type="org.domain.Monday"/>
          </calendars>
          <listeners>
            <ruleRuntimeEventListener type="org.domain.RuleRuntimeListener"/>
            <agendaEventListener type="org.domain.FirstAgendaListener"/>
            <agendaEventListener type="org.domain.SecondAgendaListener"/>
            <processEventListener type="org.domain.ProcessListener"/>
          </listeners>
        </ksession>
      </kbase>
    </kmodule>

Here the tag contains a list of key-value pairs that are the optional properties used to configure the `KieBase`s building process. For instance this sample kmodule.xml file defines an additional custom operator named `supersetOf` and implemented by the `org.mycompany.SupersetOfEvaluatorDefinition` class.

After this 2 `KieBase`s have been defined and it is possible to instance 2 different types of `KieSession`s from the first one, while only one from the second. A list of the attributes that can be defined on the kbase tag, together with their meaning and default values follows:

Table 7. kbase Attributes
Attribute name | Default value | Admitted values | Meaning
--- | --- | --- | ---
name | none | any | The name with which retrieve this KieBase from the KieContainer. This is the only mandatory attribute.
includes | none | any comma separated list | A comma separated list of other KieBases contained in this kmodule. The artifacts of all these KieBases will be also included in this one.
packages | all | any comma separated list | By default all the Drools artifacts under the resources folder, at any level, are included into the KieBase. This attribute allows to limit the artifacts that will be compiled in this KieBase to only the ones belonging to the list of packages.
default | false | true, false | Defines if this KieBase is the default one for this module, so it can be created from the KieContainer without passing any name to it. There can be at most one default KieBase in each module.
equalsBehavior | identity | identity, equality | Defines the behavior of Drools when a new fact is inserted into the Working Memory. With identity it always create a new FactHandle unless the same object isn’t already present in the Working Memory, while with equality only if the newly inserted object is not equal (according to its equal method) to an already existing fact.
eventProcessingMode | cloud | cloud, stream | When compiled in cloud mode the KieBase treats events as normal facts, while in stream mode allow temporal reasoning on them.
declarativeAgenda | disabled | disabled, enabled | Defines if the Declarative Agenda is enabled or not.

Similarly all attributes of the ksession tag (except of course the name) have meaningful default. They are listed and described in the following table:

Table 8. ksession Attributes
Attribute name | Default value | Admitted values | Meaning
--- | --- | --- | ---
name | none | any | Unique name of this KieSession. Used to fetch the KieSession from the KieContainer. This is the only mandatory attribute.
type | stateful | stateful, stateless | A stateful session allows to iteratively work with the Working Memory, while a stateless one is a one-off execution of a Working Memory with a provided data set.
default | false | true, false | Defines if this KieSession is the default one for this module, so it can be created from the KieContainer without passing any name to it. In each module there can be at most one default KieSession for each type.
clockType | realtime | realtime, pseudo | Defines if events timestamps are determined by the system clock or by a psuedo clock controlled by the application. This clock is specially useful for unit testing temporal rules.
beliefSystem | simple | simple, jtms, defeasible | Defines the type of belief system used by the KieSession.

As outlined in the former kmodule.xml sample, it is also possible to declaratively create on each `KieSession` a file (or a console) logger, one or more `WorkItemHandler`s and `Calendar`s plus some listeners that can be of 3 different types: ruleRuntimeEventListener, agendaEventListener and processEventListener

Having defined a kmodule.xml like the one in the former sample, it is now possible to simply retrieve the KieBases and KieSessions from the KieContainer using their names.

Example 4. Retriving KieBases and KieSessions from the KieContainer

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

    KieBase kBase1 = kContainer.getKieBase("KBase1");
    KieSession kieSession1 = kContainer.newKieSession("KSession2_1");
    StatelessKieSession kieSession2 = kContainer.newStatelessKieSession("KSession2_2");

It has to be noted that since KSession2_1 and KSession2_2 are of 2 different types (the first is stateful, while the second is stateless) it is necessary to invoke 2 different methods on the `KieContainer` according to their declared type. If the type of the `KieSession` requested to the `KieContainer` doesn’t correspond with the one declared in the kmodule.xml file the `KieContainer` will throw a `RuntimeException`. Also since a `KieBase` and a `KieSession` have been flagged as default is it possible to get them from the `KieContainer` without passing any name.

Example 5. Retriving default KieBases and KieSessions from the KieContainer

    KieContainer kContainer = ...

    KieBase kBase1 = kContainer.getKieBase(); // returns KBase1
    KieSession kieSession1 = kContainer.newKieSession(); // returns KSession2_1

Since a Kie project is also a Maven project the groupId, artifactId and version declared in the pom.xml file are used to generate a `ReleaseId` that uniquely identifies this project inside your application. This allows creation of a new KieContainer from the project by simply passing its `ReleaseId` to the `KieServices`.

Example 6. Creating a KieContainer of an existing project by ReleaseId

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "myartifact", "1.0" );
    KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );

##### 2.2.2.3. Building with Maven

The KIE plugin for Maven ensures that artifact resources are validated and pre-compiled, it is recommended that this is used at all times. To use the plugin simply add it to the build section of the Maven pom.xml and activate it by using packaging `kjar`.

Example 7. Adding the KIE plugin to a Maven pom.xml and activating it

      <packaging>kjar</packaging>
      ...
      <build>
        <plugins>
          <plugin>
            <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
            <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
            <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
            <extensions>true</extensions>
          </plugin>
        </plugins>
      </build>

The plugin comes with support for all the Drools/jBPM knowledge resources. However, in case you are using specific KIE annotations in your Java classes, like for example `@kie.api.Position`, you will need to add compile time dependency on `kie-api` into your project. We recommend to use the provided scope for all the additional KIE dependencies. That way the kjar stays as lightweight as possible, and not dependant on any particular KIE version.

Building a KIE module without the Maven plugin will copy all the resources, as is, into the resulting JAR. When that JAR is loaded by the runtime, it will attempt to build all the resources then. If there are compilation issues it will return a null KieContainer. It also pushes the compilation overhead to the runtime. In general this is not recommended, and the Maven plugin should always be used.

##### 2.2.2.4. Defining a KieModule programmatically

It is also possible to define the `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s belonging to a KieModule programmatically instead of the declarative definition in the kmodule.xml file. The same programmatic API also allows in explicitly adding the file containing the Kie artifacts instead of automatically read them from the resources folder of your project. To do that it is necessary to create a `KieFileSystem`, a sort of virtual file system, and add all the resources contained in your project to it.

Figure 12. KieFileSystem

Like all other Kie core components you can obtain an instance of the `KieFileSystem` from the `KieServices`. The kmodule.xml configuration file must be added to the filesystem. This is a mandatory step. Kie also provides a convenient fluent API, implemented by the `KieModuleModel`, to programmatically create this file.

Figure 13. KieModuleModel

To do this in practice it is necessary to create a `KieModuleModel` from the `KieServices`, configure it with the desired `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s, convert it in XML and add the XML to the `KieFileSystem`. This process is shown by the following example:

Example 8. Creating a kmodule.xml programmatically and adding it to a KieFileSystem

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieModuleModel kieModuleModel = kieServices.newKieModuleModel();

    KieBaseModel kieBaseModel1 = kieModuleModel.newKieBaseModel( "KBase1 ")
            .setDefault( true )
            .setEqualsBehavior( EqualityBehaviorOption.EQUALITY )
            .setEventProcessingMode( EventProcessingOption.STREAM );

    KieSessionModel ksessionModel1 = kieBaseModel1.newKieSessionModel( "KSession1" )
            .setDefault( true )
            .setType( KieSessionModel.KieSessionType.STATEFUL )
            .setClockType( ClockTypeOption.get("realtime") );

    KieFileSystem kfs = kieServices.newKieFileSystem();
    kfs.writeKModuleXML(kieModuleModel.toXML());

At this point it is also necessary to add to the `KieFileSystem`, through its fluent API, all others Kie artifacts composing your project. These artifacts have to be added in the same position of a corresponding usual Maven project.

Example 9. Adding Kie artifacts to a KieFileSystem

    KieFileSystem kfs = ...
    kfs.write( "src/main/resources/KBase1/ruleSet1.drl", stringContainingAValidDRL )
            .write( "src/main/resources/dtable.xls",
                    kieServices.getResources().newInputStreamResource( dtableFileStream ) );

This example shows that it is possible to add the Kie artifacts both as plain Strings and as `Resource`s. In the latter case the `Resource`s can be created by the `KieResources` factory, also provided by the `KieServices`. The `KieResources` provides many convenient factory methods to convert an `InputStream`, a `URL`, a `File`, or a `String` representing a path of your file system to a `Resource` that can be managed by the `KieFileSystem`.

Figure 14. KieResources

Normally the type of a `Resource` can be inferred from the extension of the name used to add it to the `KieFileSystem`. However it also possible to not follow the Kie conventions about file extensions and explicitly assign a specific `ResourceType` to a `Resource` as shown below:

Example 10. Creating and adding a Resource with an explicit type

    KieFileSystem kfs = ...
    kfs.write( "src/main/resources/myDrl.txt",
               kieServices.getResources().newInputStreamResource( drlStream )
                          .setResourceType(ResourceType.DRL) );

Add all the resources to the `KieFileSystem` and build it by passing the `KieFileSystem` to a `KieBuilder`

Figure 15. KieBuilder

When the contents of a `KieFileSystem` are successfully built, the resulting `KieModule` is automatically added to the `KieRepository`. The `KieRepository` is a singleton acting as a repository for all the available `KieModule`s.

Figure 16. KieRepository

After this it is possible to create through the `KieServices` a new `KieContainer` for that `KieModule` using its `ReleaseId`. However, since in this case the `KieFileSystem` doesn’t contain any pom.xml file (it is possible to add one using the `KieFileSystem.writePomXML` method), Kie cannot determine the `ReleaseId` of the `KieModule` and assign to it a default one. This default `ReleaseId` can be obtained from the `KieRepository` and used to identify the `KieModule` inside the `KieRepository` itself. The following example shows this whole process.

Example 11. Building the contents of a KieFileSystem and creating a KieContainer

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieFileSystem kfs = ...
    kieServices.newKieBuilder( kfs ).buildAll();
    KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer(kieServices.getRepository().getDefaultReleaseId());

At this point it is possible to get `KieBase`s and create new `KieSession`s from this `KieContainer` exactly in the same way as in the case of a `KieContainer` created directly from the classpath.

It is a best practice to check the compilation results. The `KieBuilder` reports compilation results of 3 different severities: ERROR, WARNING and INFO. An ERROR indicates that the compilation of the project failed and in the case no `KieModule` is produced and nothing is added to the `KieRepository`. WARNING and INFO results can be ignored, but are available for inspection.

Example 12. Checking that a compilation didn’t produce any error

    KieBuilder kieBuilder = kieServices.newKieBuilder( kfs ).buildAll();
    assertEquals( 0, kieBuilder.getResults().getMessages( Message.Level.ERROR ).size() );

##### 2.2.2.5. Changing the Default Build Result Severity

In some cases, it is possible to change the default severity of a type of build result. For instance, when a new rule with the same name of an existing rule is added to a package, the default behavior is to replace the old rule by the new rule and report it as an INFO. This is probably ideal for most use cases, but in some deployments the user might want to prevent the rule update and report it as an error.

Changing the default severity for a result type, configured like any other option in Drools, can be done by API calls, system properties or configuration files. As of this version, Drools supports configurable result severity for rule updates and function updates. To configure it using system properties or configuration files, the user has to use the following properties:

Example 13. Setting the severity using properties

    // sets the severity of rule updates
    drools.kbuilder.severity.duplicateRule = <INFO|WARNING|ERROR>
    // sets the severity of function updates
    drools.kbuilder.severity.duplicateFunction = <INFO|WARNING|ERROR>

##### 2.2.2.6. Building and running Drools in a fat jar

Many modules of Drools (e.g. drools-core, drools-compiler) have a file named `kie.conf` containing the names of the classes implementing the services provided by the corresponding module. When running Drools in a fat JAR, for example created by the Maven Shade Plugin, those various `kie.conf` files need to be merged, otherwise , the fat JAR will contain only 1 kie.conf from a single dependency, resulting into errors. You can merge resources in the Maven Shade Plugin using transformers, like this:

    <transformer implementation="org.apache.maven.plugins.shade.resource.AppendingTransformer">
        <resource>META-INF/kie.conf</resource>
    </transformer>

For instance this is required when running Drools in a Vert.x application. In this case the Maven Shade Plugin can be configured as it follows:

    <plugin>
        <groupId>org.apache.maven.plugins</groupId>
        <artifactId>maven-shade-plugin</artifactId>
        <version>3.1.0</version>
        <executions>
            <execution>
                <phase>package</phase>
                <goals>
                    <goal>shade</goal>
                </goals>
                <configuration>
                    <transformers>
                        <transformer implementation="org.apache.maven.plugins.shade.resource.ManifestResourceTransformer">
                            <manifestEntries>
                                <Main-Class>io.vertx.core.Launcher</Main-Class>
                                <Main-Verticle>${main.verticle}</Main-Verticle>
                            </manifestEntries>
                        </transformer>
                        <transformer implementation="org.apache.maven.plugins.shade.resource.AppendingTransformer">
                            <resource>META-INF/services/io.vertx.core.spi.VerticleFactory</resource>
                        </transformer>
                        <transformer implementation="org.apache.maven.plugins.shade.resource.AppendingTransformer">
                            <resource>META-INF/kie.conf</resource>
                        </transformer>
                    </transformers>
                    <artifactSet>
                    </artifactSet>
                    <outputFile>${project.build.directory}/${project.artifactId}-${project.version}-fat.jar</outputFile>
                </configuration>
            </execution>
        </executions>
    </plugin>

#### 2.2.3. Deploying

##### 2.2.3.1. KieBase

The `KieBase` is a repository of all the application’s knowledge definitions. It will contain rules, processes, functions, and type models. The `KieBase` itself does not contain data; instead, sessions are created from the `KieBase` into which data can be inserted and from which process instances may be started. The `KieBase` can be obtained from the `KieContainer` containing the `KieModule` where the `KieBase` has been defined.

Figure 17. KieBase

Sometimes, for instance in a OSGi environment, the `KieBase` needs to resolve types that are not in the default class loader. In this case it will be necessary to create a `KieBaseConfiguration` with an additional class loader and pass it to `KieContainer` when creating a new `KieBase` from it.

Example 14. Creating a new KieBase with a custom ClassLoader

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieBaseConfiguration kbaseConf = kieServices.newKieBaseConfiguration( null, MyType.class.getClassLoader() );
    KieBase kbase = kieContainer.newKieBase( kbaseConf );

##### 2.2.3.2. KieSessions and KieBase Modifications

KieSessions will be discussed in more detail in section "Running". The `KieBase` creates and returns `KieSession` objects, and it may optionally keep references to those. When `KieBase` modifications occur those modifications are applied against the data in the sessions. This reference is a weak reference and it is also optional, which is controlled by a boolean flag.

##### 2.2.3.3. KieScanner

The `KieScanner` allows continuous monitoring of your Maven repository to check whether a new release of a Kie project has been installed. A new release is deployed in the `KieContainer` wrapping that project. The use of the `KieScanner` requires kie-ci.jar to be on the classpath.

Figure 18. KieScanner

A `KieScanner` can be registered on a `KieContainer` as in the following example.

Example 15. Registering and starting a KieScanner on a KieContainer

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "myartifact", "1.0-SNAPSHOT" );
    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );
    KieScanner kScanner = kieServices.newKieScanner( kContainer );

    // Start the KieScanner polling the Maven repository every 10 seconds
    kScanner.start( 10000L );

In this example the `KieScanner` is configured to run with a fixed time interval, but it is also possible to run it on demand by invoking the `scanNow()` method on it. If the `KieScanner` finds, in the Maven repository, an updated version of the Kie project used by that `KieContainer` it automatically downloads the new version and triggers an incremental build of the new project. At this point, existing `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s under the control of `KieContainer` will get automatically upgraded with it - specifically, those `KieBase`s obtained with `getKieBase()` along with their related `KieSession`s, and any `KieSession` obtained directly with `KieContainer.newKieSession()` thus referencing the default `KieBase`. Additionally, from this moment on, all the new `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s created from that `KieContainer` will use the new project version. Please notice however any existing `KieBase` which was obtained via `newKieBase()` before the KieScanner upgrade, and any of its related `KieSession`s, will not get automatically upgraded; this is because `KieBase`s obtained via `newKieBase()` are not under the direct control of the `KieContainer`.

The `KieScanner` will only pickup changes to deployed jars if it is using a SNAPSHOT, version range, the LATEST, or the RELEASE setting. Fixed versions will not automatically update at runtime.

In case you don’t want to install a maven repository, it is also possible to have a `KieScanner` that works by simply fetching update from a folder of a plain file system. You can create such a `KieScanner` as simply as

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieScanner kScanner = kieServices.newKieScanner( kContainer, "/myrepo/kjars" );

where "/myrepo/kjars" will be the folder where the `KieScanner` will look for kjar updates. The jar files placed in this folder have to follow the maven convention and then have to be a name in the form {artifactId}-{versionId}.jar

##### 2.2.3.4. Maven Versions and Dependencies

Maven supports a number of mechanisms to manage versioning and dependencies within applications. Modules can be published with specific version numbers, or they can use the SNAPSHOT suffix. Dependencies can specify version ranges to consume, or take avantage of SNAPSHOT mechanism.

StackOverflow provides a very good description for this, which is reproduced below.

http://stackoverflow.com/questions/30571/how-do-i-tell-maven-to-use-the-latest-version-of-a-dependency

| Since Maven 3.x metaversions RELEASE and LATEST are no longer supported for the sake of reproducible builds.

See the POM Syntax section of the Maven book for more details.

http://books.sonatype.com/mvnref-book/reference/pom-relationships-sect-pom-syntax.html

http://books.sonatype.com/mvnref-book/reference/pom-relationships-sect-project-dependencies.html

Here’s an example illustrating the various options. In the Maven repository, com.foo:my-foo has the following metadata:

    <metadata>
      <groupId>com.foo</groupId>
      <artifactId>my-foo</artifactId>
      <version>2.0.0</version>
      <versioning>
        <release>1.1.1</release>
        <versions>
          <version>1.0</version>
          <version>1.0.1</version>
          <version>1.1</version>
          <version>1.1.1</version>
          <version>2.0.0</version>
        </versions>
        <lastUpdated>20090722140000</lastUpdated>
      </versioning>
    </metadata>

If a dependency on that artifact is required, you have the following options (other version ranges can be specified of course, just showing the relevant ones here): Declare an exact version (will always resolve to 1.0.1):

    <version>[1.0.1]</version>

    Declare an explicit version (will always resolve to 1.0.1 unless a collision occurs, when Maven will select a matching version):

    <version>1.0.1</version>

    Declare a version range for all 1.x (will currently resolve to 1.1.1):

    <version>[1.0.0,2.0.0)</version>

    Declare an open-ended version range (will resolve to 2.0.0):

    <version>[1.0.0,)</version>

    Declare the version as LATEST (will resolve to 2.0.0):

    <version>LATEST</version>

    Declare the version as RELEASE (will resolve to 1.1.1):

    <version>RELEASE</version>

Note that by default your own deployments will update the "latest" entry in the Maven metadata, but to update the "release" entry, you need to activate the "release-profile" from the Maven super POM. You can do this with either "-Prelease-profile" or "-DperformRelease=true"

##### 2.2.3.5. Settings.xml and Remote Repository Setup

The maven settings.xml is used to configure Maven execution. Detailed instructions can be found at the Maven website:

http://maven.apache.org/settings.html

The settings.xml file can be located in 3 locations, the actual settings used is a merge of those 3 locations.

- The Maven install: `$M2_HOME/conf/settings.xml`

- A user’s install: `${user.home}/.m2/settings.xml`

- Folder location specified by the system property `kie.maven.settings.custom`

The settings.xml is used to specify the location of remote repositories. It is important that you activate the profile that specifies the remote repository, typically this can be done using "activeByDefault":

    <profiles>
      <profile>
        <id>profile-1</id>
        <activation>
          <activeByDefault>true</activeByDefault>
        </activation>
        ...
      </profile>
    </profiles>

Maven provides detailed documentation on using multiple remote repositories:

http://maven.apache.org/guides/mini/guide-multiple-repositories.html

#### 2.2.4. Running

##### 2.2.4.1. KieBase

The `KieBase` is a repository of all the application’s knowledge definitions. It will contain rules, processes, functions, and type models. The `KieBase` itself does not contain data; instead, sessions are created from the `KieBase` into which data can be inserted and from which process instances may be started. The `KieBase` can be obtained from the `KieContainer` containing the `KieModule` where the `KieBase` has been defined.

Example 16. Getting a KieBase from a KieContainer

    KieBase kBase = kContainer.getKieBase();

##### 2.2.4.2. KieSession

The `KieSession` stores and executes on the runtime data. It is created from the `KieBase`.

Figure 19. KieSession
Example 17. Create a KieSession from a KieBase

    KieSession ksession = kbase.newKieSession();

##### 2.2.4.3. KieRuntime

###### KieRuntime

The `KieRuntime` provides methods that are applicable to both rules and processes, such as setting globals and registering channels. ("Exit point" is an obsolete synonym for "channel".)

Figure 20. KieRuntime
Globals

Globals are named objects that are made visible to the Drools engine, but in a way that is fundamentally different from the one for facts: changes in the object backing a global do not trigger reevaluation of rules. Still, globals are useful for providing static information, as an object offering services that are used in the RHS of a rule, or as a means to return objects from the Drools engine. When you use a global on the LHS of a rule, make sure it is immutable, or, at least, don’t expect changes to have any effect on the behavior of your rules.

A global must be declared in a rules file, and then it needs to be backed up with a Java object.

    global java.util.List list

With the KIE base now aware of the global identifier and its type, it is now possible to call `ksession.setGlobal()` with the global’s name and an object, for any session, to associate the object with the global. Failure to declare the global type and identifier in DRL code will result in an exception being thrown from this call.

    List list = new ArrayList();
    ksession.setGlobal("list", list);

Make sure to set any global before it is used in the evaluation of a rule. Failure to do so results in a `NullPointerException`.

##### 2.2.4.4. Event Model

The event package provides means to be notified of Drools engine events, including rules firing, objects being asserted, etc. This allows separation of logging and auditing activities from the main part of your application (and the rules).

The `KieRuntimeEventManager` interface is implemented by the `KieRuntime` which provides two interfaces, `RuleRuntimeEventManager` and `ProcessEventManager`. We will only cover the `RuleRuntimeEventManager` here.

Figure 21. KieRuntimeEventManager

The `RuleRuntimeEventManager` allows for listeners to be added and removed, so that events for the working memory and the agenda can be listened to.

Figure 22. RuleRuntimeEventManager

The following code snippet shows how a simple agenda listener is declared and attached to a session. It will print matches after they have fired.

Example 18. Adding an AgendaEventListener

    ksession.addEventListener( new DefaultAgendaEventListener() {
        public void afterMatchFired(AfterMatchFiredEvent event) {
            super.afterMatchFired( event );
            System.out.println( event );
        }
    });

Drools also provides `DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener` and `DebugAgendaEventListener` which implement each method with a debug print statement. To print all Working Memory events, you add a listener like this:

Example 19. Adding a DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener

    ksession.addEventListener( new DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener() );

All emitted events implement the `KieRuntimeEvent` interface which can be used to retrieve the actual `KnowlegeRuntime` the event originated from.

Figure 23. KieRuntimeEvent

The events currently supported are:

- MatchCreatedEvent

- MatchCancelledEvent

- BeforeMatchFiredEvent

- AfterMatchFiredEvent

- AgendaGroupPushedEvent

- AgendaGroupPoppedEvent

- ObjectInsertEvent

- ObjectDeletedEvent

- ObjectUpdatedEvent

- ProcessCompletedEvent

- ProcessNodeLeftEvent

- ProcessNodeTriggeredEvent

- ProcessStartEvent

##### 2.2.4.5. KieRuntimeLogger

The KieRuntimeLogger uses the comprehensive event system in Drools to create an audit log that can be used to log the execution of an application for later inspection, using tools such as the Eclipse audit viewer.

Figure 24. KieLoggers
Example 20. FileLogger

    KieRuntimeLogger logger =
      KieServices.Factory.get().getLoggers().newFileLogger(ksession, "logdir/mylogfile");
    ...
    logger.close();

##### 2.2.4.6. Commands and the CommandExecutor

KIE has the concept of stateful or stateless sessions. Stateful sessions have already been covered, which use the standard KieRuntime, and can be worked with iteratively over time. Stateless is a one-off execution of a KieRuntime with a provided data set. It may return some results, with the session being disposed at the end, prohibiting further iterative interactions. You can think of stateless as treating an engine like a function call with optional return results.

The foundation for this is the `CommandExecutor` interface, which both the stateful and stateless interfaces extend. This returns an `ExecutionResults`:

Figure 25. CommandExecutor
Figure 26. ExecutionResults

The `CommandExecutor` allows for commands to be executed on those sessions, the only difference being that the StatelessKieSession executes `fireAllRules()` at the end before disposing the session. The commands can be created using the `CommandExecutor` .The Javadocs provide the full list of the allowed comands using the `CommandExecutor`.

setGlobal and getGlobal are two commands relevant to both Drools and jBPM.

Set Global calls setGlobal underneath. The optional boolean indicates whether the command should return the global’s value as part of the `ExecutionResults`. If true it uses the same name as the global name. A String can be used instead of the boolean, if an alternative name is desired.

Example 21. Set Global Command

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
    ExecutionResults bresults =
        ksession.execute( CommandFactory.newSetGlobal( "stilton", new Cheese( "stilton" ), true);
    Cheese stilton = bresults.getValue( "stilton" );

Allows an existing global to be returned. The second optional String argument allows for an alternative return name.

Example 22. Get Global Command

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
    ExecutionResults bresults =
        ksession.execute( CommandFactory.getGlobal( "stilton" );
    Cheese stilton = bresults.getValue( "stilton" );

All the above examples execute single commands. The `BatchExecution` represents a composite command, created from a list of commands. It will iterate over the list and execute each command in turn. This means you can insert some objects, start a process, call fireAllRules and execute a query, all in a single `execute(…​)` call, which is quite powerful.

The StatelessKieSession will execute `fireAllRules()` automatically at the end. However the keen-eyed reader probably has already noticed the `FireAllRules` command and wondered how that works with a StatelessKieSession. The `FireAllRules` command is allowed, and using it will disable the automatic execution at the end; think of using it as a sort of manual override function.

Any command, in the batch, that has an out identifier set will add its results to the returned `ExecutionResults` instance. Let’s look at a simple example to see how this works. The example presented includes command from the Drools and jBPM, for the sake of illustration. They are covered in more detail in the Drool and jBPM specific sections.

Example 23. BatchExecution Command

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();

    List cmds = new ArrayList();
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newInsertObject( new Cheese( "stilton", 1), "stilton") );
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newStartProcess( "process cheeses" ) );
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newQuery( "cheeses" ) );
    ExecutionResults bresults = ksession.execute( CommandFactory.newBatchExecution( cmds ) );
    Cheese stilton = ( Cheese ) bresults.getValue( "stilton" );
    QueryResults qresults = ( QueryResults ) bresults.getValue( "cheeses" );

In the above example multiple commands are executed, two of which populate the `ExecutionResults`. The query command defaults to use the same identifier as the query name, but it can also be mapped to a different identifier.

All commands support XML and jSON marshalling using XStream, as well as JAXB marshalling. This is covered in Drools commands.

##### 2.2.4.7. StatelessKieSession

The `StatelessKieSession` wraps the `KieSession`, instead of extending it. Its main focus is on the decision service type scenarios. It avoids the need to call `dispose()`. Stateless sessions do not support iterative insertions and the method call `fireAllRules()` from Java code; the act of calling `execute()` is a single-shot method that will internally instantiate a `KieSession`, add all the user data and execute user commands, call `fireAllRules()`, and then call `dispose()`. While the main way to work with this class is via the `BatchExecution` (a subinterface of `Command`) as supported by the `CommandExecutor` interface, two convenience methods are provided for when simple object insertion is all that’s required. The `CommandExecutor` and `BatchExecution` are talked about in detail in their own section.

Figure 27. StatelessKieSession

Our simple example shows a stateless session executing a given collection of Java objects using the convenience API. It will iterate the collection, inserting each element in turn.

Example 24. Simple StatelessKieSession execution with a Collection

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
    ksession.execute( collection );

If this was done as a single Command it would be as follows:

Example 25. Simple StatelessKieSession execution with InsertElements Command

    ksession.execute( CommandFactory.newInsertElements( collection ) );

If you wanted to insert the collection itself, and the collection’s individual elements, then `CommandFactory.newInsert(collection)` would do the job.

Methods of the `CommandFactory` create the supported commands, all of which can be marshalled using XStream and the `BatchExecutionHelper`. `BatchExecutionHelper` provides details on the XML format as well as how to use Drools Pipeline to automate the marshalling of `BatchExecution` and `ExecutionResults`.

`StatelessKieSession` supports globals, scoped in a number of ways. We cover the non-command way first, as commands are scoped to a specific execution call. Globals can be resolved in three ways.

- The StatelessKieSession method `getGlobals()` returns a Globals instance which provides access to the session’s globals. These are used for all execution calls. Exercise caution regarding mutable globals because execution calls can be executing simultaneously in different threads.

  Example 26. Session scoped global

      StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
      // Set a global hbnSession, that can be used for DB interactions in the rules.
      ksession.setGlobal( "hbnSession", hibernateSession );
      // Execute while being able to resolve the "hbnSession" identifier.
      ksession.execute( collection );

- Using a delegate is another way of global resolution. Assigning a value to a global (with `setGlobal(String, Object)`) results in the value being stored in an internal collection mapping identifiers to values. Identifiers in this internal collection will have priority over any supplied delegate. Only if an identifier cannot be found in this internal collection, the delegate global (if any) will be used.

- The third way of resolving globals is to have execution scoped globals. Here, a `Command` to set a global is passed to the `CommandExecutor`.

The `CommandExecutor` interface also offers the ability to export data via "out" parameters. Inserted facts, globals and query results can all be returned.

Example 27. Out identifiers

    // Set up a list of commands
    List cmds = new ArrayList();
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newSetGlobal( "list1", new ArrayList(), true ) );
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newInsert( new Person( "jon", 102 ), "person" ) );
    cmds.add( CommandFactory.newQuery( "Get People", "getPeople" ) );

    // Execute the list
    ExecutionResults results =
      ksession.execute( CommandFactory.newBatchExecution( cmds ) );

    // Retrieve the ArrayList
    results.getValue( "list1" );
    // Retrieve the inserted Person fact
    results.getValue( "person" );
    // Retrieve the query as a QueryResults instance.
    results.getValue( "Get People" );

##### 2.2.4.8. Marshalling

The `KieMarshallers` are used to marshal and unmarshal KieSessions.

Figure 28. KieMarshallers

An instance of the `KieMarshallers` can be retrieved from the `KieServices`. A simple example is shown below:

Example 28. Simple Marshaller Example

    // ksession is the KieSession
    // kbase is the KieBase
    ByteArrayOutputStream baos = new ByteArrayOutputStream();
    Marshaller marshaller = KieServices.Factory.get().getMarshallers().newMarshaller( kbase );
    marshaller.marshall( baos, ksession );
    baos.close();

However, with marshalling, you will need more flexibility when dealing with referenced user data. To achieve this use the `ObjectMarshallingStrategy` interface. Two implementations are provided, but users can implement their own. The two supplied strategies are `IdentityMarshallingStrategy` and `SerializeMarshallingStrategy`. `SerializeMarshallingStrategy` is the default, as shown in the example above, and it just calls the `Serializable` or `Externalizable` methods on a user instance. `IdentityMarshallingStrategy` creates an integer id for each user object and stores them in a Map, while the id is written to the stream. When unmarshalling it accesses the `IdentityMarshallingStrategy` map to retrieve the instance. This means that if you use the `IdentityMarshallingStrategy`, it is stateful for the life of the Marshaller instance and will create ids and keep references to all objects that it attempts to marshal. Below is the code to use an Identity Marshalling Strategy.

Example 29. IdentityMarshallingStrategy

    ByteArrayOutputStream baos = new ByteArrayOutputStream();
    KieMarshallers kMarshallers = KieServices.Factory.get().getMarshallers()
    ObjectMarshallingStrategy oms = kMarshallers.newIdentityMarshallingStrategy()
    Marshaller marshaller =
            kMarshallers.newMarshaller( kbase, new ObjectMarshallingStrategy[]{ oms } );
    marshaller.marshall( baos, ksession );
    baos.close();

Im most cases, a single strategy is insufficient. For added flexibility, the `ObjectMarshallingStrategyAcceptor` interface can be used. This Marshaller has a chain of strategies, and while reading or writing a user object it iterates the strategies asking if they accept responsibility for marshalling the user object. One of the provided implementations is `ClassFilterAcceptor`. This allows strings and wild cards to be used to match class names. The default is ".", so in the above example the Identity Marshalling Strategy is used which has a default "." acceptor.

Assuming that we want to serialize all classes except for one given package, where we will use identity lookup, we could do the following:

Example 30. IdentityMarshallingStrategy with Acceptor

    ByteArrayOutputStream baos = new ByteArrayOutputStream();
    KieMarshallers kMarshallers = KieServices.Factory.get().getMarshallers()
    ObjectMarshallingStrategyAcceptor identityAcceptor =
            kMarshallers.newClassFilterAcceptor( new String[] { "org.domain.pkg1.*" } );
    ObjectMarshallingStrategy identityStrategy =
            kMarshallers.newIdentityMarshallingStrategy( identityAcceptor );
    ObjectMarshallingStrategy sms = kMarshallers.newSerializeMarshallingStrategy();
    Marshaller marshaller =
            kMarshallers.newMarshaller( kbase,
                                        new ObjectMarshallingStrategy[]{ identityStrategy, sms } );
    marshaller.marshall( baos, ksession );
    baos.close();

Note that the acceptance checking order is in the natural order of the supplied elements.

##### 2.2.4.9. Persistence and Transactions

Longterm out of the box persistence with Java Persistence API (JPA) is possible with Drools. It is necessary to have some implementation of the Java Transaction API (JTA) installed. For development purposes the Bitronix Transaction Manager is suggested, as it’s simple to set up and works embedded, but for production use JBoss Transactions is recommended.

Example 31. Simple example using transactions

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    Environment env = kieServices.newEnvironment();
    env.set( EnvironmentName.ENTITY_MANAGER_FACTORY,
             Persistence.createEntityManagerFactory( "emf-name" ) );
    env.set( EnvironmentName.TRANSACTION_MANAGER,
             TransactionManagerServices.getTransactionManager() );

    // KieSessionConfiguration may be null, and a default will be used
    KieSession ksession =
            kieServices.getStoreServices().newKieSession( kbase, null, env );
    int sessionId = ksession.getId();

    UserTransaction ut =
      (UserTransaction) new InitialContext().lookup( "java:comp/UserTransaction" );
    ut.begin();
    ksession.insert( data1 );
    ksession.insert( data2 );
    ksession.startProcess( "process1" );
    ut.commit();

To use a JPA, the Environment must be set with both the `EntityManagerFactory` and the `TransactionManager`. If rollback occurs the ksession state is also rolled back, hence it is possible to continue to use it after a rollback. To load a previously persisted KieSession you’ll need the id, as shown below:

Example 32. Loading a KieSession

    KieSession ksession =
            kieServices.getStoreServices().loadKieSession( sessionId, kbase, null, env );

To enable persistence several classes must be added to your persistence.xml, as in the example below:

Example 33. Configuring JPA

    <persistence-unit name="org.drools.persistence.jpa" transaction-type="JTA">
       <provider>org.hibernate.ejb.HibernatePersistence</provider>
       <jta-data-source>jdbc/BitronixJTADataSource</jta-data-source>
       <class>org.drools.persistence.info.SessionInfo</class>
       <class>org.drools.persistence.info.WorkItemInfo</class>
       <properties>
             <property name="hibernate.dialect" value="org.hibernate.dialect.H2Dialect"/>
             <property name="hibernate.max_fetch_depth" value="3"/>
             <property name="hibernate.hbm2ddl.auto" value="update" />
             <property name="hibernate.show_sql" value="true" />
             <property name="hibernate.transaction.manager_lookup_class"
                          value="org.hibernate.transaction.BTMTransactionManagerLookup" />
       </properties>
    </persistence-unit>

The jdbc JTA data source would have to be configured first. Bitronix provides a number of ways of doing this, and its documentation should be consulted for details. For a quick start, here is the programmatic approach:

Example 34. Configuring JTA DataSource

    PoolingDataSource ds = new PoolingDataSource();
    ds.setUniqueName( "jdbc/BitronixJTADataSource" );
    ds.setClassName( "org.h2.jdbcx.JdbcDataSource" );
    ds.setMaxPoolSize( 3 );
    ds.setAllowLocalTransactions( true );
    ds.getDriverProperties().put( "user", "sa" );
    ds.getDriverProperties().put( "password", "sasa" );
    ds.getDriverProperties().put( "URL", "jdbc:h2:mem:mydb" );
    ds.init();

Bitronix also provides a simple embedded JNDI service, ideal for testing. To use it, add a jndi.properties file to your META-INF folder and add the following line to it:

Example 35. JNDI properties

    java.naming.factory.initial=bitronix.tm.jndi.BitronixInitialContextFactory

#### 2.2.5. Installation and Deployment Cheat Sheets

Figure 29. Installation Overview
Figure 30. Deployment Overview

#### 2.2.6. Build, Deploy and Utilize Examples

The best way to learn the new build system is by example. The source project "drools-examples-api" contains a number of examples, and can be found at GitHub:

https://github.com/kiegroup/drools/tree/6.0.x/drools-examples-api

Each example is described below, the order starts with the simplest (most of the options are defaulted) and working its way up to more complex use cases.

The Deploy use cases shown below all involve `mvn install`. Remote deployment of JARs in Maven is well covered in Maven literature. Utilize refers to the initial act of loading the resources and providing access to the KIE runtimes. Where as Run refers to the act of interacting with those runtimes.

##### 2.2.6.1. Default KieSession

- Project: default-kesession.

- Summary: Empty kmodule.xml KieModule on the classpath that includes all resources in a single default KieBase. The example shows the retrieval of the default KieSession from the classpath.

An empty kmodule.xml will produce a single KieBase that includes all files found under resources path, be it DRL, BPMN2, XLS etc. That single KieBase is the default and also includes a single default KieSession. Default means they can be created without knowing their names.

Example 36. Author - kmodule.xml

    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule"> </kmodule>

Example 37. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

ks.getKieClasspathContainer() returns the KieContainer that contains the KieBases deployed onto the environment classpath. kContainer.newKieSession() creates the default KieSession. Notice that you no longer need to look up the KieBase, in order to create the KieSession. The KieSession knows which KieBase it’s associated with, and use that, which in this case is the default KieBase.

Example 38. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession();
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);
    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.2. Named KieSession

- Project: named-kiesession.

- Summary: kmodule.xml that has one named KieBase and one named KieSession. The examples shows the retrieval of the named KieSession from the classpath.

kmodule.xml will produce a single named KieBase, 'kbase1' that includes all files found under resources path, be it DRL, BPMN2, XLS etc. KieSession 'ksession1' is associated with that KieBase and can be created by name.

Example 39. Author - kmodule.xml

    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
        <kbase name="kbase1">
            <ksession name="ksession1"/>
        </kbase>
    </kmodule>

Example 40. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

ks.getKieClasspathContainer() returns the KieContainer that contains the KieBases deployed onto the environment classpath. This time the KieSession uses the name 'ksession1'. You do not need to lookup the KieBase first, as it knows which KieBase 'ksession1' is assocaited with.

Example 41. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);
    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.3. KieBase Inheritence

- Project: kiebase-inclusion.

- Summary: 'kmodule.xml' demonstrates that one KieBase can include the resources from another KieBase, from another KieModule. In this case it inherits the named KieBase from the 'name-kiesession' example. The included KieBase can be from the current KieModule or any other KieModule that is in the pom.xml dependency list.

kmodule.xml will produce a single named KieBase, 'kbase2' that includes all files found under resources path, be it DRL, BPMN2, XLS etc. Further it will include all the resources found from the KieBase 'kbase1', due to the use of the 'includes' attribute. KieSession 'ksession2' is associated with that KieBase and can be created by name.

Example 42. Author - kmodule.xml

    <kbase name="kbase2" includes="kbase1">
        <ksession name="ksession2"/>
    </kbase>

This example requires that the previous example, 'named-kiesession', is built and installed to the local Maven repository first. Once installed it can be included as a dependency, using the standard Maven <dependencies> element.

Example 43. Author - pom.xml

    <project xmlns="http://maven.apache.org/POM/4.0.0"
             xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
             xsi:schemaLocation="http://maven.apache.org/POM/4.0.0 http://maven.apache.org/xsd/maven-4.0.0.xsd">
      <modelVersion>4.0.0</modelVersion>
      <parent>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-examples-api</artifactId>
        <version>6.0.0/version>
      </parent>

      <artifactId>kiebase-inclusion</artifactId>
      <name>Drools API examples - KieBase Inclusion</name>

      <dependencies>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
          <artifactId>drools-compiler</artifactId>
        </dependency>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
          <artifactId>named-kiesession</artifactId>
          <version>6.0.0</version>
        </dependency>
      </dependencies>

    </project>

Once 'named-kiesession' is built and installed this example can be built and installed as normal. Again the act of installing, will force the unit tests to run, demonstrating the use case.

Example 44. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

ks.getKieClasspathContainer() returns the KieContainer that contains the KieBases deployed onto the environment classpath. This time the KieSession uses the name 'ksession2'. You do not need to lookup the KieBase first, as it knows which KieBase 'ksession1' is assocaited with. Notice two rules fire this time, showing that KieBase 'kbase2' has included the resources from the dependency KieBase 'kbase1'.

Example 45. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();
    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession2");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Open the pod bay doors, HAL."));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.4. Multiple KieBases

- Project: 'multiple-kbases.

- Summary: Demonstrates that the 'kmodule.xml' can contain any number of KieBase or KieSession declarations. Introduces the 'packages' attribute to select the folders for the resources to be included in the KieBase.

kmodule.xml produces 6 different named KieBases. 'kbase1' includes all resources from the KieModule. The other KieBases include resources from other selected folders, via the 'packages' attribute. Note the use of wildcard '*', to select this package and all packages below it.

Example 46. Author - kmodule.xml

    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">

      <kbase name="kbase1">
        <ksession name="ksession1"/>
      </kbase>

      <kbase name="kbase2" packages="org.some.pkg">
        <ksession name="ksession2"/>
      </kbase>

      <kbase name="kbase3" includes="kbase2" packages="org.some.pkg2">
        <ksession name="ksession3"/>
      </kbase>

      <kbase name="kbase4" packages="org.some.pkg, org.other.pkg">
        <ksession name="ksession4"/>
      </kbase>

      <kbase name="kbase5" packages="org.*">
        <ksession name="ksession5"/>
      </kbase>

      <kbase name="kbase6" packages="org.some.*">
        <ksession name="ksession6"/>
      </kbase>
    </kmodule>

Example 47. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

Only part of the example is included below, as there is a test method per KieSession, but each one is a repetition of the other, with different list expectations.

Example 48. Utilize and Run - Java

    @Test
    public void testSimpleKieBase() {
        List<Integer> list = useKieSession("ksession1");
        // no packages imported means import everything
        assertEquals(4, list.size());
        assertTrue( list.containsAll( asList(0, 1, 2, 3) ) );
    }

    //.. other tests for ksession2 to ksession6 here

    private List<Integer> useKieSession(String name) {
        KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
        KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();
        KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession(name);

        List<Integer> list = new ArrayList<Integer>();
        kSession.setGlobal("list", list);
        kSession.insert(1);
        kSession.fireAllRules();

        return list;
    }

##### 2.2.6.5. KieContainer from KieRepository

- Project: kcontainer-from-repository

- Summary: The project does not contain a kmodule.xml, nor does the pom.xml have any dependencies for other KieModules. Instead the Java code demonstrates the loading of a dynamic KieModule from a Maven repository.

The pom.xml must include kie-ci as a depdency, to ensure Maven is available at runtime. As this uses Maven under the hood you can also use the standard Maven settings.xml file.

Example 49. Author - pom.xml

    <project xmlns="http://maven.apache.org/POM/4.0.0"
             xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
             xsi:schemaLocation="http://maven.apache.org/POM/4.0.0 http://maven.apache.org/xsd/maven-4.0.0.xsd">
      <modelVersion>4.0.0</modelVersion>
      <parent>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-examples-api</artifactId>
        <version>6.0.0</version>
      </parent>

      <artifactId>kiecontainer-from-kierepo</artifactId>
      <name>Drools API examples - KieContainer from KieRepo</name>

      <dependencies>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
          <artifactId>kie-ci</artifactId>
        </dependency>
      </dependencies>

    </project>

Example 50. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

In the previous examples the classpath KieContainer used. This example creates a dynamic KieContainer as specified by the ReleaseId. The ReleaseId uses Maven conventions for group id, artifact id and version. It also obeys LATEST and SNAPSHOT for versions.

Example 51. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();

    // Install example1 in the local Maven repo before to do this
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(ks.newReleaseId("org.drools", "named-kiesession", "6.0.0-SNAPSHOT"));

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    Object msg1 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?");
    kSession.insert(msg1);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.6. Default KieSession from File

- Project: default-kiesession-from-file

- Summary: Dynamic KieModules can also be loaded from any Resource location. The loaded KieModule provides default KieBase and KieSession definitions.

No kmodue.xml file exists. The project 'default-kiesession' must be built first, so that the resulting JAR, in the target folder, can be referenced as a File.

Example 52. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

Any KieModule can be loaded from a Resource location and added to the KieRepository. Once deployed in the KieRepository it can be resolved via its ReleaseId. Note neither Maven or kie-ci are needed here. It will not set up a transitive dependency parent classloader.

Example 53. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieRepository kr = ks.getRepository();

    KieModule kModule = kr.addKieModule(ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("default-kiesession")));

    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(kModule.getReleaseId());

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession();
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    Object msg1 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?");
    kSession.insert(msg1);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.7. Named KieSession from File

- Project: named-kiesession-from-file

- Summary: Dynamic KieModules can also be loaded from any Resource location. The loaded KieModule provides named KieBase and KieSession definitions.

No kmodue.xml file exists. The project 'named-kiesession' must be built first, so that the resulting JAR, in the target folder, can be referenced as a File.

Example 54. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

Any KieModule can be loaded from a Resource location and added to the KieRepository. Once in the KieRepository it can be resolved via its ReleaseId. Note neither Maven or kie-ci are needed here. It will not setup a transitive dependency parent classloader.

Example 55. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieRepository kr = ks.getRepository();

    KieModule kModule = kr.addKieModule(ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("named-kiesession")));

    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(kModule.getReleaseId());

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    Object msg1 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?");
    kSession.insert(msg1);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.8. KieModule with Dependent KieModule

- Project: kie-module-form-multiple-files

- Summary: Programmatically provide the list of dependant KieModules, without using Maven to resolve anything.

No kmodue.xml file exists. The projects 'named-kiesession' and 'kiebase-include' must be built first, so that the resulting JARs, in the target folders, can be referenced as Files.

Example 56. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

Creates two resources. One is for the main KieModule 'exRes1' the other is for the dependency 'exRes2'. Even though kie-ci is not present and thus Maven is not available to resolve the dependencies, this shows how you can manually specify the dependent KieModules, for the vararg.

Example 57. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieRepository kr = ks.getRepository();

    Resource ex1Res = ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("kiebase-inclusion"));
    Resource ex2Res = ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("named-kiesession"));

    KieModule kModule = kr.addKieModule(ex1Res, ex2Res);
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(kModule.getReleaseId());

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession2");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    Object msg1 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?");
    kSession.insert(msg1);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

    Object msg2 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Open the pod bay doors, HAL.");
    kSession.insert(msg2);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.9. Programmaticaly build a Simple KieModule with Defaults

- Project: kiemoduelmodel-example

- Summary: Programmaticaly buid a KieModule from just a single file. The POM and models are all defaulted. This is the quickest out of the box approach, but should not be added to a Maven repository.

Example 58. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

This programmatically builds a KieModule. It populates the model that represents the ReleaseId and kmodule.xml, and it adds the relevant resources. A pom.xml is generated from the ReleaseId.

Example 59. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieRepository kr = ks.getRepository();
    KieFileSystem kfs = ks.newKieFileSystem();

    kfs.write("src/main/resources/org/kie/example5/HAL5.drl", getRule());

    KieBuilder kb = ks.newKieBuilder(kfs);

    kb.buildAll(); // kieModule is automatically deployed to KieRepository if successfully built.
    if (kb.getResults().hasMessages(Level.ERROR)) {
        throw new RuntimeException("Build Errors:\n" + kb.getResults().toString());
    }

    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(kr.getDefaultReleaseId());

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession();
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

##### 2.2.6.10. Programmaticaly build a KieModule using Meta Models

- Project: kiemoduelmodel-example

- Summary: Programmaticaly build a KieModule, by creating its kmodule.xml meta model resources.

Example 60. Build and Install - Maven

    mvn install

This programmatically builds a KieModule. It populates the model that represents the ReleaseId and kmodule.xml, as well as add the relevant resources. A pom.xml is generated from the ReleaseId.

Example 61. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieFileSystem kfs = ks.newKieFileSystem();

    Resource ex1Res = ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("named-kiesession"));
    Resource ex2Res = ks.getResources().newFileSystemResource(getFile("kiebase-inclusion"));

    ReleaseId rid = ks.newReleaseId("org.drools", "kiemodulemodel-example", "6.0.0-SNAPSHOT");
    kfs.generateAndWritePomXML(rid);

    KieModuleModel kModuleModel = ks.newKieModuleModel();
    kModuleModel.newKieBaseModel("kiemodulemodel")
                .addInclude("kiebase1")
                .addInclude("kiebase2")
                .newKieSessionModel("ksession6");

    kfs.writeKModuleXML(kModuleModel.toXML());
    kfs.write("src/main/resources/kiemodulemodel/HAL6.drl", getRule());

    KieBuilder kb = ks.newKieBuilder(kfs);
    kb.setDependencies(ex1Res, ex2Res);
    kb.buildAll(); // kieModule is automatically deployed to KieRepository if successfully built.
    if (kb.getResults().hasMessages(Level.ERROR)) {
        throw new RuntimeException("Build Errors:\n" + kb.getResults().toString());
    }

    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(rid);

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession6");
    kSession.setGlobal("out", out);

    Object msg1 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?");
    kSession.insert(msg1);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

    Object msg2 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "Open the pod bay doors, HAL.");
    kSession.insert(msg2);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

    Object msg3 = createMessage(kContainer, "Dave", "What's the problem?");
    kSession.insert(msg3);
    kSession.fireAllRules();

#### 2.2.7. Using a KIE scanner to monitor and update KIE containers

The KIE scanner in Drools monitors your Maven repository for new `SNAPSHOT` versions of your Drools project and then deploys the latest version of the project to a specified KIE container. You can use a KIE scanner in a development environment to maintain your Drools project deployments more efficiently as new versions become available.

| For production environments, do not use a KIE scanner or `SNAPSHOT` project versions to avoid accidental or unexpected project updates. The KIE scanner is intended for development environments that use `SNAPSHOT` project versions.

Prerequisites

- The `kie-ci.jar` file is available on the class path of your Drools project.

Procedure

1. In the relevant `.java` class in your project, register and start the KIE scanner as shown in the following example code:

   Registering and starting a KIE scanner for a KIE container

       import org.kie.api.KieServices;
       import org.kie.api.builder.ReleaseId;
       import org.kie.api.runtime.KieContainer;
       import org.kie.api.builder.KieScanner;

       ...

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
       ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices
         .newReleaseId("com.sample", "my-app", "1.0-SNAPSHOT");
       KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer(releaseId);
       KieScanner kScanner = kieServices.newKieScanner(kContainer);

       // Start KIE scanner for polling the Maven repository every 10 seconds (10000 ms)
       kScanner.start(10000L);

   In this example, the KIE scanner is configured to run with a fixed time interval. The minimum KIE scanner polling interval is 1 millisecond (ms) and the maximum polling interval is the maximum value of the data type `long`. A polling interval of 0 or less results in a `java.lang.IllegalArgumentException: pollingInterval must be positive` error. You can also configure the KIE scanner to run on demand by invoking the `scanNow()` method.

   The project group ID, artifact ID, and version (GAV) settings in the example are defined as `com.sample:my-app:1.0-SNAPSHOT`. The project version must contain the `-SNAPSHOT` suffix to enable the KIE scanner to retrieve the latest build of the specified artifact version. If you change the snapshot project version number, such as increasing to `1.0.1-SNAPSHOT`, then you must also update the version in the GAV definition in your KIE scanner configuration. The KIE scanner does not retrieve updates for projects with static versions, such as `com.sample:my-app:1.0`.

2. In the `settings.xml` file of your Maven repository, set the `updatePolicy` configuration to `always` to enable the KIE scanner to function properly:

       <profile>
         <id>guvnor-m2-repo</id>
         <repositories>
           <repository>
             <id>guvnor-m2-repo</id>
             <name>BA Repository</name>
             <url>http://localhost:8080/business-central/maven2/</url>
             <layout>default</layout>
             <releases>
               <enabled>true</enabled>
               <updatePolicy>always</updatePolicy>
             </releases>
             <snapshots>
               <enabled>true</enabled>
               <updatePolicy>always</updatePolicy>
             </snapshots>
           </repository>
         </repositories>
       </profile>

   After the KIE scanner starts polling, if the KIE scanner detects an updated version of the `SNAPSHOT` project in the specified KIE container, the KIE scanner automatically downloads the new project version and triggers an incremental build of the new project. From that moment, all of the new `KieBase` and `KieSession` objects that were created from the KIE container use the new project version.

   For information about starting or stopping a KIE scanner using KIE Server APIs, see KIE Server and KIE container commands in Drools.

### 2.3. Security

#### 2.3.1. Security Manager

The KIE engine is a platform for the modelling and execution of business behavior, using a multitude of declarative abstractions and metaphores, like rules, processes, decision tables and etc.

Many times, the authoring of these metaphores is done by third party groups, be it a different group inside the same company, a group from a partner company, or even anonymous third parties on the internet.

Rules and Processes are designed to execute arbitrary code in order to do their job, but in such cases it might be necessary to constrain what they can do. For instance, it is unlikely a rule should be allowed to create a classloader (what could open the system to an attack) and certainly it should not be allowed to make a call to `System.exit()`.

The Java Platform provides a very comprehensive and well defined security framework that allows users to define policies for what a system can do. The KIE platform leverages that framework and allow application developers to define a specific policy to be applied to any execution of user provided code, be it in rules, processes, work item handlers and etc.

##### 2.3.1.1. How to define a KIE Policy

Rules and processes can run with very restrict permissions, but the engine itself needs to perform many complex operations in order to work. Examples are: it needs to create classloaders, read system properties, access the file system, etc.

Once a security manager is installed, though, it will apply restrictions to all the code executing in the JVM according to the defined policy. For that reason, KIE allows the user to define two different policy files: one for the engine itself and one for the assets deployed into and executed by the engine.

One easy way to setup the enviroment is to give the engine itself a very permissive policy, while providing a constrained policy for rules and processes.

Policy files follow the standard policy file syntax as described in the Java documentation. For more details, see:

https://docs.oracle.com/javase/6/docs/technotes/guides/security/PolicyFiles.html#FileSyntax

A permissive policy file for the engine can look like the following:

Example 62. A sample engine.policy file

    grant {
        permission java.security.AllPermission;
    }

An example security policy for rules could be:

Example 63. A sample rules.policy file

    grant {
        permission java.util.PropertyPermission "*", "read";
        permission java.lang.RuntimePermission "accessDeclaredMembers";
    }

Please note that depending on what the rules and processes are supposed to do, many more permissions might need to be granted, like accessing files in the filesystem, databases, etc.

In order to use these policy files, all that is necessary is to execute the application with these files as parameters to the JVM. Three parameters are required:

Table 9. Parameters
Parameter | Meaning
--- | ---
-Djava.security.manager | Enables the security manager
-Djava.security.policy=<jvm_policy_file> | Defines the global policy file to be applied to the whole application, including the engine
-Dkie.security.policy=<kie_policy_file> | Defines the policy file to be applied to rules and processes

For instance:

`java -Djava.security.manager -Djava.security.policy=global.policy -Dkie.security.policy=rules.policy foo.bar.MyApp`

| When executing the engine inside a container, use your container’s documentation to find out how to configure the Security Manager and how to define the global security policy. Define the kie security policy as described above and set the `kie.security.policy` system property in order to configure the engine to use it.

| Please note that unless a Security Manager is configured, the `kie.security.policy` will be ignored.

| A Security Manager has a high performance impact in the JVM. Applications with strict performance requirements are strongly discouraged of using a Security Manager. An alternative is the use of other security procedures like the auditing of rules/processes before testing and deployment to prevent malicious code from being deployed to the environment.

# Drools Runtime and Language

Drools is a powerful hybrid reasoning system that intelligently and efficiently processes rule data.

## 3. Drools engine

The Drools engine is the rules engine in Drools. The Drools engine stores, processes, and evaluates data to execute the business rules or decision models that you define. The basic function of the Drools engine is to match incoming data, or facts, to the conditions of rules and determine whether and how to execute the rules.

The Drools engine operates using the following basic components:

- Rules: Business rules or DMN decisions that you define. All rules must contain at a minimum the conditions that trigger the rule and the actions that the rule dictates.

- Facts: Data that enters or changes in the Drools engine that the Drools engine matches to rule conditions to execute applicable rules.

- Production memory: Location where rules are stored in the Drools engine.

- Working memory: Location where facts are stored in the Drools engine.

- Agenda: Location where activated rules are registered and sorted (if applicable) in preparation for execution.

When a business user or an automated system adds or updates rule-related information in Drools, that information is inserted into the working memory of the Drools engine in the form of one or more facts. The Drools engine matches those facts to the conditions of the rules that are stored in the production memory to determine eligible rule executions. (This process of matching facts to rules is often referred to as pattern matching.) When rule conditions are met, the Drools engine activates and registers rules in the agenda, where the Drools engine then sorts prioritized or conflicting rules in preparation for execution.

The following diagram illustrates these basic components of the Drools engine:

Figure 31. Overview of basic Drools engine components

These core concepts can help you to better understand other more advanced components, processes, and sub-processes of the Drools engine, and as a result, to design more effective business assets in Drools.

### 3.1. Phreak rule algorithm in the Drools engine

The Drools engine in Drools uses the Phreak algorithm for rule evaluation. Phreak evolved from the Rete algorithm, including the enhanced Rete algorithm ReteOO that was introduced in previous versions of Drools for object-oriented systems. Overall, Phreak is more scalable than Rete and ReteOO, and is faster in large systems.

While Rete is considered eager (immediate rule evaluation) and data oriented, Phreak is considered lazy (delayed rule evaluation) and goal oriented. The Rete algorithm performs many actions during the insert, update, and delete actions in order to find partial matches for all rules. This eagerness of the Rete algorithm during rule matching requires a lot of time before eventually executing rules, especially in large systems. With Phreak, this partial matching of rules is delayed deliberately to handle large amounts of data more efficiently.

The Phreak algorithm adds the following set of enhancements to previous Rete algorithms:

- Three layers of contextual memory: Node, segment, and rule memory types

- Rule-based, segment-based, and node-based linking

- Lazy (delayed) rule evaluation

- Stack-based evaluations with pause and resume

- Isolated rule evaluation

- Set-oriented propagations

#### 3.1.1. Rule evaluation in Phreak

When the Drools engine starts, all rules are considered to be unlinked from pattern-matching data that can trigger the rules. At this stage, the Phreak algorithm in the Drools engine does not evaluate the rules. The `insert`, `update`, and `delete` actions are queued, and Phreak uses a heuristic, based on the rule most likely to result in execution, to calculate and select the next rule for evaluation. When all the required input values are populated for a rule, the rule is considered to be linked to the relevant pattern-matching data. Phreak then creates a goal that represents this rule and places the goal into a priority queue that is ordered by rule salience. Only the rule for which the goal was created is evaluated, and other potential rule evaluations are delayed. While individual rules are evaluated, node sharing is still achieved through the process of segmentation.

Unlike the tuple-oriented Rete, the Phreak propagation is collection oriented. For the rule that is being evaluated, the Drools engine accesses the first node and processes all queued insert, update, and delete actions. The results are added to a set, and the set is propagated to the child node. In the child node, all queued insert, update, and delete actions are processed, adding the results to the same set. The set is then propagated to the next child node and the same process repeats until it reaches the terminal node. This cycle creates a batch process effect that can provide performance advantages for certain rule constructs.

The linking and unlinking of rules happens through a layered bit-mask system, based on network segmentation. When the rule network is built, segments are created for rule network nodes that are shared by the same set of rules. A rule is composed of a path of segments. In case a rule does not share any node with any other rule, it becomes a single segment.

A bit-mask offset is assigned to each node in the segment. Another bit mask is assigned to each segment in the path of the rule according to these requirements:

- If at least one input for a node exists, the node bit is set to the `on` state.

- If each node in a segment has the bit set to the `on` state, the segment bit is also set to the `on` state.

- If any node bit is set to the `off` state, the segment is also set to the `off` state.

- If each segment in the path of the rule is set to the `on` state, the rule is considered linked, and a goal is created to schedule the rule for evaluation.

The same bit-mask technique is used to track modified nodes, segments, and rules. This tracking ability enables an already linked rule to be unscheduled from evaluation if it has been modified since the evaluation goal for it was created. As a result, no rules can ever evaluate partial matches.

This process of rule evaluation is possible in Phreak because, as opposed to a single unit of memory in Rete, Phreak has three layers of contextual memory with node, segment, and rule memory types. This layering enables much more contextual understanding during the evaluation of a rule.

Figure 32. Phreak three-layered memory system

The following examples illustrate how rules are organized and evaluated in this three-layered memory system in Phreak.

Example 1: A single rule (R1) with three patterns: A, B and C. The rule forms a single segment, with bits 1, 2, and 4 for the nodes. The single segment has a bit offset of 1.

Figure 33. Example 1: Single rule

Example 2: Rule R2 is added and shares pattern A.

Figure 34. Example 2: Two rules with pattern sharing

Pattern A is placed in its own segment, resulting in two segments for each rule. Those two segments form a path for their respective rules. The first segment is shared by both paths. When pattern A is linked, the segment becomes linked. The segment then iterates over each path that the segment is shared by, setting the bit 1 to `on`. If patterns B and C are later turned on, the second segment for path R1 is linked, and this causes bit 2 to be turned on for R1. With bit 1 and bit 2 turned on for R1, the rule is now linked and a goal is created to schedule the rule for later evaluation and execution.

When a rule is evaluated, the segments enable the results of the matching to be shared. Each segment has a staging memory to queue all inserts, updates, and deletes for that segment. When R1 is evaluated, the rule processes pattern A, and this results in a set of tuples. The algorithm detects a segmentation split, creates peered tuples for each insert, update, and delete in the set, and adds them to the R2 staging memory. Those tuples are then merged with any existing staged tuples and are executed when R2 is eventually evaluated.

Example 3: Rules R3 and R4 are added and share patterns A and B.

Figure 35. Example 3: Three rules with pattern sharing

Rules R3 and R4 have three segments and R1 has two segments. Patterns A and B are shared by R1, R3, and R4, while pattern D is shared by R3 and R4.

Example 4: A single rule (R1) with a subnetwork and no pattern sharing.

Figure 36. Example 4: Single rule with a subnetwork and no pattern sharing

Subnetworks are formed when a `Not`, `Exists`, or `Accumulate` node contains more than one element. In this example, the element `B not( C )` forms the subnetwork. The element `not( C )` is a single element that does not require a subnetwork and is therefore merged inside of the `Not` node. The subnetwork uses a dedicated segment. Rule R1 still has a path of two segments and the subnetwork forms another inner path. When the subnetwork is linked, it is also linked in the outer segment.

Example 5: Rule R1 with a subnetwork that is shared by rule R2.

Figure 37. Example 5: Two rules, one with a subnetwork and pattern sharing

The subnetwork nodes in a rule can be shared by another rule that does not have a subnetwork. This sharing causes the subnetwork segment to be split into two segments.

Constrained `Not` nodes and `Accumulate` nodes can never unlink a segment, and are always considered to have their bits turned on.

The Phreak evaluation algorithm is stack based instead of method-recursion based. Rule evaluation can be paused and resumed at any time when a `StackEntry` is used to represent the node currently being evaluated.

When a rule evaluation reaches a subnetwork, a `StackEntry` object is created for the outer path segment and the subnetwork segment. The subnetwork segment is evaluated first, and when the set reaches the end of the subnetwork path, the segment is merged into a staging list for the outer node that the segment feeds into. The previous `StackEntry` object is then resumed and can now process the results of the subnetwork. This process has the added benefit, especially for `Accumulate` nodes, that all work is completed in a batch, before propagating to the child node.

The same stack system is used for efficient backward chaining. When a rule evaluation reaches a query node, the evaluation is paused and the query is added to the stack. The query is then evaluated to produce a result set, which is saved in a memory location for the resumed `StackEntry` object to pick up and propagate to the child node. If the query itself called other queries, the process repeats, while the current query is paused and a new evaluation is set up for the current query node.

##### 3.1.1.1. Rule evaluation with forward and backward chaining

The Drools engine in Drools is a hybrid reasoning system that uses both forward chaining and backward chaining to evaluate rules. A forward-chaining rule system is a data-driven system that starts with a fact in the working memory of the Drools engine and reacts to changes to that fact. When objects are inserted into working memory, any rule conditions that become true as a result of the change are scheduled for execution by the agenda.

In contrast, a backward-chaining rule system is a goal-driven system that starts with a conclusion that the Drools engine attempts to satisfy, often using recursion. If the system cannot reach the conclusion or goal, it searches for subgoals, which are conclusions that complete part of the current goal. The system continues this process until either the initial conclusion is satisfied or all subgoals are satisfied.

The following diagram illustrates how the Drools engine evaluates rules using forward chaining overall with a backward-chaining segment in the logic flow:

Figure 38. Rule evaluation logic using forward and backward chaining

#### 3.1.2. Rule base configuration

Drools contains a `RuleBaseConfiguration.java` object that you can use to configure exception handler settings, multithreaded execution, and sequential mode in the Drools engine.

For the rule base configuration options, see the Drools RuleBaseConfiguration.java page on GitHub.

The following rule base configuration options are available for the Drools engine:

drools.consequenceExceptionHandler

  When configured, this system property defines the class that manages the exceptions thrown by rule consequences. You can use this property to specify a custom exception handler for rule evaluation in the Drools engine.

  Default value: `org.drools.core.runtime.rule.impl.DefaultConsequenceExceptionHandler`

  You can specify the custom exception handler using one of the following options:

  - Specify the exception handler in a system property:

        drools.consequenceExceptionHandler=org.drools.core.runtime.rule.impl.MyCustomConsequenceExceptionHandler

  - Specify the exception handler while creating the KIE base programatically:

        KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
        KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration(); kieBaseConf.setOption(ConsequenceExceptionHandlerOption.get(MyCustomConsequenceExceptionHandler.class));
        KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

drools.multithreadEvaluation

  When enabled, this system property enables the Drools engine to evaluate rules in parallel by dividing the Phreak rule network into independent partitions. You can use this property to increase the speed of rule evaluation for specific rule bases.

  Default value: `false`

  You can enable multithreaded evaluation using one of the following options:

  - Enable the multithreaded evaluation system property:

        drools.multithreadEvaluation=true

  - Enable multithreaded evaluation while creating the KIE base programatically:

        KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
        KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration();
        kieBaseConf.setOption(MultithreadEvaluationOption.YES);
        KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

  | Rules that use queries, salience, or agenda groups are currently not supported by the parallel Drools engine. If these rule elements are present in the KIE base, the compiler emits a warning and automatically switches back to single-threaded evaluation. However, in some cases, the Drools engine might not detect the unsupported rule elements and rules might be evaluated incorrectly. For example, the Drools engine might not detect when rules rely on implicit salience given by rule ordering inside the DRL file, resulting in incorrect evaluation due to the unsupported salience attribute.

drools.sequential

  When enabled, this system property enables sequential mode in the Drools engine. In sequential mode, the Drools engine evaluates rules one time in the order that they are listed in the Drools engine agenda without regard to changes in the working memory. This means that the Drools engine ignores any `insert`, `modify`, or `update` statements in rules and executes rules in a single sequence. As a result, rule execution may be faster in sequential mode, but important updates may not be applied to your rules. You can use this property if you use stateless KIE sessions and you do not want the execution of rules to influence subsequent rules in the agenda. Sequential mode applies to stateless KIE sessions only.

  Default value: `false`

  You can enable sequential mode using one of the following options:

  - Enable the sequential mode system property:

        drools.sequential=true

  - Enable sequential mode while creating the KIE base programatically:

        KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
        KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration();
        kieBaseConf.setOption(SequentialOption.YES);
        KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

#### 3.1.3. Sequential mode in Phreak

Sequential mode is an advanced rule base configuration in the Drools engine, supported by Phreak, that enables the Drools engine to evaluate rules one time in the order that they are listed in the Drools engine agenda without regard to changes in the working memory. In sequential mode, the Drools engine ignores any `insert`, `modify`, or `update` statements in rules and executes rules in a single sequence. As a result, rule execution may be faster in sequential mode, but important updates may not be applied to your rules.

Sequential mode applies to only stateless KIE sessions because stateful KIE sessions inherently use data from previously invoked KIE sessions. If you use a stateless KIE session and you want the execution of rules to influence subsequent rules in the agenda, then do not enable sequential mode. Sequential mode is disabled by default in the Drools engine.

To enable sequential mode, use one of the following options:

- Set the system property `drools.sequential` to `true`.

- Enable sequential mode while creating the KIE base programatically:

      KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
      KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration();
      kieBaseConf.setOption(SequentialOption.YES);
      KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

To configure sequential mode to use a dynamic agenda, use one of the following options:

- Set the system property `drools.sequential.agenda` to `dynamic`.

- Set the sequential agenda option while creating the KIE base programatically:

      KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
      KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration();
      kieBaseConf.setOption(SequentialAgendaOption.DYNAMIC);
      KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

When you enable sequential mode, the Drools engine evaluates rules in the following way:

1. Rules are ordered by salience and position in the rule set.

2. An element for each possible rule match is created. The element position indicates the execution order.

3. Node memory is disabled, with the exception of the right-input object memory.

4. The left-input adapter node propagation is disconnected and the object with the node is referenced in a `Command` object. The `Command` object is added to a list in the working memory for later execution.

5. All objects are asserted, and then the list of `Command` objects is checked and executed.

6. All matches that result from executing the list are added to elements based on the sequence number of the rule.

7. The elements that contain matches are executed in a sequence. If you set a maximum number of rule executions, the Drools engine activates no more than that number of rules in the agenda for execution.

In sequential mode, the `LeftInputAdapterNode` node creates a `Command` object and adds it to a list in the working memory of the Drools engine. This `Command` object contains references to the `LeftInputAdapterNode` node and the propagated object. These references stop any left-input propagations at insertion time so that the right-input propagation never needs to attempt to join the left inputs. The references also avoid the need for the left-input memory.

All nodes have their memory turned off, including the left-input tuple memory, but excluding the right-input object memory. After all the assertions are finished and the right-input memory of all the objects is populated, the Drools engine iterates over the list of `LeftInputAdatperNode` `Command` objects. The objects propagate down the network, attempting to join the right-input objects, but they are not retained in the left input.

The agenda with a priority queue to schedule the tuples is replaced by an element for each rule. The sequence number of the `RuleTerminalNode` node indicates the element where to place the match. After all `Command` objects have finished, the elements are checked and existing matches are executed. To improve performance, the first and the last populated cell in the elements are retained.

When the network is constructed, each `RuleTerminalNode` node receives a sequence number based on its salience number and the order in which it was added to the network.

The right-input node memories are typically hash maps for fast object deletion. Because object deletions are not supported, Phreak uses an object list when the values of the object are not indexed. For a large number of objects, indexed hash maps provide a performance increase. If an object has only a few instances, Phreak uses an object list instead of an index.

### 3.2. KIE sessions

In Drools, a KIE session stores and executes runtime data. The KIE session is created from a KIE base or directly from a KIE container if you have defined the KIE session in the KIE module descriptor file (`kmodule.xml`) for your project.

Example KIE session configuration in a `kmodule.xml` file

    <kmodule>
      ...
      <kbase>
        ...
        <ksession name="KSession2_1" type="stateless" default="true" clockType="realtime">
        ...
      </kbase>
      ...
    </kmodule>

A KIE base is a repository that you define in the KIE module descriptor file (`kmodule.xml`) for your project and contains all in Drools, but does not contain any runtime data.

Example KIE base configuration in a `kmodule.xml` file

    <kmodule>
      ...
      <kbase name="KBase2" default="false" eventProcessingMode="stream" equalsBehavior="equality" declarativeAgenda="enabled" packages="org.domain.pkg2, org.domain.pkg3" includes="KBase1">
        ...
      </kbase>
      ...
    </kmodule>

A KIE session can be stateless or stateful. In a stateless KIE session, data from a previous invocation of the KIE session (the previous session state) is discarded between session invocations. In a stateful KIE session, that data is retained. The type of KIE session you use depends on your project requirements and how you want data from different asset invocations to be persisted.

#### 3.2.1. Stateless KIE sessions

A stateless KIE session is a session that does not use inference to make iterative changes to facts over time. In a stateless KIE session, data from a previous invocation of the KIE session (the previous session state) is discarded between session invocations, whereas in a stateful KIE session, that data is retained. A stateless KIE session behaves similarly to a function in that the results that it produces are determined by the contents of the KIE base and by the data that is passed into the KIE session for execution at a specific point in time. The KIE session has no memory of any data that was passed into the KIE session previously.

Stateless KIE sessions are commonly used for the following use cases:

- Validation, such as validating that a person is eligible for a mortgage

- Calculation, such as computing a mortgage premium

- Routing and filtering, such as sorting incoming emails into folders or sending incoming emails to a destination

For example, consider the following driver’s license data model and sample DRL rule:

Data model for driver’s license application

    public class Applicant {
      private String name;
      private int age;
      private boolean valid;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

Sample DRL rule for driver’s license application

    package com.company.license

    rule "Is of valid age"
    when
      $a : Applicant(age < 18)
    then
      $a.setValid(false);
    end

The `Is of valid age` rule disqualifies any applicant younger than 18 years old. When the `Applicant` object is inserted into the Drools engine, the Drools engine evaluates the constraints for each rule and searches for a match. The `"objectType"` constraint is always implied, after which any number of explicit field constraints are evaluated. The variable `$a` is a binding variable that references the matched object in the rule consequence.

| The dollar sign (`$`) is optional and helps to differentiate between variable names and field names.

In this example, the sample rule and all other files in the `~/resources` folder of the Drools project are built with the following code:

Create the KIE container

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

This code compiles all the rule files found on the class path and adds the result of this compilation, a `KieModule` object, in the `KieContainer`.

Finally, the `StatelessKieSession` object is instantiated from the `KieContainer` and is executed against specified data:

Instantiate the stateless KIE session and enter data

    StatelessKieSession kSession = kContainer.newStatelessKieSession();

    Applicant applicant = new Applicant("Mr John Smith", 16);

    assertTrue(applicant.isValid());

    ksession.execute(applicant);

    assertFalse(applicant.isValid());

In a stateless KIE session configuration, the `execute()` call acts as a combination method that instantiates the `KieSession` object, adds all the user data and executes user commands, calls `fireAllRules()`, and then calls `dispose()`. Therefore, with a stateless KIE session, you do not need to call `fireAllRules()` or call `dispose()` after session invocation as you do with a stateful KIE session.

In this case, the specified applicant is under the age of 18, so the application is declined.

For a more complex use case, see the following example. This example uses a stateless KIE session and executes rules against an iterable list of objects, such as a collection.

Expanded data model for driver’s license application

    public class Applicant {
      private String name;
      private int age;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

    public class Application {
      private Date dateApplied;
      private boolean valid;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

Expanded DRL rule set for driver’s license application

    package com.company.license

    rule "Is of valid age"
    when
      Applicant(age < 18)
      $a : Application()
    then
      $a.setValid(false);
    end

    rule "Application was made this year"
    when
      $a : Application(dateApplied > "01-jan-2009")
    then
      $a.setValid(false);
    end

Expanded Java source with iterable execution in a stateless KIE session

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKnowledgeSession();
    Applicant applicant = new Applicant("Mr John Smith", 16);
    Application application = new Application();

    assertTrue(application.isValid());
    ksession.execute(Arrays.asList(new Object[] { application, applicant }));  (1)
    assertFalse(application.isValid());

    ksession.execute
      (CommandFactory.newInsertIterable(new Object[] { application, applicant }));  (2)

    List<Command> cmds = new ArrayList<Command>();  (3)
    cmds.add(CommandFactory.newInsert(new Person("Mr John Smith"), "mrSmith"));
    cmds.add(CommandFactory.newInsert(new Person("Mr John Doe"), "mrDoe"));

    BatchExecutionResults results = ksession.execute(CommandFactory.newBatchExecution(cmds));
    assertEquals(new Person("Mr John Smith"), results.getValue("mrSmith"));

1 | Method for executing rules against an iterable collection of objects produced by the `Arrays.asList()` method. Every collection element is inserted before any matched rules are executed. The `execute(Object object)` and `execute(Iterable objects)` methods are wrappers around the `execute(Command command)` method that comes from the `BatchExecutor` interface.
2 | Execution of the iterable collection of objects using the `CommandFactory` interface.
3 | `BatchExecutor` and `CommandFactory` configurations for working with many different commands or result output identifiers. The `CommandFactory` interface supports other commands that you can use in the `BatchExecutor`, such as `StartProcess`, `Query`, and `SetGlobal`.

##### 3.2.1.1. Global variables in stateless KIE sessions

The `StatelessKieSession` object supports global variables (globals) that you can configure to be resolved as session-scoped globals, delegate globals, or execution-scoped globals.

- Session-scoped globals: For session-scoped globals, you can use the method `getGlobals()` to return a `Globals` instance that provides access to the KIE session globals. These globals are used for all execution calls. Use caution with mutable globals because execution calls can be executing simultaneously in different threads.

  Session-scoped global

      import org.kie.api.runtime.StatelessKieSession;

      StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();

      // Set a global `myGlobal` that can be used in the rules.
      ksession.setGlobal("myGlobal", "I am a global");

      // Execute while resolving the `myGlobal` identifier.
      ksession.execute(collection);

- Delegate globals: For delegate globals, you can assign a value to a global (with `setGlobal(String, Object)`) so that the value is stored in an internal collection that maps identifiers to values. Identifiers in this internal collection have priority over any supplied delegate. If an identifier cannot be found in this internal collection, the delegate global (if any) is used.

- Execution-scoped globals: For execution-scoped globals, you can use the `Command` object to set a global that is passed to the `CommandExecutor` interface for execution-specific global resolution.

The `CommandExecutor` interface also enables you to export data using out identifiers for globals, inserted facts, and query results:

Out identifiers for globals, inserted facts, and query results

    import org.kie.api.runtime.ExecutionResults;

    // Set up a list of commands.
    List cmds = new ArrayList();
    cmds.add(CommandFactory.newSetGlobal("list1", new ArrayList(), true));
    cmds.add(CommandFactory.newInsert(new Person("jon", 102), "person"));
    cmds.add(CommandFactory.newQuery("Get People" "getPeople"));

    // Execute the list.
    ExecutionResults results = ksession.execute(CommandFactory.newBatchExecution(cmds));

    // Retrieve the `ArrayList`.
    results.getValue("list1");
    // Retrieve the inserted `Person` fact.
    results.getValue("person");
    // Retrieve the query as a `QueryResults` instance.
    results.getValue("Get People");

#### 3.2.2. Stateful KIE sessions

A stateful KIE session is a session that uses inference to make iterative changes to facts over time. In a stateful KIE session, data from a previous invocation of the KIE session (the previous session state) is retained between session invocations, whereas in a stateless KIE session, that data is discarded.

| Ensure that you call the `dispose()` method after running a stateful KIE session so that no memory leaks occur between session invocations.

Stateful KIE sessions are commonly used for the following use cases:

- Monitoring, such as monitoring a stock market and automating the buying process

- Diagnostics, such as running fault-finding processes or medical diagnostic processes

- Logistics, such as parcel tracking and delivery provisioning

- Ensuring compliance, such as verifying the legality of market trades

For example, consider the following fire alarm data model and sample DRL rules:

Data model for sprinklers and fire alarm

    public class Room {
      private String name;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

    public class Sprinkler {
      private Room room;
      private boolean on;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

    public class Fire {
      private Room room;
      // Getter and setter methods
    }

    public class Alarm { }

Sample DRL rule set for activating sprinklers and alarm

    rule "When there is a fire turn on the sprinkler"
    when
      Fire($room : room)
      $sprinkler : Sprinkler(room == $room, on == false)
    then
      modify($sprinkler) { setOn(true) };
      System.out.println("Turn on the sprinkler for room "+$room.getName());
    end

    rule "Raise the alarm when we have one or more fires"
    when
        exists Fire()
    then
        insert( new Alarm() );
        System.out.println( "Raise the alarm" );
    end

    rule "Cancel the alarm when all the fires have gone"
    when
        not Fire()
        $alarm : Alarm()
    then
        delete( $alarm );
        System.out.println( "Cancel the alarm" );
    end

    rule "Status output when things are ok"
    when
        not Alarm()
        not Sprinkler( on == true )
    then
        System.out.println( "Everything is ok" );
    end

For the `When there is a fire turn on the sprinkler` rule, when a fire occurs, the instances of the `Fire` class are created for that room and inserted into the KIE session. The rule adds a constraint for the specific `room` matched in the `Fire` instance so that only the sprinkler for that room is checked. When this rule is executed, the sprinkler activates. The other sample rules determine when the alarm is activated or deactivated accordingly.

Whereas a stateless KIE session relies on standard Java syntax to modify a field, a stateful KIE session relies on the `modify` statement in rules to notify the Drools engine of changes. The Drools engine then reasons over the changes and assesses impact on subsequent rule executions. This process is part of the Drools engine ability to use inference and truth maintenance and is essential in stateful KIE sessions.

In this example, the sample rules and all other files in the `~/resources` folder of the Drools project are built with the following code:

Create the KIE container

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

This code compiles all the rule files found on the class path and adds the result of this compilation, a `KieModule` object, in the `KieContainer`.

Finally, the `KieSession` object is instantiated from the `KieContainer` and is executed against specified data:

Instantiate the stateful KIE session and enter data

    KieSession ksession = kContainer.newKieSession();

    String[] names = new String[]{"kitchen", "bedroom", "office", "livingroom"};
    Map<String,Room> name2room = new HashMap<String,Room>();
    for( String name: names ){
        Room room = new Room( name );
        name2room.put( name, room );
        ksession.insert( room );
        Sprinkler sprinkler = new Sprinkler( room );
        ksession.insert( sprinkler );
    }

    ksession.fireAllRules();

Console output

    > Everything is ok

With the data added, the Drools engine completes all pattern matching but no rules have been executed, so the configured verification message appears. As new data triggers rule conditions, the Drools engine executes rules to activate the alarm and later to cancel the alarm that has been activated:

Enter new data to trigger rules

    Fire kitchenFire = new Fire( name2room.get( "kitchen" ) );
    Fire officeFire = new Fire( name2room.get( "office" ) );

    FactHandle kitchenFireHandle = ksession.insert( kitchenFire );
    FactHandle officeFireHandle = ksession.insert( officeFire );

    ksession.fireAllRules();

Console output

    > Raise the alarm
    > Turn on the sprinkler for room kitchen
    > Turn on the sprinkler for room office

    ksession.delete( kitchenFireHandle );
    ksession.delete( officeFireHandle );

    ksession.fireAllRules();

Console output

    > Cancel the alarm
    > Turn off the sprinkler for room office
    > Turn off the sprinkler for room kitchen
    > Everything is ok

In this case, a reference is kept for the returned `FactHandle` object. A fact handle is an internal engine reference to the inserted instance and enables instances to be retracted or modified later.

As this example illustrates, the data and results from previous stateful KIE sessions (the activated alarm) affect the invocation of subsequent sessions (alarm cancellation).

### 3.3. Inference and truth maintenance in the Drools engine

The basic function of the Drools engine is to match data to business rules and determine whether and how to execute rules. To ensure that relevant data is applied to the appropriate rules, the Drools engine makes inferences based on existing knowledge and performs the actions based on the inferred information.

For example, the following DRL rule determines the age requirements for adults, such as in a bus pass policy:

Rule to define age requirement

    rule "Infer Adult"
    when
      $p : Person(age >= 18)
    then
      insert(new IsAdult($p))
    end

Based on this rule, the Drools engine infers whether a person is an adult or a child and performs the specified action (the `then` consequence). Every person who is 18 years old or older has an instance of `IsAdult` inserted for them in the working memory. This inferred relation of age and bus pass can then be invoked in any rule, such as in the following rule segment:

    $p : Person()
    IsAdult(person == $p)

In many cases, new data in a rule system is the result of other rule executions, and this new data can affect the execution of other rules. If the Drools engine asserts data as a result of executing a rule, the Drools engine uses truth maintenance to justify the assertion and enforce truthfulness when applying inferred information to other rules. Truth maintenance also helps to identify inconsistencies and to handle contradictions. For example, if two rules are executed and result in a contradictory action, the Drools engine chooses the action based on assumptions from previously calculated conclusions.

The Drools engine inserts facts using either stated or logical insertions:

- Stated insertions: Defined with `insert()`. After stated insertions, facts are generally retracted explicitly. (The term insertion, when used generically, refers to stated insertion.)

- Logical insertions: Defined with `insertLogical()`. After logical insertions, the facts that were inserted are automatically retracted when the conditions that inserted the facts are no longer true. The facts are retracted when no condition supports the logical insertion. A fact that is logically inserted is considered to be justified by the Drools engine.

For example, the following sample DRL rules use stated fact insertion to determine the age requirements for issuing a child bus pass or an adult bus pass:

Rules to issue bus pass, stated insertion

    rule "Issue Child Bus Pass"
    when
      $p : Person(age < 18)
    then
      insert(new ChildBusPass($p));
    end

    rule "Issue Adult Bus Pass"
    when
      $p : Person(age >= 18)
    then
      insert(new AdultBusPass($p));
    end

These rules are not easily maintained in the Drools engine as bus riders increase in age and move from child to adult bus pass. As an alternative, these rules can be separated into rules for bus rider age and rules for bus pass type using logical fact insertion. The logical insertion of the fact makes the fact dependent on the truth of the `when` clause.

The following DRL rules use logical insertion to determine the age requirements for children and adults:

Children and adult age requirements, logical insertion

    rule "Infer Child"
    when
      $p : Person(age < 18)
    then
      insertLogical(new IsChild($p))
    end

    rule "Infer Adult"
    when
      $p : Person(age >= 18)
    then
      insertLogical(new IsAdult($p))
    end

| For logical insertions, your fact objects must override the `equals` and `hashCode` methods from the `java.lang.Object` object according to the Java standard. Two objects are equal if their `equals` methods return `true` for each other and if their `hashCode` methods return the same values. For more information, see the Java API documentation for your Java version.

When the condition in the rule is false, the fact is automatically retracted. This behavior is helpful in this example because the two rules are mutually exclusive. In this example, if the person is younger than 18 years old, the rule logically inserts an `IsChild` fact. After the person is 18 years old or older, the `IsChild` fact is automatically retracted and the `IsAdult` fact is inserted.

The following DRL rules then determine whether to issue a child bus pass or an adult bus pass and logically insert the `ChildBusPass` and `AdultBusPass` facts. This rule configuration is possible because the truth maintenance system in the Drools engine supports chaining of logical insertions for a cascading set of retracts.

Rules to issue bus pass, logical insertion

    rule "Issue Child Bus Pass"
    when
      $p : Person()
        IsChild(person == $p)
    then
      insertLogical(new ChildBusPass($p));
    end

    rule "Issue Adult Bus Pass"
    when
      $p : Person()
        IsAdult(person =$p)
    then
      insertLogical(new AdultBusPass($p));
    end

When a person turns 18 years old, the `IsChild` fact and the person’s `ChildBusPass` fact is retracted. To these set of conditions, you can relate another rule that states that a person must return the child pass after turning 18 years old. When the Drools engine automatically retracts the `ChildBusPass` object, the following rule is executed to send a request to the person:

Rule to notify bus pass holder of new pass

    rule "Return ChildBusPass Request"
    when
      $p : Person()
        not(ChildBusPass(person == $p))
    then
      requestChildBusPass($p);
    end

The following flowcharts illustrate the life cycle of stated and logical insertions:

Figure 39. Stated insertion
Figure 40. Logical insertion

The Drools engine uses a `HashMap` and a counter to track how many times an object equality is stated (how many different instances are equal). When the Drools engine logically inserts an object during a rule execution, the Drools engine justifies the object by executing the rule. For each logical insertion, only one equal object can exist, and each subsequent equal logical insertion increases the justification counter for that logical insertion. A justification is removed when the conditions of the rule become untrue, and the counter is decreased accordingly. When no more justifications exist, the logical object is automatically retracted.

#### 3.3.1. Government ID example

So now we know what inference is, and have a basic example, how does this facilitate good rule design and maintenance?

Consider a government ID department that is responsible for issuing ID cards when children become adults. They might have a decision table that includes logic like this, which says when an adult living in London is 18 or over, issue the card:

| RuleTable ID Card
| CONDITION | CONDITION | ACTION
| p : Person |
| location | age >= $1 | issueIdCard($1)
| Select Person | Select Adults | Issue ID Card
Issue ID Card to Adults | London | 18 | p

However the ID department does not set the policy on who an adult is. That’s done at a central government level. If the central government were to change that age to 21, this would initiate a change management process. Someone would have to liaise with the ID department and make sure their systems are updated, in time for the law going live.

This change management process and communication between departments is not ideal for an agile environment, and change becomes costly and error prone. Also the card department is managing more information than it needs to be aware of with its "monolithic" approach to rules management which is "leaking" information better placed elsewhere. By this I mean that it doesn’t care what explicit "age >= 18" information determines whether someone is an adult, only that they are an adult.

In contrast to this, let’s pursue an approach where we split (de-couple) the authoring responsibilities, so that both the central government and the ID department maintain their own rules.

It’s the central government’s job to determine who is an adult. If they change the law they just update their central repository with the new rules, which others use:

| RuleTable Age Policy
| CONDITION | ACTION
| p : Person |
| age >= $1 | insert($1)
| Adult Age Policy | Add Adult Relation
Infer Adult | 18 | new IsAdult( p )

The IsAdult fact, as discussed previously, is inferred from the policy rules. It encapsulates the seemingly arbitrary piece of logic "age >= 18" and provides semantic abstractions for its meaning. Now if anyone uses the above rules, they no longer need to be aware of explicit information that determines whether someone is an adult or not. They can just use the inferred fact:

| RuleTable ID Card
| CONDITION | CONDITION | ACTION
| p : Person | isAdult |
| location | person == $1 | issueIdCard($1)
| Select Person | Select Adults | Issue ID Card
Issue ID Card to Adults | London | p | p

While the example is very minimal and trivial it illustrates some important points. We started with a monolithic and leaky approach to our knowledge engineering. We created a single decision table that had all possible information in it and that leaks information from central government that the ID department did not care about and did not want to manage.

We first de-coupled the knowledge process so each department was responsible for only what it needed to know. We then encapsulated this leaky knowledge using an inferred fact IsAdult. The use of the term IsAdult also gave a semantic abstraction to the previously arbitrary logic "age >= 18".

So a general rule of thumb when doing your knowledge engineering is:

- Bad

  - Monolithic

  - Leaky

- Good

  - De-couple knowledge responsibilities

  - Encapsulate knowledge

  - Provide semantic abstractions for those encapsulations

### 3.4. Execution control in the Drools engine

When new rule data enters the working memory of the Drools engine, rules may become fully matched and eligible for execution. A single working memory action can result in multiple eligible rule executions. When a rule is fully matched, the Drools engine creates an activation instance, referencing the rule and the matched facts, and adds the activation onto the Drools engine agenda. The agenda controls the execution order of these rule activations using a conflict resolution strategy.

After the first call of `fireAllRules()` in the Java application, the Drools engine cycles repeatedly through two phases:

- Agenda evaluation. In this phase, the Drools engine selects all rules that can be executed. If no executable rules exist, the execution cycle ends. If an executable rule is found, the Drools engine registers the activation in the agenda and then moves on to the working memory actions phase to perform rule consequence actions.

- Working memory actions. In this phase, the Drools engine performs the rule consequence actions (the `then` portion of each rule) for all activated rules previously registered in the agenda. After all the consequence actions are complete or the main Java application process calls `fireAllRules()` again, the Drools engine returns to the agenda evaluation phase to reassess rules.

Figure 41. Two-phase execution process in the Drools engine

When multiple rules exist on the agenda, the execution of one rule may cause another rule to be removed from the agenda. To avoid this, you can define how and when rules are executed in the Drools engine. Some common methods for defining rule execution order are by using rule salience, agenda groups, and activation groups for rules.

#### 3.4.1. Salience for rules

Each rule has an integer `salience` attribute that determines the order of execution. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue. The default salience value for rules is zero, but the salience can be negative or positive.

For example, the following sample DRL rules are listed in the Drools engine stack in the order shown:

    rule "RuleA"
    salience 95
    when
        $fact : MyFact( field1 == true )
    then
        System.out.println("Rule2 : " + $fact);
        update($fact);
    end

    rule "RuleB"
    salience 100
    when
       $fact : MyFact( field1 == false )
    then
       System.out.println("Rule1 : " + $fact);
       $fact.setField1(true);
       update($fact);
    end

The `RuleB` rule is listed second, but it has a higher salience value than the `RuleA` rule and is therefore executed first.

#### 3.4.2. Agenda groups for rules

An agenda group is a set of rules bound together by the same `agenda-group` rule attribute. Agenda groups partition rules on the Drools engine agenda. At any one time, only one group has a focus that gives that group of rules priority for execution before rules in other agenda groups. You determine the focus with a `setFocus()` call for the agenda group. You can also define rules with an `auto-focus` attribute so that the next time the rule is activated, the focus is automatically given to the entire agenda group to which the rule is assigned.

Each time the `setFocus()` call is made in a Java application, the Drools engine adds the specified agenda group to the top of the rule stack. The default agenda group `"MAIN"` contains all rules that do not belong to a specified agenda group and is executed first in the stack unless another group has the focus.

For example, the following sample DRL rules belong to specified agenda groups and are listed in the Drools engine stack in the order shown:

Sample DRL rules for banking application

    rule "Increase balance for credits"
      agenda-group "calculation"
    when
      ap : AccountPeriod()
      acc : Account( $accountNo : accountNo )
      CashFlow( type == CREDIT,
                accountNo == $accountNo,
                date >= ap.start && <= ap.end,
                $amount : amount )
    then
      acc.balance  += $amount;
    end

    rule "Print balance for AccountPeriod"
      agenda-group "report"
    when
      ap : AccountPeriod()
      acc : Account()
    then
      System.out.println( acc.accountNo +
                          " : " + acc.balance );
    end

For this example, the rules in the `"report"` agenda group must always be executed first and the rules in the `"calculation"` agenda group must always be executed second. Any remaining rules in other agenda groups can then be executed. Therefore, the `"report"` and `"calculation"` groups must receive the focus to be executed in that order, before other rules can be executed:

Set the focus for the order of agenda group execution

    Agenda agenda = ksession.getAgenda();
    agenda.getAgendaGroup( "report" ).setFocus();
    agenda.getAgendaGroup( "calculation" ).setFocus();
    ksession.fireAllRules();

You can also use the `clear()` method to cancel all the activations generated by the rules belonging to a given agenda group before each has had a chance to be executed:

Cancel all other rule activations

    ksession.getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "Group A" ).clear();

#### 3.4.3. Activation groups for rules

An activation group is a set of rules bound together by the same `activation-group` rule attribute. In this group, only one rule can be executed. After conditions are met for a rule in that group to be executed, all other pending rule executions from that activation group are removed from the agenda.

For example, the following sample DRL rules belong to the specified activation group and are listed in the Drools engine stack in the order shown:

Sample DRL rules for banking

    rule "Print balance for AccountPeriod1"
      activation-group "report"
    when
      ap : AccountPeriod1()
      acc : Account()
    then
      System.out.println( acc.accountNo +
                          " : " + acc.balance );
    end

    rule "Print balance for AccountPeriod2"
      activation-group "report"
    when
      ap : AccountPeriod2()
      acc : Account()
    then
      System.out.println( acc.accountNo +
                          " : " + acc.balance );
    end

For this example, if the first rule in the `"report"` activation group is executed, the second rule in the group and all other executable rules on the agenda are removed from the agenda.

### 3.5. Configuring logging in the Drools engine

The Drools engine uses the Java logging API SLF4J for system logging. You can use one of the following logging utilities with the Drools engine to investigate Drools engine activity, such as for troubleshooting or data gathering:

- Logback

- Apache Commons Logging

- Apache Log4j

- `java.util.logging` package

Procedure

For the logging utility that you want to use, add the relevant dependency to your Maven project or save the relevant XML configuration file in the `org.drools` package of your Drools distribution:

Example Maven dependency for Logback

    <dependency>
      <groupId>ch.qos.logback</groupId>
      <artifactId>logback-classic</artifactId>
      <version>${logback.version}</version>
    </dependency>

Example logback.xml configuration file in org.drools package

    <configuration>
      <logger name="org.drools" level="debug"/>
      ...
    <configuration>

Example log4j.xml configuration file in org.drools package

    <log4j:configuration xmlns:log4j="http://jakarta.apache.org/log4j/">
      <category name="org.drools">
        <priority value="debug" />
      </category>
      ...
    </log4j:configuration>

| If you are developing for an ultra light environment, use the `slf4j-nop` or `slf4j-simple` logger.

### 3.6. Complex event processing (CEP)

In Drools, an event is a record of a significant change of state in the application domain at a point in time. Depending on how the domain is modeled, the change of state may be represented by a single event, multiple atomic events, or hierarchies of correlated events. From a complex event processing (CEP) perspective, an event is a type of fact or object that occurs at a specific point in time, and a business rule is a definition of how to react to the data from that fact or object. For example, in a stock broker application, a change in security prices, a change in ownership from seller to buyer, or a change in an account holder’s balance are all considered to be events because a change has occurred in the state of the application domain at a given time.

The Drools engine in Drools uses complex event processing (CEP) to detect and process multiple events within a collection of events, to uncover relationships that exist between events, and to infer new data from the events and their relationships.

CEP use cases share several requirements and goals with business rule use cases.

From a business perspective, business rule definitions are often defined based on the occurrence of scenarios triggered by events. In the following examples, events form the basis of business rules:

- In an algorithmic trading application, a rule performs an action if the security price increases by X percent above the day opening price. The price increases are denoted by events on a stock trading application.

- In a monitoring application, a rule performs an action if the temperature in the server room increases X degrees in Y minutes. The sensor readings are denoted by events.

From a technical perspective, business rule evaluation and CEP have the following key similarities:

- Both business rule evaluation and CEP require seamless integration with the enterprise infrastructure and applications. This is particularly important with life-cycle management, auditing, and security.

- Both business rule evaluation and CEP have functional requirements such as pattern matching, and non-functional requirements such as response time limits and query-rule explanations.

CEP scenarios have the following key characteristics:

- Scenarios usually process large numbers of events, but only a small percentage of the events are relevant.

- Events are usually immutable and represent a record of change in state.

- Rules and queries run against events and must react to detected event patterns.

- Related events usually have a strong temporal relationship.

- Individual events are not prioritized. The CEP system prioritizes patterns of related events and the relationships between them.

- Events usually need to be composed and aggregated.

Given these common CEP scenario characteristics, the CEP system in Drools supports the following features and functions to optimize event processing:

- Event processing with proper semantics

- Event detection, correlation, aggregation, and composition

- Event stream processing

- Temporal constraints to model the temporal relationships between events

- Sliding windows of significant events

- Session-scoped unified clock

- Required volumes of events for CEP use cases

- Reactive rules

- Adapters for event input into the Drools engine (pipeline)

#### 3.6.1. Events in complex event processing

In Drools, an event is a record of a significant change of state in the application domain at a point in time. Depending on how the domain is modeled, the change of state may be represented by a single event, multiple atomic events, or hierarchies of correlated events. From a complex event processing (CEP) perspective, an event is a type of fact or object that occurs at a specific point in time, and a business rule is a definition of how to react to the data from that fact or object. For example, in a stock broker application, a change in security prices, a change in ownership from seller to buyer, or a change in an account holder’s balance are all considered to be events because a change has occurred in the state of the application domain at a given time.

Events have the following key characteristics:

- Are immutable: An event is a record of change that has occurred at some time in the past and cannot be changed.

  | The Drools engine does not enforce immutability on the Java objects that represent events. This behavior makes event data enrichment possible. Your application should be able to populate unpopulated event attributes, and these attributes are used by the Drools engine to enrich the event with inferred data. However, you should not change event attributes that have already been populated.

- Have strong temporal constraints: Rules involving events usually require the correlation of multiple events that occur at different points in time relative to each other.

- Have managed life cycles: Because events are immutable and have temporal constraints, they are usually only relevant for a specified period of time. This means that the Drools engine can automatically manage the life cycle of events.

- Can use sliding windows: You can define sliding windows of time or length with events. A sliding time window is a specified period of time during which events can be processed. A sliding length window is a specified number of events that can be processed.

#### 3.6.2. Declaring facts as events

You can declare facts as events in your Java class or DRL rule file so that the Drools engine handles the facts as events during complex event processing. You can declare the facts as interval-based events or point-in-time events. Interval-based events have a duration time and persist in the working memory of the Drools engine until their duration time has lapsed. Point-in-time events have no duration and are essentially interval-based events with a duration of zero.

Procedure

For the relevant fact type in your Java class or DRL rule file, enter the `@role( event )` metadata tag and parameter. The `@role` metadata tag accepts the following two values:

- `fact`: (Default) Declares the type as a regular fact

- `event`: Declares the type as an event

For example, the following snippet declares that the `StockPoint` fact type in a stock broker application must be handled as an event:

Declare fact type as an event

    import some.package.StockPoint

    declare StockPoint
      @role( event )
    end

If `StockPoint` is a fact type declared in the DRL rule file instead of in a pre-existing class, you can declare the event in-line in your application code:

Declare fact type in-line and assign it to event role

    declare StockPoint
      @role( event )

      datetime : java.util.Date
      symbol : String
      price : double
    end

#### 3.6.3. Event processing modes in the Drools engine

The Drools engine runs in either cloud mode or stream mode. In cloud mode, the Drools engine processes facts as facts with no temporal constraints, independent of time, and in no particular order. In stream mode, the Drools engine processes facts as events with strong temporal constraints, in real time or near real time. Stream mode uses synchronization to make event processing possible in Drools.

Cloud mode

  Cloud mode is the default operating mode of the Drools engine. In cloud mode, the Drools engine treats events as an unordered cloud. Events still have time stamps, but the Drools engine running in cloud mode cannot draw relevance from the time stamp because cloud mode ignores the present time. This mode uses the rule constraints to find the matching tuples to activate and execute rules.

  Cloud mode does not impose any kind of additional requirements on facts. However, because the Drools engine in this mode has no concept of time, it cannot use temporal features such as sliding windows or automatic life-cycle management. In cloud mode, events must be explicitly retracted when they are no longer needed.

  The following requirements are not imposed in cloud mode:

  - No clock synchronization because the Drools engine has no notion of time

  - No ordering of events because the Drools engine processes events as an unordered cloud, against which the Drools engine match rules

  You can specify cloud mode either by setting the system property in the relevant configuration files or by using the Java client API:

  Set cloud mode using system property

      drools.eventProcessingMode=cloud

  Set cloud mode using Java client API

      import org.kie.api.conf.EventProcessingOption;
      import org.kie.api.KieBaseConfiguration;
      import org.kie.api.KieServices.Factory;

      KieBaseConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieBaseConfiguration();

      config.setOption(EventProcessingOption.CLOUD);

Stream mode

  Stream mode enables the Drools engine to process events chronologically and in real time as they are inserted into the Drools engine. In stream mode, the Drools engine synchronizes streams of events (so that events in different streams can be processed in chronological order), implements sliding windows of time or length, and enables automatic life-cycle management.

  The following requirements apply to stream mode:

  - Events in each stream must be ordered chronologically.

  - A session clock must be present to synchronize event streams.

  | Your application does not need to enforce ordering events between streams, but using event streams that have not been synchronized may cause unexpected results.

  You can specify stream mode either by setting the system property in the relevant configuration files or by using the Java client API:

  Set stream mode using system property

      drools.eventProcessingMode=stream

  Set stream mode using Java client API

      import org.kie.api.conf.EventProcessingOption;
      import org.kie.api.KieBaseConfiguration;
      import org.kie.api.KieServices.Factory;

      KieBaseConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieBaseConfiguration();

      config.setOption(EventProcessingOption.STREAM);

##### 3.6.3.1. Negative patterns in Drools engine stream mode

A negative pattern is a pattern for conditions that are not met. For example, the following DRL rule activates a fire alarm if a fire is detected and the sprinkler is not activated:

Fire alarm rule with a negative pattern

    rule "Sound the alarm"
    when
      $f : FireDetected()
      not(SprinklerActivated())
    then
      // Sound the alarm.
    end

In cloud mode, the Drools engine assumes all facts (regular facts and events) are known in advance and evaluates negative patterns immediately. In stream mode, the Drools engine can support temporal constraints on facts to wait for a set time before activating a rule.

The same example rule in stream mode activates the fire alarm as usual, but applies a 10-second delay.

Fire alarm rule with a negative pattern and time delay (stream mode only)

    rule "Sound the alarm"
    when
      $f : FireDetected()
      not(SprinklerActivated(this after[0s,10s] $f))
    then
      // Sound the alarm.
    end

The following modified fire alarm rule expects one `Heartbeat` event to occur every 10 seconds. If the expected event does not occur, the rule is executed. This rule uses the same type of object in both the first pattern and in the negative pattern. The negative pattern has the temporal constraint to wait 0 to 10 seconds before executing and excludes the `Heartbeat` event bound to `$h` so that the rule can be executed. The bound event `$h` must be explicitly excluded in order for the rule to be executed because the temporal constraint `[0s, …​]` does not inherently exclude that event from being matched again.

Fire alarm rule excluding a bound event in a negative pattern (stream mode only)

    rule "Sound the alarm"
    when
      $h: Heartbeat() from entry-point "MonitoringStream"
      not(Heartbeat(this != $h, this after[0s,10s] $h) from entry-point "MonitoringStream")
    then
      // Sound the alarm.
    end

#### 3.6.4. Metadata tags for events

The Drools engine uses the following metadata tags for events that are inserted into the working memory of the Drools engine. You can change the default metadata tag values in your Java class or DRL rule file as needed.

| The examples in this section assume that the application domain model includes the following class: The VoiceCall fact class
    /**
     * A class that represents a voice call in a Telecom domain model
     */
    public class VoiceCall {
      private String  originNumber;
      private String  destinationNumber;
      private Date    callDateTime;
      private long    callDuration;  // in milliseconds

      // Constructors, getters, and setters
    }

@role

  This tag determines whether a given fact type is handled as a regular fact or an event.

  Default parameter: `fact`

  Supported parameters: `fact`, `event`

      @role( <fact_or_event> )

  Example: Declare VoiceCall as event type

      declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
      end

@timestamp

  This tag is automatically assigned to every event in the Drools engine. By default, the time is provided by the session clock and assigned to the event when it is inserted into the working memory of the Drools engine. You can specify a custom time stamp attribute instead of the default time stamp added by the session clock.

  Default parameter: The time added by the Drools engine session clock

  Supported parameters: Session clock time or custom time stamp attribute

      @timestamp( <attributeName> )

  Example: Declare VoiceCall timestamp attribute

      declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
      end

@duration

  This tag determines the duration time for events in the Drools engine. Events can be interval-based events or point-in-time events. Interval-based events have a duration time and persist in the working memory of the Drools engine until their duration time has lapsed. Point-in-time events have no duration and are essentially interval-based events with a duration of zero. By default, every event in the Drools engine has a duration of zero. You can specify a custom duration attribute instead of the default.

  Default parameter: null (zero)

  Supported parameters: Custom duration attribute

      @duration( <attributeName> )

  Example: Declare VoiceCall duration attribute

      declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
        @duration( callDuration )
      end

@expires

  This tag determines the time duration before an event expires in the working memory of the Drools engine. By default, an event expires when the event can no longer match and activate any of the current rules. You can define an amount of time after which an event should expire. This tag is available only when the Drools engine is running in stream mode.

  Default parameter: null (event expires after event can no longer match and activate rules)

  Supported parameters: Custom `timeOffset` attribute in the format `[#d][#h][#m][#s][[ms]]`

      @expires( <timeOffset> )

  Example: Declare expiration offset for VoiceCall events

      declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
        @duration( callDuration )
        @expires( 1h35m )
      end

#### 3.6.5. Temporal operators for events

In stream mode, the Drools engine supports the following temporal operators for events that are inserted into the working memory of the Drools engine. You can use these operators to define the temporal reasoning behavior of the events that you declare in your Java class or DRL rule file. Temporal operators are not supported when the Drools engine is running in cloud mode.

- `after`

- `before`

- `coincides`

- `during`

- `includes`

- `finishes`

- `finished by`

- `meets`

- `met by`

- `overlaps`

- `overlapped by`

- `starts`

- `started by`

  after

    This operator specifies if the current event occurs after the correlated event. This operator can also define an amount of time after which the current event can follow the correlated event, or a delimiting time range during which the current event can follow the correlated event.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` starts between 3 minutes and 30 seconds and 4 minutes after `$eventB` finishes. If `$eventA` starts earlier than 3 minutes and 30 seconds after `$eventB` finishes, or later than 4 minutes after `$eventB` finishes, then the pattern is not matched.

        $eventA : EventA(this after[3m30s, 4m] $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        3m30s <= $eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.endTimeStamp <= 4m

    The `after` operator supports up to two parameter values:

    - If two values are defined, the interval starts on the first value (3 minutes and 30 seconds in the example) and ends on the second value (4 minutes in the example).

    - If only one value is defined, the interval starts on the provided value and runs indefinitely with no end time.

    - If no value is defined, the interval starts at 1 millisecond and runs indefinitely with no end time.

    The `after` operator also supports negative time ranges:

        $eventA : EventA(this after[-3m30s, -2m] $eventB)

    If the first value is greater than the second value, the Drools engine automatically reverses them. For example, the following two patterns are interpreted by the Drools engine in the same way:

        $eventA : EventA(this after[-3m30s, -2m] $eventB)
        $eventA : EventA(this after[-2m, -3m30s] $eventB)

  before

    This operator specifies if the current event occurs before the correlated event. This operator can also define an amount of time before which the current event can precede the correlated event, or a delimiting time range during which the current event can precede the correlated event.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` finishes between 3 minutes and 30 seconds and 4 minutes before `$eventB` starts. If `$eventA` finishes earlier than 3 minutes and 30 seconds before `$eventB` starts, or later than 4 minutes before `$eventB` starts, then the pattern is not matched.

        $eventA : EventA(this before[3m30s, 4m] $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        3m30s <= $eventB.startTimestamp - $eventA.endTimeStamp <= 4m

    The `before` operator supports up to two parameter values:

    - If two values are defined, the interval starts on the first value (3 minutes and 30 seconds in the example) and ends on the second value (4 minutes in the example).

    - If only one value is defined, the interval starts on the provided value and runs indefinitely with no end time.

    - If no value is defined, the interval starts at 1 millisecond and runs indefinitely with no end time.

    The `before` operator also supports negative time ranges:

        $eventA : EventA(this before[-3m30s, -2m] $eventB)

    If the first value is greater than the second value, the Drools engine automatically reverses them. For example, the following two patterns are interpreted by the Drools engine in the same way:

        $eventA : EventA(this before[-3m30s, -2m] $eventB)
        $eventA : EventA(this before[-2m, -3m30s] $eventB)

  coincides

    This operator specifies if the two events occur at the same time, with the same start and end times.

    For example, the following pattern matches if both the start and end time stamps of `$eventA` and `$eventB` are identical:

        $eventA : EventA(this coincides $eventB)

    The `coincides` operator supports up to two parameter values for the distance between the event start and end times, if they are not identical:

    - If only one parameter is given, the parameter is used to set the threshold for both the start and end times of both events.

    - If two parameters are given, the first is used as a threshold for the start time and the second is used as a threshold for the end time.

    The following pattern uses start and end time thresholds:

        $eventA : EventA(this coincides[15s, 10s] $eventB)

    The pattern matches if the following conditions are met:

        abs($eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.startTimestamp) <= 15s
        &&
        abs($eventA.endTimestamp - $eventB.endTimestamp) <= 10s

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `coincides` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  during

    This operator specifies if the current event occurs within the time frame of when the correlated event starts and ends. The current event must start after the correlated event starts and must end before the correlated event ends. (With the `coincides` operator, the start and end times are the same or nearly the same.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` starts after `$eventB` starts and ends before `$eventB` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this during $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventB.startTimestamp < $eventA.startTimestamp <= $eventA.endTimestamp < $eventB.endTimestamp

    The `during` operator supports one, two, or four optional parameters:

    - If one value is defined, this value is the maximum distance between the start times of the two events and the maximum distance between the end times of the two events.

    - If two values are defined, these values are a threshold between which the current event start time and end time must occur in relation to the correlated event start and end times.

      For example, if the values are `5s` and `10s`, the current event must start between 5 and 10 seconds after the correlated event starts and must end between 5 and 10 seconds before the correlated event ends.

    - If four values are defined, the first and second values are the minimum and maximum distances between the start times of the events, and the third and fourth values are the minimum and maximum distances between the end times of the two events.

  includes

    This operator specifies if the correlated event occurs within the time frame of when the current event occurs. The correlated event must start after the current event starts and must end before the current event ends. (The behavior of this operator is the reverse of the `during` operator behavior.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventB` starts after `$eventA` starts and ends before `$eventA` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this includes $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventA.startTimestamp < $eventB.startTimestamp <= $eventB.endTimestamp < $eventA.endTimestamp

    The `includes` operator supports one, two, or four optional parameters:

    - If one value is defined, this value is the maximum distance between the start times of the two events and the maximum distance between the end times of the two events.

    - If two values are defined, these values are a threshold between which the correlated event start time and end time must occur in relation to the current event start and end times.

      For example, if the values are `5s` and `10s`, the correlated event must start between 5 and 10 seconds after the current event starts and must end between 5 and 10 seconds before the current event ends.

    - If four values are defined, the first and second values are the minimum and maximum distances between the start times of the events, and the third and fourth values are the minimum and maximum distances between the end times of the two events.

  finishes

    This operator specifies if the current event starts after the correlated event but both events end at the same time.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` starts after `$eventB` starts and ends at the same time when `$eventB` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this finishes $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventB.startTimestamp < $eventA.startTimestamp
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp == $eventB.endTimestamp

    The `finishes` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum time allowed between the end times of the two events:

        $eventA : EventA(this finishes[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        $eventB.startTimestamp < $eventA.startTimestamp
        &&
        abs($eventA.endTimestamp - $eventB.endTimestamp) <= 5s

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `finishes` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  finished by

    This operator specifies if the correlated event starts after the current event but both events end at the same time. (The behavior of this operator is the reverse of the `finishes` operator behavior.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventB` starts after `$eventA` starts and ends at the same time when `$eventA` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this finishedby $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventA.startTimestamp < $eventB.startTimestamp
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp == $eventB.endTimestamp

    The `finished by` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum time allowed between the end times of the two events:

        $eventA : EventA(this finishedby[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        $eventA.startTimestamp < $eventB.startTimestamp
        &&
        abs($eventA.endTimestamp - $eventB.endTimestamp) <= 5s

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `finished by` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  meets

    This operator specifies if the current event ends at the same time when the correlated event starts.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` ends at the same time when `$eventB` starts:

        $eventA : EventA(this meets $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        abs($eventB.startTimestamp - $eventA.endTimestamp) == 0

    The `meets` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum time allowed between the end time of the current event and the start time of the correlated event:

        $eventA : EventA(this meets[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        abs($eventB.startTimestamp - $eventA.endTimestamp) <= 5s

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `meets` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  met by

    This operator specifies if the correlated event ends at the same time when the current event starts. (The behavior of this operator is the reverse of the `meets` operator behavior.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventB` ends at the same time when `$eventA` starts:

        $eventA : EventA(this metby $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        abs($eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.endTimestamp) == 0

    The `met by` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum distance between the end time of the correlated event and the start time of the current event:

        $eventA : EventA(this metby[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        abs($eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.endTimestamp) <= 5s

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `met by` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  overlaps

    This operator specifies if the current event starts before the correlated event starts and it ends during the time frame that the correlated event occurs. The current event must end between the start and end times of the correlated event.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` starts before `$eventB` starts and then ends while `$eventB` occurs, before `$eventB` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this overlaps $eventB)

    The `overlaps` operator supports up to two parameters:

    - If one parameter is defined, the value is the maximum distance between the start time of the correlated event and the end time of the current event.

    - If two parameters are defined, the values are the minimum distance (first value) and the maximum distance (second value) between the start time of the correlated event and the end time of the current event.

  overlapped by

    This operator specifies if the correlated event starts before the current event starts and it ends during the time frame that the current event occurs. The correlated event must end between the start and end times of the current event. (The behavior of this operator is the reverse of the `overlaps` operator behavior.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventB` starts before `$eventA` starts and then ends while `$eventA` occurs, before `$eventA` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this overlappedby $eventB)

    The `overlapped by` operator supports up to two parameters:

    - If one parameter is defined, the value is the maximum distance between the start time of the current event and the end time of the correlated event.

    - If two parameters are defined, the values are the minimum distance (first value) and the maximum distance (second value) between the start time of the current event and the end time of the correlated event.

  starts

    This operator specifies if the two events start at the same time but the current event ends before the correlated event ends.

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` and `$eventB` start at the same time, and `$eventA` ends before `$eventB` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this starts $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventA.startTimestamp == $eventB.startTimestamp
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp < $eventB.endTimestamp

    The `starts` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum distance between the start times of the two events:

        $eventA : EventA(this starts[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        abs($eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.startTimestamp) <= 5s
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp < $eventB.endTimestamp

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `starts` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

  started by

    This operator specifies if the two events start at the same time but the correlated event ends before the current event ends. (The behavior of this operator is the reverse of the `starts` operator behavior.)

    For example, the following pattern matches if `$eventA` and `$eventB` start at the same time, and `$eventB` ends before `$eventA` ends:

        $eventA : EventA(this startedby $eventB)

    You can also express this operator in the following way:

        $eventA.startTimestamp == $eventB.startTimestamp
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp > $eventB.endTimestamp

    The `started by` operator supports one optional parameter that sets the maximum distance between the start times of the two events:

        $eventA : EventA( this starts[5s] $eventB)

    This pattern matches if these conditions are met:

        abs( $eventA.startTimestamp - $eventB.startTimestamp ) <= 5s
        &&
        $eventA.endTimestamp > $eventB.endTimestamp

    | The Drools engine does not support negative intervals for the `started by` operator. If you use negative intervals, the Drools engine generates an error.

#### 3.6.6. Session clock implementations in the Drools engine

During complex event processing, events in the Drools engine may have temporal constraints and therefore require a session clock that provides the current time. For example, if a rule needs to determine the average price of a given stock over the last 60 minutes, the Drools engine must be able to compare the stock price event time stamp with the current time in the session clock.

The Drools engine supports a real-time clock and a pseudo clock. You can use one or both clock types depending on the scenario:

- Rules testing: Testing requires a controlled environment, and when the tests include rules with temporal constraints, you must be able to control the input rules and facts and the flow of time.

- Regular execution: The Drools engine reacts to events in real time and therefore requires a real-time clock.

- Special environments: Specific environments may have specific time control requirements. For example, clustered environments may require clock synchronization or Java Enterprise Edition (JEE) environments may require a clock provided by the application server.

- Rules replay or simulation: In order to replay or simulate scenarios, the application must be able to control the flow of time.

Consider your environment requirements as you decide whether to use a real-time clock or pseudo clock in the Drools engine.

Real-time clock

  The real-time clock is the default clock implementation in the Drools engine and uses the system clock to determine the current time for time stamps. To configure the Drools engine to use the real-time clock, set the KIE session configuration parameter to `realtime`:

  Configure real-time clock in KIE session

      import org.kie.api.KieServices.Factory;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.conf.ClockTypeOption;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSessionConfiguration;

      KieSessionConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();

      config.setOption(ClockTypeOption.get("realtime"));

Pseudo clock

  The pseudo clock implementation in the Drools engine is helpful for testing temporal rules and it can be controlled by the application. To configure the Drools engine to use the pseudo clock, set the KIE session configuration parameter to `pseudo`:

  Configure pseduo clock in KIE session

      import org.kie.api.runtime.conf.ClockTypeOption;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSessionConfiguration;
      import org.kie.api.KieServices.Factory;

      KieSessionConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();

      config.setOption(ClockTypeOption.get("pseudo"));

  You can also use additional configurations and fact handlers to control the pseudo clock:

  Control pseudo clock behavior in KIE session

      import java.util.concurrent.TimeUnit;

      import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSessionConfiguration;
      import org.kie.api.KieServices.Factory;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSession;
      import org.drools.core.time.SessionPseudoClock;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.rule.FactHandle;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.conf.ClockTypeOption;

      KieSessionConfiguration conf = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();

      conf.setOption( ClockTypeOption.get("pseudo"));
      KieSession session = kbase.newKieSession(conf, null);

      SessionPseudoClock clock = session.getSessionClock();

      // While inserting facts, advance the clock as necessary.
      FactHandle handle1 = session.insert(tick1);
      clock.advanceTime(10, TimeUnit.SECONDS);

      FactHandle handle2 = session.insert(tick2);
      clock.advanceTime(30, TimeUnit.SECONDS);

      FactHandle handle3 = session.insert(tick3);

#### 3.6.7. Event streams and entry points

The Drools engine can process high volumes of events in the form of event streams. In DRL rule declarations, a stream is also known as an entry point. When you declare an entry point in a DRL rule or Java application, the Drools engine, at compile time, identifies and creates the proper internal structures to use data from only that entry point to evaluate that rule.

Facts from one entry point, or stream, can join facts from any other entry point in addition to facts already in the working memory of the Drools engine. Facts always remain associated with the entry point through which they entered the Drools engine. Facts of the same type can enter the Drools engine through several entry points, but facts that enter the Drools engine through entry point A can never match a pattern from entry point B.

Event streams have the following characteristics:

- Events in the stream are ordered by time stamp. The time stamps may have different semantics for different streams, but they are always ordered internally.

- Event streams usually have a high volume of events.

- Atomic events in streams are usually not useful individually, only collectively in a stream.

- Event streams can be homogeneous and contain a single type of event, or heterogeneous and contain events of different types.

##### 3.6.7.1. Declaring entry points for rule data

You can declare an entry point (event stream) for events so that the Drools engine uses data from only that entry point to evaluate the rules. You can declare an entry point either implicitly by referencing it in DRL rules or explicitly in your Java application.

Procedure

Use one of the following methods to declare the entry point:

- In the DRL rule file, specify `from entry-point "<name>"` for the inserted fact:

  Authorize withdrawal rule with "ATM Stream" entry point

      rule "Authorize withdrawal"
      when
        WithdrawRequest($ai : accountId, $am : amount) from entry-point "ATM Stream"
        CheckingAccount(accountId == $ai, balance > $am)
      then
        // Authorize withdrawal.
      end

  Apply fee rule with "Branch Stream" entry point

      rule "Apply fee on withdraws on branches"
      when
        WithdrawRequest($ai : accountId, processed == true) from entry-point "Branch Stream"
        CheckingAccount(accountId == $ai)
      then
        // Apply a $2 fee on the account.
      end

  Both example DRL rules from a banking application insert the event `WithdrawalRequest` with the fact `CheckingAccount`, but from different entry points. At run time, the Drools engine evaluates the `Authorize withdrawal` rule using data from only the `"ATM Stream"` entry point, and evaluates the `Apply fee` rule using data from only the `"Branch Stream"` entry point. Any events inserted into the `"ATM Stream"` can never match patterns for the `"Apply fee"` rule, and any events inserted into the `"Branch Stream"` can never match patterns for the `"Authorize withdrawal rule"`.

- In the Java application code, use the `getEntryPoint()` method to specify and obtain an `EntryPoint` object and insert facts into that entry point accordingly:

  Java application code with EntryPoint object and inserted facts

      import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSession;
      import org.kie.api.runtime.rule.EntryPoint;

      // Create your KIE base and KIE session as usual.
      KieSession session = ...

      // Create a reference to the entry point.
      EntryPoint atmStream = session.getEntryPoint("ATM Stream");

      // Start inserting your facts into the entry point.
      atmStream.insert(aWithdrawRequest);

  Any DRL rules that specify `from entry-point "ATM Stream"` are then evaluated based on the data in this entry point only.

#### 3.6.8. Sliding windows of time or length

In stream mode, the Drools engine can process events from a specified sliding window of time or length. A sliding time window is a specified period of time during which events can be processed. A sliding length window is a specified number of events that can be processed. When you declare a sliding window in a DRL rule or Java application, the Drools engine, at compile time, identifies and creates the proper internal structures to use data from only that sliding window to evaluate that rule.

For example, the following DRL rule snippets instruct the Drools engine to process only the stock points from the last 2 minutes (sliding time window) or to process only the last 10 stock points (sliding length window):

Process stock points from the last 2 minutes (sliding time window)

    StockPoint() over window:time(2m)

Process the last 10 stock points (sliding length window)

    StockPoint() over window:length(10)

##### 3.6.8.1. Declaring sliding windows for rule data

You can declare a sliding window of time (flow of time) or length (number of occurrences) for events so that the Drools engine uses data from only that window to evaluate the rules.

Procedure

In the DRL rule file, specify `over window:<time_or_length>(<value>)` for the inserted fact.

For example, the following two DRL rules activate a fire alarm based on an average temperature. However, the first rule uses a sliding time window to calculate the average over the last 10 minutes while the second rule uses a sliding length window to calculate the average over the last one hundred temperature readings.

Average temperature over sliding time window

    rule "Sound the alarm if temperature rises above threshold"
    when
      TemperatureThreshold($max : max)
      Number(doubleValue > $max) from accumulate(
        SensorReading($temp : temperature) over window:time(10m),
        average($temp))
    then
      // Sound the alarm.
    end

Average temperature over sliding length window

    rule "Sound the alarm if temperature rises above threshold"
    when
      TemperatureThreshold($max : max)
      Number(doubleValue > $max) from accumulate(
        SensorReading($temp : temperature) over window:length(100),
        average($temp))
    then
      // Sound the alarm.
    end

The Drools engine discards any `SensorReading` events that are more than 10 minutes old or that are not part of the last one hundred readings, and continues recalculating the average as the minutes or readings "slide" forward in real time.

The Drools engine does not automatically remove outdated events from the KIE session because other rules without sliding window declarations might depend on those events. The Drools engine stores events in the KIE session until the events expire either by explicit rule declarations or by implicit reasoning within the Drools engine based on inferred data in the KIE base.

#### 3.6.9. Memory management for events

In stream mode, the Drools engine uses automatic memory management to maintain events that are stored in KIE sessions. The Drools engine can retract from a KIE session any events that no longer match any rule due to their temporal constraints and release any resources held by the retracted events.

The Drools engine uses either explicit or inferred expiration to retract outdated events:

- Explicit expiration: The Drools engine removes events that are explicitly set to expire in rules that declare the `@expires` tag:

  DRL rule snippet with explicit expiration

      declare StockPoint
        @expires( 30m )
      end

  This example rule sets any `StockPoint` events to expire after 30 minutes and to be removed from the KIE session if no other rules use the events.

- Inferred expiration: The Drools engine can calculate the expiration offset for a given event implicitly by analyzing the temporal constraints in the rules:

  DRL rule with temporal constraints

      rule "Correlate orders"
      when
        $bo : BuyOrder($id : id)
        $ae : AckOrder(id == $id, this after[0,10s] $bo)
      then
        // Perform an action.
      end

  For this example rule, the Drools engine automatically calculates that whenever a `BuyOrder` event occurs, the Drools engine needs to store the event for up to 10 seconds and wait for the matching `AckOrder` event. After 10 seconds, the Drools engine infers the expiration and removes the event from the KIE session. An `AckOrder` event can only match an existing `BuyOrder` event, so the Drools engine infers the expiration if no match occurs and removes the event immediately.

  The Drools engine analyzes the entire KIE base to find the offset for every event type and to ensure that no other rules use the events that are pending removal. Whenever an implicit expiration clashes with an explicit expiration value, the Drools engine uses the greater time frame of the two to store the event longer.

## 4. Running

This section extends the KIE Running section, which should be read first, with specifics for the Drools run time.

### 4.1. KieRuntime

#### 4.1.1. EntryPoint

The `EntryPoint` provides the methods around inserting, updating and deleting facts. The term "entry point" is related to the fact that we have multiple partitions in a Working Memory and you can choose which one you are inserting into. The use of multiple entry points is more common in event processing use cases, but they can be used by pure rule applications as well.

The `KieRuntime` interface provides the main interaction with the Drools engine. It is available in rule consequences and process actions. In this manual the focus is on the methods and interfaces related to rules, and the methods pertaining to processes will be ignored for now. But you’ll notice that the `KieRuntime` inherits methods from both the `WorkingMemory` and the `ProcessRuntime`, thereby providing a unified API to work with processes and rules. When working with rules, three interfaces form the `KieRuntime`: `EntryPoint`, `WorkingMemory` and the `KieRuntime` itself.

Figure 42. EntryPoint

##### 4.1.1.1. Insert

In order for a fact to be evaluated against the rules in a `KieBase`, it has to be inserted into the session. This is done by calling the method `insert(yourObject)`. When a fact is inserted into the session, some of its properties might be immediately evaluated (eager evaluation) and some might be deferred for later evaluation (lazy evaluation). The exact behaviour depends on the Drools engine algorithm being used.

| Expert systems typically use the term assert or assertion to refer to facts made available to the system. However, due to "assert" being a keyword in most languages, we have decided to use the `insert` keyword; In this manual, the two terms are used interchangeably.

When an Object is inserted it returns a `FactHandle`. This `FactHandle` is the token used to represent your inserted object within the `WorkingMemory`. It is also used for interactions with the `WorkingMemory` when you wish to delete or modify an object.

    Cheese stilton = new Cheese("stilton");
    FactHandle stiltonHandle = ksession.insert( stilton );

As mentioned in the KieBase section, a Working Memory may operate in two assertion modes: either equality or identity. Identity is the default.

Identity means that the Working Memory uses an `IdentityHashMap` to store all asserted objects. New instance assertions always result in the return of new `FactHandle`, but if an instance is asserted again then it returns the original fact handle, i.e., it ignores repeated insertions for the same object.

Equality means that the Working Memory uses a `HashMap` to store all asserted objects. An object instance assertion will only return a new `FactHandle` if the inserted object is not equal (according to its `equal()/hashcode()` methods) to an already existing fact.

##### 4.1.1.2. Delete

In order to remove a fact from the session, the method `delete()` is used. When a fact is deleted, any matches that are active and depend on that fact will be cancelled. Note that it is possible to have rules that depend on the nonexistence of a fact, in which case deleting a fact may cause a rule to activate. (See the `not` and `exists` keywords).

| Expert systems typically use the term retract or retraction to refer to the operation of removing facts from the Working Memory. Drools prefers the keyword `delete` for symmetry with the keyword `insert`; Drools also supports the keyword `retract`, but it was deprecated in favor of `delete`. In this manual, the two terms are used interchangeably.

Retraction may be done using the `FactHandle` that was returned by the insert call. On the right hand side of a rule the `delete` statement is used, which works with a simple object reference.

    Cheese stilton = new Cheese("stilton");
    FactHandle stiltonHandle = ksession.insert( stilton );
    ....
    ksession.delete( stiltonHandle );

##### 4.1.1.3. Update

The Drools engine must be notified of modified facts, so that they can be reprocessed. You must use the `update()` method to notify the `WorkingMemory` of changed objects for those objects that are not able to notify the `WorkingMemory` themselves. Notice that `update()` always takes the modified object as a second parameter, which allows you to specify new instances for immutable objects. On the right hand side of a rule the `modify` statement is recommended, as it makes the changes and notifies the Drools engine in a single statement. Alternatively, after changing a fact object’s field values through calls of setter methods you must invoke `update` immediately, event before changing another fact, or you will cause problems with the indexing within the Drools engine. The modify statement avoids this problem.

    Cheese stilton = new Cheese("stilton");
    FactHandle stiltonHandle = workingMemory.insert( stilton );
    ...
    stilton.setPrice( 100 );
    workingMemory.update( stiltonHandle, stilton );

#### 4.1.2. RuleRuntime

The RuleRuntime provides access to the Agenda, permits query executions, and lets you access named Entry Points.

Figure 43. RuleRuntime

##### 4.1.2.1. Query

Queries are used to retrieve fact sets based on patterns, as they are used in rules. Patterns may make use of optional parameters. Queries can be defined in the KIE base, from where they are called up to return the matching results. While iterating over the result collection, any identifier bound in the query can be used to access the corresponding fact or fact field by calling the `get` method with the binding variable’s name as its argument. If the binding refers to a fact object, its FactHandle can be retrieved by calling `getFactHandle`, again with the variable’s name as the parameter.

Figure 44. QueryResults
Figure 45. QueryResultsRow
Example 64. Simple Query Example

    QueryResults results =
        ksession.getQueryResults( "my query", new Object[] { "string" } );
    for ( QueryResultsRow row : results ) {
        System.out.println( row.get( "varName" ) );
    }

##### 4.1.2.2. Live Queries

Invoking queries and processing the results by iterating over the returned set is not a good way to monitor changes over time.

To alleviate this, Drools provides Live Queries, which have a listener attached instead of returning an iterable result set. These live queries stay open by creating a view and publishing change events for the contents of this view. To activate, you start your query with parameters and listen to changes in the resulting view. The `dispose` method terminates the query and discontinues this reactive scenario.

Example 65. Implementing ViewChangedEventListener

    final List updated = new ArrayList();
    final List removed = new ArrayList();
    final List added = new ArrayList();

    ViewChangedEventListener listener = new ViewChangedEventListener() {
     public void rowUpdated(Row row) {
      updated.add( row.get( "$price" ) );
     }

     public void rowRemoved(Row row) {
      removed.add( row.get( "$price" ) );
     }

     public void rowAdded(Row row) {
      added.add( row.get( "$price" ) );
     }
    };

    // Open the LiveQuery
    LiveQuery query = ksession.openLiveQuery( "cheeses",
                                              new Object[] { "cheddar", "stilton" },
                                              listener );
    ...
    ...
    query.dispose() // calling dispose to terminate the live query

A Drools blog article contains an example of Glazed Lists integration for live queries:

http://blog.athico.com/2010/07/glazed-lists-examples-for-drools-live.html

#### 4.1.3. StatefulRuleSession

The `StatefulRuleSession` is inherited by the `KieSession` and provides the rule related methods that are relevant from outside of the Drools engine.

Figure 46. StatefulRuleSession

##### 4.1.3.1. Agenda Filters

Figure 47. AgendaFilters

` AgendaFilter` objects are optional implementations of the filter interface which are used to allow or deny the firing of a match. What you filter on is entirely up to the implementation. Drools 4.0 used to supply some out of the box filters, which have not be exposed in drools 5.0 knowledge-api, but they are simple to implement and the Drools 4.0 code base can be referred to.

To use a filter specify it while calling `fireAllRules()`. The following example permits only rules ending in the string `"Test"`. All others will be filtered out.

    ksession.fireAllRules( new RuleNameEndsWithAgendaFilter( "Test" ) );

### 4.2. Event Model

The event package provides means to be notified of Drools engine events, including rules firing, objects being asserted, etc. This allows you, for instance, to separate logging and auditing activities from the main part of your application (and the rules).

The `WorkingMemoryEventManager` allows for listeners to be added and removed, so that events for the working memory and the agenda can be listened to.

Figure 48. WorkingMemoryEventManager

The following code snippet shows how a simple agenda listener is declared and attached to a session. It will print matches after they have fired.

Example 66. Adding an AgendaEventListener

    ksession.addEventListener( new DefaultAgendaEventListener() {
       public void afterMatchFired(AfterMatchFiredEvent event) {
           super.afterMatchFired( event );
           System.out.println( event );
       }
    });

Drools also provides `DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener` and `DebugAgendaEventListener` which implement each method with a debug print statement. To print all Working Memory events, you add a listener like this:

Example 67. Adding a DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener

    ksession.addEventListener( new DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener() );

The events currently supported are:

- MatchCreatedEvent

- MatchCancelledEvent

- BeforeMatchFiredEvent

- AfterMatchFiredEvent

- AgendaGroupPushedEvent

- AgendaGroupPoppedEvent

- ObjectInsertEvent

- ObjectDeletedEvent

- ObjectUpdatedEvent

- ProcessCompletedEvent

- ProcessNodeLeftEvent

- ProcessNodeTriggeredEvent

- ProcessStartEvent

### 4.3. Rule Execution Modes

Drools provides two modes for rule execution - passive and active.

As a general guideline, Passive Mode is most suitable for Drools engine applications which need to explicitly control when the Drools engine shall evaluate and fire the rules, or for CEP applications making use of the Pseudo Clock. Active Mode is most effective for Drools engine applications which delegate control of when rules are evaluated and fired to the Drools engine, or for typical CEP application making use of the Real Time Clock.

#### 4.3.1. Passive Mode

With Passive mode not only is the user responsible for working memory operations, such as `insert()`, but also for when the rules are to evaluate the data and fire the resulting rule instantiations - using `fireAllRules()` .

An example outline of Drools code for a CEP application making use of Passive Mode:

    KieSessionConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    config.setOption( ClockTypeOption.get("pseudo") );
    KieSession session = kbase.newKieSession( conf, null );
    SessionPseudoClock clock = session.getSessionClock();

    session.insert( tick1 );
    session.fireAllRules();

    clock.advanceTime(1, TimeUnit.SECONDS);
    session.insert( tick2 );
    session.fireAllRules();

    clock.advanceTime(1, TimeUnit.SECONDS);
    session.insert( tick3 );
    session.fireAllRules();

    session.dispose();

#### 4.3.2. Active Mode

Drools offers a `fireUntilHalt()` method, that starts the Drools engine in Active Mode, which is asynchronous in behavior, where rules will be continually evaluated and fired, until a `halt()` call is made.

This is specially useful for CEP scenarios that require what is commonly known as "active queries".

Please note calling `fireUntilHalt()` blocks the current thread, while the Drools engine will start and continue running asynchronously until the `halt()` is called on the KieSession. It is suggested therefore to call `fireUntilHalt()` from a dedicated thread, so the current thread does not get blocked indefinitely; this also enable the current thread to call `halt()` at a later stage, ref. examples below.

An example outline of Drools code for a CEP application making use of Active Mode:

    KieSessionConfiguration config = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    config.setOption( ClockTypeOption.get("realtime") );
    KieSession session = kbase.newKieSession( conf, null );

    new Thread( new Runnable() {
      @Override
      public void run() {
          session.fireUntilHalt();
      }
    } ).start();

    session.insert( tick1 );

    ... Thread.sleep( 1000L ); ...

    session.insert( tick2 );

    ... Thread.sleep( 1000L ); ...

    session.insert( tick3 );

    session.halt();
    session.dispose();

| Generally, it is not recommended mixing `fireAllRules()` and `fireUntilHalt()`, especially from different threads. However the Drools engine is able to handle such situations safely, thanks to the internal state machine. If `fireAllRules()` is running and a call `fireUntilHalt()` is made, the Drools engine will wait until the `fireAllRules()` is finished and then start `fireUntilHalt()`. However if `fireUntilHalt()` is running and `fireAllRules()` is called, the later is ignored and will just return directly. For more details about thread-safety and the internal state machine, reference section "Improved multi-threading behaviour".

##### 4.3.2.1. Performing KieSession operations atomically when in Active Mode

When in Active Mode, the Drools engine is in control of when the rule shall be evaluated and fired; therefore it is important that operations on the KieSession are performed in a thread-safe manner. Additionally, from a client-side perspective, there might be the need for more than one operations to be called on the KieSession in between rule evaluations, but for engine to consider these as an atomic operation: for example, inserting more than one Fact at a given time, but for the Drools engine to await until all the inserts are done, before evaluating the rules again.

Drools offers a `submit()` method to group and perform operations on the KieSession as a thread-safe atomic action, while in Active Mode.

An example outline of Drools code to perform KieSession operations atomically when in Active Mode:

    KieSession session = ...;

    new Thread( new Runnable() {
      @Override
      public void run() {
          session.fireUntilHalt();
      }
    } ).start();

    final FactHandle fh = session.insert( fact_a );

    ... Thread.sleep( 1000L ); ...

    session.submit( new KieSession.AtomicAction() {
      @Override
      public void execute( KieSession kieSession ) {
        fact_a.setField("value");
        kieSession.update( fh, fact_a );
        kieSession.insert( fact_1 );
        kieSession.insert( fact_2 );
        kieSession.insert( fact_3 );
      }
    } );

    ... Thread.sleep( 1000L ); ...

    session.insert( fact_z );

    session.halt();
    session.dispose();

As a reminder example, the fact handle could also be retrieved from the KieSession:

    ...
    session.insert( fact_a );

    ... Thread.sleep( 1000L ); ...

    session.submit( new KieSession.AtomicAction() {
      @Override
      public void execute( KieSession kieSession ) {
        final FactHandle fh = kieSession.getFactHandle( fact_a );
        fact_a.setField("value");
        kieSession.update( fh, fact_a );
        kieSession.insert( fact_1 );
        kieSession.insert( fact_2 );
        kieSession.insert( fact_3 );
      }
    } );

    ...

### 4.4. Propagation modes

The introduction of PHREAK as default algorithm for the Drools engine made the rules' evaluation lazy. This new Drools lazy behavior allowed a relevant performance boost but, in some very specific cases, breaks the semantic of a few Drools features.

More precisely in some circumstances it is necessary to propagate the insertion of new fact into th session immediately. For instance Drools allows a query to be executed in pull only (or passive) mode by prepending a '?' symbol to its invocation as in the following example:

Example 68. A passive query

    query Q (Integer i)
        String( this == i.toString() )
    end
    rule R when
        $i : Integer()
        ?Q( $i; )
    then
        System.out.println( $i );
    end

In this case, since the query is passive, it shouldn’t react to the insertion of a String matching the join condition in the query itself. In other words this sequence of commands

    KieSession ksession = ...
    ksession.insert(1);
    ksession.insert("1");
    ksession.fireAllRules();

shouldn’t cause the rule R to fire because the String satisfying the query condition has been inserted after the Integer and the passive query shouldn’t react to this insertion. Conversely the rule should fire if the insertion sequence is inverted because the insertion of the Integer, when the passive query can be satisfied by the presence of an already existing String, will trigger it.

Unfortunately the lazy nature of PHREAK doesn’t allow the Drools engine to make any distinction regarding the insertion sequence of the two facts, so the rule will fire in both cases. In circumstances like this it is necessary to evaluate the rule eagerly as done by the old RETEOO-based engine.

In other cases it is required that the propagation is eager, meaning that it is not immedate, but anyway has to happen before the Drools engine/agenda starts scheduled evaluations. For instance this is necessary when a rule has the no-loop or the lock-on-active attribute and in fact when this happens this propagation mode is automatically enforced by the Drools engine.

To cover these use cases, and in all other situations where an immediate or eager rule evaluation is required, it is possible to declaratively specify so by annotating the rule itself with @Propagation(Propagation.Type), where Propagation.Type is an enumeration with 3 possible values:

- IMMEDIATE means that the propagation is performed immediately.

- EAGER means that the propagation is performed lazily but eagerly evaluated before scheduled evaluations.

- LAZY means that the propagation is totally lazy and this is default PHREAK behaviour

This means that the following drl:

Example 69. A data-driven rule using a passive query

    query Q (Integer i)
        String( this == i.toString() )
    end
    rule R @Propagation(IMMEDIATE) when
        $i : Integer()
        ?Q( $i; )
    then
        System.out.println( $i );
    end

will make the rule R to fire if and only if the Integer is inserted after the String, thus behaving in accordance with the semantic of the passive query.

### 4.5. Commands and the CommandExecutor

The `CommandFactory` allows for commands to be executed on those sessions, the only difference being that the Stateless KIE session executes `fireAllRules()` at the end before disposing the session. The currently supported commands are:

- FireAllRules

- GetGlobal

- SetGlobal

- InsertObject

- InsertElements

- Query

- StartProcess

- BatchExecution

` InsertObject` will insert a single object, with an optional "out" identifier. `InsertElements` will iterate an Iterable, inserting each of the elements. What this means is that a Stateless KIE session is no longer limited to just inserting objects, it can now start processes or execute queries, and do this in any order.

Example 70. Insert Command

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
    ExecutionResults bresults =
      ksession.execute( CommandFactory.newInsert( new Cheese( "stilton" ), "stilton_id" ) );
    Stilton stilton = bresults.getValue( "stilton_id" );

The execute method always returns an `ExecutionResults` instance, which allows access to any command results if they specify an out identifier such as the "stilton_id" above.

Example 71. InsertElements Command

    StatelessKieSession ksession = kbase.newStatelessKieSession();
    Command cmd = CommandFactory.newInsertElements( Arrays.asList( Object[] {
                      new Cheese( "stilton" ),
                      new Cheese( "brie" ),
                      new Cheese( "cheddar" ),
                  });
    ExecutionResults bresults = ksession.execute( cmd );

The execute method only allows for a single command. That’s where `BatchExecution` comes in, which represents a composite command, created from a list of commands. Now, execute will iterate over the list and execute each command in turn. This means you can insert some objects, start a process, call fireAllRules and execute a query, all in a single `execute(…​)` call, which is quite powerful.

As mentioned previosly, the StatelessKieSession will execute `fireAllRules()` automatically at the end. However the keen-eyed reader probably has already noticed the `FireAllRules` command and wondered how that works with a StatelessKieSession. The `FireAllRules` command is allowed, and using it will disable the automatic execution at the end; think of using it as a sort of manual override function.

A custom XStream marshaller can be used with the Drools Pipeline to achieve XML scripting, which is perfect for services. Here are two simple XML samples, one for the BatchExecution and one for the `ExecutionResults`.

Example 72. Simple BatchExecution XML

    <batch-execution>
       <insert out-identifier='outStilton'>
          <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
             <type>stilton</type>
             <price>25</price>
             <oldPrice>0</oldPrice>
          </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
       </insert>
    </batch-execution>

Example 73. Simple ExecutionResults XML

    <execution-results>
       <result identifier='outStilton'>
          <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
             <type>stilton</type>
             <oldPrice>25</oldPrice>
             <price>30</price>
          </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
       </result>
    </execution-results>

Spring and Camel, covered in the integrations book, facilitate declarative services.

Example 74. BatchExecution Marshalled to XML

    <batch-execution>
      <insert out-identifier="stilton">
        <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
          <type>stilton</type>
          <price>1</price>
          <oldPrice>0</oldPrice>
        </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
      </insert>
      <query out-identifier='cheeses2' name='cheesesWithParams'>
        <string>stilton</string>
        <string>cheddar</string>
      </query>
    </batch-execution>

The `CommandExecutor` returns an `ExecutionResults`, and this is handled by the pipeline code snippet as well. A similar output for the <batch-execution> XML sample above would be:

Example 75. ExecutionResults Marshalled to XML

    <execution-results>
      <result identifier="stilton">
        <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
          <type>stilton</type>
          <price>2</price>
        </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
      </result>
      <result identifier='cheeses2'>
        <query-results>
          <identifiers>
            <identifier>cheese</identifier>
          </identifiers>
          <row>
            <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
              <type>cheddar</type>
              <price>2</price>
              <oldPrice>0</oldPrice>
            </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
          </row>
          <row>
            <org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
              <type>cheddar</type>
              <price>1</price>
              <oldPrice>0</oldPrice>
            </org.drools.compiler.Cheese>
          </row>
        </query-results>
      </result>
    </execution-results>

The `BatchExecutionHelper` provides a configured XStream instance to support the marshalling of Batch Executions, where the resulting XML can be used as a message format, as shown above. Configured converters only exist for the commands supported via the Command Factory. The user may add other converters for their user objects. This is very useful for scripting stateless or stateful KIE sessions, especially when services are involved.

There is currently no XML schema to support schema validation. The basic format is outlined here, and the drools-pipeline module has an illustrative unit test in the `XStreamBatchExecutionTest` unit test. The root element is <batch-execution> and it can contain zero or more commands elements.

Example 76. Root XML element

    <batch-execution>
    ...
    </batch-execution>

This contains a list of elements that represent commands, the supported commands is limited to those Commands provided by the Command Factory. The most basic of these is the <insert> element, which inserts objects. The contents of the insert element is the user object, as dictated by XStream.

Example 77. Insert

    <batch-execution>
       <insert>
          ...<!-- any user object -->
       </insert>
    </batch-execution>

The insert element features an "out-identifier" attribute, demanding that the inserted object will also be returned as part of the result payload.

Example 78. Insert with Out Identifier Command

    <batch-execution>
       <insert out-identifier='userVar'>
          ...
       </insert>
    </batch-execution>

It’s also possible to insert a collection of objects using the <insert-elements> element. This command does not support an out-identifier. The `org.domain.UserClass` is just an illustrative user object that XStream would serialize.

Example 79. Insert Elements command

    <batch-execution>
       <insert-elements>
          <org.domain.UserClass>
             ...
          </org.domain.UserClass>
          <org.domain.UserClass>
             ...
          </org.domain.UserClass>
          <org.domain.UserClass>
             ...
          </org.domain.UserClass>
       </insert-elements>
    </batch-execution>

While the `out` attribute is useful in returning specific instances as a result payload, we often wish to run actual queries. Both parameter and parameterless queries are supported. The `name` attribute is the name of the query to be called, and the `out-identifier` is the identifier to be used for the query results in the `<execution-results>` payload.

Example 80. Query Command

    <batch-execution>
       <query out-identifier='cheeses' name='cheeses'/>
       <query out-identifier='cheeses2' name='cheesesWithParams'>
          <string>stilton</string>
          <string>cheddar</string>
       </query>
    </batch-execution>

### 4.6. KieSessions pool

In high volume use cases `KieSession`s get created and disposed with a very high frequency. In general this operation is not extremely time consuming, but when repeated millions of times can become a bottleneck and also requires a huge GC effort. It is possible to greatly alleviate this problem by using a pool of `KieSession`s. To obtain such a pool from a `KieContainer` is enough to invoke on it the method

    KieContainerSessionsPool KieContainer.newKieSessionsPool(int initialSize)

where `initialSize` is the number of the `KieSession`s that will be initially created in the pool. However, if required by the running application, the number of `KieSession`s in the pool will dynamically grow beyond that value. At this point you can create `KieSession`s from that pool as you would normally do from a `KieContainer`:

    KieContainerSessionsPool pool = kContainer.newKieSessionsPool(10);
    KieSession kSession = pool.newKieSession();

Now you can use the KieSession as per normal, and when you call `dispose()` on it, instead of being destroyed, it just gets resetted and pushed back into the pool. Note that using this pool will also affect the case when you have one or more `StatelessKieSession`s and you keep reusing them with multiple call to the `execute()` method. In fact a `StatelessKieSession` created directly from a `KieContainer` will keep to internally create a new `KieSession` for each `execute()` invocation. Conversely if you create the `StatelessKieSession` from the pool it will internally uses the `KieSession`s provided by the pool itself. In other words even if you asked a `StatelessKieSession` to the pool, what is actually pooled are the `KieSession`s that are wrapped by it.

Once you’re done with the pool it is required that you call the `shutdown()` method on it to avoid memory leaks. Alternatively calling `dispose()` on the whole `KieContainer` will also automatically shutdown all the pools eventually created from it.

### 4.7. Rule units

You can use rule units to partition a rule set into smaller units, bind different data sources to those units, and then execute the individual unit. A rule unit consists of data sources, global variables, and rules.

You can define a rule unit by implementing the `RuleUnit` interface as shown in the following example:

Example rule unit class

    package org.mypackage.myunit;

    public static class AdultUnit implements RuleUnit {
        private int adultAge;
        private DataSource<Person> persons;

        public AdultUnit( ) { }

        public AdultUnit( DataSource<Person> persons, int age ) {
            this.persons = persons;
            this.age = age;
        }

        // A DataSource of Persons in this rule unit
        public DataSource<Person> getPersons() {
            return persons;
        }

        // A global variable valid in this rule unit
        public int getAdultAge() {
            return adultAge;
        }

        // --- life cycle methods

        @Override
        public void onStart() {
            System.out.println("AdultUnit started.");
        }

        @Override
        public void onEnd() {
            System.out.println("AdultUnit ended.");
        }
    }

In this example, `persons` is a source of facts of type `Person`. It represents that part of the working memory, which is related to that specific entry-point used when the rule unit is evaluated. The `adultAge` global variable is accessible from all the rules belonging to this rule unit. The last two methods are part of the rule unit life cycle and are invoked by the Drools engine.

The lifecycle of a rule unit can be monitored overriding the following methods:

Table 10. Rule unit life cycle methods
Method | Invoked when
--- | ---
onStart() | the Drools engine starts evaluating the unit
onEnd() | the evaluation of this unit terminates
onSuspend() | the execution of unit is suspended (only for runUntilHalt)
onResume() | the execution of unit is resumed (only for runUntilHalt)
onYield(RuleUnit other) | the consequence of rule in a given rule unit triggers the execution of a different unit

All of these methods have an empty default implementation inside the `RuleUnit` interface, so their implementation is optional. At this point, it is possible to add one or more rules to this rule unit. By default all the rules in a DRL file are automatically associated to a rule unit following a naming convention of the name of the DRL file itself. If the DRL file is in the same package and has the same name as a class implementing the `RuleUnit` interface, then all of the rules in that DRL file will implicitly belong to that unit.

For example, all the rules in the DRL file named `AdultUnit.drl` in the package `org.mypackage.myunit` are automatically part of the rule unit `org.mypackage.myunit.AdultUnit`.

You can avoid using this naming convention and explicitly declare the unit to which the rules in a DRL file belong by using the new `unit` keyword. The unit declaration must always immediately follow the package declaration and contain the name of the class in that package of which the rules in the DRL file are part.

Example rule belonging to the rule unit

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit AdultUnit

    rule Adult when
        $p : Person(age >= adultAge) from persons
    then
        System.out.println($p.getName() + " is adult and greater than " + adultAge);
    end

| You cannot mix rules with and without a rule unit in the same KIE base.

Additionally, you can rewrite the same pattern in a more convenient way using the oopath notation introduced in drools 6, as shown in the following example:

Example rule belonging to a rule unit using the oopath notation

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit AdultUnit

    rule Adult when
        $p : /persons[age >= adultAge]
    then
        System.out.println($p.getName() + " is adult and greater than " + adultAge);
    end

In this example, the persons matched by the left-hand side of the rule is retrieved from the `DataSource` contained in the rule unit class with the same name. The `adultAge` variable is used in both the left-hand side and right-hand side of the rule in the same way that a global variable is defined at the DRL level. The `persons` DataSource acts as a specific entry point, feeding the working memory.

The easiest way to create a `DataSource` is using a fixed set of data, as shown in the following example:

    DataSource<Person> persons = DataSource.create( new Person( "Mario", 42 ),
                                                    new Person( "Marilena", 44 ),
                                                    new Person( "Sofia", 4 ) );

To execute one or more rule units defined in a given KIE base, create a new `RuleUnitExecutor` and bind it to the KIE base:

    KieBase kbase = kieContainer.getKieBase();
    RuleUnitExecutor executor = RuleUnitExecutor.create().bind( kbase );

At this point, create the `AdultUnit` by passing the persons `DataSource` to it and running it on the `RuleUnitExecutor`:

    RuleUnit adultUnit = new AdultUnit(persons, 18);
    executor.run( adultUnit );

This produces the following output:

    org.mypackage.myunit.AdultUnit started.
    Marilena is adult and greater than 18
    Mario is adult and greater than 18
    org.mypackage.myunit.AdultUnit ended.

Instead of explicitly creating the rule unit instance, you can pass to the executor the rule unit class that you want to run and let the executor create an instance of it. You can then set the `DataSource` and other variables before running it. In order to do so, ensure that you have previously registered those variables on the executor so that the following code produces exactly the same result as the former example:

    executor.bindVariable( "persons", persons );
            .bindVariable( "adultAge", 18 );
    executor.run( AdultUnit.class );

The name passed to the `RuleUnitExecutor.bindVariable()` method is used at run time to bind the variable to the field of the rule unit class with the same name. For example, in the previous example the `RuleUnitExecutor` inserts into the new rule unit the data source formerly bound to the `"persons"` name and the value `18` bound to the String `"adultAge"` to the fields with the corresponding names inside the `AdultUnit` class.

You can override this default and explicitly define a logical binding name for each field of the rule unit class using the `@UnitVar` annotation. For example, the field binding in the following class can be redefined with alternative names:

    package org.mypackage.myunit;

    public static class AdultUnit implements RuleUnit {
        @UnitVar("minAge")
        private int adultAge = 18;

        @UnitVar("data")
        private DataSource<Person> persons;
    }

You can then bind the variables to the executor using those alternative names and run the unit:

    executor.bindVariable( "data", persons );
            .bindVariable( "minAge", 18 );
    executor.run( AdultUnit.class );

You can execute a rule unit in passive mode as shown in the previous example (equivalent to invoking `fireAllRules` on an entire KIE session) or in active mode using the `runUntilHalt` (equivalent to the KIE session `fireUntilHalt`).

As for the `fireUntilHalt`, the `runUntilHalt` is blocking and therefore has to be issued on a separated thread:

    new Thread( () -> executor.runUntilHalt( adultUnit ) ).start();

#### 4.7.1. Data sources

A `DataSource` is a source of the data processed by a given rule unit. A rule unit can have zero or more data sources and to each DataSource declared inside a rule unit corresponds a different entry-point into the rule unit executor. A DataSource can be shared by different units, but in this case there will be many different entry-points, one for each unit, through which the same objects will be inserted.

In other terms the `DataSource` represents the entry-point of the rule unit, so it is possible to insert a new fact into it:

    Person mario = new Person( "Mario", 42 );
    FactHandle marioFh = persons.insert( mario );

Modify the fact, optionally specifying the set of properties that have been modified in order to leverage property reactivity:

    mario.setAge( 43 );
    persons.update( marioFh, mario, "age" );

or delete it

    persons.delete( marioFh );

#### 4.7.2. Imperatively running and declaratively guarding a RuleUnit

As anticipated, you can define multiple rule units in the same KIE base and these units can work in a coordinated way by invoking or guarding the execution of each other. To demonstrate this let’s suppose having the following 2 drl files each of them containing a rule belonging to a distinct rule unit.

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit AdultUnit

    rule Adult when
        Person(age >= 18, $name : name) from persons
    then
        System.out.println($name + " is adult");
    end

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit NotAdultUnit

    rule NotAdult when
        $p : Person(age < 18, $name : name) from persons
    then
        System.out.println($name + " is NOT adult");
        modify($p) { setAge(18); }
        drools.run( AdultUnit.class );
    end

Also suppose to have a `RuleUnitExecutor` created from the `KieBase` built out of these rules and a `DataSource` of Persons bound to it.

    RuleUnitExecutor executor = RuleUnitExecutor.create().bind( kbase );
    DataSource<Person> persons = executor.newDataSource( "persons",
                                                         new Person( "Mario", 42 ),
                                                         new Person( "Marilena", 44 ),
                                                         new Person( "Sofia", 4 ) );

Note that in this case we are creating the `DataSource` directly out of the `RuleUnitExecutor` and binding it to the "persons" variable in a single statement.

At this point trying to execute the NotAdultUnit unit we obtain the following output:

    Sofia is NOT adult
    Mario is adult
    Marilena is adult
    Sofia is adult

In fact the NotAdult rule finds a match when evaluating the person "Sofia" who has an age lower than 18. Then it modifies her age to 18 and with the statement `drools.run( AdultUnit.class )` triggers the execution of the other unit which has a rule that now can fire for all the 3 persons in the `DataSource`. This means that the `drools.run()` statement inside a consequence is the way to imperatively interrupt the execution of a rule unit and cede the control to a different rule unit.

Conversely the `drools.guard()` statement allows to declaratively schedule the execution of another rule unit when the condition in the LHS of the rule containing that statement is met. More precisely, using this mechanism a rule in a given rule unit acts as a guard for a different unit. This means that, when the Drools engine produces at least one match for the LHS of the guarding rule, the guarded RuleUnit is considered active. Of course a RuleUnit can have more than one guarding rule.

Let’s see how this works with another practical example. Suppose of having a simple `BoxOffice` class

    public class BoxOffice {
        private boolean open;

        public BoxOffice( boolean open ) {
            this.open = open;
        }

        public boolean isOpen() {
            return open;
        }

        public void setOpen( boolean open ) {
            this.open = open;
        }
    }

and a `BoxOfficeUnit` with a data source of box offices.

    public class BoxOfficeUnit implements RuleUnit {
        private DataSource<BoxOffice> boxOffices;

        public DataSource<BoxOffice> getBoxOffices() {
            return boxOffices;
        }
    }

We introduce now the requirement to keep selling tickets for the event as long as there is at least one opened box office. To achieve this let’s define a second unit with a `DataSource` of person and a second one of tickets.

    public class TicketIssuerUnit implements RuleUnit {
        private DataSource<Person> persons;
        private DataSource<AdultTicket> tickets;

        private List<String> results;

        public TicketIssuerUnit() { }

        public TicketIssuerUnit( DataSource<Person> persons, DataSource<AdultTicket> tickets ) {
            this.persons = persons;
            this.tickets = tickets;
        }

        public DataSource<Person> getPersons() {
            return persons;
        }

        public DataSource<AdultTicket> getTickets() {
            return tickets;
        }

        public List<String> getResults() {
            return results;
        }
    }

Then we can define a first rule in the BoxOfficeUnit that guards for this second unit.

    package org.mypackage.myunit;
    unit BoxOfficeUnit;

    rule BoxOfficeIsOpen when
        $box: /boxOffices[ open ]
    then
        drools.guard( TicketIssuerUnit.class );
    end

In this way we achieved what we have anticipated: by running the BoxOfficeUnit at some point it will also evaluates the rules in the TicketIssuerUnit defined as

    package org.mypackage.myunit;
    unit TicketIssuerUnit;

    rule IssueAdultTicket when
        $p: /persons[ age >= 18 ]
    then
        tickets.insert(new AdultTicket($p));
    end
    rule RegisterAdultTicket when
        $t: /tickets
    then
        results.add( $t.getPerson().getName() );
    end

that is guarded by the BoxOfficeIsOpen rule, until there will exist at least a set of facts satisfying the LHS patterns of that rule. In other terms the existence of at least one open box office will keep the guarding rule and in turn its guarded unit active as it is evident in the following use case.

    DataSource<Person> persons = executor.newDataSource( "persons" );
    DataSource<BoxOffice> boxOffices = executor.newDataSource( "boxOffices" );
    DataSource<AdultTicket> tickets = executor.newDataSource( "tickets" );

    List<String> list = new ArrayList<>();
    executor.bindVariable( "results", list );

    // two open box offices
    BoxOffice office1 = new BoxOffice(true);
    FactHandle officeFH1 = boxOffices.insert( office1 );
    BoxOffice office2 = new BoxOffice(true);
    FactHandle officeFH2 = boxOffices.insert( office2 );

    persons.insert(new Person("Mario", 40));
    // fire BoxOfficeIsOpen -> run TicketIssuerUnit -> fire RegisterAdultTicket
    executor.run(BoxOfficeUnit.class);

    assertEquals( 1, list.size() );
    assertEquals( "Mario", list.get(0) );
    list.clear();

    persons.insert(new Person("Matteo", 30));
    executor.run(BoxOfficeUnit.class); // fire RegisterAdultTicket

    assertEquals( 1, list.size() );
    assertEquals( "Matteo", list.get(0) );
    list.clear();

    // close one box office, the other is still open
    office1.setOpen(false);
    boxOffices.update(officeFH1, office1);
    persons.insert(new Person("Mark", 35));
    executor.run(BoxOfficeUnit.class);

    assertEquals( 1, list.size() );
    assertEquals( "Mark", list.get(0) );
    list.clear();

    // all box offices, are now closed
    office2.setOpen(false);
    boxOffices.update(officeFH2, office2); // guarding rule no longer true
    persons.insert(new Person("Edson", 35));
    executor.run(BoxOfficeUnit.class); // no fire

    assertEquals( 0, list.size() );

#### 4.7.3. RuleUnit identity

Since a rule can guard multiple rule units and at the same time a unit can be guarded and then activated by multiple rules, it is necessary to clearly define what is the identity of a given unit. By the default the identity of a unit is simply the rule unit class. This is encoded in the `getUnitIdentity()` default method of the `RuleUnit` interface

    default Identity getUnitIdentity() {
        return new Identity( getClass() );
    }

and implies that each unit is threated as a singleton by the `RuleUnitExecutor`. To demonstrate this let’s suppose of having a simple `RuleUnit` class with only a `DataSource` accepting any kind of object

    public class Unit0 implements RuleUnit {
        private DataSource<Object> input;

        public DataSource<Object> getInput() {
            return input;
        }
    }

together with a rule belonging to this unit that guards another unit using 2 different conditions.

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit Unit0

    rule GuardAgeCheck when
        $i: /input#Integer
        $s: /input#String
    then
        drools.guard( new AgeCheckUnit($i) );
        drools.guard( new AgeCheckUnit($s.length()) );
    end

This second `RuleUnit` is intended to check the age of a set of persons. Then it has a `DataSource` of the persons to check, a minAge variable against which doing this check and a list were accumulating the results

    public class AgeCheckUnit implements RuleUnit {
        private final int minAge;
        private DataSource<Person> persons;
        private List<String> results;

        public AgeCheckUnit( int minAge ) {
            this.minAge = minAge;
        }

        public DataSource<Person> getPersons() {
            return persons;
        }

        public int getMinAge() {
            return minAge;
        }

        public List<String> getResults() {
            return results;
        }
    }

while the corresponding rule actually performing the check of the persons in the `DataSource` is the following:

    package org.mypackage.myunit
    unit AgeCheckUnit

    rule CheckAge when
        $p : /persons{ age > minAge }
    then
        results.add($p.getName() + ">" + minAge);
    end

At this point we can create a `RuleUnitExecutor`, bind it to the KIE base containing these 2 units and also create the 2 `DataSource`s to feed the same units.

    RuleUnitExecutor executor = RuleUnitExecutor.create().bind( kbase );

    DataSource<Object> input = executor.newDataSource( "input" );
    DataSource<Person> persons = executor.newDataSource( "persons",
                                                         new Person( "Mario", 42 ),
                                                         new Person( "Sofia", 4 ) );

    List<String> results = new ArrayList<>();
    executor.bindVariable( "results", results );

We are now ready to insert some objects into the input data source and execute the Unit0.

    ds.insert("test");
    ds.insert(3);
    ds.insert(4);
    executor.run(Unit0.class);

As outcome of this execution the results list will contain the following:

    [Sofia>3, Mario>3]

As anticipated the rule unit named AgeCheckUnit is seen as a singleton and then executed only once, this time with `minAge` equals to 3 (but this is not deterministic). Both the String "test" and the Integer 4 inserted into the input data source could also trigger a second execution with `minAge` set to 4, but this is not happening because another unit with the same identity has been already evaluated. To fix this problem it is enough to override the `getUnitIdentity()` method in the `AgeCheckUnit` class to also include the variable minAge in its identity.

    public class AgeCheckUnit implements RuleUnit {

        ...

        @Override
        public Identity getUnitIdentity() {
            return new Identity(getClass(), minAge);
        }
    }

Having done so, the units with minAge 3 and 4 are considered two different units and then both evaluated, so trying to rerun the former example the result list will now contain

    [Mario>4, Sofia>3, Mario>3]

## 5. Rule Language Reference

### 5.1. Overview

Drools has a "native" rule language. This format is very light in terms of punctuation, and supports natural and domain specific languages via "expanders" that allow the language to morph to your problem domain. This chapter is mostly concerted with this native rule format. The diagrams used to present the syntax are known as "railroad" diagrams, and they are basically flow charts for the language terms. The technically very keen may also refer to DRL.g which is the Antlr3 grammar for the rule language. If you use Business Central, a lot of the rule structure is done for you with content assistance, for example, type "ru" and press ctrl+space, and it will build the rule structure for you.

#### 5.1.1. A rule file

A rule file is typically a file with a .drl extension. In a DRL file you can have multiple rules, queries and functions, as well as some resource declarations like imports, globals and attributes that are assigned and used by your rules and queries. However, you are also able to spread your rules across multiple rule files (in that case, the extension .rule is suggested, but not required) - spreading rules across files can help with managing large numbers of rules. A DRL file is simply a text file.

The overall structure of a rule file is:

Example 81. Rules file

    package package-name

    imports

    globals

    functions

    queries

    rules

The order in which the elements are declared is not important, except for the package name that, if declared, must be the first element in the rules file. All elements are optional, so you will use only those you need. We will discuss each of them in the following sections.

#### 5.1.2. What makes a rule

For the impatient, just as an early view, a rule has the following rough structure:

    rule "name"
        attributes
        when
            LHS
        then
            RHS
    end

It’s really that simple. Mostly punctuation is not needed, even the double quotes for "name" are optional, as are newlines. Attributes are simple (always optional) hints to how the rule should behave. LHS is the conditional parts of the rule, which follows a certain syntax which is covered below. RHS is basically a block that allows dialect specific semantic code to be executed.

It is important to note that white space is not important, except in the case of domain specific languages, where lines are processed one by one and spaces may be significant to the domain language.

### 5.2. Keywords

Drools 5 introduces the concept of hard and soft keywords.

Hard keywords are reserved, you cannot use any hard keyword when naming your domain objects, properties, methods, functions and other elements that are used in the rule text.

Here is the list of hard keywords that must be avoided as identifiers when writing rules:

- `true`

- `false`

- `null`

Soft keywords are just recognized in their context, enabling you to use these words in any other place if you wish, although, it is still recommended to avoid them, to avoid confusions, if possible. Here is a list of the soft keywords:

- `lock-on-active`

- `date-effective`

- `date-expires`

- `no-loop`

- `auto-focus`

- `activation-group`

- `agenda-group`

- `ruleflow-group`

- `entry-point`

- `duration`

- `package`

- `import`

- `dialect`

- `salience`

- `enabled`

- `attributes`

- `rule`

- `extend`

- when

- then

- `template`

- `query`

- `declare`

- `function`

- `global`

- `eval`

- `not`

- `in`

- `or`

- `and`

- `exists`

- `forall`

- accumulate

- collect

- from

- `action`

- `reverse`

- `result`

- `end`

- over

- `init`

Of course, you can have these (hard and soft) words as part of a method name in camel case, like notSomething() or accumulateSomething() - there are no issues with that scenario.

Although the 3 hard keywords above are unlikely to be used in your existing domain models, if you absolutely need to use them as identifiers instead of keywords, the DRL language provides the ability to escape hard keywords on rule text. To escape a word, simply enclose it in grave accents, like this:

    Holiday( `true` == "yes" ) // please note that Drools will resolve that reference to the method Holiday.isTrue()

### 5.3. Comments

Comments are sections of text that are ignored by the Drools engine. They are stripped out when they are encountered, except inside semantic code blocks, like the RHS of a rule.

#### 5.3.1. Single line comment

To create single line comments, you can use '//'. The parser will ignore anything in the line after the comment symbol. Example:

    rule "Testing Comments"
    when
        // this is a single line comment
        eval( true ) // this is a comment in the same line of a pattern
    then
        // this is a comment inside a semantic code block
    end

| '#' for comments has been removed.

#### 5.3.2. Multi-line comment

Figure 49. Multi-line comment

Multi-line comments are used to comment blocks of text, both in and outside semantic code blocks. Example:

    rule "Test Multi-line Comments"
    when
        /* this is a multi-line comment
           in the left hand side of a rule */
        eval( true )
    then
        /* and this is a multi-line comment
           in the right hand side of a rule */
    end

### 5.4. Error Messages

Drools 5 introduces standardized error messages. This standardization aims to help users to find and resolve problems in a easier and faster way. In this section you will learn how to identify and interpret those error messages, and you will also receive some tips on how to solve the problems associated with them.

#### 5.4.1. Message format

The standardization includes the error message format and to better explain this format, let’s use the following example:

Figure 50. Error Message Format

1st Block: This area identifies the error code.

2nd Block: Line and column information.

3rd Block: Some text describing the problem.

4th Block: This is the first context. Usually indicates the rule, function, template or query where the error occurred. This block is not mandatory.

5th Block: Identifies the pattern where the error occurred. This block is not mandatory.

#### 5.4.2. Error Messages Description

##### 5.4.2.1. 101: No viable alternative

Indicates the most common errors, where the parser came to a decision point but couldn’t identify an alternative. Here are some examples:

    1: rule one
    2:   when
    3:     exists Foo()
    4:     exits Bar()  // "exits"
    5:   then
    6: end

The above example generates this message:

- [ERR 101] Line 4:4 no viable alternative at input 'exits' in rule one

At first glance this seems to be valid syntax, but it is not (exits != exists). Let’s take a look at next example:

    1: package org.drools.examples;
    2: rule
    3:   when
    4:     Object()
    5:   then
    6:     System.out.println("A RHS");
    7: end

Now the above code generates this message:

- [ERR 101] Line 3:2 no viable alternative at input 'WHEN'

This message means that the parser encountered the token WHEN, actually a hard keyword, but it’s in the wrong place since the rule name is missing.

The error "no viable alternative" also occurs when you make a simple lexical mistake. Here is a sample of a lexical problem:

    1: rule simple_rule
    2:   when
    3:     Student( name == "Andy )
    4:   then
    5: end

The above code misses to close the quotes and because of this the parser generates this error message:

- [ERR 101] Line 0:-1 no viable alternative at input '<eof>' in rule simple_rule in pattern Student

| Usually the Line and Column information are accurate, but in some cases (like unclosed quotes), the parser generates a 0:-1 position. In this case you should check whether you didn’t forget to close quotes, apostrophes or parentheses.

##### 5.4.2.2. 102: Mismatched input

This error indicates that the parser was looking for a particular symbol that it didn’t ﬁnd at the current input position. Here are some samples:

    1: rule simple_rule
    2:   when
    3:     foo3 : Bar(

The above example generates this message:

- [ERR 102] Line 0:-1 mismatched input '<eof>' expecting ')' in rule simple_rule in pattern Bar

To fix this problem, it is necessary to complete the rule statement.

| Usually when you get a 0:-1 position, it means that parser reached the end of source.

The following code generates more than one error message:

    1: package org.drools.examples;
    2:
    3: rule "Avoid NPE on wrong syntax"
    4:   when
    5:     not( Cheese( ( type == "stilton", price == 10 ) || ( type == "brie", price == 15 ) ) from $cheeseList )
    6:   then
    7:     System.out.println("OK");
    8: end

These are the errors associated with this source:

- [ERR 102] Line 5:36 mismatched input ',' expecting ')' in rule "Avoid NPE on wrong syntax" in pattern Cheese

- [ERR 101] Line 5:57 no viable alternative at input 'type' in rule "Avoid NPE on wrong syntax"

- [ERR 102] Line 5:106 mismatched input ')' expecting 'then' in rule "Avoid NPE on wrong syntax"

Note that the second problem is related to the first. To fix it, just replace the commas (',') by AND operator ('&&').

| In some situations you can get more than one error message. Try to fix one by one, starting at the first one. Some error messages are generated merely as consequences of other errors.

##### 5.4.2.3. 103: Failed predicate

A validating semantic predicate evaluated to false. Usually these semantic predicates are used to identify soft keywords. This sample shows exactly this situation:

     1: package nesting;
     2: dialect "mvel"
     3:
     4: import org.drools.compiler.Person
     5: import org.drools.compiler.Address
     6:
     7: fdsfdsfds
     8:
     9: rule "test something"
    10:   when
    11:     p: Person( name=="Michael" )
    12:   then
    13:     p.name = "other";
    14:     System.out.println(p.name);
    15: end

With this sample, we get this error message:

- [ERR 103] Line 7:0 rule 'rule_key' failed predicate: {(validateIdentifierKey(DroolsSoftKeywords.RULE))}? in rule

The fdsfdsfds text is invalid and the parser couldn’t identify it as the soft keyword `rule`.

| This error is very similar to 102: Mismatched input, but usually involves soft keywords.

##### 5.4.2.4. 104: Trailing semi-colon not allowed

This error is associated with the `eval` clause, where its expression may not be terminated with a semicolon. Check this example:

    1: rule simple_rule
    2:   when
    3:     eval(abc();)
    4:   then
    5: end

Due to the trailing semicolon within eval, we get this error message:

- [ERR 104] Line 3:4 trailing semi-colon not allowed in rule simple_rule

This problem is simple to fix: just remove the semi-colon.

##### 5.4.2.5. 105: Early Exit

The recognizer came to a subrule in the grammar that must match an alternative at least once, but the subrule did not match anything. Simply put: the parser has entered a branch from where there is no way out. This example illustrates it:

    1: template test_error
    2:   aa s  11;
    3: end

This is the message associated to the above sample:

- [ERR 105] Line 2:2 required (…​)+ loop did not match anything at input 'aa' in template test_error

To fix this problem it is necessary to remove the numeric value as it is neither a valid data type which might begin a new template slot nor a possible start for any other rule file construct.

#### 5.4.3. Other Messages

Any other message means that something bad has happened, so please contact the development team.

### 5.5. Package

A package is a collection of rules and other related constructs, such as imports and globals. The package members are typically related to each other - perhaps HR rules, for instance. A package represents a namespace, which ideally is kept unique for a given grouping of rules. The package name itself is the namespace, and is not related to files or folders in any way.

It is possible to assemble rules from multiple rule sources, and have one top level package configuration that all the rules are kept under (when the rules are assembled). Although, it is not possible to merge into the same package resources declared under different names. A single Rulebase may, however, contain multiple packages built on it. A common structure is to have all the rules for a package in the same file as the package declaration (so that is it entirely self-contained).

The following railroad diagram shows all the components that may make up a package. Note that a package must have a namespace and be declared using standard Java conventions for package names; i.e., no spaces, unlike rule names which allow spaces. In terms of the order of elements, they can appear in any order in the rule file, with the exception of the `package` statement, which must be at the top of the file. In all cases, the semicolons are optional.

Figure 51. package

Notice that any rule attribute (as described the section Rule Attributes) may also be written at package level, superseding the attribute’s default value. The modified default may still be replaced by an attribute setting within a rule.

#### 5.5.1. import

Figure 52. import

Import statements work like import statements in Java. You need to specify the fully qualified paths and type names for any objects you want to use in the rules. Drools automatically imports classes from the Java package of the same name, and also from the package `java.lang`.

#### 5.5.2. global

Figure 53. global

With `global` you define global variables. They are used to make application objects available to the rules. Typically, they are used to provide data or services that the rules use, especially application services used in rule consequences, and to return data from the rules, like logs or values added in rule consequences, or for the rules to interact with the application, doing callbacks. Globals are not inserted into the Working Memory, and therefore a global should never be used to establish conditions in rules except when it has a constant immutable value. The Drools engine cannot be notified about value changes of globals and does not track their changes. Incorrect use of globals in constraints may yield surprising results - surprising in a bad way.

If multiple packages declare globals with the same identifier they must be of the same type and all of them will reference the same global value.

In order to use globals you must:

1. Declare your global variable in your rules file and use it in rules. For example:

       global java.util.List myGlobalList;

       rule "Using a global"
       when
           eval( true )
       then
           myGlobalList.add( "Hello World" );
       end

2. Set the global value on your working memory. It is a best practice to set all global values before asserting any fact to the working memory. Example:

       List list = new ArrayList();
       KieSession kieSession = kiebase.newKieSession();
       kieSession.setGlobal( "myGlobalList", list );

Note that these are just named instances of objects that you pass in from your application to the working memory. This means you can pass in any object you want: you could pass in a service locator, or perhaps a service itself. With the new `from` element it is now common to pass a Hibernate session as a global, to allow `from` to pull data from a named Hibernate query.

One example may be an instance of a Email service. In your integration code that is calling the Drools engine, you obtain your emailService object, and then set it in the working memory. In the DRL, you declare that you have a global of type EmailService, and give it the name "email". Then in your rule consequences, you can use things like email.sendSMS(number, message).

Globals are not designed to share data between rules and they should never be used for that purpose. Rules always reason and react to the working memory state, so if you want to pass data from rule to rule, assert the data as facts into the working memory.

Care must be taken when changing data held by globals because the Drools engine is not aware of those changes, hence cannot react to them.

### 5.6. Function

Figure 54. function

Functions are a way to put semantic code in your rule source file, as opposed to in normal Java classes. They can’t do anything more than what you can do with helper classes. (In fact, the compiler generates the helper class for you behind the scenes.) The main advantage of using functions in a rule is that you can keep the logic all in one place, and you can change the functions as needed (which can be a good or a bad thing). Functions are most useful for invoking actions on the consequence (`then`) part of a rule, especially if that particular action is used over and over again, perhaps with only differing parameters for each rule.

A typical function declaration looks like:

    function String hello(String name) {
        return "Hello "+name+"!";
    }

Note that the `function` keyword is used, even though its not really part of Java. Parameters to the function are defined as for a method, and you don’t have to have parameters if they are not needed. The return type is defined just like in a regular method.

Alternatively, you could use a static method in a helper class, e.g., `Foo.hello()`. Drools supports the use of function imports, so all you would need to do is:

    import function my.package.Foo.hello

Irrespective of the way the function is defined or imported, you use a function by calling it by its name, in the consequence or inside a semantic code block. Example:

    rule "using a static function"
    when
        eval( true )
    then
        System.out.println( hello( "Bob" ) );
    end

### 5.7. Type Declaration

Figure 55. meta_data
Figure 56. type_declaration

Type declarations have two main goals in the Drools engine: to allow the declaration of new types, and to allow the declaration of metadata for types.

- Declaring new types: Drools works out of the box with plain Java objects as facts. Sometimes, however, users may want to define the model directly to the Drools engine, without worrying about creating models in a lower level language like Java. At other times, there is a domain model already built, but eventually the user wants or needs to complement this model with additional entities that are used mainly during the reasoning process.

- Declaring metadata: facts may have meta information associated to them. Examples of meta information include any kind of data that is not represented by the fact attributes and is consistent among all instances of that fact type. This meta information may be queried at runtime by the Drools engine and used in the reasoning process.

#### 5.7.1. Declaring New Types

To declare a new type, all you need to do is use the keyword `declare`, followed by the list of fields, and the keyword `end`. A new fact must have a list of fields, otherwise the Drools engine will look for an existing fact class in the classpath and raise an error if not found.

Example 82. Declaring a new fact type: Address

    declare Address
       number : int
       streetName : String
       city : String
    end

The previous example declares a new fact type called `Address`. This fact type will have three attributes: `number`, `streetName` and `city`. Each attribute has a type that can be any valid Java type, including any other class created by the user or even other fact types previously declared.

For instance, we may want to declare another fact type `Person`:

Example 83. declaring a new fact type: Person

    declare Person
        name : String
        dateOfBirth : java.util.Date
        address : Address
    end

As we can see on the previous example, `dateOfBirth` is of type `java.util.Date`, from the Java API, while `address` is of the previously defined fact type Address.

You may avoid having to write the fully qualified name of a class every time you write it by using the `import` clause, as previously discussed.

Example 84. Avoiding the need to use fully qualified class names by using import

    import java.util.Date

    declare Person
        name : String
        dateOfBirth : Date
        address : Address
    end

When you declare a new fact type, Drools will, at compile time, generate bytecode that implements a Java class representing the fact type. The generated Java class will be a one-to-one Java Bean mapping of the type definition. So, for the previous example, the generated Java class would be:

Example 85. generated Java class for the previous Person fact typedeclaration

    public class Person implements Serializable {
        private String name;
        private java.util.Date dateOfBirth;
        private Address address;

        // empty constructor
        public Person() {...}

        // constructor with all fields
        public Person( String name, Date dateOfBirth, Address address ) {...}

        // if keys are defined, constructor with keys
        public Person( ...keys... ) {...}

        // getters and setters
        // equals/hashCode
        // toString
    }

Since the generated class is a simple Java class, it can be used transparently in the rules, like any other fact.

Example 86. Using the declared types in rules

    rule "Using a declared Type"
    when<
        $p : Person( name == "Bob" )
    then
        // Insert Mark, who is Bob's mate.
        Person mark = new Person();
        mark.setName( "Mark" );
        insert( mark );
    end

##### 5.7.1.1. Declaring enumerative types

DRL also supports the declaration of enumerative types. Such type declarations require the additional keyword enum, followed by a comma separated list of admissible values terminated by a semicolon.

    rule "Using a declared Type"
    when
        $p : Person( name == "Bob" )
    then
        // Insert Mark, who is Bob's mate.
        Person mark = new Person();
        mark.setName( "Mark" );
        insert( mark );
    end

The compiler will generate a valid Java enum, with static methods valueOf() and values(), as well as instance methods ordinal(), compareTo() and name().

Complex enums are also partially supported, declaring the internal fields similarly to a regular type declaration. Notice that as of version 6.x, enum fields do NOT support other declared types or enums

    declare enum DaysOfWeek
       SUN("Sunday"),MON("Monday"),TUE("Tuesday"),WED("Wednesday"),THU("Thursday"),FRI("Friday"),SAT("Saturday");

       fullName : String
    end

Enumeratives can then be used in rules

Example 87. Using declarative enumerations in rules

    rule "Using a declared Enum"
    when
       $p : Employee( dayOff == DaysOfWeek.MONDAY )
    then
       ...
    end

#### 5.7.2. Declaring Metadata

Metadata may be assigned to several different constructions in Drools: fact types, fact attributes and rules. Drools uses the at sign ('@') to introduce metadata, and it always uses the form:

    @metadata_key( metadata_value )

The parenthesized metadata_value is optional.

For instance, if you want to declare a metadata attribute like `author`, whose value is Bob, you could simply write:

Example 88. Declaring a metadata attribute

    @author( Bob )

Drools allows the declaration of any arbitrary metadata attribute, but some will have special meaning to the Drools engine, while others are simply available for querying at runtime. Drools allows the declaration of metadata both for fact types and for fact attributes. Any metadata that is declared before the attributes of a fact type are assigned to the fact type, while metadata declared after an attribute are assigned to that particular attribute.

Example 89. Declaring metadata attributes for fact types and attributes

    import java.util.Date

    declare Person
        @author( Bob )
        @dateOfCreation( 01-Feb-2009 )

        name : String @key @maxLength( 30 )
        dateOfBirth : Date
        address : Address
    end

In the previous example, there are two metadata items declared for the fact type (`@author` and `@dateOfCreation`) and two more defined for the name attribute (`@key` and `@maxLength`). Please note that the `@key` metadata has no required value, and so the parentheses and the value were omitted.:

##### 5.7.2.1. Predefined class level annotations

Some annotations have predefined semantics that are interpreted by the Drools engine. The following is a list of some of these predefined annotations and their meaning.

###### @role( <fact | event> )

The @role annotation defines how the Drools engine should handle instances of that type: either as regular facts or as events. It accepts two possible values:

- fact : this is the default, declares that the type is to be handled as a regular fact.

- event : declares that the type is to be handled as an event.

The following example declares that the fact type StockTick in a stock broker application is to be handled as an event.

Example 90. declaring a fact type as an event

    import some.package.StockTick

    declare StockTick
        @role( event )
    end

The same applies to facts declared inline. If StockTick was a fact type declared in the DRL itself, instead of a previously existing class, the code would be:

Example 91. declaring a fact type and assigning it the event role

    declare StockTick
        @role( event )

        datetime : java.util.Date
        symbol : String
        price : double
    end

###### @typesafe( <boolean> )

By default all type declarations are compiled with type safety enabled; @typesafe( false ) provides a means to override this behaviour by permitting a fall-back, to type unsafe evaluation where all constraints are generated as MVEL constraints and executed dynamically. This can be important when dealing with collections that do not have any generics or mixed type collections.

###### @timestamp( <attribute name> )

Every event has an associated timestamp assigned to it. By default, the timestamp for a given event is read from the Session Clock and assigned to the event at the time the event is inserted into the working memory. Although, sometimes, the event has the timestamp as one of its own attributes. In this case, the user may tell the Drools engine to use the timestamp from the event’s attribute instead of reading it from the Session Clock.

    @timestamp( <attributeName> )

To tell the Drools engine what attribute to use as the source of the event’s timestamp, just list the attribute name as a parameter to the @timestamp tag.

Example 92. declaring the VoiceCall timestamp attribute

    declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
    end

###### @duration( <attribute name> )

Drools supports both event semantics: point-in-time events and interval-based events. A point-in-time event is represented as an interval-based event whose duration is zero. By default, all events have duration zero. The user may attribute a different duration for an event by declaring which attribute in the event type contains the duration of the event.

    @duration( <attributeName> )

So, for our VoiceCall fact type, the declaration would be:

Example 93. declaring the VoiceCall duration attribute

    declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
        @duration( callDuration )
    end

###### @expires( <time interval> )

| This tag is only considered when running the Drools engine in STREAM mode. Also, additional discussion on the effects of using this tag is made on the Memory Management section. It is included here for completeness.

Events may be automatically expired after some time in the working memory. Typically this happens when, based on the existing rules in the KIE base, the event can no longer match and activate any rules. Although, it is possible to explicitly define when an event should expire.

    @expires( <timeOffset> )

The value of timeOffset is a temporal interval in the form:

    [#d][#h][#m][#s][#[ms]]

Where [ ] means an optional parameter and \# means a numeric value.

So, to declare that the VoiceCall facts should be expired after 1 hour and 35 minutes after they are inserted into the working memory, the user would write:

Example 94. declaring the expiration offset for the VoiceCall events

    declare VoiceCall
        @role( event )
        @timestamp( callDateTime )
        @duration( callDuration )
        @expires( 1h35m )
    end

The @expires policy will take precedence and override the implicit expiration offset calculated from temporal constraints and sliding windows in the KIE base.

###### @propertyChangeSupport

Facts that implement support for property changes as defined in the Javabean(tm) spec, now can be annotated so that the Drools engine register itself to listen for changes on fact properties. The boolean parameter that was used in the insert() method in the Drools 4 API is deprecated and does not exist in the drools-api module.

Example 95. @propertyChangeSupport

    declare Person
        @propertyChangeSupport
    end

###### @propertyReactive

Make this type property reactive. See Fine grained property change listeners section for details.

###### @serialVersionUID

To improve the compatibility of serialized KieSession, it has been introduced the possibility to specify the serialVersionUID on the classes generated from the declared types through an annotation like the following:

    declare MyClass
      @serialVersionUID( 42 )
      name : String
    end

##### 5.7.2.2. Predefined attribute level annotations

As noted before, Drools also supports annotations in type attributes. Here is a list of predefined attribute annotations.

###### @key

Declaring an attribute as a key attribute has 2 major effects on generated types:

1. The attribute will be used as a key identifier for the type, and as so, the generated class will implement the equals() and hashCode() methods taking the attribute into account when comparing instances of this type.

2. Drools will generate a constructor using all the key attributes as parameters.

For instance:

Example 96. example of @key declarations for a type

    declare Person
        firstName : String @key
        lastName : String @key
        age : int
    end

For the previous example, Drools will generate equals() and hashCode() methods that will check the firstName and lastName attributes to determine if two instances of Person are equal to each other, but will not check the age attribute. It will also generate a constructor taking firstName and lastName as parameters, allowing one to create instances with a code like this:

Example 97. creating an instance using the key constructor

    Person person = new Person( "John", "Doe" );

###### @position

Patterns support positional arguments on type declarations.

Positional arguments are ones where you don’t need to specify the field name, as the position maps to a known named field. i.e. Person( name == "mark" ) can be rewritten as Person( "mark"; ). The semicolon ';' is important so that the Drools engine knows that everything before it is a positional argument. Otherwise we might assume it was a boolean expression, which is how it could be interpreted after the semicolon. You can mix positional and named arguments on a pattern by using the semicolon ';' to separate them. Any variables used in a positional that have not yet been bound will be bound to the field that maps to that position.

    declare Cheese
        name : String
        shop : String
        price : int
    end

The default order is the declared order, but this can be overridden using @position

    declare Cheese
        name : String @position(1)
        shop : String @position(2)
        price : int @position(0)
    end

The @Position annotation, in the org.drools.definition.type package, can be used to annotate original pojos on the classpath. Currently only fields on classes can be annotated. Inheritance of classes is supported, but not interfaces of methods yet.

Example patterns, with two constraints and a binding. Remember semicolon ';' is used to differentiate the positional section from the named argument section. Variables and literals and expressions using just literals are supported in positional arguments, but not variables.

    Cheese( "stilton", "Cheese Shop", p; )
    Cheese( "stilton", "Cheese Shop"; p : price )
    Cheese( "stilton"; shop == "Cheese Shop", p : price )
    Cheese( name == "stilton"; shop == "Cheese Shop", p : price )

@Position is inherited when beans extend each other; while not recommended, two fields may have the same @position value, and not all consecutive values need be declared. If a @position is repeated, the conflict is solved using inheritance (fields in the superclass have the precedence) and the declaration order. If a @position value is missing, the first field without an explicit @position (if any) is selected to fill the gap. As always, conflicts are resolved by inheritance and declaration order.

    declare Cheese
        name : String
        shop : String @position(2)
        price : int @position(0)
    end

    declare SeasonedCheese extends Cheese
        year : Date @position(0)
        origin : String @position(6)
        country : String
    end

In the example, the field order would be : price (@position 0 in the superclass), year (@position 0 in the subclass), name (first field with no @position), shop (@position 2), country (second field without @position), origin.

#### 5.7.3. Declaring Metadata for Existing Types

Drools allows the declaration of metadata attributes for existing types in the same way as when declaring metadata attributes for new fact types. The only difference is that there are no fields in that declaration.

For instance, if there is a class org.drools.examples.Person, and one wants to declare metadata for it, it’s possible to write the following code:

Example 98. Declaring metadata for an existing type

    import org.drools.examples.Person

    declare Person
        @author( Bob )
        @dateOfCreation( 01-Feb-2009 )
    end

Instead of using the import, it is also possible to reference the class by its fully qualified name, but since the class will also be referenced in the rules, it is usually shorter to add the import and use the short class name everywhere.

Example 99. Declaring metadata using the fully qualified class name

    declare org.drools.examples.Person
        @author( Bob )
        @dateOfCreation( 01-Feb-2009 )
    end

#### 5.7.4. Parametrized constructors for declared types

Generate constructors with parameters for declared types.

Example: for a declared type like the following:

    declare Person
        firstName : String @key
        lastName : String @key
        age : int
    end

The compiler will implicitly generate 3 constructors: one without parameters, one with the @key fields, and one with all fields.

    Person() // parameterless constructor
    Person( String firstName, String lastName )
    Person( String firstName, String lastName, int age )

#### 5.7.5. Non Typesafe Classes

@typesafe( <boolean>) has been added to type declarations. By default all type declarations are compiled with type safety enabled; @typesafe( false ) provides a means to override this behaviour by permitting a fall-back, to type unsafe evaluation where all constraints are generated as MVEL constraints and executed dynamically. This can be important when dealing with collections that do not have any generics or mixed type collections.

#### 5.7.6. Accessing Declared Types from the Application Code

Declared types are usually used inside rules files, while Java models are used when sharing the model between rules and applications. Although, sometimes, the application may need to access and handle facts from the declared types, especially when the application is wrapping the Drools engine and providing higher level, domain specific user interfaces for rules management.

In such cases, the generated classes can be handled as usual with the Java Reflection API, but, as we know, that usually requires a lot of work for small results. Therefore, Drools provides a simplified API for the most common fact handling the application may want to do.

The first important thing to realize is that a declared fact will belong to the package where it was declared. So, for instance, in the example below, `Person` will belong to the `org.drools.examples` package, and so the fully qualified name of the generated class will be `org.drools.examples.Person`.

Example 100. Declaring a type in the org.drools.examples package

    package org.drools.examples

    import java.util.Date

    declare Person
        name : String
        dateOfBirth : Date
        address : Address
    end

Declared types, as discussed previously, are generated at KIE base compilation time, i.e., the application will only have access to them at application run time. Therefore, these classes are not available for direct reference from the application.

Drools then provides an interface through which users can handle declared types from the application code: `org.drools.definition.type.FactType`. Through this interface, the user can instantiate, read and write fields in the declared fact types.

Example 101. Handling declared fact types through the API

    // get a reference to a KIE base with a declared type:
    KieBase kbase = ...

    // get the declared FactType
    FactType personType = kbase.getFactType( "org.drools.examples",
                                             "Person" );

    // handle the type as necessary:
    // create instances:
    Object bob = personType.newInstance();

    // set attributes values
    personType.set( bob,
                    "name",
                    "Bob" );
    personType.set( bob,
                    "age",
                    42 );

    // insert fact into a session
    KieSession ksession = ...
    ksession.insert( bob );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

    // read attributes
    String name = personType.get( bob, "name" );
    int age = personType.get( bob, "age" );

The API also includes other helpful methods, like setting all the attributes at once, reading values from a Map, or reading all attributes at once, into a Map.

Although the API is similar to Java reflection (yet much simpler to use), it does not use reflection underneath, relying on much more performant accessors implemented with generated bytecode.

#### 5.7.7. Type Declaration 'extends'

Type declarations now support 'extends' keyword for inheritance

In order to extend a type declared in Java by a DRL declared subtype, repeat the supertype in a declare statement without any fields.

    import org.people.Person

    declare Person end

    declare Student extends Person
        school : String
    end

    declare LongTermStudent extends Student
        years : int
        course : String
    end

### 5.8. Rule

Figure 57. rule

A rule specifies that when a particular set of conditions occur, specified in the Left Hand Side (LHS), then do what queryis specified as a list of actions in the Right Hand Side (RHS). A common question from users is "Why use when instead of if?" "When" was chosen over "if" because "if" is normally part of a procedural execution flow, where, at a specific point in time, a condition is to be checked.

In contrast, "when" indicates that the condition evaluation is not tied to a specific evaluation sequence or point in time, but that it happens continually, at any time during the life time of the Drools engine; whenever the condition is met, the actions are executed.

A rule must have a name, unique within its rule package. If you define a rule twice in the same DRL it produces an error while loading. If you add a DRL that includes a rule name already in the package, it replaces the previous rule. If a rule name is to have spaces, then it will need to be enclosed in double quotes (it is best to always use double quotes).

Attributes - described below - are optional. They are best written one per line.

The LHS of the rule follows the `when` keyword (ideally on a new line), similarly the RHS follows the `then` keyword (again, ideally on a newline). The rule is terminated by the keyword `end`. Rules cannot be nested.

Example 102. Rule Syntax Overview

    rule "<name>"
        <attribute>*
    when
        <conditional element>*
    then
        <action>*
    end

Example 103. A simple rule

    rule "Approve if not rejected"
      salience -100
      agenda-group "approval"
        when
            not Rejection()
            p : Policy(approved == false, policyState:status)
            exists Driver(age > 25)
            Process(status == policyState)
        then
            log("APPROVED: due to no objections.");
            p.setApproved(true);
    end

#### 5.8.1. Rule Attributes

Rule attributes provide a declarative way to influence the behavior of the rule. Some are quite simple, while others are part of complex subsystems such as ruleflow. To get the most from Drools you should make sure you have a proper understanding of each attribute.

Figure 58. rule attributes

`no-loop`

  default value: `false`

  type: Boolean

  When a rule’s consequence modifies a fact it may cause the rule to activate again, causing an infinite loop. Setting no-loop to true will skip the creation of another Activation for the rule with the current set of facts.

`ruleflow-group`

  default value: N/A

  type: String

  Ruleflow is a Drools feature that lets you exercise control over the firing of rules. Rules that are assembled by the same ruleflow-group identifier fire only when their group is active.

`lock-on-active`

  default value: `false`

  type: Boolean

  Whenever a ruleflow-group becomes active or an agenda-group receives the focus, any rule within that group that has lock-on-active set to true will not be activated any more; irrespective of the origin of the update, the activation of a matching rule is discarded. This is a stronger version of `no-loop`, because the change could now be caused not only by the rule itself. It’s ideal for calculation rules where you have a number of rules that modify a fact and you don’t want any rule re-matching and firing again. Only when the ruleflow-group is no longer active or the agenda-group loses the focus those rules with lock-on-active set to true become eligible again for their activations to be placed onto the agenda.

`salience`

  default value: `0`

  type: integer

  Each rule has an integer salience attribute which defaults to zero and can be negative or positive. Salience is a form of priority where rules with higher salience values are given higher priority when ordered in the Activation queue.

  Drools also supports dynamic salience where you can use an expression involving bound variables.

Example 104. Dynamic Salience

    rule "Fire in rank order 1,2,.."
            salience( -$rank )
        when
            Element( $rank : rank,... )
        then
            ...
    end

`agenda-group`

  default value: MAIN

  type: String

  Agenda groups allow the user to partition the Agenda providing more execution control. Only rules in the agenda group that has acquired the focus are allowed to fire.

`auto-focus`

  default value: `false`

  type: Boolean

  When a rule is activated where the `auto-focus` value is true and the rule’s agenda group does not have focus yet, then it is given focus, allowing the rule to potentially fire.

`activation-group`

  default value: N/A

  type: String

  Rules that belong to the same activation-group, identified by this attribute’s string value, will only fire exclusively. More precisely, the first rule in an activation-group to fire will cancel all pending activations of all rules in the group, i.e., stop them from firing.

  Note: This used to be called Xor group, but technically it’s not quite an Xor. You may still hear people mention Xor group; just swap that term in your mind with activation-group.

`dialect`

  default value: as specified by the package

  type: String

  possible values: "java" or "mvel"

  The dialect species the language to be used for any code expressions in the LHS or the RHS code block. Currently two dialects are available, Java and MVEL. While the dialect can be specified at the package level, this attribute allows the package definition to be overridden for a rule.

`date-effective`

  default value: N/A

  type: String, containing a date and time definition

  A rule can only activate if the current date and time is after date-effective attribute.

`date-expires`

  default value: N/A

  type: String, containing a date and time definition

  A rule cannot activate if the current date and time is after the date-expires attribute.

`duration`

  default value: no default value

  type: long

  The duration dictates that the rule will fire after a specified duration, if it is still true.

`enabled`

  default value: `true`

  type: boolean

  If false, the rule is not fired even if the condition is met. Note that the rule is still evaluated so it could affect performance even if it’s false.

Example 105. Some attribute examples

    rule "my rule"
      salience 42
      agenda-group "number 1"
        when ...

#### 5.8.2. Timers and Calendars

Rules now support both interval and cron based timers, which replace the now deprecated duration attribute.

Example 106. Sample timer attribute uses

    timer ( int: <initial delay> <repeat interval>? )
    timer ( int: 30s )
    timer ( int: 30s 5m )

    timer ( cron: <cron expression> )
    timer ( cron:* 0/15 * * * ? )

Interval (indicated by "int:") timers follow the semantics of java.util.Timer objects, with an initial delay and an optional repeat interval. Cron (indicated by "cron:") timers follow standard Unix cron expressions:

Example 107. A Cron Example

    rule "Send SMS every 15 minutes"
        timer (cron:* 0/15 * * * ?)
    when
        $a : Alarm( on == true )
    then
        channels[ "sms" ].insert( new Sms( $a.mobileNumber, "The alarm is still on" );
    end

A rule controlled by a timer becomes active when it matches, and once for each individual match. Its consequence is executed repeatedly, according to the timer’s settings. This stops as soon as the condition doesn’t match any more.

Consequences are executed even after control returns from a call to fireUntilHalt. Moreover, the Drools engine remains reactive to any changes made to the Working Memory. For instance, removing a fact that was involved in triggering the timer rule’s execution causes the repeated execution to terminate, or inserting a fact so that some rule matches will cause that rule to fire. But the Drools engine is not continually active, only after a rule fires, for whatever reason. Thus, reactions to an insertion done asynchronously will not happen until the next execution of a timer-controlled rule. Disposing a session puts an end to all timer activity.

Conversely when the Drools engine runs in passive mode (i.e.: using fireAllRules instead of fireUntilHalt) by default it doesn’t fire consequences of timed rules unless fireAllRules isn’t invoked again. However it is possible to change this default behavior by configuring the KieSession with a `TimedRuleExecutionOption` as shown in the following example.

Example 108. Configuring a KieSession to automatically execute timed rules

    KieSessionConfiguration ksconf = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    ksconf.setOption( TimedRuleExecutionOption.YES );
    KSession ksession = kbase.newKieSession(ksconf, null);

It is also possible to have a finer grained control on the timed rules that have to be automatically executed. To do this it is necessary to set a `FILTERED` `TimedRuleExecutionOption` that allows to define a callback to filter those rules, as done in the next example.

Example 109. Configuring a filter to choose which timed rules should be automatically executed

    KieSessionConfiguration ksconf = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    conf.setOption( new TimedRuleExecutionOption.FILTERED(new TimedRuleExecutionFilter() {
        public boolean accept(Rule[] rules) {
            return rules[0].getName().equals("MyRule");
        }
    }) );

For what regards interval timers it is also possible to define both the delay and interval as an expression instead of a fixed value. To do that it is necessary to use an expression timer (indicated by "expr:") as in the following example:

Example 110. An Expression Timer Example

    declare Bean
        delay   : String = "30s"
        period  : long = 60000
    end

    rule "Expression timer"
        timer( expr: $d, $p )
    when
        Bean( $d : delay, $p : period )
    then
    end

The expressions, `$d` and `$p` in this case, can use any variable defined in the pattern matching part of the rule and can be any String that can be parsed in a time duration or any numeric value that will be internally converted in a long representing a duration expressed in milliseconds.

Both interval and expression timers can have 3 optional parameters named "start", "end" and "repeat-limit". When one or more of these parameters are used the first part of the timer definition must be followed by a semicolon ';' and the parameters have to be separated by a comma ',' as in the following example:

Example 111. An Interval Timer with a start and an end

    timer (int: 30s 10s; start=3-JAN-2010, end=5-JAN-2010)

The value for start and end parameters can be a Date, a String representing a Date or a long, or more in general any Number, that will be transformed in a Java Date applying the following conversion:

    new Date( ((Number) n).longValue() )

Conversely the repeat-limit can be only an integer and it defines the maximum number of repetitions allowed by the timer. If both the end and the repeat-limit parameters are set the timer will stop when the first of the two will be matched.

The using of the start parameter implies the definition of a phase for the timer, where the beginning of the phase is given by the start itself plus the eventual delay. In other words in this case the timed rule will then be scheduled at times:

    start + delay + n*period

for up to repeat-limit times and no later than the end timestamp (whichever first). For instance the rule having the following interval timer

    timer ( int: 30s 1m; start="3-JAN-2010" )

will be scheduled at the 30th second of every minute after the midnight of the 3-JAN-2010. This also means that if for example you turn the system on at midnight of the 3-FEB-2010 it won’t be scheduled immediately but will preserve the phase defined by the timer and so it will be scheduled for the first time 30 seconds after the midnight.

If for some reason the system is paused (e.g. the session is serialized and then deserialized after a while) the rule will be scheduled only once to recover from missing activations (regardless of how many activations we missed) and subsequently it will be scheduled again in phase with the timer.

Calendars are used to control when rules can fire. The Calendar API is modelled on Quartz:

Example 112. Adapting a Quartz Calendar

    Calendar weekDayCal = QuartzHelper.quartzCalendarAdapter(org.quartz.Calendar quartzCal)

Calendars are registered with the `KieSession`:

Example 113. Registering a Calendar

    ksession.getCalendars().set( "weekday", weekDayCal );

They can be used in conjunction with normal rules and rules including timers. The rule attribute "calendars" may contain one or more comma-separated calendar names written as string literals.

Example 114. Using Calendars and Timers together

    rule "weekdays are high priority"
       calendars "weekday"
       timer (int:0 1h)
    when
        Alarm()
    then
        send( "priority high - we have an alarm" );
    end

    rule "weekend are low priority"
       calendars "weekend"
       timer (int:0 4h)
    when
        Alarm()
    then
        send( "priority low - we have an alarm" );
    end

#### 5.8.3. Left Hand Side (when) syntax

##### 5.8.3.1. What is the Left Hand Side?

The Left Hand Side (LHS) is a common name for the conditional part of the rule. It consists of zero or more Conditional Elements. If the LHS is empty, it will be considered as a condition element that is always true and it will be activated once, when a new WorkingMemory session is created.

Figure 59. Left Hand Side
Example 115. Rule without a Conditional Element

    rule "no CEs"
    when
        // empty
    then
        ... // actions (executed once)
    end

    // The above rule is internally rewritten as:

    rule "eval(true)"
    when
        eval( true )
    then
        ... // actions (executed once)
    end

Conditional elements work on one or more patterns (which are described below). The most common conditional element is " `and"`. Therefore it is implicit when you have multiple patterns in the LHS of a rule that are not connected in any way:

Example 116. Implicit and

    rule "2 unconnected patterns"
    when
        Pattern1()
        Pattern2()
    then
        ... // actions
    end

    // The above rule is internally rewritten as:

    rule "2 and connected patterns"
    when
        Pattern1()
        and Pattern2()
    then
        ... // actions
    end

| An “and” cannot have a leading declaration binding (unlike for example `or`). This is obvious, since a declaration can only reference a single fact at a time, and when the “and” is satisfied it matches both facts - so which fact would the declaration bind to?
    // Compile error
    $person : (Person( name == "Romeo" ) and Person( name == "Juliet"))

##### 5.8.3.2. Pattern (conditional element)

###### What is a pattern?

A pattern element is the most important Conditional Element. It can potentially match on each fact that is inserted in the working memory.

A pattern contains of zero or more constraints and has an optional pattern binding. The railroad diagram below shows the syntax for this.

Figure 60. Pattern

In its simplest form, with no constraints, a pattern matches against a fact of the given type. In the following case the type is `Cheese`, which means that the pattern will match against all `Person` objects in the Working Memory:

    Person()

The type need not be the actual class of some fact object. Patterns may refer to superclasses or even interfaces, thereby potentially matching facts from many different classes.

    Object() // matches all objects in the working memory

Inside of the pattern parenthesis is where all the action happens: it defines the constraints for that pattern. For example, with a age related constraint:

    Person( age == 100 )

| For backwards compatibility reasons it’s allowed to suffix patterns with the `;` character. But it is not recommended to do that.

###### Pattern binding

For referring to the matched object, use a pattern binding variable such as `$p`.

Example 117. Pattern with a binding variable

    rule ...
    when
        $p : Person()
    then
        System.out.println( "Person " + $p );
    end

The prefixed dollar symbol (`$`) is just a convention; it can be useful in complex rules where it helps to easily differentiate between variables and fields, but it is not mandatory.

##### 5.8.3.3. Constraint (part of a pattern)

###### What is a constraint?

A constraint is an expression that returns `true` or `false`. This example has a constraint that states 5 is smaller than 6:

    Person( 5 < 6 )  // just an example, as constraints like this would be useless in a real pattern

In essence, it’s a Java expression with some enhancements (such as property access) and a few differences (such as `equals()` semantics for `==`). Let’s take a deeper look.

###### Property access on Java Beans (POJO’s)

Any bean property can be used directly. A bean property is exposed using a standard Java bean getter: a method `getMyProperty()` (or `isMyProperty()` for a primitive boolean) which takes no arguments and return something. For example: the age property is written as `age` in DRL instead of the getter `getAge()`:

    Person( age == 50 )

    // this is the same as:
    Person( getAge() == 50 )

Drools uses the standard JDK `Introspector` class to do this mapping, so it follows the standard Java bean specification.

| We recommend using property access (`age`) over using getters explicitly (`getAge()`) because of performance enhancements through field indexing.

| Property accessors must not change the state of the object in a way that may effect the rules. Remember that the Drools engine effectively caches the results of its matching in between invocations to make it faster.
    public int getAge() {
        age++; // Do NOT do this
        return age;
    }
    public int getAge() {
        Date now = DateUtil.now(); // Do NOT do this
        return DateUtil.differenceInYears(now, birthday);
    }
To solve this latter case, insert a fact that wraps the current date into working memory and update that fact between `fireAllRules` as needed.

| The following fallback applies: if the getter of a property cannot be found, the compiler will resort to using the property name as a method name and without arguments:
    Person( age == 50 )

    // If Person.getAge() does not exists, this falls back to:
    Person( age() == 50 )

Nested property access is also supported:

    Person( address.houseNumber == 50 )

    // this is the same as:
    Person( getAddress().getHouseNumber() == 50 )

Nested properties are also indexed.

| In a stateful session, care should be taken when using nested accessors as the Working Memory is not aware of any of the nested values, and does not know when they change. Either consider them immutable while any of their parent references are inserted into the Working Memory. Or, instead, if you wish to modify a nested value you should mark all of the outer facts as updated. In the above example, when the `houseNumber` changes, any `Person` with that `Address` must be marked as updated.

###### Java expression

You can use any Java expression that returns a `boolean` as a constraint inside the parentheses of a pattern. Java expressions can be mixed with other expression enhancements, such as property access:

    Person( age == 50 )

It is possible to change the evaluation priority by using parentheses, as in any logic or mathematical expression:

    Person( age > 100 && ( age % 10 == 0 ) )

It is possible to reuse Java methods:

    Person( Math.round( weight / ( height * height ) ) < 25.0 )

| As for property accessors, methods must not change the state of the object in a way that may affect the rules. Any method executed on a fact in the LHS should be a read only method.
    Person( incrementAndGetAge() == 10 ) // Do NOT do this

| The state of a fact should not change between rule invocations (unless those facts are marked as updated to the working memory on every change):
    Person( System.currentTimeMillis() % 1000 == 0 ) // Do NOT do this

Normal Java operator precedence applies, see the operator precedence list below.

| All operators have normal Java semantics except for `==` and `!=`. The `==` operator has null-safe `equals()` semantics:
    // Similar to: java.util.Objects.equals(person.getFirstName(), "John")
    // so (because "John" is not null) similar to:
    // "John".equals(person.getFirstName())
    Person( firstName == "John" )
The `!=` operator has null-safe `!equals()` semantics:
    // Similar to: !java.util.Objects.equals(person.getFirstName(), "John")
    Person( firstName != "John" )

Type coercion is always attempted if the field and the value are of different types; exceptions will be thrown if a bad coercion is attempted. For instance, if "ten" is provided as a string in a numeric evaluator, an exception is thrown, whereas "10" would coerce to a numeric 10. Coercion is always in favor of the field type and not the value type:

    Person( age == "10" ) // "10" is coerced to 10

###### Comma separated AND

The comma character (‘`,`’) is used to separate constraint groups. It has implicit AND connective semantics.

    // Person is at least 50 and weighs at least 80 kg
    Person( age > 50, weight > 80 )

    // Person is at least 50, weighs at least 80 kg and is taller than 2 meter.
    Person( age > 50, weight > 80, height > 2 )

| Although the `&&` and `,` operators have the same semantics, they are resolved with different priorities: The `&&` operator precedes the `||` operator. Both the `&&` and `||` operator precede the `,` operator. See the operator precedence list below. The comma operator should be preferred at the top level constraint, as it makes constraints easier to read and the Drools engine will often be able to optimize them better.

The comma (`,`) operator cannot be embedded in a composite constraint expression, such as parentheses:

    Person( ( age > 50, weight > 80 ) || height > 2 ) // Do NOT do this: compile error

    // Use this instead
    Person( ( age > 50 && weight > 80 ) || height > 2 )

###### Binding variables

A property can be bound to a variable:

    // 2 persons of the same age
    Person( $firstAge : age ) // binding
    Person( age == $firstAge ) // constraint expression

The prefixed dollar symbol (`$`) is just a convention; it can be useful in complex rules where it helps to easily differentiate between variables and fields.

| For backwards compatibility reasons, It’s allowed (but not recommended) to mix a constraint binding and constraint expressions as such:
    // Not recommended
    Person( $age : age * 2 < 100 )
    // Recommended (separates bindings and constraint expressions)
    Person( age * 2 < 100, $age : age )

Bound variable restrictions using the operator `==` provide for very fast execution as it use hash indexing to improve performance.

###### Unification

Drools does not allow bindings to the same declaration. However this is an important aspect to derivation query unification. While positional arguments are always processed with unification a special unification symbol, ':=', was introduced for named arguments named arguments. The following "unifies" the age argument across two people.

    Person( $age := age )
    Person( $age := age)

In essence unification will declare a binding for the first occurrence and constrain to the same value of the bound field for sequence occurrences.

###### Grouped accessors for nested objects

Often it happens that it is necessary to access multiple properties of a nested object as in the following example

    Person( name == "mark", address.city == "london", address.country == "uk" )

These accessors to nested objects can be grouped with a '.(…​)' syntax providing more readable rules as in

    Person( name == "mark", address.( city == "london", country == "uk") )

Note the '.' prefix, this is necessary to differentiate the nested object constraints from a method call.

###### Inline casts and coercion

When dealing with nested objects, it also quite common the need to cast to a subtype. It is possible to do that via the # symbol as in:

    Person( name == "mark", address#LongAddress.country == "uk" )

This example casts Address to LongAddress, making its getters available. If the cast is not possible (instanceof returns false), the evaluation will be considered false. Also fully qualified names are supported:

    Person( name == "mark", address#org.domain.LongAddress.country == "uk" )

It is possible to use multiple inline casts in the same expression:

    Person( name == "mark", address#LongAddress.country#DetailedCountry.population > 10000000 )

moreover, since we also support the instanceof operator, if that is used we will infer its results for further uses of that field, within that pattern:

    Person( name == "mark", address instanceof LongAddress, address.country == "uk" )

###### Special literal support

Besides normal Java literals (including Java 5 enums), this literal is also supported:

###### Date literal

The date format `dd-MMM-yyyy` is supported by default. You can customize this by providing an alternative date format mask as the system property named `drools.dateformat`. This system property can also contain a time format mask part (e.g.`drools.dateformat="dd-MMM-yyyy HH:mm"`). Another possibility to customize the date format is to change the language locale with `drools.defaultlanguage` and `drools.defaultcountry` system properties (e.g. locale of Thailand set as `drools.defaultlanguage=th` and `drools.defaultcountry=TH`).

Example 118. Date Literal Restriction

    Cheese( bestBefore < "27-Oct-2009" )

###### List and Map access

It’s possible to directly access a `List` value by index:

    // Same as childList(0).getAge() == 18
    Person( childList[0].age == 18 )

It’s also possible to directly access a `Map` value by key:

    // Same as credentialMap.get("jsmith").isValid()
    Person( credentialMap["jsmith"].valid )

###### Abbreviated combined relation condition

This allows you to place more than one restriction on a field using the restriction connectives `&&` or `||`. Grouping via parentheses is permitted, resulting in a recursive syntax pattern.

Figure 61. Abbreviated combined relation condition
Figure 62. Abbreviated combined relation condition withparentheses

    // Simple abbreviated combined relation condition using a single &&
    Person( age > 30 && < 40 )

    // Complex abbreviated combined relation using groupings
    Person( age ( (> 30 && < 40) ||
                  (> 20 && < 25) ) )

    // Mixing abbreviated combined relation with constraint connectives
    Person( age > 30 && < 40 || location == "london" )

###### Special DRL operators

Figure 63. Operators

Coercion to the correct value for the evaluator and the field will be attempted.

###### The operators `< ⇐ > >=`

These operators can be used on properties with natural ordering. For example, for Date fields, `<` means before, for `String` fields, it means alphabetically lower.

    Person( firstName < $otherFirstName )

    Person( birthDate < $otherBirthDate )

Only applies on `Comparable` properties.

###### Null-safe dereferencing operator

The !. operator allows to derefencing in a null-safe way. More in details the matching algorithm requires the value to the left of the !. operator to be not null in order to give a positive result for pattern matching itself. In other words the pattern:

    Person( $streetName : address!.street )

will be internally translated in:

    Person( address != null, $streetName : address.street )

###### The operator `matches`

Matches a field against any valid Java Regular Expression. Typically that regexp is a string literal, but variables that resolve to a valid regexp are also allowed.

Example 119. Regular Expression Constraint

    Cheese( type matches "(Buffalo)?\\S*Mozzarella" )

| Like in Java, regular expressions written as string literals need to escape '\\'.

Only applies on `String` properties. Using `matches` against a `null` value always evaluates to false.

###### The operator `not matches`

The operator returns true if the String does not match the regular expression. The same rules apply as for the `matches` operator. Example:

Example 120. Regular Expression Constraint

    Cheese( type not matches "(Buffalo)?\\S*Mozzarella" )

Only applies on `String` properties. Using `not matches` against a `null` value always evaluates to true.

###### The operator `contains`

The operator `contains` is used to check whether a field that is a Collection or elements contains the specified value.

Example 121. Contains with Collections

    CheeseCounter( cheeses contains "stilton" ) // contains with a String literal
    CheeseCounter( cheeses contains $var ) // contains with a variable

Only applies on `Collection` properties.

The operator `contains` can also be used in place of `String.contains()` constraints checks.

Example 122. Contains with String literals

    Cheese( name contains "tilto" )
    Person( fullName contains "Jr" )
    String( this contains "foo" )

###### The operator `not contains`

The operator `not contains` is used to check whether a field that is a Collection or elements does not contain the specified value.

Example 123. Literal Constraint with Collections

    CheeseCounter( cheeses not contains "cheddar" ) // not contains with a String literal
    CheeseCounter( cheeses not contains $var ) // not contains with a variable

Only applies on `Collection` properties.

| For backward compatibility, the `excludes` operator is supported as a synonym for `not contains`.

The operator `not contains` can also be used in place of the logical negation of `String.contains()` for constraints checks - i.e.: `! String.contains()`

Example 124. Contains with String literals

    Cheese( name not contains "tilto" )
    Person( fullName not contains "Jr" )
    String( this not contains "foo" )

###### The operator `memberOf`

The operator `memberOf` is used to check whether a field is a member of a collection or elements; that collection must be a variable.

Example 125. Literal Constraint with Collections

    CheeseCounter( cheese memberOf $matureCheeses )

###### The operator `not memberOf`

The operator `not memberOf` is used to check whether a field is not a member of a collection or elements; that collection must be a variable.

Example 126. Literal Constraint with Collections

    CheeseCounter( cheese not memberOf $matureCheeses )

###### The operator `soundslike`

This operator is similar to `matches`, but it checks whether a word has almost the same sound (using English pronunciation) as the given value. This is based on the Soundex algorithm (see `http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Soundex`).

Example 127. Test with soundslike

    // match cheese "fubar" or "foobar"
    Cheese( name soundslike 'foobar' )

###### The operator `str`

This operator `str` is used to check whether a field that is a `String` starts with or ends with a certain value. It can also be used to check the length of the String.

    Message( routingValue str[startsWith] "R1" )

    Message( routingValue str[endsWith] "R2" )

    Message( routingValue str[length] 17 )

###### The operators `in` and `notin` (compound value restriction)

The compound value restriction is used where there is more than one possible value to match. Currently only the `in` and `not in` evaluators support this. The second operand of this operator must be a comma-separated list of values, enclosed in parentheses. Values may be given as variables, literals, return values or qualified identifiers. Both evaluators are actually syntactic sugar, internally rewritten as a list of multiple restrictions using the operators `!=` and `==`.

Figure 64. compoundValueRestriction
Example 128. Compound Restriction using "in"

    Person( $cheese : favouriteCheese )
    Cheese( type in ( "stilton", "cheddar", $cheese ) )

###### Inline eval operator (deprecated)

Figure 65. Inline Eval Expression

An inline eval constraint can use any valid dialect expression as long as it results to a primitive boolean. The expression must be constant over time. Any previously bound variable, from the current or previous pattern, can be used; autovivification is also used to auto-create field binding variables. When an identifier is found that is not a current variable, the builder looks to see if the identifier is a field on the current object type, if it is, the field binding is auto-created as a variable of the same name. This is called autovivification of field variables inside of inline eval’s.

This example will find all male-female pairs where the male is 2 years older than the female; the variable `age` is auto-created in the second pattern by the autovivification process.

Example 129. Return Value operator

    Person( girlAge : age, sex = "F" )
    Person( eval( age == girlAge + 2 ), sex = 'M' ) // eval() is actually obsolete in this example

| Inline eval’s are effectively obsolete as their inner syntax is now directly supported. It’s recommended not to use them. Simply write the expression without wrapping eval() around it.

###### Operator precedence

The operators are evaluated in this precedence:

Table 11. Operator precedence
Operator type | Operators | Notes
--- | --- | ---
(nested / null safe) property access | `.``!.` | Not normal Java semantics
List/Map access | `[ ]` | Not normal Java semantics
constraint binding | `:` | Not normal Java semantics
multiplicative | `\*``/``%` |
additive | `\+``-` |
shift | `<<``>>``>>>` |
relational | `<``>``⇐``>=``instanceof` |
equality | `==``!=` | Does not use normal Java (not) same semantics: uses (not) equals semantics instead.
non-short circuiting AND | `&` |
non-short circuiting exclusive OR | `^` |
non-short circuiting inclusive OR | `|` |
logical AND | `&&` |
logical OR | `||` |
ternary | `? :` |
Comma separated AND | `,` | Not normal Java semantics

##### 5.8.3.4. Positional Arguments

Patterns now support positional arguments on type declarations.

Positional arguments are ones where you don’t need to specify the field name, as the position maps to a known named field. i.e. Person( name == "mark" ) can be rewritten as Person( "mark"; ). The semicolon ';' is important so that the Drools engine knows that everything before it is a positional argument. Otherwise we might assume it was a boolean expression, which is how it could be interpreted after the semicolon. You can mix positional and named arguments on a pattern by using the semicolon ';' to separate them. Any variables used in a positional that have not yet been bound will be bound to the field that maps to that position.

    declare Cheese
        name : String
        shop : String
        price : int
    end

Example patterns, with two constraints and a binding. Remember semicolon ';' is used to differentiate the positional section from the named argument section. Variables and literals and expressions using just literals are supported in positional arguments, but not variables. Positional arguments are always resolved using unification.

    Cheese( "stilton", "Cheese Shop", p; )
    Cheese( "stilton", "Cheese Shop"; p : price )
    Cheese( "stilton"; shop == "Cheese Shop", p : price )
    Cheese( name == "stilton"; shop == "Cheese Shop", p : price )

Positional arguments that are given a previously declared binding will constrain against that using unification; these are referred to as input arguments. If the binding does not yet exist, it will create the declaration binding it to the field represented by the position argument; these are referred to as output arguments.

##### 5.8.3.5. Fine grained property change listeners

When you call modify() (see the modify statement section) on a given object it will trigger a revaluation of all patterns of the matching object type in the KIE base. This can can lead to unwanted and useless evaluations and in the worst cases to infinite recursions. The only workaround to avoid it was to split up your objects into smaller ones having a 1 to 1 relationship with the original object.

This has been introduced to provide an easier and more consistent way to overcome this problem. In fact it allows the pattern matching to only react to modification of properties actually constrained or bound inside of a given pattern. That will help with performance and recursion and avoid artificial object splitting.

This feature is enabled by default, but in case you need or want to dectivate it on a specific bean you can annotate it with @classReactive. This annotation works both on DRL type declarations:

    declare Person
    @classReactive
        firstName : String
        lastName : String
    end

and on Java classes:

    @ClassReactive
        public static class Person {
        private String firstName;
        private String lastName;
    }

By using this feature, for instance, if you have a rule like the following:

    rule "Every person named Mario is a male" when
        $person : Person( firstName == "Mario" )
    then
        modify ( $person )  { setMale( true ) }
    end

you won’t have to add the no-loop attribute to it in order to avoid an infinite recursion because the Drools engine recognizes that the pattern matching is done on the 'firstName' property while the RHS of the rule modifies the 'male' one. Note that this feature does not work for update(), and this is one of the reasons why we promote modify() since it encapsulates the field changes within the statement. Moreover, on Java classes, you can also annotate any method to say that its invocation actually modifies other properties. For instance in the former Person class you could have a method like:

    @Modifies( { "firstName", "lastName" } )
    public void setName(String name) {
        String[] names = name.split("\\s");
        this.firstName = names[0];
        this.lastName = names[1];
    }

That means that if a rule has a RHS like the following:

    modify($person) { setName("Mario Fusco") }

it will correctly recognize that the values of both properties 'firstName' and 'lastName' could have potentially been modified and act accordingly, not missing of reevaluating the patterns constrained on them. At the moment the usage of @Modifies is not allowed on fields but only on methods. This is coherent with the most common scenario where the @Modifies will be used for methods that are not related with a class field as in the Person.setName() in the former example. Also note that @Modifies is not transitive, meaning that if another method internally invokes the Person.setName() one it won’t be enough to annotate it with @Modifies( { "name" } ), but it is necessary to use @Modifies( { "firstName", "lastName" } ) even on it. Very likely @Modifies transitivity will be implemented in the next release.

For what regards nested accessors, the Drools engine will be notified only for top level fields. In other words a pattern matching like:

    Person ( address.city.name == "London )

will be revaluated only for modification of the 'address' property of a Person object. In the same way the constraints analysis is currently strictly limited to what there is inside a pattern. Another example could help to clarify this. An LHS like the following:

    $p : Person( )
    Car( owner = $p.name )

will not listen on modifications of the person’s name, while this one will do:

    Person( $name : name )
    Car( owner = $name )

To overcome this problem it is possible to annotate a pattern with @watch as it follows:

    $p : Person( ) @watch ( name )
    Car( owner = $p.name )

Indeed, annotating a pattern with @watch allows you to modify the inferred set of properties for which that pattern will react. Note that the properties named in the @watch annotation are actually added to the ones automatically inferred, but it is also possible to explicitly exclude one or more of them prepending their name with a ! and to make the pattern to listen for all or none of the properties of the type used in the pattern respectively with the wildcrds * and !*. So, for example, you can annotate a pattern in the LHS of a rule like:

    // listens for changes on both firstName (inferred) and lastName
    Person( firstName == $expectedFirstName ) @watch( lastName )

    // listens for all the properties of the Person bean
    Person( firstName == $expectedFirstName ) @watch( * )

    // listens for changes on lastName and explicitly exclude firstName
    Person( firstName == $expectedFirstName ) @watch( lastName, !firstName )

    // listens for changes on all the properties except the age one
    Person( firstName == $expectedFirstName ) @watch( *, !age )

Since it doesn’t make sense to use this annotation on a pattern using a type annotated with @ClassReactive the rule compiler will raise a compilation error if you try to do so. Also the duplicated usage of the same property in @watch (for example like in: @watch( firstName, ! firstName ) ) will end up in a compilation error. In a next release we will make the automatic detection of the properties to be listened smarter by doing analysis even outside of the pattern.

It is also possible to enable this feature only on specific types of your model or to completely disallow it by using on option of the KnowledgeBuilderConfiguration. In particular this new PropertySpecificOption can have one of the following 3 values:

    - DISABLED => the feature is turned off and all the other related annotations are just ignored
    - ALLOWED => types are not property reactive unless they are not annotated with @PropertyReactive (which is the dual of @ClassReactive)
    - ALWAYS => all types are property reactive. This is the default behavior

So, for example, to have a KnowledgeBuilder for which property reactivity is disabled by default:

    KnowledgeBuilderConfiguration config = KnowledgeBuilderFactory.newKnowledgeBuilderConfiguration();
    config.setOption(PropertySpecificOption.ALLOWED);
    KnowledgeBuilder kbuilder = KnowledgeBuilderFactory.newKnowledgeBuilder(config);

In this last case it will be possible to reenable the property reactivity feature on a specific type by annotating it with @PropertyReactive.

It is important to notice that property reactivity is automatically available only for modifications performed inside the consequence of a rule. Conversely a programmatic update is unaware of the object’s properties that have been changed, so it is unable of using this feature.

To workaround this limitation it is possible to optionally specify in an update statement the names of the properties that have been changed in the modified object as in the following example:

    Person me = new Person("me", 40);
    FactHandle meHandle = ksession.insert( me );

    me.setAge(41);
    me.setAddress("California Avenue");
    ksession.update( meHandle, me, "age", "address" );

##### 5.8.3.6. Basic conditional elements

###### Conditional Element `and`

The Conditional Element `"and"` is used to group other Conditional Elements into a logical conjunction. Drools supports both prefix `and` and infix `and`.

Figure 66. infixAnd

Traditional infix `and` is supported:

    //infixAnd
    Cheese( cheeseType : type ) and Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType )

Explicit grouping with parentheses is also supported:

    //infixAnd with grouping
    ( Cheese( cheeseType : type ) and
      ( Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType ) or
        Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType ) )

| The symbol `&&` (as an alternative to `and`) is deprecated. But it is still supported in the syntax for backwards compatibility.

Figure 67. prefixAnd

Prefix `and` is also supported:

    (and Cheese( cheeseType : type )
         Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType ) )

The root element of the LHS is an implicit prefix `and` and doesn’t need to be specified:

Example 130. implicit root prefixAnd

    when
        Cheese( cheeseType : type )
        Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType )
    then
        ...

###### Conditional Element `or`

The Conditional Element `or` is used to group other Conditional Elements into a logical disjunction. Drools supports both prefix `or` and infix `or`.

Figure 68. infixOr

Traditional infix `or` is supported:

    //infixOr
    Cheese( cheeseType : type ) or Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType )

Explicit grouping with parentheses is also supported:

    //infixOr with grouping
    ( Cheese( cheeseType : type ) or
      ( Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType ) and
        Person( favouriteCheese == cheeseType ) )

| The symbol `||` (as an alternative to `or`) is deprecated. But it is still supported in the syntax for backwards compatibility.

Figure 69. prefixOr

Prefix `or` is also supported:

    (or Person( sex == "f", age > 60 )
        Person( sex == "m", age > 65 )
    )

| The behavior of the Conditional Element `or` is different from the connective `||` for constraints and restrictions in field constraints. The Drools engine actually has no understanding of the Conditional Element `or`. Instead, via a number of different logic transformations, a rule with `or` is rewritten as a number of subrules. This process ultimately results in a rule that has a single `or` as the root node and one subrule for each of its CEs. Each subrule can activate and fire like any normal rule; there is no special behavior or interaction between these subrules. - This can be most confusing to new rule authors.

The Conditional Element `or` also allows for optional pattern binding. This means that each resulting subrule will bind its pattern to the pattern binding. Each pattern must be bound separately, using eponymous variables:

    pensioner : ( Person( sex == "f", age > 60 ) or Person( sex == "m", age > 65 ) )

    (or pensioner : Person( sex == "f", age > 60 )
        pensioner : Person( sex == "m", age > 65 ) )

Since the conditional element `or` results in multiple subrule generation, one for each possible logically outcome, the example above would result in the internal generation of two rules. These two rules work independently within the Working Memory, which means both can match, activate and fire - there is no shortcutting.

The best way to think of the conditional element `or` is as a shortcut for generating two or more similar rules. When you think of it that way, it’s clear that for a single rule there could be multiple activations if two or more terms of the disjunction are true.

###### Conditional Element `not`

Figure 70. not

The CE `not` is first order logic’s non-existential quantifier and checks for the non-existence of something in the Working Memory. Think of "not" as meaning "there must be none of…​".

The keyword `not` may be followed by parentheses around the CEs that it applies to. In the simplest case of a single pattern (like below) you may optionally omit the parentheses.

Example 131. No Busses

    not Bus()

Example 132. No red Busses

    // Brackets are optional:
    not Bus(color == "red")
    // Brackets are optional:
    not ( Bus(color == "red", number == 42) )
    // "not" with nested infix and - two patterns,
    // brackets are requires:
    not ( Bus(color == "red") and
          Bus(color == "blue") )

###### Conditional Element `exists`

Figure 71. exists

The CE `exists` is first order logic’s existential quantifier and checks for the existence of something in the Working Memory. Think of "exists" as meaning "there is at least one..". It is different from just having the pattern on its own, which is more like saying "for each one of…​". If you use `exists` with a pattern, the rule will only activate at most once, regardless of how much data there is in working memory that matches the condition inside of the `exists` pattern. Since only the existence matters, no bindings will be established.

The keyword `exists` must be followed by parentheses around the CEs that it applies to. In the simplest case of a single pattern (like below) you may omit the parentheses.

Example 133. At least one Bus

    exists Bus()

Example 134. At least one red Bus

    exists Bus(color == "red")
    // brackets are optional:
    exists ( Bus(color == "red", number == 42) )
    // "exists" with nested infix and,
    // brackets are required:
    exists ( Bus(color == "red") and
             Bus(color == "blue") )

##### 5.8.3.7. Advanced conditional elements

###### Conditional Element `forall`

Figure 72. forall

The Conditional Element `forall` completes the First Order Logic support in Drools. The Conditional Element `forall` evaluates to true when all facts that match the first pattern match all the remaining patterns. Example:

    rule "All English buses are red"
    when
        forall( $bus : Bus( type == 'english')
                       Bus( this == $bus, color = 'red' ) )
    then
        // all English buses are red
    end

In the above rule, we "select" all Bus objects whose type is "english". Then, for each fact that matches this pattern we evaluate the following patterns and if they match, the forall CE will evaluate to true.

To state that all facts of a given type in the working memory must match a set of constraints, `forall` can be written with a single pattern for simplicity. Example:

Example 135. Single Pattern Forall

    rule "All Buses are Red"
    when
        forall( Bus( color == 'red' ) )
    then
        // all Bus facts are red
    end

Another example shows multiple patterns inside the `forall`:

Example 136. Multi-Pattern Forall

    rule "all employees have health and dental care programs"
    when
        forall( $emp : Employee()
                HealthCare( employee == $emp )
                DentalCare( employee == $emp )
              )
    then
        // all employees have health and dental care
    end

Forall can be nested inside other CEs. For instance, `forall` can be used inside a `not` CE. Note that only single patterns have optional parentheses, so that with a nested `forall` parentheses must be used:

Example 137. Combining Forall with Not CE

    rule "not all employees have health and dental care"
    when
        not ( forall( $emp : Employee()
                      HealthCare( employee == $emp )
                      DentalCare( employee == $emp ) )
            )
    then
        // not all employees have health and dental care
    end

As a side note, `forall( p1 p2 p3…​)` is equivalent to writing:

    not(p1 and not(and p2 p3...))

Also, it is important to note that `forall` is a scope delimiter. Therefore, it can use any previously bound variable, but no variable bound inside it will be available for use outside of it.

###### Conditional Element `from`

Figure 73. from

The Conditional Element `from` enables users to specify an arbitrary source for data to be matched by LHS patterns. This allows the Drools engine to reason over data not in the Working Memory. The data source could be a sub-field on a bound variable or the results of a method call. It is a powerful construction that allows out of the box integration with other application components and frameworks. One common example is the integration with data retrieved on-demand from databases using hibernate named queries.

The expression used to define the object source is any expression that follows regular MVEL syntax. Therefore, it allows you to easily use object property navigation, execute method calls and access maps and collections elements.

Here is a simple example of reasoning and binding on another pattern sub-field:

    rule "validate zipcode"
    when
        Person( $personAddress : address )
        Address( zipcode == "23920W") from $personAddress
    then
        // zip code is ok
    end

With all the flexibility from the new expressiveness in the Drools engine you can slice and dice this problem many ways. This is the same but shows how you can use a graph notation with the 'from':

    rule "validate zipcode"
    when
        $p : Person( )
        $a : Address( zipcode == "23920W") from $p.address
    then
        // zip code is ok
    end

Previous examples were evaluations using a single pattern. The CE `from` also support object sources that return a collection of objects. In that case, `from` will iterate over all objects in the collection and try to match each of them individually. For instance, if we want a rule that applies 10% discount to each item in an order, we could do:

    rule "apply 10% discount to all items over US$ 100,00 in an order"
    when
        $order : Order()
        $item  : OrderItem( value > 100 ) from $order.items
    then
        // apply discount to $item
    end

The above example will cause the rule to fire once for each item whose value is greater than 100 for each given order.

You must take caution, however, when using `from`, especially in conjunction with the `lock-on-active` rule attribute as it may produce unexpected results. Consider the example provided earlier, but now slightly modified as follows:

    rule "Assign people in North Carolina (NC) to sales region 1"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person( )
        $a : Address( state == "NC") from $p.address
    then
        modify ($p) {} // Assign person to sales region 1 in a modify block
    end

    rule "Apply a discount to people in the city of Raleigh"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person( )
        $a : Address( city == "Raleigh") from $p.address
    then
        modify ($p) {} // Apply discount to person in a modify block
    end

In the above example, persons in Raleigh, NC should be assigned to sales region 1 and receive a discount; i.e., you would expect both rules to activate and fire. Instead you will find that only the second rule fires.

If you were to turn on the audit log, you would also see that when the second rule fires, it deactivates the first rule. Since the rule attribute `lock-on-active` prevents a rule from creating new activations when a set of facts change, the first rule fails to reactivate. Though the set of facts have not changed, the use of `from` returns a new fact for all intents and purposes each time it is evaluated.

First, it’s important to review why you would use the above pattern. You may have many rules across different rule-flow groups. When rules modify working memory and other rules downstream of your RuleFlow (in different rule-flow groups) need to be reevaluated, the use of `modify` is critical. You don’t, however, want other rules in the same rule-flow group to place activations on one another recursively. In this case, the `no-loop` attribute is ineffective, as it would only prevent a rule from activating itself recursively. Hence, you resort to `lock-on-active`.

There are several ways to address this issue:

- Avoid the use of `from` when you can assert all facts into working memory or use nested object references in your constraint expressions (shown below).

- Place the variable assigned used in the modify block as the last sentence in your condition (LHS).

- Avoid the use of `lock-on-active` when you can explicitly manage how rules within the same rule-flow group place activations on one another (explained below).

The preferred solution is to minimize use of `from` when you can assert all your facts into working memory directly. In the example above, both the Person and Address instance can be asserted into working memory. In this case, because the graph is fairly simple, an even easier solution is to modify your rules as follows:

    rule "Assign people in North Carolina (NC) to sales region 1"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person(address.state == "NC" )
    then
        modify ($p) {} // Assign person to sales region 1 in a modify block
    end

    rule "Apply a discount to people in the city of Raleigh"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person(address.city == "Raleigh" )
    then
        modify ($p) {} //Apply discount to person in a modify block
    end

Now, you will find that both rules fire as expected. However, it is not always possible to access nested facts as above. Consider an example where a Person holds one or more Addresses and you wish to use an existential quantifier to match people with at least one address that meets certain conditions. In this case, you would have to resort to the use of `from` to reason over the collection.

There are several ways to use `from` to achieve this and not all of them exhibit an issue with the use of `lock-on-active`. For example, the following use of `from` causes both rules to fire as expected:

    rule "Assign people in North Carolina (NC) to sales region 1"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person($addresses : addresses)
        exists (Address(state == "NC") from $addresses)
    then
        modify ($p) {} // Assign person to sales region 1 in a modify block
    end

    rule "Apply a discount to people in the city of Raleigh"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $p : Person($addresses : addresses)
        exists (Address(city == "Raleigh") from $addresses)
    then
        modify ($p) {} // Apply discount to person in a modify block
    end

However, the following slightly different approach does exhibit the problem:

    rule "Assign people in North Carolina (NC) to sales region 1"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $assessment : Assessment()
        $p : Person()
        $addresses : List() from $p.addresses
        exists (Address( state == "NC") from $addresses)
    then
        modify ($assessment) {} // Modify assessment in a modify block
    end

    rule "Apply a discount to people in the city of Raleigh"
    ruleflow-group "test"
    lock-on-active true
    when
        $assessment : Assessment()
        $p : Person()
        $addresses : List() from $p.addresses
        exists (Address( city == "Raleigh") from $addresses)
    then
        modify ($assessment) {} // Modify assessment in a modify block
    end

In the above example, the $addresses variable is returned from the use of `from`. The example also introduces a new object, assessment, to highlight one possible solution in this case. If the $assessment variable assigned in the condition (LHS) is moved to the last condition in each rule, both rules fire as expected.

Though the above examples demonstrate how to combine the use of `from` with `lock-on-active` where no loss of rule activations occurs, they carry the drawback of placing a dependency on the order of conditions on the LHS. In addition, the solutions present greater complexity for the rule author in terms of keeping track of which conditions may create issues.

A better alternative is to assert more facts into working memory. In this case, a person’s addresses may be asserted into working memory and the use of `from` would not be necessary.

There are cases, however, where asserting all data into working memory is not practical and we need to find other solutions. Another option is to reevaluate the need for `lock-on-active`. An alternative to `lock-on-active` is to directly manage how rules within the same rule-flow group activate one another by including conditions in each rule that prevent rules from activating each other recursively when working memory is modified. For example, in the case above where a discount is applied to citizens of Raleigh, a condition may be added to the rule that checks whether the discount has already been applied. If so, the rule does not activate.

| The pattern containing a from clause cannot be followed by another pattern starting with a parenthesis as in the following example
    rule R when
      $l : List( )
      String() from $l
      (String() or Number())
    then end
This is because in that case the DRL parser reads the from expression as "from $l (String() or Number())" and it is impossible to disambiguate this expression from a function call. The straightforward fix to this is wrapping also the from clause in parenthesis as it follows:
    rule R when
      $l : List( )
      (String() from $l)
      (String() or Number())
    then end

###### Conditional Element `collect`

Figure 74. collect

The Conditional Element `collect` allows rules to reason over a collection of objects obtained from the given source or from the working memory. In First Oder Logic terms this is the cardinality quantifier. A simple example:

    import java.util.ArrayList

    rule "Raise priority if system has more than 3 pending alarms"
    when
        $system : System()
        $alarms : ArrayList( size >= 3 )
                  from collect( Alarm( system == $system, status == 'pending' ) )
    then
        // Raise priority, because system $system has
        // 3 or more alarms pending. The pending alarms
        // are $alarms.
    end

In the above example, the rule will look for all pending alarms in the working memory for each given system and group them in ArrayLists. If 3 or more alarms are found for a given system, the rule will fire.

The result pattern of `collect` can be any concrete class that implements the `java.util.Collection` interface and provides a default no-arg public constructor. This means that you can use Java collections like ArrayList, LinkedList, HashSet, etc., or your own class, as long as it implements the `java.util.Collection` interface and provide a default no-arg public constructor.

Both source and result patterns can be constrained as any other pattern.

Variables bound before the `collect` CE are in the scope of both source and result patterns and therefore you can use them to constrain both your source and result patterns. But note that `collect` is a scope delimiter for bindings, so that any binding made inside of it is not available for use outside of it.

Collect accepts nested `from` CEs. The following example is a valid use of "collect":

    import java.util.LinkedList;

    rule "Send a message to all mothers"
    when
        $town : Town( name == 'Paris' )
        $mothers : LinkedList()
                   from collect( Person( gender == 'F', children > 0 )
                                 from $town.getPeople()
                               )
    then
        // send a message to all mothers
    end

###### Conditional Element `accumulate`

Figure 75. accumulate

The Conditional Element `accumulate` is a more flexible and powerful form of `collect`, in the sense that it can be used to do what `collect` does and also achieve results that the CE `collect` is not capable of achieving. Accumulate allows a rule to iterate over a collection of objects, executing custom actions for each of the elements, and at the end, it returns a result object.

Accumulate supports both the use of pre-defined accumulate functions, or the use of inline custom code. Inline custom code should be avoided though, as it is harder for rule authors to maintain, and frequently leads to code duplication. Accumulate functions are easier to test and reuse.

The Accumulate CE also supports multiple different syntaxes. The preferred syntax is the top level accumulate, as noted bellow, but all other syntaxes are supported for backward compatibility.

###### Accumulate CE (preferred syntax)

The top level accumulate syntax is the most compact and flexible syntax. The simplified syntax is as follows:

    accumulate( <source pattern>; <functions> [;<constraints>] )

For instance, a rule to calculate the minimum, maximum and average temperature reading for a given sensor and that raises an alarm if the minimum temperature is under 20C degrees and the average is over 70C degrees could be written in the following way, using Accumulate:

| The DRL language defines “`acc`” as a synonym of “`accumulate`”. The author might prefer to use “`acc`” as a less verbose keyword or the full keyword “`accumulate`” for legibility.

    rule "Raise alarm"
    when
        $s : Sensor()
        accumulate( Reading( sensor == $s, $temp : temperature );
                    $min : min( $temp ),
                    $max : max( $temp ),
                    $avg : average( $temp );
                    $min < 20, $avg > 70 )
    then
        // raise the alarm
    end

In the above example, min, max and average are Accumulate Functions and will calculate the minimum, maximum and average temperature values over all the readings for each sensor.

Drools ships with several built-in accumulate functions, including:

- average

- min

- max

- count

- sum

- variance

- standardDeviation

- collectList

- collectSet

These common functions accept any expression as input. For instance, if someone wants to calculate the average profit on all items of an order, a rule could be written using the average function:

    rule "Average profit"
    when
        $order : Order()
        accumulate( OrderItem( order == $order, $cost : cost, $price : price );
                    $avgProfit : average( 1 - $cost / $price ) )
    then
        // average profit for $order is $avgProfit
    end

Accumulate Functions are all pluggable. That means that if needed, custom, domain specific functions can easily be added to the Drools engine and rules can start to use them without any restrictions. To implement a new Accumulate Function all one needs to do is to create a Java class that implements the `org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction` interface. As an example of an Accumulate Function implementation, the following is the implementation of the `average` function:

    /**
     * An implementation of an accumulator capable of calculating average values
     */
    public class AverageAccumulateFunction implements org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction<AverageAccumulateFunction.AverageData> {

        public void readExternal(ObjectInput in) throws IOException, ClassNotFoundException {

        }

        public void writeExternal(ObjectOutput out) throws IOException {

        }

        public static class AverageData implements Externalizable {
            public int    count = 0;
            public double total = 0;

            public AverageData() {}

            public void readExternal(ObjectInput in) throws IOException, ClassNotFoundException {
                count   = in.readInt();
                total   = in.readDouble();
            }

            public void writeExternal(ObjectOutput out) throws IOException {
                out.writeInt(count);
                out.writeDouble(total);
            }

        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#createContext()
         */
        public AverageData createContext() {
            return new AverageData();
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#init(java.io.Serializable)
         */
        public void init(AverageData context) {
            context.count = 0;
            context.total = 0;
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#accumulate(java.io.Serializable, java.lang.Object)
         */
        public void accumulate(AverageData context,
                               Object value) {
            context.count++;
            context.total += ((Number) value).doubleValue();
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#reverse(java.io.Serializable, java.lang.Object)
         */
        public void reverse(AverageData context, Object value) {
            context.count--;
            context.total -= ((Number) value).doubleValue();
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#getResult(java.io.Serializable)
         */
        public Object getResult(AverageData context) {
            return new Double( context.count == 0 ? 0 : context.total / context.count );
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#supportsReverse()
         */
        public boolean supportsReverse() {
            return true;
        }

        /* (non-Javadoc)
         * @see org.kie.api.runtime.rule.AccumulateFunction#getResultType()
         */
        public Class< ? > getResultType() {
            return Number.class;
        }

    }

The code for the function is very simple, as we could expect, as all the "dirty" integration work is done by the Drools engine. Finally, to use the function in the rules, the author can import it using the "import accumulate" statement:

    import accumulate <class_name> <function_name>

For instance, if one implements the class `some.package.VarianceFunction` function that implements the `variance` function and wants to use it in the rules, he would do the following:

Example 138. Example of importing and using the custom “`variance`” accumulate function

    import accumulate some.package.VarianceFunction variance

    rule "Calculate Variance"
    when
        accumulate( Test( $s : score ), $v : variance( $s ) )
    then
        // the variance of the test scores is $v
    end

| The built in functions (sum, average, etc) are imported automatically by the Drools engine. Only user-defined custom accumulate functions need to be explicitly imported.

| For backward compatibility, Drools still supports the configuration of accumulate functions through configuration files and system properties, but this is a deprecated method. In order to configure the variance function from the previous example using the configuration file or system property, the user would set a property like this:
    drools.accumulate.function.variance = some.package.VarianceFunction
Please note that "`drools.accumulate.function.`" is a prefix that must always be used, "`variance`" is how the function will be used in the drl files, and "`some.package.VarianceFunction`" is the fully qualified name of the class that implements the function behavior.

###### Alternate Syntax: single function with return type

The accumulate syntax evolved over time with the goal of becoming more compact and expressive. Nevertheless, Drools still supports previous syntaxes for backward compatibility purposes.

In case the rule is using a single accumulate function on a given accumulate, the author may add a pattern for the result object and use the "from" keyword to link it to the accumulate result. Example: a rule to apply a 10% discount on orders over $100 could be written in the following way:

    rule "Apply 10% discount to orders over US$ 100,00"
    when
        $order : Order()
        $total : Number( doubleValue > 100 )
                 from accumulate( OrderItem( order == $order, $value : value ),
                                  sum( $value ) )
    then
        // apply discount to $order
    end

In the above example, the accumulate element is using only one function (sum), and so, the rules author opted to explicitly write a pattern for the result type of the accumulate function (Number) and write the constraints inside it. There are no problems in using this syntax over the compact syntax presented before, except that is is a bit more verbose. Also note that it is not allowed to use both the return type and the functions binding in the same accumulate statement.

Compile-time checks are performed in order to ensure the pattern used with the "`from`" keyword is assignable from the result of the accumulate function used.

| With this syntax, the "`from`" binds to the single result returned by the accumulate function, and it does not iterate.

In the above example, "`$total`" is bound to the result returned by the accumulate sum() function.

As another example however, if the result of the accumulate function is a collection, "`from`" still binds to the single result and it does not iterate:

    rule "Person names"
    when
      $x : Object() from accumulate(MyPerson( $val : name );
                                    collectList( $val ) )
    then
      // $x is a List
    end

The binded "`$x : Object()`" is the List itself, returned by the collectList accumulate function used.

This is an important distinction to highlight, as the "`from`" keyword can also be used separately of accumulate, to iterate over the elements of a collection:

    rule "Iterate the numbers"
    when
        $xs : List()
        $x : Integer() from $xs
    then
      // $x matches and binds to each Integer in the collection
    end

While this syntax is still supported for backward compatibility purposes, for this and other reasons we encourage rule authors to make use instead of the Accumulate CE preferred syntax (described in the previous chapter), so to avoid any potential pitfalls, as described by these examples.

###### Accumulate with inline custom code

| The use of accumulate with inline custom code is not a good practice for several reasons, including difficulties on maintaining and testing rules that use them, as well as the inability of reusing that code. Implementing your own accumulate functions is very simple and straightforward, they are easy to unit test and to use. This form of accumulate is supported for backward compatibility only.

Another possible syntax for the accumulate is to define inline custom code, instead of using accumulate functions. As noted on the previous warned, this is discouraged though for the stated reasons.

The general syntax of the `accumulate` CE with inline custom code is:

    <result pattern> from accumulate( <source pattern>,
                                      init( <init code> ),
                                      action( <action code> ),
                                      reverse( <reverse code> ),
                                      result( <result expression> ) )

The meaning of each of the elements is the following:

- <source pattern>: the source pattern is a regular pattern that the Drools engine will try to match against each of the source objects.

- <init code>: this is a semantic block of code in the selected dialect that will be executed once for each tuple, before iterating over the source objects.

- <action code>: this is a semantic block of code in the selected dialect that will be executed for each of the source objects.

- <reverse code>: this is an optional semantic block of code in the selected dialect that if present will be executed for each source object that no longer matches the source pattern. The objective of this code block is to undo any calculation done in the <action code> block, so that the Drools engine can do decremental calculation when a source object is modified or deleted, hugely improving performance of these operations.

- <result expression>: this is a semantic expression in the selected dialect that is executed after all source objects are iterated.

- <result pattern>: this is a regular pattern that the Drools engine tries to match against the object returned from the <result expression>. If it matches, the `accumulate` conditional element evaluates to true and the Drools engine proceeds with the evaluation of the next CE in the rule. If it does not matches, the `accumulate` CE evaluates to false and the Drools engine stops evaluating CEs for that rule.

It is easier to understand if we look at an example:

    rule "Apply 10% discount to orders over US$ 100,00"
    when
        $order : Order()
        $total : Number( doubleValue > 100 )
                 from accumulate( OrderItem( order == $order, $value : value ),
                                  init( double total = 0; ),
                                  action( total += $value; ),
                                  reverse( total -= $value; ),
                                  result( total ) )
    then
        // apply discount to $order
    end

In the above example, for each `Order` in the Working Memory, the Drools engine will execute the init code initializing the total variable to zero. Then it will iterate over all `OrderItem` objects for that order, executing the action for each one (in the example, it will sum the value of all items into the total variable). After iterating over all `OrderItem` objects, it will return the value corresponding to the result expression (in the above example, the value of variable `total`). Finally, the Drools engine will try to match the result with the `Number` pattern, and if the double value is greater than 100, the rule will fire.

The example used Java as the semantic dialect, and as such, note that the usage of the semicolon as statement delimiter is mandatory in the init, action and reverse code blocks. The result is an expression and, as such, it does not admit ';'. If the user uses any other dialect, he must comply to that dialect’s specific syntax.

As mentioned before, the reverse code is optional, but it is strongly recommended that the user writes it in order to benefit from the improved performance on update and delete.

The `accumulate` CE can be used to execute any action on source objects. The following example instantiates and populates a custom object:

    rule "Accumulate using custom objects"
    when
        $person   : Person( $likes : likes )
        $cheesery : Cheesery( totalAmount > 100 )
                    from accumulate( $cheese : Cheese( type == $likes ),
                                     init( Cheesery cheesery = new Cheesery(); ),
                                     action( cheesery.addCheese( $cheese ); ),
                                     reverse( cheesery.removeCheese( $cheese ); ),
                                     result( cheesery ) );
    then
        // do something
    end

##### 5.8.3.8. Conditional Element `eval`

Figure 76. eval

The conditional element `eval` is essentially a catch-all which allows any semantic code (that returns a primitive boolean) to be executed. This code can refer to variables that were bound in the LHS of the rule, and functions in the rule package. Overuse of eval reduces the declarativeness of your rules and can result in a poorly performing engine. While `eval` can be used anywhere in the patterns, the best practice is to add it as the last conditional element in the LHS of a rule.

Evals cannot be indexed and thus are not as efficient as Field Constraints. However this makes them ideal for being used when functions return values that change over time, which is not allowed within Field Constraints.

For folks who are familiar with Drools 2.x lineage, the old Drools parameter and condition tags are equivalent to binding a variable to an appropriate type, and then using it in an eval node.

    p1 : Parameter()
    p2 : Parameter()
    eval( p1.getList().containsKey( p2.getItem() ) )

    p1 : Parameter()
    p2 : Parameter()
    // call function isValid in the LHS
    eval( isValid( p1, p2 ) )

##### 5.8.3.9. Railroad diagrams

#### 5.8.4. The Right Hand Side (then)

##### 5.8.4.1. Usage

The Right Hand Side (RHS) is a common name for the consequence or action part of the rule; this part should contain a list of actions to be executed. It is bad practice to use imperative or conditional code in the RHS of a rule; as a rule should be atomic in nature - "when this, then do this", not "when this, maybe do this". The RHS part of a rule should also be kept small, thus keeping it declarative and readable. If you find you need imperative and/or conditional code in the RHS, then maybe you should be breaking that rule down into multiple rules. The main purpose of the RHS is to insert, delete or modify working memory data. To assist with that there are a few convenience methods you can use to modify working memory; without having to first reference a working memory instance.

`update(`object, handle`);` will tell the Drools engine that an object has changed (one that has been bound to something on the LHS) and rules may need to be reconsidered.

`update(`object`);` can also be used; here the Knowledge Helper will look up the facthandle for you, via an identity check, for the passed object. (Note that if you provide Property Change Listeners to your Java beans that you are inserting into the Drools engine, you can avoid the need to call `update()` when the object changes.). After a fact’s field values have changed you must call update before changing another fact, or you will cause problems with the indexing within the Drools engine. The modify keyword avoids this problem.

`insert(new` Something`());` will place a new object of your creation into the Working Memory.

`insertLogical(new` Something`());` is similar to insert, but the object will be automatically deleted when there are no more facts to support the truth of the currently firing rule.

`delete(`handle`);` removes an object from Working Memory.

These convenience methods are basically macros that provide short cuts to the `KnowledgeHelper` instance that lets you access your Working Memory from rules files. The predefined variable `drools` of type `KnowledgeHelper` lets you call several other useful methods. (Refer to the `KnowledgeHelper` interface documentation for more advanced operations).

- The call `drools.halt()` terminates rule execution immediately. This is required for returning control to the point whence the current session was put to work with `fireUntilHalt()`.

- Methods `insert(Object o)`, `update(Object o)` and `delete(Object o)` can be called on `drools` as well, but due to their frequent use they can be called without the object reference.

- `drools.getWorkingMemory()` returns the `WorkingMemory` object.

- `drools.setFocus( String s)` sets the focus to the specified agenda group.

- `drools.getRule().getName()`, called from a rule’s RHS, returns the name of the rule.

- `drools.getTuple()` returns the Tuple that matches the currently executing rule, and `drools.getActivation()` delivers the corresponding Activation. (These calls are useful for logging and debugging purposes.)

The full Knowledge Runtime API is exposed through another predefined variable, `kcontext`, of type `KieContext`. Its method `getKieRuntime()` delivers an object of type `KieRuntime`, which, in turn, provides access to a wealth of methods, many of which are quite useful for coding RHS logic.

- The call `kcontext.getKieRuntime().halt()` terminates rule execution immediately.

- The accessor `getAgenda()` returns a reference to this session’s `Agenda`, which in turn provides access to the various rule groups: activation groups, agenda groups, and rule flow groups. A fairly common paradigm is the activation of some agenda group, which could be done with the lengthy call:

      // give focus to the agenda group CleanUp
      kcontext.getKieRuntime().getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "CleanUp" ).setFocus();

  (You can achieve the same using `drools.setFocus( "CleanUp" )`.)

- To run a query, you call `getQueryResults(String query)`, whereupon you may process the results, as explained in section Query. Using `kcontext.getKieRuntime().getQueryResults()` or using `drools.getKieRuntime().getQueryResults()` is the proper method of running a query from a rule’s RHS, and the only supported way.

- A set of methods dealing with event management lets you, among other things, add and remove event listeners for the Working Memory and the Agenda.

- Method `getKieBase()` returns the `KieBase` object, the backbone of all the Knowledge in your system, and the originator of the current session.

- You can manage globals with `setGlobal(…​)`, `getGlobal(…​)` and `getGlobals()`.

- Method `getEnvironment()` returns the runtime’s `Environment` which works much like what you know as your operating system’s environment.

##### 5.8.4.2. The `modify` Statement

This language extension provides a structured approach to fact updates. It combines the update operation with a number of setter calls to change the object’s fields. This is the syntax schema for the `modify` statement:

    modify ( <fact-expression> ) {
        <expression> [ , <expression> ]*
    }

The parenthesized <fact-expression> must yield a fact object reference. The expression list in the block should consist of setter calls for the given object, to be written without the usual object reference, which is automatically prepended by the compiler.

The example illustrates a simple fact modification.

Example 139. A modify statement

    rule "modify stilton"
    when
        $stilton : Cheese(type == "stilton")
    then
        modify( $stilton ){
            setPrice( 20 ),
            setAge( "overripe" )
        }
    end

The advantages in using the modify statment are particularly clear when used in conjuction with fine grained property change listeners. See the corresponding section for more details.

#### 5.8.5. Conditional named consequences

Sometimes the constraint of having one single consequence for each rule can be somewhat limiting and leads to verbose and difficult to be maintained repetitions like in the following example:

    rule "Give 10% discount to customers older than 60"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
    then
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.1 ) };
    end

    rule "Give free parking to customers older than 60"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
        $car : Car ( owner == $customer )
    then
        modify($car) { setFreeParking( true ) };
    end

It is already possible to partially overcome this problem by making the second rule extending the first one like in:

    rule "Give 10% discount to customers older than 60"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
    then
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.1 ) };
    end

    rule "Give free parking to customers older than 60"
        extends "Give 10% discount to customers older than 60"
    when
        $car : Car ( owner == $customer )
    then
        modify($car) { setFreeParking( true ) };
    end

Anyway this feature makes it possible to define more labelled consequences other than the default one in a single rule, so, for example, the 2 former rules can be compacted in only one like it follows:

    rule "Give 10% discount and free parking to customers older than 60"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
        do[giveDiscount]
        $car : Car ( owner == $customer )
    then
        modify($car) { setFreeParking( true ) };
    then[giveDiscount]
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.1 ) };
    end

This last rule has 2 consequences, the usual default one, plus another one named "giveDiscount" that is activated, using the keyword do, as soon as a customer older than 60 is found in the KIE base, regardless of the fact that he owns a car or not. The activation of a named consequence can be also guarded by an additional condition like in this further example:

    rule "Give free parking to customers older than 60 and 10% discount to golden ones among them"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
        if ( type == "Golden" ) do[giveDiscount]
        $car : Car ( owner == $customer )
    then
        modify($car) { setFreeParking( true ) };
    then[giveDiscount]
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.1 ) };
    end

The condition in the if statement is always evaluated on the pattern immediately preceding it. In the end this last, a bit more complicated, example shows how it is possible to switch over different conditions using a nested if/else statement:

    rule "Give free parking and 10% discount to over 60 Golden customer and 5% to Silver ones"
    when
        $customer : Customer( age > 60 )
        if ( type == "Golden" ) do[giveDiscount10]
        else if ( type == "Silver" ) break[giveDiscount5]
        $car : Car ( owner == $customer )
    then
        modify($car) { setFreeParking( true ) };
    then[giveDiscount10]
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.1 ) };
    then[giveDiscount5]
        modify($customer) { setDiscount( 0.05 ) };
    end

Here the purpose is to give a 10% discount AND a free parking to Golden customers over 60, but only a 5% discount (without free parking) to the Silver ones. This result is achieved by activating the consequence named "giveDiscount5" using the keyword break instead of do. In fact do just schedules a consequence in the agenda, allowing the remaining part of the LHS to continue of being evaluated as per normal, while break also blocks any further pattern matching evaluation. Note, of course, that the activation of a named consequence not guarded by any condition with break doesn’t make sense (and generates a compile time error) since otherwise the LHS part following it would be never reachable.

#### 5.8.6. A Note on Auto-boxing and Primitive Types

Drools attempts to preserve numbers in their primitive or object wrapper form, so a variable bound to an int primitive when used in a code block or expression will no longer need manual unboxing; unlike Drools 3.0 where all primitives were autoboxed, requiring manual unboxing. A variable bound to an object wrapper will remain as an object; the existing JDK 1.5 and JDK 5 rules to handle auto-boxing and unboxing apply in this case. When evaluating field constraints, the system attempts to coerce one of the values into a comparable format; so a primitive is comparable to an object wrapper.

### 5.9. Query

Figure 77. query

A query is a simple way to search the working memory for facts that match the stated conditions. Therefore, it contains only the structure of the LHS of a rule, so that you specify neither "when" nor "then". A query has an optional set of parameters, each of which can be optionally typed. If the type is not given, the type Object is assumed. The Drools engine will attempt to coerce the values as needed. Query names are global to the KieBase; so do not add queries of the same name to different packages for the same RuleBase.

To return the results use `ksession.getQueryResults("name")`, where "name" is the query’s name. This returns a list of query results, which allow you to retrieve the objects that matched the query.

The first example presents a simple query for all the people over the age of 30. The second one, using parameters, combines the age limit with a location.

Example 140. Query People over the age of 30

    query "people over the age of 30"
        person : Person( age > 30 )
    end

Example 141. Query People over the age of x, and who live in y

    query "people over the age of x"  (int x, String y)
        person : Person( age > x, location == y )
    end

We iterate over the returned QueryResults using a standard "for" loop. Each element is a QueryResultsRow which we can use to access each of the columns in the tuple. These columns can be accessed by bound declaration name or index position.

Example 142. Query People over the age of 30

    QueryResults results = ksession.getQueryResults( "people over the age of 30" );
    System.out.println( "we have " + results.size() + " people over the age  of 30" );

    System.out.println( "These people are are over 30:" );

    for ( QueryResultsRow row : results ) {
        Person person = ( Person ) row.get( "person" );
        System.out.println( person.getName() + "\n" );
    }

Support for positional syntax has been added for more compact code. By default the declared type order in the type declaration matches the argument position. But it possible to override these using the @position annotation. This allows patterns to be used with positional arguments, instead of the more verbose named arguments.

    declare Cheese
        name : String @position(1)
        shop : String @position(2)
        price : int @position(0)
    end

The @Position annotation, in the org.drools.definition.type package, can be used to annotate original pojos on the classpath. Currently only fields on classes can be annotated. Inheritance of classes is supported, but not interfaces or methods. The isContainedIn query below demonstrates the use of positional arguments in a pattern; `Location(x, y;)` instead of `Location( thing == x, location == y).`

Queries can now call other queries, this combined with optional query arguments provides derivation query style backward chaining. Positional and named syntax is supported for arguments. It is also possible to mix both positional and named, but positional must come first, separated by a semi colon. Literal expressions can be passed as query arguments, but at this stage you cannot mix expressions with variables. Here is an example of a query that calls another query. Note that 'z' here will always be an 'out' variable. The '?' symbol means the query is pull only, once the results are returned you will not receive further results as the underlying data changes.

    declare Location
        thing : String
        location : String
    end

    query isContainedIn( String x, String y )
        Location(x, y;)
        or
        ( Location(z, y;) and ?isContainedIn(x, z;) )
    end

As previously mentioned you can use live "open" queries to reactively receive changes over time from the query results, as the underlying data it queries against changes. Notice the "look" rule calls the query without using '?'.

    query isContainedIn( String x, String y )
        Location(x, y;)
        or
        ( Location(z, y;) and isContainedIn(x, z;) )
    end

    rule look when
        Person( $l : likes )
        isContainedIn( $l, 'office'; )
    then
       insertLogical( $l 'is in the office' );
    end

Drools supports unification for derivation queries, in short this means that arguments are optional. It is possible to call queries from Java leaving arguments unspecified using the static field org.drools.core.runtime.rule.Variable.v - note you must use 'v' and not an alternative instance of Variable. These are referred to as 'out' arguments. Note that the query itself does not declare at compile time whether an argument is in or an out, this can be defined purely at runtime on each use. The following example will return all objects contained in the office.

    results = ksession.getQueryResults( "isContainedIn", new Object[] {  Variable.v, "office" } );
    l = new ArrayList<List<String>>();
    for ( QueryResultsRow r : results ) {
        l.add( Arrays.asList( new String[] { (String) r.get( "x" ), (String) r.get( "y" ) } ) );
    }

The algorithm uses stacks to handle recursion, so the method stack will not blow up.

It is also possible to use as input argument for a query both the field of a fact as in:

    query contains(String $s, String $c)
        $s := String( this.contains( $c ) )
    end

    rule PersonNamesWithA when
        $p : Person()
        contains( $p.name, "a"; )
    then
    end

and more in general any kind of valid expression like in:

    query checkLength(String $s, int $l)
        $s := String( length == $l )
    end

    rule CheckPersonNameLength when
        $i : Integer()
        $p : Person()
        checkLength( $p.name, 1 + $i + $p.age; )
    then
    end

The following is not yet supported:

- List and Map unification

- Expression unification - pred( X, X + 1, X * Y / 7 )

### 5.10. Domain Specific Languages

Domain Specific Languages (or DSLs) are a way of creating a rule language that is dedicated to your problem domain. A set of DSL definitions consists of transformations from DSL "sentences" to DRL constructs, which lets you use of all the underlying rule language and engine features. Given a DSL, you write rules in DSL rule (or DSLR) files, which will be translated into DRL files.

DSL and DSLR files are plain text files, and you can use any text editor to create and modify them. But there are also DSL and DSLR editors, both in the IDE as well as in the web based BRMS, and you can use those as well, although they may not provide you with the full DSL functionality.

#### 5.10.1. When to Use a DSL

DSLs can serve as a layer of separation between rule authoring (and rule authors) and the technical intricacies resulting from the modelling of domain object and the Drools engine’s native language and methods. If your rules need to be read and validated by domain experts (such as business analysts, for instance) who are not programmers, you should consider using a DSL; it hides implementation details and focuses on the rule logic proper. DSL sentences can also act as "templates" for conditional elements and consequence actions that are used repeatedly in your rules, possibly with minor variations. You may define DSL sentences as being mapped to these repeated phrases, with parameters providing a means for accommodating those variations.

DSLs have no impact on the Drools engine at runtime, they are just a compile time feature, requiring a special parser and transformer.

#### 5.10.2. DSL Basics

The Drools DSL mechanism allows you to customise conditional expressions and consequence actions. A global substitution mechanism ("keyword") is also available.

Example 143. Example DSL mapping

    [when]Something is {colour}=Something(colour=="{colour}")

In the preceding example, `[when]` indicates the scope of the expression, i.e., whether it is valid for the LHS or the RHS of a rule. The part after the bracketed keyword is the expression that you use in the rule; typically a natural language expression, but it doesn’t have to be. The part to the right of the equal sign ("=") is the mapping of the expression into the rule language. The form of this string depends on its destination, RHS or LHS. If it is for the LHS, then it ought to be a term according to the regular LHS syntax; if it is for the RHS then it might be a Java statement.

Whenever the DSL parser matches a line from the rule file written in the DSL with an expression in the DSL definition, it performs three steps of string manipulation. First, it extracts the string values appearing where the expression contains variable names in braces (here: `{colour}`). Then, the values obtained from these captures are then interpolated wherever that name, again enclosed in braces, occurs on the right hand side of the mapping. Finally, the interpolated string replaces whatever was matched by the entire expression in the line of the DSL rule file.

Note that the expressions (i.e., the strings on the left hand side of the equal sign) are used as regular expressions in a pattern matching operation against a line of the DSL rule file, matching all or part of a line. This means you can use (for instance) a '?' to indicate that the preceding character is optional. One good reason to use this is to overcome variations in natural language phrases of your DSL. But, given that these expressions are regular expression patterns, this also means that all "magic" characters of Java’s pattern syntax have to be escaped with a preceding backslash ('\').

It is important to note that the compiler transforms DSL rule files line by line. In the above example, all the text after "Something is " to the end of the line is captured as the replacement value for "{colour}", and this is used for interpolating the target string. This may not be exactly what you want. For instance, when you intend to merge different DSL expressions to generate a composite DRL pattern, you need to transform a DSLR line in several independent operations. The best way to achieve this is to ensure that the captures are surrounded by characteristic text - words or even single characters. As a result, the matching operation done by the parser plucks out a substring from somewhere within the line. In the example below, quotes are used as distinctive characters. Note that the characters that surround the capture are not included during interpolation, just the contents between them.

As a rule of thumb, use quotes for textual data that a rule editor may want to enter. You can also enclose the capture with words to ensure that the text is correctly matched. Both is illustrated by the following example. Note that a single line such as `Something is "green" and another solid thing` is now correctly expanded.

Example 144. Example with quotes

    [when]something is "{colour}"=Something(colour=="{colour}")
    [when]another {state} thing=OtherThing(state=="{state})"

It is a good idea to avoid punctuation (other than quotes or apostrophes) in your DSL expressions as much as possible. The main reason is that punctuation is easy to forget for rule authors using your DSL. Another reason is that parentheses, the period and the question mark are magic characters, requiring escaping in the DSL definition.

In a DSL mapping, the braces "{" and "}" should only be used to enclose a variable definition or reference, resulting in a capture. If they should occur literally, either in the expression or within the replacement text on the right hand side, they must be escaped with a preceding backslash ("\"):

    [then]do something= if (foo) \{ doSomething(); \}

| If braces "{" and "}" should appear in the replacement string of a DSL definition, escape them with a backslash ('\').

Example 145. Examples of DSL mapping entries

    # This is a comment to be ignored.
    [when]There is a person with name of "{name}"=Person(name=="{name}")
    [when]Person is at least {age} years old and lives in "{location}"=
          Person(age >= {age}, location=="{location}")
    [then]Log "{message}"=System.out.println("{message}");
    [when]And = and

Given the above DSL examples, the following examples show the expansion of various DSLR snippets:

Example 146. Examples of DSL expansions

    There is a person with name of "Kitty"
       ==> Person(name="Kitty")
    Person is at least 42 years old and lives in "Atlanta"
       ==> Person(age >= 42, location="Atlanta")
    Log "boo"
       ==> System.out.println("boo");
    There is a person with name of "Bob" And Person is at least 30 years old and lives in "Utah"
       ==> Person(name="Bob") and Person(age >= 30, location="Utah")

| Don’t forget that if you are capturing plain text from a DSL rule line and want to use it as a string literal in the expansion, you must provide the quotes on the right hand side of the mapping.

You can chain DSL expressions together on one line, as long as it is clear to the parser where one ends and the next one begins and where the text representing a parameter ends. (Otherwise you risk getting all the text until the end of the line as a parameter value.) The DSL expressions are tried, one after the other, according to their order in the DSL definition file. After any match, all remaining DSL expressions are investigated, too.

The resulting DRL text may consist of more than one line. Line ends are in the replacement text are written as `\n`.

#### 5.10.3. Adding Constraints to Facts

A common requirement when writing rule conditions is to be able to add an arbitrary combination of constraints to a pattern. Given that a fact type may have many fields, having to provide an individual DSL statement for each combination would be plain folly.

The DSL facility allows you to add constraints to a pattern by a simple convention: if your DSL expression starts with a hyphen (minus character, "-") it is assumed to be a field constraint and, consequently, is is added to the last pattern line preceding it.

For an example, lets take look at class `Cheese`, with the following fields: type, price, age and country. We can express some LHS condition in normal DRL like the following

    Cheese(age < 5, price == 20, type=="stilton", country=="ch")

The DSL definitions given below result in three DSL phrases which may be used to create any combination of constraint involving these fields.

    [when]There is a Cheese with=Cheese()
    [when]- age is less than {age}=age<{age}
    [when]- type is '{type}'=type=='{type}'
    [when]- country equal to '{country}'=country=='{country}'

You can then write rules with conditions like the following:

    There is a Cheese with
            - age is less than 42
            - type is 'stilton'

     The parser will pick up a line beginning with "-" and add it as a constraint to  the preceding pattern, inserting a comma when it is required.
    For the preceding example, the resulting DRL is:

    Cheese(age<42, type=='stilton')

Combining all numeric fields with all relational operators (according to the DSL expression "age is less than…​" in the preceding example) produces an unwieldy amount of DSL entries. But you can define DSL phrases for the various operators and even a generic expression that handles any field constraint, as shown below. (Notice that the expression definition contains a regular expression in addition to the variable name.)

    [when][]is less than or equal to=<=
    [when][]is less than=<
    [when][]is greater than or equal to=>=
    [when][]is greater than=>
    [when][]is equal to===
    [when][]equals===
    [when][]There is a Cheese with=Cheese()
    [when][]- {field:\w*} {operator} {value:\d*}={field} {operator} {value}

Given these DSL definitions, you can write rules with conditions such as:

    There is a Cheese with
       - age is less than 42
       - rating is greater than 50
       - type equals 'stilton'

In this specific case, a phrase such as "is less than" is replaced by `<`, and then the line matches the last DSL entry. This removes the hyphen, but the final result is still added as a constraint to the preceding pattern. After processing all of the lines, the resulting DRL text is:

    Cheese(age<42, rating > 50, type=='stilton')

| The order of the entries in the DSL is important if separate DSL expressions are intended to match the same line, one after the other.

#### 5.10.4. Developing a DSL

A good way to get started is to write representative samples of the rules your application requires, and to test them as you develop. This will provide you with a stable framework of conditional elements and their constraints. Rules, both in DRL and in DSLR, refer to entities according to the data model representing the application data that should be subject to the reasoning process defined in rules. Notice that writing rules is generally easier if most of the data model’s types are facts.

Given an initial set of rules, it should be possible to identify recurring or similar code snippets and to mark variable parts as parameters. This provides reliable leads as to what might be a handy DSL entry. Also, make sure you have a full grasp of the jargon the domain experts are using, and base your DSL phrases on this vocabulary.

You may postpone implementation decisions concerning conditions and actions during this first design phase by leaving certain conditional elements and actions in their DRL form by prefixing a line with a greater sign (">"). (This is also handy for inserting debugging statements.)

During the next development phase, you should find that the DSL configuration stabilizes pretty quickly. New rules can be written by reusing the existing DSL definitions, or by adding a parameter to an existing condition or consequence entry.

Try to keep the number of DSL entries small. Using parameters lets you apply the same DSL sentence for similar rule patterns or constraints. But do not exaggerate: authors using the DSL should still be able to identify DSL phrases by some fixed text.

#### 5.10.5. DSL and DSLR Reference

A DSL file is a text file in a line-oriented format. Its entries are used for transforming a DSLR file into a file according to DRL syntax.

- A line starting with "" or "//" (with or without preceding white space) is treated as a comment. A comment line starting with "/" is scanned for words requesting a debug option, see below.

- Any line starting with an opening bracket ("[") is assumed to be the first line of a DSL entry definition.

- Any other line is appended to the preceding DSL entry definition, with the line end replaced by a space.

A DSL entry consists of the following four parts:

- A scope definition, written as one of the keywords "when" or "condition", "then" or "consequence", "*" and "keyword", enclosed in brackets ("[" and "]"). This indicates whether the DSL entry is valid for the condition or the consequence of a rule, or both. A scope indication of "keyword" means that the entry has global significance, i.e., it is recognized anywhere in a DSLR file.

- A type definition, written as a Java class name, enclosed in brackets. This part is optional unless the next part begins with an opening bracket. An empty pair of brackets is valid, too.

- A DSL expression consists of a (Java) regular expression, with any number of embedded variable definitions, terminated by an equal sign ("="). A variable definition is enclosed in braces ("{" and "}"). It consists of a variable name and two optional attachments, separated by colons (":"). If there is one attachment, it is a regular expression for matching text that is to be assigned to the variable; if there are two attachments, the first one is a hint for the GUI editor and the second one the regular expression.

  Note that all characters that are "magic" in regular expressions must be escaped with a preceding backslash ("\") if they should occur literally within the expression.

- The remaining part of the line after the delimiting equal sign is the replacement text for any DSLR text matching the regular expression. It may contain variable references, i.e., a variable name enclosed in braces. Optionally, the variable name may be followed by an exclamation mark ("!") and a transformation function, see below.

  Note that braces ("{" and "}") must be escaped with a preceding backslash ("\") if they should occur literally within the replacement string.

Debugging of DSL expansion can be turned on, selectively, by using a comment line starting with "#/" which may contain one or more words from the table presented below. The resulting output is written to standard output.

Table 12. Debug options for DSL expansion
Word | Description
--- | ---
result | Prints the resulting DRL text, with line numbers.
steps | Prints each expansion step of condition and consequence lines.
keyword | Dumps the internal representation of all DSL entries with scope "keyword".
when | Dumps the internal representation of all DSL entries with scope "when" or "*".
then | Dumps the internal representation of all DSL entries with scope "then" or "*".
usage | Displays a usage statistic of all DSL entries.

Below are some sample DSL definitions, with comments describing the language features they illustrate.

    # Comment: DSL examples

    #/ debug: display result and usage

    # keyword definition: replaces "regula" by "rule"
    [keyword][]regula=rule

    # conditional element: "T" or "t", "a" or "an", convert matched word
    [when][][Tt]here is an? {entity:\w+}=
            ${entity!lc}: {entity!ucfirst} ()

    # consequence statement: convert matched word, literal braces
    [then][]update {entity:\w+}=modify( ${entity!lc} )\{ \}

The transformation of a DSLR file proceeds as follows:

1. The text is read into memory.

2. Each of the "keyword" entries is applied to the entire text. First, the regular expression from the keyword definition is modified by replacing white space sequences with a pattern matching any number of white space characters, and by replacing variable definitions with a capture made from the regular expression provided with the definition, or with the default (".*?"). Then, the DSLR text is searched exhaustively for occurrences of strings matching the modified regular expression. Substrings of a matching string corresponding to variable captures are extracted and replace variable references in the corresponding replacement text, and this text replaces the matching string in the DSLR text.

3. Sections of the DSLR text between "when" and "then", and "then" and "end", respectively, are located and processed in a uniform manner, line by line, as described below.

   For a line, each DSL entry pertaining to the line’s section is taken in turn, in the order it appears in the DSL file. Its regular expression part is modified: white space is replaced by a pattern matching any number of white space characters; variable definitions with a regular expression are replaced by a capture with this regular expression, its default being ".*?". If the resulting regular expression matches all or part of the line, the matched part is replaced by the suitably modified replacement text.

   Modification of the replacement text is done by replacing variable references with the text corresponding to the regular expression capture. This text may be modified according to the string transformation function given in the variable reference; see below for details.

   If there is a variable reference naming a variable that is not defined in the same entry, the expander substitutes a value bound to a variable of that name, provided it was defined in one of the preceding lines of the current rule.

4. If a DSLR line in a condition is written with a leading hyphen, the expanded result is inserted into the last line, which should contain a pattern CE, i.e., a type name followed by a pair of parentheses. if this pair is empty, the expanded line (which should contain a valid constraint) is simply inserted, otherwise a comma (",") is inserted beforehand.

   If a DSLR line in a consequence is written with a leading hyphen, the expanded result is inserted into the last line, which should contain a "modify" statement, ending in a pair of braces ("{" and "}"). If this pair is empty, the expanded line (which should contain a valid method call) is simply inserted, otherwise a comma (",") is inserted beforehand.

| It is currently not possible to use a line with a leading hyphen to insert text into other conditional element forms (e.g., "accumulate") or it may only work for the first insertion (e.g., "eval").

All string transformation functions are described in the following table.

Table 13. String transformation functions
Name | Description
--- | ---
uc | Converts all letters to upper case.
lc | Converts all letters to lower case.
ucfirst | Converts the first letter to upper case, and all other letters to lower case.
num | Extracts all digits and "-" from the string. If the last two digits in the original string are preceded by "." or ",", a decimal period is inserted in the corresponding position.
a?b/c | Compares the string with string a, and if they are equal, replaces it with b, otherwise with c. But c can be another triplet a, b, c, so that the entire structure is, in fact, a translation table.

The following DSL examples show how to use string transformation functions.

    # definitions for conditions
    [when][]There is an? {entity}=${entity!lc}: {entity!ucfirst}()
    [when][]- with an? {attr} greater than {amount}={attr} <= {amount!num}
    [when][]- with a {what} {attr}={attr} {what!positive?>0/negative?%lt;0/zero?==0/ERROR}

A file containing a DSL definition has to be put under the resources folder or any of its subfolders like any other drools artifact. It must have the extension `.dsl`, or alternatively be marked with type `ResourceType.DSL`. when programmatically added to a `KieFileSystem`. For a file using DSL definition, the extension `.dslr` should be used, while it can be added to a `KieFileSystem` with type `ResourceType.DSLR`.

For parsing and expanding a DSLR file the DSL configuration is read and supplied to the parser. Thus, the parser can "recognize" the DSL expressions and transform them into native rule language expressions.

## 6. Decision Model and Notation (DMN)

### 6.1. Decision Model and Notation (DMN)

Decision Model and Notation (DMN) is a standard established by the Object Management Group (OMG) for describing and modeling operational decisions. DMN defines an XML schema that enables DMN models to be shared between DMN-compliant platforms and across organizations so that business analysts and business rules developers can collaborate in designing and implementing DMN decision services. The DMN standard is similar to and can be used together with the Business Process Model and Notation (BPMN) standard for designing and modeling business processes.

For more information about the background and applications of DMN, see the OMG Decision Model and Notation specification.

#### 6.1.1. DMN conformance levels

The DMN specification defines three incremental levels of conformance in a software implementation. A product that claims compliance at one level must also be compliant with any preceding levels. For example, a conformance level 3 implementation must also include the supported components in conformance levels 1 and 2. For the formal definitions of each conformance level, see the OMG Decision Model and Notation specification.

The following list summarizes the three DMN conformance levels:

Conformance level 1

  A DMN conformance level 1 implementation supports decision requirement diagrams (DRDs), decision logic, and decision tables, but decision models are not executable. Any language can be used to define the expressions, including natural, unstructured languages.

Conformance level 2

  A DMN conformance level 2 implementation includes the requirements in conformance level 1, and supports Simplified Friendly Enough Expression Language (S-FEEL) expressions and fully executable decision models.

Conformance level 3

  A DMN conformance level 3 implementation includes the requirements in conformance levels 1 and 2, and supports Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) expressions, the full set of boxed expressions, and fully executable decision models.

Drools provides design and runtime support for DMN 1.2 models at conformance level 3. You can design your DMN models directly in Business Central or import existing DMN models into your Drools projects for deployment and execution.

#### 6.1.2. DMN decision requirements diagram (DRD) components

A decision requirements diagram (DRD) is a visual representation of your DMN model. This diagram consists of one or more decision requirements graphs (DRGs) that represent a particular domain of an overall DRD. The DRGs trace business decisions using decision nodes, business knowledge models, sources of business knowledge, input data, and decision services.

The following table summarizes the components in a DRD:

Table 14. DRD components
Component | Description | Notation
--- | --- | ---
Elements | Decision | Node where one or more input elements determine an output based on defined decision logic. |
Business knowledge model | Reusable function with one or more decision elements. Decisions that have the same logic but depend on different sub-input data or sub-decisions use business knowledge models to determine which procedure to follow. |
Knowledge source | External authorities, documents, committees, or policies that regulate a decision or business knowledge model. Knowledge sources are references to real-world factors rather than executable business rules. |
Input data | Information used in a decision node or a business knowledge model. Input data usually includes business-level concepts or objects relevant to the business, such as loan applicant data used in a lending strategy. |
Decision service | Top-level decision containing a set of reusable decisions published as a service for invocation. A decision service can be invoked from an external application or a BPMN business process. |
Requirement connectors | Information requirement | Connection from an input data node or decision node to another decision node that requires the information. |
Knowledge requirement | Connection from a business knowledge model to a decision node or to another business knowledge model that invokes the decision logic. |
Authority requirement | Connection from an input data node or a decision node to a dependent knowledge source or from a knowledge source to a decision node, business knowledge model, or another knowledge source. |
Artifacts | Text annotation | Explanatory note associated with an input data node, decision node, business knowledge model, or knowledge source. |
Association | Connection from an input data node, decision node, business knowledge model, or knowledge source to a text annotation. |

The following table summarizes the permitted connectors between DRD elements:

Table 15. DRD connector rules
Starts from | Connects to | Connection type | Example
--- | --- | --- | ---
Decision | Decision | Information requirement |
Business knowledge model | Decision | Knowledge requirement |
Business knowledge model |
Decision service | Decision | Knowledge requirement |
Business knowledge model |
Input data | Decision | Information requirement |
Knowledge source | Authority requirement |
Knowledge source | Decision | Authority requirement |
Business knowledge model |
Knowledge source |
Decision | Text annotation | Association |
Business knowledge model |
Knowledge source |
Input data |

The following example DRD illustrates some of these DMN components in practice:

Figure 78. Example DRD: Loan prequalification

The following example DRD illustrates DMN components that are part of a reusable decision service:

Figure 79. Example DRD: Phone call handling as a decision service

In a DMN decision service node, the decision nodes in the bottom segment incorporate input data from outside of the decision service to arrive at a final decision in the top segment of the decision service node. The resulting top-level decisions from the decision service are then implemented in any subsequent decisions or business knowledge requirements of the DMN model. You can reuse DMN decision services in other DMN models to apply the same decision logic with different input data and different outgoing connections.

#### 6.1.3. Rule expressions in FEEL

Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) is an expression language defined by the Object Management Group (OMG) DMN specification. FEEL expressions define the logic of a decision in a DMN model. FEEL is designed to facilitate both decision modeling and execution by assigning semantics to the decision model constructs. FEEL expressions in decision requirements diagrams (DRDs) occupy table cells in boxed expressions for decision nodes and business knowledge models.

For more information about FEEL in DMN, see the OMG Decision Model and Notation specification.

##### 6.1.3.1. Variable and function names in FEEL

Unlike many traditional expression languages, Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) supports spaces and a few special characters as part of variable and function names. A FEEL name must start with a `letter`, `?`, or `_` element. The unicode letter characters are also allowed. Variable names cannot start with a language keyword, such as `and`, `true`, or `every`. The remaining characters in a variable name can be any of the starting characters, as well as `digits`, white spaces, and special characters such as `+`, `-`, `/`, `*`, `'`, and `.`.

For example, the following names are all valid FEEL names:

- Age

- Birth Date

- Flight 234 pre-check procedure

Several limitations apply to variable and function names in FEEL:

Ambiguity

  The use of spaces, keywords, and other special characters as part of names can make FEEL ambiguous. The ambiguities are resolved in the context of the expression, matching names from left to right. The parser resolves the variable name as the longest name matched in scope. You can use `( )` to disambiguate names if necessary.

Spaces in names

  The DMN specification limits the use of spaces in FEEL names. According to the DMN specification, names can contain multiple spaces but not two consecutive spaces.

  In order to make the language easier to use and avoid common errors due to spaces, Drools removes the limitation on the use of consecutive spaces. Drools supports variable names with any number of consecutive spaces, but normalizes them into a single space. For example, the variable references `First Name` with one space and `First Name` with two spaces are both acceptable in Drools.

  Drools also normalizes the use of other white spaces, like the non-breakable white space that is common in web pages, tabs, and line breaks. From a Drools FEEL engine perspective, all of these characters are normalized into a single white space before processing.

The keyword `in`

  The keyword `in` is the only keyword in the language that cannot be used as part of a variable name. Although the specifications allow the use of keywords in the middle of variable names, the use of `in` in variable names conflicts with the grammar definition of `for`, `every` and `some` expression constructs.

##### 6.1.3.2. Data types in FEEL

Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) supports the following data types:

- Numbers

- Strings

- Boolean values

- Dates

- Time

- Date and time

- Days and time duration

- Years and months duration

- Functions

- Contexts

- Ranges (or intervals)

- Lists

| The DMN specification currently does not provide an explicit way of declaring a variable as a `function`, `context`, `range`, or `list`, but Drools extends the DMN built-in types to support variables of these types.

The following list describes each data type:

Numbers

  Numbers in FEEL are based on the IEEE 754-2008 Decimal 128 format, with 34 digits of precision. Internally, numbers are represented in Java as `BigDecimals` with `MathContext DECIMAL128`. FEEL supports only one number data type, so the same type is used to represent both integers and floating point numbers.

  FEEL numbers use a dot (`.`) as a decimal separator. FEEL does not support `-INF`, `+INF`, or `NaN`. FEEL uses `null` to represent invalid numbers.

  Drools extends the DMN specification and supports additional number notations:

  - Scientific: You can use scientific notation with the suffix `e<exp>` or `E<exp>`. For example, `1.2e3` is the same as writing the expression `1.2*10**3`, but is a literal instead of an expression.

  - Hexadecimal: You can use hexadecimal numbers with the prefix `0x`. For example, `0xff` is the same as the decimal number `255`. Both uppercase and lowercase letters are supported. For example, `0XFF` is the same as `0xff`.

  - Type suffixes: You can use the type suffixes `f`, `F`, `d`, `D`, `l`, and `L`. These suffixes are ignored.

Strings

  Strings in FEEL are any sequence of characters delimited by double quotation marks.

  Example:

      "John Doe"

Boolean values

  FEEL uses three-valued boolean logic, so a boolean logic expression may have values `true`, `false`, or `null`.

Dates

  Date literals are not supported in FEEL, but you can use the built-in `date()` function to construct date values. Date strings in FEEL follow the format defined in the XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes document. The format is `"YYYY-MM-DD"` where `YYYY` is the year with four digits, `MM` is the number of the month with two digits, and `DD` is the number of the day.

  Example:

      date( "2017-06-23" )

  Date objects have time equal to `"00:00:00"`, which is midnight. The dates are considered to be local, without a timezone.

Time

  Time literals are not supported in FEEL, but you can use the built-in `time()` function to construct time values. Time strings in FEEL follow the format defined in the XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes document. The format is `"hh:mm:ss[.uuu][(+-)hh:mm]"` where `hh` is the hour of the day (from `00` to `23`), `mm` is the minutes in the hour, and `ss` is the number of seconds in the minute. Optionally, the string may define the number of milliseconds (`uuu`) within the second and contain a positive (`+`) or negative (`-`) offset from UTC time to define its timezone. Instead of using an offset, you can use the letter `z` to represent the UTC time, which is the same as an offset of `-00:00`. If no offset is defined, the time is considered to be local.

  Examples:

      time( "04:25:12" )
      time( "14:10:00+02:00" )
      time( "22:35:40.345-05:00" )
      time( "15:00:30z" )

  Time values that define an offset or a timezone cannot be compared to local times that do not define an offset or a timezone.

Date and time

  Date and time literals are not supported in FEEL, but you can use the built-in `date and time()` function to construct date and time values. Date and time strings in FEEL follow the format defined in the XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes document. The format is `"<date>T<time>"`, where `<date>` and `<time>` follow the prescribed XML schema formatting, conjoined by `T`.

  Examples:

      date and time( "2017-10-22T23:59:00" )
      date and time( "2017-06-13T14:10:00+02:00" )
      date and time( "2017-02-05T22:35:40.345-05:00" )
      date and time( "2017-06-13T15:00:30z" )

  Date and time values that define an offset or a timezone cannot be compared to local date and time values that do not define an offset or a timezone.

  | If your implementation of the DMN specification does not support spaces in the XML schema, use the keyword `dateTime` as a synonym of `date and time`.

Days and time duration

  Days and time duration literals are not supported in FEEL, but you can use the built-in `duration()` function to construct days and time duration values. Days and time duration strings in FEEL follow the format defined in the XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes document, but are restricted to only days, hours, minutes and seconds. Months and years are not supported.

  Examples:

      duration( "P1DT23H12M30S" )
      duration( "P23D" )
      duration( "PT12H" )
      duration( "PT35M" )

  | If your implementation of the DMN specification does not support spaces in the XML schema, use the keyword `dayTimeDuration` as a synonym of `days and time duration`.

Years and months duration

  Years and months duration literals are not supported in FEEL, but you can use the built-in `duration()` function to construct days and time duration values. Years and months duration strings in FEEL follow the format defined in the XML Schema Part 2: Datatypes document, but are restricted to only years and months. Days, hours, minutes, or seconds are not supported.

  Examples:

      duration( "P3Y5M" )
      duration( "P2Y" )
      duration( "P10M" )
      duration( "P25M" )

  | If your implementation of the DMN specification does not support spaces in the XML schema, use the keyword `yearMonthDuration` as a synonym of `years and months duration`.

Functions

  FEEL has `function` literals (or anonymous functions) that you can use to create functions. The DMN specification currently does not provide an explicit way of declaring a variable as a `function`, but Drools extends the DMN built-in types to support variables of functions.

  Example:

      function(a, b) a + b

  In this example, the FEEL expression creates a function that adds the parameters `a` and `b` and returns the result.

Contexts

  FEEL has `context` literals that you can use to create contexts. A `context` in FEEL is a list of key and value pairs, similar to maps in languages like Java. The DMN specification currently does not provide an explicit way of declaring a variable as a `context`, but Drools extends the DMN built-in types to support variables of contexts.

  Example:

      { x : 5, y : 3 }

  In this example, the expression creates a context with two entries, `x` and `y`, representing a coordinate in a chart.

  In DMN 1.2, another way to create contexts is to create an item definition that contains the list of keys as attributes, and then declare the variable as having that item definition type.

  The Drools DMN API supports DMN `ItemDefinition` structural types in a `DMNContext` represented in two ways:

  - User-defined Java type: Must be a valid JavaBeans object defining properties and getters for each of the components in the DMN `ItemDefinition`. If necessary, you can also use the `@FEELProperty` annotation for those getters representing a component name which would result in an invalid Java identifier.

  - `java.util.Map` interface: The map needs to define the appropriate entries, with the keys corresponding to the component name in the DMN `ItemDefinition`.

Ranges (or intervals)

  FEEL has `range` literals that you can use to create ranges or intervals. A `range` in FEEL is a value that defines a lower and an upper bound, where either can be open or closed. The DMN specification currently does not provide an explicit way of declaring a variable as a `range`, but Drools extends the DMN built-in types to support variables of ranges.

  The syntax of a range is defined in the following formats:

      range          := interval_start endpoint '..' endpoint interval_end
      interval_start := open_start | closed_start
      open_start     := '(' | ']'
      closed_start   := '['
      interval_end   := open_end | closed_end
      open_end       := ')' | '['
      closed_end     := ']'
      endpoint       := expression

  The expression for the endpoint must return a comparable value, and the lower bound endpoint must be lower than the upper bound endpoint.

  For example, the following literal expression defines an interval between `1` and `10`, including the boundaries (a closed interval on both endpoints):

      [ 1 .. 10 ]

  The following literal expression defines an interval between 1 hour and 12 hours, including the lower boundary (a closed interval), but excluding the upper boundary (an open interval):

      [ duration("PT1H") .. duration("PT12H") ]

  You can use ranges in decision tables to test for ranges of values, or use ranges in simple literal expressions. For example, the following literal expression returns `true` if the value of a variable `x` is between `0` and `100`:

      x in [ 1 .. 100 ]

Lists

  FEEL has `list` literals that you can use to create lists of items. A `list` in FEEL is represented by a comma-separated list of values enclosed in square brackets. The DMN specification currently does not provide an explicit way of declaring a variable as a `list`, but Drools extends the DMN built-in types to support variables of lists.

  Example:

      [ 2, 3, 4, 5 ]

  All lists in FEEL contain elements of the same type and are immutable. Elements in a list can be accessed by index, where the first element is `1`. Negative indexes can access elements starting from the end of the list so that `-1` is the last element.

  For example, the following expression returns the second element of a list `x`:

      x[2]

  The following expression returns the second-to-last element of a list `x`:

      x[-2]

  Elements in a list can also be counted by the function `count`, which uses the list of elements as the parameter.

  For example, the following expression returns `4`:

      count([ 2, 3, 4, 5 ])

#### 6.1.4. DMN decision logic in boxed expressions

Boxed expressions in DMN are tables that you use to define the underlying logic of decision nodes and business knowledge models in a decision requirements diagram (DRD) or decision requirements graph (DRG). Some boxed expressions can contain other boxed expressions, but the top-level boxed expression corresponds to the decision logic of a single DRD artifact. While DRDs with one or more DRGs represent the flow of a DMN decision model, boxed expressions define the actual decision logic of individual nodes. DRDs and boxed expressions together form a complete and functional DMN decision model.

The following are the types of DMN boxed expressions:

- Decision tables

- Literal expressions

- Contexts

- Relations

- Functions

- Invocations

- Lists

| Drools does not provide boxed list expressions in Business Central, but supports a FEEL `list` data type that you can use in boxed literal expressions. For more information about the `list` data type and other FEEL data types in Drools, see Data types in FEEL.

All Friendly Enough Expression Language (FEEL) expressions that you use in your boxed expressions must conform to the FEEL syntax requirements in the OMG Decision Model and Notation specification.

##### 6.1.4.1. DMN decision tables

A decision table in DMN is a visual representation of one or more business rules in a tabular format. You use decision tables to define rules for a decision node that applies those rules at a given point in the decision model. Each rule consists of a single row in the table, and includes columns that define the conditions (input) and outcome (output) for that particular row. The definition of each row is precise enough to derive the outcome using the values of the conditions. Input and output values can be FEEL expressions or defined data type values.

For example, the following decision table determines credit score ratings based on a defined range of a loan applicant’s credit score:

Figure 80. Decision table for credit score rating

The following decision table determines the next step in a lending strategy for applicants depending on applicant loan eligibility and the bureau call type:

Figure 81. Decision table for lending strategy

The following decision table determines applicant qualification for a loan as the concluding decision node in a loan prequalification decision model:

Figure 82. Decision table for loan prequalification

Decision tables are a popular way of modeling rules and decision logic, and are used in many methodologies (such as DMN) and implementation frameworks (such as Drools).

| Drools supports both DMN decision tables and Drools-native decision tables, but they are different types of assets with different syntax requirements and are not interchangeable. For more information about Drools-native decision tables in Drools, see Spreadsheet decision tables.

###### Hit policies in DMN decision tables

Hit policies determine how to reach an outcome when multiple rules in a decision table match the provided input values. For example, if one rule in a decision table applies a sales discount to military personnel and another rule applies a discount to students, then when a customer is both a student and in the military, the decision table hit policy must indicate whether to apply one discount or the other (Unique, First) or both discounts (Collect Sum). You specify the single character of the hit policy (U, F, C+) in the upper-left corner of the decision table.

The following decision table hit policies are supported in DMN:

- Unique (U): Permits only one rule to match. Any overlap raises an error.

- Any (A): Permits multiple rules to match, but they must all have the same output. If multiple matching rules do not have the same output, an error is raised.

- Priority (P): Permits multiple rules to match, with different outputs. The output that comes first in the output values list is selected.

- First (F): Uses the first match in rule order.

- Collect (C+, C>, C<, C#): Aggregates output from multiple rules based on an aggregation function.

  - Collect ( C ): Aggregates values in an arbitrary list.

  - Collect Sum (C+): Outputs the sum of all collected values. Values must be numeric.

  - Collect Min (C<): Outputs the minimum value among the matches. The resulting values must be comparable, such as numbers, dates, or text (lexicographic order).

  - Collect Max (C>): Outputs the maximum value among the matches. The resulting values must be comparable, such as numbers, dates or text (lexicographic order).

  - Collect Count (C#): Outputs the number of matching rules.

##### 6.1.4.2. Boxed literal expressions

A boxed literal expression in DMN is a literal FEEL expression as text in a table cell, typically with a labeled column and an assigned data type. You use boxed literal expressions to define simple or complex node logic or decision data directly in FEEL for a particular node in a decision. Literal FEEL expressions must conform to FEEL syntax requirements in the OMG Decision Model and Notation specification.

For example, the following boxed literal expression defines the minimum acceptable PITI calculation (principal, interest, taxes, and insurance) in a lending decision, where `acceptable rate` is a variable defined in the DMN model:

Figure 83. Boxed literal expression for minimum PITI value

The following boxed literal expression sorts a list of possible dating candidates (soul mates) in an online dating application based on their score on criteria such as age, location, and interests:

Figure 84. Boxed literal expression for matching online dating candidates

##### 6.1.4.3. Boxed context expressions

A boxed context expression in DMN is a set of variable names and values with a result value. Each name-value pair is a context entry. You use context expressions to represent data definitions in decision logic and set a value for a desired decision element within the DMN decision model. A value in a boxed context expression can be a data type value or FEEL expression, or can contain a nested sub-expression of any type, such as a decision table, a literal expression, or another context expression.

For example, the following boxed context expression defines the factors for sorting delayed passengers in a flight-rebooking decision model, based on defined data types (`tPassengerTable`, `tFlightNumberList`):

Figure 85. Boxed context expression for flight passenger waiting list

The following boxed context expression defines the factors that determine whether a loan applicant can meet minimum mortgage payments based on principal, interest, taxes, and insurance (PITI), represented as a front-end ratio calculation with a sub-context expression:

Figure 86. Boxed context expression for front-end client PITI ratio

##### 6.1.4.4. Boxed relation expressions

A boxed relation expression in DMN is a traditional data table with information about given entities, listed as rows. You use boxed relation tables to define decision data for relevant entities in a decision at a particular node. Boxed relation expressions are similar to context expressions in that they set variable names and values, but relation expressions contain no result value and list all variable values based on a single defined variable in each column.

For example, the following boxed relation expression provides information about employees in an employee rostering decision:

Figure 87. Boxed relation expression with employee information

##### 6.1.4.5. Boxed function expressions

A boxed function expression in DMN is a parameterized boxed expression containing a literal FEEL expression, a nested context expression of an external JAVA or PMML function, or a nested boxed expression of any type. By default, all business knowledge models are defined as boxed function expressions. You use boxed function expressions to call functions on your decision logic and to define all business knowledge models.

For example, the following boxed function expression determines airline flight capacity in a flight-rebooking decision model:

Figure 88. Boxed function expression for flight capacity

The following boxed function expression contains a basic Java function as a context expression for determining absolute value in a decision model calculation:

Figure 89. Boxed function expression for absolute value

The following boxed function expression determines a monthly mortgage installment as a business knowledge model in a lending decision, with the function value defined as a nested context expression:

Figure 90. Boxed function expression for installment calculation in business knowledge model

##### 6.1.4.6. Boxed invocation expressions

A boxed invocation expression in DMN is a boxed expression that invokes a business knowledge model. A boxed invocation expression contains the name of the business knowledge model to be invoked and a list of parameter bindings. Each binding is represented by two boxed expressions on a row: The box on the left contains the name of a parameter and the box on the right contains the binding expression whose value is assigned to the parameter to evaluate the invoked business knowledge model. You use boxed invocations to invoke at a particular decision node a business knowledge model defined in the decision model.

For example, the following boxed invocation expression invokes a `Reassign Next Passenger` business knowledge model as the concluding decision node in a flight-rebooking decision model:

Figure 91. Boxed invocation expression to reassign flight passengers

The following boxed invocation expression invokes an `InstallmentCalculation` business knowledge model to calculate a monthly installment amount for a loan before proceeding to affordability decisions:

Figure 92. Boxed invocation expression for required monthly installment

#### 6.1.5. DMN model example

The following is a real-world DMN model example that demonstrates how you can use decision modeling to reach a decision based on input data, circumstances, and company guidelines. In this scenario, a flight from San Diego to New York is canceled, requiring the affected airline to find alternate arrangements for its inconvenienced passengers.

First, the airline collects the information necessary to determine how best to get the travelers to their destinations:

Input data

  - List of flights

  - List of passengers

Decisions

  - Prioritize the passengers who will get seats on a new flight

  - Determine which flights those passengers will be offered

Business knowledge models

  - The company process for determining passenger priority

  - Any flights that have space available

  - Company rules for determining how best to reassign inconvenienced passengers

The airline then uses the DMN standard to model its decision process in the following decision requirements diagram (DRD) for determining the best rebooking solution:

Figure 93. DRD for flight rebooking

Similar to flowcharts, DRDs use shapes to represent the different elements in a process. Ovals contain the two necessary input data, rectangles contain the decision points in the model, and rectangles with clipped corners (business knowledge models) contain reusable logic that can be repeatedly invoked.

The DRD draws logic for each element from boxed expressions that provide variable definitions using FEEL expressions or data type values.

Some boxed expressions are basic, such as the following decision for establishing a prioritized waiting list:

Figure 94. Boxed context expression example for prioritized wait list

Some boxed expressions are more complex with greater detail and calculation, such as the following business knowledge model for reassigning the next delayed passenger:

Figure 95. Boxed function expression for passenger reassignment

The following is the DMN source file for this decision model:

    <dmn:definitions xmlns="https://www.drools.org/kie-dmn/Flight-rebooking" xmlns:dmn="http://www.omg.org/spec/DMN/20151101/dmn.xsd" xmlns:feel="http://www.omg.org/spec/FEEL/20140401" id="_0019_flight_rebooking" name="0019-flight-rebooking" namespace="https://www.drools.org/kie-dmn/Flight-rebooking">
      <dmn:itemDefinition id="_tFlight" name="tFlight">
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_Flight" name="Flight Number">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_From" name="From">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_To" name="To">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_Dep" name="Departure">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:dateTime</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_Arr" name="Arrival">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:dateTime</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_Capacity" name="Capacity">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:number</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tFlight_Status" name="Status">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
      </dmn:itemDefinition>
      <dmn:itemDefinition id="_tFlightTable" isCollection="true" name="tFlightTable">
        <dmn:typeRef>tFlight</dmn:typeRef>
      </dmn:itemDefinition>
      <dmn:itemDefinition id="_tPassenger" name="tPassenger">
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tPassenger_Name" name="Name">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tPassenger_Status" name="Status">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tPassenger_Miles" name="Miles">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:number</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
        <dmn:itemComponent id="_tPassenger_Flight" name="Flight Number">
          <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
        </dmn:itemComponent>
      </dmn:itemDefinition>
      <dmn:itemDefinition id="_tPassengerTable" isCollection="true" name="tPassengerTable">
        <dmn:typeRef>tPassenger</dmn:typeRef>
      </dmn:itemDefinition>
      <dmn:itemDefinition id="_tFlightNumberList" isCollection="true" name="tFlightNumberList">
        <dmn:typeRef>feel:string</dmn:typeRef>
      </dmn:itemDefinition>
      <dmn:inputData id="i_Flight_List" name="Flight List">
        <dmn:variable name="Flight List" typeRef="tFlightTable"/>
      </dmn:inputData>
      <dmn:inputData id="i_Passenger_List" name="Passenger List">
        <dmn:variable name="Passenger List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
      </dmn:inputData>
      <dmn:decision name="Prioritized Waiting List" id="d_PrioritizedWaitingList">
        <dmn:variable name="Prioritized Waiting List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
        <dmn:informationRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredInput href="#i_Passenger_List"/>
        </dmn:informationRequirement>
        <dmn:informationRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredInput href="#i_Flight_List"/>
        </dmn:informationRequirement>
        <dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredKnowledge href="#b_PassengerPriority"/>
        </dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
        <dmn:context>
          <dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:variable name="Cancelled Flights" typeRef="tFlightNumberList"/>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>Flight List[ Status = "cancelled" ].Flight Number</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:contextEntry>
          <dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:variable name="Waiting List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>Passenger List[ list contains( Cancelled Flights, Flight Number ) ]</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:contextEntry>
          <dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>sort( Waiting List, passenger priority )</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:contextEntry>
        </dmn:context>
      </dmn:decision>
      <dmn:decision name="Rebooked Passengers" id="d_RebookedPassengers">
        <dmn:variable name="Rebooked Passengers" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
        <dmn:informationRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredDecision href="#d_PrioritizedWaitingList"/>
        </dmn:informationRequirement>
        <dmn:informationRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredInput href="#i_Flight_List"/>
        </dmn:informationRequirement>
        <dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredKnowledge href="#b_ReassignNextPassenger"/>
        </dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
        <dmn:invocation>
          <dmn:literalExpression>
            <dmn:text>reassign next passenger</dmn:text>
          </dmn:literalExpression>
          <dmn:binding>
            <dmn:parameter name="Waiting List"/>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>Prioritized Waiting List</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:binding>
          <dmn:binding>
            <dmn:parameter name="Reassigned Passengers List"/>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>[]</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:binding>
          <dmn:binding>
            <dmn:parameter name="Flights"/>
            <dmn:literalExpression>
              <dmn:text>Flight List</dmn:text>
            </dmn:literalExpression>
          </dmn:binding>
        </dmn:invocation>
      </dmn:decision>
      <dmn:businessKnowledgeModel id="b_PassengerPriority" name="passenger priority">
        <dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="Passenger1" typeRef="tPassenger"/>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="Passenger2" typeRef="tPassenger"/>
          <dmn:decisionTable hitPolicy="UNIQUE">
            <dmn:input id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_i_P1_Status" label="Passenger1.Status">
              <dmn:inputExpression typeRef="feel:string">
                <dmn:text>Passenger1.Status</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputExpression>
              <dmn:inputValues>
                <dmn:text>"gold", "silver", "bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputValues>
            </dmn:input>
            <dmn:input id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_i_P2_Status" label="Passenger2.Status">
              <dmn:inputExpression typeRef="feel:string">
                <dmn:text>Passenger2.Status</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputExpression>
              <dmn:inputValues>
                <dmn:text>"gold", "silver", "bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputValues>
            </dmn:input>
            <dmn:input id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_i_P1_Miles" label="Passenger1.Miles">
              <dmn:inputExpression typeRef="feel:string">
                <dmn:text>Passenger1.Miles</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputExpression>
            </dmn:input>
            <dmn:output id="b_Status_Priority_dt_o" label="Passenger1 has priority">
              <dmn:outputValues>
                <dmn:text>true, false</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputValues>
              <dmn:defaultOutputEntry>
                <dmn:text>false</dmn:text>
              </dmn:defaultOutputEntry>
            </dmn:output>
            <dmn:rule id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r1">
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r1_i1">
                <dmn:text>"gold"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r1_i2">
                <dmn:text>"gold"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r1_i3">
                <dmn:text>>= Passenger2.Miles</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:outputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r1_o1">
                <dmn:text>true</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputEntry>
            </dmn:rule>
            <dmn:rule id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r2">
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r2_i1">
                <dmn:text>"gold"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r2_i2">
                <dmn:text>"silver","bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r2_i3">
                <dmn:text>-</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:outputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r2_o1">
                <dmn:text>true</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputEntry>
            </dmn:rule>
            <dmn:rule id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r3">
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r3_i1">
                <dmn:text>"silver"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r3_i2">
                <dmn:text>"silver"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r3_i3">
                <dmn:text>>= Passenger2.Miles</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:outputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r3_o1">
                <dmn:text>true</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputEntry>
            </dmn:rule>
            <dmn:rule id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r4">
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r4_i1">
                <dmn:text>"silver"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r4_i2">
                <dmn:text>"bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r4_i3">
                <dmn:text>-</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:outputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r4_o1">
                <dmn:text>true</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputEntry>
            </dmn:rule>
            <dmn:rule id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r5">
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r5_i1">
                <dmn:text>"bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r5_i2">
                <dmn:text>"bronze"</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:inputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r5_i3">
                <dmn:text>>= Passenger2.Miles</dmn:text>
              </dmn:inputEntry>
              <dmn:outputEntry id="b_Passenger_Priority_dt_r5_o1">
                <dmn:text>true</dmn:text>
              </dmn:outputEntry>
            </dmn:rule>
          </dmn:decisionTable>
        </dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
        <dmn:variable name="passenger priority" typeRef="feel:boolean"/>
      </dmn:businessKnowledgeModel>
      <dmn:businessKnowledgeModel id="b_ReassignNextPassenger" name="reassign next passenger">
        <dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="Waiting List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="Reassigned Passengers List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="Flights" typeRef="tFlightTable"/>
          <dmn:context>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Next Passenger" typeRef="tPassenger"/>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>Waiting List[1]</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Original Flight" typeRef="tFlight"/>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>Flights[ Flight Number = Next Passenger.Flight Number ][1]</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Best Alternate Flight" typeRef="tFlight"/>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>Flights[ From = Original Flight.From and To = Original Flight.To and Departure > Original Flight.Departure and Status = "scheduled" and has capacity( item, Reassigned Passengers List ) ][1]</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Reassigned Passenger" typeRef="tPassenger"/>
              <dmn:context>
                <dmn:contextEntry>
                  <dmn:variable name="Name" typeRef="feel:string"/>
                  <dmn:literalExpression>
                    <dmn:text>Next Passenger.Name</dmn:text>
                  </dmn:literalExpression>
                </dmn:contextEntry>
                <dmn:contextEntry>
                  <dmn:variable name="Status" typeRef="feel:string"/>
                  <dmn:literalExpression>
                    <dmn:text>Next Passenger.Status</dmn:text>
                  </dmn:literalExpression>
                </dmn:contextEntry>
                <dmn:contextEntry>
                  <dmn:variable name="Miles" typeRef="feel:number"/>
                  <dmn:literalExpression>
                    <dmn:text>Next Passenger.Miles</dmn:text>
                  </dmn:literalExpression>
                </dmn:contextEntry>
                <dmn:contextEntry>
                  <dmn:variable name="Flight Number" typeRef="feel:string"/>
                  <dmn:literalExpression>
                    <dmn:text>Best Alternate Flight.Flight Number</dmn:text>
                  </dmn:literalExpression>
                </dmn:contextEntry>
              </dmn:context>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Remaining Waiting List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>remove( Waiting List, 1 )</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:variable name="Updated Reassigned Passengers List" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>append( Reassigned Passengers List, Reassigned Passenger )</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
            <dmn:contextEntry>
              <dmn:literalExpression>
                <dmn:text>if count( Remaining Waiting List ) > 0 then reassign next passenger( Remaining Waiting List, Updated Reassigned Passengers List, Flights ) else Updated Reassigned Passengers List</dmn:text>
              </dmn:literalExpression>
            </dmn:contextEntry>
          </dmn:context>
        </dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
        <dmn:variable name="reassign next passenger" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
        <dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
          <dmn:requiredKnowledge href="#b_HasCapacity"/>
        </dmn:knowledgeRequirement>
      </dmn:businessKnowledgeModel>
      <dmn:businessKnowledgeModel id="b_HasCapacity" name="has capacity">
        <dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="flight" typeRef="tFlight"/>
          <dmn:formalParameter name="rebooked list" typeRef="tPassengerTable"/>
          <dmn:literalExpression>
            <dmn:text>flight.Capacity > count( rebooked list[ Flight Number = flight.Flight Number ] )</dmn:text>
          </dmn:literalExpression>
        </dmn:encapsulatedLogic>
        <dmn:variable name="has capacity" typeRef="feel:boolean"/>
      </dmn:businessKnowledgeModel>
    </dmn:definitions>

### 6.2. DMN support in Drools

Drools provides design and runtime support for DMN 1.2 models at conformance level 3. You can integrate DMN models with your Drools decision services in several ways:

- Design your DMN models directly in Business Central using the DMN designer

- Import DMN files into your project in Business Central (Menu → Design → Projects → Import Asset)

- Package DMN files as part of your project knowledge JAR (KJAR) file without Business Central

In addition to all DMN conformance level 3 requirements, Drools also includes enhancements and fixes to FEEL and DMN model components to optimize the experience of implementing DMN decision services with Drools. From a platform perspective, DMN models are like any other business asset in Drools, such as DRL files or spreadsheet decision tables, that you can include in your Drools project and deploy to KIE Server in order to start your DMN decision services.

For more information about including external DMN files with your Drools project packaging and deployment method, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

#### 6.2.1. FEEL enhancements in Drools

Drools includes the following enhancements and other changes to FEEL in the current DMN implementation:

- Space Sensitivity: This DMN implementation of the FEEL language is space insensitive. The goal is to avoid non-deterministic behavior based on the context and differences in behavior based on invisible characters, such as white spaces. This means that for this implementation, a variable named `first name` with one space is exactly the same as `first name` with two spaces in it.

- List functions `or()` and `and()` : The specification defines two list functions named `or()` and `and()`. However, according to the FEEL grammar, these are not valid function names, as `and` and `or` are reserved keywords. This implementation renames these functions to `any()` and `all()` respectively, in anticipation for DMN 1.2.

- Keyword `in` cannot be used in variable names: The specification defines that any keyword can be reused as part of a variable name, but the ambiguities caused with the `for …​ in …​ return` loop prevent the reuse of the `in` keyword. All other keywords are supported as part of variable names.

- Keywords are not supported in attributes of anonymous types: FEEL is not a strongly typed language and the parser must resolve ambiguity in name parts of an attribute of an anonymous type. The parser supports reusable keywords as part of a variable name defined in the scope, but the parser does not support keywords in attributes of an anonymous type. For example, `for item in Order.items return Federal Tax for Item( item )` is a valid and supported FEEL expression, where a function named `Federal Tax for Item(…​)` can be defined and invoked correctly in the scope. However, the expression `for i in [ {x and y : true, n : 1}, {x and y : false, n: 2} ] return i.x and y` is not supported because anonymous types are defined in the iteration context of the `for` expression and the parser cannot resolve the ambiguity.

- Support for date and time literals on ranges: According to the grammar rules #8, #18, #19, #34 and #62, `date and time` literals are supported in ranges (pages 110-111). Chapter 10.3.2.7 on page 114, on the other hand, contradicts the grammar and says they are not supported. This implementation chose to follow the grammar and support `date and time` literals on ranges, as well as extend the specification to support any arbitrary expression (see extensions below).

- Invalid time syntax: Chapter 10.3.2.3.4 on page 112 and bullet point about `time` on page 131 both state that the `time` string lexical representation follows the XML Schema Datatypes specification as well as ISO 8601. According to the XML Schema specification (https://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#time), the lexical representation of a time follows the pattern `hh:mm:ss.sss` without any leading character. The DMN specification uses a leading "T" in several examples, that we understand is a typo and not in accordance with the standard.

- Support for scientific and hexadecimal notations: This implementation supports scientific and hexadecimal notation for numbers. For example, `1.2e5` (scientific notation), `0xD5` (hexadecimal notation).

- Support for expressions as end points in ranges: This implementation supports expressions as endpoints for ranges. For example, `[date("2016-11-24")..date("2016-11-27")]`

- Support for additional types: The specification only defines the following as basic types of the language:

  - number

  - string

  - boolean

  - days and time duration

  - years and month duration

  - time

  - date and time

    For completeness and orthogonality, this implementation also supports the following types:

  - context

  - list

  - range

  - function

  - unary test

- Support for unary tests: For completeness and orthogonality, unary tests are supported as first class citizens in the language. They are functions with an implicit single parameter and can be invoked in the same way as functions. For example,

  UnaryTestAsFunction.feel

        {
            is minor : < 18,
            Bob is minor : is minor( bob.age )
        }

- Support for additional built-in functions: The following additional functions are supported:

  - `now()` : Returns the current local date and time.

  - `today()` : Returns the current local date.

  - `decision table()` : Returns a decision table function, although the specification mentions a decision table. The function on page 114 is not implementable as defined.

  - `string( mask, p…​ )` : Returns a string formatted as per the mask. See Java String.format() for details on the mask syntax. For example, `string( "%4.2f", 7.1298 )` returns the string `"7.12"`.

- Support for additional date and time arithmetics: Subtracting two dates returns a day and time duration with the number of days between the two dates, ignoring daylight savings. For example,

  DateArithmetic.feel

      date( "2017-05-12" ) - date( "2017-04-25" ) = duration( "P17D" )

#### 6.2.2. DMN model enhancements in Drools

Drools includes the following enhancements to DMN model support in the current DMN implementation:

- Support for types with spaces on names: The DMN XML schema defines type refs such as QNames. The QNames do not allow spaces. Therefore, it is not possible to use types like FEEL `date and time`, `days and time duration` or `years and months duration`. This implementation does parse such typerefs as strings and allows type names with spaces. However, in order to comply with the XML schema, it also adds the following aliases to such types that can be used instead:

  - `date and time` = `dateTime`

  - `days and time duration` = `duration` or `dayTimeDuration`

  - `years and months duration` = `duration` or `yearMonthDuration`

    Note that, for the "duration" types, the user can simply use `duration` and the Drools engine will infer the proper duration, either `days and time duration` or `years and months duration`.

- Lists support heterogeneous element types: Currently this implementation supports lists with heterogeneous element types. This is an experimental extension and does limit the functionality of some functions and filters. This decision will be re-evaluated in the future.

- TypeRef link between Decision Tables and Item Definitions: On decision tables/input clause, if no values list is defined, the Drools engine automatically checks the type reference and applies the allowed values check if it is defined.

#### 6.2.3. Configurable DMN properties in Drools

Drools provides the following DMN properties that you can configure when you execute your DMN models on KIE Server or on your client application:

org.kie.dmn.strictConformance

  When enabled, this property disables by default any extensions or profiles provided beyond the DMN standard, such as some helper functions or enhanced features of DMN 1.2 backported into DMN 1.1. You can use this property to configure the Drools engine to support only pure DMN features, such as when running the DMN Technology Compatibility Kit (TCK).

  Default value: `false`

      -Dorg.kie.dmn.strictConformance=true

org.kie.dmn.runtime.typecheck

  When enabled, this property enables verification of actual values conforming to their declared types in the DMN model, as input or output of DRD elements. You can use this property to verify whether data supplied to the DMN model or produced by the DMN model is compliant with what is specified in the model.

  Default value: `false`

      -Dorg.kie.dmn.runtime.typecheck=true

org.kie.dmn.decisionservice.coercesingleton

  By default, this property makes the result of a decision service defining a single output decision be the single value of the output decision value. When disabled, this property makes the result of a decision service defining a single output decision be a `context` with the single entry for that decision. You can use this property to adjust your decision service outputs according to your project requirements.

  Default value: `true`

      -Dorg.kie.dmn.decisionservice.coercesingleton=false

org.kie.dmn.profiles.$PROFILE_NAME

  When valorized with a Java fully qualified name, this property loads a DMN profile onto the Drools engine at start time. You can use this property to implement a predefined DMN profile with supported features different from or beyond the DMN standard. For example, if you are creating DMN models using the Signavio DMN modeller, use this property to implement features from the Signavio DMN profile into your DMN decision service.

      -Dorg.kie.dmn.profiles.signavio=org.kie.dmn.signavio.KieDMNSignavioProfile

org.kie.dmn.compiler.execmodel

  When enabled, this property enables DMN decision table logic to be compiled into executable rule models during run time. You can use this property to evaluate DMN decision table logic more efficiently. This property is helpful when the executable model compilation was not originally performed during project compile time. Enabling this property may result in added compile time during the first evaluation by the Drools engine, but subsequent compilations are more efficient.

  Default value: `false`

      -Dorg.kie.dmn.compiler.execmodel=true

### 6.3. Creating and editing DMN models in Business Central

You can use the DMN designer in Business Central to design DMN decision requirements diagrams (DRDs) and define decision logic for a complete and functional DMN decision model. Drools provides design and runtime support for DMN 1.2 models at conformance level 3, and includes enhancements and fixes to FEEL and DMN model components to optimize the experience of implementing DMN decision services with Drools.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Create or import a DMN file in your Business Central project.

   To create a DMN file, click Add Asset → DMN, enter an informative DMN model name, select the appropriate Package, and click Ok.

   To import an existing DMN file, click Import Asset, enter the DMN model name, select the appropriate Package, select the DMN file to upload, and click Ok.

   The new DMN file is now listed in the DMN panel of the Project Explorer, and the DMN decision requirements diagram (DRD) canvas appears.

   | If you imported a DMN file that does not contain layout information, the imported decision requirements diagram (DRD) is formatted automatically in the DMN designer. Click Save in the DMN designer to save the DRD layout.

3. Begin adding components to your new or imported DMN decision requirements diagram (DRD) by clicking and dragging one of the DMN nodes from the left toolbar:

   Figure 96. Adding DRD components

   The following DRD components are available:

   - Decision: Use this node for a DMN decision, where one or more input elements determine an output based on defined decision logic.

   - Business knowledge model: Use this node for reusable functions with one or more decision elements. Decisions that have the same logic but depend on different sub-input data or sub-decisions use business knowledge models to determine which procedure to follow.

   - Knowledge source: Use this node for external authorities, documents, committees, or policies that regulate a decision or business knowledge model. Knowledge sources are references to real-world factors rather than executable business rules.

   - Input data: Use this node for information used in a decision node or a business knowledge model. Input data usually includes business-level concepts or objects relevant to the business, such as loan applicant data used in a lending strategy.

   - Text annotation: Use this node for explanatory notes associated with an input data node, decision node, business knowledge model, or knowledge source.

   - Decision service: Use this node to enclose a set of reusable decisions implemented as a decision service for invocation. A decision service can be used in other DMN models and can be invoked from an external application or a BPMN business process.

4. In the DMN designer canvas, double-click the new DRD node to enter an informative node name.

5. If the node is a decision or business knowledge model, select the node to display the node options and click the Edit icon to open the DMN boxed expression designer to define the decision logic for the node:

   Figure 97. Opening a new decision node boxed expression
   Figure 98. Opening a new business knowledge model boxed expression

   By default, all business knowledge models are defined as boxed function expressions containing a literal FEEL expression, a nested context expression of an external JAVA or PMML function, or a nested boxed expression of any type.

   For decision nodes, you click the undefined table to select the type of boxed expression you want to use, such as a boxed literal expression, boxed context expression, decision table, or other DMN boxed expression.

   Figure 99. Selecting the logic type for a decision node

   For business knowledge models, you click the top-left function cell to select the function type, or right-click the function value cell, select Clear, and select a boxed expression of another type.

   Figure 100. Selecting the function or other logic type for a business knowledge model

6. In the selected boxed expression designer for either a decision node (any expression type) or business knowledge model (function expression), click the applicable table cells to define the table name, variable data types, variable names and values, function parameters and bindings, or FEEL expressions to include in the decision logic.

   You can right-click cells for additional actions where applicable, such as inserting or removing table rows and columns or clearing table contents.

   The following is an example decision table for a decision node that determines credit score ratings based on a defined range of a loan applicant’s credit score:

   Figure 101. Decision node decision table for credit score rating

   The following is an example boxed function expression for a business knowledge model that calculates mortgage payments based on principal, interest, taxes, and insurance (PITI) as a literal expression:

   Figure 102. Business knowledge model function for PITI calculation

7. After you define the decision logic for the selected node, click Back to "<MODEL_NAME>" to return to the DRD view.

8. For the selected DRD node, use the available connection options to create and connect to the next node in the DRD, or click and drag a new node onto the DRD canvas from the left toolbar.

   The node type determines which connection options are supported. For example, an Input data node can connect to a decision node, knowledge source, or text annotation using the applicable connection type, whereas a Knowledge source node can connect to any DRD element. A Decision node can connect only to another decision or a text annotation.

   The following connection types are available, depending on the node type:

   - Information requirement: Use this connection from an input data node or decision node to another decision node that requires the information.

   - Knowledge requirement: Use this connection from a business knowledge model to a decision node or to another business knowledge model that invokes the decision logic.

   - Authority requirement: Use this connection from an input data node or a decision node to a dependent knowledge source or from a knowledge source to a decision node, business knowledge model, or another knowledge source.

   - Association: Use this connection from an input data node, decision node, business knowledge model, or knowledge source to a text annotation.

   Figure 103. Connecting credit score input to the credit score rating decision

9. Continue adding and defining the remaining DRD components of your decision model. Periodically click Save in the DMN designer to save your work.

10. After you add and define all components of the DRD, click Save to save and validate the completed DRD.

    The following is an example DRD for a loan prequalification decision model:

    Figure 104. Completed DRD for loan prequalification

    The following is an example DRD for a phone call handling decision model using a reusable decision service:

    Figure 105. Completed DRD for phone call handling with a decision service

    In a DMN decision service node, the decision nodes in the bottom segment incorporate input data from outside of the decision service to arrive at a final decision in the top segment of the decision service node. The resulting top-level decisions from the decision service are then implemented in any subsequent decisions or business knowledge requirements of the DMN model. You can reuse DMN decision services in other DMN models to apply the same decision logic with different input data and different outgoing connections.

#### 6.3.1. Defining DMN decision logic in boxed expressions in Business Central

Boxed expressions in DMN are tables that you use to define the underlying logic of decision nodes and business knowledge models in a decision requirements diagram (DRD) or decision requirements graph (DRG). Some boxed expressions can contain other boxed expressions, but the top-level boxed expression corresponds to the decision logic of a single DRD artifact. While DRDs with one or more DRGs represent the flow of a DMN decision model, boxed expressions define the actual decision logic of individual nodes. DRDs and boxed expressions together form a complete and functional DMN decision model.

You can use the DMN designer in Business Central to define decision logic for your DRD components using built-in boxed expressions.

Prerequisites

- You have created or imported a DMN file in Business Central.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects, click the project name, and select the DMN file you want to modify.

2. In the DMN designer canvas, select a decision node or business knowledge model that you want to define and click the Edit icon to open the DMN boxed expression designer:

   Figure 106. Opening a new decision node boxed expression
   Figure 107. Opening a new business knowledge model boxed expression

   By default, all business knowledge models are defined as boxed function expressions containing a literal FEEL expression, a nested context expression of an external JAVA or PMML function, or a nested boxed expression of any type.

   For decision nodes, you click the undefined table to select the type of boxed expression you want to use, such as a boxed literal expression, boxed context expression, decision table, or other DMN boxed expression.

   Figure 108. Selecting the logic type for a decision node

   For business knowledge models, you click the top-left function cell to select the function type, or right-click the function value cell, select Clear, and select a boxed expression of another type.

   Figure 109. Selecting the function or other logic type for a business knowledge model

3. For this example, use a decision node and select Decision Table as the boxed expression type.

   A decision table in DMN is a visual representation of one or more rules in a tabular format. Each rule consists of a single row in the table, and includes columns that define the conditions (input) and outcome (output) for that particular row.

4. Click the input column header to define the name and data type for the input condition. For example, name the input column Credit Score.FICO with a `number` data type. This column specifies numeric credit score values or ranges of loan applicants.

5. Click the output column header to define the name and data type for the output values. For example, name the output column Credit Score Rating and next to the Data Type option, click Manage to go to the Data Types page where you can create a custom data type with score ratings as constraints.

   Figure 110. Managing data types for a column header value

6. On the Data Types page, click Add and create a Credit_Score_Rating data type as a `string`:

   Figure 111. Adding a new data type

7. Click Constraints, select Enumeration from the drop-down options, and add the following constraints:

   - `"Excellent"`

   - `"Good"`

   - `"Fair"`

   - `"Poor"`

   - `"Bad"`

   Figure 112. Adding constraints to the new data type

   For information about constraint types and syntax requirements for the specified data type, see the Decision Model and Notation specification.

8. Click OK to save the constraints and click Save to save the data type.

9. Return to the Credit Score Rating decision table, click the Credit Score Rating column header, and set the data type to this new custom data type.

10. Use the Credit Score.FICO input column to define credit score values or ranges of values, and use the Credit Score Rating column to specify one of the corresponding ratings you defined in the Credit_Score_Rating data type.

    Right-click any value cell to insert or delete rows (rules) or columns (clauses).

    Figure 113. Decision node decision table for credit score rating

11. After you define all rules, click the top-left corner of the decision table to define the rule Hit Policy and Builtin Aggregator (for COLLECT hit policy only).

    The hit policy determines how to reach an outcome when multiple rules in a decision table match the provided input values. The built-in aggregator determines how to aggregate rule values when you use the COLLECT hit policy.

    Figure 114. Defining the decision table hit policy

    The following example is a more complex decision table that determines applicant qualification for a loan as the concluding decision node in the same loan prequalification decision model:

    Figure 115. Decision table for loan prequalification

For boxed expression types other than decision tables, you follow these guidelines similarly to navigate the boxed expression tables and define variables and parameters for decision logic, but according to the requirements of the boxed expression type. Some boxed expressions, such as boxed literal expressions, can be single-column tables, while other boxed expressions, such as function, context, and invocation expressions, can be multi-column tables with nested boxed expressions of other types.

For example, the following boxed context expression defines the parameters that determine whether a loan applicant can meet minimum mortgage payments based on principal, interest, taxes, and insurance (PITI), represented as a front-end ratio calculation with a sub-context expression:

Figure 116. Boxed context expression for front-end client PITI ratio

The following boxed function expression determines a monthly mortgage installment as a business knowledge model in a lending decision, with the function value defined as a nested context expression:

Figure 117. Boxed function expression for installment calculation in business knowledge model

For more information and examples of each boxed expression type, see DMN decision logic in boxed expressions.

#### 6.3.2. Creating custom data types for DMN boxed expressions in Business Central

In DMN boxed expressions in Business Central, data types determine the structure of the data that you use within an associated table, column, or field in the boxed expression. You can use default DMN data types (such as String, Number, Boolean) or you can create custom data types to specify additional fields and constraints that you want to implement for the boxed expression values.

Custom data types that you create for a boxed expression can be simple or structured:

- Simple data types have only a name and a type assignment. Example: `Age (number)`.

- Structured data types contain multiple fields associated with a parent data type. Example: A single type `Person` containing the fields `Name (string)`, `Age (number)`, `Email (string)`.

Prerequisites

- You have created or imported a DMN file in Business Central.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects, click the project name, and select the DMN file you want to modify.

2. In the DMN designer canvas, select a decision node or business knowledge model for which you want to define the data types and click the Edit icon to open the DMN boxed expression designer.

3. If the boxed expression is for a decision node that is not yet defined, click the undefined table to select the type of boxed expression you want to use, such as a boxed literal expression, boxed context expression, decision table, or other DMN boxed expression.

   Figure 118. Selecting the logic type for a decision node

4. Click the cell for the table header, column header, or parameter field (depending on the boxed expression type) for which you want to define the data type and click Manage to go to the Data Types page where you can create a custom data type.

   Figure 119. Managing data types for a column header value

   You can also set and manage custom data types for a specified decision node or business knowledge model node by selecting the Diagram properties icon in the upper-right corner of the DMN designer:

   Figure 120. Managing data types in diagram properties

   The data type that you define for a specified cell in a boxed expression determines the structure of the data that you use within that associated table, column, or field in the boxed expression.

   In this example, an output column Credit Score Rating for a DMN decision table defines a set of custom credit score ratings based on an applicant’s credit score.

5. On the Data Types page, click Add and create a Credit_Score_Rating data type as a `string`:

   Figure 121. Adding a new data type

   If the data type requires a list of items, enable the List setting.

6. Click Constraints, select Enumeration from the drop-down options, and add the following constraints:

   - `"Excellent"`

   - `"Good"`

   - `"Fair"`

   - `"Poor"`

   - `"Bad"`

   Figure 122. Adding constraints to the new data type

   For information about constraint types and syntax requirements for the specified data type, see the Decision Model and Notation specification.

7. Click OK to save the constraints and click Save to save the data type.

8. Return to the Credit Score Rating decision table, click the Credit Score Rating column header, set the data type to this new custom data type, and define the rule values for that column with the rating constraints that you specified.

   Figure 123. Decision table for credit score rating

   In the DMN decision model for this scenario, the Credit Score Rating decision flows into the following Loan Prequalification decision that also requires custom data types:

   Figure 124. Decision table for loan prequalification

9. Continuing with this example, return to the Data Types window, click Add, and create a Loan_Qualification data type as a `Structure` with no constraints.

   When you save the new structured data type, the first sub-field appears so that you can begin defining nested data fields in this parent data type. You can use these sub-fields in association with the parent structured data type in boxed expressions, such as nested column headers in decision tables or nested table parameters in context or function expressions.

   For additional sub-fields, next to the Loan_Qualification data type, select the settings icon (three vertical dots) and select Insert nested field:

   Figure 125. Adding a new structured data type with nested fields

10. For this example, under the structured Loan_Qualification data type, add a Qualification field with `"Qualified"` and `"Not Qualified"` enumeration constraints, and a Reason field with no constraints. Add also a simple Back_End_Ratio and a Front_End_Ratio data type, both with `"Sufficient"` and `"Insufficient"` enumeration constraints.

    Click Save for each data type that you create.

    Figure 126. Adding nested data types with constraints

11. Return to the decision table and, for each column, click the column header cell, set the data type to the new corresponding custom data type, and define the rule values as needed for the column with the constraints that you specified, if applicable.

    Figure 127. Decision table for loan prequalification

For boxed expression types other than decision tables, you follow these guidelines similarly to navigate the boxed expression tables and define custom data types as needed.

For example, the following boxed function expression uses custom `tCandidate` and `tProfile` structured data types to associate data for online dating compatibility:

Figure 128. Boxed function expression for online dating compatibility
Figure 129. Custom data type definitions for online dating compatibility
Figure 130. Parameter definitions with custom data types for online dating compatibility

#### 6.3.3. Including other DMN models within a DMN file in Business Central

In Business Central, you can include other DMN models from your project in a specified DMN file so that you can reuse the decision requirements diagram (DRD) components of the included models in that DMN file. When you include a DMN model within another DMN file, you can use all of the nodes and logic from both models in the same DRD, but you cannot edit the nodes from the included model. To edit nodes from included models, you must update the source file for the included model directly. All changes to the source of the included model are automatically applied across DMN files that include that model.

You cannot include DMN models from other projects in Business Central.

Prerequisites

- You have created or imported the DMN models in the same project in Business Central as the DMN file in which you want to include the models.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects, click the project name, and select the DMN file you want to modify.

2. In the DMN designer, click the Included Models tab.

3. Click Include Model, select a DMN model from your project in the DMN models list, enter a unique name for the included model, and click Include:

   Figure 131. Including a DMN model

   The DMN model is added to this DMN file, and all DRD nodes from the included model are listed under Decision Components in the Decision Navigator view:

   Figure 132. DMN file with decision components from the included DMN model

   All data types from the included model are also listed in the Data Types tab for the DMN file:

   Figure 133. DMN file with data types from the included DMN model

4. In the Model tab of the DMN designer, click and drag the included DRD components onto the canvas to begin implementing them in your DRD:

   Figure 134. Adding DRD components from the included DMN model

   To edit DRD nodes or data types from included models, you must update the source file for the included model directly. All changes to the source of the included model are automatically applied across DMN files that include that model.

   To edit the included model name or to remove the included model from the DMN file, use the Included Models tab in the DMN designer.

   | When you remove an included model, any nodes from that included model that are currently used in the DRD are also removed.

#### 6.3.4. DMN designer navigation and properties in Business Central

The DMN designer in Business Central provides the following additional features to help you navigate through the components and properties of decision requirements diagrams (DRDs).

DMN file and diagram views

  In the upper-left corner of the DMN designer, select the Project Explorer view to navigate between all DMN and other files or select the Decision Navigator view to navigate between the decision components, graphs, and boxed expressions of a selected DRD:

  Figure 135. Project Explorer view
  Figure 136. Decision Navigator view

  | The DRD components from any DMN models included in the DMN file (in the Included Models tab) are also listed in the Decision Components panel for the DMN file.

  In the upper-right corner of the DMN designer, select the Explore diagram icon to view an elevated preview of the selected DRD and to navigate between the nodes of the selected DRD:

  Figure 137. Explore diagram view
DRD properties and design

  In the upper-right corner of the DMN designer, select the Diagram properties icon to modify the identifying information, data types, and appearance of a selected DRD, DRD node, or boxed expression cell:

  Figure 138. DRD node properties

  To view the properties of the entire DRD, click the DRD canvas background instead of a specific node.

### 6.4. DMN model execution

You can create or import DMN files in your Drools project using Business Central or package the DMN files as part of your project knowledge JAR (KJAR) file without Business Central. After you implement your DMN files in your Drools project, you can execute the DMN decision service by deploying the KIE container that contains it to KIE Server for remote access or by manipulating the KIE container directly as a dependency of the calling application. Other options for creating and deploying DMN knowledge packages are also available, and most are similar for all types of knowledge assets, such as DRL files or process definitions.

For information about including external DMN assets with your project packaging and deployment method, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

#### 6.4.1. Embedding a DMN call directly in a Java application

A KIE container is local when the knowledge assets are either embedded directly into the calling program or are physically pulled in using Maven dependencies for the KJAR. You typically embed knowledge assets directly into a project if there is a tight relationship between the version of the code and the version of the DMN definition. Any changes to the decision take effect after you have intentionally updated and redeployed the application. A benefit of this approach is that proper operation does not rely on any external dependencies to the run time, which can be a limitation of locked-down environments.

Using Maven dependencies enables further flexibility because the specific version of the decision can dynamically change, (for example, by using a system property), and it can be periodically scanned for updates and automatically updated. This introduces an external dependency on the deploy time of the service, but executes the decision locally, reducing reliance on an external service being available during run time.

Prerequisites

- A KIE container is deployed in KIE Server in the form of a KJAR that includes the DMN model, ideally compiled as an executable model for more efficient execution:

      mvn clean install -DgenerateDMNModel=yes

  For more information about project packaging and deployment and executable models, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

Procedure

1. In your client application, add the following dependencies to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- Required for the DMN runtime API -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-dmn-core</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- Required if not using classpath KIE container -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-ci</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

2. Create a KIE container from `classpath` or `ReleaseId`:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "my-kjar", "1.0.0" );
       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );

   Alternative option:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

3. Obtain `DMNRuntime` from the KIE container and a reference to the DMN model to be evaluated, by using the model `namespace` and `modelName`:

       DMNRuntime dmnRuntime = KieRuntimeFactory.of(kieContainer.getKieBase()).get(DMNRuntime.class);

       String namespace = "http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a";
       String modelName = "dmn-movieticket-ageclassification";

       DMNModel dmnModel = dmnRuntime.getModel(namespace, modelName);

4. Execute the decision services for the desired model:

       DMNContext dmnContext = dmnRuntime.newContext();  (1)

       for (Integer age : Arrays.asList(1,12,13,64,65,66)) {
           dmnContext.set("Age", age);  (2)
           DMNResult dmnResult =
               dmnRuntime.evaluateAll(dmnModel, dmnContext);  (3)

           for (DMNDecisionResult dr : dmnResult.getDecisionResults()) {  (4)
               log.info("Age: " + age + ", " +
                        "Decision: '" + dr.getDecisionName() + "', " +
                        "Result: " + dr.getResult());
         }
       }

   1 | Instantiate a new DMN Context to be the input for the model evaluation. Note that this example is looping through the Age Classification decision multiple times.
   2 | Assign input variables for the input DMN context.
   3 | Evaluate all DMN decisions defined in the DMN model.
   4 | Each evaluation may result in one or more results, creating the loop.

   This example prints the following output:

       Age 1 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Child
       Age 12 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Child
       Age 13 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Adult
       Age 64 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Adult
       Age 65 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Senior
       Age 66 Decision 'AgeClassification' : Senior

   If the DMN model was not previously compiled as an executable model for more efficient execution, you can enable the following property when you execute your DMN models:

       -Dorg.kie.dmn.compiler.execmodel=true

#### 6.4.2. Executing a DMN service using the KIE Server Java client API

The KIE Server Java client API provides a lightweight approach to invoking a remote DMN service either through the REST or JMS interfaces of KIE Server. This approach reduces the number of runtime dependencies necessary to interact with a KIE base. Decoupling the calling code from the decision definition also increases flexibility by enabling them to iterate independently at the appropriate pace.

For more information about the KIE Server Java client API, see KIE Server Java client API for KIE containers and business assets.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and configured, including a known user name and credentials for a user with the `kie-server` role. For installation options, see Installation and Setup (Core and IDE).

- A KIE container is deployed in KIE Server in the form of a KJAR that includes the DMN model, ideally compiled as an executable model for more efficient execution:

      mvn clean install -DgenerateDMNModel=yes

  For more information about project packaging and deployment and executable models, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

- You have the container ID of the KIE container containing the DMN model. If more than one model is present, you must also know the model namespace and model name of the relevant model.

Procedure

1. In your client application, add the following dependency to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- Required for the KIE Server Java client API -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-client</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

2. Instantiate a `KieServicesClient` instance with the appropriate connection information.

   Example:

       KieServicesConfiguration conf =
           KieServicesFactory.newRestConfiguration(URL, USER, PASSWORD); (1)

       conf.setMarshallingFormat(MarshallingFormat.JSON);  (2)

       KieServicesClient kieServicesClient = KieServicesFactory.newKieServicesClient(conf);

   1 | The connection information: Example URL: `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server` The credentials should reference a user with the `kie-server` role.
   2 | The Marshalling format is an instance of `org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat`. It controls whether the messages will be JSON or XML. Options for Marshalling format are JSON, JAXB, or XSTREAM.

3. Obtain a `DMNServicesClient` from the KIE server Java client connected to the related KIE Server by invoking the method `getServicesClient()` on the KIE server Java client instance:

       DMNServicesClient dmnClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(DMNServicesClient.class );

   The `dmnClient` can now execute decision services on KIE Server.

4. Execute the decision services for the desired model.

   Example:

       for (Integer age : Arrays.asList(1,12,13,64,65,66)) {
           DMNContext dmnContext = dmnClient.newContext(); (1)
           dmnContext.set("Age", age);  (2)
           ServiceResponse<DMNResult> serverResp =   (3)
               dmnClient.evaluateAll($kieContainerId,
                                     $modelNamespace,
                                     $modelName,
                                     dmnContext);

           DMNResult dmnResult = serverResp.getResult();  (4)
           for (DMNDecisionResult dr : dmnResult.getDecisionResults()) {
               log.info("Age: " + age + ", " +
                        "Decision: '" + dr.getDecisionName() + "', " +
                        "Result: " + dr.getResult());
           }
       }

   1 | Instantiate a new DMN Context to be the input for the model evaluation. Note that this example is looping through the Age Classification decision multiple times.
   2 | Assign input variables for the input DMN Context.
   3 | Evaluate all the DMN Decisions defined in the DMN model: `$kieContainerId` is the ID of the container where the KJAR containing the DMN model is deployed `$modelNamespace` is the namespace for the model. `$modelName` is the name for the model.
   4 | The DMN Result object is available from the server response.

   At this point, the `dmnResult` contains all the decision results from the evaluated DMN model.

   You can also execute only a specific DMN decision in the model by using alternative methods of the `DMNServicesClient`.

   | If the KIE container only contains one DMN model, you can omit `$modelNamespace` and `$modelName` because the KIE Server API selects it by default.

#### 6.4.3. Executing a DMN service using the KIE Server REST API

Directly interacting with the REST endpoints of KIE Server provides the most separation between the calling code and the decision logic definition. The calling code is completely free of direct dependencies, and you can implement it in an entirely different development platform such as `node.js` or `.net`. The examples in this section demonstrate Nix-style curl commands but provide relevant information to adapt to any REST client.

For more information about the KIE Server REST API, see KIE Server REST API for KIE containers and business assets.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and configured, including a known user name and credentials for a user with the `kie-server` role. For installation options, see Installation and Setup (Core and IDE).

- A KIE container is deployed in KIE Server in the form of a KJAR that includes the DMN model, ideally compiled as an executable model for more efficient execution:

      mvn clean install -DgenerateDMNModel=yes

  For more information about project packaging and deployment and executable models, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

- You have the container ID of the KIE container containing the DMN model. If more than one model is present, you must also know the model namespace and model name of the relevant model.

Procedure

1. Determine the base URL for accessing the KIE Server REST API endpoints. This requires knowing the following values (with the default local deployment values as an example):

   - Host (`localhost`)

   - Port (`8080`)

   - Root context (`kie-server`)

   - Base REST path (`services/rest/`)

   Example base URL in local deployment:

   `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/`

2. Determine user authentication requirements.

   When users are defined directly in the KIE Server configuration, HTTP Basic authentication is used and requires the user name and password. Successful requests require that the user have the `kie-server` role.

   The following example demonstrates how to add credentials to a curl request:

       curl -u username:password <request>

   If KIE Server is configured with Red Hat Single Sign-On, the request must include a bearer token:

       curl -H "Authorization: bearer $TOKEN" <request>

3. Specify the format of the request and response. The REST API endpoints work with both JSON and XML formats and are set using request headers:

   JSON

       curl -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json"

   XML

       curl -H "accept: application/xml" -H "content-type: application/xml"

4. (Optional) Query the container for a list of deployed decision models:

   [GET] `server/containers/{containerId}/dmn`

   Example curl request:

       curl -u krisv:krisv -H "accept: application/xml" -X GET "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MovieDMNContainer/dmn"

   Sample XML output:

       <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>
       <response type="SUCCESS" msg="OK models successfully retrieved from container 'MovieDMNContainer'">
           <dmn-model-info-list>
               <model>
                   <model-namespace>http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a</model-namespace>
                   <model-name>dmn-movieticket-ageclassification</model-name>
                   <model-id>_99</model-id>
                   <decisions>
                       <dmn-decision-info>
                           <decision-id>_3</decision-id>
                           <decision-name>AgeClassification</decision-name>
                       </dmn-decision-info>
                   </decisions>
               </model>
           </dmn-model-info-list>
       </response>

   Sample JSON output:

       {
         "type" : "SUCCESS",
         "msg" : "OK models successfully retrieved from container 'MovieDMNContainer'",
         "result" : {
           "dmn-model-info-list" : {
             "models" : [ {
               "model-namespace" : "http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a",
               "model-name" : "dmn-movieticket-ageclassification",
               "model-id" : "_99",
               "decisions" : [ {
                 "decision-id" : "_3",
                 "decision-name" : "AgeClassification"
               } ]
             } ]
           }
         }
       }

5. Execute the model:

   [POST] `server/containers/{containerId}/dmn`

   Example curl request:

       curl -u krisv:krisv -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X POST "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MovieDMNContainer/dmn" -d "{ \"model-namespace\" : \"http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a\", \"model-name\" : \"dmn-movieticket-ageclassification\", \"decision-name\" : [ ], \"decision-id\" : [ ], \"dmn-context\" : {\"Age\" : 66}}"

   Example JSON request:

       {
         "model-namespace" : "http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a",
         "model-name" : "dmn-movieticket-ageclassification",
         "decision-name" : [ ],
         "decision-id" : [ ],
         "dmn-context" : {"Age" : 66}
       }

   Example XML request (JAXB format):

       <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
       <dmn-evaluation-context>
           <model-namespace>http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a</model-namespace>
           <model-name>dmn-movieticket-ageclassification</model-name>
           <dmn-context xsi:type="jaxbListWrapper" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
               <type>MAP</type>
               <element xsi:type="jaxbStringObjectPair" key="Age">
                   <value xsi:type="xs:int" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">66</value>
               </element>
           </dmn-context>
       </dmn-evaluation-context>

   | Regardless of the request format, the request requires the following elements: Model namespace Model name Context object containing input values

   Example JSON response:

       {
         "type" : "SUCCESS",
         "msg" : "OK from container 'MovieDMNContainer'",
         "result" : {
           "dmn-evaluation-result" : {
             "messages" : [ ],
             "model-namespace" : "http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a",
             "model-name" : "dmn-movieticket-ageclassification",
             "decision-name" : [ ],
             "dmn-context" : {
               "Age" : 66,
               "AgeClassification" : "Senior"
             },
             "decision-results" : {
               "_3" : {
                 "messages" : [ ],
                 "decision-id" : "_3",
                 "decision-name" : "AgeClassification",
                 "result" : "Senior",
                 "status" : "SUCCEEDED"
               }
             }
           }
         }
       }

   Example XML (JAXB format) response:

       <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="yes"?>
       <response type="SUCCESS" msg="OK from container 'MovieDMNContainer'">
             <dmn-evaluation-result>
                   <model-namespace>http://www.redhat.com/_c7328033-c355-43cd-b616-0aceef80e52a</model-namespace>
                   <model-name>dmn-movieticket-ageclassification</model-name>
                   <dmn-context xsi:type="jaxbListWrapper" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
                         <type>MAP</type>
                         <element xsi:type="jaxbStringObjectPair" key="Age">
                               <value xsi:type="xs:int" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">66</value>
                         </element>
                         <element xsi:type="jaxbStringObjectPair" key="AgeClassification">
                               <value xsi:type="xs:string" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema">Senior</value>
                         </element>
                   </dmn-context>
                   <messages/>
                   <decisionResults>
                         <entry>
                               <key>_3</key>
                               <value>
                                     <decision-id>_3</decision-id>
                                     <decision-name>AgeClassification</decision-name>
                                     <result xsi:type="xs:string" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">Senior</result>
                                     <messages/>
                                     <status>SUCCEEDED</status>
                               </value>
                         </entry>
                   </decisionResults>
             </dmn-evaluation-result>
       </response>

## 7. Predictive Model Markup Language (PMML)

### 7.1. Predictive Model Markup Language (PMML)

Predictive Model Markup Language (PMML) is an XML-based standard established by the Data Mining Group (DMG) for defining statistical and data-mining models. PMML models can be shared between PMML-compliant platforms and across organizations so that business analysts and developers are unified in designing, analyzing, and implementing PMML-based assets and services.

For more information about the background and applications of PMML, see the DMG PMML specification.

#### 7.1.1. PMML conformance levels

The PMML specification defines producer and consumer conformance levels in a software implementation to ensure that PMML models are created and integrated reliably. For the formal definitions of each conformance level, see the DMG PMML conformance page.

The following list summarizes the PMML conformance levels:

Producer conformance

  A tool or application is producer conforming if it generates valid PMML documents for at least one type of model. Satisfying PMML producer conformance requirements ensures that a model definition document is syntactically correct and defines a model instance that is consistent with semantic criteria that are defined in model specifications.

Consumer conformance

  An application is consumer conforming if it accepts valid PMML documents for at least one type of model. Satisfying consumer conformance requirements ensures that a PMML model created according to producer conformance can be integrated and used as defined. For example, if an application is consumer conforming for Regression model types, then valid PMML documents defining models of this type produced by different conforming producers would be interchangeable in the application.

Drools includes consumer conformance support for the following PMML 4.2.1 model types:

- Regression models

- Scorecard models

- Tree models

- Mining models (with sub-types `modelChain`, `selectAll`, and `selectFirst`)

For a list of all PMML model types, including those not supported in Drools, see the DMG PMML specification.

### 7.2. PMML model examples

PMML defines an XML schema that enables PMML models to be used between different PMML-compliant platforms. The PMML specification enables multiple software platforms to work with the same file for authoring, testing, and production execution, assuming producer and consumer conformance are met.

The following are examples of PMML Regression, Scorecard, Tree, and Mining models. These examples illustrate the supported types of models that you can integrate with your decision services in Drools.

For more PMML examples, see the DMG PMML Sample Files page.

Example PMML Regression model

    <PMML version="4.2" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2 http://www.dmg.org/v4-2-1/pmml-4-2.xsd" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2">
      <Header copyright="JBoss"/>
      <DataDictionary numberOfFields="5">
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld1" optype="continuous"/>
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld2" optype="continuous"/>
        <DataField dataType="string" name="fld3" optype="categorical">
          <Value value="x"/>
          <Value value="y"/>
        </DataField>
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld4" optype="continuous"/>
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld5" optype="continuous"/>
      </DataDictionary>
      <RegressionModel algorithmName="linearRegression" functionName="regression" modelName="LinReg" normalizationMethod="logit" targetFieldName="fld4">
        <MiningSchema>
          <MiningField name="fld1"/>
          <MiningField name="fld2"/>
          <MiningField name="fld3"/>
          <MiningField name="fld4" usageType="predicted"/>
          <MiningField name="fld5" usageType="target"/>
        </MiningSchema>
        <RegressionTable intercept="0.5">
          <NumericPredictor coefficient="5" exponent="2" name="fld1"/>
          <NumericPredictor coefficient="2" exponent="1" name="fld2"/>
          <CategoricalPredictor coefficient="-3" name="fld3" value="x"/>
          <CategoricalPredictor coefficient="3" name="fld3" value="y"/>
          <PredictorTerm coefficient="0.4">
            <FieldRef field="fld1"/>
            <FieldRef field="fld2"/>
          </PredictorTerm>
        </RegressionTable>
      </RegressionModel>
    </PMML>

Example PMML Scorecard model

    <PMML version="4.2" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2 http://www.dmg.org/v4-2-1/pmml-4-2.xsd" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2">
      <Header copyright="JBoss"/>
      <DataDictionary numberOfFields="4">
        <DataField name="param1" optype="continuous" dataType="double"/>
        <DataField name="param2" optype="continuous" dataType="double"/>
        <DataField name="overallScore" optype="continuous" dataType="double" />
        <DataField name="finalscore" optype="continuous" dataType="double" />
      </DataDictionary>
      <Scorecard modelName="ScorecardCompoundPredicate" useReasonCodes="true" isScorable="true" functionName="regression"    baselineScore="15" initialScore="0.8" reasonCodeAlgorithm="pointsAbove">
        <MiningSchema>
          <MiningField name="param1" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing">
          </MiningField>
          <MiningField name="param2" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing">
          </MiningField>
          <MiningField name="overallScore" usageType="target"/>
          <MiningField name="finalscore" usageType="predicted"/>
        </MiningSchema>
        <Characteristics>
          <Characteristic name="ch1" baselineScore="50" reasonCode="reasonCh1">
            <Attribute partialScore="20">
              <SimplePredicate field="param1" operator="lessThan" value="20"/>
            </Attribute>
            <Attribute partialScore="100">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                <SimplePredicate field="param1" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="20"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="lessOrEqual" value="25"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Attribute>
            <Attribute partialScore="200">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                <SimplePredicate field="param1" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="20"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="greaterThan" value="25"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Attribute>
          </Characteristic>
          <Characteristic name="ch2" reasonCode="reasonCh2">
            <Attribute partialScore="10">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="or">
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="lessOrEqual" value="-5"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="50"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Attribute>
            <Attribute partialScore="20">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="greaterThan" value="-5"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="param2" operator="lessThan" value="50"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Attribute>
          </Characteristic>
        </Characteristics>
      </Scorecard>
    </PMML>

Example PMML Tree model

    <PMML version="4.2" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2 http://www.dmg.org/v4-2-1/pmml-4-2.xsd" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xmlns="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2">
      <Header copyright="JBOSS"/>
      <DataDictionary numberOfFields="5">
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld1" optype="continuous"/>
        <DataField dataType="double" name="fld2" optype="continuous"/>
        <DataField dataType="string" name="fld3" optype="categorical">
          <Value value="true"/>
          <Value value="false"/>
        </DataField>
        <DataField dataType="string" name="fld4" optype="categorical">
          <Value value="optA"/>
          <Value value="optB"/>
          <Value value="optC"/>
        </DataField>
        <DataField dataType="string" name="fld5" optype="categorical">
          <Value value="tgtX"/>
          <Value value="tgtY"/>
          <Value value="tgtZ"/>
        </DataField>
      </DataDictionary>
      <TreeModel functionName="classification" modelName="TreeTest">
        <MiningSchema>
          <MiningField name="fld1"/>
          <MiningField name="fld2"/>
          <MiningField name="fld3"/>
          <MiningField name="fld4"/>
          <MiningField name="fld5" usageType="predicted"/>
        </MiningSchema>
        <Node score="tgtX">
          <True/>
          <Node score="tgtX">
            <SimplePredicate field="fld4" operator="equal" value="optA"/>
            <Node score="tgtX">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="surrogate">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld1" operator="lessThan" value="30.0"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld2" operator="greaterThan" value="20.0"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
              <Node score="tgtX">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld2" operator="lessThan" value="40.0"/>
              </Node>
              <Node score="tgtZ">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld2" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="10.0"/>
              </Node>
            </Node>
            <Node score="tgtZ">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="or">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld1" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="60.0"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld1" operator="lessOrEqual" value="70.0"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
              <Node score="tgtZ">
                <SimpleSetPredicate booleanOperator="isNotIn" field="fld4">
                  <Array type="string">optA optB</Array>
                </SimpleSetPredicate>
              </Node>
            </Node>
          </Node>
          <Node score="tgtY">
            <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="or">
              <SimplePredicate field="fld4" operator="equal" value="optA"/>
              <SimplePredicate field="fld4" operator="equal" value="optC"/>
            </CompoundPredicate>
            <Node score="tgtY">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld1" operator="greaterThan" value="10.0"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld1" operator="lessThan" value="50.0"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld4" operator="equal" value="optA"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld2" operator="lessThan" value="100.0"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld3" operator="equal" value="false"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Node>
            <Node score="tgtZ">
              <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                <SimplePredicate field="fld4" operator="equal" value="optC"/>
                <SimplePredicate field="fld2" operator="lessThan" value="30.0"/>
              </CompoundPredicate>
            </Node>
          </Node>
        </Node>
      </TreeModel>
    </PMML>

Example PMML Mining model (modelChain)

    <PMML version="4.2" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2 http://www.dmg.org/v4-2-1/pmml-4-2.xsd" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"   xmlns="http://www.dmg.org/PMML-4_2">
      <Header>
        <Application name="Drools-PMML" version="7.0.0-SNAPSHOT" />
      </Header>
      <DataDictionary numberOfFields="7">
        <DataField name="age" optype="continuous" dataType="double" />
        <DataField name="occupation" optype="categorical" dataType="string">
          <Value value="SKYDIVER" />
          <Value value="ASTRONAUT" />
          <Value value="PROGRAMMER" />
          <Value value="TEACHER" />
          <Value value="INSTRUCTOR" />
        </DataField>
        <DataField name="residenceState" optype="categorical" dataType="string">
          <Value value="AP" />
          <Value value="KN" />
          <Value value="TN" />
        </DataField>
        <DataField name="validLicense" optype="categorical" dataType="boolean" />
        <DataField name="overallScore" optype="continuous" dataType="double" />
        <DataField name="grade" optype="categorical" dataType="string">
          <Value value="A" />
          <Value value="B" />
          <Value value="C" />
          <Value value="D" />
          <Value value="F" />
        </DataField>
        <DataField name="qualificationLevel" optype="categorical" dataType="string">
          <Value value="Unqualified" />
          <Value value="Barely" />
          <Value value="Well" />
          <Value value="Over" />
        </DataField>
      </DataDictionary>
      <MiningModel modelName="SampleModelChainMine" functionName="classification">
        <MiningSchema>
          <MiningField name="age" />
          <MiningField name="occupation" />
          <MiningField name="residenceState" />
          <MiningField name="validLicense" />
          <MiningField name="overallScore" />
          <MiningField name="qualificationLevel" usageType="target"/>
        </MiningSchema>
        <Segmentation multipleModelMethod="modelChain">
          <Segment id="1">
            <True />
            <Scorecard modelName="Sample Score 1" useReasonCodes="true" isScorable="true" functionName="regression"               baselineScore="0.0" initialScore="0.345">
              <MiningSchema>
                <MiningField name="age" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing" />
                <MiningField name="occupation" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing" />
                <MiningField name="residenceState" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing" />
                <MiningField name="validLicense" usageType="active" invalidValueTreatment="asMissing" />
                <MiningField name="overallScore" usageType="predicted" />
              </MiningSchema>
              <Output>
                <OutputField name="calculatedScore" displayName="Final Score" dataType="double" feature="predictedValue"                     targetField="overallScore" />
              </Output>
              <Characteristics>
                <Characteristic name="AgeScore" baselineScore="0.0" reasonCode="ABZ">
                  <Extension name="cellRef" value="$B$8" />
                  <Attribute partialScore="10.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$10" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="lessOrEqual" value="5" />
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="30.0" reasonCode="CX1">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$11" />
                    <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                      <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="5" />
                      <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="lessThan" value="12" />
                    </CompoundPredicate>
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="40.0" reasonCode="CX2">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$12" />
                    <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                      <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="13" />
                      <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="lessThan" value="44" />
                    </CompoundPredicate>
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="25.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$13" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="45" />
                  </Attribute>
                </Characteristic>
                <Characteristic name="OccupationScore" baselineScore="0.0">
                  <Extension name="cellRef" value="$B$16" />
                  <Attribute partialScore="-10.0" reasonCode="CX2">
                    <Extension name="description" value="skydiving is a risky occupation" />
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$18" />
                    <SimpleSetPredicate field="occupation" booleanOperator="isIn">
                      <Array n="2" type="string">SKYDIVER ASTRONAUT</Array>
                    </SimpleSetPredicate>
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="10.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$19" />
                    <SimpleSetPredicate field="occupation" booleanOperator="isIn">
                      <Array n="2" type="string">TEACHER INSTRUCTOR</Array>
                    </SimpleSetPredicate>
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="5.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$20" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="occupation" operator="equal" value="PROGRAMMER" />
                  </Attribute>
                </Characteristic>
                <Characteristic name="ResidenceStateScore" baselineScore="0.0" reasonCode="RES">
                  <Extension name="cellRef" value="$B$22" />
                  <Attribute partialScore="-10.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$24" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="residenceState" operator="equal" value="AP" />
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="10.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$25" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="residenceState" operator="equal" value="KN" />
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="5.0">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$26" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="residenceState" operator="equal" value="TN" />
                  </Attribute>
                </Characteristic>
                <Characteristic name="ValidLicenseScore" baselineScore="0.0">
                  <Extension name="cellRef" value="$B$28" />
                  <Attribute partialScore="1.0" reasonCode="LX00">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$30" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="validLicense" operator="equal" value="true" />
                  </Attribute>
                  <Attribute partialScore="-1.0" reasonCode="LX00">
                    <Extension name="cellRef" value="$C$31" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="validLicense" operator="equal" value="false" />
                  </Attribute>
                </Characteristic>
              </Characteristics>
            </Scorecard>
          </Segment>
          <Segment id="2">
            <True />
            <TreeModel modelName="SampleTree" functionName="classification" missingValueStrategy="lastPrediction" noTrueChildStrategy="returnLastPrediction">
              <MiningSchema>
                <MiningField name="age" usageType="active" />
                <MiningField name="validLicense" usageType="active" />
                <MiningField name="calculatedScore" usageType="active" />
                <MiningField name="qualificationLevel" usageType="predicted" />
              </MiningSchema>
              <Output>
                <OutputField name="qualification" displayName="Qualification Level" dataType="string" feature="predictedValue"                     targetField="qualificationLevel" />
              </Output>
              <Node score="Well" id="1">
                <True/>
                <Node score="Barely" id="2">
                  <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                    <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="greaterOrEqual" value="16" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="validLicense" operator="equal" value="true" />
                  </CompoundPredicate>
                  <Node score="Barely" id="3">
                    <SimplePredicate field="calculatedScore" operator="lessOrEqual" value="50.0" />
                  </Node>
                  <Node score="Well" id="4">
                    <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="and">
                      <SimplePredicate field="calculatedScore" operator="greaterThan" value="50.0" />
                      <SimplePredicate field="calculatedScore" operator="lessOrEqual" value="60.0" />
                    </CompoundPredicate>
                  </Node>
                  <Node score="Over" id="5">
                    <SimplePredicate field="calculatedScore" operator="greaterThan" value="60.0" />
                  </Node>
                </Node>
                <Node score="Unqualified" id="6">
                  <CompoundPredicate booleanOperator="surrogate">
                    <SimplePredicate field="age" operator="lessThan" value="16" />
                    <SimplePredicate field="calculatedScore" operator="lessOrEqual" value="40.0" />
                    <True />
                  </CompoundPredicate>
                </Node>
              </Node>
            </TreeModel>
          </Segment>
        </Segmentation>
      </MiningModel>
    </PMML>

### 7.3. PMML support in Drools

Drools includes consumer conformance support for the following PMML 4.2.1 model types:

- Regression models

- Scorecard models

- Tree models

- Mining models (with sub-types `modelChain`, `selectAll`, and `selectFirst`)

For a list of all PMML model types, including those not supported in Drools, see the DMG PMML specification.

Drools does not include a built-in PMML model editor, but you can use an XML or PMML-specific authoring tool to create PMML models and then integrate the PMML models in your decision services in Drools. You can import PMML files into your project in Business Central (Menu → Design → Projects → Import Asset) or package the PMML files as part of your project knowledge JAR (KJAR) file without Business Central.

When you add a PMML file to a project in Drools, multiple assets are generated. Each type of PMML model generates a different set of assets, but all PMML model types generate at least the following set of assets:

- A DRL file that contains all of the rules associated with your PMML model

- At least two Java classes:

  - A data class that is used as the default object type for the model type

  - A `RuleUnit` class that is used to manage data sources and rule execution

If a PMML file has `MiningModel` as the root model, multiple instances of each of these files are generated.

For more information about including assets such as PMML files with your project packaging and deployment method, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

#### 7.3.1. PMML naming conventions in Drools

The following are naming conventions for generated PMML packages, classes, and rules:

- If no package name is given in a PMML model file, then the default package name `org.kie.pmml.pmml_4_2` is prefixed to the model name for the generated rules in the format `"org.kie.pmml.pmml_4_2"+modelName`.

- The package name for the generated `RuleUnit` Java class is the same as the package name for the generated rules.

- The name of the generated `RuleUnit` Java class is the model name with `RuleUnit` added to it in the format `modelName+"RuleUnit"`.

- Each PMML model has at least one data class that is generated. The package name for these classes is `org.kie.pmml.pmml_4_2.model`.

- The names of generated data classes are determined by the model type, prefixed with the model name:

  - Regression models: One data class named `modelName+"RegressionData"`

  - Scorecard models: One data class named `modelName+"ScoreCardData"`

  - Tree models: Two data classes, the first named `modelName+"TreeNode"` and the second named `modelName+"TreeToken"`

  - Mining models: One data class named `modelName+"MiningModelData"`

| The mining model also generates all of the rules and classes that are within each of its segments.

#### 7.3.2. PMML extensions in Drools

The PMML specification supports `Extension` elements that extend the content of a PMML model. You can use extensions at almost every level of a PMML model definition, and as the first and last child in the main element of a model for maximum flexibility. For more information about PMML extensions, see the DMG PMML Extension Mechanism.

To optimize PMML integration, Drools supports the following additional PMML extensions:

- `modelPackage`: Designates a package name for the generated rules and Java classes. Include this extension in the `Header` section of the PMML model file.

- `adapter`: Designates the type of construct (`bean` or `trait`) that is used to contain input and output data for rules. Insert this extension in the `MiningSchema` or `Output` section (or both) of the PMML model file.

- `externalClass`: Used in conjunction with the `adapter` extension in defining a `MiningField` or `OutputField`. This extension contains a class with an attribute name that matches the name of the `MiningField` or `OutputField` element.

### 7.4. PMML model execution

You can import PMML files into your Drools project using Business Central (Menu → Design → Projects → Import Asset) or package the PMML files as part of your project knowledge JAR (KJAR) file without Business Central. After you implement your PMML files in your Drools project, you can execute the PMML-based decision service by embedding PMML calls directly in your Java application or by sending an `ApplyPmmlModelCommand` command to a configured KIE Server.

For more information about including PMML assets with your project packaging and deployment method, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

#### 7.4.1. Embedding a PMML call directly in a Java application

A KIE container is local when the knowledge assets are either embedded directly into the calling program or are physically pulled in using Maven dependencies for the KJAR. You typically embed knowledge assets directly into a project if there is a tight relationship between the version of the code and the version of the PMML definition. Any changes to the decision take effect after you have intentionally updated and redeployed the application. A benefit of this approach is that proper operation does not rely on any external dependencies to the run time, which can be a limitation of locked-down environments.

Using Maven dependencies enables further flexibility because the specific version of the decision can dynamically change (for example, by using a system property), and it can be periodically scanned for updates and automatically updated. This introduces an external dependency on the deploy time of the service, but executes the decision locally, reducing reliance on an external service being available during run time.

Prerequisites

- A KJAR containing the PMML model to execute has been created. For more information about project packaging, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

Procedure

1. In your client application, add the following dependencies to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- Required for the PMML compiler -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-pmml</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- Required for the KIE public API -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-api</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependencies>

       <!-- Required if not using classpath KIE container -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-ci</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

2. Create a KIE container from `classpath` or `ReleaseId`:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "my-kjar", "1.0.0" );
       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );

   Alternative option:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

3. Create an instance of the `PMMLRequestData` class, which applies your PMML model to a set of data:

       public class PMMLRequestData {
           private String correlationId; (1)
           private String modelName; (2)
           private String source; (3)
           private List<ParameterInfo<?>> requestParams; (4)
           ...
       }

   1 | Identifies data that is associated with a particular request or result
   2 | The name of the model that should be applied to the request data
   3 | Used by internally generated `PMMLRequestData` objects to identify the segment that generated the request
   4 | The default mechanism for sending input data points

4. Create an instance of the `PMML4Result` class, which holds the output information that is the result of applying the PMML-based rules to the input data:

       public class PMML4Result {
           private String correlationId;
           private String segmentationId; (1)
           private String segmentId; (2)
           private int segmentIndex; (3)
           private String resultCode; (4)
           private Map<String, Object> resultVariables; (5)
           ...
       }

   1 | Used when the model type is `MiningModel`. The `segmentationId` is used to differentiate between multiple segmentations.
   2 | Used in conjunction with the `segmentationId` to identify which segment generated the results.
   3 | Used to maintain the order of segments.
   4 | Used to determine whether the model was successfully applied, where `OK` indicates success.
   5 | Contains the name of a resultant variable and its associated value.

   In addition to the normal getter methods, the `PMML4Result` class also supports the following methods for directly retrieving the values for result variables:

       public <T> Optional<T> getResultValue(String objName, String objField, Class<T> clazz, Object...params)

       public Object getResultValue(String objName, String objField, Object...params)

5. Create an instance of the `ParameterInfo` class, which serves as a wrapper for basic data type objects used as part of the `PMMLRequestData` class:

       public class ParameterInfo<T> { (1)
           private String correlationId;
           private String name; (2)
           private String capitalizedName;
           private Class<T> type; (3)
           private T value; (4)
           ...
       }

   1 | The parameterized class to handle many different types
   2 | The name of the variable that is expected as input for the model
   3 | The class that is the actual type of the variable
   4 | The actual value of the variable

6. Execute the PMML model based on the required PMML class instances that you have created:

       public void executeModel(KieBase kbase,
                                Map<String,Object> variables,
                                String modelName,
                                String correlationId,
                                String modelPkgName) {
           RuleUnitExecutor executor = RuleUnitExecutor.create().bind(kbase);
           PMMLRequestData request = new PMMLRequestData(correlationId, modelName);
           PMML4Result resultHolder = new PMML4Result(correlationId);
           variables.entrySet().forEach( es -> {
               request.addRequestParam(es.getKey(), es.getValue());
           });

           DataSource<PMMLRequestData> requestData = executor.newDataSource("request");
           DataSource<PMML4Result> resultData = executor.newDataSource("results");
           DataSource<PMMLData> internalData = executor.newDataSource("pmmlData");

           requestData.insert(request);
           resultData.insert(resultHolder);

           List<String> possiblePackageNames = calculatePossiblePackageNames(modelName,
                                                                           modelPkgName);
           Class<? extends RuleUnit> ruleUnitClass = getStartingRuleUnit("RuleUnitIndicator",
                                                                       (InternalKnowledgeBase)kbase,
                                                                       possiblePackageNames);

           if (ruleUnitClass != null) {
               executor.run(ruleUnitClass);
               if ( "OK".equals(resultHolder.getResultCode()) ) {
                 // extract result variables here
               }
           }
       }

       protected Class<? extends RuleUnit> getStartingRuleUnit(String startingRule, InternalKnowledgeBase ikb, List<String> possiblePackages) {
           RuleUnitRegistry unitRegistry = ikb.getRuleUnitRegistry();
           Map<String,InternalKnowledgePackage> pkgs = ikb.getPackagesMap();
           RuleImpl ruleImpl = null;
           for (String pkgName: possiblePackages) {
             if (pkgs.containsKey(pkgName)) {
                 InternalKnowledgePackage pkg = pkgs.get(pkgName);
                 ruleImpl = pkg.getRule(startingRule);
                 if (ruleImpl != null) {
                     RuleUnitDescr descr = unitRegistry.getRuleUnitFor(ruleImpl).orElse(null);
                     if (descr != null) {
                         return descr.getRuleUnitClass();
                     }
                 }
             }
           }
           return null;
       }

       protected List<String> calculatePossiblePackageNames(String modelId, String...knownPackageNames) {
           List<String> packageNames = new ArrayList<>();
           String javaModelId = modelId.replaceAll("\\s","");
           if (knownPackageNames != null && knownPackageNames.length > 0) {
               for (String knownPkgName: knownPackageNames) {
                   packageNames.add(knownPkgName + "." + javaModelId);
               }
           }
           String basePkgName = PMML4UnitImpl.DEFAULT_ROOT_PACKAGE+"."+javaModelId;
           packageNames.add(basePkgName);
           return packageNames;
       }

   Rules are executed by the `RuleUnitExecutor` class. The `RuleUnitExecutor` class creates KIE sessions and adds the required `DataSource` objects to those sessions, and then executes the rules based on the `RuleUnit` that is passed as a parameter to the `run()` method. The `calculatePossiblePackageNames` and the `getStartingRuleUnit` methods determine the fully qualified name of the `RuleUnit` class that is passed to the `run()` method.

To facilitate your PMML model execution, you can also use a `PMML4ExecutionHelper` class supported in Drools. For more information about the PMML helper class, see PMML execution helper class.

##### 7.4.1.1. PMML execution helper class

Drools provides a `PMML4ExecutionHelper` class that helps create the `PMMLRequestData` class required for PMML model execution and that helps execute rules using the `RuleUnitExecutor` class.

The following are examples of a PMML model execution without and with the `PMML4ExecutionHelper` class, as a comparison:

Example PMML model execution without using `PMML4ExecutionHelper`

    public void executeModel(KieBase kbase,
                             Map<String,Object> variables,
                             String modelName,
                             String correlationId,
                             String modelPkgName) {
        RuleUnitExecutor executor = RuleUnitExecutor.create().bind(kbase);
        PMMLRequestData request = new PMMLRequestData(correlationId, modelName);
        PMML4Result resultHolder = new PMML4Result(correlationId);
        variables.entrySet().forEach( es -> {
            request.addRequestParam(es.getKey(), es.getValue());
        });

        DataSource<PMMLRequestData> requestData = executor.newDataSource("request");
        DataSource<PMML4Result> resultData = executor.newDataSource("results");
        DataSource<PMMLData> internalData = executor.newDataSource("pmmlData");

        requestData.insert(request);
        resultData.insert(resultHolder);

        List<String> possiblePackageNames = calculatePossiblePackageNames(modelName,
                                                                        modelPkgName);
        Class<? extends RuleUnit> ruleUnitClass = getStartingRuleUnit("RuleUnitIndicator",
                                                                    (InternalKnowledgeBase)kbase,
                                                                    possiblePackageNames);

        if (ruleUnitClass != null) {
            executor.run(ruleUnitClass);
            if ( "OK".equals(resultHolder.getResultCode()) ) {
              // extract result variables here
            }
        }
    }

    protected Class<? extends RuleUnit> getStartingRuleUnit(String startingRule, InternalKnowledgeBase ikb, List<String> possiblePackages) {
        RuleUnitRegistry unitRegistry = ikb.getRuleUnitRegistry();
        Map<String,InternalKnowledgePackage> pkgs = ikb.getPackagesMap();
        RuleImpl ruleImpl = null;
        for (String pkgName: possiblePackages) {
          if (pkgs.containsKey(pkgName)) {
              InternalKnowledgePackage pkg = pkgs.get(pkgName);
              ruleImpl = pkg.getRule(startingRule);
              if (ruleImpl != null) {
                  RuleUnitDescr descr = unitRegistry.getRuleUnitFor(ruleImpl).orElse(null);
                  if (descr != null) {
                      return descr.getRuleUnitClass();
                  }
              }
          }
        }
        return null;
    }

    protected List<String> calculatePossiblePackageNames(String modelId, String...knownPackageNames) {
        List<String> packageNames = new ArrayList<>();
        String javaModelId = modelId.replaceAll("\\s","");
        if (knownPackageNames != null && knownPackageNames.length > 0) {
            for (String knownPkgName: knownPackageNames) {
                packageNames.add(knownPkgName + "." + javaModelId);
            }
        }
        String basePkgName = PMML4UnitImpl.DEFAULT_ROOT_PACKAGE+"."+javaModelId;
        packageNames.add(basePkgName);
        return packageNames;
    }

Example PMML model execution using `PMML4ExecutionHelper`

    public void executeModel(KieBase kbase,
                             Map<String,Object> variables,
                             String modelName,
                             String modelPkgName,
                             String correlationId) {
       PMML4ExecutionHelper helper = PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory.getExecutionHelper(modelName, kbase);
       helper.addPossiblePackageName(modelPkgName);

       PMMLRequestData request = new PMMLRequestData(correlationId, modelName);
       variables.entrySet().forEach(entry -> {
         request.addRequestParam(entry.getKey(), entry.getValue);
       });

       PMML4Result resultHolder = helper.submitRequest(request);
       if ("OK".equals(resultHolder.getResultCode)) {
         // extract result variables here
       }
    }

When you use the `PMML4ExecutionHelper`, you do not need to specify the possible package names nor the `RuleUnit` class as you would in a typical PMML model execution.

To construct a `PMML4ExecutionHelper` class, you use the `PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory` class to determine how instances of `PMML4ExecutionHelper` are retrieved.

The following are the available `PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory` class methods for constructing a `PMML4ExecutionHelper` class:

PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory methods for PMML assets in a KIE base

  Use these methods when PMML assets have already been compiled and are being used from an existing KIE base:

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, KieBase kbase)

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, KieBase kbase, boolean includeMiningDataSources)

PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory methods for PMML assets on the project classpath

  Use these methods when PMML assets are on the project classpath. The `classPath` argument is the project classpath location of the PMML file:

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName,  String classPath, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf)

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName,String classPath, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf, boolean includeMiningDataSources)

PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory methods for PMML assets in a byte array

  Use these methods when PMML assets are in the form of a byte array:

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, byte[] content, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf)

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, byte[] content, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf, boolean includeMiningDataSources)

PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory methods for PMML assets in a `Resource`

  Use these methods when PMML assets are in the form of an `org.kie.api.io.Resource` object:

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, Resource resource, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf)

      public static PMML4ExecutionHelper getExecutionHelper(String modelName, Resource resource, KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf, boolean includeMiningDataSources)

| The classpath, byte array, and resource `PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory` methods create a KIE container for the generated rules and Java classes. The container is used as the source of the KIE base that the `RuleUnitExecutor` uses. The container is not persisted. The `PMML4ExecutionHelperFactory` method for PMML assets that are already in a KIE base does not create a KIE container in this way.

#### 7.4.2. Executing a PMML model using KIE Server

You can execute PMML models that have been deployed to KIE Server by sending the `ApplyPmmlModelCommand` command to the configured KIE Server. When you use this command, a `PMMLRequestData` object is sent to the KIE Server and a `PMML4Result` result object is received as a reply. You can send PMML requests to KIE Server through the KIE Server REST API from a configured Java class or directly from a REST client.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and configured, including a known user name and credentials for a user with the `kie-server` role. For installation options, see Installation and Setup (Core and IDE).

- A KIE container is deployed in KIE Server in the form of a KJAR that includes the PMML model. For more information about project packaging, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

- You have the container ID of the KIE container containing the PMML model.

Procedure

1. In your client application, add the following dependencies to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- Required for the PMML compiler -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-pmml</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- Required for the KIE public API -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-api</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependencies>

       <!-- Required for the KIE Server Java client API -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-client</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- Required if not using classpath KIE container -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-ci</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

2. Create a KIE container from `classpath` or `ReleaseId`:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "my-kjar", "1.0.0" );
       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );

   Alternative option:

       KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();

       KieContainer kieContainer = kieServices.getKieClasspathContainer();

3. Create a class for sending requests to KIE Server and receiving responses:

       public class ApplyScorecardModel {
         private static final ReleaseId releaseId =
                 new ReleaseId("org.acme","my-kjar","1.0.0");
         private static final String containerId = "SampleModelContainer";
         private static KieCommands commandFactory;
         private static ClassLoader kjarClassLoader; (1)
         private RuleServicesClient serviceClient; (2)

         // Attributes specific to your class instance
         private String rankedFirstCode;
         private Double score;

         // Initialization of non-final static attributes
         static {
           commandFactory = KieServices.Factory.get().getCommands();

           // Specifications for kjarClassLoader, if used
           KieMavenRepository kmp = KieMavenRepository.getMavenRepository();
           File artifactFile = kmp.resolveArtifact(releaseId).getFile();
           if (artifactFile != null) {
             URL urls[] = new URL[1];
             try {
               urls[0] = artifactFile.toURI().toURL();
               classLoader = new KieURLClassLoader(urls,PMML4Result.class.getClassLoader());
             } catch (MalformedURLException e) {
               logger.error("Error getting classLoader for "+containerId);
               logger.error(e.getMessage());
             }
           } else {
             logger.warn("Did not find the artifact file for "+releaseId.toString());
           }
         }

         public ApplyScorecardModel(KieServicesConfiguration kieConfig) {
           KieServicesClient clientFactory = KieServicesFactory.newKieServicesClient(kieConfig);
           serviceClient = clientFactory.getServicesClient(RuleServicesClient.class);
         }
         ...
         // Getters and setters
         ...

         // Method for executing the PMML model on KIE Server
         public void applyModel(String occupation, int age) {
           PMMLRequestData input = new PMMLRequestData("1234","SampleModelName"); (3)
           input.addRequestParam(new ParameterInfo("1234","occupation",String.class,occupation));
           input.addRequestParam(new ParameterInfo("1234","age",Integer.class,age));

           CommandFactoryServiceImpl cf = (CommandFactoryServiceImpl)commandFactory;
           ApplyPmmlModelCommand command = (ApplyPmmlModelCommand) cf.newApplyPmmlModel(request); (4)

           ServiceResponse<ExecutionResults> results =
               ruleClient.executeCommandsWithResults(CONTAINER_ID, command); (5)

           if (results != null) {  (6)
             PMML4Result resultHolder = (PMML4Result)results.getResult().getValue("results");
             if (resultHolder != null && "OK".equals(resultHolder.getResultCode())) {
               this.score = resultHolder.getResultValue("ScoreCard","score",Double.class).get();
               Map<String,Object> rankingMap =
                    (Map<String,Object>)resultHolder.getResultValue("ScoreCard","ranking");
               if (rankingMap != null && !rankingMap.isEmpty()) {
                 this.rankedFirstCode = rankingMap.keySet().iterator().next();
               }
             }
           }
         }
       }

   1 | Defines the class loader if you did not include the KJAR in your client project dependencies
   2 | Identifies the service client as defined in the configuration settings, including KIE Server REST API access credentials
   3 | Initializes a `PMMLRequestData` object
   4 | Creates an instance of the `ApplyPmmlModelCommand`
   5 | Sends the command using the service client
   6 | Retrieves the results of the executed PMML model

4. Execute the class instance to send the PMML invocation request to KIE Server.

   Alternatively, you can use JMS and REST interfaces to send the `ApplyPmmlModelCommand` command to KIE Server. For REST requests, you use the `ApplyPmmlModelCommand` command as a `POST` request to `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/instances/{containerId}` in JSON, JAXB, or XStream request format.

   Example POST endpoint

       http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/instances/SampleModelContainer

   Example JSON request body

       {
         "commands": [ {
             "apply-pmml-model-command": {
               "outIdentifier": null,
               "packageName": null,
               "hasMining": false,
               "requestData": {
                 "correlationId": "123",
                 "modelName": "SimpleScorecard",
                 "source": null,
                 "requestParams": [
                   {
                     "correlationId": "123",
                     "name": "param1",
                     "type": "java.lang.Double",
                     "value": "10.0"
                   },
                   {
                     "correlationId": "123",
                     "name": "param2",
                     "type": "java.lang.Double",
                     "value": "15.0"
                   }
                 ]
               }
             }
           }
         ]
       }

   Example curl request with endpoint and body

       curl -X POST "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/instances/SampleModelContainer" -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -d "{ \"commands\": [ { \"apply-pmml-model-command\": { \"outIdentifier\": null, \"packageName\": null, \"hasMining\": false, \"requestData\": { \"correlationId\": \"123\", \"modelName\": \"SimpleScorecard\", \"source\": null, \"requestParams\": [ { \"correlationId\": \"123\", \"name\": \"param1\", \"type\": \"java.lang.Double\", \"value\": \"10.0\" }, { \"correlationId\": \"123\", \"name\": \"param2\", \"type\": \"java.lang.Double\", \"value\": \"15.0\" } ] } } } ]}"

   Example JSON response

       {
         "results" : [ {
           "value" : {"org.kie.api.pmml.DoubleFieldOutput":{
         "value" : 40.8,
         "correlationId" : "123",
         "segmentationId" : null,
         "segmentId" : null,
         "name" : "OverallScore",
         "displayValue" : "OverallScore",
         "weight" : 1.0
       }},
           "key" : "OverallScore"
         }, {
           "value" : {"org.kie.api.pmml.PMML4Result":{
         "resultVariables" : {
           "OverallScore" : {
             "value" : 40.8,
             "correlationId" : "123",
             "segmentationId" : null,
             "segmentId" : null,
             "name" : "OverallScore",
             "displayValue" : "OverallScore",
             "weight" : 1.0
           },
           "ScoreCard" : {
             "modelName" : "SimpleScorecard",
             "score" : 40.8,
             "holder" : {
               "modelName" : "SimpleScorecard",
               "correlationId" : "123",
               "voverallScore" : null,
               "moverallScore" : true,
               "vparam1" : 10.0,
               "mparam1" : false,
               "vparam2" : 15.0,
               "mparam2" : false
             },
             "enableRC" : true,
             "pointsBelow" : true,
             "ranking" : {
               "reasonCh1" : 5.0,
               "reasonCh2" : -6.0
             }
           }
         },
         "correlationId" : "123",
         "segmentationId" : null,
         "segmentId" : null,
         "segmentIndex" : 0,
         "resultCode" : "OK",
         "resultObjectName" : null
       }},
           "key" : "results"
         } ],
         "facts" : [ ]
       }

## 8. Experimental Features

### 8.1. Declarative Agenda

| Declarative Agenda is experimental, and all aspects are highly likely to change in the future. @Eager and @Direct are temporary annotations to control the behaviour of rules, which will also change as Declarative Agenda evolves. Annotations instead of attributes where chosen, to reflect their experimental nature.

The declarative agenda allows to use rules to control which other rules can fire and when. While this will add a lot more overhead than the simple use of salience, the advantage is it is declarative and thus more readable and maintainable and should allow more use cases to be achieved in a simpler fashion.

This feature is off by default and must be explicitly enabled, that is because it is considered highly experimental for the moment and will be subject to change, but can be activated on a given KieBase by adding the declarativeAgenda='enabled' attribute in the corresponding kbase tag of the kmodule.xml file as in the following example.

Example 147. Enabling the Declarative Agenda

    <kmodule xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
          xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
          <kbase name="DeclarativeKBase" declarativeAgenda="enabled">
          <ksession name="KSession">
          </kbase>
          </kmodule>

The basic idea is:

- All rule’s Matches are inserted into WorkingMemory as facts. So you can now do pattern matching against a Match. The rule’s metadata and declarations are available as fields on the Match object.

- You can use the kcontext.blockMatch( Match match ) for the current rule to block the selected match. Only when that rule becomes false will the match be eligible for firing. If it is already eligible for firing and is later blocked, it will be removed from the agenda until it is unblocked.

- A match may have multiple blockers and a count is kept. All blockers must became false for the counter to reach zero to enable the Match to be eligible for firing.

- kcontext.unblockAllMatches( Match match ) is an over-ride rule that will remove all blockers regardless

- An activation may also be cancelled, so it never fires with cancelMatch

- An unblocked Match is added to the Agenda and obeys normal salience, agenda groups, ruleflow groups etc.

- The @Direct annotations allows a rule to fire as soon as it’s matched, this is to be used for rules that block/unblock matches, it is not desirable for these rules to have side effects that impact else where.

Example 148. New RuleContext methods

    void blockMatch(Match match);
          void unblockAllMatches(Match match);
          void cancelMatch(Match match);

Here is a basic example that will block all matches from rules that have metadata @department('sales'). They will stay blocked until the blockerAllSalesRules rule becomes false, i.e. "go2" is retracted.

Example 149. Block rules based on rule metadata

    rule rule1 @Eager @department('sales') when
          $s : String( this == 'go1' )
          then
          list.add( kcontext.rule.name + ':' + $s );
          end
          rule rule2 @Eager @department('sales') when
          $s : String( this == 'go1' )
          then
          list.add( kcontext.rule.name + ':' + $s );
          end
          rule blockerAllSalesRules @Direct @Eager when
          $s : String( this == 'go2' )
          $i : Match( department == 'sales' )
          then
          list.add( $i.rule.name + ':' + $s  );
          kcontext.blockMatch( $i );
          end

| Further than annotate the blocking rule with @Direct, it is also necessary to annotate all the rules that could be potentially blocked by it with @Eager. This is because, since the Match has to be evaluated by the pattern matching of the blocking rule, the potentially blocked ones cannot be evaluated lazily, otherwise won’t be any Match to be evaluated.

This example shows how you can use active property to count the number of active or inactive (already fired) matches.

Example 150. Count the number of active/inactive Matches

    rule rule1 @Eager @department('sales') when
          $s : String( this == 'go1' )
          then
          list.add( kcontext.rule.name + ':' + $s );
          end
          rule rule2 @Eager @department('sales') when
          $s : String( this == 'go1' )
          then
          list.add( kcontext.rule.name + ':' + $s );
          end
          rule rule3 @Eager @department('sales') when
          $s : String( this == 'go1' )
          then
          list.add( kcontext.rule.name + ':' + $s );
          end
          rule countActivateInActive @Direct @Eager when
          $s : String( this == 'go2' )
          $active : Number( this == 1 ) from accumulate( $a : Match( department == 'sales', active == true ), count( $a ) )
          $inActive : Number( this == 2 ) from  accumulate( $a : Match( department == 'sales', active == false ), count( $a ) )
          then
          kcontext.halt( );
          end

### 8.2. Browsing graphs of objects with OOPath

When the field of a fact is a collection it is possible to bind and reason over all the items in that collection on by one using the `from` keyword. Nevertheless, when it is required to browse a graph of object the extensive use of the `from` conditional element may result in a verbose and cubersome syntax like in the following example:

Example 151. Browsing a graph of objects with from

    rule "Find all grades for Big Data exam" when
          $student: Student( $plan: plan )
          $exam: Exam( course == "Big Data" ) from $plan.exams
          $grade: Grade() from $exam.grades
          then /* RHS */ end

In this example it has been assumed to use a domain model consisting of a `Student` who has a `Plan` of study: a `Plan` can have zero or more `Exam`s and an `Exam` zero or more `Grade`s. Note that only the root object of the graph (the `Student` in this case) needs to be in the working memory in order to make this works.

By borrowing ideas from XPath, this syntax can be made more succinct, as XPath has a compact notation for navigating through related elements while handling collections and filtering constraints. This XPath-inspired notation has been called `OOPath` since it is explictly intended to browse graph of objects. Using this notation the former example can be rewritten as it follows:

Example 152. Browsing a graph of objects with OOPath

    rule "Find all grades for Big Data exam" when
          Student( $grade: /plan/exams[course == "Big Data"]/grades )
          then /* RHS */ end

Formally, the core grammar of an `OOPath` expression can be defined in EBNF notation in this way.

    OOPExpr = [ID ( ":" | ":=" )] ( "/" | "?/" ) OOPSegment { ( "/" | "?/" | "." ) OOPSegment } ;
    OOPSegment = ID ["#" ID] ["[" ( Number | Constraints ) "]"]

In practice an `OOPath` expression has the following features.

- It has to start with `/` or with a `?/` in case of a completely non-reactive OOPath (see below).

- It can dereference a single property of an object with the `.` operator

- It can dereference a multiple property of an object using the `/` operator. If a collection is returned, it will iterate over the values in the collection

- While traversing referenced objects it can filter away those not satisfying one or more constraints, written as predicate expressions between square brackets like in:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams[ course == "Big Data" ]/grades )

- During oopath traversal it is also possible to downcast the traversed object to a subclass of the class declared in the generic collection. In this way subsequent constraints can also safely access to properties declared only in that subclass like in:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams#AdvancedExam[ course == "Big Data", level > 3 ]/grades )

  Objects that are not instances of the class specificed in this inline cast will be automatically filtered away.

- A constraint can also have a beckreference to an object of the graph traversed before the currently iterated one. For example the following OOPath:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams/grades[ result > ../averageResult ] )

  will match only the grades having a result above the average for the passed exam.

- A constraint can also recursively be another OOPath as it follows:

      Student( $exam: /plan/exams[ /grades[ result > 20 ] ] )

- Items can also be accessed by their index by putting it between square brackets like in:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams[0]/grades )

  To adhere to Java convention OOPath indexes are 0-based, compared to XPath 1-based

#### 8.2.1. Reactive and Non-Reactive OOPath

At the moment Drools is not able to react to updates involving a deeply nested object traversed during the evaluation of an `OOPath` expression. To make these objects reactive to changes it is then necessary to make them extend the class `org.drools.core.phreak.ReactiveObject`. It is planned to overcome this limitation by implementing a mechanism that automatically instruments the classes belonging to a specific domain model.

Having extendend that class, the domain objects can notify the Drools engine when one of its field has been updated by invoking the inherited method `notifyModification` as in the following example:

Example 153. Notifying the Drools engine that an exam has been moved to a different course

    public void setCourse(String course) {
            this.course = course;
            notifyModification(this);
            }

In this way when using an OOPath like the following:

    Student( $grade: /plan/exams[ course == "Big Data" ]/grades )

if an exam is moved to a different course, the rule is re-triggered and the list of grades matching the rule recomputed.

It is also possible to have reactivity only in one subpart of the OOPath as in:

    Student( $grade: /plan/exams[ course == "Big Data" ]?/grades )

Here, using the `?/` separator instead of the `/` one, the Drools engine will react to a change made to an exam, or if an exam is added to the plan, but not if a new grade is added to an existing exam. Of course if a OOPath chunk is not reactive, all remaining part of the OOPath from there till the end of the expression will be non-reactive as well. For instance the following OOPath

    Student( $grade: ?/plan/exams[ course == "Big Data" ]/grades )

will be completely non-reactive. For this reason it is not allowed to use the `?/` separator more than once in the same OOPath so an expression like:

    Student( $grade: /plan?/exams[ course == "Big Data" ]?/grades )

will cause a compile time error.

### 8.3. Traits

WARNING : this feature is still experimental and subject to changes

The same fact may have multiple dynamic types which do not fit naturally in a class hierarchy. Traits allow to model this very common scenario. A trait is an interface that can be applied (and eventually removed) to an individual object at runtime. To create a trait rather than a traditional bean, one has to declare them explicitly as in the following example:

    declare trait GoldenCustomer
        // fields will map to getters/setters
        code     : String
        balance  : long
        discount : int
        maxExpense : long
    end

At runtime, this declaration results in an interface, which can be used to write patterns, but can not be instantiated directly. In order to apply a trait to an object, we provide the new don keyword, which can be used as simply as this:

    when
        $c : Customer()
    then
        GoldenCustomer gc = don( $c, GoldenCustomer.class );
    end

when a core object dons a trait, a proxy class is created on the fly (one such class will be generated lazily for each core/trait class combination). The proxy instance, which wraps the core object and implements the trait interface, is inserted automatically and will possibly activate other rules. An immediate advantage of declaring and using interfaces, getting the implementation proxy for free from the Drools engine, is that multiple inheritance hierarchies can be exploited when writing rules. The core classes, however, need not implement any of those interfaces statically, also facilitating the use of legacy classes as cores. In fact, any object can don a trait, provided that they are declared as @Traitable. Notice that this annotation used to be optional, but now is mandatory.

    import org.drools.core.factmodel.traits.Traitable;
    declare Customer
        @Traitable
        code    : String
        balance : long
    end

The only connection between core classes and trait interfaces is at the proxy level: a trait is not specifically tied to a core class. This means that the same trait can be applied to totally different objects. For this reason, the trait does not transparently expose the fields of its core object. So, when writing a rule using a trait interface, only the fields of the interface will be available, as usual. However, any field in the interface that corresponds to a core object field, will be mapped by the proxy class:

    when
        $o: OrderItem( $p : price, $code : custCode )
        $c: GoldenCustomer( code == $code, $a : balance, $d: discount )
    then
        $c.setBalance( $a - $p*$d );
    end

In this case, the code and balance would be read from the underlying Customer object. Likewise, the setAccount will modify the underlying object, preserving a strongly typed access to the data structures. A hard field must have the same name and type both in the core class and all donned interfaces. The name is used to establish the mapping: if two fields have the same name, then they must also have the same declared type. The annotation @org.drools.core.factmodel.traits.Alias allows to relax this restriction. If an @Alias is provided, its value string will be used to resolve mappings instead of the original field name. @Alias can be applied both to traits and core beans.

    import org.drools.core.factmodel.traits.*;
    declare trait GoldenCustomer
        balance : long @Alias( "org.acme.foo.accountBalance" )
    end

    declare Person
        @Traitable
        name : String
        savings : long @Alias( "org.acme.foo.accountBalance" )
    end

    when
        GoldenCustomer( balance &gt; 1000 ) // will react to new Person( 2000 )
    then
    end

More work is being done on relaxing this constraint (see the experimental section on "logical" traits later). Now, one might wonder what happens when a core class does NOT provide the implementation for a field defined in an interface. We call hard fields those trait fields which are also core fields and thus readily available, while we define soft those fields which are NOT provided by the core class. Hidden fields, instead, are fields in the core class not exposed by the interface.

So, while hard field management is intuitive, there remains the problem of soft and hidden fields. Hidden fields are normally only accessible using the core class directly. However, the "fields" Map can be used on a trait interface to access a hidden field. If the field can’t be resolved, null will be returned. Notice that this feature is likely to change in the future.

    when
        $sc : GoldenCustomer( fields[ "age" ] > 18 )  // age is declared by the underlying core class, but not by GoldenCustomer
    then

Soft fields, instead, are stored in a Map-like data structure that is specific to each core object and referenced by the proxy(es), so that they are effectively shared even when an object dons multiple traits.

    when
        $sc : GoldenCustomer( $c : code, // hard getter
                              $maxExpense : maxExpense > 1000 // soft getter
        )
    then
        $sc.setDiscount( ... ); // soft setter
    end

A core object also holds a reference to all its proxies, so that it is possible to track which type(s) have been added to an object, using a sort of dynamic "instanceof" operator, which we called isA. The operator can accept a String, a class literal or a list of class literals. In the latter case, the constraint is satisfied only if all the traits have been donned.

    $sc : GoldenCustomer( $maxExpense : maxExpense > 1000,
                          this isA "SeniorCustomer", this isA [ NationalCustomer.class, OnlineCustomer.class ]
    )

Eventually, the business logic may require that a trait is removed from a wrapped object. To this end, we provide two options. The first is a "logical don", which will result in a logical insertion of the proxy resulting from the traiting operation. The TMS will ensure that the trait is removed when its logical support is removed in the first place.

    then
        don( $x, // core object
             Customer.class, // trait class
             true // optional flag for logical insertion
        )

The second is the use of the "shed" keyword, which causes the removal of any type that is a subtype (or equivalent) of the one passed as an argument. Notice that, as of version 5.5, shed would only allow to remove a single specific trait.

    then
        Thing t = shed( $x, GoldenCustomer.class ) // also removes any trait that

This operation returns another proxy implementing the org.drools.core.factmodel.traits.Thing interface, where the getFields() and getCore() methods are defined. Internally, in fact, all declared traits are generated to extend this interface (in addition to any others specified). This allows to preserve the wrapper with the soft fields which would otherwise be lost.

A trait and its proxies are also correlated in another way. Starting from version 5.6, whenever a core object is "modified", its proxies are "modified" automatically as well, to allow trait-based patterns to react to potential changes in hard fields. Likewise, whenever a trait proxy (mached by a trait pattern) is modified, the modification is propagated to the core class and the other traits. Morover, whenever a don operation is performed, the core object is also modified automatically, to reevaluate any "isA" operation which may be triggered.

Potentially, this may result in a high number of modifications, impacting performance (and correctness) heavily. So two solutions are currently implemented. First, whenever a core object is modified, only the most specific traits (in the sense of inheritance between trait interfaces) are updated and an internal blocking mechanism is in place to ensure that each potentially matching pattern is evaluated once and only once. So, in the following situation:

    declare trait GoldenCustomer end
    declare trait NationalGoldenustomer extends GoldenCustomer end
    declare trait SeniorGoldenCustomer extends GoldenCustomer end

a modification of an object that is both a GoldenCustomer, a NationalGoldenCustomer and a SeniorGoldenCustomer wold cause only the latter two proxies to be actually modified. The first would match any pattern for GoldenCustomer and NationalGoldenCustomer; the latter would instead be prevented from rematching GoldenCustomer, but would be allowed to match SeniorGoldenCustomer patterns. It is not necessary, instead, to modify the GoldenCustomer proxy since it is already covered by at least one other more specific trait.

The second method, up to the usr, is to mark traits as @PropertyReactive. Property reactivity is trait-enabled and takes into account the trait field mappings, so to block unnecessary propagations.

#### 8.3.1. Cascading traits

WARNING : This feature is extremely experimental and subject to changes

Normally, a hard field must be exposed with its original type by all traits donned by an object, to prevent situations such as

    declare Person
      @Traitable
      name : String
      id : String
    end

    declare trait Customer
      id : String
    end

    declare trait Patient
      id : long  // Person can't don Patient, or an exception will be thrown
    end

Should a Person don both Customer and Patient, the type of the hard field id would be ambiguous. However, consider the following example, where GoldenCustomers refer their best friends so that they become Customers as well:

    declare Person
      @Traitable( logical=true )
      bestFriend : Person
    end

    declare trait Customer end

    declare trait GoldenCustomer extends Customer
      refers : Customer @Alias( "bestFriend" )
    end

Aside from the @Alias, a Person-as-GoldenCustomer’s best friend might be compatible with the requirements of the trait GoldenCustomer, provided that they are some kind of Customer themselves. Marking a Person as "logically traitable" - i.e. adding the annotation @Traitable( logical = true ) - will instruct the Drools engine to try and preserve the logical consistency rather than throwing an exception due to a hard field with different type declarations (Person vs Customer). The following operations would then work:

    Person p1 = new Person();
    Person p2 = new Person();
    p1.setBestFriend( p2 );
    ...
    Customer c2 = don( p2, Customer.class );
    ...
    GoldenCustomer gc1 = don( p1, GoldenCustomer.class );
    ...
    p1.getBestFriend(); // returns p2
    gc1.getRefers(); // returns c2, a Customer proxy wrapping p2

Notice that, by the time p1 becomes GoldenCustomer, p2 must have already become a Customer themselves, otherwise a runtime exception will be thrown since the very definition of GoldenCustomer would have been violated.

In some cases, however, one might want to infer, rather than verify, that p2 is a Customer by virtue that p1 is a GoldenCustomer. This modality can be enabled by marking Customer as "logical", using the annotation @org.drools.core.factmodel.traits.Trait( logical = true ). In this case, should p2 not be a Customer by the time that p1 becomes a GoldenCustomer, it will be automatically don the trait Customer to preserve the logical integrity of the system.

Notice that the annotation on the core class enables the dynamic type management for its fields, whereas the annotation on the traits determines whether they will be enforced as integrity constraints or cascaded dynamically.

    import org.drools.factmodel.traits.*;

    declare trait Customer
        @Trait( logical = true )
    end

# Drools Integration

Integration Documentation

## 9. Drools commands

### 9.1. Runtime commands in Drools

Drools supports runtime commands that you can send to KIE Server for asset-related operations, such as executing all rules or inserting or retracting objects in a KIE session. The full list of supported runtime commands is located in the `org.drools.core.command.runtime` package in your Drools instance.

In the KIE Server REST API, you use the global `org.drools.core.command.runtime` commands or the rule-specific `org.drools.core.command.runtime.rule` commands as the request body for `POST` requests to `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/instances/{containerId}`. For more information about using the KIE Server REST API, see KIE Server REST API for KIE containers and business assets.

In the KIE Server Java client API, you can embed these commands in your Java application along with the relevant Java client. For example, for rule-related commands, you use the `RuleServicesClient` Java client with the embedded commands. For more information about using the KIE Server Java client API, see KIE Server Java client API for KIE containers and business assets.

#### 9.1.1. Sample runtime commands in Drools

The following are sample runtime commands that you can use with the KIE Server REST API or Java client API for asset-related operations in KIE Server:

- `BatchExecutionCommand`

- `InsertObjectCommand`

- `RetractCommand`

- `ModifyCommand`

- `GetObjectCommand`

- `GetObjectsCommand`

- `InsertElementsCommand`

- `FireAllRulesCommand`

- `QueryCommand`

- `SetGlobalCommand`

- `GetGlobalCommand`

For the full list of supported runtime commands, see the `org.drools.core.command.runtime` package in your Drools instance.

Each command in this section includes a REST request body example (JSON) for the KIE Server REST API and an embedded Java command example for the KIE Server Java client API. The Java examples use an object `org.drools.compiler.test.Person` with the fields `name` (String) and `age` (Integer).

BatchExecutionCommand

  Contains multiple commands to be executed together.

  Table 16. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `commands` | List of commands to be executed. | Required
  `lookup` | Sets the KIE session ID on which the commands will be executed. For stateless KIE sessions, this attribute is required. For stateful KIE sessions, this attribute is optional and if not specified, the default KIE session is used. | Required for stateless KIE session, optional for stateful KIE session

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "lookup": "ksession1",
        "commands": [ {
            "insert": {
              "object": {
                "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                  "name": "john",
                  "age": 25
                }
              }
            }
          },
          {
            "fire-all-rules": {
              "max": 10,
              "out-identifier": "firedActivations"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      BatchExecutionCommand command = new BatchExecutionCommand();
      command.setLookup("ksession1");

      InsertObjectCommand insertObjectCommand = new InsertObjectCommand(new Person("john", 25));
      FireAllRulesCommand fireAllRulesCommand = new FireAllRulesCommand();

      command.getCommands().add(insertObjectCommand);
      command.getCommands().add(fireAllRulesCommand);

      ksession.execute(command);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": 0,
                    "key": "firedActivations"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

InsertObjectCommand

  Inserts an object into the KIE session.

  Table 17. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `object` | The object to be inserted | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional
  `return-object` | Boolean to determine whether the object must be returned in the execution results (default: `true`) | Optional
  `entry-point` | Entry point for the insertion | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "insert": {
              "entry-point": "my stream",
              "object": {
                "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                  "age": 25,
                  "name": "john"
                }
              },
              "out-identifier": "john",
              "return-object": false
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      Command insertObjectCommand =
        CommandFactory.newInsert(new Person("john", 25), "john", false, null);

      ksession.execute(insertObjectCommand);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": [
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "john"
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

RetractCommand

  Retracts an object from the KIE session.

  Table 18. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be retracted | Required

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "retract": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command: Use `FactHandleFromString`

      RetractCommand retractCommand = new RetractCommand();
      retractCommand.setFactHandleFromString("123:234:345:456:567");

  Example Java command: Use `FactHandle` from inserted object

      RetractCommand retractCommand = new RetractCommand(factHandle);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container employee-rostering successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

ModifyCommand

  Modifies a previously inserted object in the KIE session.

  Table 19. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be modified | Required
  `setters` | List of setters for object modifications | Required

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "modify": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap",
              "setters": {
                "accessor": "age",
                "value": 25
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      ModifyCommand modifyCommand = new ModifyCommand(factHandle);

      List<Setter> setters = new ArrayList<Setter>();
      setters.add(new SetterImpl("age", "25"));

      modifyCommand.setSetters(setters);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container employee-rostering successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetObjectCommand

  Retrieves an object from a KIE session.

  Table 20. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be retrieved | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-object": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap",
              "out-identifier": "john"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetObjectCommand getObjectCommand = new GetObjectCommand();
      getObjectCommand.setFactHandleFromString("123:234:345:456:567");
      getObjectCommand.setOutIdentifier("john");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": null,
                    "key": "john"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetObjectsCommand

  Retrieves all objects from the KIE session as a collection.

  Table 21. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `object-filter` | Filter for the objects returned from the KIE session | Optional
  `out-identifier` | Identifier to be used in the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-objects": {
              "out-identifier": "objects"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetObjectsCommand getObjectsCommand = new GetObjectsCommand();
      getObjectsCommand.setOutIdentifier("objects");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": [
                      {
                        "org.apache.xerces.dom.ElementNSImpl": "<?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-16\"?>\n<object xmlns:xsi=\"http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance\" xsi:type=\"person\"><age>25</age><name>john</name>\n <\/object>"
                      },
                      {
                        "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                          "name": "john",
                          "age": 25
                        }
                      }
                    ],
                    "key": "objects"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

InsertElementsCommand

  Inserts a list of objects into the KIE session.

  Table 22. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `objects` | The list of objects to be inserted into the KIE session | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional
  `return-object` | Boolean to determine whether the object must be returned in the execution results. Default value: `true`. | Optional
  `entry-point` | Entry point for the insertion | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
          "insert-elements": {
              "objects": [
                  {
                      "containedObject": {
                          "@class": "org.drools.compiler.test.Person",
                          "age": 25,
                          "name": "john"
                      }
                  },
                  {
                      "containedObject": {
                          "@class": "Person",
                          "age": 35,
                          "name": "sarah"
                      }
                  }
              ]
          }
        }
      ]
      }

  Example Java command

      List<Object> objects = new ArrayList<Object>();
      objects.add(new Person("john", 25));
      objects.add(new Person("sarah", 35));

      Command insertElementsCommand = CommandFactory.newInsertElements(objects);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": [
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "john"
                  },
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720266:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "sarah"
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

FireAllRulesCommand

  Executes all rules in the KIE session.

  Table 23. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `max` | Maximum number of rules to be executed. The default is `-1` and does not put any restriction on execution. | Optional
  `out-identifier` | ID to be used for retrieving the number of fired rules in execution results. | Optional
  `agenda-filter` | Agenda Filter to be used for rule execution. | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "fire-all-rules": {
              "max": 10,
              "out-identifier": "firedActivations"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java command

      FireAllRulesCommand fireAllRulesCommand = new FireAllRulesCommand();
      fireAllRulesCommand.setMax(10);
      fireAllRulesCommand.setOutIdentifier("firedActivations");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": 0,
                    "key": "firedActivations"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

QueryCommand

  Executes a query defined in the KIE base.

  Table 24. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `name` | Query name. | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the query results. The query results are added in the execution results with this identifier. | Optional
  `arguments` | List of objects to be passed as a query parameter. | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [
          {
            "query": {
              "name": "persons",
              "arguments": [],
              "out-identifier": "persons"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      QueryCommand queryCommand = new QueryCommand();
      queryCommand.setName("persons");
      queryCommand.setOutIdentifier("persons");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "type": "SUCCESS",
        "msg": "Container stateful-session successfully called.",
        "result": {
          "execution-results": {
            "results": [
              {
                "value": {
                  "org.drools.core.runtime.rule.impl.FlatQueryResults": {
                    "idFactHandleMaps": {
                      "type": "LIST",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        {
                          "type": "MAP",
                          "componentType": null,
                          "element": [
                            {
                              "value": {
                                "org.drools.core.common.DisconnectedFactHandle": {
                                  "id": 1,
                                  "identityHashCode": 1809949690,
                                  "objectHashCode": 1809949690,
                                  "recency": 1,
                                  "object": {
                                    "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                                      "fullname": "John Doe",
                                      "age": 47
                                    }
                                  },
                                  "entryPointId": "DEFAULT",
                                  "traitType": "NON_TRAIT",
                                  "external-form": "0:1:1809949690:1809949690:1:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:org.kie.server.testing.Person"
                                }
                              },
                              "key": "$person"
                            }
                          ]
                        }
                      ]
                    },
                    "idResultMaps": {
                      "type": "LIST",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        {
                          "type": "MAP",
                          "componentType": null,
                          "element": [
                            {
                              "value": {
                                "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                                  "fullname": "John Doe",
                                  "age": 47
                                }
                              },
                              "key": "$person"
                            }
                          ]
                        }
                      ]
                    },
                    "identifiers": {
                      "type": "SET",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        "$person"
                      ]
                    }
                  }
                },
                "key": "persons"
              }
            ],
            "facts": []
          }
        }
      }

SetGlobalCommand

  Sets an object to a global state.

  Table 25. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `identifier` | ID of the global variable defined in the KIE base | Required
  `object` | Object to be set into the global variable | Optional
  `out` | Boolean to exclude the global variable you set from the execution results | Optional
  `out-identifier` | ID of the global execution result | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [
          {
            "set-global": {
              "identifier": "helper",
              "object": {
                "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                  "fullname": "kyle",
                  "age": 30
                }
              },
              "out-identifier": "output"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      SetGlobalCommand setGlobalCommand = new SetGlobalCommand();
      setGlobalCommand.setIdentifier("helper");
      setGlobalCommand.setObject(new Person("kyle", 30));
      setGlobalCommand.setOut(true);
      setGlobalCommand.setOutIdentifier("output");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "type": "SUCCESS",
        "msg": "Container stateful-session successfully called.",
        "result": {
          "execution-results": {
            "results": [
              {
                "value": {
                  "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                    "fullname": "kyle",
                    "age": 30
                  }
                },
                "key": "output"
              }
            ],
            "facts": []
          }
        }
      }

GetGlobalCommand

  Retrieves a previously defined global object.

  Table 26. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `identifier` | ID of the global variable defined in the KIE base | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID to be used in the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-global": {
              "identifier": "helper",
              "out-identifier": "helperOutput"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetGlobalCommand getGlobalCommand = new GetGlobalCommand();
      getGlobalCommand.setIdentifier("helper");
      getGlobalCommand.setOutIdentifier("helperOutput");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": null,
                    "key": "helperOutput"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

## 10. CDI

### 10.1. Introduction

CDI, Contexts and Dependency Injection, is Java specification that provides declarative controls and strucutres to an application. KIE can use it to automatically instantiate and bind things, without the need to use the programmatic API.

### 10.2. Annotations

@KContainer, @KBase and @KSession all support an optional 'name' attribute. CDI typically does "getOrCreate" when it injects, all injections receive the same instance for the same set of annotations. the 'name' annotation forces a unique instance for each name, although all instance for that name will be identity equals.

#### 10.2.1. @KReleaseId

Used to bind an instance to a specific version of a KieModule. If kie-ci is on the classpath this will resolve dependencies automatically, downloading from remote repositories.

#### 10.2.2. @KContainer

@KContainer is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inferrence.

Injects Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieContainer kContainer;

Injects KieContainer for Dynamic KieModule

    @Inject
    @KReleaseId(groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieContainer kContainer;

Injects named KieContainer for Dynamic KieModule

    @Inject
    @KContainer(name = "kc1")
    @KReleaseId(groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieContainer kContainer;

#### 10.2.3. @KBase

@KBase is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inference.

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieBase from the kmodule.xml file.

Injects the Default KieBase from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieBase kbase;

Injects the Default KieBase from a Dynamic KieModule

    @Inject
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KBase("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase1v10;

    @Inject
    @KBase("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieBase kbase1v10;

Use 'name' attribute to force new Instance for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="kbase1", name="kb1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase1kb1;

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="kbase1", name="kb2")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase1kb2;

#### 10.2.4. @KSession for KieSession

@KSession is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inference.

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml file

Injects the Default KieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieSession ksession;

Injects the Default KieSession from a Dynamic KieModule

    @Inject
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksessionv10;

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieSession ksessionv11;

Use 'name' attribute to force new Instance for 'jar1.KBase1' KieSession

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession1ks1

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks2")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession1ks2

#### 10.2.5. @KSession for StatelessKieSession

@KSession is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inference.

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml file.

Injects the Default StatelessKieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

Injects the Default StatelessKieSession from a Dynamic KieModule

    @Inject
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksessionv10;

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private StatelessKieSession ksessionv11;

Use 'name' attribute to force new Instance for 'jar1.KBase1’StatelessKieSession

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession1ks1

    @Inject
    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks2")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession1ks2

### 10.3. API Example Comparison

CDI can inject instances into fields, or even pass them as arguments. In this example field injection is used.

CDI example for a named KieSession

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    KieSession kSession;

    public void go(PrintStream out) {
        kSession.setGlobal("out", out);
        kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
        kSession.fireAllRules();
    }

This is less code and more declarative than the API approach.

API equivalent example for a named KieSession

    public void go(PrintStream out) {
        KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
        KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();

        KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
        kSession.setGlobal("out", out);
        kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
        kSession.fireAllRules();
    }

## 11. Integration with Spring

### 11.1. Important Changes for Drools 6.0

Drools Spring integration has undergone a complete makeover inline with the changes for Drools 6.0. The following are some of the major changes

- The recommended prefix for the Drools Spring has changed from 'drools:' to 'kie:'

- New Top Level Tags in 6.0

  - kie:kmodule

  - kie:import (from version 6.2)

  - kie:releaseId (from version 6.2)

- The following tags are no longer valid as top level tags.

  - kie:kbase - A child of the kie:kmodule tag.

  - kie:ksession - A child of the kie:kbase tag.

- Removed Tags from previous versions Drools 5.x

  - drools:resources

  - drools:resource

  - drools:grid

  - drools:grid-node

### 11.2. Integration with Drools Expert

In this section we will explain the kie namespace.

#### 11.2.1. KieModule

The <kie:kmodule> defines a collection of KieBase and associated KieSession’s. The kmodule tag has one MANDATORY parameter 'id'.

Table 27. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
id | Bean’s id is the name to be referenced from other beans. Standard Spring ID semantics apply. | Yes

A kmodule tag can contain only the following tags as children.

- kie:kbase

Refer to the documentation of kmodule.xml in the Drools Expert documentation for detailed explanation of the need for kmodule.

#### 11.2.2. KieBase

##### 11.2.2.1. <kie:kbase>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 28. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
name | Name of the KieBase | Yes
packages | Comma separated list of resource packages to be included in this kbase | No
includes | kbase names to be included. All resources from the corresponding kbase are included in this kbase. | No
default | Boolean (TRUE/FALSE). Default kbase, if not provided, it is assumed to be FALSE | No
scope | prototype | singleton. If not provided assumed to be singleton (default) | No
eventProcessingMode | Event Processing Mode. Valid options are STREAM, CLOUD | No
equalsBehavior | Valid options are IDENTITY, EQUALITY | No
declarativeAgenda | Valid options are enabled, disabled, true, false | No

##### 11.2.2.2. A kbase tag can contain only the followingtags as children.

- kie:ksession

##### 11.2.2.3. <kie:kbase>'s definition example

A kmodule can contain multiple (1..n) kbase elements.

Example 154. kbase definition example

    <kie:kmodule id="sample_module">
       <kie:kbase name="kbase1" packages="org.drools.spring.sample">
         ...
       </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.2.4. Spring Bean Scope (for KieBase and KieSession)

When defining a KieBase or a KieSession, you have the option of declaring a scope for that bean. For example, To force Spring to produce a new bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'prototype'. Similar way if you want Spring to return the same bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'singleton'.

#### 11.2.3. IMPORTANT NOTE

For proper initialization of the kmodule objects (kbase/ksession), it is mandatory for a bean of type `org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor` or `org.kie.spring.annotations.KModuleAnnotationPostProcessor` be defined.

Example 155. Regular kie-spring post processorbean definition

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

Example 156. kie-spring post processorbean definition when annotations are used

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.annotations.KModuleAnnotationPostProcessor"/>

| Without the org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor or org.kie.spring.annotations.KModuleAnnotationPostProcessor bean definition, the kie-spring integration will fail to work.

#### 11.2.4. KieSessions

<kie:ksession> element defines KieSessions. The same tag is used to define both Stateful (org.kie.api.runtime.KieSession) and Stateless (org.kie.api.runtime.StatelessKieSession) sessions.

##### 11.2.4.1. <kie:ksession>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 29. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
name | ksession’s name. | Yes
type | is the session stateful or stateless?. If this attribute is empty or missing, the session is assumed to be of type Stateful. | No
default | Is this the default session? | no
scope | prototype | singleton. If not provided assumed to be singleton (default) | no
clockType | REALTIME or PSEUDO | no
listeners-ref | Specifies the reference to the event listeners group (see 'Defining a Group of listeners' section below). | no

Example 157. ksession definition example

    <kie:kmodule id="sample-kmodule">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample3" packages="drl_kiesample3">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession1" type="stateless"/>
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2"/>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.4.2. Spring Bean Scope (for KieBase and KieSession)

When defining a KieBase or a KieSession, you have the option of declaring a scope for that bean. For example, To force Spring to produce a new bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'prototype'. Similar way if you want Spring to return the same bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'singleton'.

#### 11.2.5. Kie:ReleaseId

##### 11.2.5.1. <kie:releaseId>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 30. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
id | Bean’s id is the name to be referenced from other beans. Standard Spring ID semantics apply. | Yes
groupId | groupId from Maven GAV | Yes
artifactId | artifactId from Maven GAV | Yes
version | version from Maven GAV | Yes

Example 158. releaseId definition example

    <kie:releaseId id="beanId" groupId="org.kie.spring"
                artifactId="named-artifactId" version="1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"/>

#### 11.2.6. Kie:Import

Starting with version 6.2, kie-spring allows for importing of kie objects from kjars found on the classpath. Two modes of importing the kie objects are currently supported.

Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
releaseId | Reference to a Bean ID. Standard Spring ID semantics apply. | No
enableScanner | Enable Scanner. This attribute is used only if 'releaseId' is specified. | No
scannerInterval | Scanning Interval in milli seconds. This attribute is used only if 'releaseId' is specified. | No

##### 11.2.6.1. Global Import

The import tag will force the automatic scan of all the jars on the classpath, initialize the Kie Objects (Kbase/KSessions) and import these objects into the spring context.

Global Import

    <kie:import />

##### 11.2.6.2. Specific Import - ReleaseId

Using the releaseId-ref attribute on the import tag will initialize the specific Kie Objects (Kbase/KSessions) and import these objects into the spring context.

Import Kie Objects using a releaseId

    <kie:import releaseId-ref="namedKieSession"/>
    <kie:releaseId id="namedKieSession" groupId="org.drools"
                artifactId="named-kiesession" version="7.25.0.Final"/>

Kie Scanning feature can be enabled for KieBase’s imported with a specific releaseId. This feature is currently not available for global imports.

Import Kie Objects using a releaseId - Enable Scanner

    <kie:import releaseId-ref="namedKieSession"
                enableScanner="true" scannerInterval="1000"/>

    <kie:releaseId id="namedKieSession" groupId="org.drools"
                artifactId="named-kiesession" version="7.25.0.Final"/>

If the scanner is defined and enabled, an implicit KieScanner object is created and inserted into the spring context. It can be retrived from the spring context.

Retriving the KieScanner from Spring Context

    // the implicit name would be releaseId#scanner
    KieScanner releaseIdScanner = context.getBean("namedKieSession#scanner", KieScanner.class);
    releaseIdScanner.scanNow();

| kie-ci must be available on the classpath for the releaseId importing feature to work.

#### 11.2.7. Annotations

@KContainer, @KBase and @KSession all support an optional 'name' attribute. Spring typically does "get" when it injects, all injections receive the same instance for the same set of annotations. the 'name' annotation forces a unique instance for each name, although all instance for that name will be identity equals.

##### 11.2.7.1. @KReleaseId

Used to bind an instance to a specific version of a KieModule. If kie-ci is on the classpath this will resolve dependencies automatically, downloading from remote repositories.

##### 11.2.7.2. @KContainer

Injects Classpath KieContainer

    @KContainer
    private KieContainer kContainer;

Injects KieContainer for Dynamic KieModule

    @KContainer
    @KReleaseId(groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieContainer kContainer;

Injects named KieContainer for Dynamic KieModule

    @KContainer(name = "kc1")
    @KReleaseId(groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieContainer kContainer;

##### 11.2.7.3. @KBase

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieBase from the spring xml file.

Injects the Default KieBase from the Classpath KieContainer

    @KBase
    private KieBase kbase;

Injects the Default KieBase from a Dynamic KieModule

    @KBase
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @KBase("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase1v10;

    @KBase("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieBase kbase1v11;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.ksession1' KieSession

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession11kb2;

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieSession ksession11kb2;

##### 11.2.7.4. @KSession for KieSession

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml or spring xml file

Injects the Default KieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @KSession
    private KieSession ksession;

Injects the Default KieSession from a Dynamic KieModule

    @KSession
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksessionv10;

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieSession ksessionv11;

Use 'name' attribute to force new Instance for 'jar1.KBase1' KieSession

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession1ks1

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksession1ks2

##### 11.2.7.5. @KSession for StatelessKieSession

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml or spring xml file.

Injects the Default StatelessKieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @KSession
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

Injects the Default StatelessKieSession from a Dynamic KieModule

    @KSession
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksessionv10;

    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private StatelessKieSession ksessionv11;

    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession1ks1

    @KSession(value="ksession1", name="ks2")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", artifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession1ks2

##### 11.2.7.6. IMPORTANT NOTE

When annotations are used, For proper initialization of the kmodule objects (kbase/ksession), it is mandatory for either a bean of type `org.kie.spring.annotations.KModuleAnnotationPostProcessor` be defined

Example 159. kie-spring annotations post processor bean definition

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
                class="org.kie.spring.annotations.KModuleAnnotationPostProcessor"/>

Example 160. kie-spring annotations - Component Scanning

    <context:component-scan base-package="org.kie.spring.annotations"/>

| The post processor is different when annotations are used.

#### 11.2.8. Event Listeners

Drools supports adding 3 types of listeners to KieSessions - AgendaListener, WorkingMemoryListener, ProcessEventListener

The kie-spring module allows you to configure these listeners to KieSessions using XML tags. These tags have identical names as the actual listener interfaces i.e., <kie:agendaEventListener…​.>, <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener…​.> and <kie:processEventListener…​.>.

kie-spring provides features to define the listeners as standalone (individual) listeners and also to define them as a group.

##### 11.2.8.1. Defining Stand alone Listeners:

##### 11.2.8.2. Attributes:

Table 31. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ref | No | A reference to another declared bean.

Example 161. Listener configuration example - using a bean:ref.

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_kmodule">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2">
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
          <kie:processEventListener ref="mock-process-listener"/>
          <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener ref="mock-rr-listener"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.8.3. Nested Elements:

- bean

  - class = String

  - name = String (optional)

Example 162. Listener configuration example - using nested bean.

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
       <kie:ksession name="ksession1">
    	  <kie:agendaEventListener>
          <bean class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
          </kie:agendaEventListener>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.8.4. Empty Tag : Declaration with no 'ref' and without a nestedbean

When a listener is defined without a reference to a implementing bean and does not contain a nested bean, <drools:ruleRuntimeEventListener/> the underlying implementation adds the Debug version of the listener defined in the API.

The debug listeners print the corresponding Event toString message to _System.err. _

Example 163. Listener configuration example - defaulting to the debugversions provided by the Knowledge-API .

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
     <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2">
          <kie:agendaEventListener />
          <kie:processEventListener />
          <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener />
        </kie:ksession>
     </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.8.5. Mix and Match of different declaration styles

The drools-spring module allows you to mix and match the different declarative styles within the same KieSession. The below sample provides more clarity.

Example 164. Listener configuration example - mix and match of’ref'/nested-bean/empty styles.

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession1">
          <kie:agendaEventListener>
              <bean class="org.kie.spring.mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
          </kie:agendaEventListener>
        </kie:ksession>
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2">
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
          <kie:processEventListener ref="mock-process-listener"/>
          <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener ref="mock-rr-listener"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.8.6. Defining multiple listeners of the same type

It is also valid to define multiple beans of the same event listener types for a KieSession.

Example 165. Listener configuration example - multiple listeners of thesame type.

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession1">
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
          <kie:agendaEventListener>
              <bean class="org.kie.spring.mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
          </kie:agendaEventListener>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.8.7. Defining a Group of listeners:

drools-spring allows for grouping of listeners. This is particularly useful when you define a set of listeners and want to attach them to multiple sessions. The grouping feature is also very useful, when we define a set of listeners for 'testing' and then want to switch them for 'production' use.

##### 11.2.8.8. Attributes:

Table 32. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ID | yes | Unique identifier

##### 11.2.8.9. Nested Elements:

- kie:agendaEventListener…​

- kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener…​

- kie:processEventListener…​

| The above mentioned child elements can be declared in any order. Only one declaration of each type is allowed in a group.

##### 11.2.8.10. Example:

Example 166. Group of listeners - example

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="statelessWithGroupedListeners" type="stateless"
                 listeners-ref="debugListeners"/>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

      <kie:eventListeners id="debugListeners">
      <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
      <kie:processEventListener ref="mock-process-listener"/>
      <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener ref="mock-rr-listener"/>
    </kie:eventListeners>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

#### 11.2.9. Loggers

Drools supports adding 2 types of loggers to KieSessions - ConsoleLogger, FileLogger.

The kie-spring module allows you to configure these loggers to KieSessions using XML tags. These tags have identical names as the actual logger interfaces i.e., <kie:consoleLogger…​.> and <kie:fileLogger…​.>.

##### 11.2.9.1. Defining a console logger:

A console logger can be attached to a KieSession by using the <kie:consoleLogger/> tag. This tag has no attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element.

Example 167. Defining a console logger - example

    <kie:kmodule id="loggers_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ConsoleLogger-statefulSession" type="stateful">
          <kie:consoleLogger/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.9.2. Defining a file logger:

A file logger can be attached to a KieSession by using the <kie:fileLogger/> tag. This tag has the following attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element.

Table 33. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ID | yes | Unique identifier
file | yes | Path to the actual file on the disk
threaded | no | Defaults to false. Valid values are 'true’or 'false'
interval | no | Integer. Specifies the interval for flushing the contents from memory to the disk.

Example 168. Defining a file logger - example

    <kie:kmodule id="loggers_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ConsoleLogger-statefulSession" type="stateful">
          <kie:fileLogger id="fl_logger" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log1"/>
          <kie:fileLogger id="tfl_logger" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log2"
                              threaded="true" interval="5"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.9.3. Closing a FileLogger

To prevent leaks, it is advised to close the _<kie:fileLogger …​> _ programmatically.

    LoggerAdaptor adaptor = (LoggerAdaptor) context.getBean("fl_logger");
    adaptor.close();

#### 11.2.10. Defining Batch Commands

A <kie:batch> element can be used to define a set of batch commands for a given ksession.This tag has no attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element. The commands supported are

Initialization Batch Commands

- insert-object

  - ref = String (optional)

  - Anonymous bean

- set-global

  - identifier = String (required)

  - reg = String (optional)

  - Anonymous bean

- fire-all-rules

  - max : n

- fire-until-halt

- start-process

  - parameter

    - identifier = String (required)

    - ref = String (optional)

    - Anonymous bean

- signal-event

  - ref = String (optional)

  - event-type = String (required)

  - process-instance-id =n (optional)

Example 169. Batch commands - example

    <kie:kmodule id="batch_commands_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksessionForCommands" type="stateful">
          <kie:batch>
            <kie:insert-object ref="person2"/>
            <kie:set-global identifier="persons" ref="personsList"/>
            <kie:fire-all-rules max="10"/>
          </kie:batch>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

#### 11.2.11. Persistence

Persistence Configuration Options

- jpa-persistence

  - transaction-manager

    - ref = String

  - entity-manager-factory

    - ref = String

Example 170. ksession JPA configuration example

    <kie:kstore id="kstore" /> <!-- provides KnowledgeStoreService implementation -->

    <bean id="myEmf"
           class="org.springframework.orm.jpa.LocalContainerEntityManagerFactoryBean">
       <property name="dataSource" ref="ds" />
       <property name="persistenceUnitName"
           value="org.drools.persistence.jpa.local" />
    </bean>

    <bean id="txManager" class="org.springframework.orm.jpa.JpaTransactionManager">
       <property name="entityManagerFactory" ref="myEmf" />
    </bean>

    <kie:kmodule id="persistence_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="jpaSingleSessionCommandService">
          <kie:configuration>
             <kie:jpa-persistence>
               <kie:transaction-manager ref="txManager"/>
               <kie:entity-manager-factory ref="myEmf"/>
             </kie:jpa-persistence>
          </kie:configuration>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
              class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

#### 11.2.12. Leveraging Other Spring Features

This section provides details on leveraging other standard spring features when integrating with Drools Expert.

##### 11.2.12.1. Using Spring Expressions (Spel)

    <kie:kmodule id="batch_commands_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="#{packageRepository.packages}">
        <kie:ksession name="ksessionForCommands" type="stateful"/>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
          class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

    <bean id="packageRepository" class="sample.package.class.PackageRepo">
      <property name="packages" value="drl_kiesample3">
    </bean>

    <kie:kmodule id="loggers_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ConsoleLogger-statefulSession" type="stateful">
          <kie:fileLogger id="fl" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log1"/>
          <kie:fileLogger id="tfl" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log2"
                threaded="true" interval="5"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

    <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
                class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

##### 11.2.12.2. Using Spring Profiles

Spring 3.1 introduces a new profile attribute to the beans element of the spring-beans schema. This attribute acts as a switch when enabling and disabling profiles in different environments. One potential use of this attribute can be to have the same kbase defined with debug loggers in 'dev' environment and without loggers in 'prod' environment.

The below code snippet illustrates the concept of 'profiles'.

    <beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"
    xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
    xmlns:kie="http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring"
    xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans
    http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans-4.0.xsd
    http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring.xsd">
      <beans profile="development">
        <kie:kmodule id="test-kmodule">
          <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
            <kie:ksession name="ksession1" type="stateless">
                <kie:consoleLogger />
            </kie:ksession>
          </kie:kbase>
        </kie:kmodule>
        ...
      </beans>

      <beans profile="production">
        <kie:kmodule id="test-kmodule">
          <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
            <kie:ksession name="ksession1" type="stateless"/>
          </kie:kbase>
        </kie:kmodule>
        ...
      </beans>
    </beans>

As shown above, the Spring XML contains the definition of the profiles. While loading the ApplicationContext you have to tell Spring which profile you’re loading.

There are several ways of selecting your profile and the most useful is by using the "spring.profiles.active" system property.

    System.setProperty("spring.profiles.active", "development");
    ApplicationContext ctx = new ClassPathXmlApplicationContext("beans.xml");

Obviously, it is not a good practice to hard code things as shown above and the recommended practice is to keep the system properties definitions independent of the application.

    -Dspring.profiles.active="development"

The profiles can also be loaded and enabled programmtically

    ...
    GenericXmlApplicationContext ctx = new GenericXmlApplicationContext("beans.xml");
    ConfigurableEnvironment env = ctx.getEnvironment();
    env.setActiveProfiles("development");
    ctx.refresh();
    ...

### 11.3. Integration with jBPM Human Task

This chapter describes the infrastructure used when configuring a human task server with Spring as well as a little bit about the infrastructure used when doing this.

#### 11.3.1. How to configure Spring with jBPM Human task

The jBPM human task server can be configured to use Spring persistence. The following is a dependency graph for a configuration that uses local transactions and Spring’s thread-safe EntityManager proxy:

Figure 139. Spring Human Task integration injection dependencies

A `TaskService` instance is dependent on two other bean types: a drools `SystemEventListener` bean as well as a `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` bean. The `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` bean is howerver not injected into the `TaskService` bean because this would cause a circular dependency. To solve this problem, when the `TaskService` bean is injected into the `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` bean, the setter method used secretly injects the `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` instance back into the `TaskService` bean and initializes the `TaskService` bean as well.

The `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` bean is responsible for creating all the internal instances in human task that deal with transactions and persistence context management. Besides a `TaskService` instance, this bean also requires a transaction manager and a persistence context to be injected. Specifically, it requires an instance of a `HumanTaskSpringTransactionManager` bean (as a transaction manager) and an instance of a `SharedEntityManagerBean` bean (as a persistence context instance).

We also use some of the standard Spring beans in order to configure persistence: there’s a bean to hold the `EntityManagerFactory` instance as well as the `SharedEntityManagerBean` instance. The `SharedEntityManagerBean` provides a shared, thread-safe proxy for the actual `EntityManager`.

The `HumanTaskSpringTransactionManager` bean serves as a wrapper around the Spring transaction manager, in this case the `JpaTransactionManager`. An instance of a `JpaTransactionManager` bean is also instantiated because of this.

Example 171. Configuring Human Task with Spring

    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
    <beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"
           xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
           xmlns:jbpm="http://drools.org/schema/drools-spring"
           xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans-3.0.xsd
           http://drools.org/schema/drools-spring org/drools/container/spring/drools-spring-1.2.0.xsd">

      <!-- persistence & transactions-->
      <bean id="htEmf" class="org.springframework.orm.jpa.LocalContainerEntityManagerFactoryBean">
        <property name="persistenceUnitName" value="org.jbpm.task" />
      </bean>

      <bean id="htEm" class="org.springframework.orm.jpa.support.SharedEntityManagerBean">
        <property name="entityManagerFactory" ref="htEmf"/>
      </bean>

      <bean id="jpaTxMgr" class="org.springframework.orm.jpa.JpaTransactionManager">
        <property name="entityManagerFactory" ref="htEmf" />
        <!-- this must be true if using the SharedEntityManagerBean, and false otherwise -->
        <property name="nestedTransactionAllowed" value="true"/>
      </bean>

      <bean id="htTxMgr" class="org.drools.container.spring.beans.persistence.HumanTaskSpringTransactionManager">
        <constructor-arg ref="jpaTxMgr" />
      </bean>

      <!-- human-task beans -->

      <bean id="systemEventListener" class="org.drools.SystemEventListenerFactory" factory-method="getSystemEventListener" />

      <bean id="taskService" class="org.jbpm.task.service.TaskService" >
        <property name="systemEventListener" ref="systemEventListener" />
      </bean>

      <bean id="springTaskSessionFactory" class="org.jbpm.task.service.persistence.TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl"
            init-method="initialize" depends-on="taskService" >
        <!-- if using the SharedEntityManagerBean, make sure to enable nested transactions -->
        <property name="entityManager" ref="htEm" />
        <property name="transactionManager" ref="htTxMgr" />
        <property name="useJTA" value="false" />
        <property name="taskService" ref="taskService" />
      </bean>

    </beans>

When using the `SharedEntityManagerBean` instance, it’s important to configure the Spring transaction manager to use nested transactions. This is because the `SharedEntityManagerBean` is a transactional persistence context and will close the persistence context after every operation. However, the human task server needs to be able to access (persisted) entities after operations. Nested transactions allow us to still have access to entities that otherwise would have been detached and are no longer accessible, especially when using an ORM framework that uses lazy-initialization of entities.

Also, while the `TaskSessionSpringFactoryImpl` bean takes an “useJTA” parameter, at the moment, JTA transactions with Spring have not yet been fully tested.

## 12. Integration with Aries Blueprint

### 12.1. Integration with Drools Expert

In this section we will explain the kie namespace.

#### 12.1.1. KieModule

The <kie:kmodule> defines a collection of KieBase and associated KieSession’s. The kmodule tag has one MANDATORY parameter 'id'.

Table 34. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
id | Bean’s id is the name to be referenced from other beans. Standard Blueprint ID semantics applies. | Yes

A kmodule tag can contain only the following tags as children.

- kie:kbase

Refer to the documentation of kmodule.xml in the Drools Expert documentation for detailed explanation of the need for kmodule.

#### 12.1.2. KieBase

##### 12.1.2.1. <kie:kbase>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 35. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
name | Name of the KieBase | Yes
packages | Comma separated list of resource packages to be included in this kbase | No
includes | kbase names to be included. All resources from the corresponding kbase are included in this kbase. | No
default | Boolean (TRUE/FALSE). Default kbase, if not provided, it is assumed to be FALSE | No
scope | prototype | singleton. If not provided assumed to be singleton (default) | No
eventProcessingMode | Event Processing Mode. Valid options are STREAM, CLOUD | No
equalsBehavior | Valid options are IDENTITY, EQUALITY | No

##### 12.1.2.2. A kbase tag can contain only the following tags as children.

- kie:ksession

##### 12.1.2.3. <kie:kbase>'s definition example

A kmodule can contain multiple (1..n) kbase elements.

Example 172. kbase definition example

    <kie:kmodule id="sample_module">
       <kie:kbase name="kbase1" packages="org.drools.blueprint.sample">
         ...
       </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

##### 12.1.2.4. Blueprint Bean Scope (for KieBase and KieSession)

When defining a KieBase or a KieSession, you have the option of declaring a scope for that bean. For example, To force Blueprint to produce a new bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'prototype'. Similar way if you want Blueprint to return the same bean instance each time one is needed, you should declare the bean’s scope attribute to be 'singleton'.

#### 12.1.3. KieSessions

<kie:ksession> element defines KieSessions. The same tag is used to define both Stateful (org.kie.api.runtime.KieSession) and Stateless (org.kie.api.runtime.StatelessKieSession) sessions.

##### 12.1.3.1. <kie:ksession>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 36. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
name | ksession’s name. | Yes
type | is the session stateful or stateless?. If this attribute is empty or missing, the session is assumed to be of type Stateful. | No
default | Is this the default session? | No
scope | prototype | singleton. If not provided assumed to be singleton (default) | No
clockType | REALTIME or PSEUDO | No
listeners-ref | Specifies the reference to the event listeners group (see 'Defining a Group of listeners' section below). | No

Example 173. ksession definition example

    <kie:kmodule id="sample-kmodule">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample3" packages="drl_kiesample3">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession1" type="stateless"/>
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2"/>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

#### 12.1.4. Kie:ReleaseId

##### 12.1.4.1. <kie:releaseId>'s parameters as attributes:

Table 37. Sample
Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
id | Bean’s id is the name to be referenced from other beans. Standard Blueprint ID semantics applies. | Yes
groupId | groupId from Maven GAV | Yes
artifactId | artifactId from Maven GAV | Yes
version | version from Maven GAV | Yes

Example 174. releaseId definition example

    <kie:releaseId id="beanId" groupId="org.kie.blueprint"
                artifactId="named-artifactId" version="1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"/>

#### 12.1.5. Kie:Import

Starting with version 6.5, kie-aries-blueprint allows for importing of kie objects from kjars found on the classpath. Two modes of importing the kie objects are currently supported.

Attribute | Description | Required
--- | --- | ---
releaseId | Reference to a Bean ID. Standard Blueprint ID semantics applies. | No
enableScanner | Enable Scanner. This attribute is used only if 'releaseId' is specified. | No
scannerInterval | Scanning Interval in milli seconds. This attribute is used only if 'releaseId' is specified. | No

##### 12.1.5.1. Global Import

The import tag will force the automatic scan of all the jars on the classpath, initialize the Kie Objects (Kbase/KSessions) and import these objects into the blueprint context.

Global Import

    <kie:import />

##### 12.1.5.2. Specific Import - ReleaseId

Using the releaseId-ref attribute on the import tag will initialize the specific Kie Objects (Kbase/KSessions) and import these objects into the blueprint context.

Import Kie Objects using a releaseId

    <kie:import releaseId-ref="namedKieSession"/>
    <kie:releaseId id="namedKieSession" groupId="org.drools"
                artifactId="named-kiesession" version="7.25.0.Final"/>

Kie Scanning feature can be enabled for KieBase’s imported with a specific releaseId. This feature is currently not available for global imports.

Import Kie Objects using a releaseId - Enable Scanner

    <kie:import releaseId-ref="namedKieSession"
                enableScanner="true" scannerInterval="1000"/>

    <kie:releaseId id="namedKieSession" groupId="org.drools"
                artifactId="named-kiesession" version="7.25.0.Final"/>

If the scanner is defined and enabled, an implicit KieScanner object is created and inserted into the blueprint container. It can be programmatically retrived from the blueprint container using the -scanner suffix.

Retriving the KieScanner from Blueprint Container

    // the implicit name would be releaseId-scanner
    KieScanner releaseIdScanner = (KieScanner)container.getComponentInstance("namedKieSession-scanner");
    releaseIdScanner.scanNow();

| kie-ci must be available on the classpath for the releaseId importing feature to work.

#### 12.1.6. Event Listeners

Drools supports adding 3 types of listeners to KieSessions - AgendaListener, WorkingMemoryListener, ProcessEventListener

The kie-aries-blueprint module allows you to configure these listeners to KieSessions using XML tags. These tags have identical names as the actual listener interfaces i.e., <kie:agendaEventListener…​.>, <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener…​.> and <kie:processEventListener…​.>.

kie-aries-blueprint provides features to define the listeners as standalone (individual) listeners and also to define them as a group.

##### 12.1.6.1. Defining Stand alone Listeners:

##### 12.1.6.2. Attributes:

Table 38. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ref | No | A reference to another declared bean.

Example 175. Listener configuration example - using a bean:ref.

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_kmodule">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession2">
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
          <kie:processEventListener ref="mock-process-listener"/>
          <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener ref="mock-rr-listener"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

##### 12.1.6.3. Defining multiple listeners of the same type

It is also valid to define multiple beans of the same event listener types for a KieSession.

Example 176. Listener configuration example - multiple listeners of thesame type.

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener1" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener2" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksession1">
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener1"/>
          <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener2"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

##### 12.1.6.4. Defining a Group of listeners:

kie-aries-blueprinty allows for grouping of listeners. This is particularly useful when you define a set of listeners and want to attach them to multiple sessions. The grouping feature is also very useful, when we define a set of listeners for 'testing' and then want to switch them for 'production' use.

##### 12.1.6.5. Attributes:

Table 39. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ID | yes | Unique identifier

##### 12.1.6.6. Nested Elements:

- kie:agendaEventListener…​

- kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener…​

- kie:processEventListener…​

| The above mentioned child elements can be declared in any order. Only one declaration of each type is allowed in a group.

##### 12.1.6.7. Example:

Example 177. Group of listeners - example

    <bean id="mock-agenda-listener" class="mocks.MockAgendaEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-rr-listener" class="mocks.MockRuleRuntimeEventListener"/>
    <bean id="mock-process-listener" class="mocks.MockProcessEventListener"/>

    <kie:kmodule id="listeners_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="statelessWithGroupedListeners" type="stateless"
                 listeners-ref="debugListeners"/>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

      <kie:eventListeners id="debugListeners">
      <kie:agendaEventListener ref="mock-agenda-listener"/>
      <kie:processEventListener ref="mock-process-listener"/>
      <kie:ruleRuntimeEventListener ref="mock-rr-listener"/>
    </kie:eventListeners>

#### 12.1.7. Loggers

Drools supports adding 2 types of loggers to KieSessions - ConsoleLogger, FileLogger.

The kie-aries-blueprint module allows you to configure these loggers to KieSessions using XML tags. These tags have identical names as the actual logger interfaces i.e., <kie:consoleLogger…​.> and <kie:fileLogger…​.>.

##### 12.1.7.1. Defining a console logger:

A console logger can be attached to a KieSession by using the <kie:consoleLogger/> tag. This tag has no attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element.

Example 178. Defining a console logger - example

    <kie:kmodule id="loggers_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ConsoleLogger-statefulSession" type="stateful">
          <kie:consoleLogger/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

##### 12.1.7.2. Defining a file logger:

A file logger can be attached to a KieSession by using the <kie:fileLogger/> tag. This tag has the following attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element.

Table 40. Sample
Attribute | Required | Description
--- | --- | ---
ID | yes | Unique identifier
file | yes | Path to the actual file on the disk
threaded | no | Defaults to false. Valid values are 'true’or 'false'
interval | no | Integer. Specifies the interval for flushing the contents from memory to the disk.

Example 179. Defining a file logger - example

    <kie:kmodule id="loggers_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ConsoleLogger-statefulSession" type="stateful">
          <kie:fileLogger id="fl_logger" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log1"/>
          <kie:fileLogger id="tfl_logger" file="#{ systemProperties['java.io.tmpdir'] }/log2"
                              threaded="true" interval="5"/>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

##### 12.1.7.3. Closing a FileLogger

To prevent leaks, it is advised to close the <kie:fileLogger …​> programmatically.

    LoggerAdaptor adaptor = (LoggerAdaptor) container.getComponentInstance("fl_logger");
    adaptor.close();

#### 12.1.8. Defining Batch Commands

A <kie:batch> element can be used to define a set of batch commands for a given ksession.This tag has no attributes and must be present directly under a <kie:ksession…​.> element. The commands supported are

Initialization Batch Commands

- insert-object

  - ref = String (optional)

  - Anonymous bean

- set-global

  - identifier = String (required)

  - reg = String (optional)

  - Anonymous bean

- fire-all-rules

  - max : n

- fire-until-halt

- start-process

  - parameter

    - identifier = String (required)

    - ref = String (optional)

    - Anonymous bean

- signal-event

  - ref = String (optional)

  - event-type = String (required)

  - process-instance-id =n (optional)

Example 180. Batch commands - example

    <kie:kmodule id="batch_commands_module">
      <kie:kbase name="drl_kiesample" packages="drl_kiesample">
        <kie:ksession name="ksessionForCommands" type="stateful">
          <kie:batch>
            <kie:insert-object ref="person2"/>
            <kie:set-global identifier="persons" ref="personsList"/>
            <kie:fire-all-rules max="10"/>
          </kie:batch>
        </kie:ksession>
      </kie:kbase>
    </kie:kmodule>

## 13. Android Integration

### 13.1. Integration with Drools Expert

Drools Android integration comes in two flavors, with or without the drools-compiler dependency. Without the drools-compiler dependency the KIE bases are pre-serialized at buildtime using the kie-maven-plugin. They can be then deserialized using the API, or directly injected using Roboguice. When using the drools-compiler dependency there are two options: (1) standard KieContainer API or (2) CDI-like injection with Roboguice.

#### 13.1.1. Pre-serialized Rules

It is possible to use Drools without the drools-compiler dependency, which results in a smaller apk, by pre-serializing the compiled KIE bases during build-time and then de-serializing them at runtime.

##### 13.1.1.1. Maven Configuration

The KieBase must be serialized during build time using kie-maven-plugin.

Example 181. Pre-serialized KieBase Maven pom.xml

    <dependencyManagement>
      <dependencies>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
          <artifactId>drools-bom</artifactId>
          <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
          <type>pom</type>
          <scope>import</scope>
      </dependencies>
    </dependencyManagement>
    <dependencies>
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-android</artifactId>
        <exclusions>
         <exclusion>
           <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
           <artifactId>slf4j-api</artifactId>
        </exclusions>
      </dependency>
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-core</artifactId>
      </dependency>
    </dependencies>
    <build>
      <plugins>
        <plugin>
          <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
          <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
          <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
          <configuration>
            <kiebases>
            <kiebase>HelloKB</kiebase>
            </kiebases>
            <resDirectory>${basedir}/src/main/res/raw</resDirectory>
          </configuration>
            <executions>
              <execution>
                <id>touch</id>
                <goals>
                  <goal>touch</goal>
                </goals>
                <phase>initialize</phase>
              </execution>
              <execution>
                <id>compile-kbase</id>
                  <goals>
                    <goal>build</goal>
                  </goals>
                  <phase>compile</phase>
              </execution>
              <execution>
                <id>serialize</id>
                <goals>
                  <goal>serialize</goal>
                </goals>
                <phase>compile</phase>
              </execution>
            </executions>
         </plugin>
      </plugins>
    </build>

##### 13.1.1.2. Loading the KieBase

The KieBase must be de-serialized before creating the sessions.

Loading serialized KieBase

    private class LoadKieBaseTask extends AsyncTask<InputStream, Void, KieBase> {
       @Override
       protected KieBase doInBackground(InputStream... params) {
          try {
             logger.debug("Loading KIE base");
             final KnowledgeBase kbase = KnowledgeBaseFactory.newKnowledgeBase();
             kbase.addKnowledgePackages((List<KnowledgePackage>) DroolsStreamUtils.streamIn(params[0]));
             return kbase;
          }catch(Exception e) {
             logger.error("Drools exception", e);
             return null;
          }
       }
    }

#### 13.1.2. KieContainer API with drools-compiler dependency

With the drools-compiler dependency standard KieContainer API can be used. This comes at a cost of a larger apk. To avoid the 65K limit, multidex (or proguard) can be used.

##### 13.1.2.1. Maven Configuration with drools-compiler and multidex

The kie-maven-plugin must be configured to build the kiebase. Multidex must be used to allow for the increased dependencies. There are also some settings for merging various Drools XML files within the apk.

Example 182. pom.xml with drools-compiler and multidex

    <dependencyManagement>
      <dependencies>
        <dependency>
          <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
          <artifactId>drools-bom</artifactId>
          <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
          <type>pom</type>
          <scope>import</scope>
      </dependencies>
    </dependencyManagement>
    <dependencies>
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-android</artifactId>
        <exclusions>
          <exclusion>
            <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
            <artifactId>slf4j-api</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
        </exclusions>
      </dependency>
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-compiler</artifactId>
        <exclusions>
          <exclusion>
             <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
             <artifactId>slf4j-api</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
          <exclusion>
             <groupId>xmlpull</groupId>
             <artifactId>xmlpull</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
          <exclusion>
             <groupId>xpp3</groupId>
             <artifactId>xpp3_min</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
          <exclusion>
             <groupId>org.slf4j</groupId>
             <artifactId>slf4j-api</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
          <exclusion>
             <groupId>org.eclipse.jdt.core.compiler</groupId>
             <artifactId>ecj</artifactId>
          </exclusion>
        </exclusions>
      </dependency>
    </dependencies>
    <build>
      <plugins>
        <plugin>
          <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
          <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
          <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
          <executions>
            <execution>
              <id>compile-kbase</id>
              <goals>
                <goal>build</goal>
              </goals>
              <phase>compile</phase>
            </execution>
          </executions>
        </plugin>
        <plugin>
          <groupId>com.simpligility.maven.plugins</groupId>
          <artifactId>android-maven-plugin</artifactId>
          <version>4.2.1</version>
          <extensions>true</extensions>
          <configuration>
            <sdk>
              <platform>21</platform>
            </sdk>
            <dex>
              <coreLibrary>true</coreLibrary>
              <jvmArguments><jvmArgument>-Xmx2048m</jvmArgument></jvmArguments>
              <multiDex>true</multiDex>
              <mainDexList>maindex.txt</mainDexList>
            </dex>
            <extractDuplicates>true</extractDuplicates>
            <apk>
              <metaInf>
                <includes>
                  <include>services/**</include>
                  <include>kmodule.*</include>
                  <include>HelloKB/**</include>
                  <include>drools**</include>
                  <include>maven/${project.groupId}/${project.artifactId}/**</include>
                </includes>
              </metaInf>
            </apk>
          </configuration>
        </plugin>
      </plugins>
    </build>

### 13.2. Integration with Roboguice

#### 13.2.1. Pre-serialized Rules with Roboguice

With Roboguice pre-serialized KIE bases can be injected using the @KBase annotation.

##### 13.2.1.1. Annotations

@KBase supports an optional 'name' attribute. CDI typically does "getOrCreate" when it injects, all injections receive the same instance for the same set of annotations. the 'name' annotation forces a unique instance for each name, although all instances for that name will be identity equals.

##### 13.2.1.2. @KBase

The default argument maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieBase from the kmodule.xml file.

Injects KieBase by name from pre-serialized resource

    @KBase("kbase1")
    private KieBase kbase;

##### 13.2.1.3. AndroidManifest.xml configuration

The Roboguice module needs to be specified in the manifest.

Example 183. Roboguice manifest with pre-serialized KIE base

    <application
       android:largeHeap="true"
       android:allowBackup="true"
       android:icon="@drawable/ic_launcher"
       android:label="@string/app_name"
       android:theme="@style/AppTheme">
          <meta-data
             android:name="roboguice.modules"
             android:value="org.drools.android.roboguice.DroolsModule"/>
          <activity
             android:label="@string/app_name"
             android:name="org.drools.examples.android.SplashActivity">
          <intent-filter>
             <action android:name="android.intent.action.MAIN"/>
             <category android:name="android.intent.category.LAUNCHER"/>
          </intent-filter>
       </activity>
    </application>

#### 13.2.2. KieContainer with drools-compiler dependency and Roboguice

With Roboguice and drools-compiler almost the full CDI syntax can be used to inject KieContainers, KieBases, and KieSessions.

##### 13.2.2.1. Annotations

@KContainer, @KBase and @KSession all support an optional 'name' attribute. CDI typically does "getOrCreate" when it injects, all injections receive the same instance for the same set of annotations. the 'name' annotation forces a unique instance for each name, although all instance for that name will be identity equals.

##### 13.2.2.2. @KContainer

Injects Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieContainer kContainer;

##### 13.2.2.3. @KBase

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieBase from the kmodule.xml file.

Injects the Default KieBase from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieBase kbase;

Injects KieBase by name from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    @KBase("kbase1")
    private KieBase kbase;

##### 13.2.2.4. @KSession for KieSession

@KSession is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inference.

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml file

Injects the Default KieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private KieSession ksession;

Injects StatelessKieSession by name from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    private KieSession ksession;

##### 13.2.2.5. @KSession for StatelessKieSession

@KSession is optional as it can be detected and added by the use of @Inject and variable type inference.

The default argument, if given, maps to the value attribute and specifies the name of the KieSession from the kmodule.xml file.

Injects the Default StatelessKieSession from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

Injects StatelessKieSession by name from the Classpath KieContainer

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    private StatelessKieSession ksession;

##### 13.2.2.6. AndroidManifest.xml configuration

The Roboguice module needs to be specified in the manifest.

Example 184. Roboguice manifest configuration

    <application
       android:largeHeap="true"
       android:allowBackup="true"
       android:icon="@drawable/ic_launcher"
       android:label="@string/app_name"
       android:theme="@style/AppTheme">
       <meta-data
          android:name="roboguice.modules"
          android:value="org.drools.android.roboguice.DroolsContainerModule"/>
       <activity
          android:label="@string/app_name"
          android:name="org.drools.examples.android.SplashActivity">
          <intent-filter>
             <action android:name="android.intent.action.MAIN"/>
             <category android:name="android.intent.category.LAUNCHER"/>
          </intent-filter>
       </activity>
    </application>

## 14. Apache Camel Integration

### 14.1. Camel

Camel provides a light weight bus framework for getting information into and out of Drools.

Drools introduces two elements to make easy integration.

- Drools Policy

  Augments any JAXB or XStream data loaders. For JAXB it adds drools related paths ot the contextpath, for XStream it adds custom converters and aliases for Drools classes. It also handles setting the ClassLoader to the targeted ksession.

- Drools Endpoint

  Executes the payload against the specified drools session

Drools can be configured like any normal camel component, but notice the policy that wraps the drools related segments. This will route all payloads to ksession1

Example 185. Drools EndPoint configured with the CXFRS producer

    <bean id="kiePolicy" class="org.kie.camel.component.KiePolicy" />

    <camelContext id="camel" xmlns="http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring">
       <route>
          <from uri="cxfrs://bean://rsServer"/>
             <policy ref="kiePolicy">
                <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
                <to uri="kie:ksession1" />
                <marshal ref="xstream" />
           </policy>
        </route>
    </camelContext>

It is possible to not specify the session in the drools endpoint uri, and instead "multiplex" based on an attribute or header. In this example the policy will check either the header field "DroolsLookup" for the named session to execute and if that isn’t specified it’ll check the "lookup" attribute on the incoming payload.

Example 186. Drools EndPoint configured with the CXFRS producer

    <bean id="kiePolicy" class="org.kie.camel.component.KiePolicy" />

    <camelContext id="camel" xmlns="http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring">
       <route>
          <from uri="cxfrs://bean://rsServer"/>
             <policy ref="kiePolicy">
                <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
                <to uri="kie:dynamic" />
                <marshal ref="xstream" />
           </policy>
        </route>
    </camelContext>

Example 187. Java Code to execute against Route from a Spring and CamelContext

    public class MyTest extends CamelSpringTestSupport {

        @Override
        protected AbstractXmlApplicationContext createApplicationContext() {
            return new ClassPathXmlApplicationContext("org/drools/camel/component/CxfRsSpring.xml");
        }

        public void test1() throws Exception {
            String cmd = "";
            cmd += "<batch-execution lookup=\"ksession1\">\n";
            cmd += "  <insert out-identifier=\"salaboy\">\n";
            cmd += "      <org.drools.pipeline.camel.Person>\n";
            cmd += "         <name>salaboy</name>\n";
            cmd += "      </org.drools.pipeline.camel.Person>\n";
            cmd += "   </insert>\n";
            cmd += "   <fire-all-rules/>\n";
            cmd += "</batch-execution>\n";

            Object object = this.context.createProducerTemplate().requestBody("direct://client", cmd);
            System.out.println( object );
        }
    }

The following urls show sample script examples for jaxb, xstream and json marshalling using:

- http://fisheye.jboss.org/browse/JBossRules/trunk/drools-camel/src/test/resources/org/drools/camel/component/jaxb.mvt?r=HEAD

- http://fisheye.jboss.org/browse/JBossRules/trunk/drools-camel/src/test/resources/org/drools/camel/component/jaxb.mvt?r=HEAD

- http://fisheye.jboss.org/browse/JBossRules/trunk/drools-camel/src/test/resources/org/drools/camel/component/xstream.mvt?r=HEAD

## 15. Drools Camel Server

### 15.1. Introduction

The drools camel server (drools-camel-server) module is a war which you can deploy to execute KnowledgeBases remotely for any sort of client application. This is not limited to JVM application clients, but any technology that can use HTTP, through a REST interface. This version of the execution server supports stateless and stateful sessions in a native way.

### 15.2. Deployment

Drools Camel Server is a war file, which can be deployed in a application server (such as JBoss AS). As the service is stateless, it is possible to have have as many of these services deployed as you need to serve the client load. Deploy on JBoss AS 4.x / Tomcat 6.x works out-of-the-box, instead some external dependencies must be added and the configuration must be changed to be deployed in JBoss AS 5

### 15.3. Configuration

Inside the war file you will find a few XML configuration files.

- beans.xml

  - Skeleton XML that imports knowledge-services.xml and camel-server.xml

- camel-server.xml

  - Configures CXF endpoints with Camel Routes

  - Came Routes pipeline messages to various configured knowledge services

- knowledge-services.xml

  - Various KIE bases and Sessions

- camel-client.xml

  - Sample camel client showing how to send and receive a message

  - Used by "out of the box" test.jsp

#### 15.3.1. REST/Camel Services configuration

The next step is configure the services that are going to be exposed through drools-server. You can modify this configuration in camel-server.xml file.

    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
    <beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"
      xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
      xmlns:cxf="http://camel.apache.org/schema/cxf"
      xmlns:jaxrs="http://cxf.apache.org/jaxrs"
      xsi:schemaLocation="
      http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans-2.5.xsd
      http://camel.apache.org/schema/cxf http://camel.apache.org/schema/cxf/camel-cxf.xsd
      http://cxf.apache.org/jaxrs http://cxf.apache.org/schemas/jaxrs.xsd
      http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring/camel-spring.xsd">

    <import resource="classpath:META-INF/cxf/cxf.xml" />
    <import resource="classpath:META-INF/cxf/cxf-extension-jaxrs-binding.xml"/>
    <import resource="classpath:META-INF/cxf/cxf-servlet.xml" />

      <!--
       !   If you are running on JBoss you will need to copy a camel-jboss.jar into the lib and set this ClassLoader configuration
       !  http://camel.apache.org/camel-jboss.html
       !   <bean id="jbossResolver" class="org.apache.camel.jboss.JBossPackageScanClassResolver"/>
       -->

      <!--
       !   Define the server end point.
       !   Copy and paste this element, changing id and the address, to expose services on different urls.
       !   Different Camel routes can handle different end point paths.
       -->
      <cxf:rsServer id="rsServer"
                    address="/rest"
                    serviceClass="org.kie.jax.rs.CommandExecutorImpl">
           <cxf:providers>
               <bean class="org.kie.jax.rs.CommandMessageBodyReader"/>
           </cxf:providers>
      </cxf:rsServer>

      <cxf:cxfEndpoint id="soapServer"
                address="/soap"
                 serviceName="ns:CommandExecutor"
                 endpointName="ns:CommandExecutorPort"
              wsdlURL="soap.wsdl"
              xmlns:ns="http://soap.jax.drools.org/" >
        <cxf:properties>
          <entry key="dataFormat" value="MESSAGE"/>
          <entry key="defaultOperationName" value="execute"/>
        </cxf:properties>
      </cxf:cxfEndpoint>

      <!-- Leave this, as it's needed to make Camel "drools" aware -->
      <bean id="kiePolicy" class="org.kie.camel.component.KiePolicy" />

      <camelContext id="camel" xmlns="http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring">
        <!--
         ! Routes incoming messages from end point id="rsServer".
         ! Example route unmarshals the messages with xstream and executes against ksession1.
         ! Copy and paste this element, changing marshallers and the 'to' uri, to target different sessions, as needed.
         !-->

        <route>
           <from uri="cxfrs://bean://rsServer"/>
           <policy ref="kiePolicy">
             <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
             <to uri="kie:ksession1" />
             <marshal ref="xstream" />
           </policy>
        </route>

        <route>
          <from uri="cxf://bean://soapServer"/>
          <policy ref="kiePolicy">
            <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
            <to uri="kie:ksession1" />
            <marshal ref="xstream" />
          </policy>
        </route>

      </camelContext>

    </beans>

##### 15.3.1.1. RESTful service endpoint creation

In the next XML snippet code we are creating a RESTful (JAX-RS) endpoint bound to /kservice/rest address and using org.drools.jax.rs.CommandExecutorImpl as the service implementer. This class is only used to instantiate the service endpoint because all the internal implementation is managed by Camel, and you can see in the source file that the exposed execute service must be never called.

Also a JAX-RS Provider is provided to determine if the message transported can be processed in this service endpoint.

    <cxf:rsServer id="rsServer"
                  address="/rest"
                  serviceClass="org.kie.jax.rs.CommandExecutorImpl">
         <cxf:providers>
             <bean class="org.kie.jax.rs.CommandMessageBodyReader"/>
         </cxf:providers>
    </cxf:rsServer>

Ideally this configuration doesn’t need to be modified, at least the Service Class and the JAX-RS Provider, but you can add more endpoints associated to different addresses to use them in other Camel Routes.

After all this initial configuration, you can start config your own Knowledge Services.

##### 15.3.1.2. Camel Kie Policy & Context creation

KiePolicy is used to add Drools support in Camel, basically what it does is to add interceptors into the camel route to create Camel Processors on the fly and modify the internal navigation route. If you want to have SOAP support you need to create your custom Drools Policy, but it’s going to be added in the next release.

But you don’t need to know more internal details, only instantiate this bean:

    <bean id="kiePolicy" class="org.kie.camel.component.KiePolicy" />

The next is create the camel route that will have the responsibility to execute the commands sent through JAX-RS. Basically we create a route definition associated with the JAX-RS definition as the data input, the camel policy to be used and inside the “execution route” or ProcessorDefinitions. As you can see, we set XStream as the marshaller/unmarshaller and the drools execution route definition

    <camelContext id="camel" xmlns="http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring">
       <route>
          <from uri="cxfrs://bean://rsServer"/>
          <policy ref="kiePolicy">
            <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
            <to uri="kie:ksession1" />
            <marshal ref="xstream" />
          </policy>
       </route>
       <route>
         <from uri="cxf://bean://soapServer"/>
         <policy ref="kiePolicy">
           <unmarshal ref="xstream" />
           <to uri="kie:ksession1" />
           <marshal ref="xstream" />
         </policy>
       </route>
    </camelContext>

The drools endpoint creation has the next arguments

    <to uri="kie:{1}/{2}" />

1. Execution Node identifier that is registered in the CamelContext

2. KIE session identifier that was registered in the Execution Node with identifier {1}

Both parameters are configured in knowledge-services.xml file.

##### 15.3.1.3. Knowledge Services configuration

The next step is create the KIE sessions that you are going to use.

    <beans xmlns="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans"
           xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
           xmlns:kie="http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring"
           xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans http://www.springframework.org/schema/beans/spring-beans-3.0.xsd
                              http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring http://drools.org/schema/kie-spring.xsd">

      <kie:kmodule id="drools-camel-server">
        <kie:kbase name="kbase1" packages="org.drools.server">
          <kie:ksession name="ksession1" type="stateless"/>
        </kie:kbase>
      </kie:kmodule>

      <bean id="kiePostProcessor"
                class="org.kie.spring.KModuleBeanFactoryPostProcessor"/>

    </beans>

The execution-node is a context or registered kbases and ksessions, here kbase1 and ksession1 are planed in the node1 context. The kbase itself consists of two knowledge definitions, a DRL and an XSD. The Spring documentation contains a lot more information on configuring these knowledge services.

##### 15.3.1.4. Test

With drools-server war unzipped you should be able to see a test.jsp and run it. This example just executes a simple "echo" type application. It sends a message to the rule server that pre-appends the word "echo" to the front and sends it back. By default the message is "Hello World", different messages can be passed using the url parameter msg - test.jsp?msg="My Custom Message".

Under the hood the jsp invokes the Test.java class, this then calls out to Camel which is where the meet happens. The camel-client.xml defines the client with just a few lines of XML:

    <!-- Leave this, as it's needed to make Camel "drools" aware -->
    <bean id="kiePolicy" class="org.kie.camel.component.KiePolicy" />

    <camelContext id="camel" xmlns="http://camel.apache.org/schema/spring">
      <route>
         <from uri="direct://kservice/rest"/>
         <policy ref="kiePolicy">
           <to uri="cxfrs://http://localhost:8080/drools-server/kservice/rest"/>
         </policy>
      </route>
      <route>
        <from uri="direct://kservice/soap"/>
        <policy ref="kiePolicy">
          <to uri="cxfrs://http://localhost:8080/drools-server/kservice/soap"/>
        </policy>
      </route>
    </camelContext>

"direct://kservice" is just a named hook, allowing Java to grab a reference and push data into it. In this example the data is already in XML, so we don’t need to add any `DataFormat`s to do the marshalling. The KiePolicy adds some smarts to the route and you’ll see it used on the server side too. If JAXB or XStream were used, it would inject custom paths and converters, it can also set the ClassLoader too on the server side, on the client side it automatically unwraps the Response object.

The rule itself can be found here: test.drl. Notice the type Message is declared part of the DRL and is thus not present on the Classpath.

    declare Message
       text : String
    end

    rule "echo" dialect "mvel"
    when
       $m : Message();
    then
       $m.text = "echo:" + $m.text;
    end

# Business Central

Business Central in Drools is built with the UberFire framework and uses the Guvnor plugin. Drools provides an additional rich set of plugins for rule-authoring metaphors.

## 16. Business Central (General)

### 16.1. Installation

#### 16.1.1. War installation

Use the `war` from the Business Central distribution zip that corresponds to your application server. The differences between these `war` files are mainly superficial. For example, some JARs might be excluded if the application server already supplies them.

- `eap7`: tailored for Red Hat JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 7

- `wildfly14`: tailored for Wildfly 14

#### 16.1.2. Business Central data

Business Central stores its data, by default in the directory `$WORKING_DIRECTORY/.niogit`, for example `wildfly-14.0.1.Final/bin/.niogit`, but it can be overridden with the system property`-Dorg.uberfire.nio.git.dir`.

| In production, make sure to back up the Business Central data directory.

#### 16.1.3. System properties

Here’s a list of all system properties:

- `org.kie.workbench.profile`: Selects the Business Central profile. Possible values are `FULL` or `PLANNER_AND_RULES`. A prefix `FULL_` will set the profile and hide the profile preferences from the admin preferences. Default: `FULL`.

- `kie.maven.offline.force`: Forces Maven to behave as offline. If true, disable online dependency resolution. Default: false.

  | Use this property for Business Central only. If you share a runtime environment with any other component, isolate the configuration and apply it only to Business Central.

- `org.appformer.m2repo.url`: Location of the default Maven repository Business Central uses when looking for dependencies. Usually this points to the Maven repository inside the Workbench for example `http://localhost:8080/business-central/maven2`. Please set this before starting up the Workbench. Default: File path to the inner m2 repository.

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.dir`: Location of the directory `.niogit`. Default: working directory

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.dirname`: Name of the git directory. Default: `.niogit`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.proxy.ssh.over.http`: Defines that SSH should use an HTTP Proxy. Default: `false`

- `http.proxyHost`: Defines the host name of the HTTP Proxy. Default: `null`

- `http.proxyPort`: Defines the host port (integer value) of the HTTP Proxy. Default: `null`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.proxy.ssh.over.https`: Defines that SSH should use an HTTPS Proxy. Default: `false`

- `https.proxyHost`: Defines the host name of the HTTPS Proxy. Default: `null`

- `https.proxyPort`: Defines the host port (integer value) of the HTTPS Proxy. Default: `null`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.http.enabled`: Enables or disables the HTTP daemon. Default: `true`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.http.host`: If the HTTP daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the host identifier. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTP. The HTTP still relies on the servlet container. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.http.hostname`: If the HTTP daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the host name identifier. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTP. The HTTP still relies on the servlet container. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.http.port`: If the HTTP daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the port number. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTP. The HTTP still relies on the servlet container. Default: `8080`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.https.enabled`: Enables or disables the HTTPS daemon. Default: `false`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.https.host`: If the HTTPS daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the host identifier. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTPS. The HTTPS still relies on the servlet container. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.https.hostname`: If the HTTPS daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the host name identifier. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTPS. The HTTPS still relies on the servlet container. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.https.port`: If the HTTPS daemon is enabled, it uses this property as the port number. This is an informative property that is used to display how to access the Git repository over HTTPS. The HTTPS still relies on the servlet container. Default: `8080`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.enabled`: Enables/disables git daemon. Default: `true`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.host`: If git daemon enabled, uses this property as local host identifier. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.hostname`: If the git daemon is enabled, uses this property as the local host name identifier. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.port`: If git daemon enabled, uses this property as port number. Default: `9418`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.http.sslVerify`: Enables or disables SSL certificate checking for Git repositories. Default: `true`

  | If the default or assigned port is already in use, a new port is automatically selected. Ensure that the ports are available and check the log for more information.

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.enabled`: Enables/disables ssh daemon. Default: `true`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.host`: If ssh daemon enabled, uses this property as local host identifier. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.hostname`: If the SSH daemon is enabled, uses this property as local host name identifier. Default: `localhost`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.port`: If ssh daemon enabled, uses this property as port number. Default: `8001`

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.ciphers`: A comma-separated string of ciphers. The available ciphers are `aes128-ctr`, `aes192-ctr`, `aes256-ctr`, `arcfour128`, `arcfour256`, `aes192-cbc`, `aes256-cbc`. If the property is not used, all available ciphers are loaded.

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.macs`: A comma-separated string of message authentication codes (MACs). The available MACs are `hmac-md5`, `hmac-md5-96`, `hmac-sha1`, `hmac-sha1-96`, `hmac-sha2-256`, `hmac-sha2-512`. If the property is not used, all available MACs are loaded.

  | If the default or assigned port is already in use, a new port is automatically selected. Ensure that the ports are available and check the log for more information.

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.cert.dir`: Location of the directory `.security` where local certificates will be stored. Default: working directory

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.passphrase`: Passphrase to access your Operating Systems public keystore when cloning `git` repositories with `scp` style URLs; e.g. `git@github.com:user/repository.git`.

- `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.algorithm`: Algorithm used by SSH. Default: `DSA`

  | If you plan to use RSA or any algorithm other than DSA, make sure you setup properly your Application Server to use Bouncy Castle JCE library.

- `appformer.ssh.keystore`: Defines the custom SSH keystore to be used with Business Central by specifying a class name. If the property is not available the default SSH keystore is used.

- `appformer.ssh.keys.storage.folder`: When using the default SSH keystore, this parameter defines the storage folder for the user’s SSH public keys. If the property is not available the keys are stored in the Workbench `.security` folder.

- `org.uberfire.metadata.index.dir`: Place where Lucene `.index` folder will be stored. Default: working directory

- `org.uberfire.ldap.regex.role_mapper`: Regex pattern used to map LDAP principal names to application role name. Note that the variable `role` must be part of the pattern as it is substited by the application role name when matching a principal value to role name. Default: Not used.

- `org.uberfire.sys.repo.monitor.disabled`: Disable configuration monitor (do not disable unless you know what you’re doing). Default: `false`

- `org.uberfire.secure.key`: Secret password used by password encryption. Default: `org.uberfire.admin`

- `org.uberfire.secure.alg`: Crypto algorithm used by password encryption. Default: `PBEWithMD5AndDES`

- `org.uberfire.domain`: security-domain name used by uberfire. Default: `ApplicationRealm`

- `appformer.experimental.features`: enables the Experimental Features Framework

- `org.guvnor.m2repo.dir`: Place where Maven repository folder will be stored. Default: working-directory/repositories/kie

- `org.guvnor.project.gav.check.disabled`: Disable GAV checks. Default: `false`

- `org.kie.demo`: Enables external clone of a demo application from GitHub.

- `org.kie.build.disable-project-explorer`: Disable automatic build of selected Project in Project Explorer. Default: `false`

- `org.kie.verification.disable-dtable-realtime-verification`: Disables the realtime validation and verification of decision tables. Default: `false`

- `org.kie.workbench.controller`: URL for connecting with a Drools controller, for example: `ws://localhost:8080/kie-server-controller/websocket/controller`.

- `org.uberfire.gzip.enable`: Enables or disables Gzip compression on GzipFilter. Default: `true`

Only Web Socket protocol is supported for connecting with a headless Drools controller. When specifying this property, Business Central will automatically disable all the features related to running the embedded Drools controller.

- `org.kie.workbench.controller.user`: User name for connecting with a Drools controller. Default: `kieserver`

- `org.kie.workbench.controller.pwd`: Password for connecting with a Drools controller. Default: `kieserver1!`

- `org.kie.workbench.controller.token`: Token string for connecting with a Drools controller.

Please refer to Using token based authentication for more details about how to use token based authentication.

- `kie.keystore.keyStoreURL`: URL to a keystore which should be used for connecting with a headless Drools controller.

- `kie.keystore.keyStorePwd`: Password to a keystore.

- `kie.keystore.key.ctrl.alias`: Alias of the key where password is stored.

- `kie.keystore.key.ctrl.pwd`: Password of an alias with stored password.

Please refer to Securing password using key store for more details about how to use a key store for securing your passwords.

- `org.jbpm.wb.forms.renderer.ext`: Switch form rendering between Business Central and Kie Server rendered forms. By default, form rendering is done by Business Central. Default: `false`.

- `org.jbpm.wb.forms.renderer.name`: Allows to switch between Business Central or Kie Server rendered forms. Kie server includes two renderers, `bootstrap` and `patternfly` in addition to the default renderer, `workbench`. Default: `workbench`.

To change one of these system properties in a WildFly or JBoss EAP cluster:

1. Edit the file `$JBOSS_HOME/domain/configuration/host.xml`.

2. Locate the XML elements `server` that belong to the `main-server-group` and add a system property, for example:

       <system-properties>
         <property name="org.uberfire.nio.git.dir" value="..." boot-time="false"/>
         ...
       </system-properties>

#### 16.1.4. Trouble shooting

##### 16.1.4.1. Loading.. does not disappear and Business Central fails to show

There have been reports that Firewalls in between the server and the browser can interfere with Server Sent Events (SSE) used by Business Central.

The issue results in the "Loading…​" spinner remaining visible and Business Central failing to materialize.

The workaround is to disable the Business Central’s use of Server Sent Events by adding file `/WEB-INF/classes/ErraiService.properties` to the exploded WAR containing the value `errai.bus.enable_sse_support=false`. Re-package the WAR and re-deploy.

Some Users have also reported disabling Server Sent Events does not resolve the issue. The solution found to work is to configure the JVM to use a different Entropy Gathering Device on Linux for `SecureRandom`. This can be configured by setting System Property `java.security.egd` to `file:/dev/./urandom`. See this Stack Overflow post for details.

Please note however this affects the JVM’s random number generation and may present other challenges where strong cryptography is required. Configure with caution.

##### 16.1.4.2. Not able to clone Business Central Git repository using ssh protocol.

Git clients using ssh to interact with the Git server that is bundled with Business Central are authenticated and authorized to perform git commands by the security API that is part of the Uberfire backend server. When using an LDAP security realm, some git clients were not being authorized as expected. This was due to the fact that for non-web clients such as Git via ssh, the principal (i.e., user or group) name assigned to a user by the application server’s user registry is the more complex DN associated to that principal by LDAP. The logic of the Uberfire backend server looked for on exact match of roles allowed with the principal name returned and therefore failed.

It is now possible to control the role-principal matching via the system property

    org.uberfire.ldap.regex.role_mapper

which takes as its value a Regex pattern to be applied when matching LDAP principal to role names. The pattern must contain the literal word variable 'role'. During authorization the variable is replaced by each of the allow application roles. If the pattern is matched the role is added to the user.

For instance, if the DN for the admin group in LDAP is

    DN: cn=admin,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com

and its intended role is admin, then setting `org.uberfire.ldap.regex.role_mapper` with value

    cn[\\ ]*=[\\ ]*role

will find a match on role 'admin'.

### 16.2. Quick Start

These steps help you get started with minimum of effort.

They should not be a substitute for reading the documentation in full.

#### 16.2.1. Importing examples

Import Examples - Quick install examples

If Business Central is empty you are shown an empty Space page. Clicking "Try Samples" button below will show the examples that are available.

Once "Try Samples" page opens, you can select one or more examples and click "Ok".

If Business Central already contains Projects the examples can be imported with the "Try Samples" button found from the menu.

#### 16.2.2. Add Project

Alternatively, to importing an example, a new empty project can be created from the Space page with "Add Project".

Figure 140. New Project button

Give the Project a name and optional description.

Figure 141. Giving Project a name

#### 16.2.3. Define Data Model

After a Project has been created you need to define Types to be used by your rules.

Select "Data Object" from the "Add Asset" menu.

| You can also use types contained in existing JARs. Please consult the full documentation for details.

Figure 142. Creating "Data Object"

Set the name and select a package for the new type.

Figure 143. Creating a new type

Click "+ add field" button and set a field name and type and click on "Create" to create a field for the type.

Figure 144. Click "Create" and add the field

Click "Save" to update the model.

Figure 145. Clicking "Save"

#### 16.2.4. Define Rule

Select "DRL file" (for example) from the "Add Asset" menu.

Figure 146. Selecting "DRL file" from the "Add Asset" menu

Enter a file name for the new rule.

| Make sure you select the same package as the rule had. It is possible to have rules and data models in different packages, but let’s keep things simple for demo purposes.

Figure 147. Entering a file name for rule

Enter a definition for the rule.

The definition process differs from asset type to asset type.

The full documentation has details about the different editors.

Figure 148. Defining a rule

Once the rule has been defined it will need to be saved in the same way we saved the model.

#### 16.2.5. Build and Deploy

Once rules have been defined within a project; the project can be built and deployed to the Business Central’s Maven Artifact Repository.

To build a project select the "Build & Deploy" from the Project Authoring.

Figure 149. Building a project

Click "Build & Deploy" to build the project and deploy it to the Business Central’s Maven Artifact Repository.

When you select Build & Deploy Business Central will deploy to any repositories defined in the Dependency Management section of the pom in your Business Central project. You can edit the pom.xml file associated with your Business Central project under the Repository View of the project explorer. Details on dependency management in maven can be found here : http://maven.apache.org/guides/introduction/introduction-to-dependency-mechanism.html

If there are errors during the build process they will be reported in the "Messages" panel.

Now the project has been built and deployed; it can be referenced from your own projects as any other Maven Artifact.

The full documentation contains details about integrating projects with your own applications.

### 16.3. Configuration

#### 16.3.1. Basic user management

Business Central authenticates its users against the application server’s authentication and authorization (JAAS).

On JBoss EAP and WildFly, add a user with the script `$JBOSS_HOME/bin/add-user.sh` (or `.bat`):

    $ ./add-user.sh
    // Type: Application User
    // Realm: empty (defaults to ApplicationRealm)
    // Role: admin

There is no need to restart the application server.

#### 16.3.2. Roles

Business Central uses the following roles:

- admin

- analyst

- developer

- manager

- user

##### 16.3.2.1. Admin

Administrates the BPMS system.

- Manages users

- Manages VFS Repositories

- Has full access to make any changes necessary

##### 16.3.2.2. Developer

Developer can do almost everything admin can do, except clone repositories.

- Manages rules, models, process flows, forms and dashboards

- Manages the asset repository

- Can create, build and deploy projects

- Can use the JBDS connection to view processes

##### 16.3.2.3. Analyst

Analyst is a weaker version of developer and does not have access to the asset repository or the ability to deploy projects.

##### 16.3.2.4. Business user

Daily user of the system to take actions on business tasks that are required for the processes to continue forward. Works primarily with the task lists.

- Does process management

- Handles tasks and dashboards

##### 16.3.2.5. Manager/Viewer-only User

Viewer of the system that is interested in statistics around the business processes and their performance, business indicators, and other reporting of the system and people who interact with the system.

- Only has access to dashboards

### 16.4. Introduction

#### 16.4.1. Log in and log out

Create a user with the role `admin` and log in with those credentials.

After successfully logging in, the account username is displayed at the top right. Click on it to review the roles of the current account.

#### 16.4.2. Home screen

After logging in, the home screen shows. The actual content of the home screen depends on the Business Central variant (Drools, jBPM, …​).

#### 16.4.3. Business Central overview

Business Central is structured with Spaces and Projects:

##### 16.4.3.1. Space

Spaces are useful to model departments and divisions.

A Space can hold multiple Projects.

##### 16.4.3.2. Project

Projects are the place where assets are stored and each project belongs to a single Space.

Projects are in fact a Virtual File System based storage, that by default uses GIT as backend. Such setup allows Business Central to work with multiple backends and, in the same time, take full advantage of backend specifics features like in GIT case versioning, branching and even external access.

A new Project can be created from scratch or cloned from an existing repository.

One of the biggest advantage of using GIT as backend is the ability to clone a repository from external and use your preferred tools to edit and build your assets.

| Never clone your repositories directly from .niogit directory.

#### 16.4.4. Business Central user interface concepts

Business Central consists of different logical entities:

- Part

  A Part is a screen or editor with which the user can interact to perform operations.

  Example Parts are "Project Explorer", "Project Editor", "Guided Rule Editor" etc.

- Page

  A perspective is a logical grouping of related Panels and Parts. A perspective is usually named as page, since it is a term far more familiar to end users whereas a perspective is more developer oriented. Notice however, Business Central supports both developer created pages and those created by end users from the page builder (aka Content Management) tooling but, generally speaking, page is used to refer both.

  The user can switch between pages by clicking on one of the top-level menu items; such as "Home", "Authoring", "Deploy" etc.

### 16.5. Changing the layout

#### 16.5.1. Resizing

Move the mouse pointer over the panel splitter (a grey horizontal or vertical line in between panels).

The cursor will by changing indicate it is positioned correctly over the splitter. Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the splitter to the required position; then release the left mouse button.

### 16.6. Authoring (General)

#### 16.6.1. Artifact Repository

Projects often need external artifacts in their classpath in order to build, for example a domain model JARs. The artifact repository holds those artifacts.

The Artifact Repository is a full blown Maven repository. It follows the semantics of a Maven remote repository: all snapshots are timestamped. But it is often stored on the local hard drive.

By default the artifact repository is stored under `$WORKING_DIRECTORY/repositories/kie`, but it can be overridden with the system property`-Dorg.guvnor.m2repo.dir`. There is only 1 Maven repository per installation.

The Artifact Repository screen shows a list of the artifacts in the Maven repository:

To add a new artifact to that Maven repository, either:

- Use the upload button and select a JAR. If the JAR contains a POM file under `META-INF/maven` (which every JAR build by Maven has), no further information is needed. Otherwise, a groupId, artifactId and version need be given too.

- Using Maven, `mvn deploy` to that Maven repository. Refresh the list to make it show up.

| This remote Maven repository is relatively simple. It does not support proxying, mirroring, …​ like Nexus or Archiva.

#### 16.6.2. Asset Editor

The Asset Editor is the principle component of the Business Central user interface. It consists of two main views Editor and Overview.

- The views

  Figure 150. The Asset Editor - Editor tab

  - A : The editing area - exactly what form the editor takes depends on the Asset type. An asset can only be edited by one user at a time to avoid conflicts. When a user begins to edit an asset, a lock will automatically be acquired. This is indicated by a lock symbol appearing on the asset title bar as well as in the project explorer view (see Project Explorer for details). If a user starts editing an already locked asset a pop-up notification will appear to inform the user that the asset can’t currently be edited, as it is being worked on by another user. Changes will be prevented until the editing user saves or closes the asset, or logs out of Business Central. Session timeouts will also cause locks to be released. Every user further has the option to force a lock release, if required (see the Metadata section below).

  - B : This menu bar contains various actions for the Asset; such as Save, Rename, Copy etc. Note that saving, renaming and deleting are deactivated if the asset is locked by a different user.

  - C : Different views for asset content or asset information.

    - Editor shows the main editor for the asset

    - Overview contains the metadata and conversation views for this editor. Explained in more detail below.

    - Source shows the asset in plain DRL. Note: This tab is only visible if the asset content can be generated into DRL.

    - Data Objects contains the model available for authoring. By default only Data Objects that reside within the same package as the asset are available for authoring. Data Objects outside of this package can be imported to become available for authoring the asset.

  Figure 151. The Asset Editor - Data Objects tab

- Overview

  - A : General information about the asset and the asset’s description.

    "Type:" The format name of the type of Asset.

    "Description:" Description for the asset.

    "Used in projects:" Names the projects where this rule is used.

    "Last Modified:" Who made the last change and when.

    "Created on:" Who created the asset and when.

  - B : Version history for the asset. Selecting a version loads the selected version into this editor.

  - C : Meta data (from the "Dublin Core" standard)

  - D : Comments regarding the development of the Asset can be recorded here.

Figure 152. The Asset Editor - Overview tab

- Metadata

  - A : Meta data:-

    "Tags:" A tagging system for grouping the assets.

    "Note:" A comment made when the Asset was last updated (i.e. why a change was made)

    "URI:" URI to the asset inside the Git repository.

    "Subject/Type/External link/Source" : Other miscellaneous meta data for the Asset.

    "Lock status" : Shows the lock status of the asset and, if locked, allows to force unlocking the asset.

Figure 153. The Metadata tab

- Locking

  Business Central supports pessimistic locking of assets. When one User starts editing an asset it is locked to change by other Users. The lock is held until a period of inactivity lapses, the Editor is closed or the application stopped and restarted. Locks can also be forcibly removed on the MetaData section of the Overview tab.

  A "padlock" icon is shown in the Editor’s title bar and beside the asset in the Project Explorer when an asset is locked.

  Figure 154. The Asset Editor - Locked assets cannot be edited by other users

#### 16.6.3. Tags Editor

Tags allow assets to be labelled with any number of tags that you define. These tags can be used to filter assets on the Project Explorer enabling "Tag filtering".

##### 16.6.3.1. Creating Tags

To create tags you simply have to write them on the Tags input and press the "Add new Tag/s" button. The Tag Editor allows creating tags one by one or writing more than one separated with a white space.

Figure 155. Creating Tags

Once you created new Tags they will appear over the Editor allowing you to remove them by pressing on them if you want.

Figure 156. Existing Tags

#### 16.6.4. Project Explorer

The Project Explorer provides the ability to browse files inside the current Project. The Project Explorer can be accessed from the left side when an Asset Editor is open.

##### 16.6.4.1. Initial view

If a file is currently being edited by another user, a lock symbol will be displayed in front of the file name. The symbol is blue in case the lock is owned by the currently authenticated user, otherwise black. Moving the mouse pointer over the lock symbol will display a tooltip providing the name of the user who is currently editing the file (and therefore owning the lock). To learn more about locking see Asset Editor for details.

Figure 157. Expanded asset group

##### 16.6.4.2. Different views

Project Explorer supports multiple views.

- Project View

  A simplified view of the underlying project structure. Certain system files are hidden from view.

- Repository View

  A complete view of the underlying project structure including all files; either user-defined or system generated.

Views can be selected by clicking on the icon within the Project Explorer, as shown below.

Both Project and Repository Views can be further refined by selecting either "Show as Folders" or "Show as Links".

Figure 158. Switching view

###### Repository View examples

Figure 159. Repository View - Folders
Figure 160. Repository View - Links

##### 16.6.4.3. Download Project or Repository

Download Download and Download Repository make it possible to download the project or repository as a zip file.

Figure 161. Repository and Project Downloads

##### 16.6.4.4. Filtering by Tag

To make easy view the elements on packages that contain a lot of assets, is possible to enabling the Tag filter, whichs allows you to filter the assets by their tags.

To see how to add tags to an asset look at: Tags Editor

Figure 162. Enabling Filter by Tag
Figure 163. Filter by Tag
Figure 164. Filtering by Tag

##### 16.6.4.5. Copy, Rename, Delete and Download Actions

Copy, rename and delete actions are available on Links mode, for packages in of Project View and for files and directories in Repository View. Download action is available for directories. Download option downloads the selected the selected directory as a zip file.

- A : Copy

- B : Rename

- C : Delete

- D : Download

Figure 165. Project View - Package actions

| Business Central roadmap includes a refactoring and an impact analyses tools, but currenctly doesn’t have it. Until both tools are provided make sure that your changes (copy/rename/delete) on packages, files or directories doesn’t have a major impact on your project. In cases that your change had an unexcepcted impact, Business Central enables you to restore your repository using the Repository editor.

| Files locked by other users as well as directories that contain such files cannot be renamed or deleted until the corresponding locks are released. If that is the case the rename and delete symbols will be deactivated. To learn more about locking see Asset Editor for details.

#### 16.6.5. Project Editor

The Project Editor screen can be accessed from Project Explorer. Project Editor shows the settings for the currently active project.

Unlike most of the Business Central editors, project editor edits more than one file. Showing everything that is needed for configuring the KIE project in one place.

Figure 166. Project Screen and the different views

##### 16.6.5.1. Build & Deploy

Build & Depoy builds the current project and deploys the KJAR into the Business Central internal Maven repository.

##### 16.6.5.2. Project Settings

Project Settings edits the pom.xml file used by Maven.

###### Project General Settings

General settings provide tools for project name and GAV-data (Group, Artifact, Version). GAV values are used as identifiers to differentiate projects and versions of the same project.

Figure 167. Project Settings

###### Dependencies

The project may have any number of either internal or external dependencies. Dependency is a project that has been built and deployed to a Maven repository. Internal dependencies are projects built and deployed in the same Business Central as the project. External dependencies are retrieved from repositories outside of the current Business Central. Each dependency uses the GAV-values to specify the project name and version that is used by the project.

Figure 168. Dependencies
Package Name White List

Classes and declared types in white listed packages show up as Data Objects that can be imported in assets. The full list is stored in package-name-white-list file that is stored in each project root.

Package white list has three modes:

- All packages included: Every package defined in this jar is white listed.

- Packages not included: None of the packages listed in this jar are white listed.

- Some packages included: Only part of the packages in the jar are white listed.

###### Metadata

Metadata for the pom.xml file.

##### 16.6.5.3. KIE base Settings

KIE base Settings edits the kmodule.xml file used by Drools.

Figure 169. KIE base Settings

| For more information about the KIE base properties, check the Drools Expert documentation for kmodule.xml.

###### KIE bases and sessions

KIE bases and sessions lists the KIE bases and the KIE sessions specified for the project.

KIE base list

Lists all the KIE bases by name. Only one KIE base can be set as default.

KIE base properties

KIE base can include other KIE bases. The models, rules and any other content in the included KIE base will be visible and usable by the currently selected KIE base.

Rules and models are stored in packages. The packages property specifies what packages are included into this KIE base.

Equals behavior is explained in the Drools Expert part of the documentation.

Event processing mode is explained in the Drools Fusion part of the documentation.

KIE sessions

The table lists all the KIE sessions in the selected KIE base. There can be only one default of each type. The types are stateless and stateful. Clicking the pen-icon opens a popup that shows more properties for the KIE session.

###### Metadata

Metadata for the kmodule.xml

##### 16.6.5.4. Imports

Settings edits the `project.imports` file used by the Business Central editors.

Figure 170. Imports

###### External Data Objects

Data Objects provided by the Java Runtime environment may need to be registered to be available to rule authoring where such Data Objects are not implicitly available as part of an existing Data Object defined within the Business Central or a Project dependency. For example an Author may want to define a rule that checks for `java.util.ArrayList` in Working Memory. If a domain Data Object has a field of type `java.util.ArrayList` there is no need create a registraton.

###### Metadata

Metadata for the project.imports file.

##### 16.6.5.5. Duplicate GAV detection

When performing any of the following operations a check is now made against all Maven Repositories, resolved for the Project, for whether the Project’s GroupId, ArtifactId and Version pre-exist. If a clash is found the operation is prevented; although this can be overridden by Users with the `admin` role.

| The feature can be disabled by setting the System Property `org.guvnor.project.gav.check.disabled` to `true`.

Resolved repositories are those discovered in:-

- The Project’s `POM``<repositories>` section (or any parent `POM`).

- The Project’s `POM``<distributionManagement>` section.

- Maven’s global `settings.xml` configuration file.

Affected operations:-

- Creation of new Managed Repositories.

- Saving a Project defintion with the Project Editor.

- Adding new Modules to a Managed Multi-Module Repository.

- Saving the `pom.xml` file.

- Build & installing a Project with the Project Editor.

- Build & deploying a Project with the Project Editor.

- Asset Management operations building, installing or deloying Projects.

- `REST` operations creating, installing or deploying Projects.

Users with the `Admin` role can override the list of Repositories checked using the "Repositories" settings in the Project Editor.

Figure 171. Project Editor - Viewing resolved Repositories
Figure 172. Project Editor - The list of resolved Repositories
Figure 173. Duplicate GAV detected

#### 16.6.6. Validation

Business Central provides a common and consistent service for users to understand whether files authored within the environment are valid.

##### 16.6.6.1. Problem Panel

The Problems Panel shows real-time validation results of assets within a Project.

When a Project is selected from the Project Explorer the Problems Panel will refresh with validation results of the chosen Project.

When files are created, saved or deleted the Problems Panel content will update to show either new validation errors, or remove existing if a file was deleted.

Figure 174. The Problems Panel

##### 16.6.6.2. On demand validation

It is not always desirable to save a file in order to determine whether it is in a valid state.

All of the file editors provide the ability to validate the content before it is saved.

Clicking on the 'Validate' button shows validation errors, if any.

#### 16.6.7. Data Modeller

##### 16.6.7.1. First steps to create a data model

By default, a data model is always constrained to the context of a project. For the purpose of this tutorial, we will assume that a correctly configured project already exists and the authoring page is open.

To start the creation of a data model inside a project, take the following steps:

1. From the home panel, select the Desing page and select the given project.

   Figure 175. Go to authoring page and select a project

2. Open the Data Modeller tool by clicking on a Data Object file, or using the "Add Asset → Data Object" menu option. Set Data Object name to "PurchaseOrder" and click Ok.

   Figure 176. Click on a Data Object

This will start up the Data Modeller tool, which has the following general aspect:

Figure 177. Data modeller overview

The "Editor" tab is divided into the following sections:

- The new field section is dedicated to the creation of new fields, and is opened when the "add field" button is pressed.

  Figure 178. New field creation

- The Data Object’s "field browser" section displays a list with the data object fields.

  Figure 179. The Data Object’s field browser

- The "Data Object / Field general properties" section. This is the rightmost section of the Data Modeller editor and visualizes the "Data Object" or "Field" general properties, depending on user selection.

  Data Object general properties can be selected by clicking on the Data Object Selector.

  Figure 180. Data Object selector
  Figure 181. Data Object general properties

  Field general properties can be selected by clicking on a field.

Figure 182. Field selector
Figure 183. Field general properties

- On the right side of Business Central a new "Tool Bar" is provided that enables the selection of different context sensitive tool windows that will let the user do domain specific configurations. Currently four tool windows are provided for the following domains "Drools & jBPM", "OptaPlanner", "Persistence" and "Advanced" configurations.

  Figure 184. Data modeller Tool Bar
  Figure 185. Drools & jBPM tool window
  Figure 186. OptaPlanner tool window

  | To see and use the OptaPlanner tool window, the user needs to have the role `plannermgmt`.

  Figure 187. Persistence tool window
  Figure 188. Advanced tool window

The "Source" tab shows an editor that allows the visualization and modification of the generated java code.

- Round trip between the "Editor" and "Source" tabs is possible, and also source code preservation is provided. It means that not matter where the Java code was generated (e.g. Eclipse, Data modeller), the data modeller will only update the necessary code blocks to maintain the model updated.

  Figure 189. Source editor

The "Overview" tab shows the standard metadata and version information as the other workbench editors.

##### 16.6.7.2. Data Objects

A data model consists of data objects which are a logical representation of some real-world data. Such data objects have a fixed set of modeller (or application-owned) properties, such as its internal identifier, a label, description, package etc. Besides those, a data object also has a variable set of user-defined fields, which are an abstraction of a real-world property of the type of data that this logical data object represents.

Creating a data object can be achieved using the Business Central "New Item - Data Object" menu option.

Figure 190. New Data Object menu option

Both resource name and location are mandatory parameters. When the "Ok" button is pressed a new Java file will be created and a new editor instance will be opened for the file edition. The optional "Persistable" attribute will add by default configurations on the data object in order to make it a JPA entity. Use this option if your jBPM project needs to store data object’s information in a data base.

##### 16.6.7.3. Properties & relationships

Once the data object has been created, it now has to be completed by adding user-defined properties to its definition. This can be achieved by pressing the "add field" button. The "New Field" dialog will be opened and the new field can be created by pressing the "Create" button. The "Create and continue" button will also add the new field to the Data Object, but won’t close the dialog. In this way multiple fields can be created avoiding the popup opening multiple times. The following fields can (or must) be filled out:

- The field’s internal identifier (mandatory). The value of this field must be unique per data object, i.e. if the proposed identifier already exists within current data object, an error message will be displayed.

- A label (optional): as with the data object definition, the user can define a user-friendly label for the data object field which is about to be created. This has no further implications on how fields from objects of this data object will be treated. If a label is defined, then this is how the field will be displayed throughout the data modeller tool.

- A field type (mandatory): each data object field needs to be assigned with a type.

  This type can be either of the following:

  1. A 'primitive java object' type: these include most of the object equivalents of the standard Java primitive types, such as Boolean, Short, Float, etc, as well as String, Date, BigDecimal and BigInteger.

     Figure 191. Primitive object field types

  2. A 'data object' type: any user defined data object automatically becomes a candidate to be defined as a field type of another data object, thus enabling the creation of relationships between them. A data object field can be created either in 'single' or in 'multiple' form, the latter implying that the field will be defined as a collection of this type, which will be indicated by selecting "List" checkbox.

Figure 192. Data object field types

1. A 'primitive java' type: these include java primitive types byte, short, int, long, float, double, char and boolean.

Figure 193. Primitive field types

When finished introducing the initial information for a new field, clicking the 'Create' button will add the newly created field to the end of the data object’s fields table below:

Figure 194. New field has been created

The new field will also automatically be selected in the data object’s field list, and its properties will be shown in the Field general properties editor. Additionally the field properties will be loaded in the different tool windows, in this way the field will be ready for edition in whatever selected tool window.

At any time, any field (without restrictions) can be deleted from a data object definition by clicking on the corresponding 'x' icon in the data object’s fields table.

##### 16.6.7.4. Additional options

As stated before, both Data Objects as well as Fields require some of their initial properties to be set upon creation. Additionally there are three domains of properties that can be configured for a given Data Object. A domain is basically a set of properties related to a given business area. Current available domains are, "Drools & jJBPM", "Persistence" and the "Advanced" domain. To work on a given domain the user should select the corresponding "Tool window" (see below) on the right side toolbar. Every tool window usually provides two editors, the "Data Object" level editor and the "Field" level editor, that will be shown depending on the last selected item, the Data Object or the Field.

###### Drools & jBPM domain

The Drools & jBPM domain editors manages the set of Data Object or Field properties related to drools applications.

Drools & jBPM object editor

The Drools & jBPM object editor manages the object level drools properties

Figure 195. The data object’s properties

- TypeSafe: this property allows to enable/disable the type safe behaviour for current type. By default all type declarations are compiled with type safety enabled. (See Drools for more information on this matter).

- ClassReactive: this property allows to mark this type to be treated as "Class Reactive" by the Drools engine. (See Drools for more information on this matter).

- PropertyReactive: this property allows to mark this type to be treated as "Property Reactive" by the Drools engine. (See Drools for more information on this matter).

- Role: this property allows to configure how the Drools engine should handle instances of this type: either as regular facts or as events. By default all types are handled as a regular fact, so for the time being the only value that can be set is "Event" to declare that this type should be handled as an event. (See Drools Fusion for more information on this matter).

- Timestamp: this property allows to configure the "timestamp" for an event, by selecting one of his attributes. If set the Drools engine will use the timestamp from the given attribute instead of reading it from the Session Clock. If not, the Drools engine will automatically assign a timestamp to the event. (See Drools Fusion for more information on this matter).

- Duration: this property allows to configure the "duration" for an event, by selecting one of his attributes. If set the Drools engine will use the duration from the given attribute instead of using the default event duration = 0. (See Drools Fusion for more information on this matter).

- Expires: this property allows to configure the "time offset" for an event expiration. If set, this value must be a temporal interval in the form: [d][#h][#m][#s][[ms]] Where [ ] means an optional parameter and # means a numeric value. e.g.: 1d2h, means one day and two hours. (See Drools Fusion for more information on this matter).

- Remotable: If checked this property makes the Data Object available to be used with jBPM remote services as REST, JMS and WS. (See jBPM for more information on this matter).

Drools & jJBPM field editor

The Drools & jBPM object editor manages the field level drools properties

Figure 196. The data object’s field properties

- Equals: checking this property for a Data Object field implies that it will be taken into account, at the code generation level, for the creation of both the equals() and hashCode() methods in the generated Java class. We will explain this in more detail in the following section.

- Position: this field requires a zero or positive integer. When set, this field will be interpreted by the Drools engine as a positional argument (see the section below and also the Drools documentation for more information on this subject).

###### Persistence domain

The Persistence domain editors manages the set of Data Object or Field properties related to persistence.

Persistence domain object editor

Persistence domain object editor manages the object level persistence properties

Figure 197. The data object’s properties

- Persistable: this property allows to configure current Data Object as persistable.

- Table name: this property allows to set a user defined database table name for current Data Object.

Persistence domain field editor

The persistence domain field editor manages the field level persistence properties and is divided in three sections.

Figure 198. Persistence domain field editor sections
Identifier:

A persistable Data Object should have one and only one field defined as the Data Object identifier. The identifier is typically a unique number that distinguishes a given Data Object instance from all other instances of the same class.

- Is Identifier: marks current field as the Data Object identifier. A persistable Data Object should have one and only one field marked as identifier, and it should be a base java type, like String, Integer, Long, etc. A field that references a Data Object, or is a multiple field can not be marked as identifier. And also composite identifiers are not supported in this version. When a persistable Data Object is created an identifier field is created by default with the properly initializations, it’s strongly recommended to use this identifier.

- Generation Strategy: the generation strategy establishes how the identifier values will be automatically generated when the Data Object instances are created and stored in a database. (e.g. by the forms associated to jBPM processes human tasks.) When the by default Identifier field is created, the generation strategy will be also automatically set and it’s strongly recommended to use this configuration.

- Sequence Generator: the generator represents the seed for the values that will be used by the Generation Strategy. When the by default Identifier field is created the Sequence Generator will be also automatically generated and properly configured to be used by the Generation Strategy.

Column Properties:

The column properties section enables the customization of some properties of the database column that will store the field value.

- Column name: optional value that sets the database column name for the given field.

- Unique: When checked the unique property establishes that current field value should be a unique key when stored in the database. (if not set the default value is false)

- Nullable: When checked establishes that current field value can be null when stored in a database. (if not set the default value is true)

- Insertable: When checked establishes that column will be included in SQL INSERT statements generated by the persistence provider. (if not set the default value is true)

- Updatable: When checked establishes that the column will be included SQL UPDATE statements generated by the persistence provider. (if not set the default value is true)

Relationship Properties:

When the field’s type is a Data Object type, or a list of a Data Object type a relationship type should be set in order to let the persistence provider to manage the relation. Fortunately this relation type is automatically set when such kind of fields are added to an already marked as persistable Data Object. The relationship type is set by the following popup.

Figure 199. Relationship configuration popup

- Relationship type: sets the type of relation from one of the following options:

  One to one: typically used for 1:1 relations where "A is related to one instance of B", and B exists only when A exists. e.g. PurchaseOrder → PurchaseOrderHeader (a PurchaseOrderHeader exists only if the PurchaseOrder exists)

  One to many: typically used for 1:N relations where "A is related to N instances of B", and the related instances of B exists only when A exists. e.g. PurchaseOrder → PurchaseOrderLine (a PurchaseOrderLine exists only if the PurchaseOrder exists)

  Many to one: typically used for 1:1 relations where "A is related to one instance of B", and B can exist even without A. e.g. PurchaseOrder → Client (a Client can exist in the database even without an associated PurchaseOrder)

  Many to many: typically used for N:N relations where "A can be related to N instances of B, and B can be related to M instances of A at the same time", and both B an A instances can exits in the database independently of the related instances. e.g. Course → Student. (Course can be related to N Students, and a given Student can attend to M courses)

  When a field of type "Data Object" is added to a given persistable Data Object, the "Many to One" relationship type is generated by default.

  And when a field of type "list of Data Object" is added to a given persistable Data Object , the "One to Many" relationship is generated by default.

- Cascade mode: Defines the set of cascadable operations that are propagated to the associated entity. The value cascade=ALL is equivalent to cascade={PERSIST, MERGE, REMOVE, REFRESH}. e.g. when A → B, and cascade "PERSIST or ALL" is set, if A is saved, then B will be also saved.

  The by default cascade mode created by the data modeller is "ALL" and it’s strongly recommended to use this mode when Data Objects are being used by jBPM processes and forms.

- Fetch mode: Defines how related data will be fetched from database at reading time.

  EAGER: related data will be read at the same time. e.g. If A → B, when A is read from database B will be read at the same time.

  LAZY: reading of related data will be delayed usually to the moment they are required. e.g. If PurchaseOrder → PurchaseOrderLine the lines reading will be postponed until a method "getLines()" is invoked on a PurchaseOrder instance.

  The default fetch mode created by the data modeller is "EAGER" and it’s strongly recommended to use this mode when Data Objects are being used by jBPM processes and forms.

- Optional: establishes if the right side member of a relationship can be null.

- Mapped by: used for reverse relations.

###### Advanced domain

The advanced domain enables the configuration of whatever parameter set by the other domains as well as the adding of arbitrary parameters. As it will be shown in the code generation section every "Data Object / Field" parameter is represented by a java annotation. The advanced mode enables the configuration of this annotations.

Advanced domain Data Object / Field editor.

The advanced domain editor has the same shape for both Data Object and Field.

Figure 200. Advanced domain editor.

The following operations are available

- delete: enables the deletion of a given Data Object or Field annotation.

- clear: clears a given annotation parameter value.

- edit: enables the edition of a given annotation parameter value.

- add annotation: The add annotation button will start a wizard that will let the addition of whatever java annotation available in the project dependencies.

  Add annotation wizard step #1: the first step of the wizard requires the entering of a fully qualified class name of an annotation, and by pressing the "search" button the annotation definition will be loaded into the wizard. Additionally when the annotation definition is loaded, different wizard steps will be created in order to enable the completion of the different annotation parameters. Required parameters will be marked with "*".

  Figure 201. Annotation definition loaded into the wizard.

  Whenever it’s possible the wizard will provide a suitable editor for the given parameters.

  Figure 202. Automatically generated enum values editor for an Enumeration annotation parameter.

  A generic parameter editor will be provided when it’s not possible to calculate a customized editor

  Figure 203. Generic annotation parameter editor

  When all required parameters has been entered and validated, the finish button will be enabled and the wizard can be completed by adding the annotation to the given Data Object or Field.

##### 16.6.7.5. Generate data model code.

The data model in itself is merely a visual tool that allows the user to define high-level data structures, for them to interact with the Drools engine on the one hand, and the jBPM platform on the other. In order for this to become possible, these high-level visual structures have to be transformed into low-level artifacts that can effectively be consumed by these platforms. These artifacts are Java POJOs (Plain Old Java Objects), and they are generated every time the data model is saved, by pressing the "Save" button in the top Data Modeller Menu. Additionally when the user round trip between the "Editor" and "Source" tab, the code is auto generated to maintain the consistency with the Editor view and vice versa.

Figure 204. Save the data model from the top menu

The resulting code is generated according to the following transformation rules:

- The data object’s identifier property will become the Java class’s name. It therefore needs to be a valid Java identifier.

- The data object’s package property becomes the Java class’s package declaration.

- The data object’s superclass property (if present) becomes the Java class’s extension declaration.

- The data object’s label and description properties will translate into the Java annotations "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Label" and "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Description", respectively. These annotations are merely a way of preserving the associated information, and as yet are not processed any further.

- The data object’s role property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Role" Java annotation, that IS interpreted by the application platform, in the sense that it marks this Java class as a Drools Event Fact-Type.

- The data object’s type safe property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.TypeSafe Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s class reactive property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.ClassReactive Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s property reactive property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.PropertyReactive Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s timestamp property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Timestamp Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s duration property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Duration Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s expires property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Expires Java annotation. (see Drools)

- The data object’s remotable property (if present) will be translated into the "@org.kie.api.remote.Remotable Java annotation. (see jBPM)

A standard Java default (or no parameter) constructor is generated, as well as a full parameter constructor, i.e. a constructor that accepts as parameters a value for each of the data object’s user-defined fields.

The data object’s user-defined fields are translated into Java class fields, each one of them with its own getter and setter method, according to the following transformation rules:

- The data object field’s identifier will become the Java field identifier. It therefore needs to be a valid Java identifier.

- The data object field’s type is directly translated into the Java class’s field type. In case the field was declared to be multiple (i.e. 'List'), then the generated field is of the "java.util.List" type.

- The equals property: when it is set for a specific field, then this class property will be annotated with the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Key" annotation, which is interpreted by the Drools engine, and it will 'participate' in the generated equals() method, which overwrites the equals() method of the Object class. The latter implies that if the field is a 'primitive' type, the equals method will simply compares its value with the value of the corresponding field in another instance of the class. If the field is a sub-entity or a collection type, then the equals method will make a method-call to the equals method of the corresponding data object’s Java class, or of the java.util.List standard Java class, respectively.

  If the equals property is checked for ANY of the data object’s user defined fields, then this also implies that in addition to the default generated constructors another constructor is generated, accepting as parameters all of the fields that were marked with Equals. Furthermore, generation of the equals() method also implies that also the Object class’s hashCode() method is overwritten, in such a manner that it will call the hashCode() methods of the corresponding Java class types (be it 'primitive' or user-defined types) for all the fields that were marked with Equals in the Data Model.

- The position property: this field property is automatically set for all user-defined fields, starting from 0, and incrementing by 1 for each subsequent new field. However the user can freely changes the position among the fields. At code generation time this property is translated into the "@org.kie.api.definition.type.Position" annotation, which can be interpreted by the Drools engine. Also, the established property order determines the order of the constructor parameters in the generated Java class.

As an example, the generated Java class code for the Purchase Order data object, corresponding to its definition as shown in the following figure purchase_example.jpg is visualized in the figure at the bottom of this chapter. Note that the two of the data object’s fields, namely 'header' and 'lines' were marked with Equals, and have been assigned with the positions 2 and 1, respectively).

Figure 205. Purchase Order configuration

        package org.jbpm.examples.purchases;

        /**
        * This class was automatically generated by the data modeler tool.
        */
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Label("Purchase Order")
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.TypeSafe(true)
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Role(org.kie.api.definition.type.Role.Type.EVENT)
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Expires("2d")
        @org.kie.api.remote.Remotable
        public class PurchaseOrder implements java.io.Serializable
        {

        static final long serialVersionUID = 1L;

        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Label("Total")
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Position(3)
        private java.lang.Double total;

        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Label("Description")
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Position(0)
        private java.lang.String description;

        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Label("Lines")
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Position(2)
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Key
        private java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> lines;

        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Label("Header")
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Position(1)
        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Key
        private org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader header;

        @org.kie.api.definition.type.Position(4)
        private java.lang.Boolean requiresCFOApproval;

        public PurchaseOrder()
        {
        }

        public java.lang.Double getTotal()
        {
        return this.total;
        }

        public void setTotal(java.lang.Double total)
        {
        this.total = total;
        }

        public java.lang.String getDescription()
        {
        return this.description;
        }

        public void setDescription(java.lang.String description)
        {
        this.description = description;
        }

        public java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> getLines()
        {
        return this.lines;
        }

        public void setLines(java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> lines)
        {
        this.lines = lines;
        }

        public org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader getHeader()
        {
        return this.header;
        }

        public void setHeader(org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader header)
        {
        this.header = header;
        }

        public java.lang.Boolean getRequiresCFOApproval()
        {
        return this.requiresCFOApproval;
        }

        public void setRequiresCFOApproval(java.lang.Boolean requiresCFOApproval)
        {
        this.requiresCFOApproval = requiresCFOApproval;
        }

        public PurchaseOrder(java.lang.Double total, java.lang.String description,
        java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> lines,
        org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader header,
        java.lang.Boolean requiresCFOApproval)
        {
        this.total = total;
        this.description = description;
        this.lines = lines;
        this.header = header;
        this.requiresCFOApproval = requiresCFOApproval;
        }

        public PurchaseOrder(java.lang.String description,
        org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader header,
        java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> lines,
        java.lang.Double total, java.lang.Boolean requiresCFOApproval)
        {
        this.description = description;
        this.header = header;
        this.lines = lines;
        this.total = total;
        this.requiresCFOApproval = requiresCFOApproval;
        }

        public PurchaseOrder(
        java.util.List<org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderLine> lines,
        org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrderHeader header)
        {
        this.lines = lines;
        this.header = header;
        }

        @Override
        public boolean equals(Object o)
        {
        if (this == o)
        return true;
        if (o == null || getClass() != o.getClass())
        return false;
        org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrder that = (org.jbpm.examples.purchases.PurchaseOrder) o;
        if (lines != null ? !lines.equals(that.lines) : that.lines != null)
        return false;
        if (header != null ? !header.equals(that.header) : that.header != null)
        return false;
        return true;
        }

        @Override
        public int hashCode()
        {
        int result = 17;
        result = 31 * result + (lines != null ? lines.hashCode() : 0);
        result = 31 * result + (header != null ? header.hashCode() : 0);
        return result;
        }

        }

##### 16.6.7.6. Using external models

Using an external model means the ability to use a set for already defined POJOs in current project context. In order to make those POJOs available a dependency to the given JAR should be added. Once the dependency has been added the external POJOs can be referenced from current project data model.

There are two ways to add a dependency to an external JAR file:

- Dependency to a JAR file already installed in current local M2 repository (typically associated the user home).

- Dependency to a JAR file installed in current Business Central "Guvnor M2 repository". (internal to the application)

###### Dependency to a JAR file in local M2 repository

To add a dependency to a JAR file in local M2 repository follow this steps.

Open the Project Editor for current project and select the Dependencies view.
Figure 206. Project editor.
Click on the "Add" button to add a new dependency line.
Figure 207. New dependency line.
Complete the GAV for the JAR file already installed in local M2 repository.
Figure 208. Dependency line edition.
Save the project to update its dependencies.

When project is saved the POJOs defined in the external file will be available.

Figure 209. Save project.

###### Dependency to a JAR file in current "Guvnor M2 repository".

To add a dependency to a JAR file in current "Guvnor M2 repository" follow this steps.

Open the Maven Artifact Repository editor.
Figure 210. Guvnor M2 Repository editor.
Browse your local file system and select the JAR file to be uploaded using the Browse button.
Figure 211. File browser.
Upload the file using the Upload button.
Figure 212. File upload success.
Guvnor M2 repository files.

Once the file has been loaded it will be displayed in the repository files list.

Figure 213. Files list.
Provide a GAV for the uploaded file (optional).

If the uploaded file is not a valid Maven JAR (don’t have a pom.xml file) the system will prompt the user in order to provide a GAV for the file to be installed.

Figure 214. Not valid POM.
Figure 215. Enter GAV manually.
Add dependency from repository.

Open the project editor (see bellow) and click on the "Add from repository" button to open the JAR selector to see all the installed JAR files in current "Guvnor M2 repository". When the desired file is selected the project should be saved in order to make the new dependency available.

Figure 216. Select JAR from "Maven Artifact Repository".

###### Using the external objects

When a dependency to an external JAR has been set, the external POJOs can be used in the context of current project data model in the following ways:

- External POJOs can be extended by current model data objects.

- External POJOs can be used as field types for current model data objects.

The following screenshot shows how external objects are prefixed with the string " -ext- " in order to be quickly identified.

Figure 217. Identifying external objects.

##### 16.6.7.7. Roundtrip and concurrency

Current version implements roundtrip and code preservation between Data modeller and Java source code. No matter where the Java code was generated (e.g. Eclipse, Data modeller), the data modeller will only create/delete/update the necessary code elements to maintain the model updated, i.e, fields, getter/setters, constructors, equals method and hashCode method. Also whatever Type or Field annotation not managed by the Data Modeler will be preserved when the Java sources are updated by the Data modeller.

Aside from code preservation, like in the other Business Central editors, concurrent modification scenarios are still possible. Common scenarios are when two different users are updating the model for the same project, e.g. using the data modeller or executing a 'git push command' that modifies project sources.

From an application context’s perspective, we can basically identify two different main scenarios:

###### No changes have been undertaken through the application

In this scenario the application user has basically just been navigating through the data model, without making any changes to it. Meanwhile, another user modifies the data model externally.

In this case, no immediate warning is issued to the application user. However, as soon as the user tries to make any kind of change, such as add or remove data objects or properties, or change any of the existing ones, the following pop-up will be shown:

Figure 218. External changes warning

The user can choose to either:

- Re-open the data model, thus loading any external changes, and then perform the modification he was about to undertake, or

- Ignore any external changes, and go ahead with the modification to the model. In this case, when trying to persist these changes, another pop-up warning will be shown:

  Figure 219. Force save / re-open

  The "Force Save" option will effectively overwrite any external changes, while "Re-open" will discard any local changes and reload the model.

  | "Force Save" overwrites any external changes!

###### Changes have been undertaken through the application

The application user has made changes to the data model. Meanwhile, another user simultaneously modifies the data model from outside the application context.

In this alternative scenario, immediately after the external user commits his changes to the asset repository (or e.g. saves the model with the data modeller in a different session), a warning is issued to the application user:

Figure 220. External changes warning

As with the previous scenario, the user can choose to either:

- Re-open the data model, thus losing any modifications that where made through the application, or

- Ignore any external changes, and continue working on the model.

  One of the following possibilities can now occur: ** The user tries to persist the changes he made to the model by clicking the "Save" button in the data modeller top level menu. This leads to the following warning message:

  +

  Figure 221. Force save / re-open

  The "Force Save" option will effectively overwrite any external changes, while "Re-open" will discard any local changes and reload the model.

#### 16.6.8. Data Sets

A data set is basically a set of columns populated with some rows, a matrix of data composed of timestamps, texts and numbers. A data set can be stored in different systems: a database, an excel file, in memory or in a lot of other different systems. On the other hand, a data set definition tells Business Central modules how such data can be accessed, read and parsed.

Notice, it’s very important to make crystal clear the difference between a data set and its definition since Business Central does not take care of storing any data, it just provides an standard way to define access to those data sets regardless where the data is stored.

Let’s take for instance the data stored in a remote database. A valid data set could be, for example, an entire database table or the result of an SQL query. In both cases, the database will return a bunch of columns and rows. Now, imagine we want to get access to such data to feed some charts in a new Business Central page. First thing is to create and register a data set definition in order to indicate the following:

- where the data set is stored,

- how can be accessed, read and parsed and

- what columns contains and of which type.

This chapter introduces the available Business Central tools for registering and handling data set definitions and how this definitions can be consumed in other Business Central modules like, for instance, the Page Editor.

| For simplicity sake we will be using the term data set to refer to the actual data set definitions as Data set and Data set definition can be considered synonyms under the data set authoring context.

##### 16.6.8.1. Data Set Authoring Page

Everything related to the authoring of data sets can be found under the Data Set Authoring page which is accessible from the following top level menu entry: Extensions>Data Sets, as shown in the following screenshot.

Figure 222. Data Set Authoring Page

The center panel, shows a welcome screen, whilst the left panel contains the Data Set Explorer listing all the data sets available

| This page is only intended to Administrator users, since defining data sets can be considered a low level task.

##### 16.6.8.2. Data Set Explorer

The Data Set Explorer list the data sets present in the system. Every time the user clicks on the data set it shows a brief summary alongside the following information:

Figure 223. Data Set Explorer

- (1) A button for creating a new Data set

- (2) The list of currently available Data sets

- (3) An icon that represents the Data set’s provider type (Bean, SQL, CSV, etc)

- (4) Details of current cache and refresh policy status

- (5) Details of current size on backend (unit as rows) and current size on client side (unit in bytes)

- (6) The button for editing the Data set. Once clicked the Data set editor screen is opened on the center panel

The next sections explains how to create, edit and fine tune data set definitions.

##### 16.6.8.3. Data Set Creation

Clicking on the New Data Set button opens a new screen from which the user is able to create a new data set definition in three steps:

- Provider type selection

  Specify the kind of the remote storage system (BEAN, SQL, CSV, ElasticSearch)

- Provider configuration

  Specify the attributes for being able to look up data from the remote system. The configuration varies depending on the data provider type selected.

- Data set columns & filter

  Live data preview, column types and initial filter configuration.

###### Step 1: Provider type selection

Allows the user’s specify the type of data provider of the data set being created.

This screen lists all the current available data provider types and helper popovers with descriptions. Each data provider is represented with a descriptive image:

Figure 224. Provider type selection

Four types are currently supported:

- Bean (Java class) - To generate a data set directly from Java

- SQL - For getting data from any ANSI-SQL compliant database

- CSV - To upload the contents of a remote or local CSV file

- Elastic Search - To query and get documents stored on Elastic Search nodes as data sets

Once a type is selected, click on Next button to continue with the next workflow step.

###### Step 2: Configuration

Figure 225. CSV Configuration

The provider type selected in the previous step will determine which configuration settings the system asks for.

Figure 226. Configuration screen per data set type

| The UUID attribute is a read only field as it’s generated by the system. It’s only intended for usage in API calls or specific operations.

###### Step 3: Data set columns and preview

After clicking on the Test button (see previous step), the system executes a data set lookup test call in order to check if the remote system is up and the data is available. If everything goes ok the user will see the following screen:

Figure 227. Data set preview

This screen shows a live data preview along with the columns the user wants to be part of the resulting data set. The user can also navigate through the data and apply some changes to the data set structure. Once finished, we can click on the Save button in order to register the new data set definition.

We can also change the configuration settings at any time just by going back to the configuration tab. We can repeat the Configuration>Test>Preview cycle as may times as needed until we consider it’s ready to be saved.

Columns

In the Columns tab area the user can select what columns are part of the resulting data set definition.

Figure 228. Data set columns

- (1) To add or remove columns. Select only those columns you want to be part of the resulting data set

- (2) Use the drop down image selector to change the column type

A data set may only contain columns of any of the following 4 types:

- Label - For text values supporting group operations (similar to the SQL "group by" operator) which means you can perform data lookup calls and get one row per distinct value.

- Text - For text values NOT supporting group operations. Typically for modeling large text columns such as abstracts, descriptions and the like.

- Number - For numeric values. It does support aggregation functions on data lookup calls: sum, min, max, average, count, disctinct.

- Date - For date or timestamp values. It does support time based group operations by different time intervals: minute, hour, day, month, year, …​

No matter which remote system you want to retrieve data from, the resulting data set will always return a set of columns of one of the four types above. There exists, by default, a mapping between the remote system column types and the data set types. The user is able to modify the type for some columns, depending on the data provider and the column type of the remote system. The system supports the following changes to column types:

- Label <> Text - Useful when we want to enable/disable the categorization (grouping) for the target column. For instance, imagine a database table called "document" containing a large text column called "abstract". As we do not want the system to treat such column as a "label" we might change its column type to "text". Doing so, we are optimizing the way the system handles the data set and

- Number <> Label - Useful when we want to treat numeric columns as labels. This can be used for instance to indicate that a given numeric column is not a numeric value that can be used in aggregation functions. Despite its values are stored as numbers we want to handle the column as a "label". One example of such columns are: an item’s code, an appraisal id., …​

| BEAN data sets do not support changing column types as it’s up to the developer to decide which are the concrete types for each column.

Filter

A data set definition may define a filter. The goal of the filter is to leave out rows the user does not consider necessary. The filter feature works on any data provider type and it lets the user to apply filter operations on any of the data set columns available.

Figure 229. Data set filter

While adding or removing filter conditions and operations, the preview table on central area is updated with live data that reflects the current filter status.

There exists two strategies for filtering data sets and it’s also important to note that choosing between the two have important implications. Imagine a dashboard with some charts feeding from a expense reports data set where such data set is built on top of an SQL table. Imagine also we only want to retrieve the expense reports from the "London" office. You may define a data set containing the filter "office=London" and then having several charts feeding from such data set. This is the recommended approach. Another option is to define a data set with no initial filter and then let the individual charts to specify their own filter. It’s up to the user to decide on the best approach.

Depending on the case it might be better to define the filter at a data set level for reusing across other modules. The decision may also have impact on the performance since a filtered cached data set will have far better performance than a lot of individual non-cached data set lookup requests. (See the next section for more information about caching data sets).

| Notice, for SQL data sets, the user can use both the filter feature introduced or, alternatively, just add custom filter criteria to the SQL sentence. Although, the first approach is more appropriated for non technical users since they might not have the required SQL language skills.

##### 16.6.8.4. Data set editor

To edit an existing data set definition go the data set explorer, expand the desired data set definition and click on the Edit button. This will cause a new editor panel to be opened and placed on the center of the screen, as shown in the next screenshot:

Figure 230. Data set definition editor
Figure 231. Editor selector

- Save - To validate the current changes and store the data set definition.

- Delete - To remove permanently from storage the data set definition. Any client module referencing the data set may be affected.

- Validate - To check that all the required parameters exists and are correct, as well as to validate the data set can be retrieved with no issues.

- Copy - To create a brand new definition as a copy of the current one.

| Data set definitions are stored in the underlying GIT repository as JSON files. Any action performed is registered in the repository logs so it is possible to audit the change log later on.

##### 16.6.8.5. Advanced settings

In the Advanced settings tab area the user can specify caching and refresh settings. Those are very important for making the most of the system capabilities thus improving the performance and having better application responsive levels.

Figure 232. Advanced settings

- (1) To enable or disable the client cache and specify the maximum size (bytes).

- (2) To enable or disable the backend cache and specify the maximum cache size (number of rows).

- (3) To enable or disable automatic refresh for the Data set and the refresh period.

- (4) To enable or disable the refresh on stale data setting.

Let’s dig into more details about the meaning of these settings.

##### 16.6.8.6. Caching

The system provides caching mechanisms out-of-the-box for holding data sets and performing data operations using in-memory strategies. The use of these features brings a lot of advantages, like reducing the network traffic, remote system payload, processing times etc. On the other hand, it’s up to the user to fine tune properly the caching settings to avoid hitting performance issues.

Two cache levels are supported:

- Client level

- Backend level

The following diagram shows how caching is involved in any data set operation:

Figure 233. Data set caching

Any data look up call produces a resulting data set, so the use of the caching techniques determines where the data lookup calls are executed and where the resulting data set is located.

Client cache

If ON then the data set involved in a look up operation is pushed into the web browser so that all the components that feed from this data set do not need to perform any requests to the backend since data set operations are resolved at a client side:

- The data set is stored in the web browser’s memory

- The client components feed from the data set stored in the browser

- Data set operations (grouping, aggregations, filters and sort) are processed within the web browser, by means of a Javascript data set operation engine.

If you know beforehand that your data set will remain small, you can enable the client cache. It will reduce the number of backend requests, including the requests to the storage system. On the other hand, if you consider that your data set will be quite big, disable the client cache so as to not hitting with browser issues such as slow performance or intermittent hangs.

Backend cache

Its goal is to provide a caching mechanism for data sets on backend side.

This feature allows to reduce the number of requests to the remote storage system , by holding the data set in memory and performing group, filter and sort operations using the in-memory Drools engine.

It’s useful for data sets that do not change very often and their size can be considered acceptable to be held and processed in memory. It can be also helpful on low latency connectivity issues with the remote storage. On the other hand, if your data set is going to be updated frequently, it’s better to disable the backend cache and perform the requests to the remote storage on each look up request, so the storage system is in charge of resolving the data set lookup request.

| BEAN and CSV data providers relies by default on the backend cache, as in both cases the data set must be always loaded into memory in order to resolve any data lookup operation using the in-memory Drools engine. This is the reason why the backend settings are not visible in the Advanced settings tab.

##### 16.6.8.7. Refresh

The refresh feature allows for the invalidation of any cached data when certain conditions are meet.

Figure 234. Refresh settings

- (1) To enable or disable the refresh feature.

- (2) To specify the refresh interval.

- (3) To enable or disable data set invalidation when the data is outdated.

The data set refresh policy is tightly related to data set caching, detailed in previous section. This invalidation mechanism determines the cache life-cycle.

Depending on the nature of the data there exist three main use cases:

- Source data changes predictable - Imagine a database being updated every night. In that case, the suggested configuration is to use a "refresh interval = 1 day" and disable "refresh on stale data". That way, the system will always invalidate the cached data set every day. This is the right configuration when we know in advance that the data is going to change.

- Source data changes unpredictable - On the other hand, if we do not know whether the database is updated every day, the suggested configuration is to use a "refresh interval = 1 day" and enable "refresh on stale data". If so the system, before invalidating any data, will check for modifications. On data modifications, the system will invalidate the current stale data set so that the cache is populated with fresh data on the next data set lookup call.

- Real time scenarios - In real time scenarios caching makes no sense as data is going to be updated constantly. In this kind of scenarios the data sent to the client has to be constantly updated, so rather than enabling the refresh settings (remember this settings affect the caching, and caching is not enabled) it’s up to the clients consuming the data set to decide when to refresh. When the client is a dashboard then it’s just a matter of modifying the refresh settings in the Displayer Editor configuration screen and set a proper refresh period, "refresh interval = 1 second" for example.

#### 16.6.9. Data Source Management

The data source management system provides the ability of defining data sources for accessing external databases. This data sources can be later used by other Business Central components like the Data Sets.

##### 16.6.9.1. Database Drivers

To be able to communicate with the target database a data source will need a database driver to access it. This is why the system additionally provides the ability of defining database drivers for the data sources operation. A database driver is basically a JDBC compliant driver. We will see them in the next topics.

##### 16.6.9.2. Data Source Authoring Page

Everything related to the authoring of data sources and drivers can be found under the Data Source Authoring page accessible from the following top level menu entry: Extensions>Data Sources, as shown in the following screenshot.

Figure 235. Data Source Authoring Page

| This page is only intended for Administrator users, since defining data sources can be considered a low level task.

##### 16.6.9.3. Data Source Explorer

The Data Source Explorer lists the data sources and drivers currently defined in the system, at the same time it provides the required actions for managing them.

Figure 236. Data Source Explorer

- (1) Action link for creating a new data source

- (2) List of currently available data sources

- (3) Action link for creating a new driver

- (4) List of currently available drivers

##### 16.6.9.4. New Data Source Wizard

Clicking on the New Data Source action link opens the New Data Source Wizard:

Figure 237. New Data Source Wizard

The following required parameters define a data source:

- Name: A unique name for the data source definition.

- Connection URL: A JDBC database connection url compliant with the selected driver type. This is an example of a connection url for a PostgreSQL database: jdbc:postgresql://localhost:5432/appformer.

- User: A user name in the target database.

- Password: The corresponding user password.

- Driver: Selects the JDBC driver to be used for connecting to the target database. Note that the connection url format may vary depending on the driver, and different database vendors typically provides different drivers.

- Test connection: Once clicked, the system will show a dialog similar to the one below showing the connection test status.

Figure 238. Test Connection Status

| While not required, it’s recommended to use the test connection button to check the correctness of the data source parameters prior to finishing the data source creation.

##### 16.6.9.5. Data Source Editor

The Data Source Editor is opened by clicking on a data source item in the Data Source Explorer.

The following screenshot shows the Data Source Editor opened for the data source of the example above.

Figure 239. Data Source Editor

- Main Panel: The main panel basically lets you modify the data source configuration parameters.

- Test connection: Tests the connection.

| It’s a recommended practice to test the connection prior saving a modified data source.

##### 16.6.9.6. Data Source Content Browser

The data source content browser is opened by clicking on the Browse Content button, and enables the navigation through the database structure pointed by the data source. The navigation is performed in three levels, Schemas level, Current schema level and Current table level.

- Schemas level: lists all the database schemas accessible by current data source. Which schemas are listed depends on the database access rights granted to the user which was used in the connection configuration. Similarly for the following item.

- Current schema level: shows all the database tables for the selected schema.

- Current table level: shows the table content for the selected table.

The following screenshots show the information shown at each level, for a user that realized the following navigation steps. Selects the "public" schema → Selects the "country" table.

Schema Selection:

Clicking on the Open button opens the Current schema level for the selected schema.

Figure 240. Database schemas

Table Selection:

Clicking on the Open button opens the Current table level for the selected table.

Figure 241. Schema tables

Table information:

The rows for the selected table are shown at this level.

Figure 242. Table rows

##### 16.6.9.7. External Data Sources

External data sources are typically not defined in Business Central, instead they exist in current container and for some containers like Wildfly 11 or the JBoss EAP 7 servers they can still be listed in read only mode. In this cases only the Data Source Content Browser is enabled.

Figure 243. External Data Sources navigation

##### 16.6.9.8. New Driver Wizard

Clicking on the New Driver action link opens the New Driver Wizard:

Figure 244. New Driver Wizard

The following required parameters define a Driver:

- Name: A unique name for the driver definition.

- Driver Class Name: The java fully qualified name for the class that implements the JDBC driver contract.

- Group Id: The maven group id for the artifact that contains the JDBC driver implementation.

- Artifact Id: The maven artifact id for the artifact that contains the JDBC driver implementation.

- Version: The maven version for the artifact that contains the JDBC driver implementation.

| Some commercial database drivers (like Oracle) are not available in the maven central repository. You can use those by first uploading them via Artifact Repository page and then continue with the driver configuration as for the drivers available in the maven central repository.

##### 16.6.9.9. Driver Editor

The Driver Editor is opened by clicking on a driver item in the Data Source Explorer.

The following screenshot shows the Driver Editor opened for the driver of the example above.

Figure 245. Driver Editor

- Main Panel: The main panel basically lets you modify the driver configuration parameters. See New Driver Wizard.

##### 16.6.9.10. By Default Drivers

The system is shipped with a set of by default configured drivers for the most common used open source databases. And they are aligned with the latest database versions supported by the Wildfly 11 and the JBoss EAP 7 servers.

Figure 246. By Default Drivers

| The default drivers initialization can be enabled by setting the datasource.management.disableDefaultDrivers configuration property to false. It can be set by configuring the proper value in the datasource-management.properties file, or by passing the system property -Ddatasource.management.disableDefaultDrivers=false to the JVM. For more information see Advanced Settings.

##### 16.6.9.11. Advanced Settings

The data source management system advanced settings can be found in the datasource-management.properties file in the WEB-INF/classes directory of the given Business Central distribution file.

The data source management system has the ability of working with two different internal implementations for the data sources and drivers. An implementation based on the Wildfly/EAP native data sources and drivers, and a container independent implementation. Wildfly/EAP Business Central distributions are configured by default for using the native Wildlfy/EAP containers implementations, and Tomcat8 distributions are configured for using the container independent implementations. This latter implementation can also be used for Wildfly/EAP containers.

The valid combinations are:

WildflyDataSourceProvider + WildflyDriverProvider
or
DBCPDataSourceProvider + DBCPDriverProvider

The datasource.management.wildfly.xxxxx properties are only suited for the WildflyXXXProviders.

##### 16.6.9.12. Advanced Settings for Business Central Wildlfy/EAP distributions

Property name | By default value | Description
--- | --- | ---
datasource.management.DataSourceProvider | WildflyDataSourceProvider | see Advanced Settings.
datasource.management.DriverProvider | WildflyDriverProvider | see Advanced Settings.
datasource.management.disableDefaultDrivers | true | Set to false to enable the default database drivers initialization.
datasource.management.wildfly.host | localhost | Name or ip address used for the Wildlfy server management interface binding.
datasource.management.wildfly.port | 9990 | Port used for the Wildlfy server management interface binding.
datasource.management.wildfly.admin |  | Administration user for connecting to the Wildfly server running current Business Central. In general it’s not necessary to set this value but might be needed in cases when the Wildlfy management interface is bound to an address different than localhost.
datasource.management.wildfly.password |  | Administration user password for connecting to the Wildfly server running current Business Central. In general it’s not necessary to set this value but might be needed in cases when the Wildlfy management interface is bound to an address different than localhost.
datasource.management.wildfly.realm | ManagementRealm | Realm for the administration user authentication.
datasource.management.wildfly.profile |  | The profile name used for starting the Wildfly domain, e.g. default, full, full-ha, etc. This value must only by set when Business Central is running in clustering mode and the hosting Wildfly servers are configured by using domains. Do not set if the Wildlfy servers are running as standalone servers.
datasource.management.wildfly.serverGroup |  | The server group to which current Wildfly server instance belongs, e.g. primary-server-group, etc. This value must only by set when Business Central is running in clustering mode and the hosting Wildfly servers are configured by using domains. Do not set if the Wildlfy servers are running as standalone servers.
datasource.management.DefChangeHandler |  | This value must only by set when Business Central is running in clustering mode. If the hosting Wildfly servers are configured by using domains the following value must be used DomainModeChangeHandler and the following value StandaloneModeChangeHandler must be used in cases when the hosting Wildlfy servers are running as standalone servers. Clustering installations that uses the DBCPXXXProviders must be configured for using the StandaloneModeChangeHandler.

| The properties above can also be set by passing system properties to the JVM using the Java standard mechanism. e.g. -Ddatasource.management.wildfly.port=1234. Values configured by using this mechanism will override the values configured in the datasource-management.properties file.

##### 16.6.9.13. Advanced Settings for Tomcat distributions

Property name | By default value | Description
--- | --- | ---
datasource.management.DataSourceProvider | DBCPDataSourceProvider | This is the only option available for Tomcat 8 distributions, see Advanced Settings.
datasource.management.DriverProvider | DBCPDriverProvider | This is the only option available for Tomcat 8 distributions, see Advanced Settings.
datasource.management.disableDefaultDrivers | true | Set to false to enable the default database drivers initialization.
datasource.management.DefChangeHandler |  | This value must only by set when Business Central is running in clustering mode. Tomcat distributions only support the StandaloneModeChangeHandler value.

| The properties above can also be set by passing system properties to the JVM using the Java standard mechanism. e.g. -Ddatasource.management.wildfly.port=1234. Values configured by using this mechanism will override the values configured in the datasource-management.properties file.

### 16.7. Security management

This section describes how administrator users can manage the application’s users, groups and permissions using an intuitive and friendly user interface in order to configure who can access the different resources and features available.

#### 16.7.1. Basic concepts

##### 16.7.1.1. Introduction to Business Central users, groups and roles

The Business Central security domain defines three kind of entities: user, group and role.

The security entities are being registered in the domain by consuming some realm. The realm can be either the application server’s one (Wildfly, EAP, Tomcat) or any other of the supported types, for example, using some Keycloak remote server that performs handles the target realm.

On the other hand, it’s important to notice that each realm provides, or potentially provides, its own capabilities, semantics or structure on the security domain. These kind of differences on the security domain results on inconsistencies between different environments when moving into the Business Central security domain. This way there exist some conventions which are important to understand - how security entities are being declared and how the platform behaves behind that complexity,

The way Business Central integrates the security entities from an external realm corresponds to:

- User

A user, rather than attributes and some any other kind of metadata, which can be different across domains, represents the same kind entity in any of the supported security environments (Wildfly, EAP, Tomcat, Keybloak, etc), so the entity results in a user on Business Central as well

- Role / Group

Both role and group are security entities, but rather than a user, the semantics, the behaviors or the structure in the domain is not usually common across environments. As an example consider that exist domains which do not support both, or domains were the semantics for group or role differs. As it results domain specific, the way the application behaves and figures out if an entity should be considered a group or a role, it’s by checking the application’s Role Registry. This way an entity will be considered an role in case it’s identifier is present in the application’s Role Registry, otherwise the entity will be considered as a group.

| The Role Registry is an application’s component that provides the set of roles in the Business Central security domain. It’s being populated by consuming the entities (role-name) declared in the security-constraints section on the application’s deployment descriptor (web.xml). See source file org.uberfire.ext.security.server.RolesRegistry.

| It means that depending on the concrete environment’s configuration, some entity can be as a role, on the security environment consumed by Business Central, but it results a group in the Business Central security domain, or vice versa. It depends on the entity’s identifier by checking it it is present in the Role Registry.

| A User can be assigned to multiple roles and groups, but it is mandatory to have at least, a single role assignment for being considered valid in the Business Central security domain. It does not mean, for instance, that the user is able login, or able to consume remote services, because it depends on the concrete role/s assigned and how the roles and permissions are defined the application.

##### 16.7.1.2. Permissions

A permission is basically something the user can do within the application. Usually, an action related to a specific resource. For instance:

- View a page

- Save a project

- View a repository

- Delete a dashboard

A permission can be granted or denied and it can be global or resource specific. For instance:

- Global: “Create new pages”

- Specific: “View the home page”

As you can see, a permission is a `resource + action` pair. In the concrete case of a page we have: read, update, delete and create as the available actions. That means that there are four possible permissions that could be granted for pages.

Permissions do not necessarily need to be tied to a resource. Sometimes it is also neccessary to protect access to specific features, like for instance "generate a sales report". That means, permissions can be used not only to protect access to resources but also to custom features within the application.

##### 16.7.1.3. Authorization policy

The set of permissions assigned to every role and/or group is called the authorization (or security) policy. Every application contains a single security policy which is used every time the system checks a permission.

The authorization policy file is stored in a file called WEB-INF/classes/security-policy.properties under the application’s WAR structure.

| If no policy is defined then the authorization management features are disabled and the application behaves as if all the resources & features were granted by default.

Here is an example of a security policy file:

    # Role "admin"
    role.admin.permission.perspective.read=true
    role.admin.permission.perspective.read.Dashboard=false

    # Role "user"
    role.user.permission.perspective.read=false
    role.user.permission.perspective.read.Home=true
    role.user.permission.perspective.read.Dashboard=true

Every entry defines a single permission which is assigned to a role/group. On application start up, the policy file is loaded and stored into memory.

##### 16.7.1.4. Security provider

A security environment is usually provided by the use of a realm. Realms are used to restrict access to the different application’s resources. So realms contains the information about the users, groups, roles, permissions and any other related information.

In most typical scenarios the application’s security is delegated to the container’s security mechanism, which consumes a given realm at same time. It’s important to consider that there exist several realm implementations, for example Wildfly provides a realm based on the application-users.properties/application-roles.properties files, Tomcat provides a realm based on the tomcat-users.xml file, etc. So there is no single security realm to rely on, it can be different in each installation.

Due to the potential different security environments that have to be supported, the security module provides a well defined API with some default built-in security providers. A security provider is the formal name given to a concrete user and group management service implementation for a given realm.

The user & group management features available will depend on the security provider configured. If the built-in providers do not fit with the application’s security realm, it is easy to build and register your own provider.

#### 16.7.2. Installation and setup

At the time of this writing, the application provides two pre-installed security providers:

- Wildfly 11 / EAP 7 distribution - Both distributions use the Wildfly security provider configured for the use of the default realm files application-users.properties and application-roles.properties

- Tomcat distribution - It uses the Tomcat security provider configured for the use of the default realm file tomcat-users.xml

Please read each provider’s documentation in order to apply the concrete settings for the target deployment environment.

On the other hand, when either using a custom security provider or using one of the availables, consider the following installation options:

- Enable the security management feature on an existing WAR distribution

- Setup and installation in an existing or new project

NOTE: If no security provider is installed, there will be no available user interface for managing the security realm. Once a security provider is installed and setup, the user and group management features are automatically enabled in the security management UI (see the Usage section below).

##### 16.7.2.1. Enabling user & group management

Given an existing WAR distribution, follow these steps in order to install and enable the user & group management features:

- Ensure the following libraries are present on WEB-INF/lib:

  - WEB-INF/lib/uberfire-security-management-api-?.jar

  - WEB-INF/lib/uberfire-security-management-backend-?.jar

- Copy the security provider library to WEB-INF/lib:

  - Eg: WEB-INF/lib/uberfire-security-management-wildfly-?.jar

  - If the provider requires additional libraries, copy them as well (read each provider’s documentation for more information).

- Replace the whole content of the WEB-INF/classes/security-management.properties file, or if not present, create it. The settings present on this file depend on the concrete implementation used. Please read each provider’s documentation for more information.

- If deploying on Wildfly or EAP, check if the WEB-INF/jboss-deployment-structure.xml requires any update (read each provider’s documentation for more information).

##### 16.7.2.2. Disabling user & group management

The user & groups management features can be disabled, and thus no services or user interface will be available, by means of either:

- Uninstalling the security provider from the application

  When no concrete security provider is installed, the user and group management features will be disabled and no services or user interface will be displayed to the user. This is the case for instance, in Weblogic and Websphere installations as there is no a security provider implementation available at the time of this writing.

- Removing or commenting the security management configuration file

  Removing or commenting all the lines in the configuration file located at WEB-INF/classes/security-management.properties is another way to disable the user and group management features.

##### 16.7.2.3. Upgrading an existing installation

In versions prior to 7, the only way to grant access to resources like Organizational Units, Repositories or Projects was to indicate which roles were able to access a given instance. Those roles were stored in GIT as part of the instance persistent status. The CLI was the tool used to add/remove roles:

- remove-role-repo: remove role(s) from repository

- add-role-org-unit: add role(s) to organizational unit

- remove-role-org-unit: remove role(s) from organizational unit

- add-role-project: add role(s) to project

- remove-role-project: remove role(s) from project

As of version 7, the authorization policy is based on permissions. That means is no longer required to keep a list of roles per resource instance. What is required is to define proper permission entries into the active authorization policy using the security management UI (see the Usage section below).

The commands above are no longer required so they have been removed. Basically, what those commands did is to set what roles were able to read a specific item.

In order to guarantee backward compatibility with versions prior to 7, an automatic migration tool is bundled within the application, which converts the list of roles assigned to any organizational unit, repository or project into read permission entries of the security policy.

This tool is executed when the application start ups for the first time, during the security policy deployment. So existing customers, do not have to worry about it, as they will keep their security settings.

#### 16.7.3. Usage

The Security Management page is available under the Home section in the top menu bar.

Figure 247. Link to the Security Management page

The next screenshot shows how this new page looks:

Figure 248. Security Management Home

This page supports:

- List all the roles, groups and users available

- Create & delete users and groups

- Edit users, assign roles or groups, and change user properties

- Edit both roles & groups security settings, which include:

  - The home page a user will be directed to after login

  - The permissions granted or denied to the different Business Central resources and features available

All of the above together provides a complete users and groups management subsystem as well as a permission configuration UI for protecting access to specific resources or features.

The next sections provide a deep insight into all these features.

| The user and group management related features can be entirely disabled. See the previous section Disabling user & group management. If that’s the case then both the Groups and _Users tabs will remain hidden from the user.

##### 16.7.3.1. User management

By selecting the Users tab in the left sidebar, the application shows all the users present by default on the application’s security realm:

- Searching for users

In addition to listing all the users, search is also allowed:

+ When specifying the search pattern in the search box the users listed will be reduced to only those that matches the search pattern.

+

+ Search patterns depend on the concrete security provider being used by the application. Please read each provider’s documentation for more information.

- Creating new users

  By clicking on the "New user +" anchor, a form is displayed on the screen’s right.

This is a wizard like interface where the application asks for the new user name, a password as well as what roles/groups to assign.

- Editing a user

After clicking on a user in the left sidebar, the user editor is opened on the screen’s right.

For instance, the details screen for the admin user when using the Wildfly security provider looks like the following screenshot:

Same screen but when using the Keycloak security provider looks as:

Note that when using the Keycloak provider, a new user attributes section is displayed, but it’s not present when using the Wildfly provider. This is due to the fact that the information and actions available always depend on each provider’s capabilities as explained in the Security provider capabilities section below.

Next is the type of information handled in the user’s details screen:

- The user name

- The user’s attributes

- The assigned groups

- The assigned roles

- The permissions granted or denied

In order to update or delete an existing user, click on the Edit button present near to the username in the user editor screen:

Once the editor is in edit mode, different operations can be done (provided the security provider supports them):

For instance, to modify the set of roles and groups assigned to the user or to change the user’s password as well.

- Permissions summary

The Permissions tab shows a summary of all the permissions assigned to this particular user. This is a very helpful view as it allows administrator users to verify if a target user has the right permission levels according to the security settings of its roles and groups.

Further details about how to assign permissions to roles and groups are in the Security Settings Editor section below.

- Updating the user’s attributes

  User attributes can added or deleted using the actions available in the attributes table:

- Updating assigned groups

  From the Groups tab, a group selection popup is presented when clicking on the Add to groups button:

  This popup screen allows the user to search and select or deselect the groups assigned to the user.

- Updating assigned roles

  From the Roles tab, a role selection popup is presented when clicking on Add to roles button:

  This popup screen allows the user to search and select or deselect the roles assigned to the user.

- Changing the user’s password

  A change password popup screen is presented when clicking on the Change password button:

- Deleting users

  The user currently being edited can be deleted from the realm by clicking on the Delete button.

###### Security provider capabilities

Each security realm can provide support for different operations. For example consider the use of a Wildfly’s realm based on properties files. The contents for the applications-users.properties is like:

    admin=207b6e0cc556d7084b5e2db7d822555c
    salaboy=d4af256e7007fea2e581d539e05edd1b
    maciej=3c8609f5e0c908a8c361ca633ed23844
    kris=0bfd0f47d4817f2557c91cbab38bb92d
    katy=fd37b5d0b82ce027bfad677a54fbccee
    john=afda4373c6021f3f5841cd6c0a027244
    jack=984ba30e11dda7b9ed86ba7b73d01481
    director=6b7f87a92b62bedd0a5a94c98bd83e21
    user=c5568adea472163dfc00c19c6348a665
    guest=b5d048a237bfd2874b6928e1f37ee15e
    kiewb=78541b7b451d8012223f29ba5141bcc2
    kieserver=16c6511893651c9b4b57e0c027a96075

Notice that it’s based on key-value pairs where the key is the username, and the value is the hashed value for the user’s password. So a user is just represented by a key and its username, it does not have a name nor an address or any other meta information.

On the other hand, consider the use of a realm provided by a Keycloak server. The user information is composed by more meta-data, such as the surname, address, etc, as in the following image:

So the different services and client side components from the User and Group Management API are based on capabilities. Capabilities are used to expose or restrict the available functionality provided by the different services and client side components. Examples of capabilities are:

- Create a user

- Update a user

- Delete a user

- Update user’s attributes

- Create a group

- Update a group

- Assign groups to a user

- Assign roles to a user

Each security provider must specify a set of capabilities supported. From the previous examples, it is noted that the Wildfly security provider does not support the attributes management capability - the user is only composed by the user name. On the other hand the Keycloak provider does support this capability.

The different views and user interface components rely on the capabilities supported by each provider, so if a capability is not supported by the provider in use, the UI does not provide the views for the management of that capability. As an example, consider that a concrete provider does not support deleting users - the delete user button on the user interface will be not available.

Please take a look at the concrete service provider documentation to check all the supported capabilities for each one, the default ones can be found here.

##### 16.7.3.2. Group management

By selecting the Groups tab in the left sidebar, the application shows all the groups present by default on the application’s security realm:

- Searching for groups

In addition to listing all the groups, search is also allowed:

+ When specifying the search pattern in the search box the groups listed will be reduced to only those that matches the search pattern.

+

+ Search patterns depend on the concrete security provider being used by the application. Please read each provider’s documentation for more information.

- Creating new groups

  By clicking on the "New group +" anchor, a new screen will be presented on the center panel to perform a new group creation.

After typing a name anc clicking Save, the next step is to assign users to it:

+

+ Clicking on the "Add selected users" button finishes the group creation.

- Modifying a group

After clicking on a group in the left sidebar, the security settings editor for the selected group instance is opened on the screen’s right. Further details at the Security Settings Editor section.

- Deleting groups

To delete an existing group just click on the Delete button.

##### 16.7.3.3. Role management

By selecting the Roles tab in the left sidebar, the application shows all the application roles:

Unlike users and groups, roles can not be created nor deleted as they come from the application’s web.xml descriptor. After clicking on a role in the left sidebar, the role editor is opened on the screen’s right, which is exactly the same security settings editor used for groups. Further details at the Security Settings Editor section.

That means both role and group based permissions can be defined. The main diference between roles and group are:

- Roles are an application defined resource. They are defined as <security-role> entries in the application’s web.xml descriptor.

- Groups are dynamic and can be defined at runtime. The installed security provider determines where groups instances are stored.

They can be used together without any trouble. Groups are recommended though as they are a more flexible than roles.

- Searching for roles

In addition to listing all the roles, search is also allowed:

+ When specifying the search pattern in the search box the roles listed will be reduced to only those that matches the search pattern.

+

+ Search patterns depend on the concrete security provider being used by the application. Please read each provider’s documentation for more information.

#### 16.7.4. Security Settings Editor

This editor is used to set several security settings for both roles and groups.

+

##### 16.7.4.1. Home page

This is the page where the user is directed after login. This makes it possible to have different home pages for different users, since users can be assigned to different roles or groups.

##### 16.7.4.2. Priority

It is used to determine what settings (home page, permissions, …​) have precedence for those users with more that one role or group assigned.

Without this setting, it won’t be possible to determine what role/group should take precedence. For instance, an administrative role has higher priority than a non-administrative one. For users with both administrative and non-administrative roles granted, administrative privileges will always win, provided the administrative role’s priority is greater than the other.

##### 16.7.4.3. Permissions

Currently, Business Central support the following permission categories.

- Business Central: General Business Central permissions, not tied to any specific resource type.

- Pages: If access to a page is denied then it will not be shown in any of application menus. Update, Delete and Create permissions change the behaviour of the page management plugin editor.

- Organizational Units: Sets who can Create, Update or Delete organizational units from the Organizational Unit section at the Administration page. Sets also what organizational units are visible in the Project Explorer at the Project Authoring page.

- Repositories: Sets who can Create, Update or Delete repositories from the Repositories section at the Administration page. Sets also what repositories are visible in the Project Explorer at the Project Authoring page.

- Projects: In the Project Authoring page, sets who can Create, Update, Delete or Build projects from the Project Editor screen as well as what projects are visible in the Project Explorer.

For pages, organizational units, repositories and projects it is possible to define global permissions and add single instance exceptions afterwards. For instance, Read access can be granted to all the pages and deny access just to an individual page. This is called the grant all deny a few strategy.

The opposite, deny all grant a few strategy is also supported:

| In the example above, the Update and Delete permissions are disabled as it does not makes sense to define such permissions if the user is not even able to read pages.

#### 16.7.5. Security Policy Storage

The security policy is stored under the Business Central VFS. Most concrete, in a GIT repo called “security”. The ACL table is stored in a file called “security-policy.properties” under the “authz” directory. Next is an example of the entries this file contains:

    role.admin.home=HomePage
    role.admin.priority=0
    role.admin.permission.perspective.read=true
    role.admin.permission.perspective.create=true
    role.admin.permission.perspective.delete=true
    role.admin.permission.perspective.update=true

Every time the ACL is modified from the security settings UI the changes are stored into the GIT repo.

Initially, when the application is deployed for the first time there is no security policy stored in GIT. However, the application might need to set-up a default policy with the different access profiles for each of the application roles.

In order to support default policies the system allows for declaring a security policy as part of the webapp’s content. This can be done just by placing a security-policy.properties file under the webapp’s resource classpath (the WEB-INF/classes directory inside the WAR archive is a valid one). On app start-up the following steps are executed:

- Check if an active policy is already stored in GIT

- If not, then check if a policy has been defined under the webapp’s classpath

- If found, such policy is stored under GIT

The above is an auto-deploy mechanism which is used in Business Central to set-up its default security policy.

One slight variation of the deployment process is the ability to split the “security-policy.properties” file into small pieces so that it is possible, for example, to define one file per role. The split files must start by the “security-module-” prefix, for instance: “security-module-admin.properties”. The deployment mechanism will read and deploy both the "security-policy.properties" and all the optional “security-module-?.properties” found on the classpath.

Notice, despite using the split approach, the “security-policy.properties” must always be present as it is used as a marker file by the security subsystem in order to locate the other policy files. This split mechanism allows for a better organization of the whole security policy.

### 16.8. SSH keystore

This section provides an overview of the Business Central SSH keystore and includes a guide for platform users. It explains how to use the Business Central SSH keystore to register and use it’s SSH public keys.

#### 16.8.1. Introduction

Business Central includes an SSH keystore service to provide proper SSH authentication for users.

It provides a configurable default SSH keystore, extensible APIs to allow custom implementations, support for multiple SSH public keys formats, and a new UI available on the Admin page to enable users to register their SSH public keys.

##### 16.8.1.1. The default SSH keystore

The default SSH keystore included with Business Central provides a file-based storage mechanism to store users' SSH public keys.

By default, it uses Business Central `.security` folder as a root path. It is possible to use a custom storage path by setting the `appformer.ssh.keys.storage.folder` property to direct to a different folder.

The SSH public keys are stored in the `{securityFolderPath}/pkeys/{userName}/` folder structure.

Each SSH public key consists of a pair of files in the storage folder:

- {keyId}.pub: a file containing the SSH public key content. The file name determines the logic key ID on the system, so do not modify the file name during runtime. For example

      ssh-rsa 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 userName

- .{keyId}.pub.meta: a file containing the key metadata in JSON format. If a key has no metadata, a new metadata file is dynamically generated. For example:

      {
          "name":"Key",
          "creationDate":"Oct 10, 2018 10:10:50 PM",
          "lastTimeUsed":"Oct 11, 2018 12:11:23 PM"
      }

##### 16.8.1.2. Using a custom SSH keystore

It is possible to extend and customize the platform default SSH keystore to meet more specific requirements.

Use the system property `appformer.ssh.keystore` to specify the Java class name of the service to use. If the property does not exist or it contains a wrong value, the default SSH keystore is loaded.

| To create a custom implementation of the SSH keystore, your Java Class must implement the class `org.uberfire.ssh.service.backend.keystore.SSHKeyStore` defined in the `uberfire-ssh-api` module.

#### 16.8.2. Using the SSH keystore

This section describes how to use the SSH keystore to register your own keys and how to use them.

##### 16.8.2.1. The SSH keystore UI

The SSH keystore provides an intuitive UI to enable users to manage their SSH public keys on the system. It is accessible from the Admin page by using the SSH Keys menu option.

Figure 249. SSH Keys Menu Option on Admin Page

After you click the SSH Keys menu option the SSH Keys Editor will open. the editor displays a table showing the user SSH public keys and provides access to the main action buttons.

- Add SSH Key: Used to add an SSH public key for the user.

  Figure 250. Adding new SSH public key

- Delete SSH Key: Used to remove an existing SSH public key

  Figure 251. Deleting a SSH public key

Figure 252. SSH keystore UI

##### 16.8.2.2. Adding SSH keys

This section explains step by step how to add an SSH public key to the SSH keystore.

###### Creating the SSH key on your computer

1. Open a terminal on your computer

2. Run the `ssh-keygen` command to create the key:

       ssh-keygen -t rsa -b 4096 -C "<your_user_login_here>"

   | The SSH key formats supported by the keystore are 'ssh-rsa', 'ssh-dss', 'ecdsa-sha2-nistp256', 'ecdsa-sha2-nistp384' and 'ecdsa-sha2-nistp521'.

3. When prompted, press Enter and accept the default key file location.

       Enter a file in which to save the key (/home/<your_login_here>/.ssh/id_rsa): [Press enter]

4. When prompted, enter the pass phrase that you want to use.

       Enter passphrase (empty for no passphrase): [Type a passphrase]
       Enter same passphrase again: [Type passphrase again]

5. Start the `ssh-agent`:

       eval "$(ssh-agent -s)"
       Agent pid <any-number-here>

6. Add the new SSH private key to the `ssh-agent`. If you used a different key name, replace `id_rsa` with your key name

       ssh-add ~/.ssh/id_rsa

###### Registering your SSH public key with the SSH keystore

1. In Business Central, go to the gear icon next to your login to open the Admin page.

   Figure 253. Accessing the Admin Page

2. Open the SSH keystore UI by clicking the SSH Keys menu option.

   Figure 254. SSH Keys Menu Option on Admin Page
   Figure 255. SSH KeysStore UI Without keys

3. Copy the contents of your SSH Public key onto the clipboard. Use the `cat` command to display your key content. If you used a different key name: replace `id_rsa` with your key name, and copy it.

       cat ~/.ssh/id_rsa.pub

4. In the SSH keystore UI press the Add SSH Key button to open the New SSH public key form. Specify a name, copy the key content into the key field and click Add SSH Key to register the key.

   Figure 256. Adding new SSH public key

   | Name field cannot be empty, this field defines a meaningful name for the user to identify the key on the SSH public keys table. Key must be a valid SSH Public key, so it cannot be empty and the key format must be supported by the platform.

### 16.9. Embedding Business Central in Your Application

Apart from the individual perspectives (such as the Library or Content Management), Business Central provides a number of editors used for designing and managing assets in different formats. Within Business Central, each asset type has a corresponding editor.

Business Central provides the possibility to embed the perspectives and editors in the user’s application using the standalone mode. Without actually switching to Business Central, it is possible to display perspectives and edit various assets, such as rules, processes, or decision tables, in separate applications.

To embed a part of Business Central in an application, Business Central must be deployed and running on a web server or an application server. Then, in your application, include an HTML inline frame with the proper HTTP query parameters as described in the following table.

Table 41. HTTP query parameters for the standalone mode
Parameter | Values | Description
--- | --- | ---
`standalone` | none | This parameter must be included in each URL of a perspective or an editor that will be used in the standalone mode.
`perspective` | `LibraryPerspective`, `ContentManagerPerspective`, or any custom-created page | Used for specifying the perspective to be displayed.
`header` | `UberfireBreadcrumbsContainer` | Displays the breadcrumbs at the top of the page that can be used for navigating to the lists of spaces and projects within the Library. This parameter can be used only if `perspective=LibraryPerspective` is specified.
`path` | `default://master@MySpace/Shop/src/main/java/com/Product.java` | Specifies the path to the asset to be opened in a corresponding editor. The path must be specified in the format `default://BRANCH@SPACE/PROJECT/PATH_TO_ASSET/ASSET_NAME.FILE_EXTENSION`.

Table 42. Usage examples
URL | Description
--- | ---
http://localhost:8080/business-central/kie-wb.jsp?standalone&perspective=LibraryPerspective | Opens the Library where it is possible to select a project to be managed.
http://localhost:8080/business-central/kie-wb.jsp?standalone&perspective=LibraryPerspective&header=UberfireBreadcrumbsContainer | Opens the Library with the list of projects. The `header` parameter displays the breadcrumbs at the top of the page, which allow the user to switch between the spaces as well as the projects.
http://localhost:8080/business-central/kie-wb.jsp?standalone&path=default://master@MySpace/Shop/src/main/java/com/Product.java | Opens the editor of the specified asset.
http://localhost:8080/business-central/kie-wb.jsp?standalone&perspective=ContentManagerPerspective | Opens the Content Management perspective, where it is possible to create and manage custom pages.
http://localhost:8080/business-central/kie-wb.jsp?standalone&perspective=MyCustomPage | Opens the specified custom page that has been created before using the Content Management perspective. The value of the `perspective` parameter must correspond to the actual name of the page.

### 16.10. Execution Server Management UI

The Execution Server Management UI allows users create and modify Server Templates and Containers, it also allows users manage Remote Servers. This screen is available via Deploy → Rule Deployments menu.

Figure 257. Execution Server Management

| The management UI is only available for KIE Managed Servers.

#### 16.10.1. Server Templates

Server templates are used to define a common configuration that can be used for multiple server, thus the name: Template.

Server Templates can be created directly from the management UI or it’s automatically create when a server connects to Drools controller and there isn’t a template definition for that remote server. Server templates may have one or more capabilities, such capabilities can’t be modified, if you need modify the capabilities you’ll have to create a new template. Here is the list of current capabilities:

- Rule (Drools)

- Process (jBPM)

- Planning (Optaplanner)

| For Planner capability it’s mandatory to enable Rule’s capability too.

In order to create a new Server Template you have to click at New Server Template button and follow the wizard. It’s also possible to create a container during Wizard, but for now let’s limit to just the template.

Figure 258. New Server Template Wizard

Once created you’ll get the new Template listed on the left hand side, with the new Server Template highlighted. On the right hand side you get the 2nd level navigation that lists Containers and Remote Servers that are related to selected Server Template.

Figure 259. Server Templates

On top of the navigation is also possible to delete the current Server Template or create a copy of it.

Figure 260. Server Template Actions

#### 16.10.2. Container

A Container is a KIE Container configuration of the Server Template. Click the Add Container button to create a new container for the current Server Template.

The search area can help users find an specific KJARs that they are looking for.

Figure 261. New Container Wizard

For Server Templates that have Process capabilities enabled, the Wizard has a 2nd optional step where users can configure some process related behaviors.

Figure 262. Process Configuration

Kie Base Name determines which Kie Base of the deployed artifact will be used.

Kie Session Name determines which Kie Session of the selected Kie Base will be used.

| Please notice that configurations on this tab takes effect only if the deployed project contains some business processeses. It is not enough if the server template has the extension for processes enabled.

Once created the new Container will be displayed on the containers list just above the list of remote servers. Just after created a container is by default Stopped which is the only state that allows users to remove it.

Figure 263. Container

A Container has the following tabs available for management and/or configuration:

- Status

- Version Configuration

- Process Configuration

Status tab lists all the Remote Servers that are running the active Container. Each Remote Server is rendered as a Card, which displays to users status and endpoint.

| Only started Containers are deployed to remote servers.

Figure 264. Status Container

For containers that do not have process capability the Version Configuration tab allows users to change the current version of the Container. Users can upgrade manually to a specific version using the "Upgrade" button or enable/disable the Scanner. It’s also possible to execute a Scan Now operation that will scan for new versions only once.

To redeploy SNAPSHOT kjars with your latest changes all existing containers with that version must first be removed. Executing 'build and deploy' will then create a container with the latest SNAPSHOT kjar. However, this is not possible for release versions. Following maven release convensions if the GAV of a kjar is anthing but SNAPSHOT, the GAV will need to be updated to the newer release version and deployed to its own container. The new release version can also be used to upgrade an existing container as describe previously provided the container does not have process capability.

Figure 265. Version Configuration

Process Configuration is the same form that is displayed during New Container Wizard for Template Servers that have Process Capability. If Template Server doesn’t have such capability, the action buttons will be disabled.

Figure 266. Process Configuration

#### 16.10.3. Remote Server

Remote Server is a Managed KIE Server instance running that has a Drools controller configured.

| By default, Business Central comes with a Drools controller embedded.

The list of Remote Servers are displayed just under the list of Containers. Once selected the screens reveals the Remote Server details and a list of cards, each card represents a running Container.

Figure 267. Remote Servers

### 16.11. Experimental Features Framework

This section describes the Experimental Features Framework functionality and how to use it.

#### 16.11.1. Introduction

The Experimental Features Framework is a platform service that allows developers to deliver features which are still not part of Business Central (for example, ongoing developments, tech previews, POCs…​) and expose these features to users to let them have a preview of what is comming in the future.

The Experimental Features Framework provides the following features:

- New Editor UI, accessible on the Admin page, where users can enable and disable Experimental Features.

- Support for user-level features (stored as system preferences for each user) and global features (only available to `admin` users, in the editor)

- Ability to dynamically handle the visibility for different Experimental Resources on Business Central.

  - Business Central Perspectives

  - Business Central Screens

  - Business Central Editors

  - Library Asset Types

  - Page Builder Layout Components

#### 16.11.2. Types of Experimental Features

There are two types of Experimental Features, each with different scopes:

- User: This type of feature can be enabled or disabled for any platform user, making the feature available for a single user without affecting other users, storing the feature state as a user preference.

- Global: This type of feature is global for all users. Only users with administrator permissions user can enable them.

#### 16.11.3. Experimental Features Editor

The Experimental Features Framework provides an editor where users can configure the features that they want to use. To open the editor, navigate to the Admin page and click the Experimental menu option.

Figure 268. Experimental Features Menu Option

| The Experimental menu option only appears if the Experimental Features Framework is enabled and there are Experimental Features installed on Business Central

Figure 269. Experimental Features Editor

| The features and groups displayed on this documentation are examples.

The Experimental Features Editor displays all the Experimental Features installed on Business Central. For a better user experience these features are organized in collapsible groups. Click a label to expand or collapse a group.

Figure 270. Experimental Features Group

Each row inside of the group corresponds to an experimental feature. Click toggle button to enable or disable the feature.

You can also enable or disable all group features by clicking the group’s *Enable all" / "Disable all" button.

Figure 271. Enable all group features

#### 16.11.4. Enabling the Experimental Features Framework

By default, the Experimental Features Framework is disabled. You can enable it by starting Business Central and setting the system property `appformer.experimental.features=true`.

Any Experimental Feature present on Business Central will not be accessible to users while the Experimental Features Framework is disabled.

### 16.12. Business Central profiles

Starting on 7.15.0.Final, KIE Workbench is renamed to Business Central. Business Central contains all KIE Workbench features. To select between the set of available features, the concept of profiles is introduced. This chapter describes profiles and show how you can configure them in Business Central.

#### 16.12.1. Introduction

When you start the Business Central application, all the features are available to you by default. To configure a set of features, you can select from a list of profile.

A profile is a set of features which contains:

- Menus

- Resources that it can handle

- Specific home page

Currently, we have two profiles: * Full: All workbench features will be enabled (default); * Planner and Rules: Only Optaplanner and Drools features will be available.

#### 16.12.2. Selecting a profile

Profiles can be selected on Administration page, by selecting the Profiles preference.

| Only admin users have access to the Profiles preference.

Figure 272. Profile Menu Option

It is also possible to select a profile using the system property `org.kie.workbench.profile`, which can have the values `FULL` (for Full profile) and `PLANNER_AND_RULES` (For Planner and Rules profile).

## 17. Authoring rule assets

### 17.1. Creating a package

Configuring packages is generally something that is done once, and by someone with some experience with rules/models. Generally speaking, very few people will need to configure packages, and once they are setup, they can be copied over and over if needed. Package configuration is most definitely a technical task that requires the appropriate expertise.

All assets live in "packages" in Business Central - a package is like a folder (it also serves as a "namespace"). A home folder for rule assets to live in. Rules in particular need to know what the fact model is, what the namespace is etc.

So while rules (and assets in general) can appear in any number of categories, they only live in one package. If you think of Business Central as a file system, then each package is a folder, and the assets live in that folder - as one big happy list of files.

To create an empty package select "Package" from the "Add Asset" menu.

Figure 273. New package

#### 17.1.1. Empty package

An empty package can be created by simply specifying a name.

Figure 274. New empty package

Once the Package has been created it will appear in the Project Explorer.

Figure 275. Project Explorer showing new Package

#### 17.1.2. Copy, rename, and delete packages

As already mentioned on Project Explorer section, users can copy, rename or delete a package directly from Project Explorer.

### 17.2. Guided rules

Guided rules are business rules that you create in a UI-based guided rules designer in Business Central that leads you through the rule-creation process. The guided rules designer provides fields and options for acceptable input based on the data objects for the rule being defined. The guided rules that you define are compiled into Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules as with all other rule assets.

All data objects related to a guided rule must be in the same project package as the guided rule. Assets in the same package are imported by default. After you create the necessary data objects and the guided rule, you can use the Data Objects tab of the guided rules designer to verify that all required data objects are listed or to import other existing data objects by adding a New item.

#### 17.2.1. Creating guided rules

Guided rules enable you to define business rules in a structured format, based on the data objects associated with the rules. You can create and define guided rules individually for your project.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Guided Rule.

3. Enter an informative Guided Rule name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required data objects have been assigned or will be assigned.

   You can also select Show declared DSL sentences if any domain specific language (DSL) assets have been defined in your project. These DSL assets will then become usable objects for conditions and actions that you define in the guided rules designer.

4. Click Ok to create the rule asset.

   The new guided rule is now listed in the Guided Rules panel of the Project Explorer, or in the Guided Rules (with DSL) panel if you selected the Show declared DSL sentences option.

5. Click the Data Objects tab and confirm that all data objects required for your rules are listed. If not, click New item to import data objects from other packages, or create data objects within your package.

6. After all data objects are in place, return to the Model tab of the guided rules designer and use the buttons on the right side of the window to add and define the WHEN (condition) and THEN (action) sections of the rule, based on the available data objects.

   Figure 276. The guided rules designer

   The WHEN part of the rule contains the conditions that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a bank requires loan applicants to have over 21 years of age, then the WHEN condition of an `Underage` rule would be `Age | less than | 21`.

   The THEN part of the rule contains the actions to be performed when the conditional part of the rule has been met. For example, when the loan applicant is under 21 years old, the THEN action would set `approved` to `false`, declining the loan because the applicant is under age.

   You can also specify exceptions for more complex rules, such as if a bank may approve of an under-aged applicant when a guarantor is involved. In that case, you would create or import a guarantor data object and then add the field to the guided rule.

7. After you define all components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the guided rules designer to validate the guided rule. If the rule validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all components in the rule, and try again to validate the rule until the rule passes.

8. Click Save in the guided rules designer to save your work.

##### 17.2.1.1. Adding WHEN conditions in guided rules

The WHEN part of the rule contains the conditions that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a bank requires loan applicants to have over 21 years of age, then the WHEN condition of an `Underage` rule would be `Age | less than | 21`. You can set simple or complex conditions to determine how and when your rules are applied.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your rules have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the guided rules designer.

Procedure

1. In the guided rules designer, click the plus icon () on the right side of the `WHEN` section.

   The Add a condition to the rule window with the available condition elements opens.

   Figure 277. Add a condition to the rule

   The list includes the data objects from the Data Objects tab of the guided rules designer, any DSL objects defined for the package (if you selected Show declared DSL sentences when you created this guided rule), and the following standard options:

   - The following does not exist: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must not exist.

   - The following exists: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must exist. This option is triggered on only the first match, not subsequent matches.

   - Any of the following are true: Use this to list any facts or constraints that must be true.

   - From: Use this to define a `From` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Accumulate: Use this to define an `Accumulate` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Collect: Use this to define a `Collect` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Entry Point: Use this to define an `Entry Point` for the pattern.

   - Free form DRL: Use this to insert a free-form DRL field where you can define condition elements freely, without the guided rules designer.

2. Choose a condition element (for example, LoanApplication) and click Ok.

3. Click the condition element in the guided rules designer and use the Modify constraints for LoanApplication window to add a restriction on a field, apply multiple field constraints, add a new formula style expression, apply an expression editor, or set a variable name.

   Figure 278. Modify a condition

   | A variable name enables you to identify a fact or field in other constructs within the guided rule. For example, you could set the variable of `LoanApplication` to `a` and then reference `a` in a separate `Bankruptcy` constraint that specifies which application the bankruptcy is based on.
       a : LoanApplication()
       Bankruptcy( application == a ).

   After you select a constraint, the window closes automatically.

4. Choose an operator for the restriction (for example, `greater than`) from the drop-down menu next to the added restriction.

5. Click the edit icon () to define the field value. The field value can be a literal value, a formula, or a full MVEL expression.

6. To apply multiple field constraints, click the condition and in the Modify constraints for LoanApplication window, select All of(And) or Any of(Or) from the Multiple field constraint drop-down menu.

   Figure 279. Add multiple field constraints

7. Click the constraint in the guided rules designer and further define the field value.

8. After you define all condition components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the guided rules designer to validate the guided rule conditions. If the rule validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all components in the rule, and try again to validate the rule until the rule passes.

9. Click Save in the guided rules designer to save your work.

##### 17.2.1.2. Adding THEN actions in guided rules

The THEN part of the rule contains the actions to be performed when the WHEN condition of the rule has been met. For example, when a loan applicant is under 21 years old, the THEN action might set `approved` to `false`, declining the loan because the applicant is under age. You can set simple or complex actions to determine how and when your rules are applied.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your rules have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the guided rules designer.

Procedure

1. In the guided rules designer, click the plus icon () on the right side of the `THEN` section.

   The Add a new action window with the available action elements opens.

   Figure 280. Add a new action to the rule

   The list includes insertion and modification options based on the data objects in the Data Objects tab of the guided rules designer, and on any DSL objects defined for the package (if you selected Show declared DSL sentences when you created this guided rule):

   - Change field values of: Use this to set the value of fields on a fact (such as `LoanApplication`) without notifying the Drools engine of the change.

   - Delete: Use this to delete a fact.

   - Modify: Use this to specify fields to be modified for a fact and to notify the Drools engine of the change.

   - Insert fact: Use this to insert a fact and define resulting fields and values for the fact.

   - Logically Insert fact: Use this to insert a fact logically into the Drools engine and define resulting fields and values for the fact. The Drools engine is responsible for logical decisions on insertions and retractions of facts. After regular or stated insertions, facts have to be retracted explicitly. After logical insertions, facts are automatically retracted when the conditions that originally asserted the facts are no longer true.

   - Add free form DRL: Use this to insert a free-form DRL field where you can define condition elements freely, without the guided rules designer.

   - Call method on: Use this to invoke a method from another fact.

2. Choose an action element (for example, Modify) and click Ok.

3. Click the action element in the guided rules designer and use the Add a field window to select a field.

   Figure 281. Add a field

   After you select a field, the window closes automatically.

4. Click the edit icon () to define the field value. The field value can be a literal value or a formula.

5. After you define all action components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the guided rules designer to validate the guided rule actions. If the rule validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all components in the rule, and try again to validate the rule until the rule passes.

6. Click Save in the guided rules designer to save your work.

#### 17.2.2. Augmenting with DSL sentences

If the package the rule is part of has a DSL configuration, when when you add conditions or actions, then it will provide a list of "DSL Sentences" which you can choose from - when you choose one, it will add a row to the rule - where the DSL specifies values come from a user, then a edit box (text) will be shown (so it ends up looking a bit like a form). This is optional, and there is another DSL editor. Please note that the DSL capabilities in this editor are slightly less then the full set of DSL features (basically you can do [when] and [then] sections of the DSL only - which is no different to drools 3 in effect).

The following diagram shows the DSL sentences in action in the guided editor:

Figure 282. DSL in guided editor

#### 17.2.3. Adding other rule options

You can also use the rule designer to add metadata within a rule, define additional rule attributes (such as `salience` and `no-loop`), and freeze areas of the rule to restrict modifications to conditions or actions.

Procedure

1. In the rule designer, click (show options…​) under the THEN section.

2. Click the plus icon () on the right side of the window to add options.

3. Select an option to be added to the rule:

   - Metadata: Enter a metadata label and click the plus icon (). Then enter any needed data in the field provided in the rule designer.

   - Attribute: Select from the list of rule attributes. Then further define the value in the field or option displayed in the rule designer.

   - Freeze areas for editing: Select Conditions or Actions to restrict the area from being modified in the rule designer.

     Figure 283. Rule options

4. Click Save in the rule designer to save your work.

##### 17.2.3.1. Rule attributes

Rule attributes are additional specifications that you can add to business rules to modify rule behavior. The following table lists the names and supported values of the attributes that you can assign to rules:

Table 43. Rule attributes
Attribute | Value
--- | ---
`salience` | An integer defining the priority of the rule. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue. Example: `salience 10`
`enabled` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule is enabled. When the option is not selected, the rule is disabled. Example: `enabled true`
`date-effective` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule can be activated only if the current date and time is after a `date-effective` attribute. Example: `date-effective "4-Sep-2018"`
`date-expires` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule cannot be activated if the current date and time is after the `date-expires` attribute. Example: `date-expires "4-Oct-2018"`
`no-loop` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule cannot be reactivated (looped) if a consequence of the rule re-triggers a previously met condition. When the condition is not selected, the rule can be looped in these circumstances. Example: `no-loop true`
`agenda-group` | A string identifying an agenda group to which you want to assign the rule. Agenda groups allow you to partition the agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. Only rules in an agenda group that has acquired a focus are able to be activated. Example: `agenda-group "GroupName"`
`activation-group` | A string identifying an activation (or XOR) group to which you want to assign the rule. In activation groups, only one rule can be activated. The first rule to fire will cancel all pending activations of all rules in the activation group. Example: `activation-group "GroupName"`
`duration` | A long integer value defining the duration of time in milliseconds after which the rule can be activated, if the rule conditions are still met. Example: `duration 10000`
`timer` | A string identifying either `int` (interval) or `cron` timer definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `timer "*/5 * * * *"` (every 5 minutes)
`calendar` | A Quartz calendar definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `calendars "* * 0-7,18-23 ? * *"` (exclude non-business hours)
`auto-focus` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the rule is activated, a focus is automatically given to the agenda group to which the rule is assigned. Example: `auto-focus true`
`lock-on-active` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within rule flow groups or agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the ruleflow group for the rule becomes active or the agenda group for the rule receives a focus, the rule cannot be activated again until the ruleflow group is no longer active or the agenda group loses the focus. This is a stronger version of the `no-loop` attribute, because the activation of a matching rule is discarded regardless of the origin of the update (not only by the rule itself). This attribute is ideal for calculation rules where you have a number of rules that modify a fact and you do not want any rule re-matching and firing again. Example: `lock-on-active true`
`ruleflow-group` | A string identifying a rule flow group. In rule flow groups, rules can fire only when the group is activated by the associated rule flow. Example: `ruleflow-group "GroupName"`
`dialect` | A string identifying either `JAVA` or `MVEL` as the language to be used for code expressions in the rule. By default, the rule uses the dialect specified at the package level. Any dialect specified here overrides the package dialect setting for the rule. Example: `dialect "JAVA"`

#### 17.2.4. A more complex example:

Figure 284. A more complex BRL example

In the above example, you can see how to use a mixture of Conditional Elements, literal values, and formulas. The rule has 4 "top level" Patterns and 1 Action. The "top level" Patterns are:

1. A Fact Pattern on Person. This Pattern contains two field constraints: one for birthDate field and the other one is a formula. Note that the value of the birthDate restriction is selected from a calendar. Another thing to note is that you can make calculations and use nested fields in the formula restriction (i.e. car.brand). Finally, we are setting a variable name ($p) to the Person Fact Type. You can then use this variable in other Patterns.

   | The generated DRL from this Pattern will be:
       $p : Person( birthDate < "19-Dec-1982" , eval( car.brand == "Ford" && salary > (2500 * 4.1) ))

2. A From Pattern. This condition will create a match for every Address whose street name is "Elm St." from the Person’s list of addresses. The left side of the from is a regular Fact Pattern and the right side is an Expression Builder that let us inspect variable’s fields.

   | The generated DRL from this Pattern will be: `Address( street == "Elm St." ) from $p.addresses`

3. A "Not Exist" Conditional Element. This condition will match when its content doesn’t create a match. In this case, its content is a regular Fact Pattern (on Person). In this Fact Pattern you can see how variables ($p) could be used inside a formula value.

   | The generated DRL from this Pattern will be: `not Person( salary == ( $p.salary * 2 ) )`

4. A "From Accumulate" Conditional Element. This is maybe one of the most complex Patterns you can use. It consist in a Left Pattern (It must be a Fact Pattern. In this case is a Number Pattern. The Number is named $totalAddresses), a Source Pattern (Which could be a Fact Pattern, From, Collect or Accumulate conditional elements. In this case is an Address Pattern Restriction with a field restriction in its zip field) and a Formula Section where you can use any built-in or custom Accumulate Function (in this example a count() function is used). Basically, this Conditional Element will count the addresses having a zip code of 43240 from the Person’s list of addresses.

   | The generated DRL from this Pattern will be: `$totalAddresses : Number() from accumulate ( $a : Address( zipCode == " 43240" ) from $p.addresses, count( $a ) )`

### 17.3. Guided rule templates

Guided rule templates are business rule structures with placeholder values (template keys) that are interchanged with actual values defined in separate data tables. Each row of values defined in the corresponding data table for that template results in a rule. Guided rule templates are ideal when many rules have the same conditions, actions, and other attributes but differ in values of facts or constraints. In such cases, instead of creating many similar guided rules and defining values in each rule, you can create a guided rule template with the rule structure that applies to each rule and then define only the differing values in the data table.

The guided rule templates designer provides fields and options for acceptable template input based on the data objects for the rule template being defined, and a corresponding data table where you add template key values. After you create your guided rule template and add values in the corresponding data table, the rules you defined are compiled into Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules as with all other rule assets.

All data objects related to a guided rule template must be in the same project package as the guided rule template. Assets in the same package are imported by default. After you create the necessary data objects and the guided rule template, you can use the Data Objects tab of the guided rule templates designer to verify that all required data objects are listed or to import other existing data objects by adding a New item.

#### 17.3.1. Creating guided rule templates

You can use guided rule templates to define rule structures with placeholder values (template keys) that correspond to actual values defined in a data table. Guided rule templates are an efficient alternative to defining sets of many guided rules individually that use the same structure.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Guided Rule Template.

3. Enter an informative Guided Rule Template name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required data objects have been assigned or will be assigned.

4. Click Ok to create the rule template.

   The new guided rule template is now listed in the Guided Rule Templates panel of the Project Explorer.

5. Click the Data Objects tab and confirm that all data objects required for your rules are listed. If not, click New item to import data objects from other packages, or create data objects within your package.

6. After all data objects are in place, return to the Model tab and use the buttons on the right side of the window to add and define the WHEN (condition) and THEN (action) sections of the rule template, based on the available data objects. For the field values that vary per rule, use template keys in the format `$key` in the rule designer or in the format `@{key}` in free form DRL (if used).

   Figure 285. Sample guided rule template

   | Note on template keys Template keys are fundamental in guided rule templates. Template keys are what enable field values in the templates to be interchanged with actual values that you define in the corresponding data table to generate different rules from the same template. You can use other value types, such as Literal or Formula, for values that are part of the rule structure of all rules based on that template. However, for any values that differ among the rules, use the Template key field type with a specified key. Without template keys in a guided rule template, the corresponding data table is not generated in the template designer and the template essentially functions as an individual guided rule.

   The WHEN part of the rule template is the condition that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a telecommunications company charges customers based on the services they subscribe to (Internet, phone, and TV), then one of the WHEN conditions would be `internetService | equal to | $hasInternetService`. The template key `$hasInternetService` is interchanged with an actual Boolean value (`true` or `false`) defined in the data table for the template.

   The THEN part of the rule template is the action to be performed when the conditional part of the rule has been met. For example, if a customer subscribes to only Internet service, a THEN action for `RecurringPayment` with a template key `$amount` would set the actual monthly amount to the integer value defined for Internet service charges in the data table.

7. After you define all components of the rule, click Save in the guided rule templates designer to save your work.

##### 17.3.1.1. Adding WHEN conditions in guided rule templates

The WHEN part of the rule contains the conditions that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a telecommunications company charges customers based on the services they subscribe to (Internet, phone, and TV), then one of the WHEN conditions would be `internetService | equal to | $hasInternetService`. The template key `$hasInternetService` is interchanged with an actual Boolean value (`true` or `false`) defined in the data table for the template.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your rules have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the guided rule templates designer.

Procedure

1. In the guided rule templates designer, click the plus icon () on the right side of the `WHEN` section.

   The Add a condition to the rule window with the available condition elements opens.

   Figure 286. Add a condition to the rule

   The list includes the data objects from the Data Objects tab of the guided rule templates designer, any DSL objects defined for the package, and the following standard options:

   - The following does not exist: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must not exist.

   - The following exists: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must exist. This option is triggered on only the first match, not subsequent matches.

   - Any of the following are true: Use this to list any facts or constraints that must be true.

   - From: Use this to define a `From` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Accumulate: Use this to define an `Accumulate` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Collect: Use this to define a `Collect` conditional element for the rule.

   - From Entry Point: Use this to define an `Entry Point` for the pattern.

   - Free form DRL: Use this to insert a free-form DRL field where you can define condition elements freely, without the guided rules designer. For template keys in free form DRL, use the format `@{key}`.

2. Choose a condition element (for example, Customer) and click Ok.

3. Click the condition element in the guided rule templates designer and use the Modify constraints for Customer window to add a restriction on a field, apply multiple field constraints, add a new formula style expression, apply an expression editor, or set a variable name.

   Figure 287. Modify a condition

   | A variable name enables you to identify a fact or field in other constructs within the guided rule. For example, you could set the variable of `Customer` to `c` and then reference `c` in a separate `Applicant` constraint that specifies that the `Customer` is the `Applicant`.
       c : Customer()
       Applicant( this == c )

   After you select a constraint, the window closes automatically.

4. Choose an operator for the restriction (for example, `equal to`) from the drop-down menu next to the added restriction.

5. Click the edit icon () to define the field value.

6. Select Template key and add a template key in the format `$key` if this value varies among the rules that are based on this template. This allows the field value to be interchanged with actual values that you define in the corresponding data table to generate different rules from the same template. For field values that do not vary among the rules and are part of the rule template, you can use any other value type.

7. To apply multiple field constraints, click the condition and in the Modify constraints for Customer window, select All of(And) or Any of(Or) from the Multiple field constraint drop-down menu.

   Figure 288. Add multiple field constraints

8. Click the constraint in the guided rule templates designer and further define the field values.

9. After you define all condition elements, click Save in the guided rule templates designer to save your work.

##### 17.3.1.2. Adding THEN actions in guided rule templates

The THEN part of the rule template is the action to be performed when the conditional part of the rule has been met. For example, if a customer subscribes to only Internet service, a THEN action for `RecurringPayment` with a template key `$amount` would set the actual monthly amount to the integer value defined for Internet service charges in the data table.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your rules have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the guided rule templates designer.

Procedure

1. In the guided rule templates designer, click the plus icon () on the right side of the `THEN` section.

   The Add a new action window with the available action elements opens.

   Figure 289. Add a new action to the rule

   The list includes insertion and modification options based on the data objects in the Data Objects tab of the guided rule templates designer, and on any DSL objects defined for the package:

   - Insert fact: Use this to insert a fact and define resulting fields and values for the fact.

   - Logically Insert fact: Use this to insert a fact logically into the Drools engine and define resulting fields and values for the fact. The Drools engine is responsible for logical decisions on insertions and retractions of facts. After regular or stated insertions, facts have to be retracted explicitly. After logical insertions, facts are automatically retracted when the conditions that originally asserted the facts are no longer true.

   - Add free form DRL: Use this to insert a free-form DRL field where you can define condition elements freely, without the guided rules designer. For template keys in free form DRL, use the format `@{key}`.

2. Choose an action element (for example, Logically Insert fact RecurringPayment) and click Ok.

3. Click the action element in the guided rule templates designer and use the Add a field window to select a field.

   Figure 290. Add a field

   After you select a field, the window closes automatically.

4. Click the edit icon () to define the field value.

5. Select Template key and add a template key in the format `$key` if this value varies among the rules that are based on this template. This allows the field value to be interchanged with actual values that you define in the corresponding data table to generate different rules from the same template. For field values that do not vary among the rules and are part of the rule template, you can use any other value type.

6. After you define all action elements, click Save in the guided rule templates designer to save your work.

##### 17.3.1.3. Adding other rule options

You can also use the rule designer to add metadata within a rule, define additional rule attributes (such as `salience` and `no-loop`), and freeze areas of the rule to restrict modifications to conditions or actions.

Procedure

1. In the rule designer, click (show options…​) under the THEN section.

2. Click the plus icon () on the right side of the window to add options.

3. Select an option to be added to the rule:

   - Metadata: Enter a metadata label and click the plus icon (). Then enter any needed data in the field provided in the rule designer.

   - Attribute: Select from the list of rule attributes. Then further define the value in the field or option displayed in the rule designer.

   - Freeze areas for editing: Select Conditions or Actions to restrict the area from being modified in the rule designer.

     Figure 291. Rule options

4. Click Save in the rule designer to save your work.

###### Rule attributes

Rule attributes are additional specifications that you can add to business rules to modify rule behavior. The following table lists the names and supported values of the attributes that you can assign to rules:

Table 44. Rule attributes
Attribute | Value
--- | ---
`salience` | An integer defining the priority of the rule. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue. Example: `salience 10`
`enabled` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule is enabled. When the option is not selected, the rule is disabled. Example: `enabled true`
`date-effective` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule can be activated only if the current date and time is after a `date-effective` attribute. Example: `date-effective "4-Sep-2018"`
`date-expires` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule cannot be activated if the current date and time is after the `date-expires` attribute. Example: `date-expires "4-Oct-2018"`
`no-loop` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule cannot be reactivated (looped) if a consequence of the rule re-triggers a previously met condition. When the condition is not selected, the rule can be looped in these circumstances. Example: `no-loop true`
`agenda-group` | A string identifying an agenda group to which you want to assign the rule. Agenda groups allow you to partition the agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. Only rules in an agenda group that has acquired a focus are able to be activated. Example: `agenda-group "GroupName"`
`activation-group` | A string identifying an activation (or XOR) group to which you want to assign the rule. In activation groups, only one rule can be activated. The first rule to fire will cancel all pending activations of all rules in the activation group. Example: `activation-group "GroupName"`
`duration` | A long integer value defining the duration of time in milliseconds after which the rule can be activated, if the rule conditions are still met. Example: `duration 10000`
`timer` | A string identifying either `int` (interval) or `cron` timer definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `timer "*/5 * * * *"` (every 5 minutes)
`calendar` | A Quartz calendar definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `calendars "* * 0-7,18-23 ? * *"` (exclude non-business hours)
`auto-focus` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the rule is activated, a focus is automatically given to the agenda group to which the rule is assigned. Example: `auto-focus true`
`lock-on-active` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within rule flow groups or agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the ruleflow group for the rule becomes active or the agenda group for the rule receives a focus, the rule cannot be activated again until the ruleflow group is no longer active or the agenda group loses the focus. This is a stronger version of the `no-loop` attribute, because the activation of a matching rule is discarded regardless of the origin of the update (not only by the rule itself). This attribute is ideal for calculation rules where you have a number of rules that modify a fact and you do not want any rule re-matching and firing again. Example: `lock-on-active true`
`ruleflow-group` | A string identifying a rule flow group. In rule flow groups, rules can fire only when the group is activated by the associated rule flow. Example: `ruleflow-group "GroupName"`
`dialect` | A string identifying either `JAVA` or `MVEL` as the language to be used for code expressions in the rule. By default, the rule uses the dialect specified at the package level. Any dialect specified here overrides the package dialect setting for the rule. Example: `dialect "JAVA"`

#### 17.3.2. Defining data tables for guided rule templates

After you create a guided rule template and add template keys for field values, a data table is displayed in the Data table of the guided rule templates designer. Each column in the data table corresponds to a template key that you added in the guided rule template. Use this table to define values for each template key row by row. Each row of values that you define in the data table for that template results in a rule.

Procedure

1. In the guided rule templates designer, click the Data tab to view the data table. Each column in the data table corresponds to a template key that you added in the guided rule template.

   | If you did not add any template keys to the rule template, then this data table does not appear and the template does not function as a genuine template but essentially as an individual guided rule. For this reason, template keys are fundamental in creating guided rule templates.

2. Click Add row and define the data values for each template key column to generate that rule (row).

3. Continue adding rows and defining data values for each rule that will be generated. You can click Add row for each new row, or click the plus icon () or minus icon to add or remove rows.

   Figure 292. Sample data table for a guided rule template

   To view the DRL code, click the Source tab in the guided rule templates designer.

   Example:

       rule "PaymentRules_6"
       	dialect "mvel"
       	when
       		Customer( internetService == false ,
       			phoneService == false ,
       			TVService == true )
       	then
       		RecurringPayment fact0 = new RecurringPayment();
       		fact0.setAmount( 5 );
       		insertLogical( fact0 );
       end

       rule "PaymentRules_5"
       	dialect "mvel"
       	when
       		Customer( internetService == false ,
       			phoneService == true ,
       			TVService == false )
       	then
       		RecurringPayment fact0 = new RecurringPayment();
       		fact0.setAmount( 5 );
       		insertLogical( fact0 );
       end
       ...
       //Other rules omitted for brevity.

4. As a visual aid, click the grid icon in the upper-left corner of the data table to toggle cell merging on and off, if needed. Cells in the same column with identical values are merged into a single cell.

   Figure 293. Merge cells in a data table

   You can then use the expand/collapse icon [+/-] in the upper-left corner of each newly merged cell to collapse the rows corresponding to the merged cell, or to re-expand the collapsed rows.

   Figure 294. Collapse merged cells

5. After you define the template key data for all rules and adjust the table display as needed, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the guided rule templates designer to validate the guided rule template. If the rule template validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all components in the rule template and data defined in the data table, and try again to validate the rule template until the rule template passes.

6. Click Save in the guided rule templates designer to save your work.

### 17.4. Guided decision tables

Guided decision tables are a wizard-led alternative to spreadsheet decision tables for defining business rules in a tabular format. With guided decision tables, you are led by a UI-based wizard in Business Central that helps you define rule attributes, metadata, conditions, and actions based on specified data objects in your project. After you create your guided decision tables, the rules you defined are compiled into Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules as with all other rule assets.

All data objects related to a guided decision table must be in the same project package as the guided decision table. Assets in the same package are imported by default. After you create the necessary data objects and the guided decision table, you can use the Data Objects tab of the guided decision tables designer to verify that all required data objects are listed or to import other existing data objects by adding a New item.

#### 17.4.1. Creating guided decision tables

You can use guided decision tables to define rule attributes, metadata, conditions, and actions in a tabular format that can be added to your business rules project.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Guided Decision Table.

3. Enter an informative Guided Decision Table name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required data objects have been assigned or will be assigned.

4. Select Use Wizard to finish setting up the table in the wizard, or leave this option unselected to finish creating the table and specify remaining configurations in the guided decision tables designer.

5. Select the hit policy that you want your rows of rules in the table to conform to. For details, see Hit policies for guided decision tables.

6. Specify whether you want the Extended entry or Limited entry table. For details, see Types of guided decision tables.

7. Click Ok to complete the setup. If you have selected Use Wizard, the Guided Decision Table wizard is displayed. If you did not select the Use Wizard option, this prompt does not appear and you are taken directly to the table designer.

   Figure 295. Create guided decision table

8. If you are using the wizard, add any available imports, fact patterns, constraints, and actions, and select whether table columns should expand. Click Finish to close the wizard and view the table designer.

   Figure 296. Guided Decision Table wizard

In the guided decision tables designer, you can add or edit columns and rows, and make other final adjustments.

#### 17.4.2. Hit policies for guided decision tables

Hit policies determine the order in which rules (rows) in a guided decision table are applied, whether top to bottom, per specified priority, or other options.

The following hit policies are available:

- None: (Default hit policy) Multiple rows can be executed and the verification warns about rows that conflict. Any decision tables that have been uploaded (using a non-guided decision table spreadsheet) will adopt this hit policy.

- Resolved Hit: Only one row at a time can be executed according to specified priority, regardless of list order (you can give row 10 priority over row 5, for example). This means you can keep the order of the rows you want for visual readability, but specify priority exceptions.

- Unique Hit: Only one row at a time can be executed, and each row must be unique, with no overlap of conditions being met. If more than one row is executed, then the verification produces a warning at development time.

- First Hit: Only one row at a time can be executed in the order listed in the table, top to bottom.

- Rule Order: Multiple rows can be executed and verification does not report conflicts between the rows since they are expected to happen.

Figure 297. Available hit policies

##### 17.4.2.1. Hit policy examples: Decision table for discounts on movie tickets

The following is part of a decision table for discounts on movie tickets based on customer age, student status, or military status, or all three.

Table 45. Decision table for available discounts on movie tickets
Row Number | Discount Type | Discount
--- | --- | ---
1 | Senior citizen (age 60+) | 10%
2 | Student | 10%
3 | Military | 10%

The total discount to be applied in the end will vary depending on the hit policy specified for the table, as follows.

- None/Rule Order: With both None and Rule Order hit policies, all applicable rules are incorporated, in this case allowing discounts to be stacked for each customer.

  Example: A senior citizen who is also a student and a military veteran will receive all three discounts, totaling 30%.

  Key difference: With None, warnings are created for multiple rows applied. With Rule Order, those warnings are not created.

- First Hit/Resolved Hit: With both First Hit and Resolved Hit policies, only one of the discounts can be applied.

  For First Hit, the discount that is satisfied first in the list is applied and the others are ignored.

  Example: A senior citizen who is also a student and a military veteran will receive only the senior citizen discount of 10%, since that is listed first in the table.

  For Resolved Hit, a modified table is required. The discount that you assign a priority exception to in the table, regardless of listed order, will be applied first. To assign this exception, include a new column that specifies the priority of one discount (row) over others.

  Example: If military discounts are prioritized higher than age or student discounts, despite the listed order, then a senior citizen who is also a student and a military veteran will receive only the military discount of 10%, regardless of age or student status.

  Consider the following modified decision table that accommodates a Resolved Hit policy:

  Table 46. Modified decision table that accommodates a Resolved Hit policy
  Row Number | Discount Type | Has Priority over Row | Discount
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  1 | Senior citizen (age 60+) |  | 10%
  2 | Student |  | 10%
  3 | Military | 1 | 10%

  In this modified table, the military discount is essentially the new row 1 and therefore takes priority over both age and student discounts, and any other discounts added later. You do not need to specify priority over rows "1 and 2", only over row "1". This changes the row hit order to 3 → 1 → 2 → …​ and so on as the table grows.

  | The row order would be changed in the same way if you actually moved the military discount to row 1 and applied a First Hit policy to the table instead. However, if you want the rules listed in a certain way and applied differently, such as in an alphabetized table, the Resolved Hit policy is useful.

  Key difference: With First Hit, rules are applied strictly in the listed order. With Resolved Hit, rules are applied in the listed order unless priority exceptions are specified.

- Unique Hit: A modified table is required. With a Unique Hit policy, rows must be created in a way that it is impossible to satisfy multiple rules at one time. However, you can still specify row-by-row whether to apply one rule or multiple. In this way, with a Unique Hit policy you can make decision tables more granular and prevent overlap warnings.

  Consider the following modified decision table that accommodates a Unique Hit policy:

  Table 47. Modified decision table that accommodates a Unique Hit policy
  Row Number | Is Senior Citizen (age 65+) | Is Student | Is Military | Discount
  --- | --- | --- | --- | ---
  1 | yes | no | no | 10%
  2 | no | yes | no | 10%
  3 | no | no | yes | 10%
  4 | yes | yes | no | 20%
  5 | yes | no | yes | 20%
  6 | no | yes | yes | 20%
  7 | yes | yes | yes | 30%

  In this modified table, each row is unique, with no allowance of overlap, and any single discount or any combination of discounts is accommodated.

###### Types of guided decision tables

Two types of decision tables are supported in Drools: Extended entry and Limited entry tables.

- Extended entry: An Extended Entry decision table is one for which the column definitions specify Pattern, Field, and Operator but not value. The values, or states, are themselves held in the body of the decision table.

- Limited entry: A Limited Entry decision table is one for which the column definitions specify value in addition to Pattern, Field, and Operator. The decision table states, held in the body of the table, are boolean where a positive value (a marked check box) has the effect of meaning the column should apply, or be matched. A negative value (a cleared check box) means the column does not apply.

#### 17.4.3. Adding columns to guided decision tables

After you have created the guided decision table, you can define and add various types of columns within the guided decision tables designer.

Prerequisites

- Any data objects that will be used for column parameters, such as Facts and Fields, have been created within the same package where the guided decision table is found, or have been imported from another package in Data Objects → New item of the guided decision tables designer.

For descriptions of these column parameters, see the "Required column parameters" segments for each column type in Types of columns in guided decision tables.

For details about creating data objects, see Data Modeller.

Procedure

1. In the guided decision tables designer, click Columns → Insert Column.

2. Click Include advanced options to view the full list of column options.

   Figure 298. Add columns

3. Select the column type that you want to add, click Next, and follow the steps in the wizard to specify the data required to add the column.

   For descriptions of each column type and required parameters for setup, see Types of columns in guided decision tables.

4. Click Finish to add the configured column.

After all columns are added, you can begin adding rows of rules correlating to your columns to complete the decision table. For details, see Adding rows and defining rules in guided decision tables.

Figure 299. Example of complete guided decision table

#### 17.4.4. Types of columns in guided decision tables

The Add a new column wizard for guided decision tables provides the following column options. (Select Include advanced options to view all options.)

- Add a Condition

- Add a Condition BRL fragment

- Add a Metadata column

- Add an Action BRL fragment

- Add an Attribute column

- Delete an existing fact

- Execute a Work Item

- Set the value of a field

- Set the value of a field with a Work Item result

These column types and the parameters required for each in the Add a new column wizard are described in the sections that follow.

| IMPORTANT: Required data objects for column parameters Some of the column parameters described in this section, such as Fact Patterns and Fields, provide drop-down options consisting only of data objects already defined within the same package where the guided decision table is found. Available data objects for the package are listed in the Data Objects panel of the Project Explorer and in the Data Objects tab of the guided decision tables designer. You can create additional data objects within the package as needed, or import them from another package in Data Objects → New item of the guided decision tables designer. For details about creating data objects, see Data Modeller.

##### 17.4.4.1. "Add a Condition"

Conditions represent fact patterns defined in the left ("WHEN") portion of a rule. With this column option, you can define one or more condition columns that check for the presence or absence of data objects with certain field values, and that affect the action ("THEN") portion of the rule. You can define a binding for the fact in the condition table, or select one that has previously been defined. You can also choose to negate the pattern.

Example:

    when
      $i : IncomeSource( type == "Asset" ) // Binds the IncomeSource object to the $i variable
    then
      ...
    end

    when
      not IncomeSource( type == "Asset" ) // Negates matching pattern
    then
      ...
    end

After a binding is specified, you can define field constraints. If two or more columns are defined using the same fact pattern binding, the field constraints become composite field constraints on the same pattern. If you define multiple bindings for a single model class, each binding becomes a separate model class in the condition ("WHEN") side of the rule.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Pattern: Select from the list of fact patterns already used in conditions in your table or create a new fact pattern. A fact pattern is a combination of an available data object in the package (see the note on Required data objects for details) and a model class binding that you specify. (Examples: `LoanApplication [application]` or `IncomeSource [income]` where the bracketed portion is the binding to the given fact type)

- Entry point: Define the entry point for the fact pattern, if applicable. An entry point is a gate or stream through which facts enter the Drools engine, if specified. (Examples: `Application Stream`, `Credit Check Stream`)

- Calculation type: Select one of the following calculation types:

  - Literal value: The value in the cell will be compared with the field using the operator.

  - Formula: The expression in the cell will be evaluated and then compared with the field.

  - Predicate: No field is needed; the expression will be evaluated to `true` or `false`.

- Field: Select a field from the previously specified fact pattern. The field options are defined in the fact file in the Data Objects panel of your project. (Examples: `amount` or `lengthYears` fields within the `LoanApplication` fact type)

- Binding (optional): Define a binding for the previously selected field, if needed. (Example: For pattern `LoanApplication [application]`, field `amount`, and operator `equal to`, if binding is set to `$amount`, the end condition will be `application : LoanAppplication($amount : amount == [value])`.)

- Operator: Select the operator to be applied to the fact pattern and field previously specified.

- Value list (optional): Enter a list of value options, delimited by a comma and space, to limit table input data for the condition ("WHEN") portion of the rule. When this value list is defined, the values will be provided in the table cells for that column as a drop-down list, from which users can select only one option. (Example list: `Monday, Wednesday, Friday` to specify only these three options)

- Default value (optional): Select one of the previously defined value options as the default value that will appear in the cell automatically in a new row. If the default value is not specified, the table cell will be blank by default. You can also select a default value from any previously configured data enumerations in the project, listed in the Enumeration Definitions panel of the Project Explorer. (You can create enumerations in Menu → Design → Projects → [select project] → Add Asset → Enumeration.)

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

###### Inserting an `any other` value in condition column cells

For simple condition columns in guided decision tables, you can apply an `any other` value to table cells within the column if the following parameters are set:

- Calculation type for the condition column has been set to `Literal value`.

- Operator has been set as equality `==` or inequality `!=`.

The `any other` value enables a rule to be defined for any other field values not explicitly defined in the rules already in the table.

Example:

    when
      IncomeSource( type not in ("Asset", "Job") )
      ...
    then
      ...
    end

Procedure

1. Select a cell of a condition column that uses the `==` or `!=` operator.

2. In the upper-right toolbar of the table designer, click Edit → Insert "any other" value.

##### 17.4.4.2. "Add a Condition BRL fragment"

A Business Rule Language (BRL) fragment is a section of a rule created using the guided rules designer. The condition BRL fragment is the "WHEN" portion of the rule, and the action BRL fragment is the "THEN" portion of the rule. With this column option, you can define a condition BRL fragment to be used in the left ("WHEN") side of a rule. Simpler column types can refer to Facts and Fact fields bound in the BRL fragment and vice-versa.

Example condition BRL fragment for a loan application:

Figure 300. Add a condition BRL fragment with the embedded guided rules designer

You can also select Free form DRL from the list of condition options to define the condition BRL fragment without the embedded guided rules designer.

Figure 301. Add a condition BRL fragment with free form DRL

| Template keys When you add a field for a condition BRL fragment, one of the value options is Template key (as opposed to Literal or Formula). Template keys are placeholder variables that are interchanged with a specified value when the guided decision table is generated, and form separate columns in the table for each template key value specified. While Literal and Formula values are static in a decision table, Template key values can be modified as needed. In the embedded guided rules designer, you can add a template key value to a field by selecting the Template key field option and entering the value in the editor in the format `$key`. For example, `$age` creates an `$age` column in the decision table. In free form DRL, you can add a template key value to facts in the format `@{key}`. For example, `Person( age > @{age} )` creates an `$age` column in the decision table. The data type is String for new columns added using template keys.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Rule Modeller: Define the condition BRL fragment ("WHEN" portion) for the rule.

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

##### 17.4.4.3. "Add a Metadata column"

With this column option, you can define a metadata element as a column in your decision table. Each column represents the normal metadata annotation in DRL rules. By default, the metadata column is hidden. To display the column, click Edit Columns in the guided decision tables designer and clear the Hide column check box.

Required column parameter

The following parameter is required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Metadata: Enter the name of the metadata item in Java variable form (that is, it cannot start with a number or contain spaces or special characters).

##### 17.4.4.4. "Add an Action BRL fragment"

A Business Rule Language (BRL) fragment is a section of a rule created using the guided rules designer. The condition BRL fragment is the "WHEN" portion of the rule, and the action BRL fragment is the "THEN" portion of the rule. With this column option you can define an action BRL fragment to be used in the right ("THEN") side of a rule. Simpler column types can refer to Facts and Fact fields bound in the BRL fragment and vice-versa.

Example action BRL fragment for a loan application:

Figure 302. Add an action BRL fragment with the embedded guided rules designer

You can also select Add free form DRL from the list of action options to define the action BRL fragment without the embedded guided rules designer.

Figure 303. Add an action BRL fragment with free form DRL

| Template keys When you add a field for an action BRL fragment, one of the value options is Template key (as opposed to Literal or Formula). Template keys are placeholder variables that are interchanged with a specified value when the guided decision table is generated, and form separate columns in the table for each template key value specified. While Literal and Formula values are static in a decision table, Template key values can be modified as needed. In the embedded guided rules designer, you can add a template key value to a field by selecting the Template key field option and entering the value in the editor in the format `$key`. For example, `$age` creates an `$age` column in the decision table. In free form DRL, you can add a template key value to facts in the format `@{key}`. For example, `Person( age > @{age} )` creates an `$age` column in the decision table. The data type is String for new columns added using template keys.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Rule Modeller: Define the action BRL fragment ("THEN" portion) for the rule.

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

##### 17.4.4.5. "Add an Attribute column"

With this column option, you can add one or more attribute columns representing any of the DRL rule attributes, such as Saliance, Enabled, Date-Effective, and others.

Example:

    rule "Rule1"
    salience 100 // This rule has the highest priority
    when
      $i : IncomeSource( type == "Asset" )
    then
      ...
    end

For descriptions of each attribute, select the attribute from the list in the wizard.

| Hit policies and attributes Note that depending on the hit policy that you have defined for the decision table, some attributes may be disabled because they are internally used by the hit policy. For example, if you have assigned the Resolved Hit policy to this table so that rows (rules) are applied according to a priority order specified in the table, then the Salience attribute would be obsolete. The reason is that the Salience attribute escalates rule priority according to a defined salience value, and that value would be overridden by the Resolved Hit policy in the table.

Required Column Parameter

The following parameter is required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Attribute: Select the attribute to be applied to the column.

##### 17.4.4.6. "Delete an existing fact"

With this column option, you can implement an action to delete a fact that was added previously as a fact pattern in the table. When this column is created, the fact types are provided in the table cells for that column as a drop-down list, from which users can select only one option.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

##### 17.4.4.7. "Execute a Work Item"

With this column option, you can execute a work item handler, based on your predefined work item definitions in Business Central. (You can create work items in Menu → Design → Projects → [select project] → Add Asset → Work Item definition.)

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Work Item: Select from the list of your predefined work items.

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

##### 17.4.4.8. "Set the value of a field"

With this column option, you can implement an action to set the value of a field on a previously bound fact for the "THEN" portion of the rule. You have the option to notify the Drools engine of the modified values which could lead to other rules being reactivated.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Pattern: Select from the list of fact patterns already used in conditions or condition BRL fragments in your table or create a new fact pattern. A fact pattern is a combination of an available data object in the package (see the note on Required data objects for details) and a model class binding that you specify. (Examples: `LoanApplication [application]` or `IncomeSource [income]` where the bracketed portion is the binding to the given fact type)

- Field: Select a field from the previously specified fact pattern. The field options are defined in the fact file in the Data Objects panel of your project. (Examples: `amount` or `lengthYears` fields within the `LoanApplication` fact type)

- Value list (optional): Enter a list of value options, delimited by a comma and space, to limit table input data for the action ("THEN") portion of the rule. When this value list is defined, the values will be provided in the table cells for that column as a drop-down list, from which users can select only one option. (Example list: `Accepted, Declined, Pending`)

- Default value (optional): Select one of the previously defined value options as the default value that will appear in the cell automatically in a new row. If the default value is not specified, the table cell will be blank by default. You can also select a default value from any previously configured data enumerations in the project, listed in the Enumeration Definitions panel of the Project Explorer. (You can create enumerations in Menu → Design → Projects → [select project] → Add Asset → Enumeration.)

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

- Logically insert: This option appears when the selected Fact Pattern is not currently used in another column in the guided decision table (see the next field description). Select this to insert the fact pattern logically into the Drools engine, or clear this to insert it regularly. The Drools engine is responsible for logical decisions on insertions and retractions of facts. After regular or stated insertions, facts have to be retracted explicitly. After logical insertions, facts are automatically retracted when the conditions that asserted the facts in the first place are no longer true.

- Update engine with changes: This option appears when the selected Fact Pattern is already used in another column in the guided decision table. Select this to update the Drools engine with the modified field values, or clear this to not update the Drools engine.

##### 17.4.4.9. "Set the value of a field with a Work Item result"

With this column option, you can implement an action to set the value of a previously defined fact field to the value of a result of a work item handler for the "THEN" portion of the rule. The work item must define a result parameter of the same data type as a field on a bound fact in order for you to set the field to the return parameter. (You can create work items in Menu → Design → Projects → [select project] → Add Asset → Work Item definition.)

An Execute a Work Item column must already be created in the table for this column option to be created.

Required column parameters

The following parameters are required in the Add a new column wizard to set up this column type:

- Pattern: Select from the list of fact patterns already used in your table or create a new fact pattern. A fact pattern is a combination of an available data object in the package (see the note on Required data objects for details) and a model class binding that you specify. (Examples: `LoanApplication [application]` or `IncomeSource [income]` where the bracketed portion is the binding to the given fact type)

- Field: Select a field from the previously specified fact pattern. The field options are defined in the fact file in the Data Objects panel of your project. (Examples: `amount` or `lengthYears` fields within the `LoanApplication` fact type)

- Work Item: Select from the list of your predefined work items. (The work item must define a result parameter of the same data type as a field on a bound fact in order for you to set the field to the return parameter.)

- Header (description): Add header text for the column.

- Hide column: Select this to hide the column, or clear this to display the column.

- Logically insert: This option appears when the selected Fact Pattern is not currently used in another column in the guided decision table (see the next field description). Select this to insert the fact pattern logically into the Drools engine, or clear this to insert it regularly. The Drools engine is responsible for logical decisions on insertions and retractions of facts. After regular or stated insertions, facts have to be retracted explicitly. After logical insertions, facts are automatically retracted when the conditions that asserted the facts in the first place are no longer true.

- Update engine with changes: This option appears when the selected Fact Pattern is already used in another column in the guided decision table. Select this to update the Drools engine with the modified field values, or clear this to not update the Drools engine.

#### 17.4.5. Editing or deleting columns in guided decision tables

You can edit or delete the columns you have created at any time in the guided decision tables designer.

Procedure

1. In the guided decision tables designer, click Columns.

2. Expand the appropriate section and click Edit or Delete next to the column name.

   Figure 304. Edit or delete columns

   | A condition column cannot be deleted if an existing action column uses the same pattern-matching parameters as the condition column.

3. After any column changes, click Finish in the wizard to save.

#### 17.4.6. Adding rows and defining rules in guided decision tables

After you have created your columns in the guided decision table, you can add rows and define rules within the guided decision tables designer.

Prerequisites

- Columns for the guided decision table have been added as described in Adding columns to guided decision tables.

Procedure

1. In the guided decision tables designer, click Insert → Append row or one of the Insert row options. (You can also click Insert column to open the column wizard and define a new column.)

   Figure 305. Add Rows

2. Double-click each cell and enter data. For cells with specified values, select from the cell drop-down options.

   Figure 306. Enter input data in each cell

3. After you define all rows of data in the guided decision table, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the guided decision tables designer to validate the table. If the table validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all components in the table, and try again to validate the table until the table passes.

   | Although guided decision tables have real-time verification and validation, you should still manually validate the completed decision table to ensure optimal results.

4. Click Save in the table designer to save your changes.

#### 17.4.7. Real-time verification and validation of guided decision tables

Business Central provides a real-time verification and validation feature for guided decision tables to ensure that your tables are complete and error free. Guided decision tables are validated after each cell change. If a problem in logic is detected, an error notification appears and describes the problem.

##### 17.4.7.1. Types of problems in guided decision tables

The validation and verification feature detects the following types of problems:

Redundancy

  Redundancy occurs when two rows in a decision table execute the same consequences for the same set of facts. For example, two rows checking a client’s birthday and providing a birthday discount may result in double discount.

Subsumption

  Subsumption is similar to redundancy and occurs when two rules execute the same consequences, but one executes on a subset of facts of the other. For example, consider these two rules:

  - when Person age > 10 then Increase Counter

  - when Person age > 20 then Increase Counter

  In this case, if a person is 15 years old, only one rule fires and if a person is 20 years old, both rules fire. Such cases cause similar trouble during runtime as redundancy.

Conflicts

  A conflicting situation occurs when two similar conditions have different consequences. Conflicts can occur between two rows (rules) or two cells in a decision table.

  The following example illustrates conflict between two rows in a decision table:

  - when Deposit > 20000 then Approve Loan

  - when Deposit > 20000 then Refuse Loan

  In this case, there is no way to know if the loan will be approved or not.

  The following example illustrates conflict between two cells in a decision table:

  - when Age > 25

  - when Age < 25

  A row with conflicting cells never executes.

Broken Unique Hit Policy

  When the Unique Hit policy is applied to a decision table, only one row at a time can be executed and each row must be unique, with no overlap of conditions being met. If more than one row is executed, then the verification report identifies the broken hit policy. For example, consider the following conditions in a table that determines eligibility for a price discount:

  - when Is Student = true

  - when Is Military = true

  If a customer is both a student and in the military, both conditions apply and break the Unique Hit policy. Rows in this type of table must therefore be created in a way that does not allow multiple rules to fire at one time. For details about hit policies, see Hit policies for guided decision tables.

Deficiency

  Deficiency is similar to a conflict and occurs the logic of a rule in a decision table is incomplete. For example, consider the following two deficient rules:

  - when Age > 20 then Approve Loan

  - when Deposit < 20000 then Refuse Loan

  These two rules may lead to confusion for a person who is over 20 years old and has deposited less than 20000. You can add more constraints to avoid the conflict.

Missing Columns

  When deleted columns result in incomplete or incorrect logic, rules cannot fire properly. This is detected so that you can address the missing columns, or adjust the logic to not rely on intentionally deleted conditions or actions.

Incomplete Ranges

  Ranges of field values are incomplete if a table contains constraints against possible field values but does not define all possible values. The verification report identifies any incomplete ranges provided. For example, if your table has a check for if an application is approved, the verification report reminds you to make sure you also handle situations where the application was not approved.

##### 17.4.7.2. Types of notifications

The verification and validation feature uses three types of notifications:

- Error: A serious problem that may lead to the guided decision table failing to work as designed at run time. Conflicts, for example, are reported as errors.

- Warning: Likely a serious problem that may not prevent the guided decision table from working but requires attention. Subsumptions, for example, are reported as warnings.

- Information: A moderate or minor problem that may not prevent the guided decision table from working but requires attention. Missing columns, for example, are reported as information.

| Business Central verification and validation does not prevent you from saving an incorrect change. The feature only reports issues while editing and you can still continue to overlook those and save your changes.

##### 17.4.7.3. Disabling verification and validation of guided decision tables

The decision table verification and validation feature of Business Central is enabled by default. You can disable it by setting the `org.kie.verification.disable-dtable-realtime-verification` system property value to `true` in your Red Hat JBoss EAP directory.

Procedure

Navigate to `$EAP_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml` and add the following system property:

    <property name="org.kie.verification.disable-dtable-realtime-verification" value="true"/>

### 17.5. Guided decision table graphs

Whilst it is possible to author single Guided Decision Tables it is also possible to author a graph of related tables where an action of one may provide a potential match for a condition of another. In this scenario the tables are said to be related.

#### 17.5.1. Editor

The editor itself preserves all the features of the Guided Decision Table Editor merely adding the ability to visualise multiple tables and their relationships in a single view. Selecting a single table leads to the column definitions panel, Source and Data Objects tabs being updated to reflect the selected table. Validation & Verification reporting is also updated to reflect the selected table. The Overview tab maintains state of the graph as a whole.

Figure 307. Graph editor and radar

#### 17.5.2. Creating a new graph

When a new "Guided Decision Table Graph" is first created the target package is scanned for existing single Guided Decision Tables. Those found are checked for relationships and, if any exist, added automatically to the new graph.

#### 17.5.3. Adding new tables to the graph

Tables can be added to the graph by clicking on the "Documents…​" menu entry. This reveals a tool panel that lists the tables already part of the graph. The same panel gives the User the ability to either add a new table or open an existing table.

Figure 308. Documents popup

##### 17.5.3.1. Adding new tables

Clicking on "New…​" launches the New Guided Decision Table Wizard. On completion of the Wizard the new table will be added to the graph and any relationships automatically added.

##### 17.5.3.2. Adding existing tables

Clicking on "Open…​" reveals a file selector wherefrom one or more existing Guided Decision Tables can be selected and added to the graph. If no additional Guided Decision Tables are found a message is shown to the User.

Figure 309. Documents popup - Opening existing

#### 17.5.4. Removing tables

Tables can be removed from the graph by opening the "Documents…​" panel and clicking on the "X" icon beside the table. Tables removed from the graph are not deleted from the Project and can continue to be edited by the Gudied Decision Table Editor.

### 17.6. Guided decision trees

Business Central supports authoring of simple Decision Trees.

| The editor does not support nested Data Objects at present. It is therefore advised to only use Guided Decision Trees with flat Data Object models.

#### 17.6.1. The initial editor layout

When a new Guided Decision Tree is created the editor is initially blank.

The left-hand side is a palette of available Data Objects, their fields and Actions.

The right-hand side is the area where you can drag and drop Data Objects, their fields or Actions to build a tree.

The editor will show a connector between the node being dragged and applicable children to which it can be attached. When the drag is complete the new node will be attached to the applicable child. Root nodes will not have a connector shown when being dragged to an empty tree. Completing the drag positions the root node in the centre of the editor.

There are various restrictions when composing a tree:-

1. A tree must have a Data Object at the root.

2. A tree can only have one root.

3. Data Objects can have either other Data Objects, field constraints or Actions as children.

   The field constraints must be on fields of the same Data Object as the parent node.

4. Field constraints can have either other field constraints or Actions as children.

   The field constraints must be on fields of the same Data Object as the parent node.

5. Actions can only have other Actions as children.

Figure 310. Guided Decision Trees - Empty editor

Expanding the palette reveals Tree Nodes for the Data Object and its fields.

Figure 311. Guided Decision Trees - Expanded palette

#### 17.6.2. First steps

Drag a Data Object on to the tree authoring area.

Figure 312. Guided Decision Trees - Data Object root node

Clicking on a node selects it.

Icons to manipulate the node appear when the node is selected.

The icons are:

1. Delete

   Deleting a node will also delete all children.

2. Edit

   Collapsed nodes cannot be edited as they contain numerous children.

3. Collapse

Figure 313. Guided Decision Trees - Selected node

#### 17.6.3. Editing Data Object nodes

Selecting a Data Object node and clicking the edit icon shows a popup to manage the node.

The popup shows the Data Object type and allows it to be bound to a variable. Bound Data Objects can be modified or retracted by Actions.

Figure 314. Guided Decision Trees - Data Object Editor

#### 17.6.4. Editing Field Constraint nodes

Selecting a Field Constraint node and clicking the edit icon shows a popup to manage the node.

The popup shows the Data Object type and field and allows the field to be bound to a variable. An operator, applicable to the Data Model field’s data-type, can be selected and a corresponding value entered.

Figure 315. Guided Decision Trees - Field Constraint Editor

#### 17.6.5. Editing Action nodes

Selecting an Insert Action node and clicking the edit icon shows a popup to manage the node.

The popup allows selection of the Data Object to be inserted and whether it’s insertion is "logical". Please refer to Drools documentation regarding Truth Maintenance for more information. Fields for the new Data Object can have values set.

Figure 316. Guided Decision Trees - Action "Insert" Editor

Selecting an Insert Retract node and clicking the edit icon shows a popup to manage the node.

The popup allows any Data Object bound in the path from the selected node to the root node to be selected for retraction.

Figure 317. Guided Decision Trees - Action "Retract" Editor

Selecting an Insert Update node and clicking the edit icon shows a popup to manage the node.

The popup allows any Data Object bound in the path from the selected node to the root node to be modified. Fields for the modified Data Object can have values set.

Figure 318. Guided Decision Trees - Action "Update" Editor

#### 17.6.6. Managing the tree

Even simple trees can grow in size and become difficult to maintain.

It is therefore possible to collapse parts of the tree, giving more space in the user interface to maintain different parts of the tree.

If a node has children, when selected, it will have an icon to collapse the children. Clicking this icon will collapse children.

A collapsed node can equally be expanded by selecting it and clicking on the exapnd icon. A collapsed node cannot be edited as it contains numerous children. Deleting a collapsed node deletes all children too.

Figure 319. Guided Decision Trees - Collapsing nodes
Figure 320. Guided Decision Trees - Collapsed node

### 17.7. Spreadsheet decision tables

Spreadsheet decision tables are XLS or XLSX spreadsheets that contain business rules defined in a tabular format. You can include spreadsheet decision tables with standalone Drools projects or upload them to projects in Business Central. Each row in a decision table is a rule, and each column is a condition, an action, or another rule attribute. After you create and upload your spreadsheet decision tables, the rules you defined are compiled into Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules as with all other rule assets.

All data objects related to a spreadsheet decision table must be in the same project package as the spreadsheet decision table. Assets in the same package are imported by default. Existing assets in other packages can be imported with the decision table.

#### 17.7.1. Decision table use case

An online shopping site lists the shipping charges for ordered items. The site provides free shipping under the following conditions:

- The number of items ordered is 4 or more and the checkout total is $300 or more.

- Standard shipping is selected (4 or 5 business days from the date of purchase).

The following are the shipping rates under these conditions:

Table 48. For orders less than $300
Number of items | Delivery day | Shipping charge in USD, N = Number of items
--- | --- | ---
3 or fewer | Next day 2nd day Standard | 35 15 10
4 or more | Next day 2nd day Standard | N*7.50 N*3.50 N*2.50

Table 49. For orders more than $300
Number of items | Delivery day | Shipping charge in USD, N = Number of items
--- | --- | ---
3 or fewer | Next day 2nd day Standard | 25 10 N*1.50
4 or more | Next day 2nd day Standard | N*5 N*2 FREE

These conditions and rates are shown in the following example spreadsheet decision table:

Figure 321. Decision table for shipping charges

In order for a decision table to be uploaded in Business Central, the table must comply with certain structure and syntax requirements, within an XLS or XLSX spreadsheet, as shown in this example. For more information, see Defining spreadsheet decision tables.

#### 17.7.2. Defining spreadsheet decision tables

Spreadsheet decision tables (XLS or XLSX) require two key areas that define rule data: a `RuleSet` area and a `RuleTable` area. The `RuleSet` area of the spreadsheet defines elements that you want to apply globally to all rules in the same package (not only the spreadsheet), such as a rule set name or universal rule attributes. The `RuleTable` area defines the actual rules (rows) and the conditions, actions, and other rule attributes (columns) that constitute that rule table within the specified rule set. A spreadsheet of decision tables can contain multiple `RuleTable` areas, but only one `RuleSet` area.

| You should typically upload only one spreadsheet of decision tables, containing all necessary `RuleTable` definitions, per rule package in Business Central. You can upload separate decision table spreadsheets for separate packages, but uploading multiple spreadsheets in the same package can cause compilation errors from conflicting `RuleSet` or `RuleTable` attributes and is therefore not recommended.

Refer to the following sample spreadsheet as you define your decision table:

Figure 322. Sample spreadsheet decision table for shipping charges
Procedure

1. In a new XLS or XLSX spreadsheet, go to the second or third column and label a cell `RuleSet` (row 1 in example). Reserve the column or columns to the left for descriptive metadata (optional).

2. In the next cell to the right, enter a name for the `RuleSet`. This named rule set will contain all `RuleTable` rules defined in the rule package.

3. Under the `RuleSet` cell, define any rule attributes (one per cell) that you want to apply globally to all rule tables in the package. Specify attribute values in the cells to the right. For example, you can enter an `Import` label and in the cell to the right, specify relevant data objects from other packages that you want to import into the package for the decision table (in the format `package.name.object.name`). For supported cell labels and values, see RuleSet definitions.

4. Below the `RuleSet` area and in the same column as the `RuleSet` cell, skip a row and label a new cell `RuleTable` (row 7 in example) and enter a table name in the same cell. The name is used as the initial part of the name for all rules derived from this rule table, with the row number appended for distinction. You can override this automatic naming by inserting a `NAME` attribute column.

5. Use the next four rows to define the following elements as needed (rows 8-11 in example):

   - Rule attributes: Conditions, actions, or other attributes. For supported cell labels and values, see RuleTable definitions.

   - Object types: The data objects to which the rule attributes apply. If the same object type applies to multiple columns, merge the object cells into one cell across multiple columns (as shown in the sample decision table), instead of repeating the object type in multiple cells. When an object type is merged, all columns below the merged range will be combined into one set of constraints within a single pattern for matching a single fact at a time. When an object is repeated in separate columns, the separate columns can create different patterns, potentially matching different or identical facts.

   - Constraints: Constraints on the object types.

   - Column label: (Optional) Any descriptive label for the column, as a visual aid. Leave blank if unused.

     | As an alternative to populating both the object type and constraint cells, you can leave the object type cell or cells empty and enter the full expression in the corresponding constraint cell or cells. For example, instead of `Order` as the object type and `itemsCount > $1` as a constraint (separate cells), you can leave the object type cell empty and enter `Order( itemsCount > $1 )` in the constraint cell, and then do the same for other constraint cells.

6. After you have defined all necessary rule attributes (columns), enter values for each column as needed, row by row, to generate rules (rows 12-17 in example). Cells with no data are ignored (such as when a condition or action does not apply).

   If you need to add more rule tables to this decision table spreadsheet, skip a row after the last rule in the previous table, label another `RuleTable` cell in the same column as the previous `RuleTable` and `RuleSet` cells, and create the new table following the same steps in this section (rows 19-29 in example).

7. Save your XLS or XLSX spreadsheet to finish.

| Only the first worksheet in a spreadsheet workbook will be processed as a decision table when you upload the spreadsheet in Business Central. Each `RuleSet` name combined with the `RuleTable` name must be unique across all decision table files in the same package.

After you upload the decision table in Business Central, the rules are rendered as DRL rules like the following example, from the sample spreadsheet:

    //row 12
    rule "Basic_12"
    salience 10
      when
        $order : Order( itemsCount > 0, itemsCount <= 3, deliverInDays == 1 )
      then
        insert( new Charge( 35 ) );
    end

| Enabling white space used in cell values By default, any white space before or after values in decision table cells is removed before the decision table is processed by the Drools engine. To retain white space that you use intentionally before or after values in cells, set the `drools.trimCellsInDTable` system property to `false` in your Drools distribution.

##### 17.7.2.1. RuleSet definitions

Entries in the `RuleSet` area of a decision table define DRL constructs and rule attributes that you want to apply to all rules in a package (not only in the spreadsheet). Entries must be in a vertically stacked sequence of cell pairs, where the first cell contains a label and the cell to the right contains the value. A decision table spreadsheet can have only one `RuleSet` area.

The following table lists the supported labels and values for `RuleSet` definitions:

Table 50. Supported `RuleSet` definitions
Label | Value | Usage
--- | --- | ---
`RuleSet` | The package name for the generated DRL file. Optional, the default is `rule_table`. | Must be the first entry.
`Sequential` | `true` or `false`. If `true`, then salience is used to ensure that rules fire from the top down. | Optional, at most once. If omitted, no firing order is imposed.
`SequentialMaxPriority` | Integer numeric value | Optional, at most once. In sequential mode, this option is used to set the start value of the salience. If omitted, the default value is 65535.
`SequentialMinPriority` | Integer numeric value | Optional, at most once. In sequential mode, this option is used to check if this minimum salience value is not violated. If omitted, the default value is 0.
`EscapeQuotes` | `true` or `false`. If `true`, then quotation marks are escaped so that they appear literally in the DRL. | Optional, at most once. If omitted, quotation marks are escaped.
`Import` | A comma-separated list of Java classes to import from another package. | Optional, may be used repeatedly.
`Variables` | Declarations of DRL globals (a type followed by a variable name). Multiple global definitions must be separated by commas. | Optional, may be used repeatedly.
`Functions` | One or more function definitions, according to DRL syntax. | Optional, may be used repeatedly.
`Queries` | One or more query definitions, according to DRL syntax. | Optional, may be used repeatedly.
`Declare` | One or more declarative types, according to DRL syntax. | Optional, may be used repeatedly.

| In some cases, Microsoft Office, LibreOffice, and OpenOffice might encode a double quotation mark differently, causing a compilation error. For example, `“A”` will fail, but `"A"` will pass.

##### 17.7.2.2. RuleTable definitions

Entries in the `RuleTable` area of a decision table define conditions, actions, and other rule attributes for the rules in that rule table. A spreadsheet of decision tables can contain multiple `RuleTable` areas.

The following table lists the supported labels (column headers) and values for `RuleTable` definitions. For column headers, you can use either the given labels or any custom labels that begin with the letters listed in the table.

Table 51. Supported `RuleTable` definitions
Label | Or custom label that begins with | Value | Usage
--- | --- | --- | ---
`NAME` | N | Provides the name for the rule generated from that row. The default is constructed from the text following the `RuleTable` tag and the row number. | At most one column.
`DESCRIPTION` | I | Results in a comment within the generated rule. | At most one column.
`CONDITION` | C | Code snippet and interpolated values for constructing a constraint within a pattern in a condition. | At least one per rule table.
`ACTION` | A | Code snippet and interpolated values for constructing an action for the consequence of the rule. | At least one per rule table.
`METADATA` | @ | Code snippet and interpolated values for constructing a metadata entry for the rule. | Optional, any number of columns.

The following sections provide more details about how condition, action, and metadata columns use cell data:

Conditions

  For columns headed `CONDITION`, the cells in consecutive lines result in a conditional element:

  - First cell: Text in the first cell below `CONDITION` develops into a pattern for the rule condition, and uses the snippet in the next line as a constraint. If the cell is merged with one or more neighboring cells, a single pattern with multiple constraints is formed. All constraints are combined into a parenthesized list and appended to the text in this cell.

    If this cell is empty, the code snippet in the cell below it must result in a valid conditional element on its own. For example, instead of `Order` as the object type and `itemsCount > $1` as a constraint (separate cells), you can leave the object type cell empty and enter `Order( itemsCount > $1 )` in the constraint cell, and then do the same for any other constraint cells.

    To include a pattern without constraints, you can write the pattern in front of the text of another pattern, with or without an empty pair of parentheses. You can also append a `from` clause to the pattern.

    If the pattern ends with `eval`, code snippets produce boolean expressions for inclusion into a pair of parentheses after `eval`.

  - Second cell: Text in the second cell below `CONDITION` is processed as a constraint on the object reference in the first cell. The code snippet in this cell is modified by interpolating values from cells farther down in the column. If you want to create a constraint consisting of a comparison using `==` with the value from the cells below, then the field selector alone is sufficient. Any other comparison operator must be specified as the last item within the snippet, and the value from the cells below is appended. For all other constraint forms, you must mark the position for including the contents of a cell with the symbol `$param`. Multiple insertions are possible if you use the symbols `$1`, `$2`, and so on, and a comma-separated list of values in the cells below. However, do not separate `$1`, `$2`, and so on, by commas, or the table will fail to process.

    To expand a text according to the pattern `forall($delimiter){$snippet}`, repeat the `$snippet` once for each of the values of the comma-separated list in each of the cells below, insert the value in place of the symbol `$`, and join these expansions by the given `$delimiter`. Note that the `forall` construct may be surrounded by other text.

    If the first cell contains an object, the completed code snippet is added to the conditional element from that cell. A pair of parentheses is provided automatically, as well as a separating comma if multiple constraints are added to a pattern in a merged cell. If the first cell is empty, the code snippet in this cell must result in a valid conditional element on its own. For example, instead of `Order` as the object type and `itemsCount > $1` as a constraint (separate cells), you can leave the object type cell empty and enter `Order( itemsCount > $1 )` in the constraint cell, and then do the same for any other constraint cells.

  - Third cell: Text in the third cell below `CONDITION` is a descriptive label that you define for the column, as a visual aid.

  - Fourth cell: From the fourth row on, non-blank entries provide data for interpolation. A blank cell omits the condition or constraint for this rule.

Actions

  For columns headed `ACTION`, the cells in consecutive lines result in an action statement:

  - First cell: Text in the first cell below `ACTION` is optional. If present, the text is interpreted as an object reference.

  - Second cell: Text in the second cell below `ACTION` is a code snippet that is modified by interpolating values from cells farther down in the column. For a singular insertion, mark the position for including the contents of a cell with the symbol `$param`. Multiple insertions are possible if you use the symbols `$1`, `$2`, and so on, and a comma-separated list of values in the cells below. However, do not separate `$1`, `$2`, and so on, by commas, or the table will fail to process.

    A text without any marker symbols can execute a method call without interpolation. In this case, use any non-blank entry in a row below the cell to include the statement. The `forall` construct is supported.

    If the first cell contains an object, then the cell text (followed by a period), the text in the second cell, and a terminating semicolon are strung together, resulting in a method call that is added as an action statement for the consequence. If the first cell is empty, the code snippet in this cell must result in a valid action element on its own.

  - Third cell: Text in the third cell below `ACTION` is a descriptive label that you define for the column, as a visual aid.

  - Fourth cell: From the fourth row on, non-blank entries provide data for interpolation. A blank cell omits the condition or constraint for this rule.

Metadata

  For columns headed `METADATA`, the cells in consecutive lines result in a metadata annotation for the generated rules:

  - First cell: Text in the first cell below `METADATA` is ignored.

  - Second cell: Text in the second cell below `METADATA` is subject to interpolation, using values from the cells in the rule rows. The metadata marker character `@` is prefixed automatically, so you do not need to include that character in the text for this cell.

  - Third cell: Text in the third cell below `METADATA` is a descriptive label that you define for the column, as a visual aid.

  - Fourth cell: From the fourth row on, non-blank entries provide data for interpolation. A blank cell results in the omission of the metadata annotation for this rule.

##### 17.7.2.3. Additional rule attributes for RuleSet or RuleTable definitions

The `RuleSet` and `RuleTable` areas also support labels and values for other rule attributes, such as `PRIORITY` or `NO-LOOP`. Rule attributes specified in a `RuleSet` area will affect all rule assets in the same package (not only in the spreadsheet). Rule attributes specified in a `RuleTable` area will affect only the rules in that rule table. You can use each rule attribute only once in a `RuleSet` area and once in a `RuleTable` area. If the same attribute is used in both `RuleSet` and `RuleTable` areas within the spreadsheet, then `RuleTable` takes priority and the attribute in the `RuleSet` area is overridden.

The following table lists the supported labels (column headers) and values for additional `RuleSet` or `RuleTable` definitions. For column headers, you can use either the given labels or any custom labels that begin with the letters listed in the table.

Table 52. Additional rule attributes for `RuleSet` or `RuleTable` definitions
Label | Or custom label that begins with | Value
--- | --- | ---
`PRIORITY` | P | An integer defining the `salience` value of the rule. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue. Overridden by the `Sequential` flag. Example: `PRIORITY 10`
`DATE-EFFECTIVE` | V | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule can be activated only if the current date and time is after a `DATE-EFFECTIVE` attribute. Example: `DATE-EFFECTIVE "4-Sep-2018"`
`DATE-EXPIRES` | Z | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule cannot be activated if the current date and time is after the `DATE-EXPIRES` attribute. Example: `DATE-EXPIRES "4-Oct-2018"`
`NO-LOOP` | U | A Boolean value. When this option is set to `true`, the rule cannot be reactivated (looped) if a consequence of the rule re-triggers a previously met condition. Example: `NO-LOOP true`
`AGENDA-GROUP` | G | A string identifying an agenda group to which you want to assign the rule. Agenda groups allow you to partition the agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. Only rules in an agenda group that has acquired a focus are able to be activated. Example: `AGENDA-GROUP "GroupName"`
`ACTIVATION-GROUP` | X | A string identifying an activation (or XOR) group to which you want to assign the rule. In activation groups, only one rule can be activated. The first rule to fire will cancel all pending activations of all rules in the activation group. Example: `ACTIVATION-GROUP "GroupName"`
`DURATION` | D | A long integer value defining the duration of time in milliseconds after which the rule can be activated, if the rule conditions are still met. Example: `DURATION 10000`
`TIMER` | T | A string identifying either `int` (interval) or `cron` timer definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `TIMER "*/5 * * * *"` (every 5 minutes)
`CALENDAR` | E | A Quartz calendar definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `CALENDAR "* * 0-7,18-23 ? * *"` (exclude non-business hours)
`AUTO-FOCUS` | F | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within agenda groups. When this option is set to `true`, the next time the rule is activated, a focus is automatically given to the agenda group to which the rule is assigned. Example: `AUTO-FOCUS true`
`LOCK-ON-ACTIVE` | L | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within rule flow groups or agenda groups. When this option is set to `true`, the next time the ruleflow group for the rule becomes active or the agenda group for the rule receives a focus, the rule cannot be activated again until the ruleflow group is no longer active or the agenda group loses the focus. This is a stronger version of the `no-loop` attribute, because the activation of a matching rule is discarded regardless of the origin of the update (not only by the rule itself). This attribute is ideal for calculation rules where you have a number of rules that modify a fact and you do not want any rule re-matching and firing again. Example: `LOCK-ON-ACTIVE true`
`RULEFLOW-GROUP` | R | A string identifying a rule flow group. In rule flow groups, rules can fire only when the group is activated by the associated rule flow. Example: `RULEFLOW-GROUP "GroupName"`

Figure 323. Sample decision table spreadsheet with attribute columns

##### 17.7.2.4. Examples of decision table data interpolation

The various interpolations of data in decision tables are illustrated in the following example.

Example 188. Interpolating cell data

If the template is `Foo(bar == $param)` and the cell is `42`, then the result is `Foo(bar == 42)`.

If the template is `Foo(bar < $1, baz == $2)` and the cell contains `42,43`, the result will be `Foo(bar < 42, baz ==43)`.

The template `forall(&&){bar != $}` with a cell containing `42,43` results in `bar != 42 && bar != 43`.

The next example demonstrates the joint effect of a cell defining the pattern type and the code snippet below it.

RuleTable Cheese fans
CONDITION | CONDITION
Person
age | type
Persons age | Cheese type
42 | stilton
21 | cheddar

This spreadsheet section shows how the `Person` type declaration spans 2 columns, and thus both constraints will appear as `Person(age == …​, type == …​)`. Since only the field names are present in the snippet, they imply an equality test.

In the following example the marker symbol `$param` is used.

CONDITION
Person
age == $param
Persons age
42

The result of this column is the pattern `Person(age == 42))`. You may have noticed that the marker and the operator "==" are redundant.

The next example illustrates that a trailing insertion marker can be omitted.

CONDITION
Person
age <
Persons age
42

Here, appending the value from the cell is implied, resulting in `Person(age < 42)).`

You can provide the definition of a binding variable, as in the example below.

CONDITION
c : Cheese
type
Cheese type
stilton

Here, the result is `c: Cheese(type == "stilton").` Note that the quotes are provided automatically. Actually, anything can be placed in the object type row. Apart from the definition of a binding variable, it could also be an additional pattern that is to be inserted literally.

A simple construction of an action statement with the insertion of a single value is shown below.

ACTION
list.add("$param");
Log
Old man stilton

The cell below the ACTION header is left blank. Using this style, anything can be placed in the consequence, not just a single method call. (The same technique is applicable within a CONDITION column as well.)

Below is a comprehensive example, showing the use of various column headers. It is not an error to have no value below a column header (as in the NO-LOOP column): here, the attribute will not be applied in any of the rules.

Figure 324. Example usage of keywords for imports, headers, etc.

And, finally, here is an example of Import and Functions.

Table 53. Example of functions for computing price and discount claim.
RuleSet | Cheese Price
Import | com.sample.Cheese, com.sample.Person
Functions |
    function int computePrice(Cheese cheese) {
        if (cheese.getType() == "cheddar") {
            return 10;
        } else if (cheese.getType() == "stilton") {
            return 15;
        } else {
            return 20;
        }
    }

    function boolean hasDiscount(Person person) {
        if (person.getAge() > 60) {
            return true;
        } else {
            return false;
        }
    }

Multiple package names within the same cell must be separated by a comma. Also, the pairs of type and variable names must be comma-separated. Functions, however, must be written as they appear in a DRL file. This should appear in the same column as the "RuleSet" keyword; it could be above, between or below all the rule rows.

| It may be more convenient to use Import, Variables, Functions and Queries repeatedly rather than packing several definitions into a single cell.

#### 17.7.3. Creating and integrating spreadsheet decision tables

The API to use spreadsheet decision tables is in the `drools-decisiontables` module. There is really only one class to look at: `SpreadsheetCompiler`. This class will take spreadsheets in various formats, and generate rules in DRL (which you can then use in the normal way). The `SpreadsheetCompiler` can just be used to generate partial rule files if it is wished, and assemble it into a complete rule package after the fact (this allows the separation of technical and non-technical aspects of the rules if needed).

To get started, a sample spreadsheet can be used as a base. Alternatively, if the plug-in is being used, the wizard can generate a spreadsheet from a template (to edit it an xls compatible spreadsheet editor will need to be used).

Figure 325. Wizard in the IDE

#### 17.7.4. Decision table workflow and collaboration

Spreadsheets are well established business tools (in use for over 25 years). Decision tables lend themselves to close collaboration between IT and domain experts, while making the business rules clear to business analysts, it is an ideal separation of concerns.

Typically, the whole process of authoring rules (coming up with a new decision table) would be something like:

1. Business analyst takes a template decision table (from a repository, or from IT)

2. Decision table business language descriptions are entered in the table(s)

3. Decision table rules (rows) are entered (roughly)

4. Decision table is handed to a technical resource, who maps the business language (descriptions) to scripts (this may involve software development of course, if it is a new application or data model)

5. Technical person hands back and reviews the modifications with the business analyst.

6. The business analyst can continue editing the rule rows as needed (moving columns around is also fine etc).

7. In parallel, the technical person can develop test cases for the rules (liaising with business analysts) as these test cases can be used to verify rules and rule changes once the system is running.

#### 17.7.5. Using spreadsheet features

Features of applications like Excel can be used to provide assistance in entering data into spreadsheets, such as validating fields. Lists that are stored in other worksheets can be used to provide valid lists of values for cells, like in the following diagram.

Some applications provide a limited ability to keep a history of changes, but it is recommended to use an alternative means of revision control. When changes are being made to rules over time, older versions are archived (many open source solutions exist for this, such as Subversion or Git).

#### 17.7.6. Rule templates

Related to decision tables (but not necessarily requiring a spreadsheet) are "Rule Templates" (in the drools-templates module). These use any tabular data source as a source of rule data - populating a template to generate many rules. This can allow both for more flexible spreadsheets, but also rules in existing databases for instance (at the cost of developing the template up front to generate the rules).

With Rule Templates the data is separated from the rule and there are no restrictions on which part of the rule is data-driven. So whilst you can do everything you could do in decision tables you can also do the following:

- store your data in a database (or any other format)

- conditionally generate rules based on the values in the data

- use data for any part of your rules (e.g. condition operator, class name, property name)

- run different templates over the same data

As an example, a more classic decision table is shown, but without any hidden rows for the rule meta data (so the spreadsheet only contains the raw data to generate the rules).

Table 54. Template data
Case | Person age | Cheese type | Log
Old guy | 42 | stilton | Old man stilton
Young guy | 21 | cheddar | Young man cheddar

See the ExampleCheese.xls in the examples download for the above spreadsheet.

If this was a regular decision table there would be hidden rows before row 1 and between rows 1 and 2 containing rule metadata. With rule templates the data is completely separate from the rules. This has two handy consequences - you can apply multiple rule templates to the same data and your data is not tied to your rules at all. So what does the template look like?

    1  template header
    2  age
    3  type
    4  log
    5
    6  package org.drools.examples.templates;
    7
    8  global java.util.List list;
    9
    10 template "cheesefans"
    11
    12 rule "Cheese fans_@{row.rowNumber}"
    13 when
    14    Person(age == @{age})
    15    Cheese(type == "@{type}")
    16 then
    17    list.add("@{log}");
    18 end
    19
    20 end template

Annotations to the preceding program listing:

- Line 1: All rule templates start with `template header`.

- Lines 2-4: Following the header is the list of columns in the order they appear in the data. In this case we are calling the first column `age`, the second `type` and the third `log`.

- Line 5: An empty line signifies the end of the column definitions.

- Lines 6-9: Standard rule header text. This is standard rule DRL and will appear at the top of the generated DRL. Put the package statement and any imports and global and function definitions into this section.

- Line 10: The keyword `template` signals the start of a rule template. There can be more than one template in a template file, but each template should have a unique name.

- Lines 11-18: The rule template - see below for details.

- Line 20: The keywords `end template` signify the end of the template.

The rule templates rely on MVEL to do substitution using the syntax @{token_name}. There is currently one built-in expression, @{row.rowNumber} which gives a unique number for each row of data and enables you to generate unique rule names. For each row of data a rule will be generated with the values in the data substituted for the tokens in the template.

A rule template has to be included in a file with extension .drt and associated to the corresponding decision table when defining the kbase in the kmodule.xml file as in the following example

    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
    <kmodule xmlns="http://drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
      <kbase name="TemplatesKB" packages="org.drools.examples.templates">
        <ruleTemplate dtable="org/drools/examples/templates/ExampleCheese.xls"
                      template="org/drools/examples/templates/Cheese.drt"
                      row="2" col="2"/>
          <ksession name="TemplatesKS"/>
          </kbase>
    </kmodule>

With the example data above the following rule file would be generated:

    package org.drools.examples.templates;

    global java.util.List list;

    rule "Cheese fans_1"
    when
      Person( age == 42 )
      Cheese( type == "stilton" )
    then
      list.add( "Old man stilton" );
    end

    rule "Cheese fans_2"
    when
      Person( age == 21 )
      Cheese( type == "cheddar" )
    then
      list.add( "Young man cheddar" );
    end

At this point the `KieSession` named "TemplatesKS" and containing the rules generated from the template can be simply created from the `KieContainer` and used as any other `KieSession`.

    KieSession ksession = kc.newKieSession("TemplatesKS");

    // now create some test data
    ksession.insert(new Cheese("stilton", 42));
    ksession.insert(new Person("michael", "stilton", 42));
    final List<String> list = new ArrayList<String>();
    ksession.setGlobal("list", list);

    ksession.fireAllRules();

#### 17.7.7. Uploading spreadsheet decision tables

After you define your rules in an external XLS or XLSX spreadsheet of decision tables, you can upload the spreadsheet file to your project in Business Central.

| You should typically upload only one spreadsheet of decision tables, containing all necessary `RuleTable` definitions, per rule package in Business Central. You can upload separate decision table spreadsheets for separate packages, but uploading multiple spreadsheets in the same package can cause compilation errors from conflicting `RuleSet` or `RuleTable` attributes and is therefore not recommended.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Decision Table (Spreadsheet).

3. Enter an informative Decision Table name and select the appropriate Package.

4. Select the file type (xls or xlsx), click the Choose File icon, and select the spreadsheet. Click Ok to upload.

5. In the decision tables designer, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar to validate the table. If the table validation fails, open the XLS or XLSX file and address any syntax errors. For syntax help, see Defining spreadsheet decision tables.

| Converting a spreadsheet decision table to a guided decision table To convert a spreadsheet decision table to a guided decision table, click Convert in the upper-right toolbar in the decision tables designer. Converting the spreadsheet to a guided decision table enables you to edit the table data directly in Business Central. For more information about guided decision tables, see Guided decision tables.

### 17.8. DRL (Drools Rule Language) rules

DRL (Drools Rule Language) rules are business rules that you define directly in `.drl` text files. These DRL files are the source in which all other rule assets in Business Central are ultimately rendered. You can create and manage DRL files within the Business Central interface, or create them externally using Red Hat Developer Studio, Java objects, or Maven archetypes. A DRL file can contain one or more rules that define at a minimum the rule conditions (`when`) and actions (`then`). The DRL designer in Business Central provides syntax highlighting for Java, DRL, and XML.

All data objects related to a DRL rule must be in the same project package as the DRL rule in Business Central. Assets in the same package are imported by default. Existing assets in other packages can be imported with the DRL rule.

#### 17.8.1. Creating DRL rules in Business Central

You can create and manage DRL rules for your project in Business Central. In each DRL rule file, you define rule conditions, actions, and other components related to the rule, based on the data objects you create or import in the package.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → DRL file.

3. Enter an informative DRL file name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required data objects have been assigned or will be assigned.

   You can also select Show declared DSL sentences if any domain specific language (DSL) assets have been defined in your project. These DSL assets will then become usable objects for conditions and actions that you define in the DRL designer.

4. Click Ok to create the rule asset.

   The new DRL file is now listed in the DRL panel of the Project Explorer, or in the DSLR panel if you selected the Show declared DSL sentences option. The package to which you assigned this DRL file is listed at the top of the file.

5. In the Fact types list in the left panel of the DRL designer, confirm that all data objects and data object fields (expand each) required for your rules are listed. If not, you can either import relevant data objects from other packages by using `import` statements in the DRL file, or create data objects within your package.

6. After all data objects are in place, return to the Model tab of the DRL designer and define the DRL file with any of the following components:

   Components of a DRL file

       package  //automatic

       import

       function  //optional

       query  //optional

       declare   //optional

       rule

       rule

       ...

   - `package`: (automatic) This was defined for you when you created the DRL file and selected the package.

   - `import`: Use this to identify the data objects from either this package or another package that you want to use in the DRL file. Specify the package and data object in the format `package.name.object.name`, one import per line.

     Importing data objects

         import mortgages.mortgages.LoanApplication;

   - `function`: (optional) Use this to include a function to be used by rules in the DRL file. Functions put semantic code in your rule source file. Functions are especially useful if an action (`then`) part of a rule is used repeatedly and only the parameters differ for each rule. Above the rules in the DRL file, you can declare the function or import a static method as a function, and then use the function by name in an action (`then`) part of the rule.

     Declaring and using a function with a rule (option 1)

         function String hello(String applicantName) {
             return "Hello " + applicantName + "!";
         }

         rule "Using a function"
           when
             eval( true )
           then
             System.out.println( hello( "James" ) );
         end

     Importing and using the function with a rule (option 2)

         import function my.package.applicant.hello;

         rule "Using a function"
           when
             eval( true )
           then
             System.out.println( hello( "James" ) );
         end

   - `query`: (optional) Use this to search the Drools engine for facts related to the rules in the DRL file. Queries search for a set of defined conditions and do not require `when` or `then` specifications. Query names are global to the KIE base and therefore must be unique among all other rule queries in the project. To return the results of a query, construct a traditional `QueryResults` definition using `ksession.getQueryResults("name")`, where `"name"` is the query name. This returns a list of query results, which enable you to retrieve the objects that matched the query. Define the query and query results parameters above the rules in the DRL file.

     Query and query results for people under the age of 21, with a rule

         query "people under the age of 21"
             person : Person( age < 21 )
         end

         QueryResults results = ksession.getQueryResults( "people under the age of 21" );
         System.out.println( "we have " + results.size() + " people under the age  of 21" );

         rule "Underage"
           when
             application : LoanApplication( )
             Applicant( age < 21 )
           then
             application.setApproved( false );
             application.setExplanation( "Underage" );
         end

   - `declare`: (optional) Use this to declare a new fact type to be used by rules in the DRL file. The default fact type in the `java.lang` package of Drools is `Object`, but you can declare other types in DRL files as needed. Declaring fact types in DRL files enables you to define a new fact model directly in the Drools engine, without creating models in a lower-level language like Java.

     Declaring and using a new fact type

         declare Person
           name : String
           dateOfBirth : java.util.Date
           address : Address
         end

         rule "Using a declared type"
           when
             $p : Person( name == "James" )
           then   // Insert Mark, who is a customer of James.
             Person mark = new Person();
             mark.setName( "Mark" );
             insert( mark );
         end

   - `rule`: Use this to define each rule in the DRL file. Rules consist of a rule name in the format `rule "name"`, followed by optional attributes that define rule behavior (such as `salience` or `no-loop`), followed by `when` and `then` definitions. The same rule name cannot be used more than once in the same package. The `when` part of the rule contains the conditions that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a bank requires loan applicants to have over 21 years of age, then the `when` condition for an `Underage` rule would be `Applicant( age < 21 )`. The `then` part of the rule contains the actions to be performed when the conditional part of the rule has been met. For example, when the loan applicant is under 21 years old, the `then` action would be `setApproved( false )`, declining the loan because the applicant is under age. Conditions (`when`) and actions (`then`) consist of a series of stated fact patterns with optional constraints, bindings, and other supported DRL elements, based on the available data objects in the package. These patterns determine how defined objects are affected by the rule.

     Rule for loan application age limit

         rule "Underage"
           salience 15
           dialect "mvel"
           when
             application : LoanApplication( )
             Applicant( age < 21 )
           then
             application.setApproved( false );
             application.setExplanation( "Underage" );
         end

     At a minimum, each DRL file must specify the `package`, `import`, and `rule` components. All other components are optional.

     Figure 326. Sample DRL file with required components and optional rule attributes

7. After you define all components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the DRL designer to validate the DRL file. If the file validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all syntax and components in the DRL file, and try again to validate the file until the file passes.

8. Click Save in the DRL designer to save your work.

##### 17.8.1.1. Adding WHEN conditions in DRL rules

The `when` part of the rule contains the conditions that must be met to execute an action. For example, if a bank requires loan applicants to have over 21 years of age, then the `when` condition of an `Underage` rule would be `Applicant( age < 21 )`. Conditions consist of a series of stated patterns and constraints, with optional bindings and other supported DRL elements, based on the available data objects in the package.

Prerequisites

- The `package` is defined at the top of the DRL file. This should have been done for you when you created the file.

- The `import` list of data objects used in the rule is defined below the `package` line of the DRL file. Data objects can be from this package or from another package in Business Central.

- The `rule` name is defined in the format `rule "name"` below the `package`, `import`, and other lines that apply to the entire DRL file. The same rule name cannot be used more than once in the same package. Optional rule attributes (such as `salience` or `no-loop`) that define rule behavior are below the rule name, before the `when` section.

Procedure

1. In the DRL designer, enter `when` within the rule to begin adding condition statements. The `when` section consists of zero or more fact patterns that define conditions for the rule.

   If the `when` section is empty, then actions in the `then` section are executed every time a `fireAllRules()` call is made in the Drools engine. This is useful if you want to use rules to set up the Drools engine state.

   Rule without conditions

       rule "bootstrap"
         when   // empty

         then   // actions to be executed once
           insert( new Applicant() );
       end

       // The above rule is internally rewritten as:

       rule "bootstrap"
         when
           eval( true )
         then
           insert( new Applicant() );
       end

2. Enter a pattern for the first condition to be met, with optional constraints, bindings, and other supported DRL elements. A basic pattern format is `patternBinding : patternType ( constraints )`. Patterns are based on the available data objects in the package and define the conditions to be met in order to trigger actions in the `then` section.

   - Simple pattern: A simple pattern with no constraints matches against a fact of the given type. For example, the following condition is only that the applicant exists.

         when
           Applicant( )

   - Pattern with constraints: A pattern with constraints matches against a fact of the given type and the additional restrictions in parentheses that are true or false. For example, the following condition is that the applicant is under the age of 21.

         when
           Applicant( age < 21 )

   - Pattern with binding: A binding on a pattern is a shorthand reference that other components of the rule can use to refer back to the defined pattern. For example, the following binding `a` on `LoanApplication` is used in a related action for underage applicants.

         when
           a : LoanApplication( )
           Applicant( age < 21 )
         then
           a.setApproved( false );
           a.setExplanation( "Underage" )

3. Continue defining all condition patterns that apply to this rule. The following are some of the keyword options for defining DRL conditions:

   - `and`: Use this to group conditional components into a logical conjunction. Infix and prefix `and` are supported. By default, all listed conditions or actions are combined with `and` when no conjunction is specified.

         a : LoanApplication( ) and Applicant( age < 21 )

         a : LoanApplication( )
         and Applicant( age < 21 )

         a : LoanApplication( )
         Applicant( age < 21 )

         // All of the above are the same.

   - `or`: Use this to group conditional components into a logical disjunction. Infix and prefix `or` are supported.

         Bankruptcy( amountOwed == 100000 ) or IncomeSource( amount == 20000 )

         Bankruptcy( amountOwed == 100000 )
         or IncomeSource( amount == 20000 )

   - `exists`: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must exist. Note that this does not mean that a fact exists, but that a fact must exist. This option is triggered on only the first match, not subsequent matches.

         exists ( Bankruptcy( yearOfOccurrence > 1990 || amountOwed > 10000 ) )

   - `not`: Use this to specify facts and constraints that must not exist.

         not ( Applicant( age < 21 ) )

   - `forall`: Use this to set up a construct where all facts that match the first pattern match all the remaining patterns.

         forall( app : Applicant( age < 21 )
                       Applicant( this == app, status = 'underage' ) )

   - `from`: Use this to specify a source for data to be matched by the conditional pattern.

         Applicant( ApplicantAddress : address )
         Address( zipcode == "23920W" ) from ApplicantAddress

   - `entry-point`: Use this to define an `Entry Point` corresponding to a data source for the pattern. Typically used with `from`.

         Applicant( ) from entry-point "LoanApplication"

   - `collect`: Use this to define a collection of objects that the construct can use as part of the condition. In the example, all pending applications in the Drools engine for each given mortgage are grouped in `ArrayLists`. If three or more pending applications are found, the rule is executed.

         m : Mortgage()
         a : ArrayList( size >= 3 )
             from collect( LoanApplication( Mortgage == m, status == 'pending' ) )

   - `accumulate`: Use this to iterate over a collection of objects, execute custom actions for each of the elements, and return one or more result objects (if the constraints evaluate to `true`). This option is a more flexible and powerful form of `collect`. Use the format `accumulate( <source pattern>; <functions> [;<constraints>] )`. In the example, `min`, `max`, and `average` are accumulate functions that calculate the minimum, maximum and average temperature values over all the readings for each sensor. Other supported functions include `count`, `sum`, `variance`, `standardDeviation`, `collectList`, and `collectSet`.

         s : Sensor()
         accumulate( Reading( sensor == s, temp : temperature );
                     min : min( temp ),
                     max : max( temp ),
                     avg : average( temp );
                     min < 20, avg > 70 )

     | Advanced DRL options These are examples of basic keyword options and pattern constructs for defining conditions. For more advanced DRL options and syntax supported in the DRL designer, see Rule Language Reference.

4. After you define all condition components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the DRL designer to validate the DRL file. If the file validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all syntax and components in the DRL file, and try again to validate the file until the file passes.

5. Click Save in the DRL designer to save your work.

##### 17.8.1.2. Adding THEN actions in DRL rules

The `then` part of the rule contains the actions to be performed when the conditional part of the rule has been met. For example, when a loan applicant is under 21 years old, the `then` action of an `Underage` rule would be `setApproved( false )`, declining the loan because the applicant is under age. Actions execute consequences based on the rule conditions and on available data objects in the package.

Prerequisites

- The `package` is defined at the top of the DRL file. This should have been done for you when you created the file.

- The `import` list of data objects used in the rule is defined below the `package` line of the DRL file. Data objects can be from this package or from another package in Business Central.

- The `rule` name is defined in the format `rule "name"` below the `package`, `import`, and other lines that apply to the entire DRL file. The same rule name cannot be used more than once in the same package. Optional rule attributes (such as `salience` or `no-loop`) that define rule behavior are below the rule name, before the `when` section.

Procedure

1. In the DRL designer, enter `then` after the `when` section of the rule to begin adding action statements.

2. Enter one or more actions to be executed on fact patterns based on the conditions for the rule.

   The following are some of the keyword options for defining DRL actions:

   - `and`: Use this to group action components into a logical conjunction. Infix and prefix `and` are supported. By default, all listed conditions or actions are combined with `and` when no conjunction is specified.

         application.setApproved ( false ) and application.setExplanation( "has been bankrupt" );

         application.setApproved ( false );
         and application.setExplanation( "has been bankrupt" );

         application.setApproved ( false );
         application.setExplanation( "has been bankrupt" );

         // All of the above are the same.

   - `set`: Use this to set the value of a field.

         application.setApproved ( false );
         application.setExplanation( "has been bankrupt" );

   - `modify`: Use this to specify fields to be modified for a fact and to notify the Drools engine of the change.

         modify( LoanApplication ) {
                 setAmount( 100 )
         }

   - `update`: Use this to specify fields and the entire related fact to be modified and to notify the Drools engine of the change. After a fact has changed, you must call `update` before changing another fact that might be affected by the updated values. The `modify` keyword avoids this added step.

         update( LoanApplication ) {
                 setAmount( 100 )
         }

   - `delete`: Use this to remove an object from the Drools engine. The keyword `retract` is also supported in the DRL designer and executes the same action, but `delete` is preferred for consistency with the keyword `insert`.

         delete( LoanApplication );

   - `insert`: Use this to insert a `new` fact and define resulting fields and values as needed for the fact.

         insert( new Applicant() );

   - `insertLogical`: Use this to insert a `new` fact logically into the Drools engine and define resulting fields and values as needed for the fact. The Drools engine is responsible for logical decisions on insertions and retractions of facts. After regular or stated insertions, facts have to be retracted explicitly. After logical insertions, facts are automatically retracted when the conditions that originally asserted the facts are no longer true.

         insertLogical( new Applicant() );

     | Advanced DRL options These are examples of basic keyword options and pattern constructs for defining actions. For more advanced DRL options and syntax supported in the DRL designer, see Rule Language Reference.

3. After you define all action components of the rule, click Validate in the upper-right toolbar of the DRL designer to validate the DRL file. If the file validation fails, address any problems described in the error message, review all syntax and components in the DRL file, and try again to validate the file until the file passes.

4. Click Save in the DRL designer to save your work.

###### Rule attributes

Rule attributes are additional specifications that you can add to business rules to modify rule behavior. The following table lists the names and supported values of the attributes that you can assign to rules:

Table 55. Rule attributes
Attribute | Value
--- | ---
`salience` | An integer defining the priority of the rule. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue. Example: `salience 10`
`enabled` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule is enabled. When the option is not selected, the rule is disabled. Example: `enabled true`
`date-effective` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule can be activated only if the current date and time is after a `date-effective` attribute. Example: `date-effective "4-Sep-2018"`
`date-expires` | A string containing a date and time definition. The rule cannot be activated if the current date and time is after the `date-expires` attribute. Example: `date-expires "4-Oct-2018"`
`no-loop` | A Boolean value. When the option is selected, the rule cannot be reactivated (looped) if a consequence of the rule re-triggers a previously met condition. When the condition is not selected, the rule can be looped in these circumstances. Example: `no-loop true`
`agenda-group` | A string identifying an agenda group to which you want to assign the rule. Agenda groups allow you to partition the agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. Only rules in an agenda group that has acquired a focus are able to be activated. Example: `agenda-group "GroupName"`
`activation-group` | A string identifying an activation (or XOR) group to which you want to assign the rule. In activation groups, only one rule can be activated. The first rule to fire will cancel all pending activations of all rules in the activation group. Example: `activation-group "GroupName"`
`duration` | A long integer value defining the duration of time in milliseconds after which the rule can be activated, if the rule conditions are still met. Example: `duration 10000`
`timer` | A string identifying either `int` (interval) or `cron` timer definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `timer "*/5 * * * *"` (every 5 minutes)
`calendar` | A Quartz calendar definition for scheduling the rule. Example: `calendars "* * 0-7,18-23 ? * *"` (exclude non-business hours)
`auto-focus` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the rule is activated, a focus is automatically given to the agenda group to which the rule is assigned. Example: `auto-focus true`
`lock-on-active` | A Boolean value, applicable only to rules within rule flow groups or agenda groups. When the option is selected, the next time the ruleflow group for the rule becomes active or the agenda group for the rule receives a focus, the rule cannot be activated again until the ruleflow group is no longer active or the agenda group loses the focus. This is a stronger version of the `no-loop` attribute, because the activation of a matching rule is discarded regardless of the origin of the update (not only by the rule itself). This attribute is ideal for calculation rules where you have a number of rules that modify a fact and you do not want any rule re-matching and firing again. Example: `lock-on-active true`
`ruleflow-group` | A string identifying a rule flow group. In rule flow groups, rules can fire only when the group is activated by the associated rule flow. Example: `ruleflow-group "GroupName"`
`dialect` | A string identifying either `JAVA` or `MVEL` as the language to be used for code expressions in the rule. By default, the rule uses the dialect specified at the package level. Any dialect specified here overrides the package dialect setting for the rule. Example: `dialect "JAVA"`

### 17.9. DSL (domain specific language) rules

The DSL editor allows DSL Sentences to be authored. The reader should take time to explore DSL features in the Drools Expert documentation; as the syntax in Business Central’s DSL Editor is identical. The normal syntax is extended to provide "hints" to control how the DSL variable is rendered and validated within the user-interface.

The following "hints" are supported:-

- {<varName>:<regular expression>}

  This will render a text field in place of the DSL variable when the DSL Sentence is used in the guided editor. The content of the text field will be validated against the regular expression.

- {<varName>:ENUM:<factType.fieldName>}

  This will render an enumeration in place of the DSL variable when the DSL Sentence is used in the guided editor. <factType.fieldName> binds the enumeration to the model Fact and Field enumeration definition. This could be either a "Business Central enumeration" (i.e. defined within Business Central) or a Java enumeration (i.e. defined in a model POJO JAR file).

- {<varName>:DATE:<dateFormat>}

  This will render a Date selector in place of the DSL variable when the DSL Sentence is used in the guided editor.

- {<varName>:BOOLEAN:<[checked | unchecked]>}

  This will render a dropdown selector in place of the DSL variable, providing boolean choices, when the DSL Sentence is used in the guided editor.

- {<varName>:CF:<factType.fieldName>}

  This will render a button that will allow you to set the value of this variable using a Custom Form. In order to use this feature, a Working-Set containing a Custom Form Configuration for factType.fieldName must be active. If there is no such Working-Set, a simple text box is used (just like a regular variable).

  For more information, please read more about Working-Sets and Custom Form Configurations.

Figure 327. DSL rule

### 17.10. Scorecards

A scorecard is a graphical representation of a formula used to calculate an overall score. A scorecard can be used to predict the likelihood or probability of a certain outcome. Drools now supports additive scorecards. An additive scorecard calculates an overall score by adding all partial scores assigned to individual rule conditions.

Additionally, Drools Scorecards will allows for reason codes to be set, which help in identifying the specific rules (buckets) that have contributed to the overall score. Drools Scorecards will be based on the PMML 4.1 Standard.

The New Item menu now allows for creation of scorecard assets.

Figure 328. Scorecard asset guided editor

The above image shows a scorecard with one characteristic. Each scorecard consists of two sections (a) Setup Parameters (b) Characteristic Section

#### 17.10.1. (a) Setup parameters

The setup section consits of parameters that define the overall behaviour of this scorecard.

1. Facts: This dropdown shows a list of facts that are visible for this asset.

2. Resultant Score Field: Shows a list of fields from the selected fact. Only fields of type 'double' are shown. If this dropdown is empty double check your fact model. The final calculated score will be stored in this field.

3. Initial Score: Numeric Text Field to capture the initial score. The generated rules will initialize the 'Resultant Score Field' with this score and then is added to the overall score whenever partial scores are summed up.

4. Use Reason Codes: Boolean indicator to compute reason codes along with the final score. Selecting Yes/No in this field will enable/disable the 'Resultant Reason Codes Field', 'Reason Code Algorithm' and the 'Baseline Score' field.

5. Resultant Reason Codes Field: Shows a list of fields from the selected fact. Only fields of type 'java.util.List' are shown. This collection will hold the reason codes selected by this scorecard.

6. Reason Code Algorithm: May be "none", "pointsAbove" or "pointsBelow", describing how reason codes shall be ranked, relative to the baseline score of each Characteristic, or as set at the top-level scorecard.

7. Baseline Score: A single value to use as the baseline comparison score for all characteristics, when determining reason code ranking. Alternatively, unique baseline scores may be set for each individual Characteristic as shown below. This value is required only when UseReasonCodes is "true" and baselineScore is not given for each Characteristic.

| If UseReasonCodes is "true", then BaselineScore must be defined at the Scorecard level or for each Characteristic, and ReasonCode must be provided for each Characteristic or for each of its input Attributes. If UseReasonCodes is "false", then baselineScore and reasonCode are not required.

#### 17.10.2. (b) Characteristics

On Clicking the 'New Characteristic' button, a new empty characteristic editor is added to the scorecard. Defines the point allocation strategy for each scorecard characteristic (numeric or categorical). Each scorecard characteristic is assigned a single partial score which is used to compute the overall score. The overall score is simply the sum of all partial scores. Partial scores are assumed to be continuous values of type "double".

##### 17.10.2.1. Creating characterstics

Every scorecard must have at least one characteristic

Figure 329. New characteristic

1. Name: Descriptive name for this characteristic. For informational reasons only.

2. Remove Charteristic: Will remove this characteristic from the scorecard after a confirmation dialog is shown.

3. Add Attribute: Will add a line entry for an attribute (bin).

4. Fact: Select the class which will be evaluated for calculating the partial score.

5. Characteristic: Shows the list of fields from the selected Fact. Only fields of type "String", "int", "double", "boolean" are shown.

6. Baseline Score: Sets the characteristic’s baseline score against which to compare the actual partial score when determining the ranking of reason codes. This value is required when useReasonCodes attribute is "true" and baselineScore is not defined in element Scorecard. Whenever baselineScore is defined for a Characteristic, it takes precedence over the baselineScore value defined in element Scorecard.

7. Reason Code: Contains the characteristic’s reason code, usually associated with an adverse decision.

##### 17.10.2.2. Creating attributes

On Clicking the 'New Attribute' button, a new empty attribute editor. In scorecard models, all the elements defining the Attributes for a particular Characteristic must all reference a single field.

Figure 330. New attribute

1. Operator: The condition upon which the mapping between input attribute and partial score takes place. The operator dropdown will show different values depending on the datatype of the selected Field.

   1. DataType Strings: "=", "in".

   2. DataType Integers: "=", ">", "<", ">=", "⇐", ">..<", ">=..<", ">=..⇐", ">..⇐".

   3. DataType Boolean: "true", "false".

   Refer to the next sub-section (values) for more details.

2. Value: Basis the operator selected the value specified can either be a single value or a set of values separated by comma (","). The value field is disabled for operator type boolean.

   Table 56. Operators / Values
   Data Type | Operator | Value | Remarks
   String | = | Single Value | will look for an exact match
   String | in | Comma Separated Values (a,b,c,…​) | The operator 'in' indicates an evaluation to TRUE if the field value is contained in the comma separated list of values
   Boolean | is true | N/A | Value Field is uneditable (readonly)
   Boolean | is false | N/A | Value Field is uneditable (readonly)
   Numeric | = | Single Value | Equals Operator
   Numeric | > | Single Value | Greator Than Operator
   Numeric | < | Single Value | Less Than Operator
   Numeric | >= | Single Value | Greater than or equal To
   Numeric | <= | Single Value | Less than or equal To
   Numeric | >..< | Comma Separated Values (a,b) | (Greater than Value 'a') and (less than value 'b')
   Numeric | >=..< | Comma Separated Values (a,b) | (Greater than or equal to Value 'a') and (less than value 'b')
   Numeric | >=..<= | Comma Separated Values (a,b) | (Greater than or equal to Value 'a') and (less than or equal to value 'b')
   Numeric | >..<= | Comma Separated Values (a,b) | (Greater than Value 'a') and (less than or equal to value 'b')

3. Partial Score: Defines the score points awarded to the Attribute.

4. Reason Code: Defines the attribute’s reason code. If the reasonCode attribute is used in this level, it takes precedence over the ReasonCode associated with the Characteristic element.

5. Actions: Delete this attribute. Prompts the user for confirmation.

| If Use Reason Codes is "true", then Baseline Score must be defined at the Scorecard level or for each Characteristic, and Reason Code must be provided for each Characteristic or for each of its input Attributes. If Use Reason Codes is "false", then BaselineScore and ReasonCode are not required.

### 17.11. Defining enumerations for drop-down lists in rule assets

Enumeration definitions in Business Central determine the possible values of fields for conditions or actions in guided rules, guided rule templates, and guided decision tables. An enumeration definition contains a `fact.field` mapping to a list of supported values that are displayed as a drop-down list in the relevant field of a rule asset. When a user selects a field that is based on the same fact and field as the enumeration definition, the drop-down list of defined values is displayed.

You can define enumerations in Business Central or in the DRL source for your Drools project.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Enumeration.

3. Enter an informative Enumeration name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required data objects and relevant rule assets have been assigned or will be assigned.

4. Click Ok to create the enumeration.

   The new enumeration is now listed in the Enumeration Definitions panel of the Project Explorer.

5. In the Model tab of the enumerations designer, click Add enum and define the following values for the enumeration:

   - Fact: Specify an existing data object within the same package of your project with which you want to associate this enumeration. Open the Data Objects panel in the Project Explorer to view the available data objects, or create the relevant data object as a new asset if needed.

   - Field: Specify an existing field identifier that you defined as part of the data object that you selected for the Fact. Open the Data Objects panel in the Project Explorer to select the relevant data object and view the list of available Identifier options. You can create the relevant identifier for the data object if needed.

   - Context: Specify a list of values in the format `['string1','string2','string3']` or `[integer1,integer2,integer3]` that you want to map to the Fact and Field definitions. These values will be displayed as a drop-down list for the relevant field of the rule asset.

   For example, the following enumeration defines the drop-down values for applicant credit rating in a mortgage decision service:

   Figure 331. Example enumeration for applicant credit rating in Business Central
   Example enumeration for applicant credit rating in the DRL source

       'Applicant.creditRating' : ['AA', 'OK', 'Sub prime']

   In this example, for any guided rule, guided rule template, or guided decision table that is in the same package of the project and that uses the `Applicant` data object and the `creditRating` field, the configured values are available as drop-down options:

   Figure 332. Example enumeration drop-down options in a guided rule or guided rule template
   Figure 333. Example enumeration drop-down options in a guided decision table

#### 17.11.1. Advanced enumeration options for rule assets

For advanced use cases with enumeration definitions in your Drools project, consider the following extended options for defining enumerations:

Mapping between DRL values and values in Business Central

  If you want the enumeration values to appear differently or more completely in the Business Central interface than they appear in the DRL source, use a mapping in the format `'fact.field' : ['sourceValue1=UIValue1','sourceValue2=UIValue2', …​ ]` for your enumeration definition values.

  For example, in the following enumeration definition for loan status, the options `A` or `D` are used in the DRL file but the options `Approved` or `Declined` are displayed in Business Central:

      'Loan.status' : ['A=Approved','D=Declined']

Enumeration value dependencies

  If you want the selected value in one drop-down list to determine the available options in a subsequent drop-down list, use the format `'fact.fieldB[fieldA=value1]' : ['value2', 'value3', …​ ]` for your enumeration definition.

  For example, in the following enumeration definition for insurance policies, the `policyType` field accepts the values `Home` or `Car`. The type of policy that the user selects determines the policy `coverage` field options that are then available:

      'Insurance.policyType' : ['Home', 'Car']
      'Insurance.coverage[policyType=Home]' : ['property', 'liability']
      'Insurance.coverage[policyType=Car]' : ['collision', 'fullCoverage']

  | Enumeration dependencies are not applied across rule conditions and actions. For example, in this insurance policy use case, the selected policy in the rule condition does not determine the available coverage options in the rule actions, if applicable.

External data sources in enumerations

  If you want to retrieve a list of enumeration values from an external data source instead of defining the values directly in the enumeration definition, on the class path of your project, add a helper class that returns a `java.util.List` list of strings. In the enumeration definition, instead of specifying a list of values, identify the helper class that you configured to retrieve the values externally.

  For example, in the following enumeration definition for loan applicant region, instead of defining applicant regions explicitly in the format `'Applicant.region' : ['country1', 'country2', …​ ]`, the enumeration uses a helper class that returns the list of values defined externally:

      'Applicant.region' : (new com.mycompany.DataHelper()).getListOfRegions()

  In this example, a `DataHelper` class contains a `getListOfRegions()` method that returns a list of strings. The enumerations are loaded in the drop-down list for the relevant field in the rule asset.

  You can also load dependent enumeration definitions dynamically from a helper class by identifying the dependent field as usual and enclosing the call to the helper class within quotation marks:

      'Applicant.region[countryCode]' : '(new com.mycompany.DataHelper()).getListOfRegions("@{countryCode}")'

  If you want to load all enumeration data entirely from an external data source, such as a relational database, you can implement a Java class that returns a `Map<String, List<String>>` map. The key of the map is the `fact.field` mapping and the value is a `java.util.List<String>` list of values.

  For example, the following Java class defines loan applicant regions for the related enumeration:

      public class SampleDataSource {

        public Map<String, List<String>> loadData() {
          Map data = new HashMap();

          List d = new ArrayList();
          d.add("AU");
          d.add("DE");
          d.add("ES");
          d.add("UK");
          d.add("US");
          ...
          data.put("Applicant.region", d);

          return data;
        }

      }

  The following enumeration definition correlates to this example Java class. The enumeration contains no references to fact or field names because they are defined in the Java class:

      =(new SampleDataSource()).loadData()

  The `=` operator enables Business Central to load all enumeration data from the helper class. The helper methods are statically evaluated when the enumeration definition is requested for use in an editor.

  | Defining an enumeration without a fact and field definition is currently not supported in Business Central. To define the enumeration for the associated Java class in this way, use the DRL source in your Drools project.

### 17.12. Test scenarios

Test scenarios in Drools enable you to validate the functionality of business rules and business rule data (for rules-based test scenarios) or of DMN models (for DMN-based test scenarios) before deploying them into a production environment. With a test scenario, you use data from your project to set given conditions and expected results based on one or more defined business rules. When you run the scenario, the expected results and actual results of the rule instance are compared. If the expected results match the actual results, the test is successful. If the expected results do not match the actual results, then the test fails.

Drools currently supports both the new Test Scenarios designer and the former Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer. The default designer is the new test scenarios designer, which supports testing of both rules and DMN models and provides an enhanced overall user experience with test scenarios. If required, you can continue to use the legacy test scenarios designer, which supports rule-based test scenarios only.

You can run the defined test scenarios in a number of ways, for example, you can run available test scenarios at the project level or inside a specific test scenario asset. Test scenarios are independent and cannot affect or modify other test scenarios. You can run test scenarios at any time during project development in Business Central. You do not have to compile or deploy your decision service to run test scenarios.

You can import data objects from different packages to the same project package as the test scenario. Assets in the same package are imported by default. After you create the necessary data objects and the test scenario, you can use the Data Objects tab of the test scenarios designer to verify that all required data objects are listed or to import other existing data objects by adding a New item.

| Throughout the test scenarios documentation, all references to test scenarios and the test scenarios designer are for the new version, unless explicitly noted as the legacy version.

#### 17.12.1. Test scenarios designer in Business Central

The test scenarios designer provides a tabular layout that helps you in defining a scenario template and all the associated test cases. The designer layout consists of a table which has a header and the individual rows. The header consists of three parts, the GIVEN and EXPECT row, a row with instances, and a row with corresponding fields. The header is also known as test scenario template and the individual rows are called test scenarios definitions.

The test scenario template or header has the following two parts:

- GIVEN data objects and their fields - represents the input information

- EXPECT data objects and their fields - represents the objects and their fields whose exact values are checked based on the given information and which also constitutes the expected result.

The test scenarios definitions represent the separate test cases of a template.

You can access the Project Explorer from the left panel of the designer whereas from the right panel you can access the Settings, Test Tools, Scenario Cheatsheet, Test Report and the Coverage Report tabs. You can access the Settings tab to view and edit the global settings of rule-based and DMN-based test scenarios. You can use the Test Tools to configure the data object mappings. Scenario Cheatsheet tab contains notes and the cheat sheet which you can use as reference. The Test Report tab displays the overview of the tests and the scenario status. To view the test coverage statistics, you can use the Coverage Report tab from the right side of the test scenario designer.

##### 17.12.1.1. Importing data objects

The test scenarios designer loads all data objects that are located in the same package as the test scenario. You can view all the data objects from the Data Objects tab in the designer. The loaded data objects are also displayed in the Test Tools panel.

You need to close and reopen the designer in case the data objects change (for example, when a new data object is created or when an existing one is deleted). Select a data object from the list to display its fields and the field types.

In case you want to use a data object located in a different package than the test scenario, you need to import the data object first. Follow the procedure below to import a data object for rules-based test scenarios.

| You cannot import any data objects while creating DMN-based test scenarios. DMN-based test scenarios does not use any data objects from the project but uses the custom data types defined in the DMN file.

Procedure

1. Go to Project Explorer panel in the test scenarios designer.

2. From Test Scenario, select a test scenario.

3. Select Data Objects tab and click New Item.

4. In the Add import window, choose the data object from the drop-down list.

5. Click Ok and then Save.

6. Close and reopen the test scenarios designer to view the new data object from the data objects list.

##### 17.12.1.2. Importing a test scenario

You can import an existing test scenario using the Import Asset button in the Asset tab from the project view.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. From the project’s Asset tab, click Import Asset.

3. In the Create new Import Asset window,

   - Enter the name of the import asset.

   - Select the package from the Package drop-down list.

   - From Please select a file to upload, click Choose File…​ to browse to test scenario file.

4. Select the file and click Open.

5. Click Ok and the test scenario opens in the test scenario designer.

##### 17.12.1.3. Saving a test scenario

You can save a test scenario at any time while creating a test scenario template or defining the test scenarios.

Procedure

1. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Save.

2. On the Confirm Save window,

   1. If you wish to add a comment regarding the test scenario, click add a comment.

   2. Click Save again.

A message stating that the test scenario was saved successfully appears on the screen.

##### 17.12.1.4. Deleting a test scenario

You can delete existing test scenarios that were created using the test scenarios designer.

Procedure

1. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Delete.

2. In the Confirm Delete window,

   - To add a comment regarding the deletion of the test scenario, click add a comment.

   - Click Delete.

A message stating that the test scenario was deleted successfully appears on the screen.

##### 17.12.1.5. Renaming a test scenario

You can rename existing test scenarios by using the Rename button from the upper-right toolbar in the designer.

Procedure

1. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Rename.

2. In the Rename Asset window,

   1. Enter a name in the Asset Name field.

   2. If you wish to add a comment, click add a comment.

   3. Click Rename.

      | Clicking on Rename simply renames the test scenario file.

   4. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Save.

   5. In the Confirm Save window,

      1. If you wish to add a comment, click add a comment.

      2. Click Save again.

   6. Alternately, you could click Save and Rename to save and rename the scenario at the same time.

A message stating that the test scenario was renamed successfully appears on the screen.

##### 17.12.1.6. Copying a test scenario

You can copy an existing test scenario to the same package or to some other package by using the Copy button from the upper-right toolbar.

Procedure

1. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Copy.

2. In the Make a Copy window,

   1. Enter a name in the New Name field.

   2. Select the package you want to copy the test scenario to.

   3. Optionally, to add a comment, click add a comment.

   4. Click Make a Copy.

A message stating that the test scenario was copied successfully appears on the screen.

##### 17.12.1.7. Downloading a test scenario

You can download a copy of the test scenario to your local machine for future reference or as backup.

Procedure

In the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click the Download icon.

The `.scesim` file is downloaded to your local machine.

##### 17.12.1.8. Switching between versions of a test scenario

Business Central provides you the ability to switch between the various versions of a test scenario. Every time you save the scenario, a new version of the scenario is listed under Latest Versions. To use this feature, you must save the test scenario file at least once.

Procedure

1. From the test scenarios designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Latest Version. All the versions of the file are listed under Latest Version, if they exist.

2. Click the version you want to work on.

   The selected version of the test scenario opens in the test scenarios designer.

3. From the designer toolbar, click Restore.

4. In the Confirm Restore,

   1. To add a comment, click add a comment.

   2. Click Restore to confirm.

A message stating that the selected version has been reloaded successfully in the designer appears on the screen.

##### 17.12.1.9. View or hide the alerts panel

The Alerts panel appears at the bottom of the test scenarios designer or the project view. It contains the build information and error messages in case the executed tests are failed.

Procedure

From the designer toolbar on the upper-right, click Hide Alerts/View Alerts to enable or disable the reporting panel.

##### 17.12.1.10. Contextual menu options

The test scenarios designer provides contextual menu options, which enables you to perform basic operations on the table such as adding, deleting, and, duplicating rows and columns. To use the contextual menus, you need to right-click a table element. Menu options differ based on the table element you select.

Table 57. Contextual menu options
Table element | Cell label | Available context menu options
--- | --- | ---
Header | # & Scenario description | Insert row below
GIVEN & EXPECT | Insert leftmost column, Insert rightmost column, Insert row below
INSTANCE 1, INSTANCE 2 & PROPERTY 1, PROPERTY 2 | Insert column left, Insert column right, Delete column, Duplicate Instance, Insert row below
Rows | All the cells with row numbers, test scenarios description or test scenarios definition | Insert row above, Insert row below, Duplicate row, Delete row, Run scenario

Table 58. Description of table interactions
Table interaction | Description
--- | ---
Insert leftmost column | Inserts a new leftmost column (in either the GIVEN or EXPECT section of the table based on user selection).
Insert rightmost column | Inserts a new rightmost column (in either the GIVEN or EXPECT section of the table based on user selection).
Insert column left | Inserts a new column to the left of the selected column. The new column is of the same type as the selected column (in either the GIVEN or EXPECT section of the table based on user selection).
Insert column right | Inserts a new column to the right of the selected column. The new column is of the same type as the selected column (in either the GIVEN or EXPECT section of the table based on user selection).
Delete column | Deletes the selected column.
Insert row above | Inserts a new row above the selected row.
Insert row below | Inserts a new row below the selected row. If invoked from a header cell, inserts a new row with index 1.
Duplicate row | Duplicates the selected row.
Duplicate Instance | Duplicates the selected instance.
Delete row | Deletes the selected row.
Run scenario | Runs a single test scenario.

The `Insert column right` or `Insert column left` context menu options behave differently,

- if the selected column does not have a type defined, a new column without a type is added.

- if the selected column has a type defined, either a new empty column or a column with the parent instance type is created.

  - if the action is performed from an instance header, a new column without a type is created.

  - if the action is performed from a property header, a new column with the parent instance type is created.

#### 17.12.2. Test scenario template

Before specifying test scenario definitions, you need to create a test scenario template. The header of the test scenario table defines the template for each scenario. You need to set the types of the instance and property headers for both the GIVEN and EXPECT sections. Instance headers map to a particular data object (a fact), whereas the property headers map to a particular field of the corresponding data object.

Using the test scenarios designer, you can create test scenario templates for both rule-based and DMN-based test scenarios.

##### 17.12.2.1. Creating a test scenario template for rule-based test scenarios

Create a test scenario template for rule-based test scenarios by following the procedure below to validate your rules and data.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project for which you want to create the test scenario.

2. Click Add Asset → Test Scenario.

3. Enter a Test Scenario name and select the appropriate Package. The package you select must contain all the required data objects and rule assets have been assigned or will be assigned.

4. Select RULE as the Source type.

5. Click Ok to create and open the test scenario in the test scenarios designer.

6. To map the GIVEN column header to a data object,

   1. Click an instance header in the GIVEN section.

   2. Select the data object from the Test Tools tab.

   3. Click Add.

7. To insert more properties of the data object, right-click the property header and select Insert column right or Insert column left as required.

8. To map a data object field to a property cell,

   1. Click a property cell.

   2. Select the data object field from the Test Tools tab.

   3. Click Add.

9. To map the EXPECT column header to a data object,

   1. Click an instance header in the EXPECT section.

   2. Select the data object from the Test Tools tab.

   3. Click Add.

10. To insert more properties of the data object, right-click the property header and select Insert column right or Insert column left as required.

11. To map a data object field to a property cell,

    1. Click a property cell.

    2. Select the data object field from the Test Tools tab.

    3. Click Add.

       Use the contextual menu to add or remove columns as needed.

##### 17.12.2.2. Using aliases in rule-based test scenarios

In the test scenarios designer, once you map a header cell with a data object, the data object is removed from the Test Tools tab. You can re-map a data object to another header cell by using an alias. Aliases enable you to specify multiple instances of the same data object in a test scenario. You can also create property aliases to rename the used properties directly in the table.

Procedure

In the test scenarios designer in Business Central, double-click a header cell and manually change the name. Ensure that the aliases are uniquely named.

The instance now appears in the list of data objects in the Test Tools tab.

#### 17.12.3. Test template for DMN-based test scenarios

Business Central automatically generates the template for every DMN-based test scenario asset and it contains all the specified inputs and decisions of the related DMN model. For each input node in the DMN model, a GIVEN column is added, whereas each decision node is represented by an EXPECT column. You can modify the default template at any time as per your needs. Also, to test only a specific part of the whole DMN model, its possible to remove the generated columns as well as move decision nodes from the EXPECT to the GIVEN section.

##### 17.12.3.1. Creating a test scenario template for DMN-based test scenarios

Create a test scenario template for DMN-based scenarios by following the procedure below to validate your DMN models.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project that you want to create the test scenario for.

2. Click Add Asset → Test Scenario.

3. Enter a Test Scenario name and select the appropriate Package.

4. Select DMN as the Source type.

5. Select an existing DMN asset using the Choose DMN asset option.

6. Click Ok to create and open the test scenario in the test scenarios designer.

   The template is automatically generated and you can modify it as per your needs.

#### 17.12.4. Defining a test scenario

After creating a test scenario template you have to define the test scenario next. The rows of the test scenario table define the individual test scenarios. A test scenario has a unique index number, description, set of input values (the Given values), and a set of output values (the Expect values).

Prerequisites

- The test scenario template has been created for the selected test scenario.

Procedure

1. Open the test scenario in the test scenarios designer.

2. Enter a description of the test scenario and fill in required values in each cell of the row.

3. Use the contextual menu to add or remove rows as required.

   Double click a cell to start inline editing. To skip a particular cell from test evaluation, leave it empty.

After defining the test scenario, you can run the test next.

#### 17.12.5. Using list and map collections in test scenarios

The test scenarios designer supports list and map collections for both DMN-based as well as rules-based test scenarios. You can define a collection like a list or a map ​as the value of a particular cell in both GIVEN and EXPECT columns.

Procedure

1. Set the column type first (use a field whose type is a list or a map).

2. Double click a cell in the column to input a value.

3. In the collection editor popup, click Add new item.

4. Enter the required value and click the check icon to save each collection item that you add.

5. Click Save.

   To delete an item from the collection, click the bin icon in the collection popup editor. Click Remove to delete the collection itself.

#### 17.12.6. Expression syntax in test scenarios

The test scenarios designer supports different expression languages for both rule-based and DMN-based test scenarios. While rule-based test scenarios support a basic expression language, DMN-based test scenarios support the FEEL expression language.

##### 17.12.6.1. Expression syntax in rule-based test scenarios

The following rule-based test scenario definition expressions are supported by the test scenarios designer:

Table 59. Description of expressions syntax
Operator | Description
--- | ---
= | Specifies equal to a value. This is default for all columns and is the only operator supported by the GIVEN column.
=, =!, <> | Specifies inequality of a value. This operator can be combined with other operators.
<, >, <=, >= | Specifies a comparison: less than, greater than, less or equals than, and greater or equals than.
[value1, value2, value3] | Specifies a list of values. If one or more values are valid, the scenario definition is evaluated as true.
expression1; expression2; expression3 | Specifies a list of expressions. If all expressions are valid, the scenario definition is evaluated as true.

| An empty cell is skipped from evaluation. To define an empty string, use `=`,`[]`, or `;`. To define a null value, use `null`.

Table 60. Example expressions
Expression | Description
--- | ---
-1 | The actual value is equal to -1.
< 0 | The actual value is less than 0.
! > 0 | The actual value is not greater than 0.
[-1, 0, 1] | The actual value is equal to either -1 or 0 or 1.
<> [1, -1] | The actual value is neither equal to 1 nor -1.
! 100; 0 | The actual value is not equal to 100 but is equal to 0.
!= < 0; <> > 1 | The actual value is neither less than 0 nor greater than 1.
<> <= 0; >= 1 | The actual value is neither less than 0 nor equal to 0 but is greater than or equal to 1.

| You can refer to the supported commands and syntax in the Scenario Cheatsheet tab on the right of the rule-based test scenarios designer.

##### 17.12.6.2. Expression syntax in DMN-based scenarios

The following data types are supported by the DMN-based test scenarios in the test scenarios designer:

Table 61. Data types supported by DMN-based scenarios
Supported data types | Description
--- | ---
numbers & strings | Strings must be delimited by quotation marks, for example, `"John Doe"`, `"Brno"` or `""`.
boolean values | `true`, `false`, and `null`.
dates and time | For example, `date("2019-05-13")` or `time("14:10:00+02:00")`.
functions |
contexts | For example, `{x : 5, y : 3}`.
ranges and lists | For example, `[1 .. 10]` or `[2, 3, 4, 5]`.

| You can refer to the supported commands and syntax in the Scenario Cheatsheet tab on the right of the DMN-based test scenarios designer.

#### 17.12.7. Running the test scenarios

After creating a test scenario template and defining the test scenarios, you can run the tests to validate your business rules and data.

Procedure

1. To run defined test scenarios, do any of the following tasks:

   - To execute all the available test scenarios in your project inside multiple assets, in the upper-right corner of your project page, click Test.

     Run all the test scenarios from the project view

   - To execute all the available test scenarios defined in a single `.scesim` file, at the top of the Test Scenario designer, click the Run Test icon.

   - To run a single test scenario defined in a single `.scesim` file, right-click the row of the test scenario you want to run and select Run scenario.

2. The Test Report panel displays the overview of the tests and the scenario status.

   After the tests execute, if the values entered in the test scenario table do not match with the expected values, then the corresponding cells are highlighted.

3. If tests fail, you can do the following tasks to troubleshoot the failure:

   - To review the the error message in the pop-up window, hover your mouse cursor over the highlighted cell.

   - To open the Alerts panel at the bottom of the designer or the project view for the error messages, click View Alerts.

   - Make the necessary changes and run the test again until the scenario passes.

#### 17.12.8. Running a test scenario locally

In Drools, you can either run the test scenarios directly in Business Central or locally using the command line.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. On the Project’s home page, select the Settings tab.

3. Select git URL and click the Clipboard to copy the git url.

4. Open a command terminal and navigate to the directory where you want to clone the git project.

5. Run the following command:

       git clone your_git_project_url

   Replace `your_git_project_url` with relevant data like `git://localhost:9418/MySpace/ProjectTestScenarios`.

6. Once the project is successfully cloned, navigate to the git project directory and execute the following command:

       mvn clean test

   Your project’s build information and the test results (such as, the number of tests run and whether the test run was a success or not) are displayed in the command terminal. In case of failures, make the necessary changes in Business Central, pull the changes and run the command again.

#### 17.12.9. Creating test scenario using the sample Mortgages project

This chapter illustrates creating and executing a test scenario from the sample Mortgages project shipped with Business Central using the test scenarios designer. The test scenario example in this chapter is based on the Pricing loans guided decision table from the Mortgages project.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click Mortgages.

2. If the project is not listed under Projects, from MySpace, click the three dots () in the upper-right corner of the page.

3. Click Try Samples → Mortgages → OK.

   The Assets window appears.

4. Click Add Asset → Test Scenario.

5. Enter `scenario_pricing_loans` as the Test Scenario name and select the default `mortgages.mortgages` package from the Package drop-down list.

   The package you select must contain all the required rule assets.

6. Select RULE as the Source type.

7. Click Ok to create and open the test scenario in the test scenarios designer.

8. Expand Project Explorer and verify the following:

   - `Applicant`, `Bankruptcy`, `IncomeSource`, and `LoanApplication` data objects exist.

   - `Pricing loans` guide decision table exists.

   - Verify that the new test scenario is listed under Test Scenario

9. After verifying that everything is in place, return to the Model tab of the test scenarios designer and define the GIVEN and EXPECT data for the scenario, based on the available data objects.

   A blank test scenarios designer

10. Define the GIVEN column details,

    1. Click the cell named INSTANCE 1 under the GIVEN column header.

    2. From Test Tools panel, select LoanApplication data object.

    3. Click Add.

11. To create properties of the data object, right-click the property cell and select Insert column right or Insert column left as required. For this example, you need to create two more property cells under the GIVEN column.

12. Click the first property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click amount and then Add to map the data object field to the property cell.

13. Click the second property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click deposit and then Add.

14. Click the third property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click lengthYears and then Add.

15. Right-click LoanApplication header cell and select Insert column right. A new GIVEN column to the right is created.

16. Click the new header cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select the IncomeSource data object.

    2. Click Add to map the data object to the header cell.

17. Click the property cell below IncomeSource,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the IncomeSource data object.

    2. Click type and then Add to map the data object field to the property cell.

       You have now defined all the GIVEN column cells.

18. Next, define the EXPECT column details,

    1. Click the cell named INSTANCE 2 under the EXPECT column header.

    2. From Test Tools panel, select LoanApplication data object.

    3. Click Add.

19. To create properties of the data object, right-click the property cell and select Insert column right or Insert column left as required. Create two more property cells under the EXPECT column.

20. Click the first property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click approved and then Add to map the data object field to the property cell.

21. Click the second property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click insuranceCost and then Add.

22. Click the third property cell,

    1. From Test Tools panel, select and expand the LoanApplication data object.

    2. Click approvedRate and then Add.

23. Now for defining the test scenario, enter the following data in the first row:

    - Enter `Row 1 test scenario` as the Scenario Description, `150000` as the amount, `19000` as the deposit, `30` as the lenghtYears, and `Asset` as the type for the GIVEN column values.

    - Enter `true` as approved, `0` as the insuranceCost and `2` as the approvedRate for the EXPECT column values.

24. Next enter the following data in the second row:

    - Enter `Row 2 test scenario` as the Scenario Description, `100002` as the amount, `2999` as the deposit, `20` as the lenghtYears, and `Job` as the type for the GIVEN column values.

    - Enter `true` as approved, `10` as the insuranceCost and `6` as the approvedRate for the EXPECT column values.

25. After you have defined all GIVEN, EXPECT, and other data for the scenario, click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work.

26. Click Run Test in the upper-right corner to run the `.scesim` file.

    The test result is displayed in the Test Report panel. Click View Alerts to display messages from the Alerts section. If a test fails, refer to the messages in the Alerts section at the bottom of the window, review and correct all components in the scenario, and try again to validate the scenario until the scenario passes.

27. Click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work after you have made all necessary changes.

#### 17.12.10. Test scenarios (legacy) designer in Business Central

Drools currently supports both the new Test Scenarios designer and the former Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer. The default designer is the new test scenarios designer, which supports testing of both rules and DMN models and provides an enhanced overall user experience with test scenarios. If required, you can continue to use the legacy test scenarios designer, which supports rule-based test scenarios only.

##### 17.12.10.1. Creating and running a test scenario (legacy)

You can create test scenarios in Business Central to test the functionality of business rule data before deployment. A basic test scenario must have at least the following data:

- Related data objects

- GIVEN facts

- EXPECT results

With this data, the test scenario can validate the expected and actual results for that rule instance based on the defined facts. You can also add a CALL METHOD and any available globals to a test scenario, but these scenario settings are optional.

Procedure

1. In Business Central, go to Menu → Design → Projects and click the project name.

2. Click Add Asset → Test Scenarios (Legacy).

3. Enter an informative Test Scenario name and select the appropriate Package. The package that you specify must be the same package where the required rule assets have been assigned or will be assigned. You can import data objects from any package into the asset’s designer.

4. Click Ok to create the test scenario.

   The new test scenario is now listed in the Test Scenarios panel of the Project Explorer,

5. Click the Data Objects tab to verify that all data objects required for the rules that you want to test are listed. If not, click New item to import the needed data objects from other packages, or within your package.

6. After all data objects are in place, return to the Model tab of the test scenarios designer and define the GIVEN and EXPECT data for the scenario, based on the available data objects.

   Figure 334. The test scenarios designer

   The GIVEN section defines the input facts for the test. For example, if an `Underage` rule in the project declines loan applications for applicants under the age of 21, then the GIVEN facts in the test scenario could be `Applicant` with `age` set to some integer less than 21.

   The EXPECT section defines the expected results based on the GIVEN input facts. That is, GIVEN the input facts, EXPECT these other facts to be valid or entire rules to be activated. For example, with the given facts of an applicant under the age of 21 in the scenario, the EXPECT results could be `LoanApplication` with `approved` set to `false` (as a result of the underage applicant), or could be the activation of the `Underage` rule as a whole.

7. Optionally, add a CALL METHOD and any globals to the test scenario:

   - CALL METHOD: Use this to invoke a method from another fact when the rule execution is initiated. Click CALL METHOD, select a fact, and click to select the method to invoke. You can invoke any Java class methods (such as methods from an ArrayList) from the Java library or from a JAR that was imported for the project (if applicable).

   - globals: Use this to add any global variables in the project that you want to validate in the test scenario. Click globals to select the variable to be validated, and then in the test scenarios designer, click the global name and define field values to be applied to the global variable. If no global variables are available, then they must be created as new assets in Business Central. Global variables are named objects that are visible to the Drools engine but are different from the objects for facts. Changes in the object of a global do not trigger the re-evaluation of rules.

8. Click More at the bottom of the test scenarios designer to add other data blocks to the same scenario file as needed.

9. After you have defined all GIVEN, EXPECT, and other data for the scenario, click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work.

10. Click Run scenario in the upper-right corner to run this `.scenario` file, or click Run all scenarios to run all saved `.scenario` files in the project package (if there are multiple). Although the Run scenario option does not require the individual `.scenario` file to be saved, the Run all scenarios option does require all `.scenario` files to be saved.

    If the test fails, address any problems described in the Alerts message at the bottom of the window, review all components in the scenario, and try again to validate the scenario until the scenario passes.

11. Click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work after all changes are complete.

##### 17.12.10.2. Adding GIVEN facts in test scenarios (legacy)

The GIVEN section defines input facts for the test. For example, if an `Underage` rule in the project declines loan applications for applicants under the age of 21, then the GIVEN facts in the test scenario could be `Applicant` with `age` set to some integer less than 21.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your test scenario have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer.

Procedure

1. In the Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer, click GIVEN to open the New input window with the available facts.

   Figure 335. Add GIVEN input to the test scenario

   The list includes the following options, depending on the data objects available in the Data Objects tab of the test scenarios designer:

   - Insert a new fact: Use this to add a fact and modify its field values. Enter a variable for the fact as the Fact name.

   - Modify an existing fact: (Appears only after another fact has been added.) Use this to specify a previously inserted fact to be modified in the Drools engine between executions of the scenario.

   - Delete an existing fact: (Appears only after another fact has been added.) Use this to specify a previously inserted fact to be deleted from the Drools engine between executions of the scenario.

   - Activate rule flow group: Use this to specify a rule flow group to be activated so that all rules within that group can be tested.

2. Choose a fact for the desired input option and click Add. For example, set Insert a new fact: to Applicant and enter `a` or `app` or any other variable for the Fact name.

3. Click the fact in the test scenarios designer and select the field to be modified.

   Figure 336. Modify a fact field

4. Click the edit icon () and select from the following field values:

   - Literal value: Creates an open field in which you enter a specific literal value.

   - Bound variable: Sets the value of the field to the fact bound to a selected variable. The field type must match the bound variable type.

   - Create new fact: Enables you to create a new fact and assign it as a field value of the parent fact. Then you can click the child fact in the test scenarios designer and likewise assign field values or nest other facts similarly.

5. Continue adding any other GIVEN input data for the scenario and click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work.

##### 17.12.10.3. Adding EXPECT results in test scenarios (legacy)

The EXPECT section defines the expected results based on the GIVEN input facts. That is, GIVEN the input facts, EXPECT other specified facts to be valid or entire rules to be activated. For example, with the given facts of an applicant under the age of 21 in the scenario, the EXPECT results could be `LoanApplication` with `approved` set to `false` (as a result of the underage applicant), or could be the activation of the `Underage` rule as a whole.

Prerequisites

- All data objects required for your test scenario have been created or imported and are listed in the Data Objects tab of the Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer.

Procedure

1. In the Test Scenarios (Legacy) designer, click EXPECT to open the New expectation window with the available facts.

   Figure 337. Add EXPECT results to the test scenario

   The list includes the following options, depending on the data in the GIVEN section and the data objects available in the Data Objects tab of the test scenarios designer:

   - Rule: Use this to specify a particular rule in the project that is expected to be activated as a result of the GIVEN input. Type the name of a rule that is expected to be activated or select it from the list of rules, and then in the test scenarios designer, specify the number of times the rule should be activated.

   - Fact value: Use this to select a fact and define values for it that are expected to be valid as a result of the facts defined in the GIVEN section. The facts are listed by the Fact name previously defined for the GIVEN input.

   - Any fact that matches: Use this to validate that at least one fact with the specified values exists as a result of the GIVEN input.

2. Choose a fact for the desired expectation (such as Fact value: `application`) and click Add or OK.

3. Click the fact in the test scenarios designer and select the field to be added and modified.

   Figure 338. Modify a fact field

4. Set the field values to what is expected to be valid as a result of the GIVEN input (such as `approved` | `equals` | `false`).

5. Continue adding any other EXPECT input data for the scenario and click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work.

6. After you have defined and saved all GIVEN, EXPECT, and other data for the scenario, click Run scenario in the upper-right corner to run this `.scenario` file, or click Run all scenarios to run all saved `.scenario` files in the project package (if there are multiple). Although the Run scenario option does not require the individual `.scenario` file to be saved, the Run all scenarios option does require all `.scenario` files to be saved.

   If the test fails, address any problems described in the Alerts message at the bottom of the window, review all components in the scenario, and try again to validate the scenario until the scenario passes.

7. Click Save in the test scenarios designer to save your work after all changes are complete.

## 18. Business Central integration

### 18.1. Knowledge Store REST API for Business Central spaces and projects

Drools provides a Knowledge Store REST API that you can use to interact with your projects and spaces in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. The Knowledge Store is the artifact repository for assets in Drools. This API support enables you to facilitate and automate maintenance of Business Central projects and spaces.

With the Knowledge Store REST API, you can perform the following actions:

- Retrieve information about all projects and spaces

- Create, update, or delete projects and spaces

- Build, deploy, and test projects

- Retrieve information about previous Knowledge Store REST API requests, or jobs

Knowledge Store REST API requests require the following components:

Authentication

  The Knowledge Store REST API requires HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the user role `rest-all`. To view configured user roles for your Drools distribution, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/application-roles.properties` and `~/application-users.properties`.

  To add a user with the `rest-all` role, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/bin` and run the following command:

      $ ./add-user.sh -a --user <USERNAME> --password <PASSWORD> --role rest-all

  For more information about user roles and Drools installation options, see Installing the KIE Server.

HTTP headers

  The Knowledge Store REST API requires the following HTTP headers for API requests:

  - `Accept`: Data format accepted by your requesting client:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

  - `Content-Type`: Data format of your `POST` or `PUT` API request data:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

HTTP methods

  The Knowledge Store REST API supports the following HTTP methods for API requests:

  - `GET`: Retrieves specified information from a specified resource endpoint

  - `POST`: Creates or updates a resource

  - `DELETE`: Deletes a resource

Base URL

  The base URL for Knowledge Store REST API requests is `http://SERVER:PORT/business-central/rest/`, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/`.

  | The REST API base URL for the Knowledge Store and for the Drools controller built in to Business Central are the same because both are considered part of Business Central REST services.

Endpoints

  Knowledge Store REST API endpoints, such as `/spaces/{spaceName}` for a specified space, are the URIs that you append to the Knowledge Store REST API base URL to access the corresponding resource or type of resource in Drools.

  Example request URL for `/spaces/{spaceName}` endpoint

  `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace`

Request data

  HTTP `POST` requests in the Knowledge Store REST API may require a JSON request body with data to accompany the request.

  Example POST request URL and JSON request body data

  `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace/projects`

      {
        "name": "Employee_Rostering",
        "groupId": "employeerostering",
        "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
        "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill."
      }

#### 18.1.1. Sending requests with the Knowledge Store REST API using a REST client or curl utility

The Knowledge Store REST API enables you to interact with your projects and spaces in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. You can send Knowledge Store REST API requests using any REST client or curl utility.

Prerequisites

- Business Central is installed and running.

- You have `rest-all` user role access to Business Central.

Procedure

1. Identify the relevant API endpoint to which you want to send a request, such as `[GET] /spaces` to retrieve spaces in Business Central.

2. In a REST client or curl utility, enter the following components for a `GET` request to `/spaces`. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the Business Central user with the `rest-all` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following header:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the Knowledge Store REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces`.

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the Business Central user with the `rest-all` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following header:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the Knowledge Store REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces`.

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -X GET "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces"

3. Execute the request and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       [
         {
           "name": "MySpace",
           "description": null,
           "projects": [
             {
               "name": "Employee_Rostering",
               "spaceName": "MySpace",
               "groupId": "employeerostering",
               "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
               "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
               "publicURIs": [
                 {
                   "protocol": "git",
                   "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
                 },
                 {
                   "protocol": "ssh",
                   "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
                 }
               ]
             },
             {
               "name": "Mortgage_Process",
               "spaceName": "MySpace",
               "groupId": "mortgage-process",
               "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
               "description": "Getting started loan approval process in BPMN2, decision table, business rules, and forms.",
               "publicURIs": [
                 {
                   "protocol": "git",
                   "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
                 },
                 {
                   "protocol": "ssh",
                   "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
                 }
               ]
             }
           ],
           "owner": "admin",
           "defaultGroupId": "com.myspace"
         },
         {
           "name": "MySpace2",
           "description": null,
           "projects": [
             {
               "name": "IT_Orders",
               "spaceName": "MySpace",
               "groupId": "itorders",
               "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
               "description": "Case Management IT Orders project",
               "publicURIs": [
                 {
                   "protocol": "git",
                   "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-IT_Orders-1"
                 },
                 {
                   "protocol": "ssh",
                   "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-IT_Orders-1"
                 }
               ]
             }
           ],
           "owner": "admin",
           "defaultGroupId": "com.myspace"
         }
       ]

4. In your REST client or curl utility, send another API request with the following components for a `POST` request to `/spaces/{spaceName}/projects` to create a project within a space. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the Business Central user with the `rest-all` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following header:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

     - `Content-Type`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `POST`.

   - URL: Enter the Knowledge Store REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace/projects`.

   - Request body: Add a JSON request body with the identification data for the new project:

       {
         "name": "Employee_Rostering",
         "groupId": "employeerostering",
         "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
         "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill."
       }

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the Business Central user with the `rest-all` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following headers:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

     - `content-type`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `POST`.

   - URL: Enter the Knowledge Store REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace/projects`.

   - `-d`: Add a JSON request body or file (`@file.json`) with the identification data for the new project:

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X POST "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace/projects" -d "{ \"name\": \"Employee_Rostering\", \"groupId\": \"employeerostering\", \"version\": \"1.0.0-SNAPSHOT\", \"description\": \"Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.\"}"

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X POST "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/spaces/MySpace/projects" -d @my-project.json

5. Execute the request and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "jobId": "1541017411591-6",
         "status": "APPROVED",
         "spaceName": "MySpace",
         "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
         "projectGroupId": "employeerostering",
         "projectVersion": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
         "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill."
       }

   If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your request accordingly.

#### 18.1.2. Supported Knowledge Store REST API endpoints

The Knowledge Store REST API provides endpoints for managing spaces and projects in Drools and for retrieving information about previous Knowledge Store REST API requests, or jobs.

##### 18.1.2.1. Spaces

The Knowledge Store REST API supports the following endpoints for managing spaces in Business Central. The Knowledge Store REST API base URL is `http://SERVER:PORT/business-central/rest/`. All requests require HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the `rest-all` user role.

[GET] /spaces

  Returns all spaces in Business Central.

  Example server response (JSON)

      [
        {
          "name": "MySpace",
          "description": null,
          "projects": [
            {
              "name": "Employee_Rostering",
              "spaceName": "MySpace",
              "groupId": "employeerostering",
              "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
              "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
              "publicURIs": [
                {
                  "protocol": "git",
                  "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
                },
                {
                  "protocol": "ssh",
                  "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
                }
              ]
            },
            {
              "name": "Mortgage_Process",
              "spaceName": "MySpace",
              "groupId": "mortgage-process",
              "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
              "description": "Getting started loan approval process in BPMN2, decision table, business rules, and forms.",
              "publicURIs": [
                {
                  "protocol": "git",
                  "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
                },
                {
                  "protocol": "ssh",
                  "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
                }
              ]
            }
          ],
          "owner": "admin",
          "defaultGroupId": "com.myspace"
        },
        {
          "name": "MySpace2",
          "description": null,
          "projects": [
            {
              "name": "IT_Orders",
              "spaceName": "MySpace",
              "groupId": "itorders",
              "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
              "description": "Case Management IT Orders project",
              "publicURIs": [
                {
                  "protocol": "git",
                  "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-IT_Orders-1"
                },
                {
                  "protocol": "ssh",
                  "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-IT_Orders-1"
                }
              ]
            }
          ],
          "owner": "admin",
          "defaultGroupId": "com.myspace"
        }
      ]

[GET] /spaces/{spaceName}

  Returns information about a specified space.

  Table 62. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space to be retrieved | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "name": "MySpace",
        "description": null,
        "projects": [
          {
            "name": "Mortgage_Process",
            "spaceName": "MySpace",
            "groupId": "mortgage-process",
            "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
            "description": "Getting started loan approval process in BPMN2, decision table, business rules, and forms.",
            "publicURIs": [
              {
                "protocol": "git",
                "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
              },
              {
                "protocol": "ssh",
                "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
              }
            ]
          },
          {
            "name": "Employee_Rostering",
            "spaceName": "MySpace",
            "groupId": "employeerostering",
            "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
            "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
            "publicURIs": [
              {
                "protocol": "git",
                "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
              },
              {
                "protocol": "ssh",
                "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
              }
            ]
          },
          {
            "name": "Evaluation_Process",
            "spaceName": "MySpace",
            "groupId": "evaluation",
            "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
            "description": "Getting started Business Process for evaluating employees",
            "publicURIs": [
              {
                "protocol": "git",
                "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Evaluation_Process"
              },
              {
                "protocol": "ssh",
                "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Evaluation_Process"
              }
            ]
          },
          {
            "name": "IT_Orders",
            "spaceName": "MySpace",
            "groupId": "itorders",
            "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
            "description": "Case Management IT Orders project",
            "publicURIs": [
              {
                "protocol": "git",
                "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-IT_Orders"
              },
              {
                "protocol": "ssh",
                "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-IT_Orders"
              }
            ]
          }
        ],
        "owner": "admin",
        "defaultGroupId": "com.myspace"
      }

[POST] /spaces

  Creates a space in Business Central.

  Table 63. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  body | The `name`, `description`, `owner`, `defaultGroupId`, and any other components of the new space | Request body | Required

  Example request body (JSON)

      {
        "name": "NewSpace",
        "description": "My new space.",
        "owner": "admin",
        "defaultGroupId": "com.newspace"
      }

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541016978154-3",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "spaceName": "NewSpace",
        "owner": "admin",
        "defaultGroupId": "com.newspace",
        "description": "My new space."
      }

[DELETE] /spaces/{spaceName}

  Deletes a specified space from Business Central.

  Table 64. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space to be deleted | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541127032997-8",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "spaceName": "MySpace",
        "owner": "admin",
        "description": "My deleted space.",
        "repositories": null
      }

##### 18.1.2.2. Projects

The Knowledge Store REST API supports the following endpoints for managing, building, and deploying projects in Business Central. The Knowledge Store REST API base URL is `http://SERVER:PORT/business-central/rest/`. All requests require HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the `rest-all` user role.

[GET] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects

  Returns projects in a specified space.

  Table 65. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space for which you are retrieving projects | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      [
        {
          "name": "Mortgage_Process",
          "spaceName": "MySpace",
          "groupId": "mortgage-process",
          "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
          "description": "Getting started loan approval process in BPMN2, decision table, business rules, and forms.",
          "publicURIs": [
            {
              "protocol": "git",
              "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
            },
            {
              "protocol": "ssh",
              "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Mortgage_Process"
            }
          ]
        },
        {
          "name": "Employee_Rostering",
          "spaceName": "MySpace",
          "groupId": "employeerostering",
          "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
          "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
          "publicURIs": [
            {
              "protocol": "git",
              "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
            },
            {
              "protocol": "ssh",
              "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
            }
          ]
        },
        {
          "name": "Evaluation_Process",
          "spaceName": "MySpace",
          "groupId": "evaluation",
          "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
          "description": "Getting started Business Process for evaluating employees",
          "publicURIs": [
            {
              "protocol": "git",
              "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Evaluation_Process"
            },
            {
              "protocol": "ssh",
              "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Evaluation_Process"
            }
          ]
        },
        {
          "name": "IT_Orders",
          "spaceName": "MySpace",
          "groupId": "itorders",
          "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
          "description": "Case Management IT Orders project",
          "publicURIs": [
            {
              "protocol": "git",
              "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-IT_Orders"
            },
            {
              "protocol": "ssh",
              "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-IT_Orders"
            }
          ]
        }
      ]

[GET] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}

  Returns information about a specified project in a specified space.

  Table 66. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be retrieved | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "name": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace",
        "groupId": "employeerostering",
        "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
        "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
        "publicURIs": [
          {
            "protocol": "git",
            "uri": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
          },
          {
            "protocol": "ssh",
            "uri": "ssh://localhost:8001/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
          }
        ]
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects

  Creates a project in a specified space.

  Table 67. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space in which the new project will be created | String | Required
  body | The `name`, `groupId`, `version`, `description`, and any other components of the new project | Request body | Required

  Example request body (JSON)

      {
        "name": "Employee_Rostering",
        "groupId": "employeerostering",
        "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
        "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill."
      }

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541017411591-6",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "spaceName": "MySpace",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "projectGroupId": "employeerostering",
        "projectVersion": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
        "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill."
      }

[DELETE] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}

  Deletes a specified project from a specified space.

  Table 68. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be deleted | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541128617727-10",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace"
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/git/clone

  Clones a project into a specified space from a specified Git address.

  Table 69. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space to which you are cloning a project | String | Required
  body | The `name`, `description`, and Git repository `userName`, `password`, and `gitURL` for the project to be cloned | Request body | Required

  Example request body (JSON)

      {
        "name": "Employee_Rostering",
        "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
        "userName": "baAdmin",
        "password": "password@1",
        "gitURL": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
      }

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541129488547-13",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "cloneProjectRequest": {
          "name": "Employee_Rostering",
          "description": "Employee rostering problem optimisation using Planner. Assigns employees to shifts based on their skill.",
          "userName": "baAdmin",
          "password": "password@1",
          "gitURL": "git://localhost:9418/MySpace/example-Employee_Rostering"
        },
        "spaceName": "MySpace2"
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}/maven/compile

  Compiles a specified project in a specified space (equivalent to `mvn compile`).

  Table 70. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be compiled | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541128617727-10",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace"
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}/maven/test

  Tests a specified project in a specified space (equivalent to `mvn test`).

  Table 71. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be tested | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541132591595-19",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace"
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}/maven/install

  Installs a specified project in a specified space (equivalent to `mvn install`).

  Table 72. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be installed | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541132668987-20",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace"
      }

[POST] /spaces/{spaceName}/projects/{projectName}/maven/deploy

  Deploys a specified project in a specified space (equivalent to `mvn deploy`).

  Table 73. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `spaceName` | Name of the space where the project is located | String | Required
  `projectName` | Name of the project to be deployed | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "jobId": "1541132816435-21",
        "status": "APPROVED",
        "projectName": "Employee_Rostering",
        "spaceName": "MySpace"
      }

##### 18.1.2.3. Jobs (API requests)

All `POST` and `DELETE` requests in the Knowledge Store REST API return a job ID associated with each request, in addition to the returned request details. You can use a job ID to view the request status or delete a sent request.

Knowledge Store REST API requests, or jobs, can have the following statuses:

Table 74. Job statuses (API request statuses)
Status | Description
--- | ---
`ACCEPTED` | The request was accepted and is being processed.
`BAD_REQUEST` | The request contained incorrect content and was not accepted.
`RESOURCE_NOT_EXIST` | The requested resource (path) does not exist.
`DUPLICATE_RESOURCE` | The resource already exists.
`SERVER_ERROR` | An error occurred in KIE Server.
`SUCCESS` | The request finished successfully.
`FAIL` | The request failed.
`APPROVED` | The request was approved.
`DENIED` | The request was denied.
`GONE` | The job ID for the request could not be found due to one of the following reasons: The request was explicitly removed. The request finished and has been deleted from a status cache. A request is removed from a status cache after the cache has reached its maximum capacity. The request never existed.

The Knowledge Store REST API supports the following endpoints for retrieving or deleting sent API requests. The Knowledge Store REST API base URL is `http://SERVER:PORT/business-central/rest/`. All requests require HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the `rest-all` user role.

[GET] /jobs/{jobId}

  Returns the status of a specified job (a previously sent API request).

  Table 75. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `jobId` | ID of the job to be retrieved (example: `1541010216919-1`) | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "status": "SUCCESS",
        "jobId": "1541010216919-1",
        "result": null,
        "lastModified": 1541010218352,
        "detailedResult": [
          "level:INFO, path:null, text:Build of module 'Mortgage_Process' (requested by system) completed.\n Build: SUCCESSFUL"
        ]
      }

[DELETE] /jobs/{jobId}

  Deletes a specified job (a previously sent API request). If the job is not being processed yet, this request removes the job from the job queue. This request does not cancel or stop an ongoing job.

  Table 76. Request parameters
  Name | Description | Type | Requirement
  --- | --- | --- | ---
  `jobId` | ID of the job to be deleted (example: `1541010216919-1`) | String | Required

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "status": "GONE",
        "jobId": "1541010216919-1",
        "result": null,
        "lastModified": 1541132054916,
        "detailedResult": [
          "level:INFO, path:null, text:Build of module 'Mortgage_Process' (requested by system) completed.\n Build: SUCCESSFUL"
        ]
      }

### 18.2. Embedded Drools controller calls

When running Business Central with the embedded Drools controller mode, a series of endpoints related to managing all aspects of KIE Server templates, instances, and containers are also available. For more details, see Drools controller REST API. A Java client API is also available for interacting with these endpoints.

### 18.3. Keycloak SSO integration

Single Sign On (SSO) and related token exchange mechanisms are becoming the most common scenario for the authentication and authorization in different environments on the web, specially when moving into the cloud.

This section talks about the integration of Keycloak with jBPM or Drools applications in order to use all the features provided on Keycloak. Keycloak is an integrated SSO and IDM for browser applications and RESTful web services. Lean more about it in the Keycloak’s home page.

The result of the integration with Keycloak has lots of advantages such as:

- Provide an integrated SSO and IDM environment for different clients, including Business Central

- Social logins - use your Facebook, Google, LinkedIn, etc accounts

- User session management

- And much more…​

Next sections cover the following integration points with Keycloak:

- Business Central authentication through a Keycloak server

  It basically consists of securing both web client and remote service clients through the Keycloak SSO. So either web interface or remote service consumers (whether a user or a service) will authenticate into trough KC.

- Execution server authentication through a Keycloak server

  Consists of securing the remote services provided by the execution server (as it does not provide web interface). Any remote service consumer (whether a user or a service) will authenticate trough KC.

- Consuming remote services

  This section describes how a third party clients can consume the remote service endpoints provided by both Business Central and Execution Server, such as the REST API or remote file system services.

- Keycloak and Business Central’s security administration area

#### 18.3.1. Scenario

Consider the following diagram as the environment for this document’s example:

Keycloak is a standalone process that provides remote authentication, authorization and administration services that can be potentially consumed by one or more jBPM applications over the network.

Consider these main steps for building this environment:

- Install and set up a Keycloak server

- Create and set up a Realm for this example - Configure realm’s clients, users and roles

- Install and set up the SSO client adapter & jBPM application

Note: The resulting environment and the different configurations for this document are based on Business Central.

#### 18.3.2. Install and set up a Keycloak server

Keycloak provides an extensive documentation and several articles about the installation on different environments. This section describes the minimal set up for being able to build the integrated environment for the example. Please refer to the Keycloak documentation if you need more information.

Here are the steps for a minimal Keycloak installation and set up:

- Download latest version of Keycloak from the Downloads section. This example is based on Keycloak 1.9.0.Final

- Unzip the downloaded distribution of Keycloak into a folder, let’s refer it as

      $KC_HOME

- Run the KC server - This example is based on running both Keycloak and jBPM on same host. In order to avoid port conflicts you can use a port offset for the Keycloak’s server as:

      $KC_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -Djboss.socket.binding.port-offset=100

- Create a Keycloak’s administration 'admin' user by navigating to http://localhost:8180/auth/

The Keycloak administration console will be available at http://localhost:8180/auth/admin/.

#### 18.3.3. Create and set up the demo realm

Security realms are used to restrict the access for the different application’s resources.

Once the Keycloak server is running next step is about creating a realm. This realm will provide the different users, roles, sessions, etc for the jBPM application/s.

Keycloak provides several examples for the realm creation and management, from the official examples to different articles with more examples.

Follow these steps in order to create the demo realm used later in this document:

- Go to the Keycloak administration console and click on Add realm button. Give it the name demo.

- Go to the Clients section (from the main admin console menu) and create a new client for the demo realm:

  - Client ID: kie

  - Client protocol: openid-connect

  - Acces type: confidential

  - Root URL: http://localhost:8080

  - Base URL: /business-central-x.y.z.Final

  - Redirect URIs: /business-central-x.y.z.Final/*

The resulting kie client settings screen:

| As you can see in the above settings it’s being considered the value business-central-x.y.z.Final for the application’s context path. If your jBPM application will be deployed on a different context path, host or port, just use your concrete settings here.

Last step for being able to use the demo realm from Business Central is create the application’s user and roles:

- Go to the Roles section and create the roles admin, kiemgmt and rest-all

- Go to the Users section and create the admin user. Set the password with value password in the credentials tab, unset the temporary switch.

- In the Users section navigate to the Role Mappings tab and assign the admin, kiemgmt and rest-all roles to the admin user

At this point a Keycloak server is running on the host, set up with a minimal configuration set. Let’s move to Business Central set up.

#### 18.3.4. Install and set up Business Central

For this tutorial let’s use a Wildfly as the application server for Business Central, as the jBPM installer does by default.

Let’s assume, after running the jBPM installer, the $JBPM_HOME as the root path for the Wildfly server where the application has been deployed.

##### 18.3.4.1. Install the KC adapter

In order to use the Keycloak’s authentication and authorization modules from the jBPM application, the Keycloak JBoss EAP/Wildfly Adapter must be installed on our server at $JBPM_HOME. Keycloak provides multiple adapters for different containers out of the box, if you are using another container or need to use another adapter, please take a look at the Securing Applications section from the Keycloak docs. Here are the steps to install and set up the adapter for Wildfly 11/10/9:

- Download the adapter from Keycloak Client Adapter for Wildfly 11/10/9

- Execute the following commands on your shell:

      cd $JBPM_HOME
      unzip keycloak-wildfly-adapter-dist-3.4.3.Final.zip // Install the KC client adapter

      cd $JBPM_HOME/bin
      ./standalone.sh -c standalone-full.xml // set up the KC client adapter.

      // ** Once server is up, open a new command line terminal and run:
      cd $JBPM_HOME/bin
      ./jboss-cli.sh -c --file=adapter-install.cli

##### 18.3.4.2. Configure the KC adapter

Once installed the KC adapter into Wildfly, next step is to configure the adapter in order to specify different settings such as the location for the authentication server, the realm to use and so on.

Keycloak provides two ways of configuring the adapter:

- Per WAR configuration

- Via Keycloak subsystem

In this example let’s use the second option, use the Keycloak subsystem, so our WAR is free from this kind of settings. If you want to use the per WAR approach, please take a look Required Per WAR Configuration.

Edit the configuration file $JBPM_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml and locate the subsystem configuration section. Add the following content:

    <subsystem xmlns="urn:jboss:domain:keycloak:1.1">
      <secure-deployment name="business-central-x.y.z.Final.war">
        <realm>demo</realm>
        <realm-public-key>MIIBIjANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQEFAAOCA...</realm-public-key>
        <auth-server-url>http://localhost:8180/auth</auth-server-url>
        <ssl-required>external</ssl-required>
        <resource>kie</resource>
        <enable-basic-auth>true</enable-basic-auth>
        <credential name="secret">925f9190-a7c1-4cfd-8a3c-004f9c73dae6</credential>
        <principal-attribute>preferred_username</principal-attribute>
      </secure-deployment>
    </subsystem>

If you have imported the example json files from this document in step 2, you can just use same configuration as above by using your concrete deployment name. Otherwise please use your values for these configurations:

- Name for the secure deployment - Use your concrete application’s WAR file name

- Realm - Is the realm that the applications will use, in our example, the demo realm created the previous step.

- Realm Public Key - Provide here the public key for the demo realm. It’s not mandatory, if it’s not specified, it will be retrieved from the server. Otherwise, you can find it in the Keycloak admin console → Realm settings (for demo realm) → Keys

- Authentication server URL - The URL for the Keycloak’s authentication server

- Resource - The name for the client created on step 2. In our example, use the value kie.

- Enable basic auth - For this example let’s enable Basic authentication mechanism as well, so clients can use both Token (Bearer) and Basic approaches to perform the requests.

- Credential - Use the password value for the kie client. You can find it in the Keycloak admin console → Clients → kie → Credentials tab → Copy the value for the secret.

For this example you have to take care about using your concrete values for secure-deployment name, realm-public-key and credential password.

| Ensure the following tag is NOT present in the Widfly/EAP profile’s configuration file (eg: standalone.xml):
    <single-sign-on/>
It’s enabled by default in some server versions. If present, it must be removed/disabled in order to allow Keycloak to properly handle the clients.

##### 18.3.4.3. Run the environment

At this point a Keycloak server is up and running on the host, and the KC adapter is installed and configured for the jBPM application server. You can run the application using:

    $JBPM_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -c standalone-full.xml

You can navigate into the application once the server is up at:

     http://localhost:8080/business-central-x.y.z.Final

Use your Keycloak’s admin user credentials to login: admin/password.

#### 18.3.5. Securing Business Central remote services via Keycloak

Business Central provides different remote service endpoints that can be consumed by third party clients using the Knowledge Store REST API.

In order to authenticate those services through Keycloak, apply those modifications for the WEB-INF/web.xml file (app deployment descriptor) from jBPM’s WAR file:

- Constraint the remote services URL patterns as:

      <security-constraint>
        <web-resource-collection>
          <web-resource-name>remote-services</web-resource-name>
          <url-pattern>/rest/*</url-pattern>
          <url-pattern>/maven2/*</url-pattern>
          <url-pattern>/ws/*</url-pattern>
        </web-resource-collection>
        <auth-constraint>
          <role-name>rest-all</role-name>
        </auth-constraint>
      </security-constraint>

| The user that consumes the remote services must be member of role rest-all. As on described previous steps, the admin user in this example it’s already a member of the rest-all role.

#### 18.3.6. Securing Business Central's file system services via Keycloak

In order to consume other remote services such as the file system ones (e.g. remote GIT), a specific Keycloak login module must be used for the application’s security domain in the $JBPM_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml file. By default Business Central uses the other security domain, so the resulting configuration on the $JBPM_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml should be such as:

    <security-domain name="other" cache-type="default">
        <authentication>
            <login-module code="org.keycloak.adapters.jaas.DirectAccessGrantsLoginModule" flag="required">
                <!-- Parameter value can be a file system absolute path or a classpath (e.g. "classpath:/some-path/kie-git.json")-->
                <module-option name="keycloak-config-file" value="$JBPM_HOME/kie-git.json"/>
            </login-module>
        </authentication>
    </security-domain>

Note that:

- The login modules on the other security domain in the $JBPM_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml file must be REPLACED by the above given one.

- Replace $JBPM_HOME/kie-git.json by the path (on file system) or the classpath (e.g. classpath:/some-path/kie-git.json) for the json configuration file used for the remote services client. Please continue reading in order to create this Keycloak client and how to obtain this json file.

At this point, remote services that use JAAS for the authentication process, such as the file system ones (e.g. GIT), are secured by Keycloak using the client specified in the above json configuration file. So let’s create this client on Keycloak and generate the required JSON file:

- Navigate to the KC administration console and create a new client for the demo realm using kie-git as name.

- Enable Direct Access Grants Enabled option

- Disable Standard Flow Enabled option

- Use a confidential access type for this client. See below image as example:

- Go to the Installation tab in same kie-git client configuration screen and export using the Keycloak OIDC JSON type.

- Finally copy this generated JSON file into an accessible directory on the server’s file system or add it in the application’s classpath. Use this path value as the keycloak-config-file argument for the above configuration of the org.keycloak.adapters.jaas.DirectAccessGrantsLoginModule login module.

- More information about Keycloak JAAS Login modules can be found Keycloak JAAS plugin.

At this point, the internal Git repositories can be cloned by all users authenticated via the Keycloak server:

    # Command example:
    git clone ssh://admin@localhost:8001/system

#### 18.3.7. Execution server

The KIE Execution Server provides a REST API that can be consumed for any third party clients. This this section is about how to integration the KIE Execution Server with the Keycloak SSO in order to delegate the third party clients identity management to the SSO server.

Consider the above environment running, so consider having:

- A Keycloak server running and listening on http://localhost:8180/auth

- A realm named demo with a client named kie for Business Central

- A Business Central running at http://localhost:8080/business-central-x.y.z.Final

Follow these steps in order to add an execution server into this environment:

- Create the client for the execution server on Keycloak

- Install set up and the Execution server (with the KC client adapter)

##### 18.3.7.1. Create the execution server’s client on Keycloak

As per each execution server is going to be deployed, you have to create a new client on the demo realm in Keycloak:

- Go to the KC admin console → Clients → New client

- Name: kie-execution-server

- Root URL: http://localhost:8280/

- Client protocol: openid-connect

- Access type: confidential (or public if you want so, but not recommended for production environments)

- Valid redirect URIs: /kie-server-x.y.z.Final/*

- Base URL: /kie-server-x.y.z.Final

In this example the admin user already created on previous steps is the one used for the client requests. So ensure that the admin user is member of the role kie-server in order to use the execution server’s remote services. If the role does not exist, create it.

Note: This example considers that the execution server will be configured to run using a port offset of 200, so the HTTP port will be available at localhost:8280.

##### 18.3.7.2. Install and set up the KC adapter on the execution server

At this point, a client named kie-execution-server is ready on the KC server to use from the execution server.

Let’s install, set up and deploy the execution server:

- Install another Wildfly server to use for the execution server and the KC client adapter as well. You can follow above instructions for Business Central or follow the securing applications guide

- Edit the standalone-full.xml file from the Wildfly server’s configuration path and configure the KC subsystem adapter as:

      <secure-deployment name="kie-server-x.y.z.Final.war">
          <realm>demo</realm>
          <realm-public-key>MIGfMA0GCSqGSIb...</realm-public-key>
          <auth-server-url>http://localhost:8180/auth</auth-server-url>
          <ssl-required>external</ssl-required>
          <resource>kie-execution-server</resource>
          <enable-basic-auth>true</enable-basic-auth>
          <credential name="secret">e92ec68d-6177-4239-be05-28ef2f3460ff</credential>
          <principal-attribute>preferred_username</principal-attribute>
      </secure-deployment>

Consider your concrete environment settings if different from this example:

- Secure deployment name → use the name of the execution server war file being deployed

- Public key → Use the demo realm public key or leave it blank, the server will provide one if so

- Resource → This time, instead of the kie client used in the Business Central configuration, use the kie-execution-server client

- Enable basic auth → Up to you. You can enable Basic auth for third party service consumers

- Credential → Use the secret key for the kie-execution-server client. You can find it in the Credentialstab of the KC admin console

##### 18.3.7.3. Deploy and run the execution server

Just deploy the execution server in Wildfly using any of the available mechanisms. Run the execution server using this command:

    $EXEC_SERVER_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -c standalone-full.xml -Djboss.socket.binding.port-offset=200 -Dorg.kie.server.id=<ID> -Dorg.kie.server.user=<USER> -Dorg.kie.server.pwd=<PWD> -Dorg.kie.server.location=<LOCATION_URL>  -Dorg.kie.server.controller=<CONTROLLER_URL> -Dorg.kie.server.controller.user=<CONTROLLER_USER> -Dorg.kie.server.controller.pwd=<CONTOLLER_PASSWORD>

Example:

    $EXEC_SERVER_HOME/bin/standalone.sh -c standalone-full.xml -Djboss.socket.binding.port-offset=200 -Dorg.kie.server.id=kieserver1 -Dorg.kie.server.user=admin -Dorg.kie.server.pwd=password -Dorg.kie.server.location=http://localhost:8280/kie-server-x.y.z.Final/services/rest/server -Dorg.kie.server.controller=http://localhost:8080/business-central-x.y.z.Final/rest/controller -Dorg.kie.server.controller.user=admin -Dorg.kie.server.controller.pwd=password

| The users that will consume the execution server remote service endpoints must have the role kie-server assigned. So create and assign this role in the KC admin console for the users that will consume the execution server remote services.

Once up, you can check the server status as (considered using Basic authentication for this request, see next Consuming remote services for more information):

    curl http://admin:password@localhost:8280/kie-server-x.y.z.Final/services/rest/server/

#### 18.3.8. Consuming remote services

In order to use the different remote services provided by Business Central or by an Execution Server, your client must be authenticated on the KC server and have a valid token to perform the requests.

Remember that in order to use the remote services, the authenticated user must have assigned:

- The role rest-all for using the Business Central remote services

- The role kie-server for using the Execution Server remote services

Please ensure necessary roles are created and assigned to the users that will consume the remote services on the Keycloak admin console.

You have two options to consume the different remove service endpoints:

- Using basic authentication, if the application’s client supports it

- Using Bearer (token) based authentication

##### 18.3.8.1. Using basic authentication

If the KC client adapter configuration has the Basic authentication enabled, as proposed in this guide for both Business Central (step 3.2) and Execution Server, you can avoid the token grant/refresh calls and just call the services as the following examples.

Example for a Business Central remote repositories endpoint:

    curl http://admin:password@localhost:8080/business-central-x.y.z.Final/rest/repositories

Example to check the status for the Execution Server:

    curl http://admin:password@localhost:8280/kie-server-x.y.z.Final/services/rest/server/

##### 18.3.8.2. Using token based authentication

First step is to create a new client on Keycloak that allows the third party remote service clients to obtain a token. It can be done as:

- Go to the KC admin console and create a new client using this configuration:

  - Client id: kie-remote

  - Client protocol: openid-connect

  - Access type: public

  - Valid redirect URIs: http://localhost/

- As we are going to manually obtain a token and invoke the service let’s increase the lifespan of tokens slightly. In production access tokens should have a relatively low timeout, ideally less than 5 minutes:

  - Go to the KC admin console

  - Click on your Realm Settings

  - Click on Tokens tab

  - Change the value for Access Token Lifespan to 15 minutes. That should give us plenty of time to obtain a token and invoke the service before it expires.

Once a public client for our remote clients has been created, you can now obtain the token by performing an HTTP request to the KC server’s tokens endpoint. Here is an example for command line:

    RESULT=`curl --data "grant_type=password&client_id=kie-remote&username=admin&passwordpassword=<the_client_secret>" http://localhost:8180/auth/realms/demo/protocol/openid-connect/token`

    TOKEN=`echo $RESULT | sed 's/.*access_token":"//g' | sed 's/".*//g'`

At this point, if you echo the $TOKEN it will output the token string obtained from the KC server, that can be now used to authorize further calls to the remote endpoints. For exmple, if you want to check the internal jBPM repositories:

    curl -H "Authorization: bearer $TOKEN" http://localhost:8080/business-central-x.y.z.Final/rest/repositories

#### 18.3.9. Keycloak and the Business Central's security administration area

Business Central provides an administration area which provides user, group and role management features (see Security management).

By default the application’s security management system points to the application’s server realm. For instance, in case of using the packaged distribution for Wildfly, it points to the Wildfly’s ApplicationRealm (properties based). It means the entities from the realm presented in the administration area are not the ones from the Keycloak realm that the application is using. There exist the following options in order to change this default behavior:

- Disable the user system administration

- Use the built-in Keycloak security management provider instead of the default one

In order to customize an existing jBPM application (WAR file) for using the Keycloak security management provider please follow the next steps:

1. Add the artifact keycloak-core-x.y.z.Final.jar into WEB-INF/lib

2. Add the artifact keycloak-common-x.y.z.Final.jar into WEB-INF/lib

3. Remove the actual jar artifact for any security management provider in use from WEB-INF/lib (eg: remove WEB-INF/lib/uberfire-security-management-wdilfly-x.y.Z.jar)

4. Replace the content for WEB-INF/classes/security-management.properties by:

    org.uberfire.ext.security.management.api.userManagementServices=KCAdapterUserManagementService
    org.uberfire.ext.security.management.keycloak.authServer=<authz_server_url>
    # eg: org.uberfire.ext.security.management.keycloak.authServer=http://localhost:8180/auth

1. Update the /META-INF/jboss-deployment-structure.xml in order to include/exclude the following modules:

    <deployment>
        <dependencies>
            ...
            <module name="org.jboss.resteasy.resteasy-jackson-provider" services="import"/>
            ...
        </dependencies>
        <exclusions>
            ...
            <module name="org.jboss.resteasy.resteasy-jackson2-provider"/>
            ...
        </exclusions>
    </deployment>

| The jar artifacts required in the steps above can be either downloaded from JBoss Nexus or either build from sources.

Once applying the above changes, the security administration area uses the access token present in the user’s session in order to authorize and manage the specific Keycloak realm data.

| In order to be able to manage Keycloak realms remotely, please ensure the user has the realm-management client role assigned

## 19. Business Central High Availability

### 19.1. VFS clustering

The VFS repositories (usually git repositories) stores all the assets (such as rules, decision tables, process definitions, forms, etc). If that VFS is located on each local server, then it must be kept in sync between all servers of a cluster.

Use Apache Zookeeper and Apache Helix to accomplish this. Zookeeper glues all the parts together. Helix is the cluster management component that registers all cluster details (nodes, resources and the cluster itself). Uberfire (on top of which Business Central is built) uses those 2 components to provide VFS clustering.

To create a VFS cluster:

1. Download Apache Zookeeper and Apache Helix.

2. Install both:

   1. Unzip Zookeeper into a directory (`$ZOOKEEPER_HOME`).

   2. In `$ZOOKEEPER_HOME`, copy `zoo_sample.conf` to `zoo.conf`

   3. Edit `zoo.conf`. Adjust the settings if needed. Usually only these 2 properties are relevant:

          # the directory where the snapshot is stored.
          dataDir=/tmp/zookeeper
          # the port at which the clients will connect
          clientPort=2181

   4. Unzip Helix into a directory (`$HELIX_HOME`).

3. Configure the cluster in Zookeeper:

   1. Go to its `bin` directory:

          $ cd $ZOOKEEPER_HOME/bin

   2. Start the Zookeeper server:

          $ sudo ./zkServer.sh start

      If the server fails to start, verify that the `dataDir` (as specified in `zoo.conf`) is accessible.

   3. To review Zookeeper’s activities, open `zookeeper.out`:

          $ cat $ZOOKEEPER_HOME/bin/zookeeper.out

4. Configure the cluster in Helix:

   1. Go to its `bin` directory:

          $ cd $HELIX_HOME/bin

   2. Create the cluster:

          $ ./helix-admin.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --addCluster kie-cluster

      The `zkSvr` value must match the used Zookeeper server. The cluster name (`kie-cluster`) can be changed as needed.

   3. Add nodes to the cluster:

          # Node 1
          $ ./helix-admin.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --addNode kie-cluster nodeOne:12345
          # Node 2
          $ ./helix-admin.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --addNode kie-cluster nodeTwo:12346
          ...

      Usually the number of nodes a in cluster equal the number of application servers in the cluster. The node names (`nodeOne:12345` , …​) can be changed as needed.

      | `nodeOne:12345` is the unique identifier of the node, which will be referenced later on when configuring application servers. It is not a host and port number, but instead it is used to uniquely identify the logical node.

   4. Add resources to the cluster:

          $ ./helix-admin.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --addResource kie-cluster vfs-repo 1 LeaderStandby AUTO_REBALANCE

      The resource name (`vfs-repo`) can be changed as needed.

   5. Rebalance the cluster to initialize it:

          $ ./helix-admin.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --rebalance kie-cluster vfs-repo 2

   6. Start the Helix controller to manage the cluster:

          $  ./run-helix-controller.sh --zkSvr localhost:2181 --cluster kie-cluster 2>&1 > /tmp/controller.log &

5. Configure the security domain correctly on the application server. For example on WildFly and JBoss EAP:

   1. Edit the file `$JBOSS_HOME/domain/configuration/domain.xml`.

      For simplicity sake, presume we use the default domain configuration which uses the profile `full` that defines two server nodes as part of `main-server-group`.

   2. Locate the profile `full` and add a new security domain by copying the other security domain already defined there by default:

          <security-domain name="kie-ide" cache-type="default">
              <authentication>
                   <login-module code="Remoting" flag="optional">
                       <module-option name="password-stacking" value="useFirstPass"/>
                   </login-module>
                   <login-module code="RealmDirect" flag="required">
                       <module-option name="password-stacking" value="useFirstPass"/>
                   </login-module>
              </authentication>
          </security-domain>

      | The security-domain name is a magic value.

6. Configure the system properties for the cluster on the application server. For example on WildFly and JBoss EAP:

   1. Edit the file `$JBOSS_HOME/domain/configuration/host.xml`.

   2. Locate the XML elements `server` that belong to the `main-server-group` and add the necessary system property.

      For example for nodeOne:

          <system-properties>
            <property name="jboss.node.name" value="nodeOne" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.nio.git.dir" value="/tmp/kie/nodeone" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.metadata.index.dir" value="/tmp/kie/nodeone" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.id" value="kie-cluster" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.zk" value="localhost:2181" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.local.id" value="nodeOne_12345" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.vfs.lock" value="vfs-repo" boot-time="false"/>
            <!-- If you're running both nodes on the same machine: -->
            <property name="org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.port" value="9418" boot-time="false"/>
          </system-properties>

      And for nodeTwo:

          <system-properties>
            <property name="jboss.node.name" value="nodeTwo" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.nio.git.dir" value="/tmp/kie/nodetwo" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.metadata.index.dir" value="/tmp/kie/nodetwo" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.id" value="kie-cluster" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.zk" value="localhost:2181" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.local.id" value="nodeTwo_12346" boot-time="false"/>
            <property name="org.uberfire.cluster.vfs.lock" value="vfs-repo" boot-time="false"/>
            <!-- If you're running both nodes on the same machine: -->
            <property name="org.uberfire.nio.git.daemon.port" value="9419" boot-time="false"/>
          </system-properties>

      Make sure the cluster, node and resource names match those configured in Helix.

### 19.2. jBPM clustering

In addition to the information above, jBPM clustering requires additional configuration. See this blog post to configure the database etc correctly.

# KIE Server

The KIE Server is a standalone execution server for rules.

## 20. KIE Execution Server

### 20.1. Overview

KIE Server is a modular, standalone server component that can be used to instantiate and execute rules and processes. It exposes this functionality via REST, JMS and Java interfaces to client application. It also provides seamless integration with the Business Central.

At its core, KIE Server is a configurable web application packaged as a WAR file. Distributions are availables for pure web containers (like Tomcat) and for JEE 6 and JEE 7 containers.

Most capabilities on the Kie Server are configurable, and based on the concepts of extensions. Each extension can be enabled/disabled independently, allowing the user to configure the server to its need.

The current version of the Kie Server ships with two default extensions:

- BRM: provides support for the execution of Business Rules using the Drools engine.

- BPM: provides support for the execution of Business Processes using the jBPM engine. It supports:

  - process execution

  - task execution

  - asynchronous job execution

Both extensions enabled by default, but can be disabled by setting the corresponding property (see configuration chapter for details).

This server was designed to have a low footprint, with minimal memory consumption, and therefore, to be easily deployable on a cloud environment. Each instance of this server can open and instantiate multiple Kie Containers which allows you to execute multiple services in parallel.

#### 20.1.1. Glossary

- Kie Server: execution server purely focusing on providing runtime environment for both rules and processes. These capabilities are provided by Kie Server Extensions. More capabilities can be added by further extensions (e.g. customer could add his own extensions in case of missing functionality that will then use infrastructure of the KIE Server). A Kie Server instance is a standalone Kie Server executing on a given application server/web container. A Kie Server instantiates and provides support for multiple Kie Containers.

- Kie Server Extension: a "plugin" for the Kie Server that adds capabilities to the server. The Kie Server ships with two default kie server extensions: BRM and BPM.

- Kie Container: an in-memory instantiation of a kjar, allowing for the instantiation and usage of its assets (domain models, processes, rules, etc). A Kie Server exposes Kie Containers through a standard API over transport protocols like REST and JMS.

- Controller: a server-backed REST endpoint that will be responsible for managing KIE Server instances. Such end point must provide following capabilities:

  - respond to connect requests

  - sync all registered containers on the corresponding Kie Server ID

  - respond to disconnect requests

- Kie Server state: currently known state of given Kie Server instance. This is a local storage (by default in file) that maintains the following information:

  - list of registered Drools controllers

  - list of known containers

  - kie server configuration

    The server state is persisted upon receival of events like: Kie Container created, Kie Container is disposed, Drools controller accepts registration of Kie Server instance, etc.

- Kie Server ID: an arbitrary assigned identifier to which configurations are assigned. At boot, each Kie Server Instance is assigned an ID, and that ID is matched to a configuration on the Drools controller. The Kie Server Instance fetches and uses that configuration to setup itself.

### 20.2. Installing the KIE Server

The KIE Server is distributed as a web application archive (WAR) file. The WAR file comes in three different packagings:

- webc - WAR for ordinary Web (Servlet) containers like Tomcat

- ee6 - WAR for JavaEE 6 containers like JBoss EAP 6.x

- ee7 - WAR for JavaEE 7 containers like WildFly 11.x

To install the KIE Execution Server and verify it is running, complete the following steps:

1. Deploy the WAR file into your web container.

2. Create a user with the role of `kie-server` on the container.

3. Test that you can access the KIE Server by navigating to the endpoint in a browser window: `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTEXT/services/rest/server/`.

4. When prompted for username/password, type in the username and password that you created in step 2.

5. Once authenticated, you will see an XML response in the form of KIE Server status, similar to this:

   Example 189. Sample handshaking server response

       <response type="SUCCESS" msg="KIE Server info">
         <kie-server-info>
           <version>7.25.0.Final</version>
         </kie-server-info>
       </response>

#### 20.2.1. Bootstrap switches

The Kie Server accepts a number of bootstrap switches (system properties) to configure the behaviour of the server. The following is a table of all the supported switches.

Table 77. Kie Server bootstrap switches
Property | Value | Description | Required
--- | --- | --- | ---
org.drools.server.ext.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | If true, disables the BRM support (i.e. rules support). | No
org.jbpm.server.ext.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | If true, disables the BPM support (i.e. processes support) | No
org.jbpm.ui.server.ext.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | If true, disables the BPM UI support (i.e. processes image support) | No
org.optaplanner.server.ext.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | If true, disables the BRP support (i.e. planner support) | No
org.kie.executor.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | If true, disables the BPM job executor support | No
org.kie.server.id | string | An arbitrary ID to be assigned to this server. If a headless Drools controller is configured, this is the ID under which the server will connect to the headless Drools controller to fetch the kie container configurations. | No. If not provided, an ID is automatically generated.
org.kie.server.user | string (default is "kieserver") | User name used to connect with the kieserver from the Drools controller, required when running in managed mode | No
org.kie.server.pwd | string (default is "kieserver1!") | Password used to connect with the kieserver from the Drools controller, required when running in managed mode | No
org.kie.server.controller | comma separated list of urls | List of urls to Drools controller REST endpoint. E.g.: `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller` | Yes when using a Drools controller
org.kie.server.controller.user | string (default is "kieserver") | Username used to connect to the Drools controller REST api | Yes when using a Drools controller
org.kie.server.controller.pwd | string (default is "kieserver1!") | Password used to connect to the Drools controller REST api | Yes when using a Drools controller
org.kie.server.location | URL location of kie server instance | The URL used by the Drools controller to call back on this server. E.g.: `http://localhost:8230/kie-server/services/rest/server` | Yes when using a Drools controller
org.kie.server.domain | string | JAAS LoginContext domain that shall be used to authenticate users when using JMS | No
org.kie.server.bypass.auth.user | boolean (default is "false") | Allows to bypass the authenticated user for task related operations e.g. queries | No
org.kie.server.repo | valid file system path (default is ".") | Location on local file system where kie server state files will be stored | No
org.kie.server.persistence.ds | string | Datasource JNDI name | Yes when BPM support enabled
org.kie.server.persistence.tm | string | Transaction manager platform for Hibernate properties set | Yes when BPM support enabled
org.kie.server.persistence.dialect | string | Hibernate dialect to be used | Yes when BPM support enabled
org.jbpm.ht.callback | string | One of supported callbacks for Task Service (default jaas) | No
org.jbpm.ht.custom.callback | string | Custom implementation of UserGroupCallback in case org.jbpm.ht.callback was set to ‘custom’ | No
kie.maven.settings.custom | valid file system path | Location of custom settings.xml for maven configuration | No
org.kie.executor.interval | integer (default is 0) | Number of time units between polls by executor | No
org.kie.executor.pool.size | integer (default is 1) | Number of threads in the pool for async work | No
org.kie.executor.retry.count | integer (default is 3) | Number of retries to handle errors | No
org.kie.executor.timeunit | TimeUnit (default is "SECONDS") | TimeUnit representing interval | No
org.kie.executor.disabled | boolean (default is "false") | Disables executor completely | No
kie.server.jms.queues.response | string (default is "queue/KIE.SERVER.RESPONSE") | JNDI name of response queue for JMS | No
org.kie.server.controller.connect | long (default is 10000) | Waiting time in milliseconds between repeated attempts to connect kie server to Drools controller when kie server starts up | No
org.drools.server.filter.classes | boolean (default is "false") | If true, accept only classes which are annotated with @org.kie.api.remote.Remotable or @javax.xml.bind.annotation.XmlRootElement as extra JAXB classes | No

| If you are running both KIE Server and Business Central you must configure KIE Server to use a different Data Source to Business Central using the org.kie.server.persistence.ds property. Business Central uses a jBPM Executor Service that can conflict with KIE Server if they share the same Data Source.

#### 20.2.2. Installation details for different containers

##### 20.2.2.1. Tomcat 7.x/8.x

1. Download and unzip the Tomcat distribution. Let’s call the root of the distribution `TOMCAT_HOME`. This directory is named after the Tomcat version, so for example `apache-tomcat-7.0.55`.

2. Download kie-server- -webc.war and place it into `TOMCAT_HOME/webapps`.

3. Configure user(s) and role(s). Make sure that file `TOMCAT_HOME/conf/tomcat-users.xml` contains the following username and role definition. You can of course choose different username and password, just make sure that the user has role `kie-server`:

   Example 190. Username and role definition for Tomcat

       <role rolename="kie-server"/>
       <user username="serveruser" password="my.s3cr3t.pass" roles="kie-server"/>

4. Start the server by running `TOMCAT_HOME/bin/startup.[sh|bat]`. You can check out the Tomcat logs in `TOMCAT_HOME/logs` to see if the application deployed successfully. Please read the table above for the bootstrap switches that can be used to properly configure the instance. For instance:

       ./startup.sh -Dorg.kie.server.id=first-kie-server
                    -Dorg.kie.server.location=http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server

5. Verify the server is running. Go to `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTEXT/services/rest/server/` and type the specified username and password. You should see simple XML message with basic information about the server.

| You can not leverage the JMS interface when running with Tomcat, or any other Web container. The Web container version of the WAR contains only the REST interface.

##### 20.2.2.2. WildFly 11.x

1. Download and unzip the WildFly distribution. Let’s call the root of the distribution `WILDFLY_HOME`. This directory is named after the WildFly version, so for example `wildfly-14.0.1.Final`.

2. Download kie-server- -ee7.war and place it into `WILDFLY_HOME/standalone/deployments`.

3. Configure user(s) and role(s). Execute the following command `WILDFLY_HOME/bin/add-user.[sh|bat] -a -u 'kieserver' -p 'kieserver1!' -ro 'kie-server'`. You can of course choose different username and password, just make sure that the user has role `kie-server`.

4. Start the server by running `WILDFLY_HOME/bin/standalone.[sh|bat] -c standalone-full.xml <bootstrap_switches>`. You can check out the standard output or WildFly logs in `WILDFLY_HOME/standalone/logs` to see if the application deployed successfully. Please read the table above for the bootstrap switches that can be used to properly configure the instance. For instance:

       ./standalone.sh  --server-config=standalone-full.xml
                        -Djboss.socket.binding.port-offset=150
                        -Dorg.kie.server.id=first-kie-server
                        -Dorg.kie.server.location=http://localhost:8230/kie-server/services/rest/server

5. Verify the server is running. Go to `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTEXT/services/rest/server/` and type the specified username and password. You should see simple XML message with basic information about the server.

### 20.3. Kie Server setup

| Server setup and registration changed significantly from versions 6.2 and before. The following applies only to version 6.3 and forward.

#### 20.3.1. Managed Kie Server

A managed instance is one that requires a Drools controller to be available to properly start up the Kie Server instance.

The Drools controller is a component responsible for keeping and managing a Kie Server Configuration in centralized way. Each Drools controller can manager multiple configurations at once and there can be multiple Drools controllers in the environment. Managed KIE Servers can be configured with a list of Drools controllers but will connect to only one at a time.

| It’s important to mention that even though there can be multiple Drools controllers they should be kept in sync to make sure that regardless which one of them is contacted by KIE Server instance it will provide same set of configuration.

At startup, if a Kie Server is configured with a list of Drools controllers, it will try succesivelly to connect to each of them until a connection is successfully stablished with one of them. If for any reason a connection can’t be stablished, the server will not start, even if there is local storage available with configuration. This happens by design in order to ensure consistency. For instance, if the Kie Server was down and the configuration has changed, this restriction guarantees that it will run with up to date configuration or not at all.

| In order to run the Kie Server in standalone mode, without connecting to any Drools controllers, please see "Unmanaged Kie Server".

The configuration sets, among other things:

- kie containers to be deployed and started

- configuration items - currently this is a place holder for further enhancements that will allow remotely configure KIE Execution Server components - timers, persistence, etc

The Drools controller, besides providing configuration management, is also responsible for overall management of Kie Servers. It provides a REST api that is divided into two parts:

- the Drools controller itself that is exposed to interact with KIE Execution Server instances

- an administration API that allows to remotely manage Kie Server instances:

  - add/remove servers

  - add/remove containers to/from the servers

  - start/stop containers on servers

The Drools controller deals only with the Kie Server configuration or definition to put it differently. It does not handle any runtime components of KIE Execution Server instances. They are always considered remote to Drools controller. The Drools controller is responsible for persisting the configuration to preserve restarts of the Drools controller itself. It should manage the synchronization as well in case multiple Drools controllers are configured to keep all definitions up to date on all instances of the Drools controller.

By default Drools controller is shipped with Business Central and provides a fully featured management interface (both REST api and UI). It uses underlying git repository as persistent store and thus when GIT repositories are clustered (using Apache Zookeeper and Apache Helix) it will cover the Drools controllers synchronization as well.

The diagram above illustrates the single Drools controller (Business Central) setup with multiple Kie Server instances managed by it.

The diagram bellow illustrates the clustered setup where there are multiple instances of Drools controller synchronized over Zookeeper.

In the above diagram we can see that the Kie Server instances are capable of connecting to any Drools controllers, but they will connect to only one. Each instance will attempt to connect to Drools controller as long as it can reach one. Once connection is established with one of the Drools controllers it will skip the others.

##### 20.3.1.1. Working with managed servers

There are two approaches that users can take when working with managed KIE Server instances:

- Configuration first: with this approach, a user will start working with the Drools controller (either UI or REST api) and create and configure Kie Server definitions. That consists basically of an identification for the server definition (id and name + optionally version for improved readability) and the configuration for the Kie Containers to run on the server.

- Registration first: with this approach, the Kie Server instances are started first and auto register themselves on Drools controller. The user then can configure the Kie Containers. This option simply skips the registration step done in the first approach and populates it with server id, name and version directly upon auto registration. There are no other differences between the two approaches.

#### 20.3.2. Unmanaged KIE Execution Server

An unmanaged Kie Server is in turn just a standalone instance, and thus must be configured individually using REST/JMS api from the Kie Server itself. There is no Drools controller involved. The configuration is automatically persisted by the server into a file and that is used as the internal server state, in case of restarts.

The configuration is updated during the following operations:

- deploy Kie Container

- undeploy Kie Container

- start Kie Container

- stop Kie Container

| If the Kie Server is restarted, it will try to restablish the same state that was persisted before shutdown. That means that Kie Containers that were running, will be started, but the ones that were stopped/disposed before, will not.

In most use cases, the Kie Server should be executed in managed mode as that provides some benefits, like a web user interface (if using Business Central as a Drools controller) and some facilities for clustering.

### 20.4. Creating a Kie Container

Once your Execution Server is registered, you can start adding Kie Containers to it.

Kie Containers are self contained environments that have been provisioned to hold instances of your packaged and deployed rule instances.

1. Start by clicking the \+ icon next to the Execution Server where you want to deploy your Container. This will bring up the New Container screen.

2. If you know the Group Name, Artifact Id and Version (GAV) of your deployed package, then you can enter those details and click the Ok button to select that instance (and provide a name for the Container);

3. If you don’t know these values, you can search Business Central for all packages that can be deployed. Click the Search button without entering any value in the search field (you can narrow your search by entering any term that you know exists in the package that you want to deploy).

   | INSERT SCREENSHOT HERE

   The figure above shows that there are three deployable packages available to be used as containers on the Execution Server. Select the one that you want by clicking the Select button. This will auto-populate the GAV and you can then click the Ok button to use this deployable as the new Container.

4. Enter a name for this Container at the top and then press the Ok button.

   | The Container name must be unique inside each execution server and must not contain any spaces.

| Just below the GAV row, you will see an uneditable row that shows you the URL for your Container against which you will be able to execute REST commands.

### 20.5. Managing Containers

Containers within the Execution Server can be started, stopped and updated from within Business Central.⁠

#### 20.5.1. Starting a Container

Once registered, a Container is in the 'Stopped' mode. It can be started by first selecting it and then clicking the Start button. You can also select multiple Containers and start them all at the same time.

Once the Container is in the 'Running' mode, a green arrow appears next to it. If there are any errors starting the Container(s), red icons appear next to Containers and the Execution Server that they are deployed on.

You should check the logs of both the Execution Server and the current Business Central to see what the errors are before redeploying the Containers (and possibly the Execution Server).⁠

#### 20.5.2. Stopping and Deleting a Container

Similar to starting a Container, select the Container(s) that you want to stop (or delete) and click the Stop button (which replaces the Start button for that Container once it has entered the 'Running' mode) or the Delete button.⁠

#### 20.5.3. Updating a Container

You can update deployed `KieContainers` without restarting the Execution Server. This is useful in cases where the Business Rules change, creating new versions of packages to be provisioned.

You can have multiple versions of the same package provisioned and deployed, each to a different `KieContainer`.

To update deployments in a `KieContainer` dynamically, click on the icon next to the Container. This will open up the Container Info screen. An example of this screen is shown here:

| INSERT SCREENSHOT HERE

The Container Info screen is a useful tool because it not only allows you to see the endpoint for this `KieContainer`, but it also allows you to either manually or automatically refresh the provision if an update is available. The update can be manual or automatic:

Manual Update: To manually update a `KieContainer`, enter the new Version number in the Version box and click on the Update button. You can of course, update the Group Id or the Artifact Id , if these have changed as well. Once updated, the Execution server updates the container and shows you the resolved GAV attributes at the bottom of the screen in the Resolved Release Id section.

Automatic Update: If you want a deployed Container to always have the latest version of your deployment without manually editing it, you will need to set the Version property to the value of `LATEST` and start a `Scanner`. This will ensure that the deployed provision always contains the latest version. The Scanner can be started just once on demand by clicking the Scan Now button or you can start it in the background with scans happening at a specified interval (in milliseconds).You can also set this value to `LATEST` when you are first creating this deployment. The Resolved Release Id in this case will show you the actual, latest version number.

### 20.6. KIE Server REST API for KIE containers and business assets

Drools provides a KIE Server REST API that you can use to interact with your KIE containers and business assets (such as business rules, processes, and solvers) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. This API support enables you to maintain your Drools resources more efficiently and optimize your integration and development with Drools.

With the KIE Server REST API, you can perform the following actions:

- Deploy or dispose KIE containers

- Retrieve and update KIE container information

- Return KIE Server status and basic information

- Retrieve and update business asset information

- Execute business assets (such as rules and processes)

KIE Server REST API requests require the following components:

Authentication

  The KIE Server REST API requires HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the user role `kie-server`. To view configured user roles for your Drools distribution, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/application-roles.properties` and `~/application-users.properties`.

  To add a user with the `kie-server` role, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/bin` and run the following command:

      $ ./add-user.sh -a --user <USERNAME> --password <PASSWORD> --role kie-server

  For more information about user roles and Drools installation options, see Installing the KIE Server.

HTTP headers

  The KIE Server REST API requires the following HTTP headers for API requests:

  - `Accept`: Data format accepted by your requesting client:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

    - `application/xml` (XML, for JAXB or XSTREAM)

  - `Content-Type`: Data format of your `POST` or `PUT` API request data:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

    - `application/xml` (XML, for JAXB or XSTREAM)

  - `X-KIE-ContentType`: Required header for `application/xml` XSTREAM API requests and responses:

    - `XSTREAM`

HTTP methods

  The KIE Server REST API supports the following HTTP methods for API requests:

  - `GET`: Retrieves specified information from a specified resource endpoint

  - `POST`: Updates a resource or resource instance

  - `PUT`: Updates or creates a resource or resource instance

  - `DELETE`: Deletes a resource or resource instance

Base URL

  The base URL for KIE Server REST API requests is `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/`, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/`.

Endpoints

  KIE Server REST API endpoints, such as `/server/containers/{containerId}` for a specified KIE container, are the URIs that you append to the KIE Server REST API base URL to access the corresponding resource or type of resource in Drools.

  Example request URL for `/server/containers/{containerId}` endpoint

  `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer`

Request parameters and request data

  Many KIE Server REST API requests require specific parameters in the request URL path to identify or filter specific resources and to perform specific actions. You can append URL parameters to the endpoint in the format `?<PARAM>=<VALUE>&<PARAM>=<VALUE>`.

  Example GET request URL with parameters

  `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers?groupId=com.redhat&artifactId=Project1&version=1.0&status=STARTED`

  HTTP `POST` and `PUT` requests may additionally require a request body or file with data to accompany the request.

  Example POST request URL and JSON request body data

  `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer/release-id`

      {
        "release-id": {
          "artifact-id": "Project1",
          "group-id": "com.redhat",
          "version": "1.1"
        }
      }

#### 20.6.1. Sending requests with the KIE Server REST API using a REST client or curl utility

The KIE Server REST API enables you to interact with your KIE containers and business assets (such as business rules, processes, and solvers) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. You can send KIE Server REST API requests using any REST client or curl utility.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and running.

- You have `kie-server` user role access to KIE Server.

Procedure

1. Identify the relevant API endpoint to which you want to send a request, such as `[GET] /server/containers` to retrieve KIE containers from KIE Server.

2. In a REST client or curl utility, enter the following components for a `GET` request to `/server/containers`. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following header:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers`.

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following header:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers`.

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -X GET "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers"

3. Execute the request and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "type": "SUCCESS",
         "msg": "List of created containers",
         "result": {
           "kie-containers": {
             "kie-container": [
               {
                 "container-id": "itorders_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "itorders",
                   "artifact-id": "itorders",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "resolved-release-id": {
                   "group-id": "itorders",
                   "artifact-id": "itorders",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED",
                 "scanner": {
                   "status": "DISPOSED",
                   "poll-interval": null
                 },
                 "config-items": [],
                 "container-alias": "itorders"
               }
             ]
           }
         }
       }

4. For this example, copy or note the project `group-id`, `artifact-id`, and `version` (GAV) data from one of the deployed KIE containers returned in the response.

5. In your REST client or curl utility, send another API request with the following components for a `PUT` request to `/server/containers/{containerId}` to deploy a new KIE container with the copied project GAV data. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following headers:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

     - `Content-Type`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `PUT`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer`.

   - Request body: Add a JSON request body with the configuration items for the new KIE container:

       {
         "config-items": [
           {
             "itemName": "RuntimeStrategy",
             "itemValue": "SINGLETON",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "MergeMode",
             "itemValue": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "KBase",
             "itemValue": "",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "KSession",
             "itemValue": "",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           }
         ],
         "release-id": {
           "group-id": "itorders",
           "artifact-id": "itorders",
           "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
         },
         "scanner": {
           "poll-interval": "5000",
           "status": "STARTED"
         }
       }

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following headers:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

     - `content-type`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `PUT`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer`.

   - `-d`: Add a JSON request body or file (`@file.json`) with the configuration items for the new KIE container:

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X PUT "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer" -d "{ \"config-items\": [ { \"itemName\": \"RuntimeStrategy\", \"itemValue\": \"SINGLETON\", \"itemType\": \"java.lang.String\" }, { \"itemName\": \"MergeMode\", \"itemValue\": \"MERGE_COLLECTIONS\", \"itemType\": \"java.lang.String\" }, { \"itemName\": \"KBase\", \"itemValue\": \"\", \"itemType\": \"java.lang.String\" }, { \"itemName\": \"KSession\", \"itemValue\": \"\", \"itemType\": \"java.lang.String\" } ], \"release-id\": { \"group-id\": \"itorders\", \"artifact-id\": \"itorders\", \"version\": \"1.0.0-SNAPSHOT\" }, \"scanner\": { \"poll-interval\": \"5000\", \"status\": \"STARTED\" }}"

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X PUT "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/MyContainer" -d @my-container-configs.json

6. Execute the request and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "type": "SUCCESS",
         "msg": "Container MyContainer successfully deployed with module itorders:itorders:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT.",
         "result": {
           "kie-container": {
             "container-id": "MyContainer",
             "release-id": {
               "group-id": "itorders",
               "artifact-id": "itorders",
               "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
             },
             "resolved-release-id": {
               "group-id": "itorders",
               "artifact-id": "itorders",
               "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
             },
             "status": "STARTED",
             "scanner": {
               "status": "STARTED",
               "poll-interval": 5000
             },
             "config-items": [],
             "messages": [
               {
                 "severity": "INFO",
                 "timestamp": {
                   "java.util.Date": 1540584717937
                 },
                 "content": [
                   "Container MyContainer successfully created with module itorders:itorders:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT."
                 ]
               }
             ],
             "container-alias": null
           }
         }
       }

   If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your request accordingly.

#### 20.6.2. Sending requests with the KIE Server REST API using the Swagger interface

The KIE Server REST API supports a Swagger web interface that you can use instead of a standalone REST client or curl utility to interact with your KIE containers and business assets (such as business rules, processes, and solvers) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface.

| By default, the Swagger web interface for KIE Server is enabled by the `org.kie.swagger.server.ext.disabled=false` system property. To disable the Swagger web interface in KIE Server, set this system property to `true`.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and running.

- You have `kie-server` user role access to KIE Server.

Procedure

1. In a web browser, navigate to `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/docs`, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/docs`, and log in with the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

2. In the Swagger page, select the relevant API endpoint to which you want to send a request, such as KIE Server and KIE containers → [GET] /server/containers to retrieve KIE containers from KIE Server.

3. Click Try it out and provide any optional parameters by which you want to filter results, if needed.

4. In the Response content type drop-down menu, select the desired format of the server response, such as application/json for JSON format.

5. Click Execute and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "type": "SUCCESS",
         "msg": "List of created containers",
         "result": {
           "kie-containers": {
             "kie-container": [
               {
                 "container-id": "itorders_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "itorders",
                   "artifact-id": "itorders",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "resolved-release-id": {
                   "group-id": "itorders",
                   "artifact-id": "itorders",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED",
                 "scanner": {
                   "status": "DISPOSED",
                   "poll-interval": null
                 },
                 "config-items": [],
                 "container-alias": "itorders"
               }
             ]
           }
         }
       }

6. For this example, copy or note the project `group-id`, `artifact-id`, and `version` (GAV) data from one of the deployed KIE containers returned in the response.

7. In the Swagger page, navigate to the KIE Server and KIE containers → [PUT] /server/containers/{containerId} endpoint to send another request to deploy a new KIE container with the copied project GAV data. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

8. Click Try it out and enter the following components for the request:

   - containerId: Enter the ID of the new KIE container, such as `MyContainer`.

   - body: Set the Parameter content type to the desired request body format, such as application/json for JSON format, and add a request body with the configuration items for the new KIE container:

       {
         "config-items": [
           {
             "itemName": "RuntimeStrategy",
             "itemValue": "SINGLETON",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "MergeMode",
             "itemValue": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "KBase",
             "itemValue": "",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           },
           {
             "itemName": "KSession",
             "itemValue": "",
             "itemType": "java.lang.String"
           }
         ],
         "release-id": {
           "group-id": "itorders",
           "artifact-id": "itorders",
           "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
         },
         "scanner": {
           "poll-interval": "5000",
           "status": "STARTED"
         }
       }

9. In the Response content type drop-down menu, select the desired format of the server response, such as application/json for JSON format.

10. Click Execute and review the KIE Server response.

    Example server response (JSON):

        {
          "type": "SUCCESS",
          "msg": "Container MyContainer successfully deployed with module itorders:itorders:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT.",
          "result": {
            "kie-container": {
              "container-id": "MyContainer",
              "release-id": {
                "group-id": "itorders",
                "artifact-id": "itorders",
                "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
              },
              "resolved-release-id": {
                "group-id": "itorders",
                "artifact-id": "itorders",
                "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
              },
              "status": "STARTED",
              "scanner": {
                "status": "STARTED",
                "poll-interval": 5000
              },
              "config-items": [],
              "messages": [
                {
                  "severity": "INFO",
                  "timestamp": {
                    "java.util.Date": 1540584717937
                  },
                  "content": [
                    "Container MyContainer successfully created with module itorders:itorders:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT."
                  ]
                }
              ],
              "container-alias": null
            }
          }
        }

    If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your request accordingly.

#### 20.6.3. Supported KIE Server REST API endpoints

The KIE Server REST API provides endpoints for the following types of resources in Drools:

- KIE Server and KIE containers

- KIE session assets (for runtime commands)

- DMN assets

- Planning solvers

The KIE Server REST API base URL is `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/`. All requests require HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the `kie-server` user role.

For the full list of KIE Server REST API endpoints and descriptions, use one of the following resources:

- Execution Server REST API on the jBPM Documentation page (static)

- Swagger UI for the KIE Server REST API at `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/docs` (dynamic, requires running KIE Server)

  | By default, the Swagger web interface for KIE Server is enabled by the `org.kie.swagger.server.ext.disabled=false` system property. To disable the Swagger web interface in KIE Server, set this system property to `true`.

### 20.7. KIE Server Java client API for KIE containers and business assets

Drools provides a KIE Server Java client API that enables you to connect to KIE Server using REST protocol from your Java client application. You can use the KIE Server Java client API as an alternative to the KIE Server REST API to interact with your KIE containers and business assets (such as business rules, processes, and solvers) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. This API support enables you to maintain your Drools resources more efficiently and optimize your integration and development with Drools.

With the KIE Server Java client API, you can perform the following actions also supported by the KIE Server REST API:

- Deploy or dispose KIE containers

- Retrieve and update KIE container information

- Return KIE Server status and basic information

- Retrieve and update business asset information

- Execute business assets (such as rules and processes)

KIE Server Java client API requests require the following components:

Authentication

  The KIE Server Java client API requires HTTP Basic authentication for the user role `kie-server`. To view configured user roles for your Drools distribution, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/application-roles.properties` and `~/application-users.properties`.

  To add a user with the `kie-server` role, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/bin` and run the following command:

      $ ./add-user.sh -a --user <USERNAME> --password <PASSWORD> --role kie-server

  For more information about user roles and Drools installation options, see Installing the KIE Server.

Project dependencies

  The KIE Server Java client API requires the following dependencies on the relevant classpath of your Java project:

      <!-- For remote execution on KIE Server -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
        <artifactId>kie-server-client</artifactId>
        <version>${drools.version}</version>
      </dependency>

      <!-- For runtime commands -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
        <artifactId>drools-compiler</artifactId>
        <scope>runtime</scope>
        <version>${drools.version}</version>
      </dependency>

      <!-- For debug logging (optional) -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>ch.qos.logback</groupId>
        <artifactId>logback-classic</artifactId>
        <version>${logback.version}</version>
      </dependency>

  The `<version>` for Drools dependencies is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

Client request configuration

  All Java client requests with the KIE Server Java client API must define at least the following server communication components:

  - Credentials of the `kie-server` user

  - KIE Server location, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server`

  - Marshalling format for API requests and responses (JSON, JAXB, or XSTREAM)

  - A `KieServicesConfiguration` object and a `KieServicesClient` object, which serve as the entry point for starting the server communication using the Java client API

  - A `KieServicesFactory` object defining REST protocol and user access

  - Any other client services used, such as `RuleServicesClient`, `ProcessServicesClient`, or `QueryServicesClient`

  The following are examples of basic and advanced client configurations with these components:

  Basic client configuration example

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesConfiguration;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesFactory;

      public class MyConfigurationObject {

        private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server";
        private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
        private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

        private static final MarshallingFormat FORMAT = MarshallingFormat.JSON;

        private static KieServicesConfiguration conf;
        private static KieServicesClient kieServicesClient;

        public static void initialize() {
          conf = KieServicesFactory.newRestConfiguration(URL, USER, PASSWORD);

          //If you use custom classes, such as Obj.class, add them to the configuration.
          Set<Class<?>> extraClassList = new HashSet<Class<?>>();
          extraClassList.add(Obj.class);
          conf.addExtraClasses(extraClassList);

          conf.setMarshallingFormat(FORMAT);
          kieServicesClient = KieServicesFactory.newKieServicesClient(conf);
        }
      }

  Advanced client configuration example with additional client services

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.client.CaseServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.DMNServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.DocumentServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.JobServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesConfiguration;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesFactory;
      import org.kie.server.client.ProcessServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.QueryServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.RuleServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.SolverServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.UIServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.UserTaskServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.instance.ProcessInstance;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerResource;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.ReleaseId;

      public class MyAdvancedConfigurationObject {

          // REST API base URL, credentials, and marshalling format
          private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server";
          private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
          private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";;

          private static final MarshallingFormat FORMAT = MarshallingFormat.JSON;

          private static KieServicesConfiguration conf;

          // KIE client for common operations
          private static KieServicesClient kieServicesClient;

          // Rules client
          private static RuleServicesClient ruleClient;

          // Process automation clients
          private static CaseServicesClient caseClient;
          private static DocumentServicesClient documentClient;
          private static JobServicesClient jobClient;
          private static ProcessServicesClient processClient;
          private static QueryServicesClient queryClient;
          private static UIServicesClient uiClient;
          private static UserTaskServicesClient userTaskClient;

          // DMN client
          private static DMNServicesClient dmnClient;

          // Planning client
          private static SolverServicesClient solverClient;

          public static void main(String[] args) {
              initializeKieServerClient();
              initializeDroolsServiceClients();
              initializeJbpmServiceClients();
              initializeSolverServiceClients();
          }

          public static void initializeKieServerClient() {
              conf = KieServicesFactory.newRestConfiguration(URL, USER, PASSWORD);
              conf.setMarshallingFormat(FORMAT);
              kieServicesClient = KieServicesFactory.newKieServicesClient(conf);
          }

          public static void initializeDroolsServiceClients() {
              ruleClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(RuleServicesClient.class);
              dmnClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(DMNServicesClient.class);
          }

          public static void initializeJbpmServiceClients() {
              caseClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(CaseServicesClient.class);
              documentClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(DocumentServicesClient.class);
              jobClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(JobServicesClient.class);
              processClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(ProcessServicesClient.class);
              queryClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(QueryServicesClient.class);
              uiClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(UIServicesClient.class);
              userTaskClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(UserTaskServicesClient.class);
          }

          public static void initializeSolverServiceClients() {
              solverClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(SolverServicesClient.class);
          }
      }

#### 20.7.1. Sending requests with the KIE Server Java client API

The KIE Server Java client API enables you to connect to KIE Server using REST protocol from your Java client application. You can use the KIE Server Java client API as an alternative to the KIE Server REST API to interact with your KIE containers and business assets (such as business rules, processes, and solvers) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and running.

- You have `kie-server` user role access to KIE Server.

- You have a Java project with Drools resources.

Procedure

1. In your client application, ensure that the following dependencies have been added to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- For remote execution on KIE Server -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-client</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- For runtime commands -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>drools-compiler</artifactId>
         <scope>runtime</scope>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- For debug logging (optional) -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>ch.qos.logback</groupId>
         <artifactId>logback-classic</artifactId>
         <version>${logback.version}</version>
       </dependency>

2. In the `~/kie/server/client` folder of the Java client API in GitHub , identify the relevant Java client for the request you want to send, such as `KieServicesClient` to access client services for KIE containers and other assets in KIE Server.

3. In your client application, create a `.java` class for the API request. The class must contain the necessary imports, KIE Server location and user credentials, a `KieServicesClient` object, and the client method to execute, such as `createContainer` and `disposeContainer` from the `KieServicesClient` client. Adjust any configuration details according to your use case.

   Creating and disposing a container

       import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
       import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesClient;
       import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesConfiguration;
       import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesFactory;
       import org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerResource;
       import org.kie.server.api.model.ServiceResponse;

       public class MyConfigurationObject {

         private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server";
         private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
         private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

         private static final MarshallingFormat FORMAT = MarshallingFormat.JSON;

         private static KieServicesConfiguration conf;
         private static KieServicesClient kieServicesClient;

         public static void initialize() {
           conf = KieServicesFactory.newRestConfiguration(URL, USER, PASSWORD);

         public void disposeAndCreateContainer() {
             System.out.println("== Disposing and creating containers ==");

             // Retrieve list of KIE containers
             List<KieContainerResource> kieContainers = kieServicesClient.listContainers().getResult().getContainers();
             if (kieContainers.size() == 0) {
                 System.out.println("No containers available...");
                 return;
             }

             // Dispose KIE container
             KieContainerResource container = kieContainers.get(0);
             String containerId = container.getContainerId();
             ServiceResponse<Void> responseDispose = kieServicesClient.disposeContainer(containerId);
             if (responseDispose.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
                 System.out.println("Error disposing " + containerId + ". Message: ");
                 System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
                 return;
             }
             System.out.println("Success Disposing container " + containerId);
             System.out.println("Trying to recreate the container...");

             // Re-create KIE container
             ServiceResponse<KieContainerResource> createResponse = kieServicesClient.createContainer(containerId, container);
             if(createResponse.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
                 System.out.println("Error creating " + containerId + ". Message: ");
                 System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
                 return;
             }
             System.out.println("Container recreated with success!");
             }
         }
       }

   You define service responses using the `org.kie.server.api.model.ServiceResponse<T>` object, where `T` represents the type of returned response. The `ServiceResponse` object has the following attributes:

   - `String message`: Returns the response message

   - `ResponseType type`: Returns either `SUCCESS` or `FAILURE`

   - `T result`: Returns the requested object

   In this example, when you dispose a container, the `ServiceResponse` returns a `Void` response. When you create a container, the `ServiceResponse` returns a `KieContainerResource` object.

   | A conversation between a client and a specific KIE Server container in a clustered environment is secured by a unique `conversationID`. The `conversationID` is transferred using the `X-KIE-ConversationId` REST header. If you update the container, unset the previous `conversationID`. Use `KieServiesClient.completeConversation()` to unset the `conversationID` for Java API.

4. Run the configured `.java` class from your project directory to execute the request, and review the KIE Server response.

   If you enabled debug logging, KIE Server responds with a detailed response according to your configured marshalling format, such as JSON.

   Example server response for a new KIE container (log):

       10:23:35.194 [main] INFO  o.k.s.a.m.MarshallerFactory - Marshaller extensions init
       10:23:35.396 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.client.balancer.LoadBalancer - Load balancer RoundRobinBalancerStrategy{availableEndpoints=[http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server]} selected url 'http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server'
       10:23:35.398 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.i.AbstractKieServicesClientImpl - About to send GET request to 'http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server'
       10:23:35.440 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.i.AbstractKieServicesClientImpl - About to deserialize content:
        '{
         "type" : "SUCCESS",
         "msg" : "Kie Server info",
         "result" : {
           "kie-server-info" : {
             "id" : "default-kieserver",
             "version" : "7.11.0.Final-redhat-00003",
             "name" : "default-kieserver",
             "location" : "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server",
             "capabilities" : [ "KieServer", "BRM", "BPM", "CaseMgmt", "BPM-UI", "BRP", "DMN", "Swagger" ],
             "messages" : [ {
               "severity" : "INFO",
               "timestamp" : {
         "java.util.Date" : 1540814906533
       },
               "content" : [ "Server KieServerInfo{serverId='default-kieserver', version='7.11.0.Final-redhat-00003', name='default-kieserver', location='http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server', capabilities=[KieServer, BRM, BPM, CaseMgmt, BPM-UI, BRP, DMN, Swagger], messages=null}started successfully at Mon Oct 29 08:08:26 EDT 2018" ]
             } ]
           }
         }
       }'
        into type: 'class org.kie.server.api.model.ServiceResponse'
       10:23:35.653 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - KieServicesClient connected to: default-kieserver version 7.11.0.Final-redhat-00003
       10:23:35.653 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Supported capabilities by the server: [KieServer, BRM, BPM, CaseMgmt, BPM-UI, BRP, DMN, Swagger]
       10:23:35.653 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability KieServer
       10:23:35.653 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - No builder found for 'KieServer' capability
       10:23:35.654 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability BRM
       10:23:35.654 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.DroolsServicesClientBuilder@6b927fb' for capability 'BRM'
       10:23:35.655 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.RuleServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.RuleServicesClientImpl@4a94ee4}
       10:23:35.655 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability BPM
       10:23:35.656 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.JBPMServicesClientBuilder@4cc451f2' for capability 'BPM'
       10:23:35.672 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.JobServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.JobServicesClientImpl@1189dd52, interface org.kie.server.client.admin.ProcessAdminServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.admin.impl.ProcessAdminServicesClientImpl@36bc55de, interface org.kie.server.client.DocumentServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.DocumentServicesClientImpl@564fabc8, interface org.kie.server.client.admin.UserTaskAdminServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.admin.impl.UserTaskAdminServicesClientImpl@16d04d3d, interface org.kie.server.client.QueryServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.QueryServicesClientImpl@49ec71f8, interface org.kie.server.client.ProcessServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.ProcessServicesClientImpl@1d2adfbe, interface org.kie.server.client.UserTaskServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.UserTaskServicesClientImpl@36902638}
       10:23:35.672 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability CaseMgmt
       10:23:35.672 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.CaseServicesClientBuilder@223d2c72' for capability 'CaseMgmt'
       10:23:35.676 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.admin.CaseAdminServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.admin.impl.CaseAdminServicesClientImpl@2b662a77, interface org.kie.server.client.CaseServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.CaseServicesClientImpl@7f0eb4b4}
       10:23:35.676 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability BPM-UI
       10:23:35.676 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.JBPMUIServicesClientBuilder@5c33f1a9' for capability 'BPM-UI'
       10:23:35.677 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.UIServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.UIServicesClientImpl@223191a6}
       10:23:35.678 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability BRP
       10:23:35.678 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.OptaplannerServicesClientBuilder@49139829' for capability 'BRP'
       10:23:35.679 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.SolverServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.SolverServicesClientImpl@77fbd92c}
       10:23:35.679 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability DMN
       10:23:35.679 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Builder 'org.kie.server.client.helper.DMNServicesClientBuilder@67c27493' for capability 'DMN'
       10:23:35.680 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Capability implemented by {interface org.kie.server.client.DMNServicesClient=org.kie.server.client.impl.DMNServicesClientImpl@35e2d654}
       10:23:35.680 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - Building services client for server capability Swagger
       10:23:35.680 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.impl.KieServicesClientImpl - No builder found for 'Swagger' capability
       10:23:35.681 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.client.balancer.LoadBalancer - Load balancer RoundRobinBalancerStrategy{availableEndpoints=[http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server]} selected url 'http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server'
       10:23:35.701 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.i.AbstractKieServicesClientImpl - About to send PUT request to 'http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/employee-rostering3' with payload '{
         "container-id" : null,
         "release-id" : {
           "group-id" : "employeerostering",
           "artifact-id" : "employeerostering",
           "version" : "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
         },
         "resolved-release-id" : null,
         "status" : null,
         "scanner" : null,
         "config-items" : [ ],
         "messages" : [ ],
         "container-alias" : null
       }'
       10:23:38.071 [main] DEBUG o.k.s.c.i.AbstractKieServicesClientImpl - About to deserialize content:
        '{
         "type" : "SUCCESS",
         "msg" : "Container employee-rostering3 successfully deployed with module employeerostering:employeerostering:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT.",
         "result" : {
           "kie-container" : {
             "container-id" : "employee-rostering3",
             "release-id" : {
               "group-id" : "employeerostering",
               "artifact-id" : "employeerostering",
               "version" : "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
             },
             "resolved-release-id" : {
               "group-id" : "employeerostering",
               "artifact-id" : "employeerostering",
               "version" : "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
             },
             "status" : "STARTED",
             "scanner" : {
               "status" : "DISPOSED",
               "poll-interval" : null
             },
             "config-items" : [ ],
             "messages" : [ {
               "severity" : "INFO",
               "timestamp" : {
         "java.util.Date" : 1540909418069
       },
               "content" : [ "Container employee-rostering3 successfully created with module employeerostering:employeerostering:1.0.0-SNAPSHOT." ]
             } ],
             "container-alias" : null
           }
         }
       }'
        into type: 'class org.kie.server.api.model.ServiceResponse'

   If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your Java configurations accordingly.

#### 20.7.2. Supported KIE Server Java clients

The following are some of the Java client services available in the `org.kie.server.client` package of your Drools distribution. You can use these services to interact with related resources in KIE Server similarly to the KIE Server REST API.

- `KieServicesClient`: Used as the entry point for other KIE Server Java clients, and used to interact with KIE containers

- `JobServicesClient`: Used to schedule, cancel, re-queue, and get job requests

- `RuleServicesClient`: Used to send commands to the server to perform rule-related operations, such as executing rules or inserting objects into the KIE session

- `SolverServicesClient`: Used to perform all OptaPlanner operations, such as getting the solver state and the best solution, or disposing a solver

The `getServicesClient` method provides access to any of these clients:

    RuleServicesClient rulesClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(RuleServicesClient.class);

For the full list of available KIE Server Java clients, see the Java client API source in GitHub.

#### 20.7.3. Example requests with the KIE Server Java client API

The following are examples of KIE Server Java client API requests for basic interactions with KIE Server. For the full list of available KIE Server Java clients, see the Java client API source in GitHub.

Listing KIE Server capabilities

  You can use the `org.kie.server.api.model.KieServerInfo` object to identify server capabilities. The `KieServicesClient` client requires the server capability information to correctly produce service clients. You can specify the capabilities globally in `KieServicesConfiguration`; otherwise they are automatically retrieved from KIE Server.

  Example request to return KIE Server capabilities

      public void listCapabilities() {

        KieServerInfo serverInfo = kieServicesClient.getServerInfo().getResult();
        System.out.print("Server capabilities:");

        for (String capability : serverInfo.getCapabilities()) {
          System.out.print(" " + capability);
        }

        System.out.println();
      }

Listing KIE containers in KIE Server

  KIE containers are represented by the `org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerResource` object. The list of resources is represented by the `org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerResourceList` object.

  Example request to return KIE containers from KIE Server

      public void listContainers() {
          KieContainerResourceList containersList = kieServicesClient.listContainers().getResult();
          List<KieContainerResource> kieContainers = containersList.getContainers();
          System.out.println("Available containers: ");
          for (KieContainerResource container : kieContainers) {
              System.out.println("\t" + container.getContainerId() + " (" + container.getReleaseId() + ")");
          }
      }

  You can optionally filter the KIE container results using an instance of the `org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerResourceFilter` class, which is passed to the `org.kie.server.client.KieServicesClient.listContainers()` method.

  Example request to return KIE containers by release ID and status

      public void listContainersWithFilter() {

          // Filter containers by releaseId "org.example:container:1.0.0.Final" and status FAILED
          KieContainerResourceFilter filter = new KieContainerResourceFilter.Builder()
                  .releaseId("org.example", "container", "1.0.0.Final")
                  .status(KieContainerStatus.FAILED)
                  .build();

          // Using previously created KieServicesClient
          KieContainerResourceList containersList = kieServicesClient.listContainers(filter).getResult();
          List<KieContainerResource> kieContainers = containersList.getContainers();

          System.out.println("Available containers: ");

          for (KieContainerResource container : kieContainers) {
              System.out.println("\t" + container.getContainerId() + " (" + container.getReleaseId() + ")");
          }
      }

Creating and disposing KIE containers in KIE Server

  You can use the `createContainer` and `disposeContainer` methods in the `KieServicesClient` client to dispose and create KIE containers. In this example, when you dispose a container, the `ServiceResponse` returns a `Void` response. When you create a container, the `ServiceResponse` returns a `KieContainerResource` object.

  Example request to dispose and re-create a KIE container

      public void disposeAndCreateContainer() {
          System.out.println("== Disposing and creating containers ==");

          // Retrieve list of KIE containers
          List<KieContainerResource> kieContainers = kieServicesClient.listContainers().getResult().getContainers();
          if (kieContainers.size() == 0) {
              System.out.println("No containers available...");
              return;
          }

          // Dispose KIE container
          KieContainerResource container = kieContainers.get(0);
          String containerId = container.getContainerId();
          ServiceResponse<Void> responseDispose = kieServicesClient.disposeContainer(containerId);
          if (responseDispose.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
              System.out.println("Error disposing " + containerId + ". Message: ");
              System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
              return;
          }
          System.out.println("Success Disposing container " + containerId);
          System.out.println("Trying to recreate the container...");

          // Re-create KIE container
          ServiceResponse<KieContainerResource> createResponse = kieServicesClient.createContainer(containerId, container);
          if(createResponse.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
              System.out.println("Error creating " + containerId + ". Message: ");
              System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
              return;
          }
          System.out.println("Container recreated with success!");
      }

Executing runtime commands in KIE Server

  Drools supports runtime commands that you can send to KIE Server for asset-related operations, such as inserting or retracting objects in a KIE session or firing all rules. The full list of supported runtime commands is located in the `org.drools.core.command.runtime` package in your Drools instance.

  You can use the `org.kie.api.command.KieCommands` class to insert commands, and use `org.kie.api.KieServices.get().getCommands()` to instantiate the `KieCommands` class. If you want to add multiple commands, use the `BatchExecutionCommand` wrapper.

  Example request to insert an object and fire all rules

      import org.kie.api.command.Command;
      import org.kie.api.command.KieCommands;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.ServiceResponse;
      import org.kie.server.client.RuleServicesClient;
      import org.kie.server.client.KieServicesClient;
      import org.kie.api.KieServices;

      import java.util.Arrays;

      ...

      public void executeCommands() {

        String containerId = "hello";
        System.out.println("== Sending commands to the server ==");
        RuleServicesClient rulesClient = kieServicesClient.getServicesClient(RuleServicesClient.class);
        KieCommands commandsFactory = KieServices.Factory.get().getCommands();

        Command<?> insert = commandsFactory.newInsert("Some String OBJ");
        Command<?> fireAllRules = commandsFactory.newFireAllRules();
        Command<?> batchCommand = commandsFactory.newBatchExecution(Arrays.asList(insert, fireAllRules));

        ServiceResponse<String> executeResponse = rulesClient.executeCommands(containerId, batchCommand);

        if(executeResponse.getType() == ResponseType.SUCCESS) {
          System.out.println("Commands executed with success! Response: ");
          System.out.println(executeResponse.getResult());
        } else {
          System.out.println("Error executing rules. Message: ");
          System.out.println(executeResponse.getMsg());
        }
      }

  | A conversation between a client and a specific KIE Server container in a clustered environment is secured by a unique `conversationID`. The `conversationID` is transferred using the `X-KIE-ConversationId` REST header. If you update the container, unset the previous `conversationID`. Use `KieServiesClient.completeConversation()` to unset the `conversationID` for Java API.

### 20.8. KIE Server and KIE container commands in Drools

Drools supports server commands that you can send to KIE Server for server-related or container-related operations, such as retrieving server information or creating or deleting a container. The full list of supported KIE Server configuration commands is located in the `org.kie.server.api.commands` package in your Drools instance.

In the KIE Server REST API, you use the `org.kie.server.api.commands` commands as the request body for `POST` requests to `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/server/config`. For more information about using the KIE Server REST API, see KIE Server REST API for KIE containers and business assets.

In the KIE Server Java client API, you use the corresponding method in the parent `KieServicesClient` Java client as an embedded API request in your Java application. All KIE Server commands are executed by methods provided in the Java client API, so you do not need to embed the actual KIE Server commands in your Java application. For more information about using the KIE Server Java client API, see KIE Server Java client API for KIE containers and business assets.

#### 20.8.1. Sample KIE Server and KIE container commands

The following are sample KIE Server commands that you can use with the KIE Server REST API or Java client API for server-related or container-related operations in KIE Server:

- `GetServerInfoCommand`

- `GetServerStateCommand`

- `CreateContainerCommand`

- `GetContainerInfoCommand`

- `ListContainersCommand`

- `CallContainerCommand`

- `DisposeContainerCommand`

- `GetScannerInfoCommand`

- `UpdateScannerCommand`

- `UpdateReleaseIdCommand`

For the full list of supported KIE Server configuration and management commands, see the `org.kie.server.api.commands` package in your Drools instance.

You can run KIE Server commands individually or together as a batch REST API request or batch Java API request:

Batch REST API request to create, call, and dispose a KIE container (JSON)

    {
      "commands": [
        {
          "create-container": {
            "container": {
              "status": "STARTED",
              "container-id": "command-script-container",
              "release-id": {
                "version": "1.0",
                "group-id": "com.redhat",
                "artifact-id": "Project1"
              }
            }
          }
        },
        {
          "call-container": {
            "payload": "{\n  \"commands\" : [ {\n    \"fire-all-rules\" : {\n      \"max\" : -1,\n      \"out-identifier\" : null\n    }\n  } ]\n}",
            "container-id": "command-script-container"
          }
        },
        {
          "dispose-container": {
            "container-id": "command-script-container"
          }
        }
      ]
    }

Batch Java API request to retrieve, dispose, and re-create a KIE container

    public void disposeAndCreateContainer() {
        System.out.println("== Disposing and creating containers ==");

        // Retrieve list of KIE containers
        List<KieContainerResource> kieContainers = kieServicesClient.listContainers().getResult().getContainers();
        if (kieContainers.size() == 0) {
            System.out.println("No containers available...");
            return;
        }

        // Dispose KIE container
        KieContainerResource container = kieContainers.get(0);
        String containerId = container.getContainerId();
        ServiceResponse<Void> responseDispose = kieServicesClient.disposeContainer(containerId);
        if (responseDispose.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
            System.out.println("Error disposing " + containerId + ". Message: ");
            System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
            return;
        }
        System.out.println("Success Disposing container " + containerId);
        System.out.println("Trying to recreate the container...");

        // Re-create KIE container
        ServiceResponse<KieContainerResource> createResponse = kieServicesClient.createContainer(containerId, container);
        if(createResponse.getType() == ResponseType.FAILURE) {
            System.out.println("Error creating " + containerId + ". Message: ");
            System.out.println(responseDispose.getMsg());
            return;
        }
        System.out.println("Container recreated with success!");
    }

Each command in this section includes a REST request body example (JSON) for the KIE Server REST API and an embedded method example from the `KieServicesClient` Java client for the KIE Server Java client API.

GetServerInfoCommand

  Returns information about the KIE Server.

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "get-server-info" : { }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      KieServerInfo serverInfo = kieServicesClient.getServerInfo();

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Kie Server info",
            "result": {
              "kie-server-info": {
                "id": "default-kieserver",
                "version": "7.11.0.Final-redhat-00001",
                "name": "default-kieserver",
                "location": "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server",
                "capabilities": [
                  "KieServer",
                  "BRM",
                  "BPM",
                  "CaseMgmt",
                  "BPM-UI",
                  "BRP",
                  "DMN",
                  "Swagger"
                ],
                "messages": [
                  {
                    "severity": "INFO",
                    "timestamp": {
                      "java.util.Date": 1538502533321
                    },
                    "content": [
                      "Server KieServerInfo{serverId='default-kieserver', version='7.11.0.Final-redhat-00001', name='default-kieserver', location='http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server', capabilities=[KieServer, BRM, BPM, CaseMgmt, BPM-UI, BRP, DMN, Swagger], messages=null}started successfully at Tue Oct 02 13:48:53 EDT 2018"
                    ]
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetServerStateCommand

  Returns information about the current state and configurations of the KIE Server.

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "get-server-state" : { }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      KieServerStateInfo serverStateInfo = kieServicesClient.getServerState();

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Successfully loaded server state for server id default-kieserver",
            "result": {
              "kie-server-state-info": {
                "controller": [
                  "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller"
                ],
                "config": {
                  "config-items": [
                    {
                      "itemName": "org.kie.server.location",
                      "itemValue": "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server",
                      "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                    },
                    {
                      "itemName": "org.kie.server.controller.user",
                      "itemValue": "controllerUser",
                      "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                    },
                    {
                      "itemName": "org.kie.server.controller",
                      "itemValue": "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller",
                      "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                    }
                  ]
                },
                "containers": [
                  {
                    "container-id": "employee-rostering",
                    "release-id": {
                      "group-id": "employeerostering",
                      "artifact-id": "employeerostering",
                      "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                    },
                    "resolved-release-id": null,
                    "status": "STARTED",
                    "scanner": {
                      "status": "STOPPED",
                      "poll-interval": null
                    },
                    "config-items": [
                      {
                        "itemName": "KBase",
                        "itemValue": "",
                        "itemType": "BPM"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "KSession",
                        "itemValue": "",
                        "itemType": "BPM"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "MergeMode",
                        "itemValue": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS",
                        "itemType": "BPM"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "RuntimeStrategy",
                        "itemValue": "SINGLETON",
                        "itemType": "BPM"
                      }
                    ],
                    "messages": [],
                    "container-alias": "employeerostering"
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

CreateContainerCommand

  Creates a KIE container in the KIE Server.

  Table 78. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container` | Map containing the `container-id`, `release-id` data (group ID, artifact ID, version), `status`, and any other components of the new KIE container | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "create-container" : {
            "container" : {
              "status" : null,
              "messages" : [ ],
              "container-id" : "command-script-container",
              "release-id" : {
                "version" : "1.0",
                "group-id" : "com.redhat",
                "artifact-id" : "Project1"
              },
              "config-items" : [ ]
            }
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      ServiceResponse<KieContainerResource> response = kieServicesClient.createContainer("command-script-container", resource);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully deployed with module com.redhat:Project1:1.0.",
            "result": {
              "kie-container": {
                "container-id": "command-script-container",
                "release-id": {
                  "version" : "1.0",
                  "group-id" : "com.redhat",
                  "artifact-id" : "Project1"
                },
                "resolved-release-id": {
                  "version" : "1.0",
                  "group-id" : "com.redhat",
                  "artifact-id" : "Project1"
                },
                "status": "STARTED",
                "scanner": {
                  "status": "DISPOSED",
                  "poll-interval": null
                },
                "config-items": [],
                "messages": [
                  {
                    "severity": "INFO",
                    "timestamp": {
                      "java.util.Date": 1538762455510
                    },
                    "content": [
                      "Container command-script-container successfully created with module com.redhat:Project1:1.0."
                    ]
                  }
                ],
                "container-alias": null
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetContainerInfoCommand

  Returns information about a specified KIE container in KIE Server.

  Table 79. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "get-container-info" : {
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      ServiceResponse<KieContainerResource> response = kieServicesClient.getContainerInfo("command-script-container");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Info for container command-script-container",
            "result": {
              "kie-container": {
                "container-id": "command-script-container",
                "release-id": {
                  "group-id": "com.redhat",
                  "artifact-id": "Project1",
                  "version": "1.0"
                },
                "resolved-release-id": {
                  "group-id": "com.redhat",
                  "artifact-id": "Project1",
                  "version": "1.0"
                },
                "status": "STARTED",
                "scanner": {
                  "status": "DISPOSED",
                  "poll-interval": null
                },
                "config-items": [

                ],
                "container-alias": null
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

ListContainersCommand

  Returns a list of KIE containers that have been created in the KIE Server.

  Table 80. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `kie-container-filter` | Optional map containing `release-id-filter`, `container-status-filter`, and any other KIE container properties by which you want to filter results | Optional

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "list-containers" : {
            "kie-container-filter" : {
              "release-id-filter" : { },
              "container-status-filter" : {
                "accepted-status" : ["FAILED"]
              }
            }
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      KieContainerResourceFilter filter = new KieContainerResourceFilter.Builder()
              .status(KieContainerStatus.FAILED)
              .build();

      KieContainerResourceList containersList = kieServicesClient.listContainers(filter);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "List of created containers",
            "result": {
              "kie-containers": {
                "kie-container": [
                  {
                    "container-id": "command-script-container",
                    "release-id": {
                      "group-id": "com.redhat",
                      "artifact-id": "Project1",
                      "version": "1.0"
                    },
                    "resolved-release-id": {
                      "group-id": "com.redhat",
                      "artifact-id": "Project1",
                      "version": "1.0"
                    },
                    "status": "STARTED",
                    "scanner": {
                      "status": "STARTED",
                      "poll-interval": 5000
                    },
                    "config-items": [
                      {
                        "itemName": "RuntimeStrategy",
                        "itemValue": "SINGLETON",
                        "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "MergeMode",
                        "itemValue": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS",
                        "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "KBase",
                        "itemValue": "",
                        "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                      },
                      {
                        "itemName": "KSession",
                        "itemValue": "",
                        "itemType": "java.lang.String"
                      }
                    ],
                    "messages": [
                      {
                        "severity": "INFO",
                        "timestamp": {
                          "java.util.Date": 1538504619749
                        },
                        "content": [
                          "Container command-script-container successfully created with module com.redhat:Project1:1.0."
                        ]
                      }
                    ],
                    "container-alias": null
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

CallContainerCommand

  Calls a KIE container and executes one or more runtime commands. For information about Drools runtime commands, see Runtime commands in Drools.

  Table 81. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container to be called | Required
  `payload` | One or more commands in a `BatchExecutionCommand` wrapper to be executed on the KIE container | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "call-container" : {
            "payload" : "{\n  \"lookup\" : \"defaultKieSession\",\n  \"commands\" : [ {\n    \"fire-all-rules\" : {\n      \"max\" : -1,\n      \"out-identifier\" : null\n    }\n  } ]\n}",
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      List<Command<?>> commands = new ArrayList<Command<?>>();
            BatchExecutionCommand batchExecution1 = commandsFactory.newBatchExecution(commands, "defaultKieSession");
            commands.add(commandsFactory.newFireAllRules());

            ServiceResponse<ExecutionResults> response1 = ruleClient.executeCommandsWithResults("command-script-container", batchExecution1);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": "{\n  \"results\" : [ ],\n  \"facts\" : [ ]\n}"
          }
        ]
      }

DisposeContainerCommand

  Disposes a specified KIE container in the KIE Server.

  Table 82. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container to be disposed | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "dispose-container" : {
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      ServiceResponse<Void> response = kieServicesClient.disposeContainer("command-script-container");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully disposed.",
            "result": null
          }
        ]
      }

GetScannerInfoCommand

  Returns information about the KIE scanner used for automatic updates in a specified KIE container, if applicable.

  Table 83. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container where the KIE scanner is used | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "get-scanner-info" : {
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      ServiceResponse<KieScannerResource> response = kieServicesClient.getScannerInfo("command-script-container");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Scanner info successfully retrieved",
            "result": {
              "kie-scanner": {
                "status": "DISPOSED",
                "poll-interval": null
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

UpdateScannerCommand

  Starts or stops a KIE scanner that controls polling for updated KIE container deployments.

  | Avoid using a KIE scanner with business processes. Using a KIE scanner with processes can lead to unforeseen updates that can then cause errors in long-running processes when changes are not compatible with running process instances.

  Table 84. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container where the KIE scanner is used | Required
  `status` | Status to be set on the KIE scanner (`STARTED`, `STOPPED`) | Required
  `poll-interval` | Permitted polling duration in milliseconds | Required only when starting scanner

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "update-scanner" : {
            "scanner" : {
              "status" : "STARTED",
              "poll-interval" : 10000
            },
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      KieScannerResource scannerResource = new KieScannerResource();
      scannerResource.setPollInterval(10000);
      scannerResource.setStatus(KieScannerStatus. STARTED);

      ServiceResponse<KieScannerResource> response = kieServicesClient.updateScanner("command-script-container", scannerResource);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Kie scanner successfully created.",
            "result": {
              "kie-scanner": {
                "status": "STARTED",
                "poll-interval": 10000
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

UpdateReleaseIdCommand

  Updates the release ID data (group ID, artifact ID, version) for a specified KIE container.

  Table 85. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `container-id` | ID of the KIE container to be updated | Required
  `releaseId` | Updated GAV (group ID, artifact ID, version) data to be applied to the KIE container | Required

  Example REST request body (JSON)

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "update-release-id" : {
            "releaseId" : {
              "version" : "1.1",
              "group-id" : "com.redhat",
              "artifact-id" : "Project1"
            },
            "container-id" : "command-script-container"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java client method

      ServiceResponse<ReleaseId> response = kieServicesClient.updateReleaseId("command-script-container", "com.redhat:Project1:1.1");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Release id successfully updated",
            "result": {
              "release-id": {
                "group-id": "com.redhat",
                "artifact-id": "Project1",
                "version": "1.1"
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

### 20.9. Runtime commands in Drools

Drools supports runtime commands that you can send to KIE Server for asset-related operations, such as executing all rules or inserting or retracting objects in a KIE session. The full list of supported runtime commands is located in the `org.drools.core.command.runtime` package in your Drools instance.

In the KIE Server REST API, you use the global `org.drools.core.command.runtime` commands or the rule-specific `org.drools.core.command.runtime.rule` commands as the request body for `POST` requests to `http://SERVER:PORT/kie-server/services/rest/server/containers/instances/{containerId}`. For more information about using the KIE Server REST API, see KIE Server REST API for KIE containers and business assets.

In the KIE Server Java client API, you can embed these commands in your Java application along with the relevant Java client. For example, for rule-related commands, you use the `RuleServicesClient` Java client with the embedded commands. For more information about using the KIE Server Java client API, see KIE Server Java client API for KIE containers and business assets.

#### 20.9.1. Sample runtime commands in Drools

The following are sample runtime commands that you can use with the KIE Server REST API or Java client API for asset-related operations in KIE Server:

- `BatchExecutionCommand`

- `InsertObjectCommand`

- `RetractCommand`

- `ModifyCommand`

- `GetObjectCommand`

- `GetObjectsCommand`

- `InsertElementsCommand`

- `FireAllRulesCommand`

- `QueryCommand`

- `SetGlobalCommand`

- `GetGlobalCommand`

For the full list of supported runtime commands, see the `org.drools.core.command.runtime` package in your Drools instance.

Each command in this section includes a REST request body example (JSON) for the KIE Server REST API and an embedded Java command example for the KIE Server Java client API. The Java examples use an object `org.drools.compiler.test.Person` with the fields `name` (String) and `age` (Integer).

BatchExecutionCommand

  Contains multiple commands to be executed together.

  Table 86. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `commands` | List of commands to be executed. | Required
  `lookup` | Sets the KIE session ID on which the commands will be executed. For stateless KIE sessions, this attribute is required. For stateful KIE sessions, this attribute is optional and if not specified, the default KIE session is used. | Required for stateless KIE session, optional for stateful KIE session

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "lookup": "ksession1",
        "commands": [ {
            "insert": {
              "object": {
                "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                  "name": "john",
                  "age": 25
                }
              }
            }
          },
          {
            "fire-all-rules": {
              "max": 10,
              "out-identifier": "firedActivations"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      BatchExecutionCommand command = new BatchExecutionCommand();
      command.setLookup("ksession1");

      InsertObjectCommand insertObjectCommand = new InsertObjectCommand(new Person("john", 25));
      FireAllRulesCommand fireAllRulesCommand = new FireAllRulesCommand();

      command.getCommands().add(insertObjectCommand);
      command.getCommands().add(fireAllRulesCommand);

      ksession.execute(command);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": 0,
                    "key": "firedActivations"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

InsertObjectCommand

  Inserts an object into the KIE session.

  Table 87. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `object` | The object to be inserted | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional
  `return-object` | Boolean to determine whether the object must be returned in the execution results (default: `true`) | Optional
  `entry-point` | Entry point for the insertion | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "insert": {
              "entry-point": "my stream",
              "object": {
                "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                  "age": 25,
                  "name": "john"
                }
              },
              "out-identifier": "john",
              "return-object": false
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      Command insertObjectCommand =
        CommandFactory.newInsert(new Person("john", 25), "john", false, null);

      ksession.execute(insertObjectCommand);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": [
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "john"
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

RetractCommand

  Retracts an object from the KIE session.

  Table 88. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be retracted | Required

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "retract": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command: Use `FactHandleFromString`

      RetractCommand retractCommand = new RetractCommand();
      retractCommand.setFactHandleFromString("123:234:345:456:567");

  Example Java command: Use `FactHandle` from inserted object

      RetractCommand retractCommand = new RetractCommand(factHandle);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container employee-rostering successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

ModifyCommand

  Modifies a previously inserted object in the KIE session.

  Table 89. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be modified | Required
  `setters` | List of setters for object modifications | Required

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "modify": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap",
              "setters": {
                "accessor": "age",
                "value": 25
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      ModifyCommand modifyCommand = new ModifyCommand(factHandle);

      List<Setter> setters = new ArrayList<Setter>();
      setters.add(new SetterImpl("age", "25"));

      modifyCommand.setSetters(setters);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container employee-rostering successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetObjectCommand

  Retrieves an object from a KIE session.

  Table 90. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `fact-handle` | The `FactHandle` associated with the object to be retrieved | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-object": {
              "fact-handle": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap",
              "out-identifier": "john"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetObjectCommand getObjectCommand = new GetObjectCommand();
      getObjectCommand.setFactHandleFromString("123:234:345:456:567");
      getObjectCommand.setOutIdentifier("john");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": null,
                    "key": "john"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

GetObjectsCommand

  Retrieves all objects from the KIE session as a collection.

  Table 91. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `object-filter` | Filter for the objects returned from the KIE session | Optional
  `out-identifier` | Identifier to be used in the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-objects": {
              "out-identifier": "objects"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetObjectsCommand getObjectsCommand = new GetObjectsCommand();
      getObjectsCommand.setOutIdentifier("objects");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": [
                      {
                        "org.apache.xerces.dom.ElementNSImpl": "<?xml version=\"1.0\" encoding=\"UTF-16\"?>\n<object xmlns:xsi=\"http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance\" xsi:type=\"person\"><age>25</age><name>john</name>\n <\/object>"
                      },
                      {
                        "org.drools.compiler.test.Person": {
                          "name": "john",
                          "age": 25
                        }
                      }
                    ],
                    "key": "objects"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

InsertElementsCommand

  Inserts a list of objects into the KIE session.

  Table 92. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `objects` | The list of objects to be inserted into the KIE session | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the `FactHandle` created from the object insertion and added to the execution results | Optional
  `return-object` | Boolean to determine whether the object must be returned in the execution results. Default value: `true`. | Optional
  `entry-point` | Entry point for the insertion | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
          "insert-elements": {
              "objects": [
                  {
                      "containedObject": {
                          "@class": "org.drools.compiler.test.Person",
                          "age": 25,
                          "name": "john"
                      }
                  },
                  {
                      "containedObject": {
                          "@class": "Person",
                          "age": 35,
                          "name": "sarah"
                      }
                  }
              ]
          }
        }
      ]
      }

  Example Java command

      List<Object> objects = new ArrayList<Object>();
      objects.add(new Person("john", 25));
      objects.add(new Person("sarah", 35));

      Command insertElementsCommand = CommandFactory.newInsertElements(objects);

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [],
                "facts": [
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720265:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "john"
                  },
                  {
                    "value": {
                      "org.drools.core.common.DefaultFactHandle": {
                        "external-form": "0:4:436792766:-2127720266:4:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:java.util.LinkedHashMap"
                      }
                    },
                    "key": "sarah"
                  }
                ]
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

FireAllRulesCommand

  Executes all rules in the KIE session.

  Table 93. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `max` | Maximum number of rules to be executed. The default is `-1` and does not put any restriction on execution. | Optional
  `out-identifier` | ID to be used for retrieving the number of fired rules in execution results. | Optional
  `agenda-filter` | Agenda Filter to be used for rule execution. | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands" : [ {
          "fire-all-rules": {
              "max": 10,
              "out-identifier": "firedActivations"
          }
        } ]
      }

  Example Java command

      FireAllRulesCommand fireAllRulesCommand = new FireAllRulesCommand();
      fireAllRulesCommand.setMax(10);
      fireAllRulesCommand.setOutIdentifier("firedActivations");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": 0,
                    "key": "firedActivations"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

QueryCommand

  Executes a query defined in the KIE base.

  Table 94. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `name` | Query name. | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID of the query results. The query results are added in the execution results with this identifier. | Optional
  `arguments` | List of objects to be passed as a query parameter. | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [
          {
            "query": {
              "name": "persons",
              "arguments": [],
              "out-identifier": "persons"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      QueryCommand queryCommand = new QueryCommand();
      queryCommand.setName("persons");
      queryCommand.setOutIdentifier("persons");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "type": "SUCCESS",
        "msg": "Container stateful-session successfully called.",
        "result": {
          "execution-results": {
            "results": [
              {
                "value": {
                  "org.drools.core.runtime.rule.impl.FlatQueryResults": {
                    "idFactHandleMaps": {
                      "type": "LIST",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        {
                          "type": "MAP",
                          "componentType": null,
                          "element": [
                            {
                              "value": {
                                "org.drools.core.common.DisconnectedFactHandle": {
                                  "id": 1,
                                  "identityHashCode": 1809949690,
                                  "objectHashCode": 1809949690,
                                  "recency": 1,
                                  "object": {
                                    "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                                      "fullname": "John Doe",
                                      "age": 47
                                    }
                                  },
                                  "entryPointId": "DEFAULT",
                                  "traitType": "NON_TRAIT",
                                  "external-form": "0:1:1809949690:1809949690:1:DEFAULT:NON_TRAIT:org.kie.server.testing.Person"
                                }
                              },
                              "key": "$person"
                            }
                          ]
                        }
                      ]
                    },
                    "idResultMaps": {
                      "type": "LIST",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        {
                          "type": "MAP",
                          "componentType": null,
                          "element": [
                            {
                              "value": {
                                "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                                  "fullname": "John Doe",
                                  "age": 47
                                }
                              },
                              "key": "$person"
                            }
                          ]
                        }
                      ]
                    },
                    "identifiers": {
                      "type": "SET",
                      "componentType": null,
                      "element": [
                        "$person"
                      ]
                    }
                  }
                },
                "key": "persons"
              }
            ],
            "facts": []
          }
        }
      }

SetGlobalCommand

  Sets an object to a global state.

  Table 95. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `identifier` | ID of the global variable defined in the KIE base | Required
  `object` | Object to be set into the global variable | Optional
  `out` | Boolean to exclude the global variable you set from the execution results | Optional
  `out-identifier` | ID of the global execution result | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [
          {
            "set-global": {
              "identifier": "helper",
              "object": {
                "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                  "fullname": "kyle",
                  "age": 30
                }
              },
              "out-identifier": "output"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      SetGlobalCommand setGlobalCommand = new SetGlobalCommand();
      setGlobalCommand.setIdentifier("helper");
      setGlobalCommand.setObject(new Person("kyle", 30));
      setGlobalCommand.setOut(true);
      setGlobalCommand.setOutIdentifier("output");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "type": "SUCCESS",
        "msg": "Container stateful-session successfully called.",
        "result": {
          "execution-results": {
            "results": [
              {
                "value": {
                  "org.kie.server.testing.Person": {
                    "fullname": "kyle",
                    "age": 30
                  }
                },
                "key": "output"
              }
            ],
            "facts": []
          }
        }
      }

GetGlobalCommand

  Retrieves a previously defined global object.

  Table 96. Command attributes
  Name | Description | Requirement
  --- | --- | ---
  `identifier` | ID of the global variable defined in the KIE base | Required
  `out-identifier` | ID to be used in the execution results | Optional

  Example JSON request body

      {
        "commands": [ {
            "get-global": {
              "identifier": "helper",
              "out-identifier": "helperOutput"
            }
          }
        ]
      }

  Example Java command

      GetGlobalCommand getGlobalCommand = new GetGlobalCommand();
      getGlobalCommand.setIdentifier("helper");
      getGlobalCommand.setOutIdentifier("helperOutput");

  Example server response (JSON)

      {
        "response": [
          {
            "type": "SUCCESS",
            "msg": "Container command-script-container successfully called.",
            "result": {
              "execution-results": {
                "results": [
                  {
                    "value": null,
                    "key": "helperOutput"
                  }
                ],
                "facts": []
              }
            }
          }
        ]
      }

### 20.10. Drools controller REST API for KIE Server templates and instances

Drools provides a Drools controller REST API that you can use to interact with your KIE Server templates (configurations), KIE Server instances (remote servers), and associated KIE containers (deployment units) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. This API support enables you to maintain your Drools servers and resources more efficiently and optimize your integration and development with Drools.

With the Drools controller REST API, you can perform the following actions:

- Retrieve information about KIE Server templates, instances, and associated KIE containers

- Update, start, or stop KIE containers associated with KIE Server templates and instances

- Create, update, or delete KIE Server templates

- Create, update, or delete KIE Server instances

Requests to the Drools controller REST API require the following components:

Authentication

  The Drools controller REST API requires HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the following user roles, depending on controller type:

  - `rest-all` user role if you installed Business Central and you want to use the built-in Drools controller

  - `kie-server` user role if you installed the headless Drools controller separately from Business Central

  To view configured user roles for your Drools distribution, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/application-roles.properties` and `~/application-users.properties`.

  To add a user with the `kie-server` role or the `rest-all` role or both, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/bin` and run the following command with the role or roles specified:

      $ ./add-user.sh -a --user <USERNAME> --password <PASSWORD> --role kie-server,rest-all

  To configure the `kie-server` or `rest-all` user with Drools controller access, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml`, uncomment the `org.kie.server` properties (if applicable), and add the controller user login credentials and controller location (if needed):

      <property name="org.kie.server.location" value="http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller" value="http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller.user" value="baAdmin"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller.pwd" value="password@1"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.id" value="default-kieserver"/>

  For more information about user roles and Drools installation options, see Installing the KIE Server.

HTTP headers

  The Drools controller REST API requires the following HTTP headers for API requests:

  - `Accept`: Data format accepted by your requesting client:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

    - `application/xml` (XML, for JAXB)

  - `Content-Type`: Data format of your `POST` or `PUT` API request data:

    - `application/json` (JSON)

    - `application/xml` (XML, for JAXB)

HTTP methods

  The Drools controller REST API supports the following HTTP methods for API requests:

  - `GET`: Retrieves specified information from a specified resource endpoint

  - `POST`: Updates a resource or resource instance

  - `PUT`: Creates a resource or resource instance

  - `DELETE`: Deletes a resource or resource instance

Base URL

  The base URL for Drools controller REST API requests is `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTROLLER/rest/`, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/` if you are using the Drools controller built in to Business Central.

Endpoints

  Drools controller REST API endpoints, such as `/controller/management/servers/{serverTemplateId}` for a specified KIE Server template, are the URIs that you append to the Drools controller REST API base URL to access the corresponding server resource or type of server resource in Drools.

  Example request URL for `/controller/management/servers/{serverTemplateId}` endpoint

  `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/default-kieserver`

Request parameters and request data

  Some Drools controller REST API requests require specific parameters in the request URL path to identify or filter specific resources and to perform specific actions. You can append URL parameters to the endpoint in the format `?<PARAM>=<VALUE>&<PARAM>=<VALUE>`.

  Example DELETE request URL with parameters

  `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/server/new-kieserver-instance?location=http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server`

  HTTP `POST` and `PUT` requests may additionally require a request body or file with data to accompany the request.

  Example PUT request URL and JSON request body data

  `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/new-kieserver`

      {
        "server-id": "new-kieserver",
        "server-name": "new-kieserver",
        "container-specs": [],
        "server-config": {},
        "capabilities": [
          "RULE",
          "PROCESS",
          "PLANNING"
        ]
      }

#### 20.10.1. Sending requests with the Drools controller REST API using a REST client or curl utility

The Drools controller REST API enables you to interact with your KIE Server templates (configurations), KIE Server instances (remote servers), and associated KIE containers (deployment units) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. You can send Drools controller REST API requests using any REST client or curl utility.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and running.

- The Drools controller or headless Drools controller is installed and running.

- You have `rest-all` user role access to the Drools controller if you installed Business Central, or `kie-server` user role access to the headless Drools controller installed separately from Business Central.

Procedure

1. Identify the relevant API endpoint to which you want to send a request, such as `[GET] /controller/management/servers` to retrieve KIE Server templates from the Drools controller.

2. In a REST client or curl utility, enter the following components for a `GET` request to `controller/management/servers`. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the Drools controller user with the `rest-all` role or the headless Drools controller user with the `kie-server` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following header:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the Drools controller REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers`.

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the Drools controller user with the `rest-all` role or the headless Drools controller user with the `kie-server` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following header:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the Drools controller REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers`.

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -X GET "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers"

3. Execute the request and review the Drools controller response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "server-template": [
           {
             "server-id": "default-kieserver",
             "server-name": "default-kieserver",
             "container-specs": [
               {
                 "container-id": "employeerostering_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "container-name": "employeerostering",
                 "server-template-key": {
                   "server-id": "default-kieserver",
                   "server-name": "default-kieserver"
                 },
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "employeerostering",
                   "artifact-id": "employeerostering",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "configuration": {
                   "RULE": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.RuleConfig": {
                       "pollInterval": null,
                       "scannerStatus": "STOPPED"
                     }
                   },
                   "PROCESS": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ProcessConfig": {
                       "runtimeStrategy": "SINGLETON",
                       "kbase": "",
                       "ksession": "",
                       "mergeMode": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS"
                     }
                   }
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED"
               },
               {
                 "container-id": "mortgage-process_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "container-name": "mortgage-process",
                 "server-template-key": {
                   "server-id": "default-kieserver",
                   "server-name": "default-kieserver"
                 },
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "mortgage-process",
                   "artifact-id": "mortgage-process",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "configuration": {
                   "RULE": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.RuleConfig": {
                       "pollInterval": null,
                       "scannerStatus": "STOPPED"
                     }
                   },
                   "PROCESS": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ProcessConfig": {
                       "runtimeStrategy": "PER_PROCESS_INSTANCE",
                       "kbase": "",
                       "ksession": "",
                       "mergeMode": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS"
                     }
                   }
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED"
               }
             ],
             "server-config": {},
             "server-instances": [
               {
                 "server-instance-id": "default-kieserver-instance@localhost:8080",
                 "server-name": "default-kieserver-instance@localhost:8080",
                 "server-template-id": "default-kieserver",
                 "server-url": "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server"
               }
             ],
             "capabilities": [
               "RULE",
               "PROCESS",
               "PLANNING"
             ]
           }
         ]
       }

4. In your REST client or curl utility, send another API request with the following components for a `PUT` request to `/controller/management/servers/{serverTemplateId}` to create a new KIE Server template. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the Drools controller user with the `rest-all` role or the headless Drools controller user with the `kie-server` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following headers:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

     - `Content-Type`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `PUT`.

   - URL: Enter the Drools controller REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/new-kieserver`.

   - Request body: Add a JSON request body with the configurations for the new KIE Server template:

       {
         "server-id": "new-kieserver",
         "server-name": "new-kieserver",
         "container-specs": [],
         "server-config": {},
         "capabilities": [
           "RULE",
           "PROCESS",
           "PLANNING"
         ]
       }

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the Drools controller user with the `rest-all` role or the headless Drools controller user with the `kie-server` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following headers:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

     - `content-type`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `PUT`.

   - URL: Enter the Drools controller REST API base URL and endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/new-kieserver`.

   - `-d`: Add a JSON request body or file (`@file.json`) with the configurations for the new KIE Server template:

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X PUT "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/new-kieserver" -d "{ \"server-id\": \"new-kieserver\", \"server-name\": \"new-kieserver\", \"container-specs\": [], \"server-config\": {}, \"capabilities\": [ \"RULE\", \"PROCESS\", \"PLANNING\" ]}"

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -H "content-type: application/json" -X PUT "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller/management/servers/new-kieserver" -d @my-server-template-configs.json

5. Execute the request and confirm the successful Drools controller response.

   If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your request accordingly.

#### 20.10.2. Sending requests with the Drools controller REST API using the Swagger interface

The Drools controller REST API supports a Swagger web interface that you can use instead of a standalone REST client or curl utility to interact with your KIE Server templates, instances, and associated KIE containers in Drools without using the Business Central user interface.

| By default, the Swagger web interface for the Drools controller is enabled by the `org.kie.workbench.swagger.disabled=false` system property. To disable the Swagger web interface for the Drools controller, set this system property to `true`.

Prerequisites

- The Drools controller is installed and running.

- You have `rest-all` user role access to the Drools controller if you installed Business Central, or `kie-server` user role access to the headless Drools controller installed separately from Business Central.

Procedure

1. In a web browser, navigate to `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTROLLER/docs`, such as `http://localhost:8080/business-central/docs`, and log in with the user name and password of the Drools controller user with the `rest-all` role or the headless Drools controller user with the `kie-server` role.

   | If you are using the Drools controller built in to Business Central, the Swagger page associated with the Drools controller is identified as the "Business Central API" for Business Central REST services. If you are using the headless Drools controller without Business Central, the Swagger page associated with the headless Drools controller is identified as the "Controller API". In both cases, the Drools controller REST API endpoints are the same.

2. In the Swagger page, select the relevant API endpoint to which you want to send a request, such as Controller :: KIE Server templates and KIE containers → [GET] /controller/management/servers to retrieve KIE Server templates from the Drools controller.

3. Click Try it out and provide any optional parameters by which you want to filter results, if applicable.

4. In the Response content type drop-down menu, select the desired format of the server response, such as application/json for JSON format.

5. Click Execute and review the KIE Server response.

   Example server response (JSON):

       {
         "server-template": [
           {
             "server-id": "default-kieserver",
             "server-name": "default-kieserver",
             "container-specs": [
               {
                 "container-id": "employeerostering_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "container-name": "employeerostering",
                 "server-template-key": {
                   "server-id": "default-kieserver",
                   "server-name": "default-kieserver"
                 },
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "employeerostering",
                   "artifact-id": "employeerostering",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "configuration": {
                   "RULE": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.RuleConfig": {
                       "pollInterval": null,
                       "scannerStatus": "STOPPED"
                     }
                   },
                   "PROCESS": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ProcessConfig": {
                       "runtimeStrategy": "SINGLETON",
                       "kbase": "",
                       "ksession": "",
                       "mergeMode": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS"
                     }
                   }
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED"
               },
               {
                 "container-id": "mortgage-process_1.0.0-SNAPSHOT",
                 "container-name": "mortgage-process",
                 "server-template-key": {
                   "server-id": "default-kieserver",
                   "server-name": "default-kieserver"
                 },
                 "release-id": {
                   "group-id": "mortgage-process",
                   "artifact-id": "mortgage-process",
                   "version": "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT"
                 },
                 "configuration": {
                   "RULE": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.RuleConfig": {
                       "pollInterval": null,
                       "scannerStatus": "STOPPED"
                     }
                   },
                   "PROCESS": {
                     "org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ProcessConfig": {
                       "runtimeStrategy": "PER_PROCESS_INSTANCE",
                       "kbase": "",
                       "ksession": "",
                       "mergeMode": "MERGE_COLLECTIONS"
                     }
                   }
                 },
                 "status": "STARTED"
               }
             ],
             "server-config": {},
             "server-instances": [
               {
                 "server-instance-id": "default-kieserver-instance@localhost:8080",
                 "server-name": "default-kieserver-instance@localhost:8080",
                 "server-template-id": "default-kieserver",
                 "server-url": "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server"
               }
             ],
             "capabilities": [
               "RULE",
               "PROCESS",
               "PLANNING"
             ]
           }
         ]
       }

6. In the Swagger page, navigate to the Controller :: KIE Server templates and KIE containers → [GET] /controller/management/servers/{serverTemplateId} endpoint to send another request to create a new KIE Server template. Adjust any request details according to your use case.

7. Click Try it out and enter the following components for the request:

   - serverTemplateId: Enter the ID of the new KIE Server template, such as `new-kieserver`.

   - body: Set the Parameter content type to the desired request body format, such as application/json for JSON format, and add a request body with the configurations for the new KIE Server template:

       {
         "server-id": "new-kieserver",
         "server-name": "new-kieserver",
         "container-specs": [],
         "server-config": {},
         "capabilities": [
           "RULE",
           "PROCESS",
           "PLANNING"
         ]
       }

8. In the Response content type drop-down menu, select the desired format of the server response, such as application/json for JSON format.

9. Click Execute and confirm the successful Drools controller response.

   If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your request accordingly.

#### 20.10.3. Supported Drools controller REST API endpoints

The Drools controller REST API provides endpoints for interacting with KIE Server templates (configurations), KIE Server instances (remote servers), and associated KIE containers (deployment units). The Drools controller REST API base URL is `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTROLLER/rest/`. All requests require HTTP Basic authentication or token-based authentication for the `rest-all` user role if you installed Business Central and you want to use the built-in Drools controller, or the `kie-server` user role if you installed the headless Drools controller separately from Business Central.

For the full list of Drools controller REST API endpoints and descriptions, use one of the following resources:

- Controller REST API on the jBPM Documentation page (static)

- Swagger UI for the Drools controller REST API at `http://SERVER:PORT/CONTROLLER/docs` (dynamic, requires running Drools controller)

  | By default, the Swagger web interface for the Drools controller is enabled by the `org.kie.workbench.swagger.disabled=false` system property. To disable the Swagger web interface for the Drools controller, set this system property to `true`. If you are using the Drools controller built in to Business Central, the Swagger page associated with the Drools controller is identified as the "Business Central API" for Business Central REST services. If you are using the headless Drools controller without Business Central, the Swagger page associated with the headless Drools controller is identified as the "Controller API". In both cases, the Drools controller REST API endpoints are the same.

### 20.11. Drools controller Java client API for KIE Server templates and instances

Drools provides a Drools controller Java client API that enables you to connect to the Drools controller using REST or WebSocket protocol from your Java client application. You can use the Drools controller Java client API as an alternative to the Drools controller REST API to interact with your KIE Server templates (configurations), KIE Server instances (remote servers), and associated KIE containers (deployment units) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface. This API support enables you to maintain your Drools servers and resources more efficiently and optimize your integration and development with Drools.

With the Drools controller Java client API, you can perform the following actions also supported by the Drools controller REST API:

- Retrieve information about KIE Server templates, instances, and associated KIE containers

- Update, start, or stop KIE containers associated with KIE Server templates and instances

- Create, update, or delete KIE Server templates

- Create, update, or delete KIE Server instances

Drools controller Java client API requests require the following components:

Authentication

  The Drools controller Java client API requires HTTP Basic authentication for the following user roles, depending on controller type:

  - `rest-all` user role if you installed Business Central and you want to use the built-in Drools controller

  - `kie-server` user role if you installed the headless Drools controller separately from Business Central

  To view configured user roles for your Drools distribution, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/application-roles.properties` and `~/application-users.properties`.

  To add a user with the `kie-server` role or the `rest-all` role or both, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/bin` and run the following command with the role or roles specified:

      $ ./add-user.sh -a --user <USERNAME> --password <PASSWORD> --role kie-server,rest-all

  To configure the `kie-server` or `rest-all` user with Drools controller access, navigate to `~/$SERVER_HOME/standalone/configuration/standalone-full.xml`, uncomment the `org.kie.server` properties (if applicable), and add the controller user login credentials and controller location (if needed):

      <property name="org.kie.server.location" value="http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/server"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller" value="http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller.user" value="baAdmin"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.controller.pwd" value="password@1"/>
      <property name="org.kie.server.id" value="default-kieserver"/>

  For more information about user roles and Drools installation options, see Installing the KIE Server.

Project dependencies

  The Drools controller Java client API requires the following dependencies on the relevant classpath of your Java project:

      <!-- For remote execution on controller -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
        <artifactId>kie-server-controller-client</artifactId>
        <version>${drools.version}</version>
      </dependency>

      <!-- For REST client -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>org.jboss.resteasy</groupId>
        <artifactId>resteasy-client</artifactId>
        <version>${resteasy.version}</version>
      </dependency>

      <!-- For WebSocket client -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>io.undertow</groupId>
        <artifactId>undertow-websockets-jsr</artifactId>
        <version>${undertow.version}</version>
      </dependency>

      <!-- For debug logging (optional) -->
      <dependency>
        <groupId>ch.qos.logback</groupId>
        <artifactId>logback-classic</artifactId>
        <version>${logback.version}</version>
      </dependency>

  The `<version>` for Drools dependencies is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

Client request configuration

  All Java client requests with the Drools controller Java client API must define at least the following controller communication components:

  - Credentials of the `rest-all` user if you installed Business Central, or the `kie-server` user if you installed the headless Drools controller separately from Business Central

  - Drools controller location for REST or WebSocket protocol:

    - Example REST URL: `http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller`

    - Example WebSocket URL: `ws://localhost:8080/headless-controller/websocket/controller`

  - Marshalling format for API requests and responses (JSON or JAXB)

  - A `KieServerControllerClient` object, which serves as the entry point for starting the server communication using the Java client API

  - A `KieServerControllerClientFactory` defining REST or WebSocket protocol and user access

  - The Drools controller client service or services used, such as `listServerTemplates`, `getServerTemplate`, or `getServerInstances`

  The following are examples of REST and WebSocket client configurations with these components:

  Client configuration example with REST

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ServerTemplateList;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;

      public class ListServerTemplatesExample {

          private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller";
          private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
          private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

          private static final MarshallingFormat FORMAT = MarshallingFormat.JSON;

          public static void main(String[] args) {
              KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newRestClient(URL,
                                                                                                USER,
                                                                                                PASSWORD);

              final ServerTemplateList serverTemplateList = client.listServerTemplates();
              System.out.println(String.format("Found %s server template(s) at controller url: %s",
                                               serverTemplateList.getServerTemplates().length,
                                               URL));
          }
      }

  Client configuration example with WebSocket

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ServerTemplateList;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;

      public class ListServerTemplatesExample {

          private static final String URL = "ws://localhost:8080/my-controller/websocket/controller";
          private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
          private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

          private static final MarshallingFormat FORMAT = MarshallingFormat.JSON;

          public static void main(String[] args) {
              KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newWebSocketClient(URL,
                                                                                                     USER,
                                                                                                     PASSWORD);

              final ServerTemplateList serverTemplateList = client.listServerTemplates();
              System.out.println(String.format("Found %s server template(s) at controller url: %s",
                                               serverTemplateList.getServerTemplates().length,
                                               URL));
          }
      }

#### 20.11.1. Sending requests with the Drools controller Java client API

The Drools controller Java client API enables you to connect to the Drools controller using REST or WebSocket protocols from your Java client application. You can use the Drools controller Java client API as an alternative to the Drools controller REST API to interact with your KIE Server templates (configurations), KIE Server instances (remote servers), and associated KIE containers (deployment units) in Drools without using the Business Central user interface.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed and running.

- The Drools controller or headless Drools controller is installed and running.

- You have `rest-all` user role access to the Drools controller if you installed Business Central, or `kie-server` user role access to the headless Drools controller installed separately from Business Central.

- You have a Java project with Drools resources.

Procedure

1. In your client application, ensure that the following dependencies have been added to the relevant classpath of your Java project:

       <!-- For remote execution on controller -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-controller-client</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- For REST client -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.jboss.resteasy</groupId>
         <artifactId>resteasy-client</artifactId>
         <version>${resteasy.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- For WebSocket client -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>io.undertow</groupId>
         <artifactId>undertow-websockets-jsr</artifactId>
         <version>${undertow.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <!-- For debug logging (optional) -->
       <dependency>
         <groupId>ch.qos.logback</groupId>
         <artifactId>logback-classic</artifactId>
         <version>${logback.version}</version>
       </dependency>

2. In the `~/kie/server/controller/client` folder of the Java client API in GitHub , identify the relevant Java client implementation for the request you want to send, such as the `RestKieServerControllerClient` implementation to access client services for KIE Server templates and KIE containers in REST protocol.

3. In your client application, create a `.java` class for the API request. The class must contain the necessary imports, the Drools controller location and user credentials, a `KieServerControllerClient` object, and the client method to execute, such as `createServerTemplate` and `createContainer` from the `RestKieServerControllerClient` implementation. Adjust any configuration details according to your use case.

   Creating and interacting with a KIE Server template and KIE containers

       import java.util.Arrays;
       import java.util.HashMap;
       import java.util.Map;

       import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
       import org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerStatus;
       import org.kie.server.api.model.KieScannerStatus;
       import org.kie.server.api.model.ReleaseId;
       import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.*;
       import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
       import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;

       public class RestTemplateContainerExample {

         private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller";
         private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
         private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

           private static KieServerControllerClient client;

           public static void main(String[] args) {
               KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newRestClient(URL,
                                                                                                 USER,
                                                                                                 PASSWORD,
                                                                                                 MarshallingFormat.JSON);
               // Create server template and KIE container, start and stop KIE container, and delete server template
               ServerTemplate serverTemplate = createServerTemplate();
               ContainerSpec container = createContainer(serverTemplate);
               client.startContainer(container);
               client.stopContainer(container);
               client.deleteServerTemplate(serverTemplate.getId());
           }

           // Re-create and configure server template
           protected static ServerTemplate createServerTemplate() {
               ServerTemplate serverTemplate = new ServerTemplate();
               serverTemplate.setId("example-client-id");
               serverTemplate.setName("example-client-name");
               serverTemplate.setCapabilities(Arrays.asList(Capability.PROCESS.name(),
                                                            Capability.RULE.name(),
                                                            Capability.PLANNING.name()));

               client.saveServerTemplate(serverTemplate);

               return serverTemplate;
           }

           // Re-create and configure KIE containers
           protected static ContainerSpec createContainer(ServerTemplate serverTemplate){
               Map<Capability, ContainerConfig> containerConfigMap = new HashMap();

               ProcessConfig processConfig = new ProcessConfig("PER_PROCESS_INSTANCE", "kieBase", "kieSession", "MERGE_COLLECTION");
               containerConfigMap.put(Capability.PROCESS, processConfig);

               RuleConfig ruleConfig = new RuleConfig(500l, KieScannerStatus.SCANNING);
               containerConfigMap.put(Capability.RULE, ruleConfig);

               ReleaseId releaseId = new ReleaseId("org.kie.server.testing", "stateless-session-kjar", "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT");

               ContainerSpec containerSpec = new ContainerSpec("example-container-id", "example-client-name", serverTemplate, releaseId, KieContainerStatus.STOPPED, containerConfigMap);
               client.saveContainerSpec(serverTemplate.getId(), containerSpec);

               return containerSpec;
           }
       }

4. Run the configured `.java` class from your project directory to execute the request, and review the Drools controller response.

   If you enabled debug logging, KIE Server responds with a detailed response according to your configured marshalling format, such as JSON. If you encounter request errors, review the returned error code messages and adjust your Java configurations accordingly.

#### 20.11.2. Supported Drools controller Java clients

The following are some of the Java client services available in the `org.kie.server.controller.client` package of your Drools distribution. You can use these services to interact with related resources in the Drools controller similarly to the Drools controller REST API.

- `KieServerControllerClient`: Used as the entry point for communicating with the Drools controller

- `RestKieServerControllerClient`: Implementation used to interact with KIE Server templates and KIE containers in REST protocol (found in `~/org/kie/server/controller/client/rest`)

- `WebSocketKieServerControllerClient`: Implementation used to interact with KIE Server templates and KIE containers in WebSocket protocol (found in `~/org/kie/server/controller/client/websocket`)

For the full list of available Drools controller Java clients, see the Java client API source in GitHub.

#### 20.11.3. Example requests with the Drools controller Java client API

The following are examples of Drools controller Java client API requests for basic interactions with the Drools controller. For the full list of available Drools controller Java clients, see the Java client API source in GitHub.

Creating and interacting with KIE Server templates and KIE containers

  You can use the `ServerTemplate` and `ContainerSpec` services in the REST or WebSocket Drools controller clients to create, dispose, and update KIE Server templates and KIE containers, and to start and stop KIE containers, as illustrated in this example.

  Example request to create and interact with a KIE Server template and KIE containers

      import java.util.Arrays;
      import java.util.HashMap;
      import java.util.Map;

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.KieContainerStatus;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.KieScannerStatus;
      import org.kie.server.api.model.ReleaseId;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.*;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;

      public class RestTemplateContainerExample {

        private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller";
        private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
        private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

          private static KieServerControllerClient client;

          public static void main(String[] args) {
              KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newRestClient(URL,
                                                                                                USER,
                                                                                                PASSWORD,
                                                                                                MarshallingFormat.JSON);
              // Create server template and KIE container, start and stop KIE container, and delete server template
              ServerTemplate serverTemplate = createServerTemplate();
              ContainerSpec container = createContainer(serverTemplate);
              client.startContainer(container);
              client.stopContainer(container);
              client.deleteServerTemplate(serverTemplate.getId());
          }

          // Re-create and configure server template
          protected static ServerTemplate createServerTemplate() {
              ServerTemplate serverTemplate = new ServerTemplate();
              serverTemplate.setId("example-client-id");
              serverTemplate.setName("example-client-name");
              serverTemplate.setCapabilities(Arrays.asList(Capability.PROCESS.name(),
                                                           Capability.RULE.name(),
                                                           Capability.PLANNING.name()));

              client.saveServerTemplate(serverTemplate);

              return serverTemplate;
          }

          // Re-create and configure KIE containers
          protected static ContainerSpec createContainer(ServerTemplate serverTemplate){
              Map<Capability, ContainerConfig> containerConfigMap = new HashMap();

              ProcessConfig processConfig = new ProcessConfig("PER_PROCESS_INSTANCE", "kieBase", "kieSession", "MERGE_COLLECTION");
              containerConfigMap.put(Capability.PROCESS, processConfig);

              RuleConfig ruleConfig = new RuleConfig(500l, KieScannerStatus.SCANNING);
              containerConfigMap.put(Capability.RULE, ruleConfig);

              ReleaseId releaseId = new ReleaseId("org.kie.server.testing", "stateless-session-kjar", "1.0.0-SNAPSHOT");

              ContainerSpec containerSpec = new ContainerSpec("example-container-id", "example-client-name", serverTemplate, releaseId, KieContainerStatus.STOPPED, containerConfigMap);
              client.saveContainerSpec(serverTemplate.getId(), containerSpec);

              return containerSpec;
          }
      }

Listing KIE Server templates and specifying connection timeout (REST)

  When you use REST protocol for Drools controller Java client API requests, you can provide your own `javax.ws.rs.core.Configuration` specification to modify the underlying REST client API, such as connection timeout.

  Example REST request to return server templates and specify connection timeout

      import java.util.concurrent.TimeUnit;
      import javax.ws.rs.core.Configuration;
      import org.jboss.resteasy.client.jaxrs.ResteasyClientBuilder;

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ServerTemplateList;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;

      public class RESTTimeoutExample {

        private static final String URL = "http://localhost:8080/business-central/rest/controller";
        private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
        private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

        public static void main(String[] args) {

            // Specify connection timeout
            final Configuration configuration =
                    new ResteasyClientBuilder()
                            .establishConnectionTimeout(10,
                                                          TimeUnit.SECONDS)
                            .socketTimeout(60,
                                             TimeUnit.SECONDS)
                              .getConfiguration();
              KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newRestClient(URL,
                                                                                                USER,
                                                                                                PASSWORD,
                                                                                                MarshallingFormat.JSON,
                                                                                                configuration);

              // Retrieve list of server templates
              final ServerTemplateList serverTemplateList = client.listServerTemplates();
              System.out.println(String.format("Found %s server template(s) at controller url: %s",
                                               serverTemplateList.getServerTemplates().length,
                                               URL));
          }
      }

Listing KIE Server templates and specifying event notifications (WebSocket)

  When you use WebSocket protocol for Drools controller Java client API requests, you can enable event notifications based on changes that happen in the particular Drools controller to which the client API is connected. For example, you can receive notifications when KIE Server templates or instances are connected to or updated in the Drools controller.

  Example WebSocket request to return server templates and specify event notifications

      import org.kie.server.api.marshalling.MarshallingFormat;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.events.*;
      import org.kie.server.controller.api.model.spec.ServerTemplateList;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClient;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.KieServerControllerClientFactory;
      import org.kie.server.controller.client.event.EventHandler;

      public class WebSocketEventsExample {

          private static final String URL = "ws://localhost:8080/my-controller/websocket/controller";
          private static final String USER = "baAdmin";
          private static final String PASSWORD = "password@1";

          public static void main(String[] args) {
              KieServerControllerClient client = KieServerControllerClientFactory.newWebSocketClient(URL,
                                                                                                     USER,
                                                                                                     PASSWORD,
                                                                                                     MarshallingFormat.JSON,
                                                                                                     new TestEventHandler());

              // Retrieve list of server templates
              final ServerTemplateList serverTemplateList = client.listServerTemplates();
              System.out.println(String.format("Found %s server template(s) at controller url: %s",
                                               serverTemplateList.getServerTemplates().length,
                                               URL));
              try {
                  Thread.sleep(60 * 1000);
              } catch (Exception e) {
                  e.printStackTrace();
              }
          }

          // Set up event notifications
          static class TestEventHandler implements EventHandler {

              @Override
              public void onServerInstanceConnected(ServerInstanceConnected serverInstanceConnected) {
                  System.out.println("serverInstanceConnected = " + serverInstanceConnected);
              }

              @Override
              public void onServerInstanceDeleted(ServerInstanceDeleted serverInstanceDeleted) {
                  System.out.println("serverInstanceDeleted = " + serverInstanceDeleted);
              }

              @Override
              public void onServerInstanceDisconnected(ServerInstanceDisconnected serverInstanceDisconnected) {
                  System.out.println("serverInstanceDisconnected = " + serverInstanceDisconnected);
              }

              @Override
              public void onServerTemplateDeleted(ServerTemplateDeleted serverTemplateDeleted) {
                  System.out.println("serverTemplateDeleted = " + serverTemplateDeleted);
              }

              @Override
              public void onServerTemplateUpdated(ServerTemplateUpdated serverTemplateUpdated) {
                  System.out.println("serverTemplateUpdated = " + serverTemplateUpdated);
              }

              @Override
              public void onServerInstanceUpdated(ServerInstanceUpdated serverInstanceUpdated) {
                  System.out.println("serverInstanceUpdated = " + serverInstanceUpdated);
              }

              @Override
              public void onContainerSpecUpdated(ContainerSpecUpdated containerSpecUpdated) {
                  System.out.println("onContainerSpecUpdated = " + containerSpecUpdated);
              }
          }
      }

### 20.12. Securing password using key store

KIE server is using for some communication (e.g. REST api) basic authentication with passwords. From the security perspective it is not safe to store such passwords in clear text form on the disc. For this purpose a mechanism was developed to store passwords in a key store and then use it in the application.

#### 20.12.1. Simple usecase

User wants to secure his password for communicating via REST client. He creates new keystore where he will put his password, he will setup sytem variables with the info to the keystore and KIE will automatically load the keystore and will use the password for securing the communication.

#### 20.12.2. Implementation and business logic

Current implementation is using key store if it is defined. If not, the funcionality is falling back to old behavior using config parameters.

#### 20.12.3. System requirements

To use a key store we need to create it first. As JKS is not supporting symetric keys we have to create JCEKS key store. Moreover, password can be stored in a key store only for Java 8 and above. For generating a key store you can use standard tool KeyTool which is part of JDK instalation.

#### 20.12.4. Initialization of a key store

For keystore initialization we recommend to use keytool. Syntax is the following:

    ${JAVA_HOME}/bin/keytool -importpassword -keystore _keystore_url_ -keypass _alias_key_password_ -alias _password_alias_ -storepass _keystore_password_ -storetype JCEKS

- alias - alias name of the entry to process

- keypass - key password

- keystore - keystore name

- storepass - keystore password

- storetype - keystore type

After running this command user will be asked for entering the password which he wants to store.

#### 20.12.5. System parameters for loading key store

- kie.keystore.keyStoreURL - URL to a keystore which should be used

- kie.keystore.keyStorePwd - password to a keystore

- kie.keystore.key.server.alias - alias of the key for REST services where password is stored

- kie.keystore.key.server.pwd - password of an alias for REST services with stored password

- kie.keystore.key.ctrl.alias - alias of the key for default REST Drools controller where password is stored

- kie.keystore.key.ctrl.pwd - password of an alias for default REST Drools controller with stored password

#### 20.12.6. Example

1. create user and password in application server (it has to have kie-server role)

    ${EAP_HOME}/add-user.sh -a -e -u kieserver -p "kiePassword1!" -g kie-server

2. use key tool to create keystore with password in it

    ${JAVA_HOME}/bin/keytool -importpassword -keystore /home/kie/keystores/droolsServer.jceks -keypass keypwd -alias droolsKey -storepass serverpwd -storetype JCEKS

    Enter the password to be stored:
    Re-enter password:

    ${JAVA_HOME}/bin/keytool -importpassword -keystore /home/kie/keystores/droolsServer.jceks -keypass keypwd -alias restKey -storepass serverpwd -storetype JCEKS

    Enter the password to be stored:
    Re-enter password:

3. set following system properties on application server that will let the KIE Server or Drools controller to read password from keystore

        <system-properties>
            <property name="kie.keystore.keyStoreURL" value="file:///home/kie/keystores/droolsServer.jceks"/>
            <property name="kie.keystore.keyStorePwd" value="serverpwd"/>
            <property name="kie.keystore.key.server.alias" value="restKey"/>
            <property name="kie.keystore.key.server.pwd" value="keypwd"/>
            <property name="kie.keystore.key.ctrl.alias" value="droolsKey"/>
            <property name="kie.keystore.key.ctrl.pwd" value="keypwd"/>
        </system-properties>

4. start server to verify configuration

### 20.13. Prometheus metrics monitoring in Drools

Prometheus is an open-source systems monitoring toolkit that you can use with Drools to collect and store metrics related to the execution of business rules, processes, Decision Model and Notation (DMN) models, and other Drools assets. You can access the stored metrics through a REST API call to the KIE Server, through the Prometheus expression browser, or using a data-graphing tool such as Grafana.

You can configure Prometheus metrics monitoring for an on-premise KIE Server instance, for KIE Server on Spring Boot, or for a KIE Server deployment on Red Hat OpenShift Container Platform.

For the list of available metrics that KIE Server exposes with Prometheus, see the KIE Server Prometheus Extension page on GitHub.

#### 20.13.1. Configuring Prometheus metrics monitoring for KIE Server

You can configure your KIE Server instances to use Prometheus to collect and store metrics related to your business asset activity in Drools. For the list of available metrics that KIE Server exposes with Prometheus, see the KIE Server Prometheus Extension page on GitHub.

Prerequisites

- KIE Server is installed.

- You have `kie-server` user role access to KIE Server.

- Prometheus is installed. For information about downloading and using Prometheus, see the Prometheus documentation page.

Procedure

1. In your KIE Server instance, set the `org.kie.prometheus.server.ext.disabled` system property to `false` to enable the Prometheus extension. You can define this property when you start KIE Server or in the `standalone.xml` or `standalone-full.xml` file of Drools distribution.

2. If you are running Drools on Spring Boot, add the following dependencies in the `pom.xml` file of your Maven project and configure the required key in the `application.properties` system property:

   Spring Boot pom.xml dependencies for Prometheus

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-services-prometheus</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.kie.server</groupId>
         <artifactId>kie-server-rest-prometheus</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   Spring Boot application.properties key for Drools and Prometheus

       kieserver.drools.enabled=true
       kieserver.dmn.enabled=true
       kieserver.prometheus.enabled=true

3. In the `prometheus.yaml` file of your Prometheus distribution, add the following settings in the `scrape_configs` section to configure Prometheus to scrape metrics from KIE Server:

   Scrape configurations in prometheus.yaml file

       scrape_configs:
         job_name: 'kie-server'
       metrics_path: /SERVER_PATH/services/rest/metrics
       Basic_auth:
       username: USER_NAME
       password: PASSWORD
       static_configs:
         - targets: ["HOST:PORT"]

   Scrape configurations in prometheus.yaml file for Spring Boot (if applicable)

       scrape_configs:
         job_name: 'kie'
       metrics_path: /rest/metrics
       static_configs:
       - targets: ["HOST:PORT"]

   Replace the values according to your KIE Server location and settings.

4. Start the KIE Server instance.

   After you start the configured KIE Server instance, Prometheus begins collecting metrics and KIE Server publishes the metrics to the REST API endpoint `http://HOST:PORT/SERVER/services/rest/metrics` (or on Spring Boot, to `http://HOST:PORT/rest/metrics`).

5. In a REST client or curl utility, send a REST API request with the following components to verify that KIE Server is publishing the metrics:

   For REST client:

   - Authentication: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - HTTP Headers: Set the following header:

     - `Accept`: `application/json`

   - HTTP method: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and metrics endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/metrics` (or on Spring Boot, `http://localhost:8080/rest/metrics`).

   For curl utility:

   - `-u`: Enter the user name and password of the KIE Server user with the `kie-server` role.

   - `-H`: Set the following header:

     - `accept`: `application/json`

   - `-X`: Set to `GET`.

   - URL: Enter the KIE Server REST API base URL and metrics endpoint, such as `http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/metrics` (or on Spring Boot, `http://localhost:8080/rest/metrics`).

       curl -u 'baAdmin:password@1' -H "accept: application/json" -X GET "http://localhost:8080/kie-server/services/rest/metrics"

   Example server response

       # HELP kie_server_container_started_total Kie Server Started Containers
       # TYPE kie_server_container_started_total counter
       kie_server_container_started_total{container_id="task-assignment-kjar-1.0",} 1.0
       # HELP solvers_running Number of solvers currently running
       # TYPE solvers_running gauge
       solvers_running 0.0
       # HELP dmn_evaluate_decision_nanosecond DMN Evaluation Time
       # TYPE dmn_evaluate_decision_nanosecond histogram
       # HELP solver_duration_seconds Time in seconds it took solver to solve the constraint problem
       # TYPE solver_duration_seconds summary
       solver_duration_seconds_count{solver_id="100tasks-5employees.xml",} 1.0
       solver_duration_seconds_sum{solver_id="100tasks-5employees.xml",} 179.828255925
       solver_duration_seconds_count{solver_id="24tasks-8employees.xml",} 1.0
       solver_duration_seconds_sum{solver_id="24tasks-8employees.xml",} 179.995759653
       # HELP drl_match_fired_nanosecond Drools Firing Time
       # TYPE drl_match_fired_nanosecond histogram
       # HELP dmn_evaluate_failed_count DMN Evaluation Failed
       # TYPE dmn_evaluate_failed_count counter
       # HELP kie_server_start_time Kie Server Start Time
       # TYPE kie_server_start_time gauge
       kie_server_start_time{name="myapp-kieserver",server_id="myapp-kieserver",location="http://myapp-kieserver-demo-monitoring.127.0.0.1.nip.io:80/services/rest/server",version="7.4.0.redhat-20190428",} 1.557221271502E12
       # HELP kie_server_container_running_total Kie Server Running Containers
       # TYPE kie_server_container_running_total gauge
       kie_server_container_running_total{container_id="task-assignment-kjar-1.0",} 1.0
       # HELP solver_score_calculation_speed Number of moves per second for a particular solver solving the constraint problem
       # TYPE solver_score_calculation_speed summary
       solver_score_calculation_speed_count{solver_id="100tasks-5employees.xml",} 1.0
       solver_score_calculation_speed_sum{solver_id="100tasks-5employees.xml",} 6997.0
       solver_score_calculation_speed_count{solver_id="24tasks-8employees.xml",} 1.0
       solver_score_calculation_speed_sum{solver_id="24tasks-8employees.xml",} 19772.0

   If the metrics are not available in KIE Server, review and verify the KIE Server and Prometheus configurations described in this section.

   You can also interact with your collected metrics in the Prometheus expression browser at `http://HOST:PORT/graph`, or integrate your Prometheus data source with a data-graphing tool such as Grafana:

   Figure 339. Prometheus expression browser with KIE Server metrics
   Figure 340. Prometheus expression browser with KIE Server target
   Figure 341. Grafana dashboard with KIE Server metrics for DMN models
   Figure 342. Grafana dashboard with KIE Server metrics for solvers

Additional resources

- Getting Started with Prometheus

- Grafana Support for Prometheus

- Using Prometheus in Grafana

# Drools Examples

Examples to help you learn Drools

## 21. Examples

### 21.1. Example decisions in Drools for an IDE

Drools provides example decisions distributed as Java classes that you can import into your integrated development environment (IDE). You can use these examples to better understand Drools engine capabilities or use them as a reference for the decisions that you define in your own Drools projects.

The following example decision sets are some of the examples available in Drools:

- Hello World example: Demonstrates basic rule execution and use of debug output

- State example: Demonstrates forward chaining and conflict resolution through rule salience and agenda groups

- Fibonacci example: Demonstrates recursion and conflict resolution through rule salience

- Banking example: Demonstrates pattern matching, basic sorting, and calculation

- Pet Store example: Demonstrates rule agenda groups, global variables, callbacks, and GUI integration

- Sudoku example: Demonstrates complex pattern matching, problem solving, callbacks, and GUI integration

- House of Doom example: Demonstrates backward chaining and recursion

| For optimization examples provided with OptaPlanner, see the OptaPlanner User Guide.

### 21.2. Importing and executing Drools example decisions in an IDE

You can import Drools example decisions into your integrated development environment (IDE) and execute them to explore how the rules and code function. You can use these examples to better understand Drools engine capabilities or use them as a reference for the decisions that you define in your own Drools projects.

Prerequisites

- Java 8 or later is installed.

- Maven 3.5.x or later is installed.

- An IDE is installed, such as Eclipse with the JBoss Tools plugin.

Procedure

1. Download and unzip the source from the Drools repository in GitHub.

   For the Conway’s Game of Life example decision, also download and unzip the source from the Drools and jBPM integration repository in GitHub.

2. Open your IDE and select File → Import → Maven → Existing Maven Projects, or the equivalent option for importing a Maven project.

3. Click Browse, navigate to `~/drools-master/drools-examples` (or, for the Conway’s Game of Life example, `~/droolsjbpm-integration-examples`), and import the project.

4. Navigate to the example package that you want to run and find the Java class with the `main` method.

5. Right-click the Java class and select Run As → Java Application to run the example.

   To run all examples through a basic user interface, run the `DroolsExamplesApp.java` class (or, for Conway’s Game of Life, the `DroolsJbpmIntegrationExamplesApp.java` class) in the `org.drools.examples` main class.

   Figure 343. Interface for all examples in drools-examples (DroolsExamplesApp.java)
   Figure 344. Interface for all examples in droolsjbpm-integration-examples (DroolsJbpmIntegrationExamplesApp.java)

### 21.3. Hello World example decisions (basic rules and debugging)

The Hello World example decision set demonstrates how to insert objects into the Drools engine working memory, how to match the objects using rules, and how to configure logging to trace the internal activity of the Drools engine.

The following is an overview of the Hello World example:

- Name: `helloworld`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorld.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates basic rule execution and use of debug output

In the Hello World example, a KIE session is generated to enable rule execution. All rules require a KIE session for execution.

KIE session for rule execution

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get(); (1)
    KieContainer kc = ks.getKieClasspathContainer(); (2)
    KieSession ksession = kc.newKieSession("HelloWorldKS"); (3)

1 | Obtains the `KieServices` factory. This is the main interface that applications use to interact with the Drools engine.
2 | Creates a `KieContainer` from the project class path. This detects a /META-INF/kmodule.xml file from which it configures and instantiates a `KieContainer` with a `KieModule`.
3 | Creates a `KieSession` based on the `"HelloWorldKS"` KIE session configuration defined in the /META-INF/kmodule.xml file.

| For more information about Drools project packaging, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

Drools has an event model that exposes internal engine activity. Two default debug listeners, `DebugAgendaEventListener` and `DebugWorkingMemoryEventListener`, print debug event information to the `System.err` output. The `KieRuntimeLogger` provides execution auditing, the result of which you can view in a graphical viewer.

Debug listeners and audit loggers

    // Set up listeners.
    ksession.addEventListener( new DebugAgendaEventListener() );
    ksession.addEventListener( new DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener() );

    // Set up a file-based audit logger.
    KieRuntimeLogger logger = KieServices.get().getLoggers().newFileLogger( ksession, "./target/helloworld" );

    // Set up a ThreadedFileLogger so that the audit view reflects events while debugging.
    KieRuntimeLogger logger = ks.getLoggers().newThreadedFileLogger( ksession, "./target/helloworld", 1000 );

The logger is a specialized implementation built on the `Agenda` and `RuleRuntime` listeners. When the Drools engine has finished executing, `logger.close()` is called.

The example creates a single `Message` object with the message `"Hello World"`, inserts the status `HELLO` into the `KieSession`, executes rules with `fireAllRules()`.

Data insertion and execution

    // Insert facts into the KIE session.
    final Message message = new Message();
    message.setMessage( "Hello World" );
    message.setStatus( Message.HELLO );
    ksession.insert( message );

    // Fire the rules.
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule execution uses a data model to pass data as inputs and outputs to the `KieSession`. The data model in this example has two fields: the `message`, which is a `String`, and the `status`, which can be `HELLO` or `GOODBYE`.

Data model class

    public static class Message {
        public static final int HELLO   = 0;
        public static final int GOODBYE = 1;

        private String          message;
        private int             status;
        ...
    }

The two rules are located in the file `src/main/resources/org/drools/examples/helloworld/HelloWorld.drl`.

The `when` condition of the `"Hello World"` rule states that the rule is activated for each `Message` object inserted into the KIE session that has the status `Message.HELLO`. Additionally, two variable bindings are created: the variable `message` is bound to the `message` attribute and the variable `m` is bound to the matched `Message` object itself.

The `then` action of the rule is written using the MVEL expression language, as declared by the rule `dialect` attribute. After printing the content of the bound variable `message` to `System.out`, the rule changes the values of the `message` and `status` attributes of the `Message` object bound to `m`. The rule uses the MVEL `modify` statement to apply a block of assignments in one statement and to notify the Drools engine of the changes at the end of the block.

"Hello World" rule

    rule "Hello World"
          dialect "mvel"
      when
        m : Message( status == Message.HELLO, message : message )
      then
        System.out.println( message );
        modify ( m ) { message = "Goodbye cruel world",
                       status = Message.GOODBYE };
    end

The `"Good Bye"` rule, which specifies the `java` dialect, is similar to the `"Hello World"` rule except that it matches `Message` objects that have the status `Message.GOODBYE`.

"Good Bye" rule

    rule "Good Bye"
          dialect "java"
      when
        Message( status == Message.GOODBYE, message : message )
      then
        System.out.println( message );
    end

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample` class as a Java application in your IDE. The rule writes to `System.out`, the debug listener writes to `System.err`, and the audit logger creates a log file in `target/helloworld.log`.

System.out output in the IDE console

    Hello World
    Goodbye cruel world

System.err output in the IDE console

    ==>[ActivationCreated(0): rule=Hello World;
                       tuple=[fid:1:1:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]]
    [ObjectInserted: handle=[fid:1:1:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96];
                     object=org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]
    [BeforeActivationFired: rule=Hello World;
                       tuple=[fid:1:1:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]]
    ==>[ActivationCreated(4): rule=Good Bye;
                       tuple=[fid:1:2:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]]
    [ObjectUpdated: handle=[fid:1:2:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96];
                    old_object=org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96;
                    new_object=org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]
    [AfterActivationFired(0): rule=Hello World]
    [BeforeActivationFired: rule=Good Bye;
                       tuple=[fid:1:2:org.drools.examples.helloworld.HelloWorldExample$Message@17cec96]]
    [AfterActivationFired(4): rule=Good Bye]

To better understand the execution flow of this example, you can load the audit log file from `target/helloworld.log` into your IDE debug view or Audit View, if available (for example, in Window → Show View in some IDEs).

In this example, the Audit view shows that the object is inserted, which creates an activation for the `"Hello World"` rule. The activation is then executed, which updates the `Message` object and causes the `"Good Bye"` rule to activate. Finally, the `"Good Bye"` rule is executed. When you select an event in the Audit View, the origin event, which is the `"Activation created"` event in this example, is highlighted in green.

Figure 345. Hello World example Audit View

### 21.4. State example decisions (forward chaining and conflict resolution)

The State example decision set demonstrates how the Drools engine uses forward chaining and any changes to facts in the working memory to resolve execution conflicts for rules in a sequence. The example focuses on resolving conflicts through salience values or through agenda groups that you can define in rules.

The following is an overview of the State example:

- Name: `state`

- Main classes: `org.drools.examples.state.StateExampleUsingSalience`, `org.drools.examples.state.StateExampleUsingAgendaGroup` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule files: `org.drools.examples.state.*.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates forward chaining and conflict resolution through rule salience and agenda groups

A forward-chaining rule system is a data-driven system that starts with a fact in the working memory of the Drools engine and reacts to changes to that fact. When objects are inserted into working memory, any rule conditions that become true as a result of the change are scheduled for execution by the agenda.

In contrast, a backward-chaining rule system is a goal-driven system that starts with a conclusion that the Drools engine attempts to satisfy, often using recursion. If the system cannot reach the conclusion or goal, it searches for subgoals, which are conclusions that complete part of the current goal. The system continues this process until either the initial conclusion is satisfied or all subgoals are satisfied.

The Drools engine in Drools uses both forward and backward chaining to evaluate rules.

The following diagram illustrates how the Drools engine evaluates rules using forward chaining overall with a backward-chaining segment in the logic flow:

Figure 346. Rule evaluation logic using forward and backward chaining

In the State example, each `State` class has fields for its name and its current state (see the class `org.drools.examples.state.State`). The following states are the two possible states for each object:

- `NOTRUN`

- `FINISHED`

State class

    public class State {
        public static final int NOTRUN   = 0;
        public static final int FINISHED = 1;

        private final PropertyChangeSupport changes =
            new PropertyChangeSupport( this );

        private String name;
        private int    state;

        ... setters and getters go here...
    }

The State example contains two versions of the same example to resolve rule execution conflicts:

- A `StateExampleUsingSalience` version that resolves conflicts by using rule salience

- A `StateExampleUsingAgendaGroups` version that resolves conflicts by using rule agenda groups

Both versions of the state example involve four `State` objects: `A`, `B`, `C`, and `D`. Initially, their states are set to `NOTRUN`, which is the default value for the constructor that the example uses.

#### State example using salience

The `StateExampleUsingSalience` version of the State example uses salience values in rules to resolve rule execution conflicts. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue.

The example inserts each `State` instance into the KIE session and then calls `fireAllRules()`.

Salience State example execution

    final State a = new State( "A" );
    final State b = new State( "B" );
    final State c = new State( "C" );
    final State d = new State( "D" );

    ksession.insert( a );
    ksession.insert( b );
    ksession.insert( c );
    ksession.insert( d );

    ksession.fireAllRules();

    // Dispose KIE session if stateful (not required if stateless).
    ksession.dispose();

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.state.StateExampleUsingSalience` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window:

Salience State example output in the IDE console

    A finished
    B finished
    C finished
    D finished

Four rules are present.

First, the `"Bootstrap"` rule fires, setting `A` to state `FINISHED`, which then causes `B` to change its state to `FINISHED`. Objects `C` and `D` are both dependent on `B`, causing a conflict that is resolved by the salience values.

To better understand the execution flow of this example, you can load the audit log file from `target/state.log` into your IDE debug view or Audit View, if available (for example, in Window → Show View in some IDEs).

In this example, the Audit View shows that the assertion of the object `A` in the state `NOTRUN` activates the `"Bootstrap"` rule, while the assertions of the other objects have no immediate effect.

Figure 347. Salience State example Audit View
Rule "Bootstrap" in salience State example

    rule "Bootstrap"
      when
        a : State(name == "A", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(a.getName() + " finished" );
        a.setState( State.FINISHED );
    end

The execution of the `"Bootstrap"` rule changes the state of `A` to `FINISHED`, which activates rule `"A to B"`.

Rule "A to B" in salience State example

    rule "A to B"
      when
        State(name == "A", state == State.FINISHED )
        b : State(name == "B", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(b.getName() + " finished" );
        b.setState( State.FINISHED );
    end

The execution of rule `"A to B"` changes the state of `B` to `FINISHED`, which activates both rules `"B to C"` and `"B to D"`, placing their activations onto the Drools engine agenda.

Rules "B to C" and "B to D" in salience State example

    rule "B to C"
        salience 10
      when
        State(name == "B", state == State.FINISHED )
        c : State(name == "C", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(c.getName() + " finished" );
        c.setState( State.FINISHED );
    end

    rule "B to D"
      when
        State(name == "B", state == State.FINISHED )
        d : State(name == "D", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(d.getName() + " finished" );
        d.setState( State.FINISHED );
    end

From this point on, both rules may fire and, therefore, the rules are in conflict. The conflict resolution strategy enables the Drools engine agenda to decide which rule to fire. Rule `"B to C"` has the higher salience value (`10` versus the default salience value of `0`), so it fires first, modifying object `C` to state `FINISHED`.

The Audit View in your IDE shows the modification of the `State` object in the rule `"A to B"`, which results in two activations being in conflict.

You can also use the Agenda View in your IDE to investigate the state of the Drools engine agenda. In this example, the Agenda View shows the breakpoint in the rule `"A to B"` and the state of the agenda with the two conflicting rules. Rule `"B to D"` fires last, modifying object `D` to state `FINISHED`.

Figure 348. Salience State example Agenda View

#### State example using agenda groups

The `StateExampleUsingAgendaGroups` version of the State example uses agenda groups in rules to resolve rule execution conflicts. Agenda groups enable you to partition the Drools engine agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. By default, all rules are in the agenda group `MAIN`. You can use the `agenda-group` attribute to specify a different agenda group for the rule.

Initially, a working memory has its focus on the agenda group `MAIN`. Rules in an agenda group only fire when the group receives the focus. You can set the focus either by using the method `setFocus()` or the rule attribute `auto-focus`. The `auto-focus` attribute enables the rule to be given a focus automatically for its agenda group when the rule is matched and activated.

In this example, the `auto-focus` attribute enables rule `"B to C"` to fire before `"B to D"`.

Rule "B to C" in agenda group State example

    rule "B to C"
        agenda-group "B to C"
        auto-focus true
      when
        State(name == "B", state == State.FINISHED )
        c : State(name == "C", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(c.getName() + " finished" );
        c.setState( State.FINISHED );
        kcontext.getKnowledgeRuntime().getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "B to D" ).setFocus();
    end

The rule `"B to C"` calls `setFocus()` on the agenda group `"B to D"`, enabling its active rules to fire, which then enables the rule `"B to D"` to fire.

Rule "B to D" in agenda group State example

    rule "B to D"
        agenda-group "B to D"
      when
        State(name == "B", state == State.FINISHED )
        d : State(name == "D", state == State.NOTRUN )
      then
        System.out.println(d.getName() + " finished" );
        d.setState( State.FINISHED );
    end

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.state.StateExampleUsingAgendaGroups` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window (same as the salience version of the State example):

Agenda group State example output in the IDE console

    A finished
    B finished
    C finished
    D finished

#### Dynamic facts in the State example

Another notable concept in this State example is the use of dynamic facts, based on objects that implement a `PropertyChangeListener` object. In order for the Drools engine to see and react to changes of fact properties, the application must notify the Drools engine that changes occurred. You can configure this communication explicitly in the rules by using the `modify` statement, or implicitly by specifying that the facts implement the `PropertyChangeSupport` interface as defined by the JavaBeans specification.

This example demonstrates how to use the `PropertyChangeSupport` interface to avoid the need for explicit `modify` statements in the rules. To make use of this interface, ensure that your facts implement `PropertyChangeSupport` in the same way that the class `org.drools.example.State` implements it, and then use the following code in the DRL rule file to configure the Drools engine to listen for property changes on those facts:

Declaring a dynamic fact

    declare type State
      @propertyChangeSupport
    end

When you use `PropertyChangeListener` objects, each setter must implement additional code for the notification. For example, the following setter for `state` is in the class `org.drools.examples`:

Setter example with PropertyChangeSupport

    public void setState(final int newState) {
        int oldState = this.state;
        this.state = newState;
        this.changes.firePropertyChange( "state",
                                         oldState,
                                         newState );
    }

### 21.5. Fibonacci example decisions (recursion and conflict resolution)

The Fibonacci example decision set demonstrates how the Drools engine uses recursion to resolve execution conflicts for rules in a sequence. The example focuses on resolving conflicts through salience values that you can define in rules.

The following is an overview of the Fibonacci example:

- Name: `fibonacci`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.fibonacci.FibonacciExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.fibonacci.Fibonacci.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates recursion and conflict resolution through rule salience

The Fibonacci Numbers form a sequence starting with 0 and 1. The next Fibonacci number is obtained by adding the two preceding Fibonacci numbers: 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, 144, 233, 377, 610, 987, 1597, 2584, 4181, 6765, 10946, and so on.

The Fibonacci example uses the single fact class `Fibonacci` with the following two fields:

- `sequence`

- `value`

The `sequence` field indicates the position of the object in the Fibonacci number sequence. The `value` field shows the value of that Fibonacci object for that sequence position, where `-1` indicates a value that still needs to be computed.

Fibonacci class

    public static class Fibonacci {
        private int  sequence;
        private long value;

        public Fibonacci( final int sequence ) {
            this.sequence = sequence;
            this.value = -1;
        }

        ... setters and getters go here...
    }

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.fibonacci.FibonacciExample` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window:

Fibonacci example output in the IDE console

    recurse for 50
    recurse for 49
    recurse for 48
    recurse for 47
    ...
    recurse for 5
    recurse for 4
    recurse for 3
    recurse for 2
    1 == 1
    2 == 1
    3 == 2
    4 == 3
    5 == 5
    6 == 8
    ...
    47 == 2971215073
    48 == 4807526976
    49 == 7778742049
    50 == 12586269025

To achieve this behavior in Java, the example inserts a single `Fibonacci` object with a sequence field of `50`. The example then uses a recursive rule to insert the other 49 `Fibonacci` objects.

Instead of implementing the `PropertyChangeSupport` interface to use dynamic facts, this example uses the MVEL dialect `modify` keyword to enable a block setter action and notify the Drools engine of changes.

Fibonacci example execution

    ksession.insert( new Fibonacci( 50 ) );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

This example uses the following three rules:

- `"Recurse"`

- `"Bootstrap"`

- `"Calculate"`

The rule `"Recurse"` matches each asserted `Fibonacci` object with a value of `-1`, creating and asserting a new `Fibonacci` object with a sequence of one less than the currently matched object. Each time a Fibonacci object is added while the one with a sequence field equal to `1` does not exist, the rule re-matches and fires again. The `not` conditional element is used to stop the rule matching once you have all 50 Fibonacci objects in memory. The rule also has a `salience` value because you need to have all 50 `Fibonacci` objects asserted before you execute the `"Bootstrap"` rule.

Rule "Recurse"

    rule "Recurse"
        salience 10
      when
        f : Fibonacci ( value == -1 )
        not ( Fibonacci ( sequence == 1 ) )
      then
        insert( new Fibonacci( f.sequence - 1 ) );
        System.out.println( "recurse for " + f.sequence );
    end

To better understand the execution flow of this example, you can load the audit log file from `target/fibonacci.log` into your IDE debug view or Audit View, if available (for example, in Window → Show View in some IDEs).

In this example, the Audit View shows the original assertion of the `Fibonacci` object with a `sequence` field of `50`, done from Java code. From there on, the Audit View shows the continual recursion of the rule, where each asserted `Fibonacci` object causes the `"Recurse"` rule to become activated and to fire again.

Figure 349. Rule "Recurse" in Audit View

When a `Fibonacci` object with a `sequence` field of `2` is asserted, the `"Bootstrap"` rule is matched and activated along with the `"Recurse"` rule. Notice the multiple restrictions on field `sequence` that test for equality with `1` or `2`:

Rule "Bootstrap"

    rule "Bootstrap"
      when
        f : Fibonacci( sequence == 1 || == 2, value == -1 ) // multi-restriction
      then
        modify ( f ){ value = 1 };
        System.out.println( f.sequence + " == " + f.value );
    end

You can also use the Agenda View in your IDE to investigate the state of the Drools engine agenda. The `"Bootstrap"` rule does not fire yet because the `"Recurse"` rule has a higher salience value.

Figure 350. Rules "Recurse" and "Bootstrap" in Agenda View 1

When a `Fibonacci` object with a `sequence` of `1` is asserted, the `"Bootstrap"` rule is matched again, causing two activations for this rule. The `"Recurse"` rule does not match and activate because the `not` conditional element stops the rule matching as soon as a `Fibonacci` object with a `sequence` of `1` exists.

Figure 351. Rules "Recurse" and "Bootstrap" in Agenda View 2

The `"Bootstrap"` rule sets the objects with a `sequence` of `1` and `2` to a value of `1`. Now that you have two `Fibonacci` objects with values not equal to `-1`, the `"Calculate"` rule is able to match.

At this point in the example, nearly 50 `Fibonacci` objects exist in the working memory. You need to select a suitable triple to calculate each of their values in turn. If you use three Fibonacci patterns in a rule without field constraints to confine the possible cross products, the result would be 50x49x48 possible combinations, leading to about 125,000 possible rule firings, most of them incorrect.

The `"Calculate"` rule uses field constraints to evaluate the three Fibonacci patterns in the correct order. This technique is called cross-product matching.

The first pattern finds any `Fibonacci` object with a value `!= -1` and binds both the pattern and the field. The second `Fibonacci` object does the same thing, but adds an additional field constraint to ensure that its sequence is greater by one than the `Fibonacci` object bound to `f1`. When this rule fires for the first time, you know that only sequences `1` and `2` have values of `1`, and the two constraints ensure that `f1` references sequence `1` and that `f2` references sequence `2`.

The final pattern finds the `Fibonacci` object with a value equal to `-1` and with a sequence one greater than `f2`.

At this point in the example, three `Fibonacci` objects are correctly selected from the available cross products, and you can calculate the value for the third `Fibonacci` object that is bound to `f3`.

Rule "Calculate"

    rule "Calculate"
      when
        // Bind f1 and s1.
        f1 : Fibonacci( s1 : sequence, value != -1 )
        // Bind f2 and v2, refer to bound variable s1.
        f2 : Fibonacci( sequence == (s1 + 1), v2 : value != -1 )
        // Bind f3 and s3, alternative reference of f2.sequence.
        f3 : Fibonacci( s3 : sequence == (f2.sequence + 1 ), value == -1 )
      then
        // Note the various referencing techniques.
        modify ( f3 ) { value = f1.value + v2 };
        System.out.println( s3 + " == " + f3.value );
    end

The `modify` statement updates the value of the `Fibonacci` object bound to `f3`. This means that you now have another new `Fibonacci` object with a value not equal to `-1`, which allows the `"Calculate"` rule to re-match and calculate the next Fibonacci number.

The debug view or Audit View of your IDE shows how the firing of the last `"Bootstrap"` rule modifies the `Fibonacci` object, enabling the `"Calculate"` rule to match, which then modifies another `Fibonacci` object that enables the `"Calculate"` rule to match again. This process continues until the value is set for all `Fibonacci` objects.

Figure 352. Rules in Audit View

### 21.6. Pricing example decisions (decision tables)

The Pricing example decision set demonstrates how to use a spreadsheet decision table for calculating the retail cost of an insurance policy in tabular format instead of directly in a DRL file.

The following is an overview of the Pricing example:

- Name: `decisiontable`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.decisiontable.PricingRuleDTExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.decisiontable.ExamplePolicyPricing.xls` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates use of spreadsheet decision tables to define rules

Spreadsheet decision tables are XLS or XLSX spreadsheets that contain business rules defined in a tabular format. You can include spreadsheet decision tables with standalone Drools projects or upload them to projects in Business Central. Each row in a decision table is a rule, and each column is a condition, an action, or another rule attribute. After you create and upload your decision tables into your Drools project, the rules you defined are compiled into Drools Rule Language (DRL) rules as with all other rule assets.

The purpose of the Pricing example is to provide a set of business rules to calculate the base price and a discount for a car driver applying for a specific type of insurance policy. The driver’s age and history and the policy type all contribute to calculate the basic premium, and additional rules calculate potential discounts for which the driver might be eligible.

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.decisiontable.PricingRuleDTExample` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window:

    Cheapest possible
    BASE PRICE IS: 120
    DISCOUNT IS: 20

The code to execute the example follows the typical execution pattern: the rules are loaded, the facts are inserted, and a stateless KIE session is created. The difference in this example is that the rules are defined in an `ExamplePolicyPricing.xls` file instead of a DRL file or other source. The spreadsheet file is loaded into the Drools engine using templates and DRL rules.

#### Spreadsheet decision table setup

The `ExamplePolicyPricing.xls` spreadsheet contains two decision tables in the first tab:

- `Base pricing rules`

- `Promotional discount rules`

As the example spreadsheet demonstrates, you can use only the first tab of a spreadsheet to create decision tables, but multiple tables can be within a single tab. Decision tables do not necessarily follow top-down logic, but are more of a means to capture data resulting in rules. The evaluation of the rules is not necessarily in the given order, because all of the normal mechanics of the Drools engine still apply. This is why you can have multiple decision tables in the same tab of a spreadsheet.

The decision tables are executed through the corresponding rule template files `BasePricing.drt` and `PromotionalPricing.drt`. These template files reference the decision tables through their template parameter and directly reference the various headers for the conditions and actions in the decision tables.

BasePricing.drt rule template file

    template header
    age[]
    profile
    priorClaims
    policyType
    base
    reason

    package org.drools.examples.decisiontable;

    template "Pricing bracket"
    age
    policyType
    base

    rule "Pricing bracket_@{row.rowNumber}"
      when
        Driver(age >= @{age0}, age <= @{age1}
            , priorClaims == "@{priorClaims}"
            , locationRiskProfile == "@{profile}"
        )
        policy: Policy(type == "@{policyType}")
      then
        policy.setBasePrice(@{base});
        System.out.println("@{reason}");
    end
    end template

PromotionalPricing.drt rule template file

    template header
    age[]
    priorClaims
    policyType
    discount

    package org.drools.examples.decisiontable;

    template "discounts"
    age
    priorClaims
    policyType
    discount

    rule "Discounts_@{row.rowNumber}"
      when
        Driver(age >= @{age0}, age <= @{age1}, priorClaims == "@{priorClaims}")
        policy: Policy(type == "@{policyType}")
      then
        policy.applyDiscount(@{discount});
    end
    end template

The rules are executed through the `kmodule.xml` reference of the KIE Session `DTableWithTemplateKB`, which specifically mentions the `ExamplePolicyPricing.xls` spreadsheet and is required for successful execution of the rules. This execution method enables you to execute the rules as a standalone unit (as in this example) or to include the rules in a packaged knowledge JAR (KJAR) file, so that the spreadsheet is packaged along with the rules for execution.

The following section of the `kmodule.xml` file is required for the execution of the rules and spreadsheet to work successfully:

        <kbase name="DecisionTableKB" packages="org.drools.examples.decisiontable">
            <ksession name="DecisionTableKS" type="stateless"/>
        </kbase>

        <kbase name="DTableWithTemplateKB" packages="org.drools.examples.decisiontable-template">
            <ruleTemplate dtable="org/drools/examples/decisiontable-template/ExamplePolicyPricingTemplateData.xls"
                          template="org/drools/examples/decisiontable-template/BasePricing.drt"
                          row="3" col="3"/>
            <ruleTemplate dtable="org/drools/examples/decisiontable-template/ExamplePolicyPricingTemplateData.xls"
                          template="org/drools/examples/decisiontable-template/PromotionalPricing.drt"
                          row="18" col="3"/>
            <ksession name="DTableWithTemplateKS"/>
        </kbase>

As an alternative to executing the decision tables using rule template files, you can use the `DecisionTableConfiguration` object and specify an input spreadsheet as the input type, such as `DecisionTableInputType.xls`:

    DecisionTableConfiguration dtableconfiguration =
        KnowledgeBuilderFactory.newDecisionTableConfiguration();
            dtableconfiguration.setInputType( DecisionTableInputType.XLS );

            KnowledgeBuilder kbuilder = KnowledgeBuilderFactory.newKnowledgeBuilder();

            Resource xlsRes = ResourceFactory.newClassPathResource( "ExamplePolicyPricing.xls",
                                                                    getClass() );
            kbuilder.add( xlsRes,
                          ResourceType.DTABLE,
                          dtableconfiguration );

The Pricing example uses two fact types:

- `Driver`

- `Policy`.

The example sets the default values for both facts in their respective Java classes `Driver.java` and `Policy.java`. The `Driver` is 30 years old, has had no prior claims, and currently has a risk profile of `LOW`. The `Policy` that the driver is applying for is `COMPREHENSIVE`.

In any decision table, each row is considered a different rule and each column is a condition or an action. Each row is evaluated in a decision table unless the agenda is cleared upon execution.

Decision table spreadsheets (XLS or XLSX) require two key areas that define rule data:

- A `RuleSet` area

- A `RuleTable` area

The `RuleSet` area of the spreadsheet defines elements that you want to apply globally to all rules in the same package (not only the spreadsheet), such as a rule set name or universal rule attributes. The `RuleTable` area defines the actual rules (rows) and the conditions, actions, and other rule attributes (columns) that constitute that rule table within the specified rule set. A decision table spreadsheet can contain multiple `RuleTable` areas, but only one `RuleSet` area.

Figure 353. Decision table configuration

The `RuleTable` area also defines the objects to which the rule attributes apply, in this case `Driver` and `Policy`, followed by constraints on the objects. For example, the `Driver` object constraint that defines the `Age Bracket` column is `age >= $1, age <= $2`, where the comma-separated range is defined in the table column values, such as `18,24`.

#### Base pricing rules

The `Base pricing rules` decision table in the Pricing example evaluates the age, risk profile, number of claims, and policy type of the driver and produces the base price of the policy based on these conditions.

Figure 354. Base price calculation

The `Driver` attributes are defined in the following table columns:

- `Age Bracket`: The age bracket has a definition for the condition `age >=$1, age <=$2`, which defines the condition boundaries for the driver’s age. This condition column highlights the use of `$1 and $2`, which is comma delimited in the spreadsheet. You can write these values as `18,24` or `18, 24` and both formats work in the execution of the business rules.

- `Location risk profile`: The risk profile is a string that the example program passes always as `LOW` but can be changed to reflect `MED` or `HIGH`.

- `Number of prior claims`: The number of claims is defined as an integer that the condition column must exactly equal to trigger the action. The value is not a range, only exact matches.

The `Policy` of the decision table is used in both the conditions and the actions of the rule and has attributes defined in the following table columns:

- `Policy type applying for`: The policy type is a condition that is passed as a string that defines the type of coverage: `COMPREHENSIVE`, `FIRE_THEFT`, or `THIRD_PARTY`.

- `Base $ AUD`: The `basePrice` is defined as an `ACTION` that sets the price through the constraint `policy.setBasePrice($param);` based on the spreadsheet cells corresponding to this value. When you execute the corresponding DRL rule for this decision table, the `then` portion of the rule executes this action statement on the true conditions matching the facts and sets the base price to the corresponding value.

- `Record Reason`: When the rule successfully executes, this action generates an output message to the `System.out` console reflecting which rule fired. This is later captured in the application and printed.

The example also uses the first column on the left to categorize rules. This column is for annotation only and has no affect on rule execution.

#### Promotional discount rules

The `Promotional discount rules` decision table in the Pricing example evaluates the age, number of prior claims, and policy type of the driver to generate a potential discount on the price of the insurance policy.

Figure 355. Discount calculation

This decision table contains the conditions for the discount for which the driver might be eligible. Similar to the base price calculation, this table evaluates the `Age`, `Number of prior claims` of the driver, and the `Policy type applying for` to determine a `Discount %` rate to be applied. For example, if the driver is 30 years old, has no prior claims, and is applying for a `COMPREHENSIVE` policy, the driver is given a discount of `20` percent.

### 21.7. Pet Store example decisions (agenda groups, global variables, callbacks, and GUI integration)

The Pet Store example decision set demonstrates how to use agenda groups and global variables in rules and how to integrate Drools rules with a graphical user interface (GUI), in this case a Swing-based desktop application. The example also demonstrates how to use callbacks to interact with a running Drools engine to update the GUI based on changes in the working memory at run time.

The following is an overview of the Pet Store example:

- Name: `petstore`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStoreExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStore.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates rule agenda groups, global variables, callbacks, and GUI integration

In the Pet Store example, the sample `PetStoreExample.java` class defines the following principal classes (in addition to several classes to handle Swing events):

- `Petstore` contains the `main()` method.

- `PetStoreUI` is responsible for creating and displaying the Swing-based GUI. This class contains several smaller classes, mainly for responding to various GUI events, such as user mouse clicks.

- `TableModel` holds the table data. This class is essentially a JavaBean that extends the Swing class `AbstractTableModel`.

- `CheckoutCallback` enables the GUI to interact with the rules.

- `Ordershow` keeps the items that you want to buy.

- `Purchase` stores details of the order and the products that you are buying.

- `Product` is a JavaBean containing details of the product available for purchase and its price.

Much of the Java code in this example is either plain JavaBean or Swing based. For more information about Swing components, see the Java tutorial on Creating a GUI with JFC/Swing.

#### Rule execution behavior in the Pet Store example

Unlike other example decision sets where the facts are asserted and fired immediately, the Pet Store example does not execute the rules until more facts are gathered based on user interaction. The example executes rules through a `PetStoreUI` object, created by a constructor, that accepts the `Vector` object `stock` for collecting the products. The example then uses an instance of the `CheckoutCallback` class containing the rule base that was previously loaded.

Pet Store KIE container and fact execution setup

    // KieServices is the factory for all KIE services.
    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();

    // Create a KIE container on the class path.
    KieContainer kc = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();

    // Create the stock.
    Vector<Product> stock = new Vector<Product>();
    stock.add( new Product( "Gold Fish", 5 ) );
    stock.add( new Product( "Fish Tank", 25 ) );
    stock.add( new Product( "Fish Food", 2 ) );

    // A callback is responsible for populating the working memory and for firing all rules.
    PetStoreUI ui = new PetStoreUI( stock,
                                    new CheckoutCallback( kc ) );
    ui.createAndShowGUI();

The Java code that fires the rules is in the `CheckoutCallBack.checkout()` method. This method is triggered when the user clicks Checkout in the UI.

Rule execution from CheckoutCallBack.checkout()

    public String checkout(JFrame frame, List<Product> items) {
        Order order = new Order();

        // Iterate through list and add to cart.
        for ( Product p: items ) {
            order.addItem( new Purchase( order, p ) );
        }

        // Add the JFrame to the ApplicationData to allow for user interaction.

        // From the KIE container, a KIE session is created based on
        // its definition and configuration in the META-INF/kmodule.xml file.
        KieSession ksession = kcontainer.newKieSession("PetStoreKS");

        ksession.setGlobal( "frame", frame );
        ksession.setGlobal( "textArea", this.output );

        ksession.insert( new Product( "Gold Fish", 5 ) );
        ksession.insert( new Product( "Fish Tank", 25 ) );
        ksession.insert( new Product( "Fish Food", 2 ) );

        ksession.insert( new Product( "Fish Food Sample", 0 ) );

        ksession.insert( order );

        // Execute rules.
        ksession.fireAllRules();

        // Return the state of the cart
        return order.toString();
    }

The example code passes two elements into the `CheckoutCallBack.checkout()` method. One element is the handle for the `JFrame` Swing component surrounding the output text frame, found at the bottom of the GUI. The second element is a list of order items, which comes from the `TableModel` that stores the information from the `Table` area at the upper-right section of the GUI.

The `for` loop transforms the list of order items coming from the GUI into the `Order` JavaBean, also contained in the file `PetStoreExample.java`.

In this case, the rule is firing in a stateless KIE session because all of the data is stored in Swing components and is not executed until the user clicks Checkout in the UI. Each time the user clicks Checkout, the content of the list is moved from the Swing `TableModel` into the KIE session working memory and is then executed with the `ksession.fireAllRules()` method.

Within this code, there are nine calls to `KieSession`. The first of these creates a new `KieSession` from the `KieContainer` (the example passed in this `KieContainer` from the `CheckoutCallBack` class in the `main()` method). The next two calls pass in the two objects that hold the global variables in the rules: the Swing text area and the Swing frame used for writing messages. More inserts put information on products into the `KieSession`, as well as the order list. The final call is the standard `fireAllRules()`.

#### Pet Store rule file imports, global variables, and Java functions

The `PetStore.drl` file contains the standard package and import statements to make various Java classes available to the rules. The rule file also includes global variables to be used within the rules, defined as `frame` and `textArea`. The global variables hold references to the Swing components `JFrame` and `JTextArea` components that were previously passed on by the Java code that called the `setGlobal()` method. Unlike standard variables in rules, which expire as soon as the rule has fired, global variables retain their value for the lifetime of the KIE session. This means the contents of these global variables are available for evaluation on all subsequent rules.

PetStore.drl package, imports, and global variables

    package org.drools.examples;

    import org.kie.api.runtime.KieRuntime;
    import org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStoreExample.Order;
    import org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStoreExample.Purchase;
    import org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStoreExample.Product;
    import java.util.ArrayList;
    import javax.swing.JOptionPane;

    import javax.swing.JFrame;

    global JFrame frame
    global javax.swing.JTextArea textArea

The `PetStore.drl` file also contains two functions that the rules in the file use:

PetStore.drl Java functions

    function void doCheckout(JFrame frame, KieRuntime krt) {
            Object[] options = {"Yes",
                                "No"};

            int n = JOptionPane.showOptionDialog(frame,
                                                 "Would you like to checkout?",
                                                 "",
                                                 JOptionPane.YES_NO_OPTION,
                                                 JOptionPane.QUESTION_MESSAGE,
                                                 null,
                                                 options,
                                                 options[0]);

           if (n == 0) {
                krt.getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "checkout" ).setFocus();
           }
    }

    function boolean requireTank(JFrame frame, KieRuntime krt, Order order, Product fishTank, int total) {
            Object[] options = {"Yes",
                                "No"};

            int n = JOptionPane.showOptionDialog(frame,
                                                 "Would you like to buy a tank for your " + total + " fish?",
                                                 "Purchase Suggestion",
                                                 JOptionPane.YES_NO_OPTION,
                                                 JOptionPane.QUESTION_MESSAGE,
                                                 null,
                                                 options,
                                                 options[0]);

           System.out.print( "SUGGESTION: Would you like to buy a tank for your "
                               + total + " fish? - " );

           if (n == 0) {
                 Purchase purchase = new Purchase( order, fishTank );
                 krt.insert( purchase );
                 order.addItem( purchase );
                 System.out.println( "Yes" );
           } else {
                System.out.println( "No" );
           }
           return true;
    }

The two functions perform the following actions:

- `doCheckout()` displays a dialog that asks the user if she or he wants to check out. If the user does, the focus is set to the `checkout` agenda group, enabling rules in that group to (potentially) fire.

- `requireTank()` displays a dialog that asks the user if she or he wants to buy a fish tank. If the user does, a new fish tank `Product` is added to the order list in the working memory.

| For this example, all rules and functions are within the same rule file for efficiency. In a production environment, you typically separate the rules and functions in different files or build a static Java method and import the files using the import function, such as `import function my.package.name.hello`.

#### Pet Store rules with agenda groups

Most of the rules in the Pet Store example use agenda groups to control rule execution. Agenda groups allow you to partition the Drools engine agenda to provide more execution control over groups of rules. By default, all rules are in the agenda group `MAIN`. You can use the `agenda-group` attribute to specify a different agenda group for the rule.

Initially, a working memory has its focus on the agenda group `MAIN`. Rules in an agenda group only fire when the group receives the focus. You can set the focus either by using the method `setFocus()` or the rule attribute `auto-focus`. The `auto-focus` attribute enables the rule to be given a focus automatically for its agenda group when the rule is matched and activated.

The Pet Store example uses the following agenda groups for rules:

- `"init"`

- `"evaluate"`

- `"show items"`

- `"checkout"`

For example, the sample rule `"Explode Cart"` uses the `"init"` agenda group to ensure that it has the option to fire and insert shopping cart items into the KIE session working memory:

Rule "Explode Cart"

    // Insert each item in the shopping cart into the working memory.
    rule "Explode Cart"
        agenda-group "init"
        auto-focus true
        salience 10
        dialect "java"
      when
        $order : Order( grossTotal == -1 )
        $item : Purchase() from $order.items
      then
        insert( $item );
        kcontext.getKnowledgeRuntime().getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "show items" ).setFocus();
        kcontext.getKnowledgeRuntime().getAgenda().getAgendaGroup( "evaluate" ).setFocus();
    end

This rule matches against all orders that do not yet have their `grossTotal` calculated. The execution loops for each purchase item in that order.

The rule uses the following features related to its agenda group:

- `agenda-group "init"` defines the name of the agenda group. In this case, only one rule is in the group. However, neither the Java code nor a rule consequence sets the focus to this group, and therefore it relies on the `auto-focus` attribute for its chance to fire.

- `auto-focus true` ensures that this rule, while being the only rule in the agenda group, gets a chance to fire when `fireAllRules()` is called from the Java code.

- `kcontext…​.setFocus()` sets the focus to the `"show items"` and `"evaluate"` agenda groups, enabling their rules to fire. In practice, you loop through all items in the order, insert them into memory, and then fire the other rules after each insertion.

The `"show items"` agenda group contains only one rule, `"Show Items"`. For each purchase in the order currently in the KIE session working memory, the rule logs details to the text area at the bottom of the GUI, based on the `textArea` variable defined in the rule file.

Rule "Show Items"

    rule "Show Items"
        agenda-group "show items"
        dialect "mvel"
      when
        $order : Order( )
        $p : Purchase( order == $order )
      then
       textArea.append( $p.product + "\n");
    end

The `"evaluate"` agenda group also gains focus from the `"Explode Cart"` rule. This agenda group contains two rules, `"Free Fish Food Sample"` and `"Suggest Tank"`, which are executed in that order.

Rule "Free Fish Food Sample"

    // Free fish food sample when users buy a goldfish if they did not already buy
    // fish food and do not already have a fish food sample.
    rule "Free Fish Food Sample"
        agenda-group "evaluate" (1)
        dialect "mvel"
      when
        $order : Order()
        not ( $p : Product( name == "Fish Food") && Purchase( product == $p ) ) (2)
        not ( $p : Product( name == "Fish Food Sample") && Purchase( product == $p ) ) (3)
        exists ( $p : Product( name == "Gold Fish") && Purchase( product == $p ) ) (4)
        $fishFoodSample : Product( name == "Fish Food Sample" );
      then
        System.out.println( "Adding free Fish Food Sample to cart" );
        purchase = new Purchase($order, $fishFoodSample);
        insert( purchase );
        $order.addItem( purchase );
    end

The rule `"Free Fish Food Sample"` fires only if all of the following conditions are true:

1 | The agenda group `"evaluate"` is being evaluated in the rules execution.
2 | User does not already have fish food.
3 | User does not already have a free fish food sample.
4 | User has a goldfish in the order.

If the order facts meet all of these requirements, then a new product is created (Fish Food Sample) and is added to the order in working memory.

Rule "Suggest Tank"

    // Suggest a fish tank if users buy more than five goldfish and
    // do not already have a tank.
    rule "Suggest Tank"
        agenda-group "evaluate"
        dialect "java"
      when
        $order : Order()
        not ( $p : Product( name == "Fish Tank") && Purchase( product == $p ) ) (1)
        ArrayList( $total : size > 5 ) from collect( Purchase( product.name == "Gold Fish" ) ) (2)
        $fishTank : Product( name == "Fish Tank" )
      then
        requireTank(frame, kcontext.getKieRuntime(), $order, $fishTank, $total);
    end

The rule `"Suggest Tank"` fires only if the following conditions are true:

1 | User does not have a fish tank in the order.
2 | User has more than five fish in the order.

When the rule fires, it calls the `requireTank()` function defined in the rule file. This function displays a dialog that asks the user if she or he wants to buy a fish tank. If the user does, a new fish tank `Product` is added to the order list in the working memory. When the rule calls the `requireTank()` function, the rule passes the `frame` global variable so that the function has a handle for the Swing GUI.

The `"do checkout"` rule in the Pet Store example has no agenda group and no `when` conditions, so the rule is always executed and considered part of the default `MAIN` agenda group.

Rule "do checkout"

    rule "do checkout"
        dialect "java"
      when
      then
        doCheckout(frame, kcontext.getKieRuntime());
    end

When the rule fires, it calls the `doCheckout()` function defined in the rule file. This function displays a dialog that asks the user if she or he wants to check out. If the user does, the focus is set to the `checkout` agenda group, enabling rules in that group to (potentially) fire. When the rule calls the `doCheckout()` function, the rule passes the `frame` global variable so that the function has a handle for the Swing GUI.

| This example also demonstrates a troubleshooting technique if results are not executing as you expect: You can remove the conditions from the `when` statement of a rule and test the action in the `then` statement to verify that the action is performed correctly.

The `"checkout"` agenda group contains three rules for processing the order checkout and applying any discounts: `"Gross Total"`, `"Apply 5% Discount"`, and `"Apply 10% Discount"`.

Rules "Gross Total", "Apply 5% Discount", and "Apply 10% Discount"

    rule "Gross Total"
        agenda-group "checkout"
        dialect "mvel"
      when
        $order : Order( grossTotal == -1)
        Number( total : doubleValue ) from accumulate( Purchase( $price : product.price ),
                                                                  sum( $price ) )
      then
        modify( $order ) { grossTotal = total }
        textArea.append( "\ngross total=" + total + "\n" );
    end

    rule "Apply 5% Discount"
        agenda-group "checkout"
        dialect "mvel"
      when
        $order : Order( grossTotal >= 10 && < 20 )
      then
        $order.discountedTotal = $order.grossTotal * 0.95;
        textArea.append( "discountedTotal total=" + $order.discountedTotal + "\n" );
    end

    rule "Apply 10% Discount"
        agenda-group "checkout"
        dialect "mvel"
      when
        $order : Order( grossTotal >= 20 )
      then
        $order.discountedTotal = $order.grossTotal * 0.90;
        textArea.append( "discountedTotal total=" + $order.discountedTotal + "\n" );
    end

If the user has not already calculated the gross total, the `Gross Total` accumulates the product prices into a total, puts this total into the KIE session, and displays it through the Swing `JTextArea` using the `textArea` global variable.

If the gross total is between `10` and `20` (currency units), the `"Apply 5% Discount"` rule calculates the discounted total, adds it to the KIE session, and displays it in the text area.

If the gross total is not less than `20`, the `"Apply 10% Discount"` rule calculates the discounted total, adds it to the KIE session, and displays it in the text area.

#### Pet Store example execution

Similar to other Drools decision examples, you execute the Pet Store example by running the `org.drools.examples.petstore.PetStoreExample` class as a Java application in your IDE.

When you execute the Pet Store example, the `Pet Store Demo` GUI window appears. This window displays a list of available products (upper left), an empty list of selected products (upper right), Checkout and Reset buttons (middle), and an empty system messages area (bottom).

Figure 356. Pet Store example GUI after launch

The following events occurred in this example to establish this execution behavior:

1. The `main()` method has run and loaded the rule base but has not yet fired the rules. So far, this is the only code in connection with rules that has been run.

2. A new `PetStoreUI` object has been created and given a handle for the rule base, for later use.

3. Various Swing components have performed their functions, and the initial UI screen is displayed and waits for user input.

You can click on various products from the list to explore the UI setup:

Figure 357. Explore the Pet Store example GUI

No rules code has been fired yet. The UI uses Swing code to detect user mouse clicks and add selected products to the `TableModel` object for display in the upper-right corner of the UI. This example illustrates the Model-View-Controller design pattern.

When you click Checkout, the rules are then fired in the following way:

1. Method `CheckOutCallBack.checkout()` is called (eventually) by the Swing class waiting for the click on Checkout. This inserts the data from the `TableModel` object (upper-right corner of the UI) into the KIE session working memory. The method then fires the rules.

2. The `"Explode Cart"` rule is the first to fire, with the `auto-focus` attribute set to `true`. The rule loops through all of the products in the cart, ensures that the products are in the working memory, and then gives the `"show Items"` and `"evaluate"` agenda groups the option to fire. The rules in these groups add the contents of the cart to the text area (bottom of the UI), evaluate if you are eligible for free fish food, and determine whether to ask if you want to buy a fish tank.

   Figure 358. Fish tank qualification

3. The `"do checkout"` rule is the next to fire because no other agenda group currently has focus and because it is part of the default `MAIN` agenda group. This rule always calls the `doCheckout()` function, which asks you if you want to check out.

4. The `doCheckout()` function sets the focus to the `"checkout"` agenda group, giving the rules in that group the option to fire.

5. The rules in the `"checkout"` agenda group display the contents of the cart and apply the appropriate discount.

6. Swing then waits for user input to either select more products (and cause the rules to fire again) or to close the UI.

   Figure 359. Pet Store example GUI after all rules have fired

You can add more `System.out` calls to demonstrate this flow of events in your IDE console:

System.out output in the IDE console

    Adding free Fish Food Sample to cart
    SUGGESTION: Would you like to buy a tank for your 6 fish? - Yes

### 21.8. Honest Politician example decisions (truth maintenance and salience)

The Honest Politician example decision set demonstrates the concept of truth maintenance with logical insertions and the use of salience in rules.

The following is an overview of the Honest Politician example:

- Name: `honestpolitician`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.honestpolitician.HonestPoliticianExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.honestpolitician.HonestPolitician.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates the concept of truth maintenance based on the logical insertion of facts and the use of salience in rules

The basic premise of the Honest Politician example is that an object can only exist while a statement is true. A rule consequence can logically insert an object with the `insertLogical()` method. This means the object remains in the KIE session working memory as long as the rule that logically inserted it remains true. When the rule is no longer true, the object is automatically retracted.

In this example, rule execution causes a group of politicians to change from being honest to being dishonest as a result of a corrupt corporation. As each politician is evaluated, they start out with their honesty attribute being set to `true`, but a rule fires that makes the politicians no longer honest. As they switch their state from being honest to dishonest, they are then removed from the working memory. The rule salience notifies the Drools engine how to prioritize any rules that have a salience defined for them, otherwise utilizing the default salience value of `0`. Rules with a higher salience value are given higher priority when ordered in the activation queue.

#### Politician and Hope classes

The sample class `Politician` in the example is configured for an honest politician. The `Politician` class is made up of a String item `name` and a Boolean item `honest`:

Politician class

    public class Politician {
        private String name;
        private boolean honest;
        ...
    }

The `Hope` class determines if a `Hope` object exists. This class has no meaningful members, but is present in the working memory as long as society has hope.

Hope class

    public class Hope {

        public Hope() {

        }
      }

#### Rule definitions for politician honesty

In the Honest Politician example, when at least one honest politician exists in the working memory, the `"We have an honest Politician"` rule logically inserts a new `Hope` object. As soon as all politicians become dishonest, the `Hope` object is automatically retracted. This rule has a `salience` attribute with a value of `10` to ensure that it fires before any other rule, because at that stage the `"Hope is Dead"` rule is true.

Rule "We have an honest politician"

    rule "We have an honest Politician"
        salience 10
      when
        exists( Politician( honest == true ) )
      then
        insertLogical( new Hope() );
    end

As soon as a `Hope` object exists, the `"Hope Lives"` rule matches and fires. This rule also has a `salience` value of `10` so that it takes priority over the `"Corrupt the Honest"` rule.

Rule "Hope Lives"

    rule "Hope Lives"
        salience 10
      when
        exists( Hope() )
      then
        System.out.println("Hurrah!!! Democracy Lives");
    end

Initially, four honest politicians exist so this rule has four activations, all in conflict. Each rule fires in turn, corrupting each politician so that they are no longer honest. When all four politicians have been corrupted, no politicians have the property `honest == true`. The rule `"We have an honest Politician"` is no longer true and the object it logically inserted (due to the last execution of `new Hope()`) is automatically retracted.

Rule "Corrupt the Honest"

    rule "Corrupt the Honest"
      when
        politician : Politician( honest == true )
        exists( Hope() )
      then
        System.out.println( "I'm an evil corporation and I have corrupted " + politician.getName() );
        modify ( politician ) { honest = false };
    end

With the `Hope` object automatically retracted through the truth maintenance system, the conditional element `not` applied to `Hope` is no longer true so that the `"Hope is Dead"` rule matches and fires.

Rule "Hope is Dead"

    rule "Hope is Dead"
      when
        not( Hope() )
      then
        System.out.println( "We are all Doomed!!! Democracy is Dead" );
    end

#### Example execution and audit trail

In the `HonestPoliticianExample.java` class, the four politicians with the honest state set to `true` are inserted for evaluation against the defined business rules:

HonestPoliticianExample.java class execution

    public static void execute( KieContainer kc ) {
            KieSession ksession = kc.newKieSession("HonestPoliticianKS");

            final Politician p1 = new Politician( "President of Umpa Lumpa", true );
            final Politician p2 = new Politician( "Prime Minster of Cheeseland", true );
            final Politician p3 = new Politician( "Tsar of Pringapopaloo", true );
            final Politician p4 = new Politician( "Omnipotence Om", true );

            ksession.insert( p1 );
            ksession.insert( p2 );
            ksession.insert( p3 );
            ksession.insert( p4 );

            ksession.fireAllRules();

            ksession.dispose();
        }

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.honestpolitician.HonestPoliticianExample` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window:

Execution output in the IDE console

    Hurrah!!! Democracy Lives
    I'm an evil corporation and I have corrupted President of Umpa Lumpa
    I'm an evil corporation and I have corrupted Prime Minster of Cheeseland
    I'm an evil corporation and I have corrupted Tsar of Pringapopaloo
    I'm an evil corporation and I have corrupted Omnipotence Om
    We are all Doomed!!! Democracy is Dead

The output shows that, while there is at least one honest politician, democracy lives. However, as each politician is corrupted by some corporation, all politicians become dishonest, and democracy is dead.

To better understand the execution flow of this example, you can modify the `HonestPoliticianExample.java` class to include a `RuleRuntime` listener and an audit logger to view execution details:

HonestPoliticianExample.java class with an audit logger

    package org.drools.examples.honestpolitician;

    import org.kie.api.KieServices;
    import org.kie.api.event.rule.DebugAgendaEventListener; (1)
    import org.kie.api.event.rule.DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener;
    import org.kie.api.runtime.KieContainer;
    import org.kie.api.runtime.KieSession;

    public class HonestPoliticianExample {

        /**
         * @param args
         */
        public static void main(final String[] args) {
        	KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get(); (2)
        	//ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
            KieContainer kc = KieServices.Factory.get().getKieClasspathContainer();
            System.out.println(kc.verify().getMessages().toString());
            //execute( kc );
            execute( ks, kc); (3)
        }

        public static void execute( KieServices ks, KieContainer kc ) { (4)
            KieSession ksession = kc.newKieSession("HonestPoliticianKS");

            final Politician p1 = new Politician( "President of Umpa Lumpa", true );
            final Politician p2 = new Politician( "Prime Minster of Cheeseland", true );
            final Politician p3 = new Politician( "Tsar of Pringapopaloo", true );
            final Politician p4 = new Politician( "Omnipotence Om", true );

            ksession.insert( p1 );
            ksession.insert( p2 );
            ksession.insert( p3 );
            ksession.insert( p4 );

            // The application can also setup listeners (5)
            ksession.addEventListener( new DebugAgendaEventListener() );
            ksession.addEventListener( new DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener() );

            // Set up a file-based audit logger.
            ks.getLoggers().newFileLogger( ksession, "./target/honestpolitician" ); (6)

            ksession.fireAllRules();

            ksession.dispose();
        }

    }

1 | Adds to your imports the packages that handle the `DebugAgendaEventListener` and `DebugRuleRuntimeEventListener`
2 | Creates a `KieServices Factory` and a `ks` element to produce the logs because this audit log is not available at the `KieContainer` level
3 | Modifies the `execute` method to use both `KieServices` and `KieContainer`
4 | Modifies the `execute` method to pass in `KieServices` in addition to the `KieContainer`
5 | Creates the listeners
6 | Builds the log that can be passed into the debug view or Audit View or your IDE after executing of the rules

When you run the Honest Politician with this modified logging capability, you can load the audit log file from `target/honestpolitician.log` into your IDE debug view or Audit View, if available (for example, in Window → Show View in some IDEs).

In this example, the Audit View shows the flow of executions, insertions, and retractions as defined in the example classes and rules:

Figure 360. Honest Politician example Audit View

When the first politician is inserted, two activations occur. The rule `"We have an honest Politician"` is activated only one time for the first inserted politician because it uses an `exists` conditional element, which matches when at least one politician is inserted. The rule `"Hope is Dead"` is also activated at this stage because the `Hope` object is not yet inserted. The rule `"We have an honest Politician"` fires first because it has a higher `salience` value than the rule `"Hope is Dead"`, and inserts the `Hope` object (highlighted in green). The insertion of the `Hope` object activates the rule `"Hope Lives"` and deactivates the rule `"Hope is Dead"`. The insertion also activates the rule `"Corrupt the Honest"` for each inserted honest politician. The rule `"Hope Lives"` is executed and prints `"Hurrah!!! Democracy Lives"`.

Next, for each politician, the rule `"Corrupt the Honest"` fires, printing `"I’m an evil corporation and I have corrupted X"`, where `X` is the name of the politician, and modifies the politician honesty value to `false`. When the last honest politician is corrupted, `Hope` is automatically retracted by the truth maintenance system (highlighted in blue). The green highlighted area shows the origin of the currently selected blue highlighted area. After the `Hope` fact is retracted, the rule `"Hope is dead"` fires, printing `"We are all Doomed!!! Democracy is Dead"`.

### 21.9. Sudoku example decisions (complex pattern matching, callbacks, and GUI integration)

The Sudoku example decision set, based on the popular number puzzle Sudoku, demonstrates how to use rules in Drools to find a solution in a large potential solution space based on various constraints. This example also shows how to integrate Drools rules into a graphical user interface (GUI), in this case a Swing-based desktop application, and how to use callbacks to interact with a running Drools engine to update the GUI based on changes in the working memory at run time.

The following is an overview of the Sudoku example:

- Name: `sudoku`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.sudoku.SudokuExample` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule files: `org.drools.examples.sudoku.*.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates complex pattern matching, problem solving, callbacks, and GUI integration

Sudoku is a logic-based number placement puzzle. The objective is to fill a 9x9 grid so that each column, each row, and each of the nine 3x3 zones contains the digits from 1 to 9 only one time. The puzzle setter provides a partially completed grid and the puzzle solver’s task is to complete the grid with these constraints.

The general strategy to solve the problem is to ensure that when you insert a new number, it must be unique in its particular 3x3 zone, row, and column. This Sudoku example decision set uses Drools rules to solve Sudoku puzzles from a range of difficulty levels, and to attempt to resolve flawed puzzles that contain invalid entries.

#### Sudoku example execution and interaction

Similar to other Drools decision examples, you execute the Sudoku example by running the `org.drools.examples.sudoku.SudokuExample` class as a Java application in your IDE.

When you execute the Sudoku example, the `Drools Sudoku Example` GUI window appears. This window contains an empty grid, but the program comes with various grids stored internally that you can load and solve.

Click File → Samples → Simple to load one of the examples. Notice that all buttons are disabled until a grid is loaded.

Figure 361. Sudoku example GUI after launch

When you load the Simple example, the grid is filled according to the puzzle’s initial state.

Figure 362. Sudoku example GUI after loading Simple sample

Choose from the following options:

- Click Solve to fire the rules defined in the Sudoku example that fill out the remaining values and that make the buttons inactive again.

  Figure 363. Simple sample solved

- Click Step to see the next digit found by the rule set. The console window in your IDE displays detailed information about the rules that are executing to solve the step.

  Step execution output in the IDE console

      single 8 at [0,1]
      column elimination due to [1,2]: remove 9 from [4,2]
      hidden single 9 at [1,2]
      row elimination due to [2,8]: remove 7 from [2,4]
      remove 6 from [3,8] due to naked pair at [3,2] and [3,7]
      hidden pair in row at [4,6] and [4,4]

- Click Dump to see the state of the grid, with cells showing either the established value or the remaining possibilities.

  Dump execution output in the IDE console

              Col: 0     Col: 1     Col: 2     Col: 3     Col: 4     Col: 5     Col: 6     Col: 7     Col: 8
      Row 0:  123456789  --- 5 ---  --- 6 ---  --- 8 ---  123456789  --- 1 ---  --- 9 ---  --- 4 ---  123456789
      Row 1:  --- 9 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 6 ---  123456789  --- 5 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 3 ---
      Row 2:  --- 7 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 4 ---  --- 9 ---  --- 3 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 8 ---
      Row 3:  --- 8 ---  --- 9 ---  --- 7 ---  123456789  --- 4 ---  123456789  --- 6 ---  --- 3 ---  --- 5 ---
      Row 4:  123456789  123456789  --- 3 ---  --- 9 ---  123456789  --- 6 ---  --- 8 ---  123456789  123456789
      Row 5:  --- 4 ---  --- 6 ---  --- 5 ---  123456789  --- 8 ---  123456789  --- 2 ---  --- 9 ---  --- 1 ---
      Row 6:  --- 5 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 2 ---  --- 6 ---  --- 9 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 7 ---
      Row 7:  --- 6 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 5 ---  123456789  --- 4 ---  123456789  123456789  --- 9 ---
      Row 8:  123456789  --- 4 ---  --- 9 ---  --- 7 ---  123456789  --- 8 ---  --- 3 ---  --- 5 ---  123456789

The Sudoku example includes a deliberately broken sample file that the rules defined in the example can resolve.

Click File → Samples → !DELIBERATELY BROKEN! to load the broken sample. The grid starts with some issues, for example, the value `5` appears two times in the first row, which is not allowed.

Figure 364. Broken Sudoku example initial state

Click Solve to apply the solving rules to this invalid grid. The associated solving rules in the Sudoku example detect the issues in the sample and attempts to solve the puzzle as far as possible. This process does not complete and leaves some cells empty.

The solving rule activity is displayed in the IDE console window:

Detected issues in the broken sample

    cell [0,8]: 5 has a duplicate in row 0
    cell [0,0]: 5 has a duplicate in row 0
    cell [6,0]: 8 has a duplicate in col 0
    cell [4,0]: 8 has a duplicate in col 0
    Validation complete.

Figure 365. Broken sample solution attempt

The sample Sudoku files labeled Hard are more complex and the solving rules might not be able to solve them. The unsuccessful solution attempt is displayed in the IDE console window:

Hard sample unresolved

    Validation complete.
    ...
    Sorry - can't solve this grid.

The rules that work to solve the broken sample implement standard solving techniques based on the sets of values that are still candidates for a cell. For example, if a set contains a single value, then this is the value for the cell. For a single occurrence of a value in one of the groups of nine cells, the rules insert a fact of type `Setting` with the solution value for some specific cell. This fact causes the elimination of this value from all other cells in any of the groups the cell belongs to and the value is retracted.

Other rules in the example reduce the permissible values for some cells. The rules `"naked pair"`, `"hidden pair in row"`, `"hidden pair in column"`, and `"hidden pair in square"` eliminate possibilities but do not establish solutions. The rules `"X-wings in rows"`, "`X-wings in columns"`, `"intersection removal row"`, and `"intersection removal column"` perform more sophisticated eliminations.

#### Sudoku example classes

The package `org.drools.examples.sudoku.swing` contains the following core set of classes that implement a framework for Sudoku puzzles:

- The `SudokuGridModel` class defines an interface that is implemented to store a Sudoku puzzle as a 9x9 grid of `Cell` objects.

- The `SudokuGridView` class is a Swing component that can visualize any implementation of the `SudokuGridModel` class.

- The `SudokuGridEvent` and `SudokuGridListener` classes communicate state changes between the model and the view. Events are fired when a cell value is resolved or changed.

- The `SudokuGridSamples` class provides partially filled Sudoku puzzles for demonstration purposes.

| This package does not have any dependencies on Drools libraries.

The package `org.drools.examples.sudoku` contains the following core set of classes that implement the elementary `Cell` object and its various aggregations:

- The `CellFile` class, with subtypes `CellRow`, `CellCol`, and `CellSqr`, all of which are subtypes of the `CellGroup` class.

- The `Cell` and `CellGroup` subclasses of `SetOfNine`, which provides a property `free` with the type `Set<Integer>`. For a `Cell` class, the set represents the individual candidate set. For a `CellGroup` class, the set is the union of all candidate sets of its cells (the set of digits that still need to be allocated).

  In the Sudoku example are 81 `Cell` and 27 `CellGroup` objects and a linkage provided by the `Cell` properties `cellRow`, `cellCol`, and `cellSqr`, and by the `CellGroup` property `cells` (a list of `Cell` objects). With these components, you can write rules that detect the specific situations that permit the allocation of a value to a cell or the elimination of a value from some candidate set.

- The `Setting` class is used to trigger the operations that accompany the allocation of a value. The presence of a `Setting` fact is used in all rules that detect a new situation in order to avoid reactions to inconsistent intermediary states.

- The `Stepping` class is used in a low priority rule to execute an emergency halt when a `"Step"` does not terminate regularly. This behavior indicates that the program cannot solve the puzzle.

- The main class `org.drools.examples.sudoku.SudokuExample` implements a Java application combining all of these components.

#### Sudoku validation rules (validate.drl)

The `validate.drl` file in the Sudoku example contains validation rules that detect duplicate numbers in cell groups. They are combined in a `"validate"` agenda group that enables the rules to be explicitly activated after a user loads the puzzle.

The `when` conditions of the three rules `"duplicate in cell …​"` all function in the following ways:

- The first condition in the rule locates a cell with an allocated value.

- The second condition in the rule pulls in any of the three cell groups to which the cell belongs.

- The final condition finds a cell (other than the first one) with the same value as the first cell and in the same row, column, or square, depending on the rule.

Rules "duplicate in cell …​"

    rule "duplicate in cell row"
      when
        $c: Cell( $v: value != null )
        $cr: CellRow( cells contains $c )
        exists Cell( this != $c, value == $v, cellRow == $cr )
      then
        System.out.println( "cell " + $c.toString() + " has a duplicate in row " + $cr.getNumber() );
    end

    rule "duplicate in cell col"
      when
        $c: Cell( $v: value != null )
        $cc: CellCol( cells contains $c )
        exists Cell( this != $c, value == $v, cellCol == $cc )
      then
        System.out.println( "cell " + $c.toString() + " has a duplicate in col " + $cc.getNumber() );
    end

    rule "duplicate in cell sqr"
      when
        $c: Cell( $v: value != null )
        $cs: CellSqr( cells contains $c )
        exists Cell( this != $c, value == $v, cellSqr == $cs )
      then
        System.out.println( "cell " + $c.toString() + " has duplicate in its square of nine." );
    end

The rule `"terminate group"` is the last to fire. This rule prints a message and stops the sequence.

Rule "terminate group"

    rule "terminate group"
        salience -100
      when
      then
        System.out.println( "Validation complete." );
        drools.halt();
    end

#### Sudoku solving rules (sudoku.drl)

The `sudoku.drl` file in the Sudoku example contains three types of rules: one group handles the allocation of a number to a cell, another group detects feasible allocations, and the third group eliminates values from candidate sets.

The rules `"set a value"`, `"eliminate a value from Cell"`, and `"retract setting"` depend on the presence of a `Setting` object. The first rule handles the assignment to the cell and the operations for removing the value from the `free` sets of the three groups of the cell. This group also reduces a counter that, when zero, returns control to the Java application that has called `fireUntilHalt()`.

The purpose of the rule `"eliminate a value from Cell"` is to reduce the candidate lists of all cells that are related to the newly assigned cell. Finally, when all eliminations have been made, the rule `"retract setting"` retracts the triggering `Setting` fact.

Rules "set a value", "eliminate a value from a Cell", and "retract setting"

    // A Setting object is inserted to define the value of a Cell.
    // Rule for updating the cell and all cell groups that contain it
    rule "set a value"
      when
        // A Setting with row and column number, and a value
        $s: Setting( $rn: rowNo, $cn: colNo, $v: value )

        // A matching Cell, with no value set
        $c: Cell( rowNo == $rn, colNo == $cn, value == null,
                  $cr: cellRow, $cc: cellCol, $cs: cellSqr )

        // Count down
        $ctr: Counter( $count: count )
      then
        // Modify the Cell by setting its value.
        modify( $c ){ setValue( $v ) }
        // System.out.println( "set cell " + $c.toString() );
        modify( $cr ){ blockValue( $v ) }
        modify( $cc ){ blockValue( $v ) }
        modify( $cs ){ blockValue( $v ) }
        modify( $ctr ){ setCount( $count - 1 ) }
    end

    // Rule for removing a value from all cells that are siblings
    // in one of the three cell groups
    rule "eliminate a value from Cell"
      when
        // A Setting with row and column number, and a value
        $s: Setting( $rn: rowNo, $cn: colNo, $v: value )

        // The matching Cell, with the value already set
        Cell( rowNo == $rn, colNo == $cn, value == $v, $exCells: exCells )

        // For all Cells that are associated with the updated cell
        $c: Cell( free contains $v ) from $exCells
      then
        // System.out.println( "clear " + $v + " from cell " + $c.posAsString()  );
        // Modify a related Cell by blocking the assigned value.
        modify( $c ){ blockValue( $v ) }
    end

    // Rule for eliminating the Setting fact
    rule "retract setting"
      when
        // A Setting with row and column number, and a value
        $s: Setting( $rn: rowNo, $cn: colNo, $v: value )

        // The matching Cell, with the value already set
        $c: Cell( rowNo == $rn, colNo == $cn, value == $v )

        // This is the negation of the last pattern in the previous rule.
        // Now the Setting fact can be safely retracted.
        not( $x: Cell( free contains $v )
             and
             Cell( this == $c, exCells contains $x ) )
      then
        // System.out.println( "done setting cell " + $c.toString() );
        // Discard the Setter fact.
        delete( $s );
        // Sudoku.sudoku.consistencyCheck();
    end

Two solving rules detect a situation where an allocation of a number to a cell is possible. The rule `"single"` fires for a `Cell` with a candidate set containing a single number. The rule `"hidden single"` fires when no cell exists with a single candidate, but when a cell exists containing a candidate, this candidate is absent from all other cells in one of the three groups to which the cell belongs. Both rules create and insert a `Setting` fact.

Rules "single" and "hidden single"

    // Detect a set of candidate values with cardinality 1 for some Cell.
    // This is the value to be set.
    rule "single"
      when
        // Currently no setting underway
        not Setting()

        // One element in the "free" set
        $c: Cell( $rn: rowNo, $cn: colNo, freeCount == 1 )
      then
        Integer i = $c.getFreeValue();
        if (explain) System.out.println( "single " + i + " at " + $c.posAsString() );
        // Insert another Setter fact.
        insert( new Setting( $rn, $cn, i ) );
    end

    // Detect a set of candidate values with a value that is the only one
    // in one of its groups. This is the value to be set.
    rule "hidden single"
      when
        // Currently no setting underway
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        // Some integer
        $i: Integer()

        // The "free" set contains this number
        $c: Cell( $rn: rowNo, $cn: colNo, freeCount > 1, free contains $i )

        // A cell group contains this cell $c.
        $cg: CellGroup( cells contains $c )
        // No other cell from that group contains $i.
        not ( Cell( this != $c, free contains $i ) from $cg.getCells() )
      then
        if (explain) System.out.println( "hidden single " + $i + " at " + $c.posAsString() );
        // Insert another Setter fact.
        insert( new Setting( $rn, $cn, $i ) );
    end

Rules from the largest group, either individually or in groups of two or three, implement various solving techniques used for solving Sudoku puzzles manually.

The rule `"naked pair"` detects identical candidate sets of size `2` in two cells of a group. These two values may be removed from all other candidate sets of that group.

Rule "naked pair"

    // A "naked pair" is two cells in some cell group with their sets of
    // permissible values being equal with cardinality 2. These two values
    // can be removed from all other candidate lists in the group.
    rule "naked pair"
      when
        // Currently no setting underway
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        // One cell with two candidates
        $c1: Cell( freeCount == 2, $f1: free, $r1: cellRow, $rn1: rowNo, $cn1: colNo, $b1: cellSqr )

        // The containing cell group
        $cg: CellGroup( freeCount > 2, cells contains $c1 )

        // Another cell with two candidates, not the one we already have
        $c2: Cell( this != $c1, free == $f1 /*** , rowNo >= $rn1, colNo >= $cn1 ***/ ) from $cg.cells

        // Get one of the "naked pair".
        Integer( $v: intValue ) from $c1.getFree()

        // Get some other cell with a candidate equal to one from the pair.
        $c3: Cell( this != $c1 && != $c2, freeCount > 1, free contains $v ) from $cg.cells
      then
        if (explain) System.out.println( "remove " + $v + " from " + $c3.posAsString() + " due to naked pair at " + $c1.posAsString() + " and " + $c2.posAsString() );
        // Remove the value.
        modify( $c3 ){ blockValue( $v ) }
    end

The three rules `"hidden pair in …​"` functions similarly to the rule `"naked pair"`. These rules detect a subset of two numbers in exactly two cells of a group, with neither value occurring in any of the other cells of the group. This means that all other candidates can be eliminated from the two cells harboring the hidden pair.

Rules "hidden pair in …​"

    // If two cells within the same cell group contain candidate sets with more than
    // two values, with two values being in both of them but in none of the other
    // cells, then we have a "hidden pair". We can remove all other candidates from
    // these two cells.
    rule "hidden pair in row"
      when
        // Currently no setting underway
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        // Establish a pair of Integer facts.
        $i1: Integer()
        $i2: Integer( this > $i1 )

        // Look for a Cell with these two among its candidates. (The upper bound on
        // the number of candidates avoids a lot of useless work during startup.)
        $c1: Cell( $rn1: rowNo, $cn1: colNo, freeCount > 2 && < 9, free contains $i1 && contains $i2, $cellRow: cellRow )

        // Get another one from the same row, with the same pair among its candidates.
        $c2: Cell( this != $c1, cellRow == $cellRow, freeCount > 2, free contains $i1 && contains $i2 )

        // Ascertain that no other cell in the group has one of these two values.
        not( Cell( this != $c1 && != $c2, free contains $i1 || contains $i2 ) from $cellRow.getCells() )
      then
        if( explain) System.out.println( "hidden pair in row at " + $c1.posAsString() + " and " + $c2.posAsString() );
        // Set the candidate lists of these two Cells to the "hidden pair".
        modify( $c1 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
        modify( $c2 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
    end

    rule "hidden pair in column"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i1: Integer()
        $i2: Integer( this > $i1 )
        $c1: Cell( $rn1: rowNo, $cn1: colNo, freeCount > 2 && < 9, free contains $i1 && contains $i2, $cellCol: cellCol )
        $c2: Cell( this != $c1, cellCol == $cellCol, freeCount > 2, free contains $i1 && contains $i2 )
        not( Cell( this != $c1 && != $c2, free contains $i1 || contains $i2 ) from $cellCol.getCells() )
      then
        if (explain) System.out.println( "hidden pair in column at " + $c1.posAsString() + " and " + $c2.posAsString() );
        modify( $c1 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
        modify( $c2 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
    end

    rule "hidden pair in square"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i1: Integer()
        $i2: Integer( this > $i1 )
        $c1: Cell( $rn1: rowNo, $cn1: colNo, freeCount > 2 && < 9, free contains $i1 && contains $i2,
                   $cellSqr: cellSqr )
        $c2: Cell( this != $c1, cellSqr == $cellSqr, freeCount > 2, free contains $i1 && contains $i2 )
        not( Cell( this != $c1 && != $c2, free contains $i1 || contains $i2 ) from $cellSqr.getCells() )
      then
        if (explain) System.out.println( "hidden pair in square " + $c1.posAsString() + " and " + $c2.posAsString() );
        modify( $c1 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
        modify( $c2 ){ blockExcept( $i1, $i2 ) }
    end

Two rules deal with `"X-wings"` in rows and columns. When only two possible cells for a value exist in each of two different rows (or columns) and these candidates lie also in the same columns (or rows), then all other candidates for this value in the columns (or rows) can be eliminated. When you follow the pattern sequence in one of these rules, notice how the conditions that are conveniently expressed by words such as `same` or `only` result in patterns with suitable constraints or that are prefixed with `not`.

Rules "X-wings in …​"

    rule "X-wings in rows"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i: Integer()
        $ca1: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    $ra: cellRow, $rano: rowNo,         $c1: cellCol,        $c1no: colNo )
        $cb1: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    $rb: cellRow, $rbno: rowNo > $rano,      cellCol == $c1 )
        not( Cell( this != $ca1 && != $cb1, free contains $i ) from $c1.getCells() )

        $ca2: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    cellRow == $ra, $c2: cellCol,       $c2no: colNo > $c1no )
        $cb2: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    cellRow == $rb,      cellCol == $c2 )
        not( Cell( this != $ca2 && != $cb2, free contains $i ) from $c2.getCells() )

        $cx: Cell( rowNo == $rano || == $rbno, colNo != $c1no && != $c2no,
                   freeCount > 1, free contains $i )
      then
        if (explain) {
            System.out.println( "X-wing with " + $i + " in rows " +
                $ca1.posAsString() + " - " + $cb1.posAsString() +
                $ca2.posAsString() + " - " + $cb2.posAsString() + ", remove from " + $cx.posAsString() );
        }
        modify( $cx ){ blockValue( $i ) }
    end

    rule "X-wings in columns"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i: Integer()
        $ca1: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    $c1: cellCol, $c1no: colNo,         $ra: cellRow,        $rano: rowNo )
        $ca2: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    $c2: cellCol, $c2no: colNo > $c1no,      cellRow == $ra )
        not( Cell( this != $ca1 && != $ca2, free contains $i ) from $ra.getCells() )

        $cb1: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    cellCol == $c1, $rb: cellRow,  $rbno: rowNo > $rano )
        $cb2: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i,
                    cellCol == $c2,      cellRow == $rb )
        not( Cell( this != $cb1 && != $cb2, free contains $i ) from $rb.getCells() )

        $cx: Cell( colNo == $c1no || == $c2no, rowNo != $rano && != $rbno,
                   freeCount > 1, free contains $i )
      then
        if (explain) {
            System.out.println( "X-wing with " + $i + " in columns " +
                $ca1.posAsString() + " - " + $ca2.posAsString() +
                $cb1.posAsString() + " - " + $cb2.posAsString() + ", remove from " + $cx.posAsString()  );
        }
        modify( $cx ){ blockValue( $i ) }
    end

The two rules `"intersection removal …​"` are based on the restricted occurrence of some number within one square, either in a single row or in a single column. This means that this number must be in one of those two or three cells of the row or column and can be removed from the candidate sets of all other cells of the group. The pattern establishes the restricted occurrence and then fires for each cell outside of the square and within the same cell file.

Rules "intersection removal …​"

    rule "intersection removal column"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i: Integer()
        // Occurs in a Cell
        $c: Cell( free contains $i, $cs: cellSqr, $cc: cellCol )
        // Does not occur in another cell of the same square and a different column
        not Cell( this != $c, free contains $i, cellSqr == $cs, cellCol != $cc )

        // A cell exists in the same column and another square containing this value.
        $cx: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i, cellCol == $cc, cellSqr != $cs )
      then
        // Remove the value from that other cell.
        if (explain) {
            System.out.println( "column elimination due to " + $c.posAsString() +
                                ": remove " + $i + " from " + $cx.posAsString() );
        }
        modify( $cx ){ blockValue( $i ) }
    end

    rule "intersection removal row"
      when
        not Setting()
        not Cell( freeCount == 1 )

        $i: Integer()
        // Occurs in a Cell
        $c: Cell( free contains $i, $cs: cellSqr, $cr: cellRow )
        // Does not occur in another cell of the same square and a different row.
        not Cell( this != $c, free contains $i, cellSqr == $cs, cellRow != $cr )

        // A cell exists in the same row and another square containing this value.
        $cx: Cell( freeCount > 1, free contains $i, cellRow == $cr, cellSqr != $cs )
      then
        // Remove the value from that other cell.
        if (explain) {
            System.out.println( "row elimination due to " + $c.posAsString() +
                                ": remove " + $i + " from " + $cx.posAsString() );
        }
        modify( $cx ){ blockValue( $i ) }
    end

These rules are sufficient for many but not all Sudoku puzzles. To solve very difficult grids, the rule set requires more complex rules. (Ultimately, some puzzles can be solved only by trial and error.)

### 21.10. Conway’s Game of Life example decisions (ruleflow groups and GUI integration)

The Conway’s Game of Life example decision set, based on the famous cellular automaton by John Conway, demonstrates how to use ruleflow groups in rules to control rule execution. The example also demonstrates how to integrate Drools rules with a graphical user interface (GUI), in this case a Swing-based implementation of Conway’s Game of Life.

The following is an overview of the Conway’s Game of Life (Conway) example:

- Name: `conway`

- Main classes: `org.drools.examples.conway.ConwayRuleFlowGroupRun`, `org.drools.examples.conway.ConwayAgendaGroupRun` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `droolsjbpm-integration-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule files: `org.drools.examples.conway.*.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates ruleflow groups and GUI integration

| The Conway’s Game of Life example is separate from most of the other example decision sets in Drools and is located in the Drools and jBPM integration repository in GitHub.

In Conway’s Game of Life, a user interacts with the game by creating an initial configuration or an advanced pattern with defined properties and then observing how the initial state evolves. The objective of the game is to show the development of a population, generation by generation. Each generation results from the preceding one, based on the simultaneous evaluation of all cells.

The following basic rules govern what the next generation looks like:

- If a live cell has fewer than two live neighbors, it dies of loneliness.

- If a live cell has more than three live neighbors, it dies from overcrowding.

- If a dead cell has exactly three live neighbors, it comes to life.

Any cell that does not meet any of those criteria is left as is for the next generation.

The Conway’s Game of Life example uses Drools rules with `ruleflow-group` attributes to define the pattern implemented in the game. The example also contains a version of the decision set that achieves the same behavior using agenda groups. Agenda groups enable you to partition the Drools engine agenda to provide execution control over groups of rules. By default, all rules are in the agenda group `MAIN`. You can use the `agenda-group` attribute to specify a different agenda group for the rule.

This overview does not explore the version of the Conway example using agenda groups. For more information about agenda groups, see the Drools example decision sets that specifically address agenda groups.

#### Conway example execution and interaction

Similar to other Drools decision examples, you execute the Conway ruleflow example by running the `org.drools.examples.conway.ConwayRuleFlowGroupRun` class as a Java application in your IDE.

When you execute the Conway example, the `Conway’s Game of Life` GUI window appears. This window contains an empty grid, or "arena" where the life simulation takes place. Initially the grid is empty because no live cells are in the system yet.

Figure 366. Conway example GUI after launch

Select a predefined pattern from the Pattern drop-down menu and click Next Generation to click through each population generation. Each cell is either alive or dead, where live cells contain a green ball. As the population evolves from the initial pattern, cells live or die relative to neighboring cells, according to the rules of the game.

Figure 367. Generation evolution in Conway example

Neighbors include not only cells to the left, right, top, and bottom but also cells that are connected diagonally, so that each cell has a total of eight neighbors. Exceptions are the corner cells, which have only three neighbors, and the cells along the four borders, with five neighbors each.

You can manually intervene to create or kill cells by clicking the cell.

To run through an evolution automatically from the initial pattern, click Start.

#### Conway example rules with ruleflow groups

The rules in the `ConwayRuleFlowGroupRun` example use ruleflow groups to control rule execution. A ruleflow group is a group of rules associated by the `ruleflow-group` rule attribute. These rules can only fire when the group is activated. The group itself can only become active when the elaboration of the ruleflow diagram reaches the node representing the group.

The Conway example uses the following ruleflow groups for rules:

- `"register neighbor"`

- `"evaluate"`

- `"calculate"`

- `"reset calculate"`

- `"birth"`

- `"kill"`

- `"kill all"`

All of the `Cell` objects are inserted into the KIE session and the `"register …​"` rules in the ruleflow group `"register neighbor"` are allowed to execute by the ruleflow process. This group of four rules creates `Neighbor` relations between some cell and its northeastern, northern, northwestern, and western neighbors.

This relation is bidirectional and handles the other four directions. Border cells do not require any special treatment. These cells are not paired with neighboring cells where there is not any.

By the time all activations have fired for these rules, all cells are related to all their neighboring cells.

Rules "register …​"

    rule "register north east"
        ruleflow-group "register neighbor"
      when
        $cell: Cell( $row : row, $col : col )
        $northEast : Cell( row  == ($row - 1), col == ( $col + 1 ) )
      then
        insert( new Neighbor( $cell, $northEast ) );
        insert( new Neighbor( $northEast, $cell ) );
    end

    rule "register north"
        ruleflow-group "register neighbor"
      when
        $cell: Cell( $row : row, $col : col )
        $north : Cell( row  == ($row - 1), col == $col )
      then
        insert( new Neighbor( $cell, $north ) );
        insert( new Neighbor( $north, $cell ) );
    end

    rule "register north west"
        ruleflow-group "register neighbor"
      when
        $cell: Cell( $row : row, $col : col )
        $northWest : Cell( row  == ($row - 1), col == ( $col - 1 ) )
      then
        insert( new Neighbor( $cell, $northWest ) );
        insert( new Neighbor( $northWest, $cell ) );
    end

    rule "register west"
        ruleflow-group "register neighbor"
      when
        $cell: Cell( $row : row, $col : col )
        $west : Cell( row  == $row, col == ( $col - 1 ) )
      then
        insert( new Neighbor( $cell, $west ) );
        insert( new Neighbor( $west, $cell ) );
    end

After all the cells are inserted, some Java code applies the pattern to the grid, setting certain cells to `Live`. Then, when the user clicks Start or Next Generation, the example executes the `Generation` ruleflow. This ruleflow manages all changes of cells in each generation cycle.

Figure 368. Generation ruleflow

The ruleflow process enters the `"evaluate"` ruleflow group and any active rules in the group can fire. The rules `"Kill the …​"` and `"Give Birth"` in this group apply the game rules to birth or kill cells. The example uses the `phase` attribute to drive the reasoning of the `Cell` object by specific groups of rules. Typically, the phase is tied to a ruleflow group in the ruleflow process definition.

Notice that the example does not change the state of any `Cell` objects at this point because it must complete the full evaluation before those changes can be applied. The example sets the cell to a `phase` that is either `Phase.KILL` or `Phase.BIRTH`, which is used later to control actions applied to the `Cell` object.

Rules "Kill the …​" and "Give Birth"

    rule "Kill The Lonely"
        ruleflow-group "evaluate"
        no-loop
      when
        // A live cell has fewer than 2 live neighbors.
        theCell: Cell( liveNeighbors < 2, cellState == CellState.LIVE,
                       phase == Phase.EVALUATE )
      then
        modify( theCell ){
            setPhase( Phase.KILL );
        }
    end

    rule "Kill The Overcrowded"
        ruleflow-group "evaluate"
        no-loop
      when
        // A live cell has more than 3 live neighbors.
        theCell: Cell( liveNeighbors > 3, cellState == CellState.LIVE,
                       phase == Phase.EVALUATE )
      then
        modify( theCell ){
            setPhase( Phase.KILL );
        }
    end

    rule "Give Birth"
        ruleflow-group "evaluate"
        no-loop
      when
        // A dead cell has 3 live neighbors.
        theCell: Cell( liveNeighbors == 3, cellState == CellState.DEAD,
                       phase == Phase.EVALUATE )
      then
        modify( theCell ){
            theCell.setPhase( Phase.BIRTH );
        }
    end

After all `Cell` objects in the grid have been evaluated, the example uses the `"reset calculate"` rule to clear any activations in the `"calculate"` ruleflow group. The example then enters a split in the ruleflow that enables the rules `"kill"` and `"birth"` to fire, if the ruleflow group is activated. These rules apply the state change.

Rules "reset calculate", "kill", and "birth"

    rule "reset calculate"
        ruleflow-group "reset calculate"
      when
      then
        WorkingMemory wm = drools.getWorkingMemory();
        wm.clearRuleFlowGroup( "calculate" );
    end

    rule "kill"
        ruleflow-group "kill"
        no-loop
      when
        theCell: Cell( phase == Phase.KILL )
      then
        modify( theCell ){
            setCellState( CellState.DEAD ),
            setPhase( Phase.DONE );
        }
    end

    rule "birth"
        ruleflow-group "birth"
        no-loop
      when
        theCell: Cell( phase == Phase.BIRTH )
      then
        modify( theCell ){
            setCellState( CellState.LIVE ),
            setPhase( Phase.DONE );
        }
    end

At this stage, several `Cell` objects have been modified with the state changed to either `LIVE` or `DEAD`. When a cell becomes live or dead, the example uses the `Neighbor` relation in the rules `"Calculate …​"` to iterate over all surrounding cells, increasing or decreasing the `liveNeighbor` count. Any cell that has its count changed is also set to to the `EVALUATE` phase to make sure it is included in the reasoning during the evaluation stage of the ruleflow process.

After the live count has been determined and set for all cells, the ruleflow process ends. If the user initially clicked Start, the Drools engine restarts the ruleflow at that point. If the user initially clicked Next Generation, the user can request another generation.

Rules "Calculate …​"

    rule "Calculate Live"
        ruleflow-group "calculate"
        lock-on-active
      when
        theCell: Cell( cellState == CellState.LIVE )
        Neighbor( cell == theCell, $neighbor : neighbor )
      then
        modify( $neighbor ){
            setLiveNeighbors( $neighbor.getLiveNeighbors() + 1 ),
            setPhase( Phase.EVALUATE );
        }
    end

    rule "Calculate Dead"
        ruleflow-group "calculate"
        lock-on-active
      when
        theCell: Cell( cellState == CellState.DEAD )
        Neighbor( cell == theCell, $neighbor : neighbor )
      then
        modify( $neighbor ){
            setLiveNeighbors( $neighbor.getLiveNeighbors() - 1 ),
            setPhase( Phase.EVALUATE );
        }
    end

### 21.11. House of Doom example decisions (backward chaining and recursion)

The House of Doom example decision set demonstrates how the Drools engine uses backward chaining and recursion to reach defined goals or subgoals in a hierarchical system.

The following is an overview of the House of Doom example:

- Name: `backwardchaining`

- Main class: `org.drools.examples.backwardchaining.HouseOfDoomMain` (in `src/main/java`)

- Module: `drools-examples`

- Type: Java application

- Rule file: `org.drools.examples.backwardchaining.BC-Example.drl` (in `src/main/resources`)

- Objective: Demonstrates backward chaining and recursion

A backward-chaining rule system is a goal-driven system that starts with a conclusion that the Drools engine attempts to satisfy, often using recursion. If the system cannot reach the conclusion or goal, it searches for subgoals, which are conclusions that complete part of the current goal. The system continues this process until either the initial conclusion is satisfied or all subgoals are satisfied.

In contrast, a forward-chaining rule system is a data-driven system that starts with a fact in the working memory of the Drools engine and reacts to changes to that fact. When objects are inserted into working memory, any rule conditions that become true as a result of the change are scheduled for execution by the agenda.

The Drools engine in Drools uses both forward and backward chaining to evaluate rules.

The following diagram illustrates how the Drools engine evaluates rules using forward chaining overall with a backward-chaining segment in the logic flow:

Figure 369. Rule evaluation logic using forward and backward chaining

The House of Doom example uses rules with various types of queries to find the location of rooms and items within the house. The sample class `Location.java` contains the `item` and `location` elements used in the example. The sample class `HouseOfDoomMain.java` inserts the items or rooms in their respective locations in the house and executes the rules.

Items and locations in HouseOfDoomMain.java class

    ksession.insert( new Location("Office", "House") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Kitchen", "House") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Knife", "Kitchen") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Cheese", "Kitchen") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Desk", "Office") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Chair", "Office") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Computer", "Desk") );
    ksession.insert( new Location("Drawer", "Desk") );

The example rules rely on backward chaining and recursion to determine the location of all items and rooms in the house structure.

The following diagram illustrates the structure of the House of Doom and the items and rooms within it:

Figure 370. House of Doom structure

To execute the example, run the `org.drools.examples.backwardchaining.HouseOfDoomMain` class as a Java application in your IDE.

After the execution, the following output appears in the IDE console window:

Execution output in the IDE console

    go1
    Office is in the House
    ---
    go2
    Drawer is in the House
    ---
    go3
    ---
    Key is in the Office
    ---
    go4
    Chair is in the Office
    Desk is in the Office
    Key is in the Office
    Computer is in the Office
    Drawer is in the Office
    ---
    go5
    Chair is in Office
    Desk is in Office
    Drawer is in Desk
    Key is in Drawer
    Kitchen is in House
    Cheese is in Kitchen
    Knife is in Kitchen
    Computer is in Desk
    Office is in House
    Key is in Office
    Drawer is in House
    Computer is in House
    Key is in House
    Desk is in House
    Chair is in House
    Knife is in House
    Cheese is in House
    Computer is in Office
    Drawer is in Office
    Key is in Desk

All rules in the example have fired to detect the location of all items in the house and to print the location of each in the output.

#### Recursive query and related rules

A recursive query repeatedly searches through the hierarchy of a data structure for relationships between elements.

In the House of Doom example, the `BC-Example.drl` file contains an `isContainedIn` query that most of the rules in the example use to recursively evaluate the house data structure for data inserted into the Drools engine:

Recursive query in BC-Example.drl

    query isContainedIn( String x, String y )
      Location( x, y; )
      or
      ( Location( z, y; ) and isContainedIn( x, z; ) )
    end

The rule `"go"` prints every string inserted into the system to determine how items are implemented, and the rule `"go1"` calls the query `isContainedIn`:

Rules "go" and "go1"

    rule "go" salience 10
      when
        $s : String( )
      then
        System.out.println( $s );
    end

    rule "go1"
      when
        String( this == "go1" )
        isContainedIn("Office", "House"; )
      then
        System.out.println( "Office is in the House" );
    end

The example inserts the `"go1"` string into the Drools engine and activates the `"go1"` rule to detect that item `Office` is in the location `House`:

Insert string and fire rules

    ksession.insert( "go1" );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go1" output in the IDE console

    go1
    Office is in the House

#### Transitive closure rule

Transitive closure is a relationship between an element contained in a parent element that is multiple levels higher in a hierarchical structure.

The rule `"go2"` identifies the transitive closure relationship of the `Drawer` and the `House`: The `Drawer` is in the `Desk` in the `Office` in the `House`.

    rule "go2"
      when
        String( this == "go2" )
        isContainedIn("Drawer", "House"; )
      then
        System.out.println( "Drawer is in the House" );
    end

The example inserts the `"go2"` string into the Drools engine and activates the `"go2"` rule to detect that item `Drawer` is ultimately within the location `House`:

Insert string and fire rules

    ksession.insert( "go2" );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go2" output in the IDE console

    go2
    Drawer is in the House

The Drools engine determines this outcome based on the following logic:

1. The query recursively searches through several levels in the house to detect the transitive closure between `Drawer` and `House`.

2. Instead of using `Location( x, y; )`, the query uses the value of `(z, y; )` because `Drawer` is not directly in `House`.

3. The `z` argument is currently unbound, which means it has no value and returns everything that is in the argument.

4. The `y` argument is currently bound to `House`, so `z` returns `Office` and `Kitchen`.

5. The query gathers information from the `Office` and checks recursively if the `Drawer` is in the `Office`. The query line `isContainedIn( x, z; )` is called for these parameters.

6. No instance of `Drawer` exists directly in `Office`, so no match is found.

7. With `z` unbound, the query returns data within the `Office` and determines that z == Desk.

       isContainedIn(x==drawer, z==desk)

8. The `isContainedIn` query recursively searches three times, and on the third time, the query detects an instance of `Drawer` in `Desk`.

       Location(x==drawer, y==desk)

9. After this match on the first location, the query recursively searches back up the structure to determine that the `Drawer` is in the `Desk`, the `Desk` is in the `Office`, and the `Office` is in the `House`. Therefore, the `Drawer` is in the `House` and the rule is satisfied.

#### Reactive query rule

A reactive query searches through the hierarchy of a data structure for relationships between elements and is dynamically updated when elements in the structure are modified.

The rule `"go3"` functions as a reactive query that detects if a new item `Key` ever becomes present in the `Office` by transitive closure: A `Key` in the `Drawer` in the `Office`.

Rule "go3"

    rule "go3"
      when
        String( this == "go3" )
        isContainedIn("Key", "Office"; )
      then
        System.out.println( "Key is in the Office" );
    end

The example inserts the `"go3"` string into the Drools engine and activates the `"go3"` rule. Initially, this rule is not satisfied because no item `Key` exists in the house structure, so the rule produces no output.

Insert string and fire rules

    ksession.insert( "go3" );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go3" output in the IDE console (unsatisfied)

    go3

The example then inserts a new item `Key` in the location `Drawer`, which is in `Office`. This change satisfies the transitive closure in the `"go3"` rule and the output is populated accordingly.

Insert new item location and fire rules

    ksession.insert( new Location("Key", "Drawer") );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go3" output in the IDE console (satisfied)

    Key is in the Office

This change also adds another level in the structure that the query includes in subsequent recursive searches.

#### Queries with unbound arguments in rules

A query with one or more unbound arguments returns all undefined (unbound) items within a defined (bound) argument of the query. If all arguments in a query are unbound, then the query returns all items within the scope of the query.

The rule `"go4"` uses an unbound argument `thing` to search for all items within the bound argument `Office`, instead of using a bound argument to search for a specific item in the `Office`:

Rule "go4"

    rule "go4"
      when
        String( this == "go4" )
        isContainedIn(thing, "Office"; )
      then
        System.out.println( thing + "is in the Office" );
    end

The example inserts the `"go4"` string into the Drools engine and activates the `"go4"` rule to return all items in the `Office`:

Insert string and fire rules

    ksession.insert( "go4" );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go4" output in the IDE console

    go4
    Chair is in the Office
    Desk is in the Office
    Key is in the Office
    Computer is in the Office
    Drawer is in the Office

The rule `"go5"` uses both unbound arguments `thing` and `location` to search for all items and their locations in the entire `House` data structure:

Rule "go5"

    rule "go5"
      when
        String( this == "go5" )
        isContainedIn(thing, location; )
      then
        System.out.println(thing + " is in " + location );
    end

The example inserts the `"go5"` string into the Drools engine and activates the `"go5"` rule to return all items and their locations in the `House` data structure:

Insert string and fire rules

    ksession.insert( "go5" );
    ksession.fireAllRules();

Rule "go5" output in the IDE console

    go5
    Chair is in Office
    Desk is in Office
    Drawer is in Desk
    Key is in Drawer
    Kitchen is in House
    Cheese is in Kitchen
    Knife is in Kitchen
    Computer is in Desk
    Office is in House
    Key is in Office
    Drawer is in House
    Computer is in House
    Key is in House
    Desk is in House
    Chair is in House
    Knife is in House
    Cheese is in House
    Computer is in Office
    Drawer is in Office
    Key is in Desk

# Drools Release Notes

## 22. Release Notes

### 22.1. New and Noteworthy in Business Central 7.23.0

#### 22.1.1. Enhanced BC collaboration features

The following enhancements were added to Business Central to provide additional options for managing access to spaces and projects.

Figure 371. Security Management user interface

With the introduction of this new feature, it is now possible to manage spaces and projects permissions directly in their respective screens, using the Contributors tab. When contributors are added to a space, they are able to open it and see its projects and other information available. Based on their contributor role, they also have the following permissions granted:

- Owner: Update contributors, delete spaces, create and delete projects

- Admin: Update contributors (except owners) and create projects

- Contributor: Create projects

Figure 372. Space Contributors tab

When a project is created inside a space, its contributors are copied from the space and the project creator becomes the owner of the new project. It is also possible to add new contributors to the project if they are also contributors to the project’s space. Contributors can view the project, and depending on their role, they may also have the following permissions:

- Owner: View, update, build, deploy, and delete projects

- Admin: View, update, build and deploy projects

- Contributor: View, update and build projects

Figure 373. Project Contributors tab

The security check uses both the Security Management user interface and Contributors tab to assign permissions to spaces and projects. For example, users can delete a space if they are assigned to a role with the required permissions or is a owner of that space.

#### 22.1.2. Role based access control for branches

In addition to the new collaboration features, you can customize contributor role permissions for each branch of a project.

Figure 374. Branch Management settings section

Select which permissions each contributor role has for the selected branch.

#### 22.1.3. Importing a subset of branches

When importing projects from a repository, you can select only the branches that you want to persist in Business Central.

1. In Business Central, click Menu → Design → Projects.

2. Select or create the space into which you want to import the project. The default space is MySpace.

3. Click the three dots on the right side of the screen and select Import Project.

Figure 375. Import project popup access

In the Import Project window, enter the URL and credentials for the Git repository that contains the project that you want to import and click Import.

Figure 376. Import project popup

After clicking on Import, all projects found in that repository will be listed:

Figure 377. List of projects to import

On the right side of each project name, click on the branch icon. Select the branches that you want to import.

Figure 378. List of projects to import

Only the selected branches are persisted:

Figure 379. List of imported branches

#### 22.1.4. DMN included models

The DMN designer contains a new Included Models tab that you can use to include externally defined DMN models in the specified DMN file. When you add an included model in a DMN file, you can reuse components of the included model in that DMN file. This enhancement helps you more efficiently integrate DMN logic between different DMN models in your project.

### 22.2. New and Noteworthy in Business Central 7.19.0

#### 22.2.1. DMN Automatic Layout

Nodes in DMN decision requirements diagrams (DRDs) can be positioned automatically with the new Perform automatic layout toolbar button. This automatic layout feature orients DRD nodes vertically, from the bottom to the top of the DRD. However, automatic layout currently does not support Decision Service nodes.

#### 22.2.2. DMN and Test Scenario context menu keyboard control

In both DMN and Test Scenario tables, keyboard support for the context menu invocation was added. You can now invoke a context menu by typing Ctrl+Space.

### 22.3. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.18

#### 22.3.1. New Builder Options

##### 22.3.1.1. TrimCellsInDTableOption

By default all the value of the cells in decision tables are trimmed before being processed. There could be situations where this automatic trimming is not required or even detrimental. In this cases it is now possible to disable the trimming using the new TrimCellsInDTableOption or the correspondent "drools.trimCellsInDTable" System property.

#### 22.3.2. GroupDRLsInKieBasesByFolderOption

By default all the Drools artifacts under the resources folder, at any level, are included into the KieBase. From now on, the packages attribute of the kmodule.xml allows to limit the artifacts that will be compiled in this KieBase to only the ones belonging to the list of packages. However older versions of Drools actually checked the folder name instead of the package one. The new GroupDRLsInKieBasesByFolderOption or the correspondent "drools.groupDRLsInKieBasesByFolder" System property allows to re-enable that old folder-based behaviour.

### 22.4. New and Noteworthy in Business Central 7.18.0

#### 22.4.1. Guided rules designer filtering

The guided rules designer now supports filtering of DSL (domain specific language) files and Fact Types when you add new Condition or Action elements.

Figure 380. Filtering

#### 22.4.2. Test Scenario (Preview) renamed to Test Scenario and List/Map support

Old Test Scenario has been renamed as Test Scenario (Legacy) and Test Scenario (Preview) now is Test Scenario. The editor now supports also List and Map as supported data types for testing.

#### 22.4.3. Development streamline lifecycle

Along with the new development mode on KIE Server, Business Central also adds a simplified deployment mechanism for SNAPSHOT modules to improve the user experience during the development and testing phases of a module. Some of the changes introduced:

- More flexible deployment policy, allowing you to run module updates with no need of undeploying previous deployments.

- Once a SNAPSHOT module is deployed, Business Central will store the user deployment preferences making subsequent deployments update the previously deployed container. This mechanism also keeps the active process instances.

- Added abilitiy to redeploy a module, updating the container with latest changes but aborting the active process instances.

Other changes introduced:

Figure 381. New Development Mode toggle on the module General Settings screen to turn the module into SNAPSHOT
Figure 382. Changed Build button to drop-down with Build & Install option
Figure 383. Changed Deploy button to drop-down with Redeploy only (only available on SNAPSHOT modules)

### 22.5. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.17

#### 22.5.1. Minor changes in DMN FEEL built-in functions' parameter names

Previous releases of Drools offered (optionally) a FEEL built-in function `split()` as an extended function, beyond the DMN v1.1 specification. In order to align with version v1.2 of the DMN specification, which now includes `split()` as part of the standardised FEEL built-in functions set, the function parameter names have been aligned to the ones mandated by the DMN specification itself, with the signature `split( string, delimiter )` as specified in Table 68 of the DMN v1.2 specification document.

### 22.6. New and Noteworthy in Business Central 7.17.0

#### 22.6.1. Test Scenario (Preview) enabled by default

Test Scenario (Preview) is now enabled by default so there is no additional configuration needed.

#### 22.6.2. Test Scenario DMN support

Test Scenario (Preview) now support DMN model testing

#### 22.6.3. DMN Decision Service support

A DMN decision service node is now available in the DMN designer palette in Business Central.

### 22.7. New and Noteworthy in Business Central 7.16.0

#### 22.7.1. DMN and Test Scenario keyboard control

For both DMN and Test Scenario tables, the following keyboard control support was added:

- Table navigation: After you select a cell in a DMN or Test Scenario table, you can use the arrow keys to navigate between other cells. The way you select the first cell differs in DMN and Test Scenario tables:

  - In a DMN table, the top-left cell is selected by default. Next to standard navigation, press Enter to select a nested expression and Esc to return to the parent expression.

  - In a Test Scenario table, no cell is selected by default. Press Shift+Home to select the first available cell.

- Table editing: After you select a cell in a DMN or Test Scenario table, you can input a new value into the cell or change the already added value. To edit a cell, press Enter. To stop the editing, press Shift+Tab.

### 22.8. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.15

#### 22.8.1. Broken DMN resources detected in Drools project builds

When a Drools project (KJAR file) contains an invalid or a broken resource, the project fails to build and reports the failure in one or more error messages. Previously, a Drools project with an invalid DMN resource could build successfully, with no error messages. With this release, this issue has been resolved so that an invalid DMN resource now causes a project build failure with error messaging, as expected (ref: DROOLS-3335).

For more information about project packaging and deployment, see Build, Deploy, Utilize and Run.

For a custom programmatic build, you can use the following code snippet to retrieve a list of build errors:

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieFileSystem kfs = ks.newKieFileSystem()
                          .generateAndWritePomXML(releaseId)
                          .write(dmnResource);
    KieBuilder kieBuilder = ks.newKieBuilder(kfs)
                              .buildAll();
    Results results = kieBuilder.getResults();
    if (results.hasMessages(Message.Level.ERROR)) {
        throw new IllegalStateException(results.getMessages(Message.Level.ERROR).toString());
    }

#### 22.8.2. New method for creating a knowledge run time

The preferred way to create a knowledge run time (for example, `DMNRuntime`) is no longer through a `KieSession` instance, but rather through the new `KieRuntimeFactory` API:

    DMNRuntime rt = KieRuntimeFactory.of(kieContainer.getKieBase()).get(DMNRuntime.class);

### 22.9. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.15.0

#### 22.9.1. Git hooks notifications

Improved git hooks integration to provide feedback notifications to the user with customized messages.

#### 22.9.2. KIE Workbench Consolidation

KIE Workbench is now called Business Central and it is available on `business-central` web context. Profiles provide a set of Business Central features and you can choose a profile based on your requirements. The `FULL` profile is a default profile that includes all features. The `PLANNER_AND_RULES` profile includes only drools-kie-wb features. You can select a profile either by using the `org.kie.workbench.profile` system property (possible values are FULL or PLANNER_AND_RULES) or from the Profile option in the Administration screen.

### 22.10. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.14

#### 22.10.1. File-system based KieScanner

The `KieScanner` allows continuous monitoring of your Maven repository to check whether a new release of a Kie project has been installed and if so it live updates the running `KieContainer` with the newer version of that project. However in many cases installing a maven repository is impractical especially in production environment. For this reason it is now possible to have a `KieScanner` that works by simply fetching update from a folder of a plain file system. You can create and start such a `KieScanner` as simply as

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieScanner kScanner = kieServices.newKieScanner( kContainer, "/myrepo/kjars" );

    // Start the KieScanner polling the Maven repository every 10 seconds
    kScanner.start( 10000L );

where "/myrepo/kjars" will be the folder where the `KieScanner` will look for kjar updates. The jar files placed in this folder have to follow the maven convention and then have to be a name in the form {artifactId}-{versionId}.jar

#### 22.10.2. Support for executable models in DMN projects

You can now use the `kie-maven-plugin` build component to generate DMN executable model classes and compile them in a Drools project (`kjar`). This support enables DMN decision table logic in DMN projects to be evaluated more efficiently.

To enable executable models in DMN projects, add the required `kie-dmn-core` dependency in the `pom.xml` file:

    <dependency>
      <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
      <artifactId>kie-dmn-core</artifactId>
      <scope>provided</scope>
    </dependency>

To build a DMN project enabling executable model compilation, navigate to your Maven project directory in a command terminal and run the following command:

    mvn clean install -DgenerateDMNModel=yes

Alternatively, you can define the property directly in the `pom.xml` file:

    <project>
      ...
      <properties>
        <generateDMNModel>yes</generateDMNModel>
      </properties>
      ...
    </project>

For more information about configuring executable models for your Maven or Java project, see Executable rule models.

### 22.11. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.14.0

#### 22.11.1. SSH and Git Daemon Port Assignment Changes

If the SSH or Git daemon default or assigned ports are already in use, a new port is automatically selected. Ensure that the ports are available and check the log for more information.

Before this change, the application used to fail to start.

### 22.12. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.13.0

#### 22.12.1. Test Scenarios (Preview) editor

This version contains the preview of the new Test Scenarios editor that tests a rule with a completely new user experience.

See section Test scenarios for details on enabling and using the editor.

#### 22.12.2. Experimental Features support

New Experimental Features Framework added to the Workbench. It provides an easy mechanism for users to preview features which are not part of the product but might be interesting for them (for example, ongoing developments, tech previews, POCs…​).

See section Experimental Features Framework for more details.

#### 22.12.3. SSH keystore

In order to provide the Workbench VFS with proper SSH authentication, a new keystore must added. This keystore enables users to register their SSH public keys.

Figure 384. SSH keystore UI

You can access it from the Admin page using the new SSH Keys menu option.

Figure 385. SSH Keys Menu Option on Admin Page

See the SSH keystore section for details.

### 22.13. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.13

#### 22.13.1. Allow to declare serialVersionUID on classes generated from declared types

To improve the compatibility of serialized KieSession, it has been introduced the possibility to specify the serialVersionUID on the classes generated from the declared types through an annotation like the following:

    declare MyClass
      @serialVersionUID( 42 )
      name : String
    end

#### 22.13.2. Declaratively set Calendars on KieSession via kmodule.xml

It is possible to declaratively set one or more Calendars on a KieSession through the kmodule.xml configuration file as in the following example:

    <ksession name="KSession1">
      <calendars>
        <calendar name="monday" type="org.domain.Monday"/>
      </calendars>
    </ksession>

where the type is the name of class implementing the `org.kie.api.time.Calendar` interface.

#### 22.13.3. KieSessions pool

In high volume use cases `KieSession`s get created and disposed with a very high frequency. In general this operation is not extremely time consuming, but when repeated millions of times can become a bottleneck and also requires a huge GC effort. Some users tried to alleviate this problem with self-made pools and for this reason it has been decided to provide this solution out-of-the-box.

To obtain a pool of `KieSession` from a `KieContainer` is enough to invoke on it the method

    KieContainerSessionsPool KieContainer.newKieSessionsPool(int initialSize)

where `initialSize` is the number of the `KieSession`s that will be initially created in the pool. However, if required by the running application, the number of `KieSession`s in the pool will dynamically grow beyond that value. At this point you can create `KieSession`s from that pool as you would normally do from a `KieContainer`:

    KieContainerSessionsPool pool = kContainer.newKieSessionsPool(10);
    KieSession kSession = pool.newKieSession();

Now you can use the KieSession as per normal, and when you call `dispose()` on it, instead of being destroyed, it just gets resetted and pushed back into the pool. Note that using this pool will also affect the case when you have one or more `StatelessKieSession`s and you keep reusing them with multiple call to the `execute()` method. In fact a `StatelessKieSession` created directly from a `KieContainer` will keep to internally create a new `KieSession` for each `execute()` invocation. Conversely if you create the `StatelessKieSession` from the pool it will internally uses the `KieSession`s provided by the pool itself. In other words even if you asked a `StatelessKieSession` to the pool, what is actually pooled are the `KieSession`s that are wrapped by it.

Once you’re done with the pool it is required that you call the `shutdown()` method on it to avoid memory leaks. Alternatively calling `dispose()` on the whole `KieContainer` will also automatically shutdown all the pools eventually created from it.

#### 22.13.4. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.13.0

##### 22.13.4.1. Test Scenarios (Preview) editor

This version contains the preview of the new Test Scenarios editor that tests a rule with a completely new user experience.

See section Test scenarios for details on enabling and using the editor.

##### 22.13.4.2. Experimental Features support

New Experimental Features Framework added to the Workbench. It provides an easy mechanism for users to preview features which are not part of the product but might be interesting for them (for example, ongoing developments, tech previews, POCs…​).

See section Experimental Features Framework for more details.

##### 22.13.4.3. SSH keystore

In order to provide the Workbench VFS with proper SSH authentication, a new keystore must added. This keystore enables users to register their SSH public keys.

Figure 386. SSH keystore UI

You can access it from the Admin page using the new SSH Keys menu option.

Figure 387. SSH Keys Menu Option on Admin Page

See the SSH keystore section for details.

### 22.14. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.12

#### 22.14.1. End of support for `drools-rhq-plugin` component

The `drools-rhq-plugin` component for monitoring Drools using JBoss Operations Network is no longer supported because it is underutilized and has become outdated.

### 22.15. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.11

#### 22.15.1. Minor API changes of Kie DMN open source engine

The API of Kie DMN open source engine introduces some minor changes, in order to support the new DMN v1.2 format.

A new package `org.kie.dmn.model.api` inside Maven module `kie-dmn-model` provides a generic model to support for both DMN versions v1.1 and v1.2. This requires users of previous versions to update references from previous package `org.kie.dmn.model.v1_1` to this new package `org.kie.dmn.model.api`.

| Users of the Kie DMN API must update references of import packages from `import org.kie.dmn.model.v1_1.;` to `import org.kie.dmn.model.api.;`.

Package `org.kie.dmn.api.marshalling.v1_1` has been deprecated in favour of `org.kie.dmn.api.marshalling`; normally this shouldn’t impact end-users of the Kie DMN API as the `DMNRuntime` will automatically provide support for both DMN v1.1 and v1.2. This change impacts users who manage the marshaling of DMN resources manually, who must upgrade to the new package in order to support the new DMN v1.2 version.

### 22.16. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.11.0

#### 22.16.1. Multiple Git branches support

You can now work on multiple Git source branches interchangeably in Business Central to improve the Git workflow of your projects.

After you have created and opened a project, you can see all the assets of your project:

In the breadcrumbs navigation, you can now see a drop-down menu that, when clicked, displays all the Git branches available:

You can click Add Branch to add more branches to your project:

After adding the new branch, you are redirected to the new branch with all the assets that you had in the base branch:

You can also click Delete Branch in the top-right corner of the screen to delete any branch except for the master branch:

### 22.17. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.9

#### 22.17.1. Moved ExecutableCommand to KIE public API

Drools internal `ExecutableCommand` interface has been moved to KIE public API. It’s now possible to create custom executable commands without rely on internal interface.

A deprecated internal `ExecutableCommand` interface still exists for backward compatibility and will be removed in a future release.

| Existing custom commands based on old internal interface that override `canRunInTransaction()` method will no longer compile due to this change.

#### 22.17.2. Alpha Network Compiler

Drools now supports an optimization on evaluating alpha nodes which involves generating an intermediate class that gets compiled to evaluate the constraint faster.

It’s highly experimental and it’s supposed to work only with the new executable model system. To enable it use `drools.alphaNetworkCompiler` configuration key in the `KieModuleModel` configuration.

    <kmodule xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
             xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
      <configuration>
        <property key="drools.alphaNetworkCompiler" value="true"/>
      </configuration>
    </kmodule>

| The current implementation has problems with incremental compilation so don’t use it together.

### 22.18. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.8.0

#### 22.18.1. New System Property for setting the Default Maven Repository in Project pom.xml files

To make building Workbench projects outside of the Workbench easier, it is now possible to set the URL for the default Maven Repository that is added into each new Project pom.xml. It is recommended that you set this before starting you Workbench for the first time.

### 22.19. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.7

#### 22.19.1. Executable rule models

Executable rule models are embeddable models that provide a Java-based representation of a rule set for execution at build time. The executable model is a more efficient alternative to the standard asset packaging in Drools and enables KIE containers and KIE bases to be created more quickly, especially when you have large lists of DRL (Drools Rule Language) files and other Drools assets. The model is low level and enables you to provide all necessary execution information, such as the lambda expressions for the index evaluation.

Executable rule models provide the following specific advantages for your projects:

- Compile time: Traditionally, a packaged Drools project (KJAR) contains a list of DRL files and other Drools artifacts that define the rule base together with some pre-generated classes implementing the constraints and the consequences. Those DRL files must be parsed and compiled when the KJAR is downloaded from the Maven repository and installed in a KIE container. This process can be slow, especially for large rule sets. With an executable model, you can package within the project KJAR the Java classes that implement the executable model of the project rule base and re-create the KIE container and its KIE bases out of it in a much faster way. In Maven projects, you use the `kie-maven-plugin` to automatically generate the executable model sources from the DRL files during the compilation process.

- Run time: In an executable model, all constraints are defined as Java lambda expressions. The same lambda expressions are also used for constraints evaluation, so you no longer need to use `mvel` expressions for interpreted evaluation nor the just-in-time (JIT) process to transform the `mvel`-based constraints into bytecode. This creates a quicker and more efficient run time.

- Development time: An executable model enables you to develop and experiment with new features of the Drools engine without needing to encode elements directly in the DRL format or modify the DRL parser to support them.

| For query definitions in executable rule models, you can use up to 10 arguments only.

##### 22.19.1.1. Executable model domain-specific languages (DSLs)

One goal while designing the first iteration of the domain-specific language (DSL) for the executable model was to get rid of the notion of pattern and to consider a rule as a flow of expressions (constraints) and actions (consequences). For this reason we called it Flow DSL. Some examples of this DSL are available here.

However after having implemented the Flow DSL it became clear that the decision of avoiding the explicit use of patterns obliged us to implement some extra logic that had both a complexity and a performance cost, since in order to properly re-create the data structures expected by the Drools compiler it is necessary to put together the patterns out of those apparently unrelated expressions.

For this reason it has been decided to reintroduce the patterns in a second DSL that we called Pattern DSL. This allowed to bypass that algorithm grouping expressions that has to fill an artificial semantic gap and that is also time consuming at run time. We believe that both DSLs are valid for different use cases and so we decided to keep and support both. In particular the Pattern DSL is safer and faster (even if more verbose) so this will be the DSL that will be automatically generated when creating a KJAR through the kie-maven-plugin. Conversely the Flow DSL is more succinct and closer to the way a user may want to programmatically define a rule in Java and we planned to make it even less verbose by generating in an automatic way through a post processor the parts of the model defining the indexing and property reactivity. In other words, we expect that the Pattern DSL will be written by machines and the Flow DSL eventually by humans.

##### 22.19.1.2. Embedding an executable rule model in a Maven project

You can embed an executable rule model in your Maven project to compile your rule assets more efficiently at build time.

Prerequisites

- You have a Mavenized project that contains Drools business assets.

Procedure

1. In the `pom.xml` file of your Maven project, ensure that the packaging type is set to `kjar` and add the `kie-maven-plugin` build component:

       <packaging>kjar</packaging>
       ...
       <build>
         <plugins>
           <plugin>
             <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
             <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
             <version>${drools.version}</version>
             <extensions>true</extensions>
           </plugin>
         </plugins>
       </build>

   The `kjar` packaging type activates the `kie-maven-plugin` component to validate and pre-compile artifact resources. The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002). These settings are required to properly package the Maven project.

2. Add the following dependencies to the `pom.xml` file to enable rule assets to be built from an executable model:

   - `drools-canonical-model`: Enables an executable canonical representation of a rule set model that is independent from Drools

   - `drools-model-compiler`: Compiles the executable model into Drools internal data structures so that it can be executed by the Drools engine

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>drools-canonical-model</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>drools-model-compiler</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

3. In a command terminal, navigate to your Maven project directory and run the following command to build the project from an executable model:

       mvn clean install -DgenerateModel=<VALUE>

   The `-DgenerateModel=<VALUE>` property enables the project to be built as a model-based KJAR instead of a DRL-based KJAR.

   Replace `<VALUE>` with one of three values:

   - `YES`: Generates the executable model corresponding to the DRL files in the original project and excludes the DRL files from the generated KJAR.

   - `WITHDRL`: Generates the executable model corresponding to the DRL files in the original project and also adds the DRL files to the generated KJAR for documentation purposes (the KIE base is built from the executable model regardless).

   - `NO`: Does not generate the executable model.

   Example build command:

       mvn clean install -DgenerateModel=YES

##### 22.19.1.3. Embedding an executable rule model in a Java application

You can embed an executable rule model programmatically within your Java application to compile your rule assets more efficiently at build time.

Prerequisites

- You have a Java application that contains Drools business assets.

Procedure

1. Add the following dependencies to the relevant classpath for your Java project:

   - `drools-canonical-model`: Enables an executable canonical representation of a rule set model that is independent from Drools

   - `drools-model-compiler`: Compiles the executable model into Drools internal data structures so that it can be executed by the Drools engine

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>drools-canonical-model</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

       <dependency>
         <groupId>org.drools</groupId>
         <artifactId>drools-model-compiler</artifactId>
         <version>${drools.version}</version>
       </dependency>

   The `<version>` is the Maven artifact version for Drools currently used in your project (for example, 7.23.0.Final-redhat-00002).

2. Add rule assets to the KIE virtual file system `KieFileSystem` and use `KieBuilder` with `buildAll( ExecutableModelProject.class )` specified to build the assets from an executable model:

       import org.kie.api.KieServices;
       import org.kie.api.builder.KieFileSystem;
       import org.kie.api.builder.KieBuilder;

         KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
         KieFileSystem kfs = ks.newKieFileSystem()
         kfs.write("src/main/resources/KBase1/ruleSet1.drl", stringContainingAValidDRL)
         .write("src/main/resources/dtable.xls",
           kieServices.getResources().newInputStreamResource(dtableFileStream));

         KieBuilder kieBuilder = ks.newKieBuilder( kfs );
         // Build from an executable model
         kieBuilder.buildAll( ExecutableModelProject.class )
         assertEquals(0, kieBuilder.getResults().getMessages(Message.Level.ERROR).size());

   After `KieFileSystem` is built from the executable model, the resulting `KieSession` uses constraints based on lambda expressions instead of less-efficient `mvel` expressions. If `buildAll()` contains no arguments, the project is built in the standard method without an executable model.

   As a more manual alternative to using `KieFileSystem` for creating executable models, you can define a `Model` with a fluent API and create a `KieBase` from it:

       Model model = new ModelImpl().addRule( rule );
       KieBase kieBase = KieBaseBuilder.createKieBaseFromModel( model );

### 22.20. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.7.0

#### 22.20.1. Project Oriented Workbench

Workbench becomes Project Oriented. Meaning each project is now in a dedicated repository. Previously each project was in a folder and one repository could hold several projects. These changes merge the concepts of Project and Repository.

One project one repository approach makes the UI simpler and improves releasing or freezing a single project. Previously if a project was frozen, branched or tagged the repository was still shared with other projects, making the release control harder and more complicated.

Projects from older Workbench versions need to be migrated to the new setup. For this we offer a command line migration tool.

Project Orientated does not, at the moment, offer support for multimodule setup. This feature is planned, but not in this release. The now deprecated Asset Management features depended on multimodule support and can not be migrated to this Workbench version.

#### 22.20.2. Connecting to a headless Drools controller

When running a Workbench instance, there is now greater flexibility to decide how Kie Server instances will be managed. Previously, whenever a Workbench is started, it would always start an embedded Drools controller. This setup is still available but now there is also an option to not start this service and instead connect to a headless Drools controller. This allows a more fine grained deployment model where it’s possible to decide the best approach for a specific scenario.

To switch between these modes, a key system property is used: org.kie.workbench.controller. By default, the Workbench will continue to start the embedded service if this system property is missing. Otherwise, it will try to connect to the remote service and also ensure that none of the embedded services are started.

It is important to note that only Web Socket connection protocol is available to use when connecting to headless Drools controller.

For more details regarding all possible system configs regarding user name, password, token and secured password via key store, please refer to Workbench system properties.

#### 22.20.3. Content management enhancements

##### 22.20.3.1. Properties panel

It is possible to edit the properties of the different page elements including, the page itself or any of its rows and components. Once an element is selected, either by hovering on the element and clicking on the editor’s area or selecting the element in the Properties panel dropdown, its properties are displayed in the left docked panel. See screenshot:

Figure 388. Content management properties panel

The properties available in this version are basically those related with the element style such as width, height or margins, amongst others. The properties available might differ for each type. Notice for example, the HTML component provides an extra set of properties all related with the text style.

Once a property is changed, its value is reflected in the editor’s area, both in design and preview modes.

##### 22.20.3.2. Screen component removed

The Screen component, which was placed under the Core group in the right sidebar’s Components panel, has been removed. The reason is, this component was not suitable for production environments.

In future versions though, domain related components, such as a BPM’s task list, will be available for easy consumption by end users.

#### 22.20.4. New Migration Tool

A new command line Migration tool with support for Linux and Windows has been provided to move different resources to it’s latest version. It makes possible to perform different migrations:

- Project Migration: migrates KIE projects from the old project layout (7.4.x and previous) to the new project-oriented structure.

- Forms Migration: migrates old jBPM Form Modeler forms into the new Forms format.

Figure 389. Command Line Migration Tool

You can find more info here.

### 22.21. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.6.0

#### 22.21.1. Content management enhancements

A few extra changes have been introduced in the Content Management tooling (aka Page Authoring) in order to improve the user experience. The following screenshot reveals the changes introduced since the latest version.

Figure 390. Content management new look & feel

##### 22.21.1.1. Fluid/Page editor mode selection

The new page pop up allows for the selection of two edition modes:

Figure 391. Content management’s new page pop up

- Fluid: it acts more as a classical web page, showing a vertical scrollbar when the page exceeds the available height.

- Page: it was the default in previous versions. When selected, it forces the page to always fit the window’s 100% height.

##### 22.21.1.2. Preview feature

Page authors can go back and forth from the Editor to the Preview mode as many times as needed. In the Preview mode all the editor’s controls are removed, allowing for the display of the page as it would be seen by end users once the page is published.

##### 22.21.1.3. Use dock panels to increase the editor content area

In order to increase the available space in the editor’s central area, the page listing, the navigation configuration and the component palette panels have all been moved to the left sidebar as docked panels.

##### 22.21.1.4. Component palette reorganization

In previous versions, there only existed one single category of components in the palette. As of version 7.6, the components are now grouped into three main categories:

- Core: HTML and Page components

- Navigation: Menu Bar, Tree, Tiles, Tab List, Carousel and Target Div

- Reporting: Bar, Pie, Line, Area, Map, Bubble, Metric, Meter, Table and Filter

The goal of these changes is to make the palette more appealing as well as to ease the selection of the target component to drag.

### 22.22. New Drools controller client API

In order to facilitate the management of Drools controller related tasks such as creating server templates, starting and stopping containers, etc, we developed a new Java client API available under the kie-server-controller-client Maven module. With this API, you can connect to a Drools controllerusing either REST or Web Socket protocols. For more details, see Drools controller Client API chapter.

### 22.23. Breaking changes in Kie Server 7.5.1 from 7.0

#### 22.23.1. Drools controller API changes

Changes to `SpecManagementService` interface:

- Included new method `getContainerInfo` that allows to retrieve a single `ContainerSpec` defined in a `ServerTemplate`.

- Changed methods `listContainerSpec`, `listServerTemplateKeys`, and `listServerTemplates` return types from generic collection to specific domain list types (`ContainerSpecList`, `ServerTemplateKeyList`, and `ServerTemplateList`) in order to properly serialize and deserialize the returned values using JAXB and JSON.

Changes to `RuleCapabilitiesService` interface:

- `startScanner` method now uses a `java.lang.Long` time instead of a primitive `long` for the `interval` parameter in order to avoid JSON and JAXB serialization issues.

Changes to `RuntimeManagementService` interface:

- Changed methods `getContainers` and `getServerInstances` return types from generic collection to specific domain list types (`ContainerList` and `ServerInstanceKeyList`) in order to properly serialize and deserialize the returned values using JAXB and JSON.

For more details, see JBPM-6243.

#### 22.23.2. Kie Server API changes

Changes to `ServiceResponse` wrapper:

- Moved `ResponseType` enum and common methods to a new interface called `KieServiceResponse`, allowing it to be extended to multiple implementations.

### 22.24. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.5.0

#### 22.24.1. Content management enhancements

Remarkable changes have been introduced in the Content Management (aka Dashboards) tooling in order to improve the user experience.

##### 22.24.1.1. Perspective to page renaming

The "page" term is far more familiar to users. Notice that, "perspective" is a concept that was borrowed from the Eclipse development tool, thus it is a concept mostly used in developer circles. Page is more related to web content, easier to understand by regular people. For this reason, perspective has been renamed to page all over the tooling.

##### 22.24.1.2. Left sidebar new look and feel

This is the most noticeable change introduced. The left sidebar has been completely rewritten in order to provide an enhanced look and feel.

Figure 392. Content management tooling’s left side bar

The two sections Pages and Navigation have been merged into a single view. From this view users can either create new pages or change the navigation configuration.

The Navigation section lists the navigation trees. Specifically, the tree named Workbench is available by default, it can not be deleted and it contains the entries displayed in the workbench’s top mega menu. Any change applied to it will cause the mega menu to modify its entries. This is actually the mechanism users must use to extend the workbench with new pages.

##### 22.24.1.3. Tags button disabled

The tags feature or the ability to attach a set of labels to a page during edition time has been removed. This feature in combination with the former "Apps" perspective was used to allow users to publish their dynamic pages in a categorized way. This feature is no longer needed. During the edition of a page, the Tags button, that used to appear at the editor’s top right button bar, has been removed.

As a replacement, users can leverage the existing navigation features to create new pages and attach them to the workbench’s mega menu.

#### 22.24.2. Extra navigation components

The existing navigation components available in the Content Management tooling have been extended with some extra types. To date there exist the following components:

- Tile navigator

- Tab list

- Carousel

The following have recently been added to the release:

##### 22.24.2.1. Menu bar

As its name states, this component displays the entries of a navigation tree in a manu bar shape. There is no limit to the number of levels supported. When a page item is clicked, the page content is displayed in the Target div (see details below) component specified in the menu bar’s configuration.

Figure 393. Menu bar navigation component

##### 22.24.2.2. Tree navigator

Same as the Menu bar, but the entries are displayed as a vertical tree structure.

Figure 394. Menu bar navigation component

##### 22.24.2.3. Target div

Both the Carousel and the Tile navigator components can handle by themselves the display of the items the user clicks on. Others like Tab list, Menu bar and Tree navigator require a Target div component as its display output since they have a clear separation between the display of its entries and the content of the last item clicked.

So, every time, a Target div based navigation component is dropped into a page, a Target div component must have been dropped as well, so that the first one can link to it. The following screen shows the configuration panel that is displayed every time a target div based component is dropped into a page.

Figure 395. Target div based navigation components configuration

The navigation group is mandatory for all the navigation components as it indicates the navigation structure to display whereas the Target div setting is not available for non target div components like Carousel or Tile navigator.

### 22.25. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.4.0

#### 22.25.1. Guided Decision Table improvements

In addition to fixing numerous bugs the Wizard used to create and edit columns has been improved to show descriptions of the different steps required for the different column types.

Figure 396. Guided Decision Table Wizard example 1
Figure 397. Guided Decision Table Wizard example 2

#### 22.25.2. Disable experimental editors

The following features are considered experimental and can be disabled using the Security/User Management administration screen:-

- Guided Decision Tree Editor

- Guided Score Card Editor

- XLS Score Card Editor

- (New) BPMN2 Process Editor

- Deployments/Server Provisioning Perspective

These features are enabled by default.

Figure 398. Disabling an Editor

### 22.26. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.3.0

#### 22.26.1. New Home and Menu Bar

The Home page, Menu bar and About popup now have a new design. Menu items are split into groups representing major functional areas.

Figure 399. Home view with Menu expanded
Figure 400. About popup

#### 22.26.2. Admin page changes

The Admin page is now accessible with the cog icon on the Menu bar and has more items. Access to the perspective artifacts, Data Sets, Data Sources and Language options have been moved there.

Figure 401. Admin page

### 22.27. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.1

### 22.28. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.1.0

#### 22.28.1. Project Metrics Dashboard

A brand new dashboard is now available for every project listed in the authoring library. After opening the project details page, a metrics card shows up on the right side of the screen.

Figure 402. Project Metrics Card

The card shows the history of contributions (commits) made to that specific project over time. Click the View All link to access the full dashboard that shows several metrics all about the project’s contributions.

Figure 403. Project Metrics Dashboard

Notice that different filter controls are available for selecting the contributions made either by a concrete user or in a specific time frame.

#### 22.28.2. Teams Metrics Dashboard

A brand new dashboard has also been added to the Teams page. A metrics card on the right side shows the history of all contributions (commits).

Figure 404. Teams Metrics Card

Click the View All link to access the full dashboard showing overall contributions metrics.

Figure 405. Teams Metrics Dashboard

Note that different filter controls are available for selecting the contributions by different criteria:

- by a concrete user,

- within a specific time frame,

- by team or,

- by project.

This dashboard replaces the former Authoring>Contributors dashboard, which is no longer available at the top menu bar of the workbench.

### 22.29. New and Noteworthy in Drools 7.0

#### 22.29.1. Core Engine

##### 22.29.1.1. DMN Runtime Support

Drools now has complete runtime support for DMN (Decision Model and Notation). DMN files are now an asset that can be added to any kjar for execution. Please refer to the DMN section for details on how to build and execute DMN models.

At this time, no DMN authoring is supported, but it will be supported in future versions.

##### 22.29.1.2. Multithreaded evaluation in the Drools engine

| This feature is experimental in Drools 7.0.

In Drools 7.0, the Drools engine can now evaluate more business rules in parallel by dividing the RETE and PHREAK pattern-matching algorithms in independent partitions and evaluating them in parallel.

Multithreaded evaluation is disabled by default in Drools. To enable multithreaded evaluation for a parallel KIE base, use one of the following options:

- Enable multithreaded evaluation with `KieBaseConfiguration`:

      KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
      KieBaseConfiguration kieBaseConf = ks.newKieBaseConfiguration();
      kieBaseConf.setOption(MultithreadEvaluationOption.YES);
      KieBase kieBase = kieContainer.newKieBase(kieBaseConf);

- Enable the multithreaded evaluation system property:

      drools.multithreadEvaluation = true

| Rules that use queries, salience, or agenda groups are currently not supported by the parallel Drools engine. If these rule elements are present in the KIE base, the compiler emits a warning and automatically switches back to single-threaded evaluation. However, in some cases, the Drools engine might not detect the unsupported rule elements and rules might be evaluated incorrectly. For example, the Drools engine might not detect when rules rely on implicit salience given by rule ordering inside the DRL file, resulting in incorrect evaluation due to the unsupported salience attribute.

##### 22.29.1.3. OOPath improvements

| This feature is experimental

OOPath has been introduced with Drools 6.3.0 but in Drools 7.0.0 the syntax has been slightly changed to make it closer to standard xpath one. This means that constraints have to be put between square brackets instead of curly ones and inline cast has to be expressed out of constraints. For instance the following oopath expressed with 6.x syntax:

    /list{#SubClass, prop == 0}

in Drools 7.x becomes:

    /list#SubClass[prop == 0]

Also Drools 7.0.0 improves the support for standard Java Collection, with a dedicated implementation for `List` and `Set`, as specialized `ReactiveList` and `ReactiveSet`; a `ReactiveCollection` is also available. This also includes out of the box reactive support when performing mutable operations through their `Iterator` and `ListIterator`.

Example:

    public class School extends AbstractReactiveObject {
        private String name;
        private final List<Child> children = new ReactiveList<Child>(); (1)

        public void setName(String name) {
            this.name = name;
            notifyModification(); (2)
        }

        public void addChild(Child child) {
            children.add(child); (3)
            // no need to call notifyModification() here.
        }

1 | Using specialized `ReactiveList` for reactive support over standard Java `List`.
2 | Usually `notifyModification()` is required to be called when a field is changed for reactive support
3 | but in the case of `ReactiveList` this is handled automatically, like every other mutating operations performed over the field `children`.

| As a best-practice, it is recommended to declare reactive collection fields `final` as per the example shown.

###### OOPath Maven plug-in

The Kie Maven plug-in offers a new goal `injectreactive` to instrument bytecode and automatically inject reactivity support for standard cases.

The `injectreactive` goal is disabled by default, and can be enabled via Maven plug-in configuration `instrument-enabled` settings.

Example:

    <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
    <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <extensions>true</extensions>
    <configuration>
        <instrument-enabled>true</instrument-enabled> (1)
    </configuration>

1 | Enable the `injectreactive` goal.

The `injectreactive` goal will instrument bytecode pertaining to the Maven project build’s output directory `${project.build.outputDirectory}`.

It is possible to limit the scope of the goal to a specific package or hierarchy of packages via Maven plug-in configuration `instrument-packages` settings list. .Example:

    <groupId>org.kie</groupId>
    <artifactId>kie-maven-plugin</artifactId>
    <extensions>true</extensions>
    <configuration>
        <instrument-enabled>true</instrument-enabled>
        <instrument-packages>
            <instrumentPackage>to.instrument</instrumentPackage> (1)
            <instrumentPackage>org.drools.compiler.xpath.tobeinstrumented.*</instrumentPackage> (2)
        </instrument-packages>
    </configuration>

1 | Limit scope of instrumentation specifically to `to.instrument` package only.
2 | Limit scope of instrumentation to `org.drools.compiler.xpath.tobeinstrumented` and its children packages.

The plug-in will instrument bytecode for every field assignment under the following standard cases:

- a field assignment will also trigger `notifyModification()`

- wrap any field defined as List with a `ReactiveList`

- wrap any field defined as Set with a `ReactiveSet`

- wrap any field defined as Collection with a `ReactiveCollection`

| In order for a field of type List/Set to be wrapped correctly, the field member of the java class must be declared specifically using either `java.util.Collection`, `java.util.List` or `java.util.Set` (declaring for instance a field as `java.util.ArrayList` will not be instrumented with the specialized reactive collections).

| It is not recommended to mix manual support for reactivity (implemented manually) and the bytecode instrumentation Maven plug-in; it is better envisaged to keep the two scopes distinct, for instance by making use of the plug-in configuration to instrument only specific packages as documented above.

The following section present detailed examples of the plug-in instrumentation.

Instrumentation of field assignments

A field assignment like in the following example:

Original:

    public class Toy {
        private String owner;
        ...

        public void setOwner(String owner) {
            this.owner = owner;
        }
    }

will be instrumented by intercepting the field assignment and triggering the `notifyModification()`:

Result:

    public class Toy implements ReactiveObject {
        private String owner;
        ...

        public void setOwner(final String owner) {
            this.$$_drools_write_owner(owner);
        }

        public void $$_drools_write_owner(final String owner) {
            this.owner = owner;
            ReactiveObjectUtil.notifyModification((ReactiveObject) this);
        }
    }

Please notice this instrumentation applies only if the field is not a `Collection`.

In the case the field assignment is referring a `List` or a `Set`, the instrumentation will wrap the assignment with a `ReactiveList` or ``ReactiveSet` accordingly; for example:

Original:

    public class School {
        private final String name;
        private final List<Child> children = new ArrayList<Child>();
        ...

        public School(String name) {
            this.name = name;
        }

        public List<Child> getChildren() {
            return children;
        }
    }

will be instrumented by intercepting and wrapping with `ReactiveList`:

Result:

    public class School implements ReactiveObject {
        private final String name;
        private final List<Child> children;

        public School(final String name) {
            this.$$_drools_write_children(new ArrayList());
            this.name = name;
        }

        public List<Child> getChildren() {
            return this.children;
        }

        public void $$_drools_write_children(final List list) {
            this.children = (List<Child>) new ReactiveList(list);
        }

##### 22.29.1.4. PMML Support

| This feature is experimental

| This feature makes use of Rule Units

Drools now support assets that conform to a subset of the Predictive Modeling Markup Language (PMML). The following predictive model types are now supported:

- Regression

- Scorecard

- Tree

Additionally, the Mining model type has partial support; with the following modes currently available:

- Model Chain

- Select All

- Select First

Further modes of operation will be supported as they become available.

##### 22.29.1.5. Soft expiration for events

When explicitly defining an event expiration in Drools 6.x, it is always considered an hard expiration, meaning that it always takes precedence on any other expiration implicitly calculated on temporal windows and constraints where the event is involved. Drools 7 also allows to specify a soft expiration for events that can be used if the inferred expiration offset is infinite. In this way it is possible to have a guaranteed expiration that is either the inferred one or the specified one if the other is missing. Moreover this implies that rule authors are not required to include a temporal constraint in all rules and then event classes can be designed even if the rules are not yet known.

By default event expiration is considered to be hard, but it is possible to change the expiration policy and define a soft expiration either annotating the event’s class as it follows:

    @Role(Role.Type.EVENT)
    @Expires( value = "30s", policy = TIME_SOFT )
    public class MyEvent { ... }

or using a type declaration:

    declare MyEvent
      @role( event )
      @expires(value = 30s, policy = TIME_SOFT)
    end

##### 22.29.1.6. Rule Units

| This feature is experimental

Rule units represent a purely declarative approach to partition a rules set into smaller units, binding different data sources to those units and orchestrate the execution of the individual unit. A rule unit is an aggregate of data sources, global variables and rules.

#### 22.29.2. Business Central

Apart from the generic improvements to Business Central (listed below in a separate section), there are also some Drools-specific enhancements in Business Central.

##### 22.29.2.1. DMN style hit policies for Decision Tables

With each Hit Policy, by default a row has priority over each row below it.

- Unique Hit With unique hit policy each row has to be unique meaning there can be no overlap. There can never be a situation where two rows can fire, if there is the Verification feature warns about this on development time.

- First Hit First hit fires only one row, the one that is satisfied first from top to bottom.

- Resolved Hit Similar to First Hit, but you can for example give row 10 priority over row 5. This means you can keep the order of the rows you want for visual readability, but specify priority exceptions.

- Rule Order Multiple rows can fire and Verification does not report about conflicts between the rows since they are expected to happen.

- None This is the normal hit mode. Old decision tables will use this by default, but since 7.0 uses PHREAK the row order now matters. There is no migration tooling needed for the old tables. Multiple rows can fire. Verification warns about rows that conflict.

##### 22.29.2.2. Guided Rule Editor : Support formulae in composite field constraints

Composite field constraints now support use of formulae.

When adding constraints to a Pattern the "Multiple Field Constraint" selection ("All of (and)" and "Any of (or)") supports use of formulae in addition to expressions.

Figure 406. Composite field constraint - Select formula
Figure 407. Composite field constraint - Formula editor

##### 22.29.2.3. Guided Decision Table Editor : New editor

The Guided Decision Table Editor has been extensively rewritten to support editing of multiple tables in the same editor. Tables that share an association are visibly linked making it easier to visualise relationships. Associations are infered from Actions that create or update a Fact consumed by the Conditions of another table.

Highlights include:-

- A new look and feel

- Resizable columns

- Reordering of columns by dragging and dropping "in table"

- Reordering of rows by dragging and dropping "in table"

- Repositioning of tables with drag and drop

- Panning of view to scroll content

- Zoomable view, so you can zoom "out" to see more content at once

- File locks and Version History per Decision Table

Figure 408. New editor
Figure 409. New editor - multiple open tables

##### 22.29.2.4. Guided Decision Table Editor : Caching of enumeration lookups

The Guided Decision Table Editor has long been capable of using enumeration definitions. However since a table can contain many cells performance of enumerations could sometimes be less than ideal if the definition required a server round-trip to retrieve the lookups from a helper class.

Results from server round-trips are now cached in the client hence removing the need for successive network calls when cells are modified. The cache is initialised when the editor is opened and populated on demand.

##### 22.29.2.5. Guided Decision Table Editor : Verification and Validation

###### System Property

It is possible to disable the Verification & Validation with the system property ``org.kie.verification.disable-dtable-realtime-verification. This can be useful for large decision tables or if the users want to ignore V&V.

###### Range Checks

The verification takes the first steps towards helping you to make complete decision tables. In the next release we add the support for checking if all the ranges are covered for boolean, numeric and date values. This means if your table has a check for if an Application is approved the verification report will remind you to make sure you also handle situations where the Application was not approved.

###### Unique Single Hit

In the past verification and validation has raised an issue if rows subsume each other. If a row subsumes another, then the conditions can be satisfied with the same set of facts. Meaning two rows from the same table can fire at the same time. In some cases subsumption does not matter, but in other cases you want to have a table where only one rule fires at the time. The table is then a single hit decision table. To help the making of single hit tables where only one row can fire, the verification keeps an eye on the conditions. Reporting situations when single hit is broken.

### 22.30. Breaking changes in Drools 7.0 from 6.x

#### 22.30.1. Property reactivity enabled by default

Property reactivity has been introduced in Drools 5.4 but users had to explicitly enable it on a class by class basis through the `@PropertyReactive` annotation or on the whole KIE base using the `PropertySpecificOption.ALWAYS` builder option. However, since using this feature is considered a good practice both under correctness and performance points of view, it has been enabled by default in Drools 7.0. If required it is possible to disable property reactivity and reconfigure Drools 7.0 to work exactly as it did in version 6.x by adding the following configuration to the kmodule.xml file.

    <configuration>
      <property key="drools.propertySpecific" value="ALLOWED"/>
    </configuration>

#### 22.30.2. Type preserving accumulate functions

In Drools 6 when using the `sum` function inside an accumulate pattern the result was always a Double regardless of the field type on which the sum was performed. This caused the following 3 problems:

- Loss of precision: the sum of a long `1881617265586265321L` will incorrectly return `1.88161726558626534E18`. The BigDecimal sum of `0.09` and `0.01` will also be incorrect.

- Loss of performance: summing with a Double total is significantly slower than summing with a Long or an Integer.

- Leaked complexity: it enforced the user to pattern matching on Double, or more generically (suggested choice) on Number, while it may be expected that the result of summing on a field of type Integer would be an Integer as well.

Conversely Drools 7 preserves the type of the expression on which the sum is executed, so it will be possible to directly match on that type as in:

    Long(...) from accumulate(..., sum($p.getLongWeight()))

#### 22.30.3. Renaming TimedRuleExecutionOption

The KieSession option to control when timed rules have to be automatically executed has been renamed into `TimedRuleExecutionOption` fixing a typing mistake in its name which affected previous releases; the property has been aligned into `drools.timedRuleExecution`.

Table 97. Name changes
| previous releases | version `7.0.0.Final`
--- | --- | ---
KieSession option | `TimedRuleExectionOption` | `TimedRuleExecutionOption`
property | `drools.timedRuleExection` | `drools.timedRuleExecution`

#### 22.30.4. Renaming and unification of configuration files

In Drools 6.x, the default Drools configuration properties were configured in two distinct files: * `drools.default.rulebase.conf` located in the META-INF folder of drools-core * `drools.default.packagebuilder.conf` located in the META-INF folder of of drools-compiler

In Drools 7.0.0, these files are unified into a single one named `kie.default.properties.conf`, located in the META-INF folder of drools-core. If you want to override the default values of these properties or add your own, you can put them in a file called `kie.properties.conf` located in the META-INF folder of your project.

### 22.31. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 7.0.0

The workbench has been updated to support Wildfly 10 and EAP7. Minimum Java requirement is JDK8.

#### 22.31.1. New Authoring (Library)

Authoring now has a new design, with a better information organization. It’s now possible to manage (create, delete and edit) Teams (Organizational Units), list Projects in a Repository and the Assets in a Project. When an Asset is selected, you can see the Asset Editor and the Project Explorer.

| The Library uses the indexing of the Workbench. It is, therefore, imperative that existing index information is deleted so that the Workbench can rebuild them with the necessary information. Index information is stored in the `.index` folder within your application servers `\bin` folder (or as you may have configured otherwise with the `org.uberfire.metadata.index.dir` System Property).

Figure 410. Teams view
Figure 411. Teams creation
Figure 412. Empty Repository
Figure 413. Repository with Projects
Figure 414. Empty Project
Figure 415. Project with Assets
Figure 416. Asset View

Also, you can set some preferences about your default workspace by accessing Home > Admin > Library.

Figure 417. Library Preferences

#### 22.31.2. Authoring - Imports of Examples

Prior to 7.x the Workbench used to install pre-defined examples at startup.

Version 7.x brings the ability to import examples from git repositories. The Authoring Perspective contains a menu item for 'Examples' clicking this launches a Wizard to guide you through the import.

Example 191. Menu item

The Authoring Perspective contains a menu item for 'Examples'.

Example 192. Wizard - Enter source Repository

Page 1 of the Wizard allows the User to select a pre-defined examples repository, or enter their own URL.

Example 193. Wizard - Select Project(s)

Page 2 of the Wizard lists Projects available in the source repository.

Example 194. Wizard - Enter target Repository

Page 3 of the Wizard allows the User to enter a target Repository name and associate it with an Organizational Unit.

#### 22.31.3. Authoring - Pop-ups improvements

All system pop-ups had their UX improved.

The "comment" field is hidden by default.

Now, the destination package can be selected when a project file is copied from any package.

#### 22.31.4. Authoring - Project Editor - Reimport button

The "Reimport" button invalidates all cached dependencies, in order to handle scenarios where a specific dependency was updated without having its version modified.

#### 22.31.5. Security Management

The User and Group management perspectives released in version 6.4 have been unified into a single perspective which delivers a shared view for managing both users and groups as well as the permissions granted to any of the application roles.

This very new perspective is placed under the Home section in the top menu bar.

Figure 418. Link to the Security Management perspective

The next screenshot shows how this new perspective looks:

Figure 419. Security Management Home

A tabbed pane is shown on the left, allowing the User to select the Roles, Groups or Users tab. After clicking on a Role (or Group) a detailed screen is displayed allowing the user to configure some security settings.

Figure 420. Role security settings

- Home Perspective: The target perspective where the user is directed after login, which makes it possible to have different home pages per role/group.

- Priority: Used to determine what settings (home perspective, permissions, …​) have precedence for those users with more than one role or group assigned.

- Permissions: A full ACL (Access Control List) editor for grant/deny permissions over the different resources available in the platform like Perspectives, Organizational Units, Repositories or Projects. Global permissions on top of any of those resource types can be ovewritten by means of adding individual exceptions which makes it possible to implement both the grant all deny a few or the deny all grant a few strategies.

#### 22.31.6. kie-config-cli has been removed

The command-line tool `kie-config-cli.[sh/bat]` for managing remote repositories that was present in 6.x has been removed for the following reasons:

- The security-related operations it provided (`add-role-repo`, `remove-role-repo`, `add-role-org-unit`, `remove-role-org-unit`, `add-role-project`, `remove-role-project`) have been replaced by more comprehensive Security management feature.

- The operations related to managing deployments (`list-deployment`, `add-deployment`, `remove-deployment`) no longer make sense, since jBPM Runtime has been removed from workbench. Deployments can still be managed programmatically using Kie Server REST API.

- The remaining operations (`create-org-unit`, `remove-org-unit`, `list-org-units`, `create-repo`, `remove-repo`, `list-repo`, `add-repo-org-unit`, `remove-repo-org-unit`, `list-project-details`) are available as a part of Knowledge Store REST API.

#### 22.31.7. User and Project Admin Pages and Preferences

The workbench now has a new menu item: "Admin". In there, you can find some admin tools, like "Users", "Groups" and "Roles" management, and also general preferences. When a preference is changed there, it will affect all places that depend on it, but only for the logged user.

Figure 421. User admin page access
Figure 422. User admin page, that contains user level tools and preferences

Each project also has its own admin page, with admin tools and preferences. When a preference is changed there, it will affect only that project, and only for the logged user.

Figure 423. Project admin page access
Figure 424. Project admin page, that contains project level tools and preferences

#### 22.31.8. GAV conflict check and child GAV edition

It is now possible, for each user, to set the GAV conflict check flag, and also allow or block child GAV edition for all their projects, or specifically for each project.

The configuration can be found inside the admin tool "Project", in case the access is made through the "Admin" menu item. It can also be found by entering the admin tool "General", on the Project admin page.

Figure 425. Group Artifact Version (GAV) preferences

#### 22.31.9. Data Source Management

The new data source management system empowers the workbench with the ability of defining data sources and drivers for accessing external databases.

Some of the included functionalities are:

- A new perspective for managing the data sources:

Figure 426. Data Source Authoring Perspective

- A new wizard for guiding the data source creation.

Figure 427. New Data Source Wizard

- A new wizard for guiding the drivers creation.

Figure 428. New Driver Wizard

And the ability of browsing the database information for the databases pointed to by the data sources.

- Available schemas browsing

Figure 429. Database schemas

- Available tables browsing

Figure 430. Schema tables

- Table content browsing

Figure 431. Table information

### 22.32. Breaking changes in Kie Server 7.0 from 6.x

#### 22.32.1. ServiceResponse XStream marshalling changes

| This release note applies only when directly interfacing with the Kie Server (kie-server) API, not when using the Kie Server Java Client (kie-server-client) API.

In an effort to be more consistent with JAXB marshalling, XStream marshalling has undergone the following changes:

- The XML ServiceResponse element’s `response` object no longer renders with the canonical name.

- XStream now uses `type` and `msg` as attributes, not child elements.

For more details, see DROOLS-1509.

#### 22.32.2. Simplified Planner REST API

##### 22.32.2.1. ServiceResponse wrapper removal

`ServiceResponse` wrapper has been removed from Planner service responses returned by KIE Server. This allows an easier processing of the responses on the client side.

    <solver-instance>
        ...
        <status>SOLVING</status>
        <score scoreClass="org.optaplanner.core.api.score.buildin.hardsoft.HardSoftScore">0hard/-10soft</score>
        <best-solution class="curriculumcourse.curriculumcourse.CourseSchedule">
            ...
        </best-solution>
    </solver-instance>

##### 22.32.2.2. New Planner API overview

Register a solver:

- PUT http://${kie-server}/services/rest/server/containers/${container_id}/solvers/${solver_id}

Submit a solution:

- POST http://${kie-server}/services/rest/server/containers/${container_id}/solvers/${solver_id}/state/solving

Get the best solution:

- GET http://${kie-server}/services/rest/server/containers/${container_id}/solvers/${solver_id}/bestsolution

Terminate a solver:

- POST http://${kie-server}/services/rest/server/containers/${container_id}/solvers/${solver_id}/state/terminating-early

Dispose a solver:

- DELETE http://${kie-server}/services/rest/server/containers/${container_id}/solvers/${solver_id}

### 22.33. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.5.0

#### 22.33.1. Configurable ThreadFactory

Some runtime environments (like for example Google App Engine) don’t allow to directly create new Threads. For this reason it is now possible to plug your own ThreadFactory implementation by setting the system property drools.threadFactory with its class name. For instance if you implemented your Google App Engine compatible ThreadFactory with the class `com.user.project.GoogleAppEngineThreadFactory` you can make Drools to use it by setting:

    drools.threadFactory = com.user.project.GoogleAppEngineThreadFactory

#### 22.33.2. Use of any expressions as input for a query

It is now possible to use as input argument for a query both the field of a fact as in:

    query contains(String $s, String $c)
        $s := String( this.contains( $c ) )
    end

    rule PersonNamesWithA when
        $p : Person()
        contains( $p.name, "a"; )
    then
    end

and more in general any kind of valid expression like in:

    query checkLength(String $s, int $l)
        $s := String( length == $l )
    end

    rule CheckPersonNameLength when
        $i : Integer()
        $p : Person()
        checkLength( $p.name, 1 + $i + $p.age; )
    then
    end

#### 22.33.3. Update with modified properties

Property reactivity has been introduced to avoid unwanted and useless (re)evaluations and allow the Drools engine to react only to modification of properties actually constrained or bound inside of a given pattern. However this feature is automatically available only for modifications performed inside the consequence of a rule. Conversely a programmatic update is unaware of the object’s properties that have been changed, so it is unable of using this feature.

To overcome this limitation it is now possible to optionally specify in an update statement the names of the properties that have been changed in the modified object as in the following example:

    Person me = new Person("me", 40);
    FactHandle meHandle = ksession.insert( me );

    me.setAge(41);
    me.setAddress("California Avenue");
    ksession.update( meHandle, me, "age", "address" );

#### 22.33.4. Monitoring framework improvements

A new type of MBean has been introduced in order to provide monitoring of the KieContainers, and the JMX MBeans hierarchical structure have been revisited to reflect the relationship with the related MBeans of the KieBases. The JMX objectnaming has been normalized to reflect the terminology used in the Kie API. A new type of MBean has been introduced in order to provide monitoring for Stateless KieSession, which was not available in previous releases.

Table 98. JMX objectname changes
MBean | before `6.5.x` | from `6.5.0.Final`
--- | --- | ---
KieContainer | n/a | `org.kie:kcontainerId={kcontainerId}`
KieBase | `org.drools.kbases:type={kbaseId}` | `org.kie:kcontainerId={kcontainerId},kbaseId={kbaseId}`
KieSession (stateful) | `org.drools.kbases:type={kbaseId},group=Sessions,sessionId={ksessionId}` | `org.kie:kcontainerId={kcontainerId},kbaseId={kbaseId},ksessionType=Stateful,ksessionName={ksessionName}`
Stateless KieSession | n/a | `org.kie:kcontainerId={kcontainerId},kbaseId={kbaseId},ksessionType=Stateless,ksessionName={ksessionName}`

The KieSession MBeans consolidate the statistics data for all sessions instantiated under the same name.

KieSession created via `JPAKnowledgeService`, will be monitored under a KieSession MBean having constant `{ksessionName}` valorized to `persistent`; this MBean is not managed by the KieContainer directly, hence it requires to be manually deregistered from JMX, when monitoring is no longer needed.

The new JMX objectnaming scheme now enforces proper JMX quoting for IDs, e.g.: `org.kie:kcontainerId="2cb55f40-f220-432a-aba8-7940c18bf108",kbaseId="KBase1"`

The old DroolsManagementAgent (which was registered on JMX under `org.drools:type=DroolsManagementAgent`) is no longer necessary, hence no longer registered on JMX.

The KieSession MBeans now have proper JMX `CompositeData` and `TabularData` support, where applicable. The KieSession MBeans continue to support all process-related aggregated statistics monitoring, but no longer display start/end dates for each process instances: auditing and logging support is available in jBPM for this scope.

The Drools RHQ/JON plug-in have been changed to reflect all the above mentioned changes, in addition to specific bug-fixing aiming to display hierarchical nesting correctly.

### 22.34. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.4.0

#### 22.34.1. Better Java 8 compatibility

It is now possible to use Java 8 syntax (lambdas and method references) in the Right Hand Side (then) part of a rule.

#### 22.34.2. More robust incremental compilation

The incremental compilation (dynamic rule-base update) had some relevant flaws when one or more rules with a subnetwork (rules with complex existential patterns) were involved, especially when the same subnetwork was shared among different rules. This issue required a partial rewriting of the existing incremental compilation algorithm, followed by a complete audit that has also been validated by brand new test suite made by more than 20,000 test cases only in this area.

#### 22.34.3. Improved multi-threading behaviour

Engine’s code dealing with multi-threading has been partially rewritten in order to remove a large number of synchronisation points and improve stability and predictability. In particular this new implementation allows a clearer separation and better interaction between the User thread (performing the insert/update/delete actions on the session), the Drools engine thread (doing the proper rules evaluation) and the Timer one (performing time-based actions like events expiration).

This improvement has been made possible by the new phreak algorithm introduced with Drools 6. In fact with in the ReteOO algorithm the network evaluation is performed during the User insert/update/delete action, meaning that each user action locks the entire engine. Conversely with phreak the insert/update/delete is separated and the network evaluation happens when fireAllRules or fireUntilHalt is called.

More in detail this improvement has been made by 2 parts. First of all a new thread-safe queue has been added to store all user actions as commands. This queue is populated by the User thread while its entries are flushed and processed by the Drools engine thread during the rules evaluations phase. The second part introduced a state machine coordinating the User, Timer and Engine threads and then providing a clearer and self-documenting way to model their interactions.

#### 22.34.4. OOPath improvements

| This feature is experimental

OOPath has been introduced with Drools 6.3.0. In Drools 6.4.0 it has been enhanced to support the following features:

- A constraint can also have a beckreference to an object of the graph traversed before the currently iterated one. For example the following OOPath:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams/grades{ result > ../averageResult } )

  will match only the grades having a result above the average for the passed exam.

- A constraint can also recursively be another OOPath as it follows:

      Student( $exam: /plan/exams{ /grades{ result > 20 } } )

- It is also possible to use the `?/` separator instead of the `/` one. As in the following example:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams{ course == "Big Data" }?/grades )

  By doing so the Drools engine will react to a change made to an exam, or if an exam is added to the plan, but not if a new grade is added to an existing exam. Of course if a OOPath chunk is not reactive, all remaining part of the OOPath from there till the end of the expression will be non-reactive as well. For instance the following OOPath

      Student( $grade: ?/plan/exams{ course == "Big Data" }/grades )

  will be completely non-reactive. For this reason it is not allowed to use the `?/` separator more than once in the same OOPath so an expression like:

      Student( $grade: /plan?/exams{ course == "Big Data" }?/grades )

  will cause a compile time error.

### 22.35. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 6.4.0

#### 22.35.1. New look and feel

The general look and feel in the entire workbench has been updated to adopt PatternFly. The update brings a cleaner, lightweight and more consistent user experience throughout every screen. Allowing users focus on the data and the tasks by removing all uncessary visual elements. Interactions and behaviors remain mostly unchanged, limiting the scope of this change to visual updates.

Figure 432. Workbench - New look and feel

#### 22.35.2. Various UI improvements

In addition to the PatternFly update described above which targeted the general look and feel, many individual components in the workbench have been improved to create a better user experience. This involved making sure the default size of modal popup windows is appropriate to fit the corresponding content, adjusting the size of text fields as well as aligning labels, and improving the resize behaviour of various components when used on smaller screens.

Figure 433. Workbench - Properly sized popup window
Figure 434. Workbench - Properly sized text fields and aligned labels
Figure 435. Workbench - Resized editor window with limited horizontal space

#### 22.35.3. New locales

Locales `ru` (Russian) and `zh_TW` (Chineses Traditional) have now been added.

The locales now supported are:

- Default English.

- `es` (Spanish)

- `fr` (French)

- `de` (German)

- `ja` (Japanese)

- `pt_BR` (Portuguese - Brazil)

- `zh_CN` (Chinese - Simplified)

- `zh_TW` (Chinese - Traditional)

- `ru` (Russian)

#### 22.35.4. Authoring - Imports - Consistent terminology

The Workbench used to have a section in the Project Editor for "Import Suggestions" which was really a way for Users to register classes provided by the Java Runtime environment to be available to Rule authoring. Furthermore Editors had a "Config" tab which was where Users were expected to import classes from other packages to that in which the rule is located.

Neither term was clear and both were inconsistent with each other and other aspects of the Workbench.

We have changed these terms to (hopefully) be clearer in their meaning and to be consistent with the "Data Object" term used in relation to authoring Java classes within the Workbench.

Figure 436. Project Editor - External Data Objects
Figure 437. Project Editor - Defining External Data Objects
Figure 438. Asset Editors - Data Objects

The Data Object screen lists all Data Objects in the same package as the asset and allows other Data Objects from other packages to be imported.

Figure 439. Asset Editors - Defining Data Objects available for authoring

#### 22.35.5. Disable automatic build

When navigating Projects with the Project Explorer the workbench automatically builds the selected project, displaying build messages in the Message Console. Whilst this is beneficial it can have a detremental impact on performance of the workbench when authoring large projects. The automatic build can now be disabled with the `org.kie.build.disable-project-explorer` System Property. Set the value to `true` to disable. The default value is `false`.

#### 22.35.6. Support for `SCP` style `git` Repository URLs

When cloning `git` Repositories it is now possible to use `SCP` style URLS, for example `git@github.com:user/repository.git`. If your Operating System’s public keystore is password protected the passphrase can be provided with the `org.uberfire.nio.git.ssh.passphrase` System Property.

#### 22.35.7. Authoring - Duplicate GAV detection

When performing any of the following operations a check is now made against all Maven Repositories, resolved for the Project, for whether the Project’s GroupId, ArtifactId and Version pre-exist. If a clash is found the operation is prevented; although this can be overridden by Users with the `admin` role.

| The feature can be disabled by setting the System Property `org.guvnor.project.gav.check.disabled` to `true`.

Resolved repositories are those discovered in:

- The Project’s `POM` `<repositories>` section (or any parent `POM`).

- The Project’s `POM` `<distributionManagement>` section.

- Maven’s global `settings.xml` configuration file.

Affected operations:

- Creation of new Managed Repositories.

- Saving a Project defintion with the Project Editor.

- Adding new Modules to a Managed Multi-Module Repository.

- Saving the `pom.xml` file.

- Build & installing a Project with the Project Editor.

- Build & deploying a Project with the Project Editor.

- Asset Management operations building, installing or deloying Projects.

- `REST` operations creating, installing or deploying Projects.

Users with the `Admin` role can override the list of Repositories checked using the "Repositories" settings in the Project Editor.

Figure 440. Project Editor - Viewing resolved Repositories
Figure 441. Project Editor - The list of resolved Repositories
Figure 442. Duplicate GAV detected

#### 22.35.8. New Execution Server Management User Interface

The KIE Execution Server Management UI has been completely redesigned to adjust to major improvements introduced recently. Besides the fact that new UI has been built from scratch and following best practices provided by PatternFly, the new interface expands previous features giving users more control of their servers.

Figure 443. KIE Execution Server - New user interface

#### 22.35.9. User and group management

Provides the backend services and an intuitive and friendly user interface that allows the workbench administrators to manage the application’s users and groups.

This interface provides to the workbench administrators the ability to perform realm related operations such as create users, create groups, assign groups or roles to a given user, etc.

It comes by default with built-in implementations for the administration of Wildfly, EAP and Tomcat default realms, and it’s designed to be extensible - any third party realm management system can be easily integrated into the workbench.

### 22.36. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.3.0

#### 22.36.1. Browsing graphs of objects with OOPath

| This feature is experimental

When the field of a fact is a collection it is possible to bind and reason over all the items in that collection on by one using the `from` keyword. Nevertheless, when it is required to browse a graph of object the extensive use of the `from` conditional element may result in a verbose and cubersome syntax like in the following example:

Example 195. Browsing a graph of objects with from

    rule "Find all grades for Big Data exam" when
        $student: Student( $plan: plan )
        $exam: Exam( course == "Big Data" ) from $plan.exams
        $grade: Grade() from $exam.grades
    then /* RHS */ end

In this example it has been assumed to use a domain model consisting of a `Student` who has a `Plan` of study: a `Plan` can have zero or more `Exam`s and an `Exam` zero or more `Grade`s. Note that only the root object of the graph (the `Student` in this case) needs to be in the working memory in order to make this works.

By borrowing ideas from XPath, this syntax can be made more succinct, as XPath has a compact notation for navigating through related elements while handling collections and filtering constraints. This XPath-inspired notation has been called `OOPath` since it is explictly intended to browse graph of objects. Using this notation the former example can be rewritten as it follows:

Example 196. Browsing a graph of objects with OOPath

    rule "Find all grades for Big Data exam" when
        Student( $grade: /plan/exams[course == "Big Data"]/grades )
    then /* RHS */ end

Formally, the core grammar of an `OOPath` expression can be defined in EBNF notation in this way.

    OOPExpr = "/" OOPSegment { ( "/" | "." ) OOPSegment } ;
    OOPSegment = [ID ( ":" | ":=" )] ID ["[" Number "]"] ["{" Constraints "}"];

In practice an `OOPath` expression has the following features.

- It has to start with `/`.

- It can dereference a single property of an object with the `.` operator

- It can dereference a multiple property of an object using the `/` operator. If a collection is returned, it will iterate over the values in the collection

- While traversing referenced objects it can filter away those not satisfying one or more constraints, written as predicate expressions between curly brackets like in:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams[course == "Big Data"]/grades )

- Items can also be accessed by their index by putting it between square brackets like in:

      Student( $grade: /plan/exams[0]/grades )

  To adhere to Java convention OOPath indexes are 0-based, compared to XPath 1-based

##### 22.36.1.1. Reactive OOPath

At the moment Drools is not able to react to updates involving a deeply nested traversed during the evaluation of an `OOPath` expression. To make these objects reactive to changes at the moment it is necessary to make them extend the class `org.drools.core.phreak.ReactiveObject`. It is planned to overcome this limitation by implementing a mechanism that automatically instruments the classes belonging to a specific domain model.

Having extendend that class, the domain objects can notify the Drools engine when one of its field has been updated by invoking the inherited method `notifyModification` as in the following example:

Example 197. Notifying the Drools engine that an exam has been moved to a different course

    public void setCourse(String course) {
        this.course = course;
        notifyModification(this);
    }

In this way if an exam is moved to a different course, the rule is re-triggered and the list of grades matching the rule recomputed.

#### 22.36.2. Kie Navigator View for Eclipse

A new viewer has been added to the Eclipse Tooling. This Kie Navigator View is used to manage Kie Server installations and projects.

### 22.37. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 6.3.0

#### 22.37.1. Real Time Validation and Verification for the Decision Tables

Decision tables used to have a Validation-button for validating the table. This is now removed and the table is validated after each cell value change. The validation and verification checks include:

- Redundancy

- Subsumption

- Conflicts

- Missing Columns

These checks are explained in detail in the workbench documentation.

#### 22.37.2. Improved DRL Editor

The DRL Editor has undergone a face lift; moving from a plain TextArea to using ACE Editor and a custom DRL syntax highlighter.

Figure 444. ACE Editor

#### 22.37.3. Asset locking

To avoid conflicts when editing assets, a new locking mechanism has been introduced that makes sure that only one user at a time can edit an asset. When a user begins to edit an asset, a lock will automatically be acquired. This is indicated by a lock symbol appearing on the asset title bar as well as in the project explorer view. If a user starts editing an already locked asset a pop-up notification will appear to inform the user that the asset can’t currently be edited, as it is being worked on by another user. As long as the editing user holds the lock, changes by other users will be prevented. Locks will automatically be released when the editing user saves or closes the asset, or logs out of the workbench. Every user further has the option to force a lock release in the metadata tab, if required.

Figure 445. Editing an asset automatically acquires a lock
Figure 446. Locked assets cannot be edited by other users

#### 22.37.4. Data Modeller Tool Windows

Drools and jBPM configurations, Persistence (see Generation of JPA enabled Data Models) and Advanced configurations were moved into "Tool Windows". "Tool Windows" are a new concept introduced in latest Uberfire version that enables the development of context aware screens. Each "Tool Window" will contain a domain editor that will manage a set of related Data Object parameters.

Figure 447. Drools and jBPM domain tool window
Figure 448. Persistence tool window
Figure 449. Advanced configurations tool window

#### 22.37.5. Generation of JPA enabled Data Models

Data modeller was extended to support the generation of persistable Data Objects. The persistable Data Objects are based on the JPA specification and all the underlying metadata are automatically generated.

- "The New → Data Object" Data Objects can be marked as persistable at creation time.

  Figure 450. New Data Object

- The Persistence tool window contains the JPA Domain editors for both Data Object and Field. Each editor will manage the by default generated JPA metadata

  Figure 451. Data Object level JPA domain editor
  Figure 452. Field level JPA domain editor

- Persistence configuration screen was added to the project editor.

  Figure 453. Persistence configuration

#### 22.37.6. Data Set Authoring

A new perspective for authoring data set definitions has been added. Data set definitions make it possible to retrieve data from external systems like databases, CSV/Excel files or even use a Java class to generate the data. Once the data is available it can be used, for instance, to create charts and dashboards from the Perspective Editor just feeding the charts from any of the data sets available.

Figure 454. Data Sets Authoring Perspective

### 22.38. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.2.0

#### 22.38.1. Propagation modes

The introduction of PHREAK as default algorithm for the Drools engine made the rules' evaluation lazy. This new Drools lazy behavior allowed a relevant performance boost but, in some very specific cases, breaks the semantic of a few Drools features.

More precisely in some circumstances it is necessary to propagate the insertion of new fact into th session immediately. For instance Drools allows a query to be executed in pull only (or passive) mode by prepending a '?' symbol to its invocation as in the following example:

Example 198. A passive query

    query Q (Integer i)
        String( this == i.toString() )
    end
    rule R when
        $i : Integer()
        ?Q( $i; )
    then
        System.out.println( $i );
    end

In this case, since the query is passive, it shouldn’t react to the insertion of a String matching the join condition in the query itself. In other words this sequence of commands

    KieSession ksession = ...
    ksession.insert(1);
    ksession.insert("1");
    ksession.fireAllRules();

shouldn’t cause the rule R to fire because the String satisfying the query condition has been inserted after the Integer and the passive query shouldn’t react to this insertion. Conversely the rule should fire if the insertion sequence is inverted because the insertion of the Integer, when the passive query can be satisfied by the presence of an already existing String, will trigger it.

Unfortunately the lazy nature of PHREAK doesn’t allow the Drools engine to make any distinction regarding the insertion sequence of the two facts, so the rule will fire in both cases. In circumstances like this it is necessary to evaluate the rule eagerly as done by the old RETEOO-based engine.

In other cases it is required that the propagation is eager, meaning that it is not immedate, but anyway has to happen before the Drools engine/agenda starts scheduled evaluations. For instance this is necessary when a rule has the no-loop or the lock-on-active attribute and in fact when this happens this propagation mode is automatically enforced by the Drools engine.

To cover these use cases, and in all other situations where an immediate or eager rule evaluation is required, it is possible to declaratively specify so by annotating the rule itself with @Propagation(Propagation.Type), where Propagation.Type is an enumeration with 3 possible values:

- IMMEDIATE means that the propagation is performed immediately.

- EAGER means that the propagation is performed lazily but eagerly evaluated before scheduled evaluations.

- LAZY means that the propagation is totally lazy and this is default PHREAK behaviour

This means that the following drl:

Example 199. A data-driven rule using a passive query

    query Q (Integer i)
        String( this == i.toString() )
    end
    rule R @Propagation(IMMEDIATE) when
        $i : Integer()
        ?Q( $i; )
    then
        System.out.println( $i );
    end

will make the rule R to fire if and only if the Integer is inserted after the String, thus behaving in accordance with the semantic of the passive query.

### 22.39. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 6.2.0

#### 22.39.1. Download Repository or Part of the Repository as a ZIP

This feature makes it possible to download a repository or a folder from the repository as a ZIP file.

Figure 455. Download current repository or project
Figure 456. Download a folder

#### 22.39.2. Project Editor permissions

The ability to configure role-based permissions for the Project Editor have been added.

Permissions can be configured using the `WEB-INF/classes/workbench-policy.properties` file.

The following permissions are supported:

- Save button

  `feature.wb_project_authoring_save`

- Delete button

  `feature.wb_project_authoring_delete`

- Copy button

  `feature.wb_project_authoring_copy`

- Rename button

  `feature.wb_project_authoring_rename`

- Build & Deploy button

  `feature.wb_project_authoring_buildAndDeploy`

#### 22.39.3. Unify validation style in Guided Decision Table Wizard.

All of our new screens use GWT-Bootstrap widgets and alert users to input errors in a consistent way.

One of the most noticable differences was the Guided Decision Table Wizard that alerted errors in a way inconsistent with our use of GWT-Bootstrap.

This Wizard has been updated to use the new look and feel.

Figure 457. New Guided Decision Table Wizard validation

#### 22.39.4. Improved Wizards

During the re-work of the Guided Decision Table’s Wizard to make it’s validation consistent with other areas of the application we took the opportunity to move the Wizard Framework to GWT-Bootstrap too.

The resulting appearance is much more pleasing. We hope to migrate more legacy editors to GWT-Bootstrap as time and priorities permit.

Figure 458. New Wizard Framework

#### 22.39.5. Consistent behaviour of XLS, Guided Decision Tables and Guided Templates

Consistency is a good thing for everybody. Users can expect different authoring metaphores to produce the same rule behaviour (and developers know when something is a bug!).

There were a few inconsistencies in the way XLS Decision Tables, Guidied Decision Tables and Guided Rule Templates generated the underlying rules for empty cells. These have been eliminated making their operation consistent.

- If all constraints have null values (empty cells) the Pattern is not created.

  Should you need the Pattern but no constraints; you will need to include the constraint `this != null`.

  This operation is consistent with how XLS and Guided Decision Tables have always worked.

- You can define a constraint on a String field for an empty String or white-space by delimiting it with double-quotation marks. The enclosing quotation-marks are removed from the value when generating the rules.

  The use of quotation marks for other String values is not required and they can be omitted. Their use is however essential to differentiate a constraint for an empty String from an empty cell - in which case the constraint is omitted.

#### 22.39.6. Improved Metadata Tab

The Metadata tab provided in previous versions was redesigned to provide a better asset versioning information browsing and recovery. Now every workbench editor will provide an "Overview tab" that will enable the user to manage the following information.

Figure 459. Improved Metadata Tab

- Versions history

  The versions history shows a tabular view of the asset versions and provides a "Select" button that will enable the user to load a previously created version.

  Figure 460. Versions history

- Metadata

  The metadata section gets access to additional file attributes.

  Figure 461. Metadata section

- Comments area

  The redesigned comments area enables much clearer discussions on a file.

- Version selection dropdown

  The "Version selector dropdown" located at the menu bar provides the ability to load and restore previous versions from the "Editor tab", without having to open the "Overview tab" to load the "Version history".

  Figure 462. Version selection dropdown

#### 22.39.7. Improved Data Objects Editor

The Java editor was unified to the standard workbench editors functioning. It means that and now every data object is edited on his own editor window.

Figure 463. Improved Data Object Editor

- "New → Data Object" option was added to create the data objects.

- Overview tab was added for every file to manage the file metadata and have access to the file versions history.

- Editable "Source Tab" tab was added. Now the Java code can be modified by administrators using the workbench.

- "Editor" - "Source Tab" round trip is provided. This will let administrators to do manual changes on the generated Java code and go back to the editor tab to continue working.

- Class usages detection. Whenever a Data Object is about to be deleted or renamed, the project will be scanned for the class usages. If usages are found (e.g. in drl files, decision tables, etc.) the user will receive an alert. This will prevent the user from breaking the project build.

  Figure 464. Usages detection

#### 22.39.8. Execution Server Management UI

A new perspective called Management has been added under Servers top level menu. This perspective provides users the ability to manage multiple execution servers with multiple containers. Available features includes connect to already deployed execution servers; create new, start, stop, delete or upgrade containers.

Figure 465. Management perspective

| Current version of Execution Server just supports rule based execution.

#### 22.39.9. Social Activities

A brand new feature called Social Activities has been added under a new top level menu item group called Activity.

This new feature is divided in two different perspectives: Timeline Perspective and People Perspective.

The Timeline Perspective shows on left side the recent assets created or edited by the logged user. In the main window there is the "Latest Changes" screen, showing all the recent updated assets and an option to filter the recent updates by repository.

Figure 466. Timeline Perspective

The People Perspective is the home page of an user. Showing his infos (including a gravatar picture from user e-mail), user connections (people that user follow) and user recent activities. There is also a way to edit an user info. The search suggestion can be used to navigate to a user profile, follow him and see his updates on your timeline.

Figure 467. People Perspective
Figure 468. Edit User Info

#### 22.39.10. Contributors Dashboard

A brand new perspective called Contributors has been added under a new top level menu item group called Activity. The perspective itself is a dashboard which shows several indicators about the contributions made to the managed organizations / repositories within the workbench. Every time a organization/repository is added/removed from the workbench the dashboard itself is updated accordingly.

This new perspective allows for the monitoring of the underlying activity on the managed repositories.

Figure 469. Contributors perspective

#### 22.39.11. Package selector

The location of new assets whilst authoring was driven by the context of the Project Explorer.

This has been replaced with a Package Selector in the New Resource Popup.

The location defaults to the Project Explorer context but different packages can now be more easily chosen.

Figure 470. Package selector

#### 22.39.12. Improved visual consistency

All Popups have been refactored to use GWT-Bootstrap widgets.

Whilst a simple change it brings greater visual consistency to the application as a whole.

Figure 471. Example Guided Decision Table Editor popup
Figure 472. Example Guided Rule Editor popup

#### 22.39.13. Guided Decision Tree Editor

A new editor has been added to support modelling of simple decision trees.

See the applicable section within the User Guide for more information about usage.

Figure 473. Example Guided Decision Tree

#### 22.39.14. Create Repository Wizard

A wizard has been created to guide the repository creation process. Now the user can decide at repository creation time if it should be a managed or unmanaged repository and configure all related parameters.

Figure 474. Create Repository Wizard 1/2
Figure 475. Create Repository Wizard 2/2

#### 22.39.15. Repository Structure Screen

The new Repository Structure Screen will let users to manage the projects for a given repository, as well as other operations related to managed repositories like: branch creation, assets promotion and project release.

Figure 476. Repository Structure Screen for a Managed Repository
Figure 477. Repository Structure Screen for an Unmanaged Repository

### 22.40. New and Noteworthy in Integration 6.2.0

#### 22.40.1. KIE Execution Server

A new KIE Execution Server was created with the goal of supporting the deployment of kjars and the automatic creation of REST endpoints for remote rules execution. This initial implementation supports provisioning and execution of kjars via REST without any glue code.

A user interface was also integrated into the workbench for remote provisioning. See the workbench’s New&Noteworthy for details.

Kie Server interface

    @Path("/server")
    public interface KieServer {

        @GET
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response getInfo();

        @POST
        @Consumes({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response execute( CommandScript command );

        @GET
        @Path("containers")
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response listContainers();

        @GET
        @Path("containers/{id}")
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response getContainerInfo( @PathParam("id") String id );

        @PUT
        @Path("containers/{id}")
        @Consumes({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response createContainer( @PathParam("id") String id, KieContainerResource container );

        @DELETE
        @Path("containers/{id}")
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response disposeContainer( @PathParam("id") String id );

        @POST
        @Path("containers/{id}")
        @Consumes({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response execute( @PathParam("id") String id, String cmdPayload );

        @GET
        @Path("containers/{id}/release-id")
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response getReleaseId( @PathParam("id") String id);

        @POST
        @Path("containers/{id}/release-id")
        @Consumes({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response updateReleaseId( @PathParam("id") String id, ReleaseId releaseId );

        @GET
        @Path("containers/{id}/scanner")
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response getScannerInfo( @PathParam("id") String id );

        @POST
        @Path("containers/{id}/scanner")
        @Consumes({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        @Produces({MediaType.APPLICATION_XML, MediaType.APPLICATION_JSON})
        public Response updateScanner( @PathParam("id") String id, KieScannerResource resource );

    }

### 22.41. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.1.0

#### 22.41.1. JMX support for KieScanner

Added support for JMX monitoring and management on KieScanner and KieContainer. To enable, set the property `kie.scanner.mbeans` to `enabled`, for example via Java command line: `-Dkie.scanner.mbeans=enabled` .

KieScannerMBean will register under the name:

It exposes the following properties:

- Scanner Release Id: the release ID the scanner was configured with. May include maven range versions and special keywords like LATEST, SNAPSHOT, etc.

- Current Release Id: the actual release ID the artifact resolved to.

- Status: STARTING, SCANNING, UPDATING, RUNNING, STOPPED, SHUTDOWN

It also exposes the following operations:

- scanNow(): forces an immediate scan of the maven repository looking for artifact updates

- start(): starts polling the maven repository for artifact updates based on the polling interval parameter

- stop(): stops automatically polling the maven repository

### 22.42. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 6.1.0

#### 22.42.1. Data Modeler - round trip and source code preservation

Full round trip between Data modeler and Java source code is now supported. No matter where the Java code was generated (e.g. Eclipse, Data modeller), data modeler will only update the necessary code blocks to maintain the model updated.

#### 22.42.2. Data Modeler - improved annotations

New annotations @TypeSafe, @ClassReactive, @PropertyReactive, @Timestamp, @Duration and @Expires were added in order enrich current Drools annotations manged by the data modeler.

#### 22.42.3. Standardization of the display of tabular data

We have standardized the display of tabular data with a new table widget.

The new table supports the following features:

- Selection of visible columns

- Resizable columns

- Moveable columns

Figure 478. New table

The table is used in the following scenarios:

- Inbox (Incoming changes)

- Inbox (Recently edited)

- Inbox (Recently opened)

- Project Problems summary

- Artifact Repository browser

- Project Editor Dependency grid

- Project Editor KSession grid

- Project Editor Work Item Handlers Configuration grid

- Project Editor Listeners Configuration grid

- Search Results grid

#### 22.42.4. Generation of `modify(x) {…​}` blocks

The Guided Rule Editor, Guided Template Editor and Guided Decision Table Editor have been changed to generate `modify(x){…​}`

Historically these editors supported the older `update(x)` syntax and hence rules created within the Workbench would not respond correctly to `@PropertyReactive` and associated annotations within a model. This has now been rectified with the use of `modify(x){…​}` blocks.

### 22.43. New and Noteworthy in KIE API 6.0.0

#### 22.43.1. New KIE name

KIE is the new umbrella name used to group together our related projects; as the family continues to grow. KIE is also used for the generic parts of unified API; such as building, deploying and loading. This replaces the kiegroup and knowledge keywords that would have been used before.

Figure 479. KIE Anatomy

#### 22.43.2. Maven aligned projects and modules and Maven Deployment

One of the biggest complaints during the 5.x series was the lack of defined methodology for deployment. The mechanism used by Drools and jBPM was very flexible, but it was too flexible. A big focus for 6.0 was streamlining the build, deploy and loading (utilization) aspects of the system. Building and deploying activities are now aligned with Maven and Maven repositories. The utilization for loading rules and processess is now convention and configuration oriented, instead of programmatic, with sane defaults to minimise the configuration.

Projects can be built with Maven and installed to the local M2_REPO or remote Maven repositories. Maven is then used to declare and build the classpath of dependencies, for KIE to access.

#### 22.43.3. Configuration and convention based projects

The 'kmodule.xml' provides declarative configuration for KIE projects. Conventions and defaults are used to reduce the amount of configuration needed.

Example 200. Declare KieBases and KieSessions

    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
      <kbase name="kbase1" packages="org.mypackages">
        <ksession name="ksession1"/>
      </kbase>
    </kmodule>

Example 201. Utilize the KieSession

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.getKieClasspathContainer();

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

#### 22.43.4. KieBase Inclusion

It is possible to include all the KIE artifacts belonging to a KieBase into a second KieBase. This means that the second KieBase, in addition to all the rules, function and processes directly defined into it, will also contain the ones created in the included KieBase. This inclusion can be done declaratively in the kmodule.xml file

Example 202. Including a KieBase into another declaratively

    <kmodule xmlns="http://www.drools.org/xsd/kmodule">
      <kbase name="kbase2" includes="kbase1">
        <ksession name="ksession2"/>
      </kbase>
    </kmodule>

or programmatically using the `KieModuleModel`.

Example 203. Including a KieBase into another programmatically

    KieModuleModel kmodule = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieModuleModel();
    KieBaseModel kieBaseModel1 = kmodule.newKieBaseModel("KBase2").addInclude("KBase1");

#### 22.43.5. KieModules, KieContainer and KIE-CI

Any Maven produced JAR with a 'kmodule.xml' in it is considered a KieModule. This can be loaded from the classpath or dynamically at runtime from a Resource location. If the kie-ci dependency is on the classpath it embeds Maven and all resolving is done automatically using Maven and can access local or remote repositories. Settings.xml is obeyed for Maven configuration.

The KieContainer provides a runtime to utilize the KieModule, versioning is built in throughout, via Maven. Kie-ci will create a classpath dynamically from all the Maven declared dependencies for the artifact being loaded. Maven LATEST, SNAPSHOT, RELEASE and version ranges are supported.

Example 204. Utilize and Run - Java

    KieServices ks = KieServices.Factory.get();
    KieContainer kContainer = ks.newKieContainer(
            ks.newReleaseId("org.mygroup", "myartefact", "1.0") );

    KieSession kSession = kContainer.newKieSession("ksession1");
    kSession.insert(new Message("Dave", "Hello, HAL. Do you read me, HAL?"));
    kSession.fireAllRules();

KieContainers can be dynamically updated to a specific version, and resolved through Maven if KIE-CI is on the classpath. For stateful KieSessions the existing sessions are incrementally updated.

Example 205. Dynamically Update - Java

    KieContainer kContainer.updateToVersion(
                    ks.newReleaseId("org.mygroup", "myartefact", "1.1") );

#### 22.43.6. KieScanner

The `KieScanner` is a Maven-oriented replacement of the KnowledgeAgent present in Drools 5. It continuously monitors your Maven repository to check if a new release of a Kie project has been installed and if so, deploys it in the `KieContainer` wrapping that project. The use of the `KieScanner` requires kie-ci.jar to be on the classpath.

A `KieScanner` can be registered on a `KieContainer` as in the following example.

Example 206. Registering and starting a KieScanner on a KieContainer

    KieServices kieServices = KieServices.Factory.get();
    ReleaseId releaseId = kieServices.newReleaseId( "org.acme", "myartifact", "1.0-SNAPSHOT" );
    KieContainer kContainer = kieServices.newKieContainer( releaseId );
    KieScanner kScanner = kieServices.newKieScanner( kContainer );

    // Start the KieScanner polling the Maven repository every 10 seconds
    kScanner.start( 10000L );

In this example the `KieScanner` is configured to run with a fixed time interval, but it is also possible to run it on demand by invoking the `scanNow()` method on it. If the `KieScanner` finds, in the Maven repository, an updated version of the Kie project used by that `KieContainer` it automatically downloads the new version and triggers an incremental build of the new project. From this moment all the new `KieBase`s and `KieSession`s created from that `KieContainer` will use the new project version.

#### 22.43.7. Hierarchical ClassLoader

The CompositeClassLoader is no longer used; as it was a constant source of performance problems and bugs. Traditional hierarchical classloaders are now used. The root classloader is at the KieContext level, with one child ClassLoader per namespace. This makes it cleaner to add and remove rules, but there can now be no referencing between namespaces in DRL files; i.e. functions can only be used by the namespaces that declared them. The recommendation is to use static Java methods in your project, which is visible to all namespaces; but those cannot (like other classes on the root KieContainer ClassLoader) be dynamically updated.

#### 22.43.8. Legacy API Adapter

The 5.x API for building and running with Drools and jBPM is still available through Maven dependency "knowledge-api-legacy5-adapter". Because the nature of deployment has significantly changed in 6.0, it was not possible to provide an adapter bridge for the KnowledgeAgent. If any other methods are missing or problematic, please open a JIRA, and we’ll fix for 6.1

#### 22.43.9. KIE Documentation

While a lot of new documentation has been added for working with the new KIE API, the entire documentation has not yet been brought up to date. For this reason there will be continued references to old terminologies. Apologies in advance, and thank you for your patience. We hope those in the community will work with us to get the documentation updated throughout, for 6.1

### 22.44. New and Noteworthy in Drools 6.0.0

#### 22.44.1. PHREAK - Lazy rule matching algorithm

The main work done for Drools in 6.0 involves the new PREAK algorithm. This is a lazy algorithm that should enable Drools to handle a larger number of rules and facts. AngendaGroups can now help improvement performance, as rules are not evaluated until it attempts to fire them.

Sequential mode continues to be supported for PHREAK but now 'modify' is allowed. While there is no 'inference' with sequential configuration, as rules are lazily evaluated, any rule not yet evaluated will see the more recent data as a result of 'modify'. This is more inline with how people intuitively think sequential works.

The conflict resolution order has been tweaked for PHREAK, and now is ordered by salience and then rule order; based on the rule position in the file.. Prior to Drools 6.0.0, after salience, it was considered arbitrary. When KieModules and updateToVersion are used for dynamic deployment, the rule order in the file is preserved via the diff processing.

#### 22.44.2. Automatically firing timed rule in passive mode

When the Drools engine runs in passive mode (i.e.: using fireAllRules) by default it doesn’t fire consequences of timed rules unless fireAllRules isn’t invoked again. Now it is possible to change this default behavior by configuring the KieSession with a `TimedRuleExectionOption` as shown in the following example.

Example 207. Configuring a KieSession to automatically execute timed rules

    KieSessionConfiguration ksconf = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    ksconf.setOption( TimedRuleExectionOption.YES );
    KSession ksession = kbase.newKieSession(ksconf, null);

It is also possible to have a finer grained control on the timed rules that have to be automatically executed. To do this it is necessary to set a `FILTERED``TimedRuleExectionOption` that allows to define a callback to filter those rules, as done in the next example.

Example 208. Configuring a filter to choose which timed rules should be automatically executed

    KieSessionConfiguration ksconf = KieServices.Factory.get().newKieSessionConfiguration();
    conf.setOption( new TimedRuleExectionOption.FILTERED(new TimedRuleExecutionFilter() {
        public boolean accept(Rule[] rules) {
            return rules[0].getName().equals("MyRule");
        }
    }) );

#### 22.44.3. Expression Timers

It is now possible to define both the delay and interval of an interval timer as an expression instead of a fixed value. To do that it is necessary to declare the timer as an expression one (indicated by "expr:") as in the following example:

Example 209. An Expression Timer Example

    declare Bean
        delay   : String = "30s"
        period  : long = 60000
    end

    rule "Expression timer"
        timer( expr: $d, $p )
    when
        Bean( $d : delay, $p : period )
    then
    end

The expressions, $d and $p in this case, can use any variable defined in the pattern matching part of the rule and can be any String that can be parsed in a time duration or any numeric value that will be internally converted in a long representing a duration expressed in milliseconds.

Both interval and expression timers can have 3 optional parameters named "start", "end" and "repeat-limit". When one or more of these parameters are used the first part of the timer definition must be followed by a semicolon ';' and the parameters have to be separated by a comma ',' as in the following example:

Example 210. An Interval Timer with a start and an end

    timer (int: 30s 10s; start=3-JAN-2010, end=5-JAN-2010)

The value for start and end parameters can be a Date, a String representing a Date or a long, or more in general any Number, that will be transformed in a Java Date applying the following conversion:

    new Date( ((Number) n).longValue() )

Conversely the repeat-limit can be only an integer and it defines the maximum number of repetitions allowed by the timer. If both the end and the repeat-limit parameters are set the timer will stop when the first of the two will be matched.

The using of the start parameter implies the definition of a phase for the timer, where the beginning of the phase is given by the start itself plus the eventual delay. In other words in this case the timed rule will then be scheduled at times:

    start + delay + n*period

for up to repeat-limit times and no later than the end timestamp (whichever first). For instance the rule having the following interval timer

    timer ( int: 30s 1m; start="3-JAN-2010" )

will be scheduled at the 30th second of every minute after the midnight of the 3-JAN-2010. This also means that if for example you turn the system on at midnight of the 3-FEB-2010 it won’t be scheduled immediately but will preserve the phase defined by the timer and so it will be scheduled for the first time 30 seconds after the midnight. If for some reason the system is paused (e.g. the session is serialized and then deserialized after a while) the rule will be scheduled only once to recover from missing activations (regardless of how many activations we missed) and subsequently it will be scheduled again in phase with the timer.

#### 22.44.4. RuleFlowGroups and AgendaGroups are merged

These two groups have been merged and now RuleFlowGroups behave the same as AgendaGroups. The get methods have been left, for deprecation reasons, but both return the same underlying data. When jBPM activates a group it now just calls setFocus. RuleFlowGroups and AgendaGroups when used together was a continued source of errors. It also aligns the codebase, towards PHREAK and the multi-core explotation that is planned in the future.

### 22.45. New and Noteworthy in KIE Workbench 6.0.0

The workbench has had a big overhaul using a new base project called UberFire. UberFire is inspired by Eclipse and provides a clean, extensible and flexible framework for the workbench. The end result is not only a richer experience for our end users, but we can now develop more rapidly with a clean component based architecture. If you like he Workbench experience you can use UberFire today to build your own web based dashboard and console efforts.

As well as the move to a UberFire the other biggest change is the move from JCR to Git; there is an utility project to help with migration. Git is the most scalable and powerful source repository bar none. JGit provides a solid OSS implementation for Git. This addresses the continued performance problems with the various JCR implementations, which would slow down once the number of files and number of versions become too high. There has been a big "low tech" drive, to remove complexity. Everything is now stored as a file, including meta data. The database is only there to provide fast indexing and search. So importing and exporting is all standard Git and external sites, like GitHub, can be used to exchange repositories.

In 5.x developers would work with their own source repository and then push JCR, via the team provider. This team provider was not full featured and not available outside Eclipse. Git enables our repository to work any existing Git tool or team provider. While not yet supported in the UI, this will be added over time, it is possible to connect to the repo and tag and branch and restore things.

Figure 480. Workbench

The Guvnor brand leaked too much from its intended role; such as the authoring metaphors, like Decision Tables, being considered Guvnor components instead of Drools components. This wasn’t helped by the monolithic projects structure used in 5.x for Guvnor. In 6.0 Guvnor 's focus has been narrowed to encapsulates the set of UberFire plugins that provide the basis for building a web based IDE. Such as Maven integration for building and deploying, management of Maven repositories and activity notifications via inboxes. Drools and jBPM build workbench distributions using Uberfire as the base and including a set of plugins, such as Guvnor, along with their own plugins for things like decision tables, guided editors, BPMN2 designer, human tasks.

The "Model Structure" diagram outlines the new project anatomy. The Drools workbench is called KIE-Drools-WB. KIE-WB is the uber workbench that combines all the Guvnor, Drools and jBPM plugins. The jBPM-WB is ghosted out, as it doesn’t actually exist, being made redundant by KIE-WB.

Figure 481. Module Structure

| KIE Drools Workbench and KIE Workbench share a common set of components for generic workbench functionality such as Project navigation, Project definitions, Maven based Projects, Maven Artifact Repository. These common features are described in more detail throughout this documentation.

The two primary distributions consist of:

- KIE Drools Workbench

  - Drools Editors, for rules and supporting assets.

  - jBPM Designer, for Rule Flow and supporting assets.

- KIE Workbench

  - Drools Editors, for rules and supporting assets.

  - jBPM Designer, for BPMN2 and supporting assets.

  - Business Central, runtime and Human Task support.

  - jBPM Form Builder.

  - BAM.

Workbench highlights:

- New flexible Workbench environment, with perspectives and panels.

- New packaging and build system following KIE API.

  - Maven based projects.

  - Maven Artifact Repository replaces Global Area, with full dependency support.

- New Data Modeller replaces the declarative Fact Model Editor; bringing authoring of Java classes to the authoring environment. Java classes are packaged into the project and can be used within rules, processes etc and externally in your own applications.

- Virtual File System replaces JCR with a default Git based implementation.

  - Default Git based implementation supports remote operations.

  - External modifications appear within the Workbench.

- Incremental Build system showing, near real-time validation results of your project and assets.

      The editors themselves are largely unchanged; however of note imports have moved from the package definition to individual editors so you need only import types used for an asset and not the package as a whole.

### 22.46. New and Noteworthy in Integration 6.0.0

#### 22.46.1. CDI

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KSession("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieBase kbase1v10;

    @Inject
    @KBase("kbase1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieBase kbase1v10;

Side by side version loading for 'jar1.KBase1' KieBase

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.0")
    private KieSession ksessionv10;

    @Inject
    @KSession("ksession1")
    @KReleaseId( groupId = "jar1", rtifactId = "art1", version = "1.1")
    private KieSession ksessionv11;

CDI is now tightly integrated into the KIE API. It can be used to inject versioned KieSession and KieBases.

#### 22.46.2. Spring

Spring has been revamped and now integrated with KIE. Spring can replace the 'kmodule.xml' with a more powerful spring version. The aim is for consistency with kmodule.xml

#### 22.46.3. Aries Blueprints

Aries blueprints is now also supported, and follows the work done for spring. The aim is for consistency with spring and kmodule.xml

#### 22.46.4. OSGi Ready

All modules have been refactored to avoid package splitting, which was a problem in 5.x. Testing has been moved to PAX.